JP2020022890A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of enhancing amusement of a player toward games.SOLUTION: A game machine includes: variable means for making a variation from a first state in which a ball entrance of a game ball to a second ball entrance means is difficult to a second state in which the ball entrance of the game ball becomes possible; state setting means capable of setting a special state in which it becomes possible to vary the second ball entrance means to the second state if a specific condition is established; cancellation means in which a dynamic display of identification information is performed if the special state is being set by the state setting means and the special state is cancelled on the basis of the fact that the dynamic display period of the identification information is finished; and presentation performance means in which, if the special state is being set, the dynamic display of the identification information is started and on the basis of a residual dynamic display period of the identification information, a presentation based on information by which an establishment of the specific condition is determined is performed.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the state of the starting port provided on the game board is changed from the first state in which the game ball is hard to enter to the second state in which the game ball is easy to enter. In some cases, a first lottery is performed. In such a conventional gaming machine, a lottery executed when a game ball enters the starting port in a state easily changed to the second state is executed a predetermined number of times, and until a predetermined number of lottery results is displayed. Gaming machines that are continuously set have been proposed.

JP 2012-147965 A

  However, there is a demand for further improvement in interest.

  The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving a player's interest in playing a game.

  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the first ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, a second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means, A first determination is performed based on a game ball having entered the ball means, and a first advantage is provided to the player over the first determination based on a game ball having entered the second ball entry means. (2) determining means for executing the determination, dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the determination result by the determining means, and a first state in which a game ball is difficult to enter the second entering means Means for changing the state of the game ball to a second state in which game balls can be entered, and a special state in which the state of the second ball entry means can be changed to the second state when a specific condition is satisfied. State setting means capable of setting the special state, and when the special state is set by the state setting means, A dynamic display of the identification information is executed, and based on the expiration of the dynamic display period, a release unit for releasing the special state, and a dynamic display of the identification information when the special state is set. Display starting, and effect executing means for executing an effect based on information that has determined that the specific condition is satisfied based on the remaining dynamic display period.

  According to a second aspect of the present invention, in the gaming machine according to the first aspect, a detecting means for detecting that the game ball has passed through the passing area; and when the detecting means detects the passage of the game ball, Determination means for determining whether a specific condition is satisfied, wherein the effect execution means executes an effect for indicating a result of the determination based on the execution of the determination by the determination means.

  According to a third aspect of the present invention, in the gaming machine according to the first or second aspect, the effect executing means performs a specific effect based on a remaining dynamic display period of the identification information being equal to or shorter than a predetermined period. To do.

  According to a fourth aspect of the present invention, in the gaming machine according to any one of the first to third aspects, the information acquired by the acquisition means based on a game ball having entered the second ball entry means. A storage unit for storing the information before the second determination is performed by the determination unit up to a predetermined number, wherein the effect execution unit determines that the remaining dynamic display period of the identification information is equal to or smaller than the predetermined number. The specific effect is not executed on condition that the information is stored in the storage means when the time is equal to or shorter than the period.

  According to a fifth aspect of the present invention, in the gaming machine according to any one of the second to fourth aspects, the result information for indicating the determination result by the determination means is dynamically displayed for a predetermined period, and then the display is stopped. 2 dynamic display means, and period determination means for determining a remaining dynamic display period of the identification information at the time when the result information is stopped and displayed by the second dynamic display means, and the effect execution means When the determination result by the period determination means satisfies a predetermined period condition, the stop display mode of the result information is switched to a stop display mode based on the determination result of the identification information.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, the first ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, the second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means, and a game ball in the first ball entry means Performs a first determination based on that a ball has entered, and performs a second determination that is more advantageous to the player than the first determination based on that a game ball has entered the second ball entry means. Determining means, dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a determination result by the determining means, and entry of game balls from the first state in which game balls are difficult to enter the second ball entry means; Variable means for changing to a second state in which a ball can be made, and a state in which a special state in which the second ball entry means can be changed to the second state when a specific condition is satisfied can be set. Setting means, and a dynamic table of the identification information when the special state is set by the state setting means. Is executed, based on the expiration of the dynamic display period, release means for releasing the special state, and when the special state is set, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, And an effect executing means for executing an effect based on information that determines the satisfaction of the specific condition based on the remaining dynamic display period.

  Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine of the first aspect, the following effects are achieved. That is, detecting means for detecting that the game ball has passed through the passing area, and determining means for determining whether the specific condition is satisfied when the detection means detects the passage of the game ball, The effect execution means executes an effect for indicating the result of the determination based on the execution of the determination by the determination means.

  Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  According to the gaming machine of the third aspect, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine of the first or second aspect, the following effect is achieved. That is, the effect executing means executes the specific effect based on the remaining dynamic display period of the identification information being equal to or shorter than a predetermined period.

  Therefore, there is an effect that the player's willingness to play can be increased.

  According to the gaming machine of the fourth aspect, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine according to any one of the first to third aspects, the following effects are exhibited. That is, of the information acquired by the acquisition means based on the game ball having entered the second ball entry means, the information before the second determination is executed by the determination means is a predetermined number. The effect execution means has a condition that the information is stored in the storage means when the remaining dynamic display period of the identification information is equal to or shorter than the predetermined period. The specific effect is not executed.

  Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  According to the gaming machine of the fifth aspect, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine of any one of the second to fourth aspects, the following effects are achieved. That is, after dynamically displaying the result information for indicating the determination result by the determination means for a predetermined period, the second dynamic display means for stopping and displaying the result information is stopped and displayed by the second dynamic display means. And a period determining means for determining a remaining dynamic display period of the identification information at a certain point in time.The effect executing means, when a determination result by the period determining means satisfies a predetermined period condition, The stop display mode of the result information is switched to a stop display mode based on the determination result of the identification information.

  Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed the ball flow in the right area | region of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is the schematic diagram which showed the ball flow in the right area | region of the game board of a pachinko machine. (A), (b) is the schematic diagram which showed the operation | movement relationship between the storage apparatus provided in the game board of the pachinko machine, and a non-motorized accessory. (A), (b) is a schematic diagram showing the internal structure of the second variable winning device 650. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. (A) is a figure which showed typically the area division setting of the display screen in the 3rd symbol display device, and (b) is a figure which showed an example of the display screen in the 3rd symbol display device. (A) is a timing chart showing a flow of a small hitting game of a small hitting type B executed based on a ball entering the first entrance, and (b) is a first entrance. It is a timing chart which showed the flow of the small hitting game of the small hitting type A executed based on the ball entry into the small hitting game. (A) is a timing chart showing a flow of a small hitting game executed based on a ball entering the second entrance, and (b) is a timing chart based on a ball entering the second entrance. It is the timing chart which showed the flow of the big hit game which is executed. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a game flow in the first embodiment. It is a timing chart (first half) which shows the relationship between the game state and the production state in the first embodiment. It is a timing chart (the latter half) which shows the relationship between the game state and the production state in the first embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen of the third symbol display device at the time when the first special symbol starts to fluctuate when the gaming state is a time saving state, and (b) is a gaming diagram. It is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen of the third symbol display device when the state is a time saving state and 40 seconds have elapsed since the change of the first special symbol started. (A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen of the third symbol display device after the ball enters the second entrance while the first special symbol is changing while the gaming state is a time saving state. (B) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device when the gaming state is the time saving state and the variation period of the first special symbol is one second remaining. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display screen of the third symbol display device at the time when the change of the first special symbol executed during the time reduction state is stopped, and (b) is a diagram after the time reduction state ends. It is the figure which showed an example of the display screen of the 3rd symbol display device in the normal state at the time when the change of the 2nd special symbol was started. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device at the time when the change of the second special symbol having won the small hit is stopped and displayed in the normal state after the end of the time saving state, (B) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of the third symbol display device when a big hit game is started based on the small hit game displayed in FIG. 18 (a). (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of the third symbol display device when the second jackpot game is started due to a time saving change executed after the jackpot game due to the V winning, and b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device when the gaming state is the time saving state and the fluctuation period of the first special symbol is 10 seconds remaining. (A) is a display of the third symbol display device in a case where the gaming state is a time saving state, and a hold of a second special symbol occurs due to a ball entering the second entrance during the battle effect. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the screen, (b) of the 3rd symbol display device in the case where a game state is a time-saving state and a ball does not enter a 2nd ball entrance during a battle effect. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a display screen. (A) shows an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device in a case where the gaming state is the time saving state and the reserve ball of the second special symbol is obtained up to the upper limit during the time saving change of the first special symbol. It is a schematic diagram, (b) is a game state is a time saving state, and during the bonus effect execution given when the reserve ball of the second special symbol is acquired to the upper limit during the time saving change of the first special symbol It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display screen of the 3rd symbol display device. (A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen of the third symbol display device in a case where the gaming state is the normal state and the small hitting game based on the first special symbol is executed, and (b). FIG. 23 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen of the third symbol display device during the small hit game shown in FIG. (A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen of the third symbol display device when a right-handed game is performed while the gaming state is a normal state (left-handed state), and (b) is a motorized state. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus in the state where the accessory was opening | released. It is a figure showing the outline of various counters. FIG. 2A is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of a ROM in a main control device according to the first embodiment. FIG. 2B is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of a RAM in the main control device according to the first embodiment. FIG. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a first random number table in the first embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a special symbol 1 random number table in the first embodiment. It is a schematic diagram, (c) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the special symbol 2 random number table in 1st Embodiment, (d) is the content of the 2nd per random number table in 1st Embodiment. FIG. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first hit type selection table in the first embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special symbol one big hit selection table in the first embodiment. (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special symbol 2 big hit selection table in the first embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a small hit type selection table in the first embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special symbol one small hit selection table in the first embodiment. (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special symbol 2 small hit selection table in the first embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the fluctuation pattern table in the first embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation pattern table in the first embodiment. FIG. 3C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special pattern 1 deviation pattern table in the first embodiment, and FIG. 4D is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special pattern in the first embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the fluctuation pattern table for 1 small hits. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 1 time reduction variation pattern table in the first embodiment, and (b) is the contents of the special figure 2 variation pattern table in the first embodiment. FIG. FIG. 2A is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of a ROM in the audio ramp control device according to the first embodiment. FIG. 2B is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of a RAM in the audio ramp control device according to the first embodiment. It is a block diagram shown. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of an effect state selection table, and (b) is each effect state selected by the effect state selection table, and the second state displayed on the third symbol display device. It is the schematic diagram which showed the relationship with three symbols and a reservation symbol. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the display control device according to the first embodiment. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of a display data table according to the first embodiment. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of a transfer data table according to the first embodiment. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of a drawing list according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special design change processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol change start processing performed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the normal fluctuation | variation start process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the time-saving change start process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit start setting process performed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a prefetch process executed by an MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the electric accessory control process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a through gate passage process executed by the MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the general-purpose prefetching process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a V entrance passage process executed by the MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a V-pass process performed by the MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a start-up process executed by the MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. 4 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by an MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit control process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit control process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit end process performed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the electric auditors product opening / closing process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the storage apparatus control processing performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a start-up process performed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment. 4 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment. 4 is a flowchart illustrating a variation pattern-related process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a processing related to the number of reserved balls executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed winning information related processing performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 1st embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the hit-related process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart showing a general-purpose variation display setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the production | presentation state setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the specific effect setting process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a counter updating process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating main processing executed by an MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a boot process executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing a command interruption process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 9 is a flowchart showing a V interrupt process. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process executed by an MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. 9 is a flowchart showing a stop type command process. (A) is a flowchart showing a rear image change command process executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment, and (b) is a flowchart executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. 6 is a flowchart showing error command processing to be performed. It is a flowchart which shows the hit related command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing a jackpot start command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows a round number command process. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a display setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a warning image setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a pointer update process executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing a transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a resident image transfer setting process. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a normal image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a drawing process executed by an MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen of the third symbol display device in the second embodiment, and (b) is an example of a display screen of the third symbol display device in the second embodiment. FIG. (A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen of the third symbol display device in the second embodiment, and (b) is an example of a display screen of the third symbol display device in the second embodiment. FIG. FIG. 7A is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of a ROM in a main control device according to a second embodiment. FIG. 7B is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of a RAM in the main control device according to the second embodiment. FIG. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the variation pattern table for special figure 1 time saving in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special design change processing 2 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the time saving completion | finish determination process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the time saving change start process 2 performed by the MPU in the main control device in the second embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit control process 2 performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen of the third symbol display device in the third embodiment, and (b) is an example of a display screen of the third symbol display device in the third embodiment. FIG. FIG. 7A is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of a ROM in a main control device according to the third embodiment. FIG. 7B is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of a RAM in the main control device according to the third embodiment. FIG. It is the model which showed typically the content of the time saving state selection table in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special design change processing 3 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 3rd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process 3 performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation time setting process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit control process 3 performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed command judgment processing 3 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 3rd embodiment. It is a front view which shows the modification 1 of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a front view which shows the modification 2 of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a front view which shows another example of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is the schematic diagram which showed the operation | movement of the modification of an electric accessory. It is the schematic diagram which showed the operation | movement of the modification of an electric accessory. It is the schematic diagram which showed the operation | movement of the modification of an electric accessory. It is the schematic diagram which showed the operation | movement of the modification of an electric accessory. (A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen of the third symbol display device in other effect example 1, and (b) is an example of a display screen of the third symbol display device in other effect example 1. FIG. (A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen of the third symbol display device in other effect example 2, and (b) is an example of a display screen of the third symbol display device in other effect example 2. FIG. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a variation pattern table for ordinary figure in other effect example 2, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a normal fluctuation pattern table in other effect example 2. FIG. 8C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a variation pattern table for time saving A in other effect example 2; FIG. 9D is a schematic diagram showing the variation for time saving B in other effect example 2; It is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the pattern table typically. 18 is a flowchart showing a normal symbol variation process 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in other effect example 2.

<First embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIGS. 3 and 4 are right side areas of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. 5 is a schematic view showing the operation of the non-electric accessory 710 provided on the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 6 is a schematic view showing the operation of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10. Is a schematic diagram showing the internal structure of the second variable winning device 650 provided in the pachinko machine, and FIG. 7 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed to have substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinges 18 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

  The inner frame 12 has a large number of nails, a left first ball entry port 64a, a right first ball entry port 64b (hereinafter referred to as both the left first ball entry port 64a and the right first ball entry port 64b). Is referred to as a first entrance 64, a second entrance 640, a through gate 67, a variable winning device (a first variable winning device 65, a second variable winning device 650) and the like. 2) is detachably mounted from the front side. When a ball flows down the front surface (game area) of the game board 13, a ball game is performed. Note that the inner frame 12 has a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 8) that launches a ball into the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower plate unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, a metal hinge 19 is attached to the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 19 is provided is used as a pivot for opening and closing the front frame 14 and the lower plate. The unit 15 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side. Note that the locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is provided with a decorative resin component, an electrical component, and the like, and is provided with a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 is visible on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape that projects forward and has an open upper surface, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball firing unit 112a by the inclination.

  Light emitting means such as various lamps is provided around the front frame 14 (for example, at a corner). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the game state at the time of a big hit, a predetermined reach, or the like, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. On the periphery of the window 14c, there are provided illuminations 29 to 33 in which light-emitting means such as LEDs are incorporated. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a jackpot lamp, and at the time of a big hit or a reach effect, etc., each of the illumination parts 29 to 33 is lit by turning on or blinking a built-in LED. Or, it flashes to notify that a jackpot is in progress or that the player is reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, at the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and which can display when a prize ball is being paid out and when an error has occurred.

  Further, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized below the right side illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of chrome-plated ABS resin is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball lending operation unit 40 is provided below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state in which bills, cards, and the like are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is slid according to the operation. Lending is done. More specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED is turned on, and the balance is displayed as a number as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the card or the like has a remaining amount. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without a card unit, a so-called cash machine, the ball-lending operation unit 40 becomes unnecessary. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part to make the parts configuration common. The pachinko machine using the card unit and the cash machine can be shared.

  On the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface on the left side. . On the other hand, on the right side of the lower plate unit 15, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 is provided. Inside the operation handle 51, the driving of the ball firing unit 112a is performed. Sensor 51a for permitting the operation, a push-button type stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 are detected by a change in electric resistance. A variable resistor (not shown) is built in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the operation amount. The ball is fired at a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes, and the ball is hit into the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. When the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  In the present embodiment, the above-described configuration is used. However, the configuration is not limited thereto, and a configuration in which the main control device 110 or another control device detects the ball fired by the ball firing unit 112a, or a solenoid of the ball firing unit 112a may be used. It may be configured to detect that a ball has been fired. Alternatively, the number of detected balls may be counted and stored until a process such as RAM clear is performed.

  A frame button 22 is provided above the lower plate unit 15. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the effect or background displayed on the third symbol display device 81 described later. In this manner, by arranging the frame button 22 operable by the player on the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to arbitrarily select the effect to be executed on the pachinko machine 10, and to increase the willingness of the player to participate in the game. Can be enhanced.

  In the present embodiment, the frame button 22 that can be pressed by the player is provided as the operating means that can be operated by the player. However, other configurations may be used. Or approaching), a lever-type operating means that the player can operate in the left-right (or front-back) direction, and a handle-type operating means that the player can rotate. Further, in the present embodiment, the number of operating means is one, but more than one operating means may be provided, or a plurality of operating means of different operating methods may be provided. With this configuration, the player can execute more various operations, and can increase the types of effects performed based on the operation of the operating means by the player.

  The operation means (frame button 22) is provided at a position (upper left side of the lower plate unit 15) that can be operated by the player while playing the game (while operating the operation handle 51 with the right hand). Therefore, the frame button 22 can be easily operated even while the player is executing the game.

  At the lower front part of the lower plate 50, a ball release lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball pulling lever 52 is constantly urged rightward, and is slid leftward against the urging, so that a bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a “dollar box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, and a number of nails, windmills and rails 61 and 62 for ball guidance, a general ball entrance 63, The first entrance 64, the second entrance 640, the variable winning device (the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650), the variable display device unit 80 and the like are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is an inner frame. 12 is attached to the back side. The general entrance 63, the first entrance 64, the second entrance 640, the variable winning device (the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650), and the variable display device unit 80 are formed by router processing. It is arranged in a through hole formed in the board 60 and is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with a wood screw or the like. Further, the central portion of the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62 is provided inside the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front of the game board 13, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a front area of the game board 13 and is a substantially circular area defined by two rails 61 and 62 and an arc member 70 (a starting port or the like is provided, and a shot ball is provided). Area that flows down). The game area includes all areas where the ball that has passed through the return ball preventing member 68 flows before passing through the out port 66 or the winning port (ball entry port).

  In the pachinko machine 10, a game (hereinafter, referred to as a game) in which the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (the left side when viewed from the front of the game board 13) is formed as a left game area, and the right side is formed as a right game area, and a ball is aimed at the left game area. In a left-hitting game, a game in which a ball enters the general entrance 63 or the first left entrance 64a is performed, and a game in which a ball is fired aiming at a right game area (hereinafter referred to as a right-hitting game). ), The shot ball passes above the variable display device unit 80 and is provided in the right game area with the first right ball entrance 64b, the second ball entrance 640, the first variable prize device 65, and the second variable prize device 65. A game aiming at the variable winning device 650 or the like is performed. In the present pachinko machine 10 configured as described above, the game is suppressed from being monotonous by causing the player to perform a game (left-handed game or right-handed game) according to the game state.

  In addition, as will be described later in detail, in the pachinko machine 10, a game (left-handed game or right-handed game) that is advantageous to the player according to various game states (normal state, time-saving state, big hit state, etc.) set. Games). This allows the player to change the content of the game while grasping the current game state, thereby suppressing the game from becoming monotonous.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description of the game board 13 will be continued. The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 8) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to a tip portion (upper left portion of FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61 to prevent a situation in which a ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right portion in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball fired at a predetermined momentum strikes the return rubber 69 and momentum. Is rebounded toward the center while being attenuated. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is provided between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62. It is fixed by being driven into the plate 60.

  In this pachinko machine 10, when a ball enters either the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640, a lottery of a special symbol (first symbol) is performed, and the ball is passed through a through gate (normal). When passing through the (entrance opening) 67, a lottery of a normal symbol (second symbol) is performed. In the special symbol lottery performed for the ball entering the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot, and it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. If it is, the jackpot type is also determined. When the special symbol hits, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special game state, and the normally closed first specific winning opening 65a is closed for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse, or 10 balls are won). Is released) and the release is repeated a number of times (number of rounds) according to the jackpot type. As a result, a large amount of balls wins in the first specific winning opening 65a, so that a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual.

  Also, in the present pachinko machine 10, a small hit in which a bonus different from the special game state is given to the player is determined in a part of the case where a non-big hit (out) is determined by a special symbol lottery. Is configured. When the special symbol lottery is won in the small win, the second specific winning opening 650a of the second variable winning device 650 is kept for a predetermined period (for example, until a total of 1.8 seconds elapse, or until ten balls are won). The small hit game to be opened is executed. Although details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10, a part of the ball that has won the second specific winning opening 650a during the small hit game has passed through the specific area (V winning switch 650e3 (see FIG. 6)). In this case, the big hit game is configured to be executed after the small hit game ends. With this, the game is aimed at winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery, and the jackpot is executed based on the game result of the small jackpot game executed by winning the small jackpot in the special symbol lottery. It is possible to execute both the game aiming at that. Therefore, since the player can execute various games, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

  As will be described later in detail, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with seven types of special symbols such as “big hit A” to “big hit G”. Note that the two types of “big hits A and B” are big hit types that can be determined when a lottery executed in response to a ball entering the first entrance 64 becomes a big hit. The two types of "big hits C and D" are small wins in a lottery executed when the ball enters the first entrance opening 64, and the ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game Is a jackpot type that can be determined in the following manner. "Big hit E" is a jackpot in a lottery executed when the ball enters the second entrance 640, or when the ball is in the second entry. It is a jackpot type that can be determined when a ball passes through a specific area during a lottery executed by a lottery executed when the ball enters the ball opening 640, and is a "big hit F, G" Has entered the ball into the second entrance 640 Becomes small prize in the lottery is executed bets triggered a jackpot sphere can be determined if having passed through the specific area classification in the small win game. The plurality of jackpot types provided in this manner include a bonus during a jackpot game (for example, the number of rounds, an opening time, an opening operation pattern) and a jackpot as a bonus given to the player when the jackpot game is executed. Benefits provided after the game (for example, a privilege for providing a gaming state in which the player easily obtains the next jackpot) are set to be different. Thereby, in the jackpot game executed with various occasions for the player, it is possible to increase the motivation of the player to acquire a jackpot game to which a more advantageous privilege is given, and to provide various playability. be able to.

  When the special symbol (first symbol) is selected, the first symbol display device 37 starts to display the special symbol in a variable manner. Is stopped and displayed. When the ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of times of entry is determined for each type of entry. Each of them is reserved up to a maximum of four times, and the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. When the variable display ends on the first symbol display device 37, if the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 remains, the next special symbol lottery is performed. Then, the variable display according to the lottery is started.

  On the other hand, in the ordinary symbol lottery performed for the passage of the ball at the through gate (ordinary ball entrance) 67, it is determined whether or not it is an ordinary symbol hit. When a normal symbol is hit, the second entrance 640 is changed by the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 being changed to the open position for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 3 seconds). Be released. It should be noted that the second entrance 640 is normally closed because the electric accessory 640a is arranged at the closed position. Therefore, when a normal symbol is hit, the ball easily enters the second entrance 640, and as a result, a lottery of a special symbol is easily performed.

  Also, when the lottery of the ordinary symbol (the second symbol) is performed, the variation display of the ordinary symbol is started on the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds or 4 seconds) elapses, the lottery is performed. The normal symbol indicating the result is stopped and displayed. When a ball passes through the through gate (normal entrance) 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passes is retained up to a maximum of four times, and the number of retained balls is the first symbol. The information is displayed on the display device 37 and is also shown on the second symbol holding lamp 84. When the variable display is finished on the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the through gate (normal entrance) 67 remains, the next ordinary symbol lottery is performed, and according to the lottery. The variable display is started.

  As described above, seven types of special symbols such as "big hit A" to "big hit G" are provided. In the case of "big hits A to C", the number of rounds becomes a special game state of 7 rounds (7 rounds big hit), and in the case of "big hit D", the number of rounds becomes 2 rounds of a special game state (2 rounds big hit). When the "big hit E" is reached, the number of rounds becomes a special game state of 15 rounds (15 round big hit). When it becomes "big hit F", the number of rounds becomes a special game state of 5 rounds (5 round big hits), and when it becomes "big hit G", the number of rounds becomes a special game state of 10 rounds (10 round big hits).

  In addition, when the "big hit A", "big hit C", and "big hit EG" are reached, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol becomes shorter after the end of the big hit, and the second time is higher than the normal state at the time of winning the normal symbol. A time-saving state in which the electric accessory 640a is controlled to be opened so that the ball easily enters the entrance 640 is provided until the special symbol changes once (one time reduction). . In the case of "big hit B" and "big hit D", after the big hit is completed, the above-mentioned time saving state is not given and the normal state is set.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 used in the present embodiment has a function (so-called time-saving function) of shifting the gaming state to a time-saving state in which a ball can easily enter the second entrance 640 than in the normal state. It does not have the function of changing the jackpot probability of special symbols or the jackpot probability of ordinary symbols (so-called probability variation function), but is not limited to this, using a pachinko machine having a probability variation function Is also good.

  As described above, in the special symbol jackpot according to the present embodiment, the number of rounds at the time of the jackpot differs according to the type of the jackpot. On the other hand, the number of rounds may be common to all jackpot types (for example, all eight rounds). Further, for example, the period during which the “normal symbol time reduction state” is set may be changed according to the type of the jackpot. In addition, instead of changing the period during which the “normal time saving state of the ordinary symbol” is changed, the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is opened or the electric accessory 640a is opened once per ordinary symbol. The number of times to be performed may be changed. In the present embodiment, the bonus granted after the end of the jackpot is determined according to the type of the jackpot. For example, the jackpot is terminated on the condition that the ball passes through a specific area (V winning switch 650e3) during the jackpot. Afterwards, a probable change state of a special symbol or a time reduction state of a normal symbol may be given. Further, in the present embodiment, the time reduction state is configured to continue until the number of times of the change of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (one time). 10), and when the number of special symbol changes reaches the number of time reductions, or when the result of the special symbol lottery is a specific lottery result, the time reduction state may be configured to end. Further, a lottery different from the special symbol lottery (lottery for determining whether or not the time reduction state is continued) is executed, and if the result of the lottery is a result that the time reduction state is not continued, the time reduction state is ended. You may. Further, in the present embodiment, the time saving state is always given after the jackpot game by the specific jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot C, jackpot E to G), but other configurations may be used. For example, a time saving application frequency measuring means for measuring the number of times the time saving state is continuously provided is provided. Even if the big hit game by type is executed, the time saving state may not be given after the big hit game ends. Thereby, the upper limit of the game period in which the player is advantageous can be set, and it is possible to suppress providing the player with excessive gambling. In addition, as an example of suppressing excessive gambling, an example in which the upper limit is set to the number of times the time reduction state is continuously provided is described. An upper limit may be set for the number of times the special symbol is changed during the extended holiday period. Even in the case of such a configuration, the upper limit can be set in the time saving extended holiday period, so that excessive gambling can be suppressed. In this case, since the upper limit is not set for the number of times the time saving state is given (ie, the number of jackpots during the time saving holidays period), a limited period (the time saving holidays period with the upper limit set) is set. In the meantime, the player can be motivated to play a game in order to win many jackpots.

  A first design in which a plurality of light-emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as “LEDs”) 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light-emitting means, are provided on the upper right side (the upper right side in FIG. 2) of the game area in front view. A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 performs a display corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays a game state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a display a variation by displaying a lighting state to indicate whether or not a special symbol lottery performed in accordance with the ball entry (starting prize) into the first entrance 64 is changed, or the variation is displayed. As a stop symbol after the end, a special symbol (first symbol) according to the result of the lottery of the special symbol is indicated by a lighting state, or a ball inserted into the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. The number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) that have not been changed yet, is indicated by the lighting state.

  If a ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 while the special symbol (first symbol) is being displayed while the first symbol display device 37 is displaying the variation, the ball is entered. The number of times is retained up to a maximum of four times for each entrance, and the number of retained balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, each of the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 is configured to be held up to four times, but the maximum number of holdings is limited to four. However, the number of times may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). Further, it may be set so as to be held until the total number of the entering balls into the plurality of entrances reaches the upper limit number (for example, eight times).

  The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds during a big hit, an error display, and the like. The LEDs 37a are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the LEDs are different, and the various game states of the pachinko machine 10 (the high probability state of the special symbol) Or, during normal working hours, etc.). In addition, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot as a stopped symbol after the end of the fluctuation, but also indicates a special jackpot according to the jackpot type (big jackpot A to G) when the jackpot is a jackpot. A symbol (first symbol) is shown.

  In the game area, a plurality of general entrances 63 are provided in which a predetermined number (for example, 5) of balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls enter. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is provided in a central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as “display device”) and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. . A center frame 86 is provided on the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 displays a decorative third symbol (decorative symbol) according to the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the display of the second symbol display device 83. For example, when a ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (start winning), the first symbol display device 37 uses the trigger as a trigger to change the display of the special symbol (first symbol). Be executed. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol. When a ball passes through the through gate 67, the second symbol display device 83 executes a variable display of a normal symbol (second symbol) using the ball as a trigger. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the ordinary symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the ordinary symbol.

  Although the details will be described later, in the present pachinko machine 10, the target of the symbol (main symbol) for informing the player of the variable display in an easy-to-understand manner using the third symbol display device 81 is changed according to the game state and the like. It is configured as follows. In the pachinko machine 10, whether or not a privilege that is advantageous to the player is given is determined based on a special symbol lottery result in one game state (for example, a normal state). This is because, in a gaming state (for example, a time reduction state), it is configured to be determined based on a lottery result of a normal symbol. As described above, even in the case of the pachinko machine 10 having complicated playability, by switching the target of the symbol (main symbol) mainly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to the special symbol and the ordinary symbol, the player can It is only necessary to pay close attention to the variable display of the main symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and an easy-to-understand game can be provided.

  The third symbol display device 81 is configured by an 8-inch size liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device 114 described later, so that, for example, three symbol columns of left, middle, and right are displayed. Is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, among the displays of the game state accompanying the control of the main control device 110, the display relating to the special symbol is performed by the first symbol display device 37, and the display relating to the ordinary symbol is performed by the second symbol display device 83. On the other hand, the third symbol display device 81 performs decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the display of the second symbol display device 83. Note that, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like. Further, a plurality of liquid crystal displays may be provided as the third symbol display device 81, or the third symbol display device 81 may be configured to be movable. Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 9A is a diagram schematically illustrating the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen. FIG. 9B is a diagram exemplifying an actual display screen. As shown in FIG. 9 (a), the first display area Dm shows a first special symbol, a second special symbol, or a normal symbol (different depending on the game state), which is one of the third symbols. Three symbol rows of the area Dm1), the middle (middle display area Dm2), and the right (the right display area Dm3) are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, and a third symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is displayed on the first display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. (Or a symbol or an ordinary symbol) is displayed in a variable manner (dynamic display).

  The third symbols (first special symbols, second special symbols, or ordinary symbols) displayed in the first display area Dm are respectively constituted by main symbols numbered from “0” to “9”. ing. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the lottery result by the main controller 110 described later is a specific lottery result (a big hit or a part of a small hit in the case of a special symbol, a hit in the case of a normal symbol). In such a case, the same third symbol (main symbol) is aligned (for example, “777”), a variable display is performed, and a big hit is generated after the variable display is completed.

  Specifically, the first display area Dm displays three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 for left, middle, and right, respectively. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbol is displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers in the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, and the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are scrolled from top to bottom with a periodicity to perform variable display. Particularly, in the left symbol row Z1, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in descending order, and in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in ascending order.

  In the first display area Dm, the third symbol is stopped and displayed on the activated line L1. If the third symbol is stopped in a combination of the big hit symbols (in this embodiment, the same combination of the main symbols) on the pay line, the big hit video is displayed as the big hit.

  In the upper right area of the first display area Dm, a second display area Dn (Dn1 to Dn6) is formed. In the second display area Dn, a symbol row indicating a first special symbol, a second special symbol, and a normal symbol is displayed. Specifically, the second display area Dn1 is an area where a symbol row indicating a first special symbol is displayed, and the second display area Dn2 is an area where a symbol row indicating a second special symbol is displayed. The 2 display area Dn3 is formed as an area where a symbol row indicating a normal symbol is displayed, and a variable display corresponding to the variable display of each symbol is displayed.

  Further, in the second display area Dn, the number of reserved storages of the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the normal symbol are also displayed. Specifically, the second display area Ds4 is an area in which the number of reserved storages of the first special symbol is displayed, and the second display area Ds5 is an area in which the number of reserved storages of the second special symbol is displayed. The second display area Ds6 is an area in which the number of normally stored symbols is displayed.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 10, the display corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the normal symbol, and the display corresponding to the number of retained symbols of each symbol are the second symbols of the third symbol display device 81. It is configured to be displayed in the display area Dn, of which one symbol (a symbol to be notified to the player) is selected as a main symbol, and the other symbols are less noticeable than the main symbol. It is displayed as a symbol in the second display area Dn. Thereby, the player can execute the optimal game only by checking the display contents of the main symbol.

  In the present embodiment, the display pattern of the sub-pattern is made smaller than that of the main symbol, so that the display pattern is less noticeable than the main symbol. However, other configurations may be used. By increasing the transmissivity of the display mode of the subsidiary symbol or by moving the display area of the subsidiary symbol, the subsidiary symbol may be configured to be more difficult to identify than the main symbol.

  In addition, as the symbol row mode of each symbol displayed in the second display area Dn, the symbol row displayed as the main symbol may be displayed as it is, or “O” as shown in FIG. 9B. "And" X "are displayed in two rows in parallel, and when two" O "symbols are displayed in the left and right columns, the first special symbol, the second special symbol, or the ordinary symbol is hit. May be configured to be notified to the player.

  Furthermore, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured not to display the sub-design corresponding to the symbol displayed as the main symbol, or to display the sub-design in a place other than the third symbol display device 81. You may.

  In the present embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, a main symbol corresponding to the first special symbol (a special symbol 1 main symbol Dma) is displayed in the first display area Dm (see FIG. 9B )), When the gaming state is the time saving state, a main symbol (a general symbol main symbol Dmc) corresponding to the ordinary symbol is displayed in the first display area Dm (see FIG. 16A). Furthermore, when the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, a main symbol (special symbol 2 main symbol Dmd) corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed in the first display area Dm regardless of the game state (FIG. 17 (b)).

  In addition, as will be described in detail later, in each game state, when a predetermined game condition is satisfied (for example, when a normal symbol whose fluctuation is started during the time reduction state stops changing after the time reduction state ends), It is configured such that a combination different from the combination of the main symbol and the sub symbol is displayed. Thereby, the display of the third symbol display device 81 can be executed without giving a sense of incongruity to the player with respect to the symbol variation executed so as to straddle different game states. Further, the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the ordinary symbol are all displayed as sub-patterns in the second display area Dn, and the effect pseudo symbol is variably displayed as the main symbol (see FIG. 22A). It is configured as follows. Thus, during a period in which each symbol is not variably displayed (for example, a small hit period), it is possible to make the player feel that the symbol variance is being executed, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  The main symbol (third symbol) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 is configured in a display mode consisting of numbers from “0” to “9”, and is distinguished from other main symbols. A display mode other than a number may be used as long as the display mode is possible. For example, a display mode imitating a character or a display mode combining a character and a number may be used. Further, as the symbols displayed in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 in the first display area Dm, no bonus is given to the player even if the symbols other than the main symbol are stopped together with the same symbol on the activated line L1. A symbol row including a sub symbol may be used as the symbol.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a lottery result of a special symbol or a normal symbol performed by a main controller 110 (see FIG. 8) described later is a win, a variable display in which the same main symbol is aligned. Is performed, and a big hit occurs after the variable display ends. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, the variable display in which the same main symbol is not prepared is performed.

  The main symbol (third symbol) displayed in the first display area Dm is stopped and displayed on the activated line L1, and this stopped display state is maintained for at least one second. By displaying the stopped third symbol for a certain period of time (1 second or longer), the player can determine whether or not the combination is the third symbol corresponding to the hit (special symbol, ordinary symbol lottery result) Is overlooked) can be suppressed. In the above-described stop display state, only the main symbols stopped and displayed on the activated line L1 are displayed, and the other main symbols (main symbols set in each symbol row and other than the activated line L1) The main symbol stopped and displayed at the location may not be displayed (displayed so as to be inconspicuous). As a result, it is possible to more clearly notify the player of the stop display result of the main symbol.

  In addition, when the combination of the third symbols stopped and displayed is a combination corresponding to the departure, and there is a reserved ball, after the stop display for one second, the variable display corresponding to the lottery based on the reserved ball is started. . When there are a plurality of reserved balls, the lottery is executed based on the reserved ball corresponding to the oldest incoming ball in time.

  On the other hand, when the main symbol (the third symbol) of the combination corresponding to the special symbol or the departure of the ordinary symbol is stopped and displayed for one second in a state where the reserved ball does not exist, the third symbol is still stopped and displayed thereafter. Continue. This state continues until a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses or until a new main symbol change is started. When a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed since the main symbol (the third symbol) was stopped and displayed, a demonstration effect indicating that the game was not executed is displayed. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed after the stop display of the third symbol, it is determined that the player is not playing a game, and the demonstration effect is started. I do. Thereby, the player who is trying to select the pachinko machine 10 to start the game can easily determine whether or not the game is being performed based on whether or not the demonstration effect is displayed.

  In this embodiment, the demonstration effect starts when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses after the symbol corresponding to the main symbol (the first special symbol, the second special symbol, the ordinary symbol) is stopped and displayed. However, the demonstration effect may be started based on the elapsed time from when all the symbols are stopped and displayed irrespective of the main symbol and the slave symbol, The display form of the demonstration may be different between the demonstration effect when only the symbols are stopped and displayed, and the demonstration effect when both the main symbol and the subsidiary symbols are stopped and displayed. In this case, for example, in the demonstration effect executed when only the main symbol is stopped and displayed, a notification for prompting the progress of the game is executed, and in the demonstration effect when both the main symbol and the sub symbol are stopped and displayed, a new It is preferable to execute a notification for prompting a game by a proper player. Thereby, a game can be smoothly performed.

  Next, the sub-display area Ds provided below the first display area Dm will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 9A, a sub-display area Ds is formed below the first display area Dm. The auxiliary display area Ds is an area in which an auxiliary display mode for assisting a player in playing a game, such as a game situation or a game description, is displayed in accordance with each game state or game result. Specifically, the number of reserved symbols corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed (see FIG. 9B), and the content of the fluctuation effect of the main symbol executed in the first display area Dm is assisted. (See FIG. 22 (a)), guide the contents of a game to be played (see FIG. 22 (b)), and display the remaining period of a specific period (shortening period) which is advantageous to the player (FIG. 22 (a)). 15 (a)). This makes it possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description of the game board 13 will be continued. Below the variable display device unit 80, a first left ball entrance 64a into which a ball can enter is provided. When a ball enters the left first entrance opening 64a, a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch is turned on. A special symbol is drawn by the main controller 110, and a display corresponding to the result of the drawing is indicated by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37. In addition, the left first ball entrance 64a is also one of the winning holes from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters. The left first entrance 64a performs a right-handed game when the ball is launched into the path on the left side of the variable display device unit 80 in a front view (a so-called left-handed game). It is configured to make it easier to enter the ball than in the case.

  Below the first left ball entrance 64a, a storage device 750 and a specific general ball entrance 630 are provided. Although a detailed description of the storage device 750 will be described later with reference to FIG. 5, the storage device 750 includes a storage valve 750a that can be variably operated between a closed state and an open state, and a configuration in which the storage valve 750a is in a closed state. And a side wall for forming a storage area in which one sphere can be stored. The storage valve 750a is variably controlled to change from a closed state where a ball can be stored to an open state when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery, and when the variable operation is performed to an open state, the storage area is set. (Or the sphere that has flowed into the storage device 750 while the storage valve 750a is being changed to the open state) flows down below the storage device 750. Note that the storage device 750 is provided at a location where a ball can be stored both when playing a left-handed game and when playing a right-handed game.

  Below the storage device 750, a specific general ball entrance 630 is provided so that a ball passing through the storage device 750 can enter the ball. The specific general entrance 630 is a winning opening in which ten balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters, and is used as a trigger for operating the non-motorized accessory 710. The detailed description of the non-motorized accessory 710 will be described later with reference to FIG. 5. The provided non-motorized accessory 710 is configured to change to a position where a ball can enter the right first entrance opening 64b.

  On the other hand, in the right area of the game board 13, two flow paths through which the right-handed ball flows down, and a distribution member 700 for distributing the ball fired by the right-handed game to the two paths described above, The non-motorized accessory 710, the right first entrance 65b, the through gate 67, the second entrance 640 and the electric accessory 640a, the first variable winning device 65, and the second variable winning device 650 It is arranged. Next, the configuration of the right side area of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  The ball fired by the right-handed game is alternately distributed to the first flow path 701 and the second flow path 702 by the distribution member 700. The ball distributed to the first flow path 701 passes through the curved path 701a (see FIG. 3), passes through the through gate 67 and the second ball entrance 640, and flows out below the right region. Also, the ball distributed to the second flow path 702 flows down the third flow path 703a when the non-motorized accessory 710 provided on the downstream side is in a closed state (see FIG. 5A). Then, the gas flows into the inflow port 704a, flows down the fifth flow path 704b provided on the back side of the first flow path 701 (the rear side in the perspective of FIG. 2), and the right area on the game board 13 from the outflow port 704c. Spills down. On the other hand, when the non-motorized accessory 710 is in the open state (see FIG. 5B), it flows down the fourth flow path 703b and enters the right first ball entrance 64b. When a ball enters the right first entrance opening 64b, three balls are paid out as prize balls.

  In addition, although the detailed description of the non-motorized accessory 710 will be described later with reference to FIG. The non-motorized accessory 710 is configured to be changed to a closed state by its own weight.

  Then, the balls distributed to the two flow paths (the first flow path 701 and the second flow path 702) by the distribution member 700 join below the right region, and are placed on the second variable winning device 650 and the first variable winning device 65. And flows into the out port 66 while flowing down the flow path that can flow into the storage device 750.

  Here, the flow of the ball distributed by the distribution member 700 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram showing a ball flow when a ball fired by a right-handed game flows down the first flow path 701, and FIG. It is the schematic diagram which showed the ball flow when flowing down 702.

  As shown in FIG. 3, when the distribution member 700 fires 100 balls in one minute to alternately distribute the ball fired by the right-handed game to the first flow path 701 and the second flow path 702. In this case, 50 pieces of water flow down the first flow path 701 at an interval of 1.2 seconds, and 50 pieces of water flow down the second flow path 702 at an interval of 1.2 seconds. The first flow path 701 is constituted by a spherical passage formed with a passage width of one ball (about 15 mm), and the flowing speed of the ball is reduced by a curved path 701a provided in the middle thereof. The sphere passing through the first flow path 701 and flowing out of the first flow path 701 is configured to pass about 2 seconds.

  A through gate 67 is provided at a position downstream of the first flow path 701 (downstream of the curved path 701a), and a second ball entrance 640 is provided downstream of the through gate 67. . The second entrance 640 allows the ball to pass through the first flow path 701 when the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state, and passes through the first flow path 701 when the electric accessory 640a is in the open state. The configured ball is configured to enter the second entrance 640.

  Further, the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 is configured to reach the second entrance 640 after 0.2 seconds. Although the details will be described later, since the variation time of the ordinary symbol executed when the ball has passed through the through gate 67 is 3 seconds at the shortest, the ball passing through the through gate 67 is Is configured so as not to enter the second entrance 640 due to the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a executed based on the lottery of the ordinary symbol executed when passing through. In other words, the period from passing through the through gate 67 to reaching the second entrance 640 (electrically driven accessory 640a) is shorter than the period required for the lottery of the ordinary symbols. Thus, it is possible to physically execute a lottery of a normal symbol and to physically insert a ball into the second entrance 640 only by firing one ball. Therefore, execution of an inappropriate game can be suppressed. Further, in the present embodiment, the ball fired by the right-handed game is divided by the distribution member 700 into the first flow path 701 (the flow path in which the through gate 67 and the second ball entrance 640 are provided) and the second flow path. Since the pattern is alternately distributed to the road 702, a normal symbol lottery is executed (a ball is passed through the through gate 67), and the normal symbol lottery is won. Since it is necessary to fire at least three balls in order for the ball to enter the 640, it is possible to suppress the execution of a more inappropriate game (for example, a single shot).

  In the present embodiment, the through gate 67 and the second ball entrance 640 are provided in one of the two flow paths distributed by the distribution member 700, but the through gate 67 is provided in one of the flow paths. 67 may be provided, and the second entrance 640 may be provided in the other flow path. With such a configuration, for example, when a malicious player destroys the distribution member 700 and creates a state in which the ball flows down only one of the flow paths, the ball passes through the through gate 67. By doing so, it is possible to regulate a game in which a ball enters the second entrance 640 when a normal symbol is won, and it is possible to suppress an illegal game from being played.

  Next, a case where a sphere flows down the second flow path 702 will be described with reference to FIG. The second flow path 702 is configured such that the period during which the ball flows down is shorter than that of the first flow path 701 described above. Specifically, the time required for the sphere flowing into the second flow path 702 to flow out of the outflow port 704c is about 1.5 seconds. With this configuration, when 100 balls are fired toward the right region in one minute, the sphere that has flown into the first flow path 701 and the sphere that is fired next to the sphere are fired, and the second flow path 702 is fired. And the ball that has flowed into the lower right area (the area where the first variable prize device 65 and the second variable prize device 650 are disposed) of the game board 13 almost simultaneously (about 0.1 second difference). Become. Therefore, in the game state (big hit state or small hit state) in which each variable winning device is opened, it is possible to easily win a plurality of balls at once.

  Further, a part of the second flow path 702 (fifth flow path 704b) is provided on the back side of the first flow path 701 (far side in the viewpoint of FIG. 4), and is viewed from the front (front view from the viewpoint of FIG. 4). The plurality of flow paths are configured to overlap. In this way, by forming a plurality of ball channels using the depth direction of the game board 13, it is possible to reduce the space for forming the ball channels (the area occupied by the ball channels in the game board 13). it can.

  Further, the ball outlet (outlet 704c) of the second flow path 702 is located lower than the outlet of the first flow path 701 (downstream of the second ball inlet 640), and at the right of the game board 13. In the lower region, the sphere is configured to flow out downstream of the sphere flowing out of the first flow path 701. As a result, the spheres that have flowed out of the outlet 704c vigorously (the spheres that flowed out faster than the spheres that flowed down the first flow path 701) collide directly with the spheres that flowed out of the first flow path 701, and become irregular. A situation in which a ball flow occurs can be suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, a configuration is used in which the ball fired by the right-handed game by the distribution member 700 is alternately distributed to two flow paths. However, other configurations may be used. Instead of alternating (1: 1) to the channels, the balls may be distributed at different ratios, or the balls may be distributed to three or more channels. Further, in the present embodiment, the sorting member 700 in which the sorting destination of the next passing ball changes according to the own weight of the passing ball is used. For example, a sorting member electrically driven according to a predetermined rule is used. A dividing member may be used.

  Next, an operation flow of the storage device 750 and the non-motorized accessory 710 used in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5A is a schematic diagram showing that the storage device 750 and the non-motorized accessory 710 are both in a closed state (closed state), and FIG. FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram showing that both objects 710 are in an open state (open state).

  As shown in FIG. 5A, when the non-motorized accessory 710 is in the closed state (closed state), it is impossible (difficult) to allow the ball to enter the right first entrance opening 64b. Therefore, when the gaming state is the normal state, it is possible to perform a right-handed game aiming at the right area of the gaming board 13 and to suppress a ball from entering the right first entrance opening 64b.

  The non-motorized accessory 710 has an action portion that comes into contact when the ball passes through a specific portion, and the action portion is operated by its own weight of the contacted ball, and is released based on the operation. Is configured. Specifically, the ball that has entered the specific general ball entrance 630 abuts on the above-described action portion, and the action connection portion 710a operates in conjunction with the action, whereby the non-motorized accessory 710 is opened. As a result, the ball can enter the first right ball entry port 64b.

  Further, the right first ball entry port 64b is provided with a second action portion to which the ball that has entered the ball can abut. As a result, the second action portion operates, and the non-electric accessory 710 is closed. As described above, the non-motorized accessory 710 is configured to switch the variable state based on the operation of the member acting by the weight of the ball without using an electric drive source. Note that the configuration of the non-motorized accessory 710 may be other than the configuration described above, and a known configuration that operates based on the weight of the ball may be used.

  As described above, the entry of a ball into the specific general entrance 630 serving as a trigger for operating (opening) the non-motorized accessory 710 is performed by the storage device 750 provided above the specific general entrance 630. When the storage device 750 is released, the ball can enter the specific general ball entrance 630. When the predetermined release condition (for example, the start of the jackpot game) is satisfied as described above, the storage device 750 is in the release state until the predetermined closing condition (for example, 10 seconds has elapsed) is satisfied. It is variably controlled so that

  That is, as shown in FIG. 5B, when the big hit game is started and the first variable winning device 65 is opened, the storage device 750 is released. Then, the storage device 750 is released, and the non-motorized accessory 710 is opened based on the fact that the ball has entered the specific general entrance 630. In the first embodiment, since the storage device 750 is disposed at a position where the ball fired by either the left-handed game or the right-handed game can pass through the storage device 750, the right-handed game The ball that did not win in the first variable prize device 65 during the jackpot game in which the game is performed (the ball that passed on the first variable prize device 65 during the interval between rounds when the first variable prize device is temporarily closed) ) Can be made to enter the specific general entrance 630.

  Therefore, it is possible to acquire both the payout of the prize ball based on the ball entry into the first variable winning device 65 and the payout of the prize ball based on the ball entry into the specific general entrance port 630 during the jackpot game. be able to. Furthermore, since the ball which could not win in the first variable winning device 65 is configured to be able to enter the specific general entrance 630, the first variable during the jackpot game which was conventionally wasted. A ball that does not win the prize device 65 can be given an added value that is advantageous to the player.

  In the first embodiment, the storage valve 750a is set to release the storage device 750 for 10 seconds after the jackpot game is started (after the first opening operation of the first variable winning device 65 is performed). It is configured to be variably operated. Therefore, by establishing the end condition of the first round (for example, winning 10 balls) in the jackpot game within 10 seconds, the interval from the end of the first round to the start of the second round (inter-round interval) ) The period and the period during which the storage device 750 is released can be matched.

  As a result, the ball that has passed on the first variable winning device 65 during the interval between rounds can be made to enter the specific general entrance 630, so that the first round in the jackpot game is early (within 10 seconds). 2) It is possible to have the player play the game eagerly to end the game.

  The release timing of the storage device 750 executed during the big hit game is 10 seconds as described above (after the big hit game is started (after the first opening operation of the first variable winning device 65 is executed). ) May be set, and the storage device 750 may be set to be released at a predetermined interval (for example, every 10 seconds) for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds). With such a configuration, when the end timing of each round of the jackpot game (timing at which an interval between rounds is set) and the timing at which the storage device 750 is released coincide with each other, many jackpot games are performed during the jackpot game. A ball can be made to enter the specific general entrance 630.

  In the case of using the above-described configuration, the timing at which the end condition of each round in the jackpot game is satisfied is adjusted (for example, the tenth ball that is the end condition of the round wins the first variable winning device). By adjusting the timing of operation by operating the operation handle 51), it is possible to change the number of balls to enter the specific general entrance 630 during the jackpot game, so that the player can It is possible to provide a new game property in which each middle round end timing is adjusted to a predetermined timing (timing at which the storage device 750 is set to the release state), and it is possible to make the player enthusiastically play a game.

  The third symbol display device 81 may be configured to display a display mode for notifying the release timing of the storage device 750 or a display mode in which the player can predict the timing at which the interval between rounds is executed. Thereby, the player can execute the game during the jackpot game while grasping the content displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the first embodiment described above, the non-motorized accessory 710 is opened (opened) when the jackpot game is executed. Therefore, by performing a right-handed game during the jackpot game, the right first The ball can be surely entered into the entrance 64b. This makes it possible to reliably execute the change of the first special symbol in the time-saving state in which the game shifts after the jackpot game ends (the time-saving at the time of starting the extended game mode in which the game shifts from the normal state big hit (initial time-saving time)).

  Further, in the present embodiment, the non-motorized accessory 710 operates so as to transition to a closed state (closed state) when one ball enters the right first entrance opening 64b, so that a large hit is achieved. Excessive entry of the ball into the right first entry opening 64b during the game can be suppressed.

  Next, referring to FIG. 6, a configuration in which the game balls guided to the distribution channel of the back cover body 650e in the second variable winning device 650 are distributed to a normal discharge channel 650e1 and a special discharge channel 650e2 described later. Will be described.

  FIG. 6A is a schematic diagram showing a state in which a ball that has won the second variable prize device 650 is distributed to the normal discharge channel 650e1, and FIG. It is a schematic diagram showing a state in which a winning ball is distributed to a special discharge channel 650e2.

  As shown in FIG. 6B, when the switching member 650h is actuated, the game ball that has passed through the detection port 650a1 of the second variable winning device 650 is distributed to the special discharge channel 650e2. In the present embodiment, a staying member 650n is provided in the special discharge channel 650e2. With this staying member 650n, only one game ball can stay in the distribution destination area 650h3, which is the area where the switching ball 650h distributes the game ball to the special discharge channel 650e2 side. Thereby, when one game ball is staying in the distribution destination area 650h3, the game ball that has passed through the detection port 650a1 of the second variable winning device 650 is not distributed to the special discharge channel 650e2, Normally, it flows down to the discharge channel 650e1.

  The staying member 650n is configured by a shutter mechanism that can come and go from the game board 13 side. The staying member 650n operates in the front-rear direction of the game board 13 by the operation of the staying solenoid 209b (see FIG. 8). The staying member 650n can cause one game ball to stay in the distribution destination area 650h3 by performing an advance operation (closing operation) forward. On the other hand, by performing the evacuation operation (opening operation) backward, the game balls staying in the distribution destination area 650h3 flow down to the special discharge channel 650e2.

  Here, the second variable winning device 650 allows the game ball to enter by opening the opening / closing door 650f1 during the small hit game. In addition, the staying member 650n performs a closing operation during the small hitting game (when a ball can enter the second variable winning device 650), and after the opening / closing door 650f1 is closed (a new variable winning device 650 is provided). The opening operation is performed after a lapse of a predetermined time from when it becomes impossible to enter the ball). That is, in the present control example, the game balls that have entered the second variable winning device 650 are limited to one ball that flows down to the special discharge channel 650e2 even if the switching member 650h is operating. Thereby, it can be suppressed that the game balls flowing down to the special discharge channel 650e2 become excessive.

  The game ball flowing down to the special discharge channel 650e2 passes through the V winning switch 650e3. In the first embodiment, a jackpot game is provided based on the passage of a game ball to the V winning switch 650e3.

  In the first embodiment, the number of game balls flowing down to the special discharge channel 650e2 is limited to one ball. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more game balls stay in the distribution destination area 650h3. The number of game balls to be restricted may be changed as appropriate by making it possible or making the staying member operate a predetermined number of times (for example, twice) during the small hitting game.

  A case where a game ball is guided to the normal discharge channel 650e1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6A is a diagram showing a state in which the flow path solenoid 209c (see FIG. 8) is inactive, and the opening surface of the entrance of the special discharge flow path 650e2 is blocked by the guide piece 650h2 of the switching member 650h. .

  In the first embodiment, even when the flow path solenoid 209c is inactive, the stagnation member 650n provided in the special discharge flow path 650e2 is configured to operate. As a result, it is not necessary to switch the process depending on whether the flow path solenoid 9209c is operated or not, so that design cost and program capacity can be reduced.

  When the flow path solenoid 650k is inactive, all game balls that have passed through the detection port 650a1 of the second variable winning device 650 flow down to the normal discharge flow path 650e1. On the other hand, since there is no game ball flowing down to the special discharge channel 650e2, there is no influence of the staying member 650n newly provided in the first embodiment.

  Next, the flow of the small hit game in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 10A shows a small hitting game of the small hitting type B executed based on the ball entry into the first entrance 64 (first left entrance 64a, right first entrance 64b). 10B is a timing chart showing the flow of FIG. 10B. FIG. 10B is executed based on the entry of a ball into the first entrance 64 (left first entrance 64a, right first entrance 64b). It is a timing chart which shows the flow of the small hit game of small hit type A. FIG. 11A is a timing chart showing a flow of a small hitting game executed based on the entry of a ball into the second entrance 640, and FIG. 11B is a timing chart showing the flow of the second entrance 640. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of the big hit game performed based on the ball entry into the ball. The details of the operation control of the various devices shown in FIGS. 10 and 11 will be described later.

  Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, when a small hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, a small hit game for 60 seconds is executed (see FIG. 22). In this small hitting game, a game in which the second variable winning device 650 is opened is executed, and when the ball that has won the second variable winning device 650 passes through a specific area (V winning switch 650e3), the small hitting game ends. The big hit game is configured to be executed later. When a small hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, a small hit (small hit type A) in which a ball can pass (is easy to pass) in a specific area (V winning switch 650e3) during the small hit game is set. One of the small hits (small hitting type B) in which the ball cannot pass (is difficult to pass) in the specific area (V winning switch 650e3) is selected.

  First, a description will be given with reference to FIG. Based on the winning of the ball into the first entrance 64, the main control device 110 controls the variation of the first special symbol. At that time, the display control device 114 executes a first special symbol variation effect indicating that the first special symbol is changing, for the same period (30 seconds) as the variation time of the first special symbol. Note that the time of the first special symbol fluctuation effect executed by the display control device 114 will be described later. Then, when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped and the main control device 110 starts the small hitting control (when the small hitting game is executed), the opening / closing door 650f1 provided in the second variable winning device 650 is opened / closed. The V-inlet solenoid 209a, the stagnation solenoid 209b for variably operating the stagnation member 650n, and the flow path solenoid 209c for variably operating the switching member 650h are turned on in accordance with a predetermined opening scenario. Specifically, the V inlet solenoid 209a repeats the opening operation of turning off for 15 seconds and turning on for 0.5 seconds twice after the small hitting game is executed, and then turns off for 15 seconds and turns off for 0.8 seconds. An open scenario for a total of 60 seconds is set to be in the ON state and the OFF state for 13.2 seconds.

  Next, the staying solenoid 209b is turned on (a state in which the ball stays) for 55 seconds after the execution of the small hitting game, and is then turned off (a state in which the ball stays released) for a total of 60 seconds. A second release scenario is set. The above-described opening scenario of the V inlet solenoid 209a and the staying solenoid 209b is an opening scenario common to the small hit types A and B.

  On the other hand, the opening scenario of the flow path solenoid 209c is configured such that different opening scenarios are set depending on the type of small hit, and a small hit where a ball cannot pass (is difficult to pass) in a specific area (V winning switch 650e3). In the small hit type B, which is a type, an open scenario in which the small hitting game is continuously turned off for 60 seconds during the small hitting game period is set (see FIG. 10A), and the ball passes through the specific area (V winning switch 650e3). In the small hitting type A, which is a possible (easy to pass) small hitting type, an open scenario is set in which the small hitting game is executed for 40 seconds off, 15 seconds on, and 5 seconds off after the small hitting game is executed (FIG. 10). (B)).

  As described above, by making only the driving operation of one of the three solenoids different during the execution of the small hitting game, the ball easily passes through the specific area (the V winning switch 650e3). By configuring the small hit game and the small hit game in which the ball is difficult to pass, a common open scenario can be used for the small hit game executed in different small hit types, thereby reducing the processing load. be able to.

  In the present embodiment, the opening scenario of the V inlet solenoid 209a and the staying solenoid 209b are shared, and the opening scenario of the flow path solenoid 209c is made different depending on the type of small hit. However, other configurations may be used. For example, the opening scenario of the residence solenoid 209b and the opening scenario of the flow path solenoid 209C may be made common, and the opening scenario of the V inlet solenoid 209a may be made different. In this case, a common opening scenario is set such that a period in which the ball can pass through and a period in which the ball cannot pass through the specific area (V winning switch 650e3) are set according to the timing at which the ball wins the second variable winning device 650. In advance, as an opening scenario of the V inlet solenoid 209a, an opening scenario in which the V inlet solenoid 209a is turned on corresponding to a period in which the ball can pass through the specific area (V winning switch 650e3), and a specific area (V It is preferable to use an open scenario in which the winning switch 650e3) corresponds to a period during which the ball cannot pass, and the V inlet solenoid 209a is turned on. Further, it is preferable that the period during which the V inlet solenoid 209a is turned on is unified in any of the open scenarios. With this configuration, it is possible to make the second variable winning device 650 match the number of balls that can be won.

  In addition, as in the above-described example, the opening scenario is not changed only for the V inlet solenoid 209a, and even when the same opening scenario is used, the start position (execution start position) of the opening scenario is changed. A small hit game in which a ball easily passes through a specific area (V winning switch 650e3) and a small hit game in which a ball hardly passes may be configured to be executable. In the case of such a configuration, it is not necessary to prepare different release scenarios for each small hit type, so that the storage capacity can be reduced.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 11A, a flow of the small hitting game executed based on the entry of the ball into the second entrance 640 will be described. In the present embodiment, the small hitting game executed based on the entry of the ball into the second entrance 640 (that is, the small hitting is won in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2)) Since the small hitting game executed based on the small hitting type is configured to execute the same operation control, the description will be given without limiting the small hitting type.

  In FIG. 11A, a description will be given by setting the time of the entire small hit control (small hit game time) to 10 seconds. First, when the set time t1 (6.5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the small hitting game (control), the V inlet solenoid 209a of the plurality of solenoids is turned off, and the opening / closing door 650f1 is closed. By closing the opening / closing door 650f1, a new ball does not win in the second variable winning device 650. Next, the set time t2 (9 seconds) elapses, the staying solenoid 209b is turned off, the staying member 650n is opened (retracted state), and the ball stayed by the staying member 650n flows down to the special discharge path 650e2. To go. The set time t2 is set to a time sufficient for the ball existing in the second variable winning device 650 at the time when the set time t1 has elapsed to flow down the normal discharge flow path 650e1. In the two-variable winning device 650, only the balls stayed by the staying member 650n flow down the special discharge channel 650e2. Next, when the set time t3 (5 seconds) has elapsed, the flow path solenoid 209c is turned off, and the guide piece 650h2 of the switching member 650h blocks the opening surface of the entrance of the special discharge flow path 650e2. The set time t3 is set to a time sufficient to cause the sphere flowing down the special discharge flow path 650e2 to flow downstream of the movable range of the guide piece 650h2 after the set time t2 has elapsed.

  By driving the staying solenoid 209b and the flow path solenoid 209c with a time difference in this way, even if the ball is stayed by the staying member 650n within the movable range of the guide piece 650h2, the stay is performed by the guide piece 650h2 and the staying member 650n. Since it is possible to reliably flow down to the special discharge channel 650e2 without interference with the stagnated spheres, it is possible to reduce the size of the apparatus.

  Finally, based on the fact that the ball flowing down the special discharge channel 650e2 has passed through the V winning switch (specific area) 650e3, the main control device 110 ends the small hitting game control and performs the big hitting game control. The specific winning opening 65 is opened.

  Next, differences from FIG. 11A will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 11B, the operation of the second variable winning device 650 is not performed because the lottery result of the second special symbol based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 is a big hit (a symbol hit). That is, after the variation control of the second special symbol by the main control device 110 ends, the big hit control is started. In the meantime, the display control device 114 executes a second special symbol change effect indicating that the second special symbol is changing.

  Here, the relationship between the effect performed by the display control device 114 in FIG. 11A and the time of the effect performed by the display control device 114 in FIG. 11B will be described. In FIG. 11 (a), the total of the fluctuation time (2 seconds) of the second special symbol and the small hit effect time (10 seconds) is set to 12 seconds, and in FIG. 11 (b), the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set. Is set to 12 seconds. This is the timing when the jackpot game is started even if the jackpot based on the lottery result of the second special symbol is either the above-mentioned V winning or the symbol winning, that is, the first variable winning device 65 (the first specific winning). This is for adjusting the opening timing of the mouth 65a). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the result of the lottery of the second special symbol, and to enjoy the effect performed by the display control device to the end.

  Next, the flow of a game in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the flow of a game in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, when the game state is roughly divided into a normal state, a left-handed game in which a lottery of the first special symbol (special 1) is executed aiming at the left first entrance 64a and a game state in which the game state is a time reduction state In this case, the second special symbol (special 2) is executed by aiming at the second entrance 640, or the first variable prize device 65, the second variable prize device 65, 2 It is configured so that a right-handed game aiming at the variable winning device 650 is performed, and a winning (big hit or small hit) is won in the lottery of the first special symbol executed during the left-handed game, and the winning game is ended. When the time saving state is given later, the game shifts to the right-handed game (rensou mode), and shifts to the specific game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state. This extended play mode (specific game state) ends when the predetermined condition is satisfied (when the game state shifts to the normal state and the number of balls reserved for the second special symbol becomes 0), and ends in the normal state. It shifts to a left-handed game. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, during the left-handed game (normal state), a game is performed with the aim of shifting to the right-handed game (specific game state) which is advantageous to the player, and the right-handed game is performed. During the extended play mode (specific gaming state), a game is played with the aim of continuing the extended play mode (specific gaming state). As described above, in the gaming machines having different gaming properties, by making the different gaming properties correspond to the game in which the position at which the player fires the ball is different (right-handed game, left-handed game), Easy-to-understand games can be provided.

  Also, in the present pachinko machine 10, a symbol in which the lottery of the first special symbol is won as a trigger to shift from the normal state in which the left-handed game is performed to the specific game state in which the right-handed game is performed (rensou mode). A plurality of (two types) triggers of a winning and a first special symbol being won in a small hit, and a V-win winning in which a special area (V winning switch 650e3) is passed to execute a big hit during the small hit game. Therefore, the player can be prevented from getting tired of the game early during the left-handed game, which is a normal state disadvantageous to the player.

  As shown in FIG. 12, in a normal game state in which a left-handed game is performed, a game aimed at the left first entrance 64a is executed. When the lottery of the first special symbol is performed based on the ball entering the left first entrance 64a and the jackpot type of the lottery result is jackpot A (80% of the jackpot winning), after the end of the jackpot A time-saving gaming state (time-saving state) in which winning in the second entrance 640 is facilitated is provided. When shifting to the time-saving game state (time-saving state), a right-handed game in which a right-handed shot of firing a ball to the right side of the game board 13 to aim at the second entrance 640 provided in the right area of the game board 13 is performed. Done. On the other hand, when the jackpot type is the jackpot B (20% of the jackpot winning), the time-saving game state (time-saving state) is not given after the end of the jackpot. (Normal state). Further, in this embodiment, when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a small hit and the type of the small hit is a small hit A (10% of the small hit winning), there is a route that becomes a big hit (V winning). . In this case, the game shifts to the time-saving game state after the end of the big hit. Further, even if the small hit type is the small hit A, the ball cannot be passed through the specific area (V winning switch 650e3) during the small hit game, or the small hit type of the winning small hit Is a small hit B, the game does not shift to the time saving game state (time saving state), but shifts to the normal state in which the left-handed game is executed.

  Next, a flow during the right-handed game that is advantageous to the player in the pachinko machine 10 will be described. As described with reference to FIGS. 2 to 5, in the pachinko machine 10, the right first ball entry port 64 b is provided in the right area of the game board 13, and a big hit game in which a right-handed game is executed. At least one ball therein is configured so that the ball enters the right first ball entrance 64b. In other words, in the normal gaming state (normal state), when a jackpot to which the time-saving state is given after the end of the jackpot game is won, at least one hold storage of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is performed after the jackpot game ends. The time-saving state is started in a state where there is no reserved storage of the second special symbol (special figure 2).

  As shown in FIG. 12, in the pachinko machine 10, when both the reserved memory of the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the reserved memory of the second special symbol (special figure 2) exist, the second special symbol is used. The lottery (fluctuation) based on the reserved storage of the (special figure 2) is configured to be preferentially executed (so-called special 2 priority fluctuation), but the reserved storage of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is not performed. In the absence state, a lottery (change) based on the reserved storage of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is executed. Here, since the variation pattern (fluctuation time) of the first special symbol (special figure 1) in the time reduction state is set to 150 seconds regardless of the lottery result, after the time reduction state is started. During the period of 150 seconds, the first special symbol (special figure 1) is changed. In addition, when a change (lottery) of any of the special symbols (special figure 1, special figure 2) is executed once during the time reduction state, the end condition of the time reduction state is satisfied ( 1 time reduction).

  During the period in which the first special symbol (special figure 1) fluctuates in the time saving state, a game for acquiring the hold memory of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed, and the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed. A maximum of four reservation memories of the special figure 2) can be acquired. Here, if the reserved memory of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) can be acquired, the change of the first special symbol is stopped after the end of the working hours, and after the transition to the normal state, the reserved memory of the second special symbol is stored. Based on the lottery is executed. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the lottery of the second special symbol is set so as to win the big hit with a probability of 1/300 and to win the small hit with a probability of 299/300. The small hits won by the special symbol lottery are executed in a small hitting game in which a ball can pass (is easy to pass) in a specific area (V winning switch 630e3). A jackpot to which a time saving state is given after the end of the jackpot game is set. Therefore, in the time-saving gaming state, the extended play mode (specific gaming state) is continued as long as the storage of the second special symbol is held.

  On the other hand, during the period when the first special symbol fluctuates in the time saving state (during the extended holiday preparation period), it is not possible to acquire the reserved memory of the second special symbol, and there is no reserved memory of the second special symbol. When the time-saving state ends, the game shifts to the normal game state as it is, and the extended play mode (specific game state) ends.

  In addition, when a plurality of (for example, three) reserved memories of the second special symbol are acquired during the extended holiday preparation period, the fluctuation of the second special symbol is started when the vehicle enters the time saving state again. Become. In the present embodiment, the variation time of the second special symbol in the time reduction state (special 2 variation time) is set to 2 seconds regardless of the lottery result, and is shorter than the variation time of the ordinary symbol in the time reduction state (3 seconds). Therefore, it is possible to suppress the acquisition of a new reserved memory of the second special symbol during the time-saving state in which the lottery (change) of the second special symbol is being executed. Thereby, it is possible to suppress a situation in which an excessive prize ball is provided to the player. In the present embodiment, the time saving state is configured to loop with a probability of about 90% once entering the time saving state.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 13 to 23, the effect display contents executed by the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 13 and FIG. 14, a description will be given of the flow of the effect display contents that change in accordance with the transition of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment. FIG. 13 is a timing chart (first half) showing the relationship between the gaming state and the presentation state in the present embodiment, and FIG. 14 is a timing chart (second half) showing the relationship between the gaming state and the presentation state in the present embodiment.

  Here, the decorative symbol (third symbol) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 used in the present embodiment will be briefly described. The third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment can display a decorative symbol (third symbol) corresponding to three types of symbols of a first special symbol, a second special symbol, and a normal symbol on the third symbol display device 81. The decorative symbol (third symbol) corresponding to the symbol for which the lottery result should be most notified to the player is displayed as the main symbol in the first display area Dm (see FIG. 9) of the third symbol display device. The decorative symbol (third symbol) corresponding to the other symbol is displayed as a secondary symbol in the second display area Dn (see FIG. 9) of the third symbol display device.

  Then, by switching the symbols to be displayed as the main symbols in accordance with the transition of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the player can simply recognize the display result of the main symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is configured to make it easy to understand complicated gaming characteristics.

  The control for switching the symbols to be displayed as the main symbols described above will be described in detail later. , A symbol displayed as a main symbol and a symbol displayed as a sub symbol are switched and displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 13, when the gaming state is the normal (special 1) state in which the first special symbol is changed (lottery), “state 1” is set as the effect state. During the period in which the “state 1” is set, the first special symbol is displayed so as to be a main symbol, the normal symbol is displayed as a subsidiary symbol, and a reserved symbol of the first special symbol is displayed as a main reserved symbol (FIG. 9 (b)). In this manner, in the “normal (special 1)” state in which the first special symbol change (lottery) is being performed, a display that allows the player to easily recognize the result of the first special symbol lottery is provided. In addition, the contents of the game can be reported in an easily understandable manner.

  Next, in the “big hit” state in which the big hit is won by the lottery of the first special symbol and the big hit game is executed, the first symbol is displayed in the first display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 9B). A jackpot effect image is displayed. In this case, since the main symbol is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81, "-" is set as the effect state.

  After the jackpot game is over, the gaming state shifts to the time saving state, and the first special symbol is changed. "Or" State 5 "is set. Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in the “time saving (special 1)” state will be described. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the gaming state is “time saving (special 1)”, a game for acquiring the holding memory of the second special symbol is performed. In order to acquire the reserved memory of the second special symbol, a right-handed game is performed, the ball is passed through the through gate 67 (the normal symbol lottery is executed), and the normal symbol is won (the ordinary symbol is won). It is necessary to open the electric accessory 640a with a probability of 1/20).

  That is, in the case where the gaming state is the “time reduction (special 1)” state, the player plays the game while expecting that the lottery result of the ordinary symbol will be successful. Further, in the present embodiment, when the normal symbol whose fluctuation is started during the time reduction state stops changing during the time reduction state and the operation of the electric accessory 640a is started, the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a is performed. Since the open pattern (long open) which is advantageous to the player is set, the normal figure fluctuation is started when the game state is not the time reduction state (for example, the big hit state), and the electric power is changed during the time reduction state. In the case where the operation of the accessory 640a is started, or in the case where the normal figure fluctuation is started during the time reduction state and the operation of the electric accessory 640a is started after the end of the time reduction state (for example, the normal state), etc. The normal opening pattern (short opening) is executed instead of the opening pattern (long opening) in which the opening operation of the object 640a is advantageous to the player.

  In the gaming machine configured as described above, if the main symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is switched to the third symbol corresponding to the ordinary symbol on condition that the gaming state is shifted to the time saving state. However, in spite of the time saving state as described above, the variation of the ordinary symbol, in which the electric accessory 640a is short-circuited, is displayed in the main symbol, giving the player distrust. There was a problem that it would.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the “time reduction (special 1)” state is set as the gaming state, the variation state of the ordinary symbol is determined, and the timing at which the variation of the ordinary symbol is started and the variation of the ordinary symbol are determined. Is stopped (when the hit is won, the timing when the electric accessory 640a is opened), and both are in the "time saving (special 1)" state, the effect state is "state 5". Is set, and in other cases, "state 3" is set.

  During the period in which “state 5” is set as the effect state, the normal symbol is displayed such that the main symbol, the first special symbol, and the second special symbol are the slave symbols, and the second special symbol is designated as the main reserved symbol. Is displayed (see FIG. 16A). As described above, in the “time saving (special 1)” state in which the first special symbol is changed (lottery) for a long period (150 seconds), the symbol corresponding to the main symbol is switched from the first special symbol to the normal symbol. This makes it possible for the player to easily recognize the result of the lottery of the ordinary symbols, and to inform the contents of the game in an easily understandable manner.

  Also, during the period in which the “state 3” is set as the effect state, pseudo symbols that do not correspond to any of the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the ordinary symbol are the main symbol, the first special symbol, and the second special symbol. The third symbol corresponding to the ordinary symbol is displayed so as to be a sub symbol, and the reserved symbol of the second special symbol is displayed as the main reserved symbol (see FIG. 16 (a)). With this configuration, the contents of the game can be reported in an easily understandable manner.

  In the state where the second special symbol is fluctuating, “state 4” is set as the effect state regardless of the game state (regardless of the normal state or the time saving state). During the period in which “state 4” is set as the effect state, a third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed as a main symbol (see FIG. 17B). Then, as shown in FIG. 14, when “state 5” is set as the effect state, if the lottery result of the fluctuating first special symbol is a specific result (for example, a big hit), the When the remaining fluctuation time of one special symbol is equal to or shorter than a predetermined period, “state 6” is set as the effect state.

  During the period in which “state 6” is set as the effect state, the first special symbol is randomly selected from the variable display mode in which the third symbol corresponding to the ordinary symbol executed in “state 5” is the main symbol. A simulation symbol based on the result is displayed as a variation as a main symbol. By doing so, it is possible to secure a period for indicating to the player the lottery result of the first special symbol that has won the jackpot. Therefore, from the state where the “state 5” is set and the variable display mode in which the third symbol corresponding to the ordinary symbol is the main symbol is displayed, the jackpot game of the first special symbol is suddenly started, and the game is started. The disadvantage that the user is confused can be suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, the timing at which the effect state shifts from “state 5” to “state 6” is the timing at which the normal symbol change is executed. Thus, the transition of the effect state can be performed without discomfort.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state and the lottery result of the first special symbol is a small hit, a specific effect for the small hit is executed (see FIG. 22). When the gaming state is the normal state and the small hitting game based on the first special symbol is executed, “state 2” is set as the effect state.

  During the period in which the “state 2” is set as the effect state, in the special effect for small hits, a pseudo symbol that does not correspond to any of the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the ordinary symbol is displayed as a variable as a main symbol. Is done. In this case, the pseudo symbol variably displayed is a pseudo symbol variably displayed based on the opening timing of the second variable winning device 650 during the small hit game. In other words, the timing at which the pseudo symbol is stopped and displayed in a predetermined stop display mode (for example, a double stitch) is displayed a predetermined period before the timing when the second variable winning device 650 is opened, that is, the predetermined stop display mode is displayed. The timing at which the ball that has been fired since then has become possible to win the second variable 650 is given, and an effect that makes the player think that the second variable winning device 650 has opened based on the stop display of the pseudo symbol is provided. Be executed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the small hitting game in which the second variable winning device 650 is opened, a small hitting game which is advantageous to the player (the ball easily passes through the specific area (V winning switch 650e3)) is disadvantageous. The type of the stop display mode of the pseudo symbol which is variably displayed during the small hit game is set by the type of the small hit game being executed. For example, as a stop display mode of a pseudo symbol corresponding to a timing at which the second variable winning device 650 is opened at a timing at which a ball can pass through a specific area, a specific stop display mode (for example, a specific numeral (7)) Eye) is stopped. With this configuration, the type of the small hit game and the opening timing of the second variable winning device 650 can be grasped by the fluctuation display of the pseudo symbol executed during the small hit game, so that the player You can enjoy small hit games.

  Next, a display screen displayed on the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the present embodiment, as described above with reference to FIGS. 13 and 14, the pachinko machine 10 responds to the gaming state and the fluctuation state and the holding state of each symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol, normal symbol). Thus, display control is performed to change the symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol, and ordinary symbol) corresponding to the main symbol displayed in the first display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. With such a configuration, in a gaming machine designed to have different design lotteries (lottery of the first special symbol, lottery of the second special symbol, lottery of the ordinary symbol) depending on the gaming state, By simply letting the player know the display result of the main symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to easily notify whether or not the game result is advantageous to the player, and to the player. An easy-to-understand gaming machine can be provided.

  FIG. 15A is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at the time when the variation of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is started when the gaming state is the time saving state. is there. In the present embodiment, during the time reduction state, the right-handed game is a game that is advantageous to the player. Therefore, guidance for guiding the game method in the guidance display area Dm4 formed on the upper left of the first display area Dm. "Right-handed" characters are displayed. At the center of the first display area Dm, a general symbol main symbol Dmc having a third symbol corresponding to the ordinary symbol as a main symbol is variably displayed in synchronization with the ordinary symbol. On the left side of the first display area Dm, a main reserved symbol display area Dm5 for displaying the retained number of second special symbols as a main reserved symbol is formed. Note that, in the state shown in FIG. 15A, the number of reserved memories of the second special symbol is “0”.

  The second display area Dn1 formed on the upper right side of the first display area Dm has a third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol, and the second display area Dn2 has a third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol. However, in the third display area Dn3, a third symbol corresponding to the ordinary symbol is displayed as a subsidiary symbol, and indicates that the corresponding symbol is changing in the second display region Dn1 and the second display region Dn3. For this reason, the third symbol (slave symbol) is variably displayed, and the third symbol (slave symbol) is stopped and displayed in the second display area Dn2 to indicate that the corresponding symbol has not fluctuated.

  In addition, as for the display mode of the subsidiary symbols displayed in the second display areas Dn1 to Dn3, the display mode corresponding to whether or not the corresponding symbol (the first special symbol, the second special symbol, the normal symbol) is changing. Should be fine. Further, as a display mode corresponding to a stopped symbol, it is only necessary to be able to grasp that there is no change (stop), and as shown in the second display area Dn2 of FIG. May be displayed in a stop mode, or the stop mode of the previous variable display may be stopped and displayed as it is.

  Then, in the second display area Dn4, the number "3" is displayed as a display mode for indicating that the number of reserved memories (the number of reserved balls) of the first special symbol is three, and in the second display area Dn5. , The number “0” is displayed as a display mode for indicating that the number of reserved memories (the number of reserved balls) of the second special symbol is 0 (a state in which the reserved memory is not acquired), and the second display In the area Dn6, the numeral "4" is displayed as a display mode for indicating that the number of reserved symbols (the number of reserved balls) of the ordinary symbol is four.

  As a display mode for indicating the number of reserved storages (the number of reserved balls) of each symbol displayed in the second display areas Dn4 to Dn6, the number of reserved storages of each symbol is specifically shown as in the present embodiment. A display mode in which a value is indicated by a number may be used, or a display mode indicating only whether or not each symbol is on hold (for example, “「 ”when there is a hold memory,“ − ”when there is no hold memory) May be used. In this case, the number of storages to be held may be suggested by changing the color of the display mode of “○” indicating that there is the storage to be held. Also, a display mode that abstractly indicates the number of reserved storages may be used.

  The state shown in FIG. 15A is a state in which the first special symbol fluctuates for a fluctuation time of 150 seconds and the second special symbol does not fluctuate. The secondary symbol corresponding to the special symbol is variably displayed, and "-" indicating that the secondary symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is not variably displayed is displayed in the second display area Dn2.

  Further, in the sub-display area Ds formed below the first display area Dm, “150 seconds” is displayed in the first sub-display area Ds1 as a time display for indicating the remaining time in the time saving state. In the second sub-display area Ds2 on the left side of the display area Ds1, “Countdown !!” is displayed as a guide display for notifying the player that the remaining period of the time saving state is being subtracted. In the present embodiment, as the remaining period displayed in the first sub-display area Ds1, the remaining period of the fluctuation period (150 seconds) of the special figure 1 in the time saving state is calculated, and the calculated value is displayed. Therefore, an accurate period until the time saving state ends can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the player can play the game with peace of mind until the period elapses. However, a different value may be displayed as the remaining period display to be displayed in the first sub-display area Ds1, for example, a value with the remaining period of the fluctuation period (150 seconds) of the special figure 1 in the time saving state as an upper limit. May be set at random and displayed so that the value is subtracted.

  In this case, until the displayed value becomes 0, the difference between the value indicating the remaining fluctuation period of Toku-zu 1 and the value set at random is added and displayed, or the displayed value is changed to “???”. May be changed to the display. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp how long the time reduction state lasts, and it is possible to cause the player to play the game while always pounding.

  FIG. 15B shows a state in which the gaming state is a time-saving state, and 40 seconds have elapsed since the start of the change of the first special symbol (Special figure 1) (from the state shown in FIG. 15A). 5 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in FIG. As shown in FIG. 15 (b), the main symbol Dmc is stopped and displayed in a mode (a display mode of “555”) informing that a winning has been won in the lottery of the normal symbol, and the first display area Dm is displayed. On the lower right side of the icon, a guide display for notifying that the electric accessory 640a has been long opened due to the winning of the ordinary symbol, and that the ball can enter the second entrance 640 is displayed.

  In the first sub-display area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds, “110 seconds” is displayed as the remaining time in the time saving state, and in the second sub-display area Ds2, a ball is made to enter the second entrance 640. “Charge time” indicating that the state is easy (the state where the electric accessory 640a is in the long opening operation) is displayed. Then, in the second display area Ds3, a stop display mode ("OO") for indicating that a normal symbol has been won in a win is displayed.

  As described above, in the case where the gaming state is the time reduction state, while the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is being executed, the lottery result of the ordinary symbol (ordinary symbol) becomes the symbol that the player should pay close attention to. The ordinary drawing lottery result is displayed using the symbol Dmc. Therefore, a display that is easy for the player to understand can be provided.

  In the present embodiment, the display position and display mode of each main symbol (special figure 1 main symbol, special figure 2 main symbol, ordinary figure main symbol, and pseudo main symbol) displayed in the first display area Dm are described. The same stop display mode (e.g., collateral) is used for the same stop display mode for indicating a specific lottery result (for example, a win) in which the symbol lottery result is advantageous to the player. Even if the symbol to be designed is changed in accordance with the game state, the player can be caused to execute the effect display (effect change display) without a sense of incongruity. As a configuration of the above, the display position and the display mode may be different for each main symbol, or the stop display mode for indicating a specific lottery result (for example, winning) in which the symbol lottery result is advantageous to the player may be different. You may let it.

  FIG. 16A is a diagram illustrating a state in which the gaming state is a time saving state, and a state in which a ball has entered the second entrance 640 while the first special symbol (special figure 1) is changing. As shown in FIG. 16A, when a ball enters the second entrance 640, a display indicating that the ball has entered the second entrance 640 is provided at the upper center of the first display area Dm. "Charge completed" is displayed. Then, in the main reserved symbol display area Dm5, a display mode (the black circle in the figure) indicating that the retained number of the second special symbol is “1” is displayed. In this state, the number "1" is displayed in the second display area Dn5 as a display mode indicating that the number of reserved storages of the second special symbol is one.

  In the present embodiment, one ball is inserted into the second entrance 640 as a closing condition of the electric accessory 640a when the normal accessory is won during the working hours and the electric accessory 640a is in the long open state. A lapse of 11 seconds (total opening time of 6 seconds) has been set since the operation of the ball or the electric accessory 640a was started, and in this figure, one ball enters the second entrance 640, Since the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a has been completed and the next ordinary symbol change state is being executed, the main symbol Dmc is variably displayed at the center of the first display area Dm. In the first sub-display area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds, “100 seconds” is displayed as the remaining time in the time saving state.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as described above, at the time when one hold memory of the second special symbol is acquired, after the time-saving state ends (after the change of the first special symbol being changed is stopped), the second special symbol is stopped. (2) The special symbol is started to be displayed in a variable manner, and is designed so that a symbol or a V winning can be obtained with a high probability. Further, after the jackpot game executed based on the lottery of the second special symbol, the time saving state is always given, so that a chance to acquire the reserved memory of the second special symbol again comes. In addition, when a plurality of hold memories of the second special symbol are acquired in one time saving state (during the change of the first special symbol), a jackpot game corresponding to the acquired number is executed. Have been. Therefore, by displaying the "second storage of the second special symbol" that the player most expects during the time reduction state as the main symbol on the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game. it can.

  In the present embodiment, as a display mode of the main hold symbol, a maximum of four “black circles” are configured to be able to be displayed corresponding to the number of storages to be held, but other configurations may be used. In order to effectively notify the presence or absence of the extended mode (the presence or absence of the storage of the second special symbol), the display mode of the main storage symbol corresponding to the first storage of the second special symbol is changed to another main storage. You may make it different from the display mode of a symbol. As a display mode in this case, the main reserved symbol corresponding to the first reserved memory of the second special symbol is emphasized more than other main reserved symbols by changing the size, color, shape and pattern of the main reserved symbol. Alternatively, only the main reserved symbol corresponding to the first reserved storage of the second special symbol may be displayed at a position different from other main reserved symbols. Further, instead of changing the display mode of the main reserved symbol, the mode (display mode of the background image) on the display area side where the main reserved symbol is displayed may be changed. Alternatively, only when the first hold storage of the second special symbol is obtained, the effect may be notified by the sound output unit or the light emitting unit.

  FIG. 16B is a diagram illustrating an example of the display screen when the gaming state is the time saving state and the fluctuation period of the first special symbol (Special figure 1) is one second remaining. In this state, a pseudo effect symbol whose main symbol does not correspond to the display of the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the ordinary symbol is displayed as a pseudo main symbol Dmb in the center of the first display area Dm. This pseudo main symbol Dmb is temporarily stopped and displayed in a rocking state until the period in which the fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped (until the remaining period display of the first sub display area Ds1 becomes “0 second”). .

  This pseudo effect symbol is at the timing when the game state is the time reduction state and the fluctuation of the normal symbol, in which the fluctuation period exceeds the remaining short time period, is started (timing when “state 3” is set as the production state). It is what is displayed. With this configuration, when the third symbol corresponding to the variation of the ordinary symbol in which the variation period exceeds the remaining short time period is displayed as the ordinary symbol main symbol Dmc, even if the ordinary symbol main symbol Dmc is hit. Even if the stop display is performed in the display mode indicating, it is possible to suppress the problem that the electric accessory 640a is short-circuited and opened, thereby giving the player distrust of the effect.

  In addition, the third symbol corresponding to the variation of the ordinary symbol whose variation period is longer than the remaining short time period is displayed as the general symbol main symbol Dmc, and the display of the general symbol main symbol Dmc is interrupted at the timing when the time reduction state ends ( It is possible to switch to another main symbol display), but if the display of the main symbol used to make the player gaze at the display content is changed in the middle, it will give the player a great sense of discomfort. There's a problem. By using the above-described configuration, such a problem can be solved.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, since the display mode showing the lottery result of the first special symbol is displayed as the display mode of the pseudo effect symbol, the pseudo effect symbol is displayed in synchronization with the timing at which the change of the first special symbol stops. The lottery result of the first special symbol can be smoothly displayed only by changing the swinging state (temporary stop state) to the completely stopped state (see FIG. 17A). In addition, when the temporarily stopped main symbol (pseudo main symbol Dmb) is temporarily stopped in a display mode indicating a hit, the lottery result of the first special symbol is a hit, so that the bonus is definitely given to the player. It is possible to suppress the problem of giving the player distrust of the display mode (display result) of the main symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, a configuration other than the configuration in which the pseudo effect design is displayed during the period in which the pseudo effect design described in the present embodiment is displayed as the main design (during the period in which “state 3” is set as the effect state) may be used. For example, during the period, an effect that encourages the end of the time saving state may be executed without displaying any main symbols. Even in the case of such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the general symbol main symbol Dmc corresponding to the ordinary symbol in which the fluctuation period longer than the remaining short time period is set from being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Since it is possible, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the player has a mistrust.

  In the state shown in FIG. 16 (b), the fluctuation of the ordinary symbol is stopped and displayed while the pseudo main symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, so that the lottery result of the ordinary symbol is displayed in the second display area Dn3. Are stopped and displayed in a display mode (“○ ×”) indicating the departure. As described above, the fluctuation stop timing of the normal symbol is within a predetermined period (for example, within 2 seconds) from the fluctuation stop timing (end timing of the time saving state) of the special figure 1, and the lottery result of the normal symbol is out of order. Even in the case of, the effect display using the pseudo main symbol Dmb is executed.

  In FIG. 16 (b), since the main reserved symbol display area Dm5 displays a display mode indicating that the number of retained second special symbols is two, the second special symbol is displayed after the time saving state ends. Starts to fluctuate. In order to guide the player to that effect, "Charge release time !!" is displayed above the first display area Dm. The “charge release time” indicates a period during which a jackpot corresponding to the number of the second special symbols stored and stored is executed.

  Then, when the charge release time is entered, as shown in FIG. 17A, "charge release time entry" is displayed in the information of the first display area Dm, and the special figure 1 main symbol Dma is stopped and displayed. At this timing (time saving end timing), the ordinary symbol that is displayed in a variable manner, that is, the variation during the time saving state is started and the variation stop timing is after the end of the time saving, is a second display area as a subsidiary symbol. Since it is displayed on Dn3, it is possible to suppress the above-described inconvenience in the case where the fluctuation display of the main symbol Dmc is shown to the player.

  Next, when the charge release time starts, as shown in FIG. 17B, the special figure 2 main symbol Dmd is variably displayed in the first display area Dm. In this case, since the change of the second special symbol is started, the display mode indicating the number of reserved memories (number of reserved symbols) of the special figure 2 displayed in the main reserved symbol display area Dm5 is updated, and the remaining one reserved symbol is updated. A display mode indicating the number of storages is displayed. Further, in the second display area Dn, the sub-pattern corresponding to the special figure 1 is displayed in the second display area Dn1 while being stopped and displayed as the main symbol in FIG. 17A, and in the second display area Dn2. The special figure 2 change is displayed, and in the second display area Dn3, the normal figure change is displayed in a sub-pattern.

  In the present embodiment, when the change of the special figure 2 is executed, it is designed so that either the big hit or the small hit is easily won (100% is won). Therefore, there is no need for the player to pay close attention to the normal map fluctuation. Therefore, while the special figure 2 is being changed, the special figure 2 main symbol Dmd is displayed as the main symbol, so that the player can be provided with an easy-to-understand game.

  In the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 is set to 2 seconds in both the normal state and the time saving state. This period of 2 seconds is shorter than the shortest period normally set as the fluctuation time of the symbol. As a result, during the period when the special figure 2 is fluctuating, the execution and the stop of the general figure fluctuation are suppressed without straddling a plurality of game states. As a result, during the fluctuation of the special figure 2, occurrence of an extra effect is suppressed. In addition, with this configuration, when the special figure 2 fluctuates during the time saving state, the hit change of the ordinary figure is executed and stopped during the special figure 2 fluctuation period (during the time saving), It can be suppressed that the electric accessory 640a is opened and the special figure 2 reservation is increased during the special figure 2 fluctuation period (during the shortened working hours), and an excessive payout is provided to the player. Can be suppressed.

  It should be noted that the fluctuation period of the normal symbol and the fluctuation period of the special figure 2 are configured to be selectable from a plurality of times, and only when the selected fluctuation period satisfies a predetermined condition, the fluctuation period of the special figure 2 ), The electric accessory 640a may be configured to be openable. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with unexpectedness and to have an effect that the player can play the game enthusiastically.

  Subsequently, when the special figure 2 fluctuation shown in FIG. 17B is won and the small win is displayed, the display screen shown in FIG. 18A is displayed. That is, in the first display area Dm, the special figure 2 main symbol Dmd is stopped and displayed in the display mode ("555") indicating the small hit, and is opened in the lower right area of the first display area Dm during the small hit game. A guidance display for guiding the player to the second variable winning device 650 to be performed is displayed. Then, "Aim for V" is displayed in the second sub-display area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds.

  Then, during the small hit game shown in FIG. 18 (a), when the ball passes through a specific area (V winning switch 650e3) in the second variable winning device 650 and the big hit game is started, FIG. 18 (b) ) Is displayed. In this jackpot effect screen, the main design is not displayed in the main display area Dm, and a third design corresponding to each design (special 1, special 2, general figure) is displayed in the second display region Dm as a subordinate design. Is displayed. As a result, the player can enjoy the big hit effect without worrying about the fluctuation display of each symbol (special 1, special 2, general figure) being executed.

  Further, in the jackpot effect, “Charge Bonus 1st” is displayed in the main display area Dm as the number of consecutive jackpots indicating the number of jackpots executed during the extended console mode. “ROUND1” is displayed as a round number display indicating the number of rounds. As described above, in the present embodiment, a plurality of rounds (2, 5, 7, 10, 15 rounds) are set in the jackpot game. Further, in the present embodiment, the jackpot can be executed after the time-saving state ends, by the number of times that the special figure 2 is held and stored during the special figure 1 fluctuation (150-second fluctuation) during the time-saving state.

  In the gaming machine of the present embodiment configured as described above, the display relating to the plurality of jackpots executed during the extended-village state is counted as a period from the start of the extended-village state to the end thereof. It is configured to be able to display the sojourn period cumulative display and the specific period cumulative display that totals only the jackpot games based on the jackpot right acquired in one change of the special figure 1 (ie, the number of special figure 2 reservations). In the example shown in FIG. 18A, the round number display area Dm6 formed on the lower right side of the first display area Dm corresponds to the number of rounds for the jackpot game in the specific period described above. The number display mode is displayed.

  In the number-of-rounds display area Dm6, it is determined how many rounds of the jackpot game are to be executed cumulatively, based on the reserved storage of the special figure 2 acquired by one special figure 1 change, and the determination result. Is displayed. Specifically, based on the end of the special figure 1 change (150-second change) during the time saving game, the winning information corresponding to the special figure 2 suspension (that is, stored in the special figure winning information storage area 223a described later) (The winning information relating to the special figure 2) is extracted, and the number of viable jackpots and the number of rounds are determined. Then, a display mode including at least the determination result is displayed in the round number display area Dm6.

  The number-of-rounds display mode displayed in the number-of-rounds display area Dm6 includes a number-of-executed-rounds display mode (indicated by a solid-line circle in FIG. 18B) indicating the number of rounds that have been determined to be executed. , A running round display mode indicating the currently running round (indicated by a black circle in FIG. 18B), and a jackpot right acquired during a specific period (a special figure 1 fluctuation (150 second fluctuation) during a time-saving game). And a specific period total round number suggestion display mode (indicated by a dotted circle in FIG. 18 (b)) indicating the total number of rounds in the jackpot game period that can be executed by the game.

  By executing the jackpot effect configured as described above, the player can enter the special figure 2 number of reserved balls displayed in the main reserved symbol display area Dm5 and the specific period total rounds displayed in the round number display area Dm6. While watching the number suggestion display mode, it is possible to enjoy the jackpot game while predicting the type (number of rounds) of the jackpot game to be executed in the future.

  Furthermore, as described above, the number-of-executed rounds display mode and the currently-executed round display mode are displayed in the number-of-rounds display area Dm6. Of the total number of rounds that may be executed (the number of rounds displayed as a specific period total round number suggestion display mode) or the number of rounds that are determined to be executed (the execution confirmed round number display mode), The player can easily grasp the location. Therefore, it is possible to easily predict the number of remaining rounds executed within a specific period.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 18B, “the first charge bonus” is displayed as the number of times of consecutive play indicating the number of jackpots executed during the consecutive play mode. The number of consecutive holidays displayed is the number of jackpots (number of consecutive holidays within a specific period) executed based on the jackpot right acquired during the above-described specific period (special figure 1 fluctuation (150 second fluctuation during time-saving game) (150-second fluctuation)) Alternatively, both the display of the number of extended holidays and the display of the number of extended holidays within a specific period may be displayed. A means for calculating the special figure 1 change (the number of times the 150-second change is executed) during the time-saving game is provided, and the total number of jackpots in the extended play mode, the number of times of entering the specific period, and the execution within one specific period The number of jackpots that will be displayed With this configuration, it is possible not only to enjoy the display mode during the jackpot game, but also to grasp the game state of the pachinko machine 10 and to refer to the game in the future. After calculating the number of times described above, the average number of jackpots within a specific period executed within one specific period may be displayed.

  By displaying the average number of jackpots in the specific period, if the average number of jackpots in the specific period is low, it is determined whether the lottery result of the ordinary symbol is biased out or a through condition which is a condition for executing the lottery of the ordinary symbol. It is possible to refer to a future game while analyzing whether the number of passing balls to the gate 67 is small and an assumed cause.

  In the present embodiment, the display mode (one round, one display mode) corresponding to the number of rounds is displayed as the display mode displayed in the round number display area Dm6. The display mode displayed in the area Dm6 is not limited to this, and may be any display mode in which the player can predict the number of rounds. For example, the size and color of the display mode may be changed according to a predetermined rule in accordance with the number of rounds.

  Further, in the present embodiment, “ROUND1” is displayed as a round number display indicating the number of jackpot rounds currently being executed. However, this round number display does not indicate the number of rounds for one jackpot game. Instead, the number of rounds may be added to the jackpot game executed within a specific period and displayed. As a result, it is possible to easily grasp and store the game result in the extended game mode. In the second sub-display area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds, "5, 10, 20" indicating the number of times of execution in a plurality of jackpot games executed within a specific period is displayed.

  When the second jackpot game is started due to the time saving variation (variation in the special figure 2) executed after the jackpot game shown in FIG. 18B is completed, the second jackpot game shown in FIG. The middle display screen is displayed. As shown in FIG. 19 (a), in the state where the second jackpot game has been started, the main reserved symbol display area Dm5 displays a display mode indicating that the remaining reserved storage number is “0”. In the main display area Dm, “Charge Bonus Second Time” is displayed as the number-of-games display to indicate that the current big-hit is the second big-hit in the consecutive-play mode. In the round number display area Dm6, the execution confirmed round number display mode for a total of 20 rounds is displayed. In other words, in FIG. 18B, the number of rounds displayed as the specific round total round number suggestion display mode is changed to the execution confirmed round number display mode by executing the jackpot game (second time) this time. ing. In this way, by changing the specific round total round number suggestion display mode to the execution confirmed round number display mode, it is possible for the player to execute the jackpot game with peace of mind.

  In the present embodiment, when the jackpot game is started, in order to notify the number of rounds of the jackpot game this time, of the number of rounds displayed as a specific period total round number suggestion display mode, the current jackpot game Although the configuration corresponding to the number of game rounds is changed to the execution confirmed round number display mode, other configurations may be used. For example, at the timing when the jackpot game is started, the execution confirmed round number display is performed. When the display is performed as it is and a predetermined condition (for example, execution of a predetermined operation on the frame button 22 during the jackpot game or the jackpot game reaches the third round during the jackpot game) is established, the specific period total The round number suggestion display mode may be changed to the execution confirmed round number display mode. Thereby, the player can be interested in the effect to grasp the number of execution confirmed rounds even during the big hit game.

  Further, in the present embodiment, an example has been described in which the specific period total round number suggestion display mode is all changed to the execution confirmed round number display mode. However, other configurations may be used, for example, the specific period total round number suggestion display mode. May be changed to the execution confirmed round number display mode, or the specific period total round number suggestion display mode may be changed to the execution confirmed round number display mode at a plurality of timings during the jackpot game. It may be. As a result, the jackpot game can be executed while always having a sense of expectation.

  Next, referring to FIG. 19B to FIG. 20B, the remaining period of the time-saving state (the time-saving state in which the special figure 1 change is executed) (the remaining change period of the special figure 1) is a predetermined condition ( The effect display (battle effect) executed when (remaining 10 seconds) is satisfied will be described. This effect display (battle effect) is an effect for notifying the player that the extended-village mode will end when there is no pending memory in the special figure 2 when the time saving state ends. As described above, this battle effect is executed when the remaining period of the time-saving state is within 10 seconds and the number of reserved special figure 2 is “0”. Then, when a ball enters the second entrance 640 during the battle effect and the reservation memory of the special figure 2 is generated, a battle victory effect for indicating that the extended play mode is continued is executed. (See FIG. 20 (a).) If no ball has entered the second entrance 640 during this battle effect, a battle defeat effect is performed to indicate that the extended play mode will be continued (see FIG. 20 (a)). FIG. 20 (b)). In the present embodiment, when a battle effect is executed, an effect that ultimately defeats the battle is set. This means that the period of the battle effect is set to a period (10 seconds) in which the normal figure change can be changed three or four times, and the probability of the ball entering the second entrance 640 during the battle effect is This is because the probability that the ball does not enter the second entrance 640 during the battle effect is lower. That is, it is only necessary to execute the control for changing the effect content only when a low-probability event occurs, so that the processing load can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, the effect of the battle effect is made different depending on whether or not the special figure 2 is reserved. However, other elements may be included. For example, when the lottery result of the special figure 1 which fluctuates during the working hours is a big hit, a battle victory effect may be executed at a timing when the lottery result of the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed. As a result, a surprising effect can be provided to a player who predicts the winning or losing of the battle effect based only on the content (presence or absence of storage) of the main reserved symbol display area Dm5.

  In the present embodiment, the display mode of the main reserved symbol display area Dm5 is updated at the timing when the reserved storage of the special figure 2 occurs. However, as another configuration, for example, during the battle effect, the display form of the special figure 2 is changed. Even if the suspension storage occurs, the display mode of the main suspension symbol display area Dm5 may not be updated, or the main suspension symbol display area Dm5 may not be displayed when the battle effect is executed. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp that the ball has entered the second entrance 640 during the execution of the battle effect, and to enhance the effect of the battle effect. Can be.

  Also, based on the winning information of the ordinary symbols stored on hold, it is possible to determine whether or not the ordinary symbol is correct, and the content of the battle effect (the opponent, the order of the attack, the type of the attack, etc.) can be changed based on the determination result. It is good to constitute. As a result, it is possible for the player to watch the content of the battle effect. Further, a privilege effect that is executed only when a plurality of special figure 2 reservations are acquired during the battle effect may be provided.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 21 (a), a description will be given of the contents of the effect that is executed when the special figure 2 suspension is acquired up to the upper limit during the special figure 1 time reduction. As shown in FIG. 21A, when the special figure 2 reservation is acquired up to the upper limit, the special figure 2 reservation is stored in the main reserved symbol display area Dm5 to indicate that the upper limit (four) is stored. (The black circles in the figure are four display modes), the main reserved symbol is displayed. Then, a message for congratulating that the special figure 2 reservation has reached the upper limit is displayed in the center of the first display area Dm. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 21 (b), in the first display area Dm, a bonus effect (buzzing effect using a character) irrelevant to the lottery result of each symbol is executed.

  Then, in the first sub-display area Ds1, a character "??" that hides the remaining period of time and short-term is displayed. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know which gaming state the period in which the above-described privilege effect is being executed.

  Here, during the special figure 1 time change, the lottery of the ordinary symbol is repeatedly performed, and the winning of the ordinary symbol is performed, so that the electric accessory 640a is opened and the ball enters the second entrance 640. Thus, a game for acquiring the reserved memory of the second special symbol is executed. While such a game is being executed, the player usually pays the most attention to the result of the lottery of the ordinary symbols, so that the ordinary symbol main symbol Dmc is displayed as the main symbol of the third symbol display device 81 ( When the special figure 2 reservation as shown in FIG. 15 (b) and FIG. 21 (a) is stored up to the upper limit (four), the special figure 2 reservation can no longer be stored. In addition, the player does not have to pay close attention to whether or not the symbol is normally won. Therefore, in the state shown in FIG. 21A, the third symbol corresponding to the ordinary symbol is displayed as the secondary symbol in the second display area Dn3.

  Thus, it is possible to suppress the display of the third symbol corresponding to the symbol that the player does not watch as the main symbol. Further, it is possible to suppress a problem that the main symbol Dmc is displayed in the state of FIG. 21A and the stop display is performed in the display mode indicating the hit.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 22, a description will be given of the effect contents when the first special symbol (special figure 1) executed in the normal gaming state is a small hit. FIG. 22A is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a display screen immediately after the small hitting game is started, and FIG. 22B is a diagram illustrating a specific timing (second variable winning device 650) during the small hitting game. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen at the time of opening the image).

  Here, in the present embodiment, when the small hit game based on the lottery result of the special figure 1 is executed in the normal state, the pseudo main symbol Dmb is variably displayed in the first display area Dm. The pseudo main symbol Dmb is variably displayed so as to indicate the opening timing of the second variable winning device 650 during the small hitting game, and the sub display area Ds is for explaining the game content during the small hitting game. If the symbols (pseudo main symbol Dmb) are aligned, the character "CHANCE" is displayed (see FIG. 22A).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 22 (b), when the pseudo main symbol Dmb is stopped and displayed in a predetermined stop display mode (“444” in FIG. 22 (b)), it is displayed on the lower right side of the first display area Dm. A guidance display mode for guiding the player to the game aiming at the second variable winning device 650 is displayed, and the character "Aim for V" for explaining the content of the game is displayed in the sub display area Ds.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the small hitting game based on the special figure 1 is executed in the normal state, the pseudo main symbol Dmb that is variably displayed based on the opening timing of the second variable winning device 650 is the first symbol. It is displayed in one display area Dm. This makes it seem that the opening operation of the second variable winning device 650 executed a plurality of times during the small hit game is executed based on the variable display of the pseudo main symbol Dmb.

  Also, in the state where the small hit game based on the special figure 1 is executed in the normal state, the main reserved symbol for displaying the number of reserved symbols is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 so as to emphasize the player. Make up. Thereby, based on the fluctuating display of the pseudo main symbol which is not related to each symbol (special figure 1, special figure 2, ordinary figure), the above-mentioned holding symbol display indicating the number of held symbols of each symbol is not changed. It can be hard for the player to notice. In addition, as another configuration, a pseudo reserved symbol display (pseudo reserved main symbol) that is changed based on the variable display of the pseudo main symbol Dmb may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, the pseudo main symbol Dmb also performs a variable display in which the pseudo variable symbol Dmb is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode (for example, a blind eye) indicating a deviation during the small hitting game, at a timing different from the opening timing of the second variable winning device 650. Is done. Thereby, even when the interval between the opening timings of the second variable winning device 650 is wide, the pseudo main symbol Dmb can be continuously displayed in a variable manner. In addition, in the pseudo main symbol Dmb that is stopped and displayed based on the opening timing of the second variable winning device 650, the stop display mode is changed to the opening timing of the corresponding second variable winning device 650 that is advantageous to the player. The timing (open timing at which the ball can pass through the specific area (V winning switch 650e3)) is configured to be different from the timing. For example, the pseudo main symbol Dmb corresponding to the open timing advantageous to the player is stopped. As a display mode, a display mode in which a specific same numeral is stopped, such as “777”, is set. Thereby, the opening timing of the second variable winning device 650 and the degree of advantage of the opening timing can be grasped by the variable display of the pseudo main symbol Dmb executed during the small hitting game. Interest can be given to the effect display contents.

  Next, an error display displayed on the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23A is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a display screen when a right-handed game is played in a normal state in which a left-handed game is executed. As shown in FIG. 23A, in the normal state in which the left-handed game is executed, when it is determined that the right-handed game has been performed, the main symbol displayed in the first display area Dm is covered. Notification display area Dm7 is formed as described above, and the characters "Please return to left-handed" are displayed. This allows the player to correct the game content.

  In the present embodiment, the error display in FIG. 23A indicates that the right-handed game is executed (the ball passes through the through gate 67) during the normal state in which the left-handed game is executed. Although the ball is passed through the through gate 67 immediately after the transition from the time saving state to the normal state, the normal state in which the left-handed game is executed is set as the gaming state. It is preferable that the error display is not executed even if the operation is detected. Specifically, immediately before shifting from the time-saving state to the normal state (immediately before the end of the time-saving state), the fluctuation period of the ordinary symbol that has been started and the electric operation that is executed when the fluctuation (lottery) result is a hit. A predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) during the operation period of the accessory 640a or after the time saving state ends may be set as a grace period during which no error display is performed.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the error display from being performed even if the ball shot into the game area immediately before the time reduction state ends passes through the through gate 67 after the time reduction state ends. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the willingness of the player who has been actively playing the game until immediately before the end of the time reduction state.

  In addition, in the case of using such a configuration, when a ball enters the second entrance 640 during the above-mentioned grace period, it is preferable that an unusual privilege effect is executed. It is preferable to execute a resurrection effect indicating that a state advantageous to the player (rensou mode) has revived. Thereby, the player can be motivated to play the game to the end.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 23B, the display contents displayed during the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a during the time saving state will be described. FIG. 23 (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed during the opening operation of the electric accessory during the time reduction state (during the long opening). In the present embodiment, the right-handed game is continuously performed during the time saving state, so that the ball can be immediately introduced into the second entrance 640 when the electric accessory 640a is in the long open state. The game board 13 is constituted. Further, the electric accessory 640a that is long opened is opened for 3 seconds as the first opening period, then closed for 5 seconds, and then opened again for 3 seconds (second opening period).

  The display screen shown in FIG. 23B is displayed when the ball does not enter the second entrance 640 during the first opening period during the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a (during long opening). Is what is done. In other words, if a right-handed game is normally performed, the first game board 13 is used in spite of using the configuration of the game board 13 in which the ball can surely enter the second entrance 640 during the first opening period. Assuming that a normal right-handed game has not been executed as a case where the ball has not been entered into the second entrance 640 during the opening period, a display for prompting a right-handed game is displayed in the notification display area Dm7. Is displayed.

  In the present embodiment, even if a right-handed game is started after seeing the content displayed in the notification display area Dm7, each period is set so that the ball can enter the second entrance 640 during the second opening period. Is set. Specifically, it is designed such that the period from when the ball is fired in a right-handed game to when the ball reaches the second entrance 640 (electrically powered accessory 640a) is about 2 seconds, The closing period provided between the first opening period (3 seconds) and the second opening period (3 seconds) is set to 5 seconds. Therefore, by performing a right-handed game for three seconds after the start of the closing period, it is possible to cause a ball to enter the second entrance 640.

  In the present embodiment, the first open period and the second open period are set to the same number of seconds, and a unit that measures the elapsed period of the first open period and a unit that measures the elapsed period of the second open period Although the common use is attempted, for example, the second open period may be set longer than the first open period. Thereby, based on the fact that a display for prompting a right-handed shot is displayed in the notification display area Dm7, when a right-handed game is performed, it is possible to more reliably make the ball enter the second entrance 640. it can.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the closing period is set to 5 seconds, but a longer closing time (for example, 30 seconds) may be set. In this case, as a condition for terminating the opening operation of the motorized accessory 640a, if the right-handed game is normally executed, the number of balls that can enter the second entrance 640 during the first opening period ( (For example, one ball) may be set as the termination condition. Thereby, even if the closing period executed during the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a (the closing period executed after the elapse of the first opening period) is lengthened, the player who normally plays the right-handed game can be prevented. Thus, the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a can be ended before the closing period is executed.

<Electrical Configuration in First Embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

  The main control device 110 has an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer, which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built therein. Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control device by the data transmission / reception circuit to instruct the sub-control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction.

  The main control device 110 executes the main processes of the pachinko machine 10 such as the jackpot lottery, the setting of the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 24) for storing various counters for controlling these processes.

  Here, a counter and the like provided in RAM 203 of main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. These counters and the like are used to perform a jackpot lottery, a display setting of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, a lottery of a display result of the second symbol display device 83, and the like. Used in.

  For setting the jackpot lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, selection of the first random number counter C1 used for the lottery of the big hit (and the small hit) and selection of the big hit type (big hit symbol). The first hit type counter C2 used for selecting the stop type, the stop type counter C3 used for selecting the stop type, the small hit type counter C5 used for selecting the small hit type (small hit symbol), and used for selecting the variation pattern And a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting an initial value of the first random number counter C1. In addition, the random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the ordinary symbols (the second symbol display device 83), and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 37), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main processing (see FIG. 53). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. Although details will be described later, the RAM 203 stores the first entrance 64 (left first entrance 64a, right first entrance 64b (hereinafter, referred to as the first entrance 64 when both are shown). )), A special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a in which each counter value is stored for a prize, and a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b in which each counter value is stored for a prize for the second entrance 640. I have. In the present embodiment, the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 are provided with up to four retaining balls, respectively, so that a maximum of eight retaining balls can be stored in total. Therefore, when a ball wins in the first entrance 64 during a period in which a special symbol can be selected by lottery, such as when the special symbol is not being displayed in a fluctuating manner or when a special symbol jackpot is not being played, each counter value becomes a special symbol. When the ball is stored in the 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the second winning opening 640 receives a ball, each counter value is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Thereafter, the respective counter values stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a are moved to the execution area provided in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, and the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner (dynamic display). Setting and control processing for performing the setting are performed. Similarly, each counter value stored in the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b is moved to the execution area provided in the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b, and the second special symbol is variably displayed. Various settings and control processing are executed.

  In the present embodiment, the upper limit of the number of holdings (the number of stored storages) is set to four for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The present invention is not limited to this, and a different value may be set, or only one special symbol may be held.

  On the other hand, during a period in which a special symbol cannot be selected by lottery, such as during a change display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol or during a jackpot game of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the ball enters the first entrance 64 or When the second entrance 640 is won, if the number of reserves for the winning entrance (starting entrance) is less than the upper limit (four in the present embodiment), acquisition of each counter value is not performed. The special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b corresponding to the winning entrance is stored. If the number of reserves for the winning entrance is equal to or more than the upper limit value (four in this embodiment), each counter value or the like is not obtained and the prize ball (five in this embodiment) is not obtained. Prize ball) is treated as an invalid ball paid out to the player.

  In the present embodiment, the upper limit value of the number of reserved balls is four for each of the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640, but is not limited thereto, and is smaller than four (for example, 3) or more than four (for example, eight). Further, a configuration in which no upper limit is provided may be adopted.

  Each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by one in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 299) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 299 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 299). It returns to the structure. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 299, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 53).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is, for example, updated periodically (once every timer interrupt processing in the present embodiment), and the timing at which the ball wins the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. Is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. The value of the random number which is a special symbol jackpot is defined in the first random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is stored in the first random number table. If the value matches the value of the random number which is a jackpot defined in 202a, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot.

  Here, the first random number table 202a will be described. The first winning random number table 202a is a table in which a random number value (determination value) determined to be a winning in each gaming state in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is set. Specifically, the first random number table 202a includes a special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 used for the first special symbol lottery and a special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 used for the second special symbol lottery. In the lottery of the first special symbol, it is determined whether the acquired value of the first random number counter C1 is “0”, and if it is “0”, it is determined that the winning is a big hit. In addition, it is determined whether the value of the first random number counter C1 obtained is “1 to 3”, and if it is “1 to 3”, it is determined that the small hit has occurred.

  On the other hand, in the lottery of the second special symbol, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is “0”, and if it is “0”, it is determined that the winning is a big hit. Further, it is determined whether or not the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is "1 to 299". If the value is "1 to 299", it is determined that the small hit has occurred.

  Here, the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a or the execution area of the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b may be a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol. For example, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is that at the time of the special symbol big hit. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same execution area.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter ranging from 0 to 299. As described above, there is one value of the first random number counter C1 serving as a special symbol big hit, and the random number value “0” is stored in the first random number table 202a as described above. As described above, the total number of random numbers is 300, and the total number of random numbers to be a jackpot is 1, so the probability of a special symbol to be a jackpot is “1/300”. In addition, the value of the first random number counter C1 which is a small hit in the first special symbol is three, and the value of the first random number counter C1 which is a small hit in the second special symbol is 299. The probability of the small hit of the special symbol is “1/100”, and the probability of the small hit of the second special symbol is “299/300”.

  The value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in a range of 0 to 99. When the special symbol lottery result is a big hit, the big hit type is selected based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 and the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 27A). The Rukoto. The details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The stop type selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by one in order within a range of, for example, 0 to 99, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In the present embodiment, the stop type at the time of disengagement displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is selected by the stop type selection counter C3, and is different from the reach symbol as the final stop symbol after reach occurs. Two stop (effect) patterns are selected: a "reach out" where the symbol stops (for example, in the range of 90 to 99) and a "complete out of reach" (for example, in the range of 0 to 89) in which no reach occurs. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (once for each timer interruption process in the present embodiment), and when a ball enters the first entrance 64, the value is stored in the RAM 203. The special symbol 1 is stored in the reserved ball storage area 203a. When a ball enters the second entrance 640, the value is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

  The random number value for determining the special symbol stop type from the value of the stop type selection counter C3 (random number value) is set by a stop type selection table (not shown). It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. In the present embodiment, this table is divided into a table for the normal state and a table for the time saving state, and the range of the random number value set for each type of stop is changed according to the table. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed according to whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the time saving state, or the like.

  The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by one in order within a range of, for example, 0 to 198, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The fluctuation type counter CS1 determines one fluctuation pattern from the set fluctuation pattern selection table. A fluctuation time (dynamic display period) is set in this fluctuation pattern, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 is also a counter that determines the fluctuation time. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 53) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. The variation pattern table 202d (see FIGS. 29 and 30) storing a random value that determines one symbol variation time from the value of the variation type counter CS1 (random value) is stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. It is provided within.

  A plurality of data tables for selecting a variation pattern are defined in the variation pattern table 202d (see FIGS. 29 and 30). In the variation pattern table 202d, a plurality of variation pattern tables respectively corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol are set, and for each of the variation patterns, the variation pattern corresponding to the game state or the result of the determination as to whether the game is valid or not. The table is set. Details of each variation pattern table will be described later with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30.

  The second random number counter C4 is configured as, for example, a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 239 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In this embodiment, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically at each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37), and the ball passes through the right or left normal starting port (through gate) 67. This is acquired when it is detected, and is stored in the general-purpose execution area of the RAM 203.

  Then, the value of the random number, which is a normal symbol hit, is defined in the second random number table 202c (see FIG. 26 (c)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second random number counter C4 Is equal to the winning random number specified in the second winning random number table 202c, it is determined that the winning is a normal symbol (second symbol). For example, in the second winning random number table 202c, there are 12 random numbers which are usually hits of symbols, and the range is "0 to 11". The total number of random numbers that can be obtained by the second random number counter C4 is 240, and the total number of random numbers that can be won is 12, so the probability of winning a symbol is usually “12/240 (1/20) ".

  Further, in the present embodiment, the normal state and the time reduction state can be set as the game state. According to the game state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol and the second symbol in the case where the normal symbol is hit are obtained. The opening time of the motorized accessory 640a attached to the entrance 640 is made different, so that the ball can easily enter the second entrance 640 in the time reduction state than in the normal state. Thereby, when the game state is the normal state, a game (left-handed game) aiming at the first entrance 64 (the left first entrance 64a) is performed, and when the game state is the time reduction state, A game (right-handed game) aiming at the second entrance 640 can be performed.

  In the normal state, when the ball passes through the through gate (normal ball entrance) 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is obtained, and the second symbol display device 83 displays the variation of the ordinary symbol for 4 seconds. You. If the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “0 to 11”, it is determined that the winning has been achieved, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 has been completed, the stop symbol (the second symbol) ), The symbol of “」 ”is illuminated and displayed, and the electric accessory 640a is opened (short open) for“ 0.1 seconds × 2 times ”. On the other hand, when the ball passes through the through gate (normal entrance) 67 in the time saving state, the fluctuation display of the ordinary symbol is executed for 3 seconds on the second symbol display device 83, and the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 per second is acquired. Is in the range of "0 to 11", it is determined that the winning has been achieved, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, a symbol "O" is displayed as a stopped symbol (second symbol) while being lit. The electric accessory 640a is opened (long open) for "3 seconds × 2 times". In the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the opening time and the number of times of opening the ordinary electric accessory may be appropriately changed within a range that does not impair the game performance.

  In the present embodiment, although the detailed description will be given later, the timing at which the value of the first random number counter C4 is obtained (the timing at which the normal symbol lottery is executed) and the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 Is completed (the timing at which the operation of the electric accessory 640a is set), so that the electric accessory 640a is opened long only when both are in the time saving state. For example, if the timing at which the value of the first random number counter C4 is obtained (the timing at which the normal symbol lottery is executed) is a time saving state, the timing at which the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed Even if (the timing at which the operation of the electric accessory 640a is set) is in the normal state, the electric accessory 640a may be configured to be long opened. Even if the timing at which the value of the first random number counter C4 is acquired (the timing at which the normal symbol lottery is executed) is in the normal state, the timing when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends (the electric If the timing when the operation of the accessory 640a is set) is a time saving state, the electric accessory 640a may be configured to be long opened.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once every timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 37). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see 53).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 performs a jackpot lottery and a display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the values of the counters and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 8, the description will be continued. The RAM 203 includes, in addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 24, a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, I / Os, and the like. And a work area (work area) in which the value is stored.

  The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is cut off (including when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by turning off the power, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before the power was shut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is turned off by a main process (see FIG. 53), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 52). The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When the input is made, the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 51) as the processing at the time of the power failure is immediately executed.

  Next, the contents of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 25A is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating the contents of the ROM 202 in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the present embodiment. The ROM 202 is provided with at least a first hit random number table 202a, a first hit type selection table 202b, a second hit random number table 202c, a variation pattern table 202d, and a small hit type selection table 202e.

  Next, the first random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIGS. As shown in FIG. 26A, the first random number table 202a includes a special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 used for the first special symbol lottery and a special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 used for the second special symbol lottery. It is prescribed.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 26B, the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 is used for entering the first entrance 64 (left first entrance 64a, right first entrance 64b). 7 is a table in which random numbers (judgment values) determined to be hits are set in the first special symbol lottery. In the lottery of the first special symbol, it is determined whether or not the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is “0”. If the value is “0”, it is determined that a big hit has occurred. Further, it is determined whether or not the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is “1 to 3”, and if it is “1 to 3”, it is determined that the small hit is made. In addition, when it is determined that the value is “4 to 299”, it is determined that the value is out of range.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 26 (c), the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 stores a random number value (judgment value) determined to be a hit in the second special symbol lottery based on the ball entering the second entrance 640. ) Is a set table. In the lottery of the second special symbol, it is determined whether or not the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is “0”. If the value is “0”, it is determined that it is a big hit. Further, it is determined whether or not the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is “1 to 299”. If the value is “1 to 299”, it is determined that the small hit is made.

  The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 26 (d)) is a data table in which hit determination values of ordinary symbols are stored. As shown in FIG. 26 (d), regardless of the state of the gaming machine, when the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the second random number counter buffer is in the range of 0 to 11, the normal symbol hit is determined. Is determined.

  When it is determined that the symbol is a normal symbol, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, a symbol of “」 ”is displayed as a stopped symbol (second symbol), and the electric accessory is displayed. 640a is opened for a predetermined time.

  Here, the electric accessory 640a in the present embodiment operates in the front-rear direction of the game board 13 by the operation of the solenoid (not shown, one of the solenoids 209z) as described above with reference to FIG. The electric accessory 640a performs a forward operation (opening operation) to guide the ball to enter the second entrance 640. On the other hand, by performing the retreating operation (closing operation) backward, the ball does not guide the ball to the second entrance 640 (does not enter the ball).

  Although details will be described later, the electric accessory 640a in the present embodiment is opened for three seconds again after a three-second opening period (first opening period) elapses during the time-saving state, after a five-second closing period. An opening operation (long opening) in which a period (second opening period) is set is executed, and when not in the time reduction state (during the normal state), after an opening period (first opening period) of 0.1 second elapses, After a closing period of 0.1 second, an opening operation (short opening) in which an opening period (second opening period) of 0.1 second is set again is executed. Thereby, it is possible to suppress a game in which a ball is attempted to enter the second entrance 640 even though the time saving state is not being set (the normal state is being set).

  The electric accessory 640a according to the present embodiment is designed such that when one ball enters the second entrance 640, the condition for terminating the opening operation is satisfied, and the opening operation is terminated. Thus, it is possible to suppress a plurality of balls from entering the second entrance 640 by one opening operation of the electric accessory 640a. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, as described with reference to FIGS. 2 to 4, since the configuration is such that the ball flowing down the flow path that can enter the second ball entrance 640 is regulated, Since a situation in which a plurality of balls enter the second ball entrance 640 at one time can be suppressed, a plurality of balls enter the second ball entrance 640 by one opening operation of the electric accessory 640a. Balling can be further suppressed.

  Next, the details of the first hit type selection table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 27A to 27C are schematic diagrams schematically showing the contents of the first hit type selection table 202b.

  The first hit type selection table 202b indicates that when the big hit of the first special symbol is won or the small hit of the first special symbol is won, the ball is in the specific area (V winning switch 650e3 (FIG. 5)), a special symbol 1 jackpot selection table 202b1 for selecting a jackpot type when passing through, and a win in the second special symbol jackpot or a small jackpot in the second special symbol, 27 has a special symbol 2 big hit selection table 202b2 for selecting a big hit type when the ball passes through a specific area (V winning switch 650e3 (see FIG. 5)) during the small hit game. a)).

  As shown in FIG. 27B, at the time of the big hit of the first special symbol, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “0 to 79”, the big hit A (7R short hit big hit) is selected, and “580” In the case of "-99", the big hit D (16R short time no big hit) is selected. In addition, at the time of the small hit of the first special symbol, the big hit type is selected corresponding to the small hit type described later. Specifically, when the small hit type is the small hit A, the big hit C (7R short hit big hit) is selected, and when the small hit B is the big hit D (2R short hit big hit) is selected.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 27C, at the time of the big hit of the second special symbol, regardless of the value of the first hit type counter C2 (when the value is “0 to 99”), the big hit E (15R time-saving big hit) ) Is selected. Also, at the time of the small hit of the second special symbol, the big hit type is selected corresponding to the small hit type described later. Specifically, if the small hit type is small hit C, the big hit F (5R short hit big hit) is selected, if the small hit D is the big hit G (10R short hit big hit) is selected, and if the small hit E is Is a big hit E (15R hour big hit).

  In the present embodiment, in the above-described respective jackpot types, when “time-saving jackpot” is selected, a time-saving state of “one time-saving number of times” is provided after the end of the jackpot game. However, the number of time savings given after the end of the jackpot game is not limited to this, and may be set to two or more times, or different time saving states are selected based on the selected jackpot type. You may do so. Alternatively, a different number of time saving states may be selected based on the gaming state set at the time of winning the selected jackpot type and the jackpot (the ball passes through the specific area), or “ Based on the number of times "big hits" are successively selected, a different number of time saving states may be selected based on the big hit type selected at the time of the big hit winning. With this configuration, in addition to the content of the jackpot game (the number of rounds of the jackpot game, etc.), it is possible to make the privilege content (number of times of reduced working hours) given after the end of the jackpot game different. It is possible to make the player ambitiously playing the game while expecting what kind of privilege (time saving state) will be given after the end of the big hit game.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the time saving end condition for ending the time saving state is set by performing the change of the special symbol for a preset number of time saving times, but the time saving end condition different from the present embodiment is set. May be set. For example, the number of times of the change of the first special symbol and the number of times of the change of the second special symbol may be measured, and different end conditions may be set for the change of each special symbol. Specifically, the time saving end condition is that the number of times of change of the first special symbol is four or the number of times of change of the second special symbol is one. The fact that the total number of times of change with the two special symbols is four, or that the number of times of change of the second special symbol is one may be set as the time saving end condition.

  In addition, each time a special symbol is changed, a lottery may be performed to determine whether or not to end the time reduction state, and the time reduction state may be ended based on the result of the lottery. The time-saving state may be ended when the stop display is performed with the symbol of. With this configuration, it is possible to set the timing at which the time reduction state ends in a complicated manner, and to allow a player who is in a time reduction game to perform a game while expecting the time reduction state to continue for a long time. Can be. In this case, at least a part of the period in which the time reduction does not end may be notified to the player. Thereby, it is possible to make the player understand a part of the period in which the working hours are not ended, and it is possible to make the player play the game with peace of mind during that period.

  Next, the contents of the small hit type selection table 202e will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 28A to 28C are schematic diagrams schematically showing the contents of the small hit type selection table 202e.

  The small hit type selection table 202e includes a special symbol 1 small hit selection table 202e1 for selecting a small hit type when the small hit of the first special symbol is won, and a special winning small hit selection table 202e1 for the second special symbol. There is a special symbol 2 small hit selection table 202e2 for selecting a small hit type (see FIG. 28 (a)).

  As shown in FIG. 28B, at the time of winning the small hit of the first special symbol, when the value of the small hit type counter C5 is “0 to 10”, the small hit A (V passing possible) is selected, and “ In the case of "11 to 99", the small hit B (V passing impossible) is selected.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 28 (c), at the time of the small hit winning of the second special symbol, if the value of the small hit type counter C5 is "0 to 9", the small hit C (V passing possible) is selected, In the case of "10 to 24", the small hit D (V passable) is selected, and in the case of "25 to 99", the small hit E (V passable) is selected.

  In the present embodiment, the operations of the V inlet solenoid 209a and the flow path solenoid 209c of the second variable winning device 650 are set according to the small hit type. Specifically, in the small hit game with the small hits A and C to E, the flow path solenoid 209c of the second variable winning device 650 operates, and the ball can enter the special discharge flow path 650e2. I have. On the other hand, in the small hit game with the small hit B, the flow path solenoid 209c of the second variable winning device 650 is not operated. The ball cannot enter the special discharge channel 650e2. That is, the small hits A and C to E pass the ball to the specific area (the V winning switch 650e3), and the small hits are the small hits to which the big hit can be given, and the small hits B are the small hits to which the big hit is not given. .

  Further, in the small hit game by the small hits A and B (small hit type selected by the small hit winning of the first special symbol), the V inlet solenoid 209a operates so that the opening / closing door 650f is opened for a short period (FIG. 10). In the small hit game with small hits C to E (small hit type selected by the small hit winning of the second special symbol), the V inlet solenoid 209a operates so that the opening / closing door 650f is opened for a long period of time (FIG. 11). That is, the small hits A and B are small hits in which the ball is unlikely to enter the second variable winning device 650 during the small hit game, and the small hits C to E are the second variable winning devices 650 during the small hit game. It is a small hit where the ball easily enters.

  In this control example, the type of the jackpot to be given thereafter is determined according to the type of the small hit, and the big hit given after the small hit A becomes the big hit C (7R short hit big hit) and the big hit B The jackpot given afterwards is a jackpot D (2R short jackpot), the jackpot given after the small jackpot C is a jackpot F (5R short jackpot), and the jackpot given after the small jackpot D is a jackpot G (10R). It is configured so that the big hit is given after the small hit E and the big hit is given as the big hit E (15R time saving big hit).

  In the present control example, the type of the jackpot to be given thereafter is determined according to the type of the small hit. However, as another specification, the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit. Also, the jackpot type is determined by the jackpot selection table (only the jackpot right is acquired), and in the subsequent small jackpot game, the jackpot for which the right has been acquired is executed by passing the ball through the V winning switch 650e3. You may. By doing so, the player can select the small hit that passes through the V winning switch 650e3, and the interest of the game can be improved. Also, a configuration may be adopted in which a predetermined lottery is executed based on the fact that the ball has passed through the specific area (V winning switch 650e3) during the small hit game, and the big hit type is determined based on the lottery result. Good. Thereby, the content of the jackpot game to be executed can be made different depending on the timing at which the ball passes through the specific area, so that the player is willing to play the small jackpot game, and the interest of the game can be improved. it can.

  Next, the contents of the variation pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIGS. The variation pattern table 202d is a data table used to determine the display mode (variation time) of the variation pattern, and the display mode is defined for each value of the variation type counter CS1. In the variation pattern table 202d, a plurality of different tables corresponding to types of special symbols, lottery results, and game states are defined.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 29A, the special figure 1 big hit variation pattern table 202d1, the special figure 1 departure (normal) change pattern table 202d2, and the special figure 1 small hit variation pattern table 202d3 And at least a special pattern 1 time reduction variation pattern table 202d4 and a special pattern 2 variation pattern table 202d5.

  First, with reference to FIG. 29B, the special figure 1 big hit variation pattern table 202d will be described. The special pattern 1 big hit change pattern table 202d1 selects a change pattern (change time) when the big hit is won from the change patterns (change time) of the first special symbol (special figure 1) in the normal state. And a random number value (counter value of the variation type counter value CS1) for determining the type (variation time) of the variation pattern.

  Specifically, when the jackpot is determined as the stop type, the variation pattern of the normal reach (30 seconds) is associated with the range of “0 to 50” as the value of the variation type counter CS1, and the variation pattern of “51 to 179” is set. A variation pattern of super reach (60 seconds) is associated with the range, and a variation pattern of various special reach (90 seconds) is associated with the range of “180 to 198”.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 29 (c), the contents of the (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 for the special figure 1 will be described. The special pattern 1 deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 indicates that the lottery result of the special figure 1 is out of the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol (special figure 1) in the normal state. A random number value (counter value of the fluctuation type counter value CS1) for determining the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) in is defined.

  Specifically, when complete departure is determined as the stop type, a short departure (7 seconds) fluctuation pattern is associated with the range of “0 to 98” as the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. A variation pattern of a long time (10 seconds) is associated with the range of “198”. In addition, when the first special symbol is removed by lottery and the out-of-reach is determined as the stop type, various values of the normal reach (30 seconds) are associated with the range of “0 to 149” as the value of the variation type counter CS1. , “150 to 197”, various super reach (60 seconds) are associated, and “198” is associated with various special reach (90 seconds).

  Next, the contents of the special figure 1 small hit variation pattern table 202d3 will be described with reference to FIG. 29 (d). The special figure 1 small hit variation pattern table 202d3 is the first special symbol ( A random value (counter value of the variation type counter value CS1) for determining the variation pattern (variation time) when the lottery result of the special figure 1 is a small hit among the variation pattern (variation time) of the special figure 1) ) Is specified.

  Specifically, when the small hit is determined as the stop type, the type of the small hit (small hit A, small hit B) and various types of super reach (60 seconds) regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1. Are associated.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, various fluctuation patterns are selected corresponding to each stop type based on the lottery result of the first special symbol. Is set so that a long (for example, 90 seconds) fluctuation pattern is easily selected when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit. So, if the player is displayed continuously fluctuating for a long time, may he win the jackpot? You will play while expecting. Therefore, the game result can be predicted by the set period length of the fluctuation pattern, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 30A, the contents of the special figure 1 time reduction variation pattern table 202d4 will be described. The special pattern 1 time-saving variation pattern table 202d42 has a random number value (counter value of the variation type counter value CS1) for determining the variation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol (special figure 1) in the time-saving state. Stipulated.

  Specifically, a variation pattern for 150 seconds is associated with the determined stop type and the value of the variation type counter CS1.

  FIG. 30B is a diagram showing the contents of the special figure 2 variation pattern table 202d5. The variation pattern table 202d5 for special figure 2 defines a random value for determining the variation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol (special figure 2) in the normal state and the time saving state.

  Specifically, if the determined stop type is a big hit, a short and big hit (7 seconds) is set irrespective of the value of the change type counter CS1, and if the determined stop type is a small hit, the change type is Irrespective of the value of the counter CS1, the short hit (2 seconds) is associated.

  Next, the contents of the RAM 203 in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. As shown in FIG. 25B, the RAM 203 has a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d, and a special symbol. 2 reserved ball number counter 203e, ordinary symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, time reduction counter 203g, big hit start flag 203h, big hit flag 203i, small hit start flag 203j, small hit flag 203k, V passing big hit type storage area 203m , V flag 203n, storage release flag 203p, release counter 203qa, medium time saving flag 203q, and other memory area 203z.

  The special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area), and each of these areas has a random number counter per first. Each value of C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the small hit type counter C5 is stored.

  More specifically, at the timing when the ball enters the first entrance 64 (start winning prize), each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 and C5 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in four holdings. Among the vacant areas of the areas (reserved first area to reserved fourth area), the areas are stored in ascending order of the area numbers (first to fourth). That is, the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the area having the smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when a special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is transferred to the execution area. It is shifted (moved), and a determination such as a lottery of a special symbol is made based on each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the execution area.

  When data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process of packing the winning data stored in the other reserved areas (the reserved second area to the reserved fourth area) into the reserved area having the smaller area number (the reserved first area to the reserved third area). Done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, data is shifted only for reserved areas (reserved second area to reserved fourth area) in which winning data is stored.

  The special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b has one execution area and four reserved areas, similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. In the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, each counter value acquired based on the winning winning in the second ball entrance 640 is stored. The method of storing the counter value and the like are the same as those in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Like the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b, the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). Area). Each of these areas stores a second random number counter C4.

  More specifically, at the timing when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the value of the counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is available in four reserved areas (the first reserved area to the fourth reserved area). Of the areas that are present, the areas are stored in ascending order of area number (first to fourth). That is, similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, in the main control device 110, when the lottery for the ordinary symbol is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the ordinary symbol retaining ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( Is moved), and a determination such as a lottery for a normal symbol is made based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area.

  When the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty, so that the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, A shift process is performed in which the winning data stored in the other reserved areas is packed into the reserved area having the smaller area number. The data shift is also performed only for the reserved area in which the winning data is stored.

  The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is a variable display (third symbol) of a special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the ball entering the first entrance 64 (start winning). This is a counter for counting the number of reserved balls (the number of times of standby) of the variable display performed on the display device 81 up to four times. The initial value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first entrance 64 and the number of retained balls in the variable display increases, the counter value increases to a maximum value of 4. It is incremented by one (see S704 in FIG. 43). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time a new special symbol change display is executed (see S210 in FIG. 38).

  The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times N1 of the variable display in the first special symbol is changed) is notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by a reserved ball number command (see S211 in FIG. 38). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 each time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is changed.

  Each time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is changed, the sound ramp control device 113 holds the variable display retained by the main control device 110 by the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110. The value of the number of balls itself can be obtained. As a result, the number of retained balls in the variable display, which is managed by the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113, is transmitted to the main control device 110 by the influence of noise or the like. Even in the case where the number of balls is deviated from the actual number of retained balls displayed in the fluctuation display, the deviation can be corrected by a next received ball number command.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and displays the reserved ball number for notifying the display control device 114 of the reserved ball number every time the reserved ball number changes. Send the ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball count symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball count notified by the display reserved ball count command.

  The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is a variable display (third symbol) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry into the second entrance 640 (start winning). This is a counter for counting the number of reserved balls (the number of times of standby) of the variable display performed on the display device 81 up to four times. The initial value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the second entrance 640 and the number of retained balls in the variable display increases, the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e increases to a maximum value of 4. It is incremented by one (see S710 in FIG. 43). On the other hand, the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 each time a new special symbol change display is executed (see S205 in FIG. 38). The value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command, similarly to the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d.

  The ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203f counts up to four times the number of waiting balls (the number of standbys) of the variable display of the ordinary symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball through the through gate 67. It is a counter that counts up to. The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the through gate 67 and the number of retained balls of the variable display increases, one is added to the maximum value of 4 ( See S1104 in FIG. 47). On the other hand, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is decremented by one each time a new variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is executed (see S905 in FIG. 45).

  When the ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (the number of times M of the variable display in the normal symbol is held) is less than 4, the value of the second random number counter C4 is obtained. The acquired data is stored in the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203c (S1105 in FIG. 47). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the ordinary symbol retaining ball storage area 203c (S1103 in FIG. 47: No) ).

  The time reduction counter 203g is a counter for counting the remaining time reduction period (the number of times the special symbol fluctuates) in the normal symbol time reduction state (time reduction state). At the time reduction counter 203g, 1 is set at the end of the big hit game in which the big hit type is other than "big hit B, D" (that is, "big hit A, C, EG") (see S1815 in FIG. 54). . That is, in this embodiment, when the time saving state is given after the big hit game, one time saving state is given.

  The big hit start flag 203h is a flag used to determine whether it is a big hit start timing. The jackpot start flag 203h is set to ON when the lottery result is a jackpot in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38) (see S219 in FIG. 38), and the start timing of the jackpot in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 54). Is determined (see S1801 in FIG. 54), and is set to OFF when it is determined that the timing is the jackpot start timing in the jackpot control process (see S1802 in FIG. 54). Thereby, it is possible to execute the processing according to the big hit start timing. Although not shown in each of the above control examples, the jackpot start timing is similarly determined.

  The big hit flag 203i is a flag used to determine whether or not a big hit is being performed, that is, whether or not a big hit game is being executed. Like the big hit start flag 203h, the big hit flag 203i is turned on when the lottery result is a big hit in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 38) (see S219 in FIG. 38). Then, in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 54), it is referred to determine whether or not a jackpot is in progress (see S1805 in FIG. 54), and in the jackpot control process, it is determined that it is the timing for ending the jackpot. In this case, it is set to off (see S1813 in FIG. 54).

  The small hit start flag 203j is a flag used to determine whether or not it is a small hit start timing. The small hit start flag 203j is set to ON in a small hit start setting process (see FIG. 42) executed when the lottery result is determined to be a small hit in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 38). (See S610 in FIG. 42). Then, it is referred to in the small hit control process (see FIG. 55) to determine whether or not it is the small hit start timing (see S1901 in FIG. 55), and the small hit control process is the small hit start timing. Is set to off (see S1902 in FIG. 55).

  The small hitting flag 203k is a flag used to determine whether a small hitting is being performed, that is, whether a small hitting game is being executed. The small hitting flag 203k is set to ON in the small hitting start setting process (see FIG. 42), similarly to the small hitting start flag 203j described above (see S610 in FIG. 42). Then, in the small hit control process (see FIG. 55), it is referred to determine whether or not a small hit is occurring (S1906 in FIG. 55), and in the small hit control process, it is determined that it is the end timing of the small hit. In this case, it is set to off (S1911 in FIG. 55).

  The big hit type storage area 203m at the time of passing V is an area for storing a big hit type corresponding to the small hit type of the small hit when the small hit is won. The type of the jackpot to be executed based on passing through is stored. In the small hit start setting process (see FIG. 42), the big hit type corresponding to the winning small hit type is set (see S608 in FIG. 42), and the V passing process (see FIG. 50) is set in the small hit start setting process (see FIG. 42). ), The set jackpot type is read (see S1401 in FIG. 50), and the corresponding V flag is set to ON (see S1401 in FIG. 50).

  The V flag 203n is a flag for storing that the ball has passed the V winning switch 650e3 of the second variable winning device 650, and sets the big hit type based on the value of the V flag 203n at the end of the small hitting game. Things. The V flag 203n is set based on the value of the big hit type at the time of V passing in the V passing process (see FIG. 50) (S1402 in FIG. 50), and is referred to in the small hit ending process (S2003 and S2004 in FIG. 56). Thereafter, it is set to off (S2006 in FIG. 56).

  The storage release flag 203p is a flag used to indicate a period during which the storage valve 750a of the storage device 750 provided in the pachinko machine 10 is released (opened), and when set to ON, the storage of the storage device 750 is performed. When the state is released and set to off, the storage device 750 enters the storage state. This storage release flag 203p is set to ON (S1801 in FIG. 54) when it is determined in the big hit control process (see FIG. 54) that it is the start timing of the big hit (S1804 in FIG. 54), and the storage device is set. It is referred to in the control process (see FIG. 58) (see S2202 in FIG. 58), and is set to off when the value of the release counter 203Pa reaches the upper limit (25000) (see S2205 in FIG. 58). S2208). That is, in the present embodiment, the storage device 750 is released (the storage valve 750a is opened) at the timing when the big hit game is started, and the storage device 750 is brought into the storage state after a predetermined period (10 seconds) has elapsed (the storage valve). 750a is closed). Thereby, the privilege given to the player when the big hit is won can be increased.

  Note that a configuration other than the present embodiment may be used as a configuration for changing the state (storage state, release state) of the storage device 750. For example, a jackpot for shifting the storage device 750 to the release state, and a storage device 750 May be set according to the selected jackpot type, or a plurality of winning ports (for example, the first specific winning port 65 and the second specific winning port 650) may be set in advance. In the case where a jackpot game in which opening operations are performed in the order described above is executed, the storage device 750 may be shifted to a release state at a timing when a specific winning opening is opened.

  Further, in the configuration in which the storage device 750 is shifted from the release state to the storage state (the termination condition of the release state), in the present embodiment, the configuration in which the release state is ended when 10 seconds elapse after the transition to the release state. Even if a ball is not stored in the storage device 750, the ball can pass through the storage device 750, but the period during which the storage device is released is shortened (for example, 0.5 seconds). Only the stored balls may be allowed to pass through the storage device 750. This allows the player to enthusiastically play a game to cause the storage device 750 to store a ball before the release condition (big hit) of the storage device 750 is satisfied.

  The release counter 203pa is a counter for measuring a period during which the storage valve 750a of the storage device 750 is released (opened). This release counter 203pa is set to “1” when it is determined in the storage device control process (see FIG. 58) that the storage release flag 203p has been set to ON (see S2202 in FIG. 58) (see FIG. 58). Thereafter, every time the storage device control process is executed, the value is incremented by 1 (see S2206 in FIG. 58). Then, it is determined whether the value of the counter has reached “25000” (see 2205 in FIG. 58), and based on the determination result, the variable operation of the storage valve 750a is controlled, and the storage valve 750a is variably controlled to the closed state. Then, the value of the release counter 203Pa is set to “0” (see S2209 in FIG. 58).

  The time saving medium hit flag 203q is a flag for indicating in which gaming state the lottery of the ordinary symbol whose result of the lottery is a hit (general figure lottery) is executed. When the lottery is executed during the time saving state, Set to on. The time saving medium hit flag 203q is referred to when setting the opening pattern of the electric accessory 640a that is executed based on the winning of the ordinary drawing lottery.

  The other memory area 203z is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110.

  Returning to FIG. 8, the description will be continued. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a large opening solenoid for closing or opening the first specific winning opening 65a, A solenoid 209 composed of a solenoid or the like for driving the electric accessory is connected, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205.

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), and a RAM erase switch (122 in FIG. 7) described later provided in the power supply device 115. Various processes are executed based on signals output from various switches 208 and a RAM erasure signal SG2 output from a RAM erasure switch (122 in FIG. 7) circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loaned balls. The MPU 211 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 212 storing a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I / O and the like are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similarly to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 51) as a process during a power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize ball. The winning ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the sphere launch unit 112a so that the launching strength of the sphere according to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when the sphere control is instructed by the main control device 110. The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown). The launching solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation handle 51b is turned off (not operated) on the condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off. The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation of the 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs a sound from a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, and outputs and changes the lighting and extinguishing of a lamp display device 227 (such as a decoration lamp 227a, a transmission lamp 227b, and other lamps 227c). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as the display effect (variable display). The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  The input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225.

  The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22 and, when the player operates the frame button 22, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or performs super-reach. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect content, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the third image display device 81 displays a back image corresponding to the changed stage. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and controls display of an error command including the type of the error. Transmit to device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

  Next, details of the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 31A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 31A, the ROM 222 has at least a fluctuation pattern selection table 222a and an effect state selection table 222b.

  The variation pattern selection table 222a indicates that the sound ramp control device 113 is configured based on the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110 and that the rough variation content (variation time, variation type (reach, deviation, etc.) indicated by the variation pattern command is used. ) Is used to determine a more detailed variation. As a result, various variations can be determined. Here, one variation mode among a plurality of types is determined by lottery for the rough variation content instructed from main controller 110.

  The effect state selection table 222b is a table for selecting an effect state for setting a display mode of an effect image (third symbol image, reserved symbol image, background image, etc.) displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the state of establishment of various flags, and the lottery results of special symbols and ordinary symbols, any one of the six rendering states is selected.

  Here, the contents of the effect state selection table 222b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the effect state selection table 222b. As shown in FIG. 32 (a), the effect state selection table 222b indicates that the extended state flag 223i, the ordinary figure valid flag 223q, the pseudo effect flag 223r, and the special 2 change flag 223s are established (on or off). Is set to any one of the effect states “1” to “6”.

  Specifically, if the pseudo-effect flag 223r is also set to off in a state where the extended-mode flag 223i is set to off, the effect state "1" is selected. On the other hand, when the pseudo effect flag 223r is set to ON, the effect state “2” is selected. In addition, in the state where the extended-village flag 223i is set to ON and the general map valid flag 223q is set to OFF, if the special figure 2 change flag 223s is set to OFF, the effect state “3” is set. Selected. On the other hand, when the special figure 2 change flag 223s is set to ON, the effect state “4” is selected. Then, when the extended-village flag 223i is set to ON and the general-purpose-valid flag 223q is set to ON, the effect state “5” is selected. In the state where the effect state “5” is selected, the fluctuation stop timing of the executed first special symbol (special figure 1) and the fluctuation stop timing of the ordinary symbol (general figure) are set at a predetermined interval (special figure). In the case where the fluctuation stop timing of the ordinary figure is earlier than the fluctuation stop timing of No. 1 and each fluctuation stop timing is within 2 seconds), the effect state “6” is selected.

  Here, the relationship between the effect state selected by the effect state selection table 222b and the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 (b) is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between each effect state selected by the effect state selection table 222b and the third symbol and the reserved symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, not only the above-described third symbol and the reserved symbol, but also various effect images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are displayed in the set effect state. However, the detailed description is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 32B, a third symbol (main symbol) displayed in the first display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 according to the rendering state selected by the rendering state selection table 222b (see FIG. 9). And a symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol, ordinary symbol) corresponding to the main reserved symbol (see FIG. 9) displayed in the first sub-display area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. Stipulated. In this manner, the pachinko machine 10 having a complicated game performance is made by changing the symbols (the first special symbol, the second special symbol, the ordinary symbol) corresponding to the main symbol and the main reserved symbol depending on the effect state. Just letting the player know the symbol and the main reserved symbol can inform the result of the main game in an easily understandable manner.

  More specifically, when the effect state “1” is selected, the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol (special symbol 1) becomes the main symbol, and the reserved symbol for indicating the number of reserved symbols of the special symbol 1 is stored. The symbol becomes the main reserved symbol and is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 9). The effect state “1” is selected when the gaming state is the normal state in which the left-handed game is being executed.

  Next, when the effect state “2” is selected, a pseudo symbol for effect that does not correspond to any of the symbols (special figure 1, special figure 2, ordinary figure) is the main symbol (pseudo main symbol Dmb). The main symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 so as not to display any symbol on the main symbol (see FIG. 22B). The effect state “2” is selected when the gaming state is the normal state and the small hitting game of Tokuju 1 is executed.

  The pseudo main symbol Dmb displayed as the main symbol when the effect state “2” is selected is a symbol variation display (see FIG. 22A) and a stop display (FIG. 22), like the other main symbols. (B)) is executed, and the pseudo main symbol Dmb is determined based on the timing at which the second specific winning opening 650a of the second variable winning device 650 is opened in the small hit game of Tokuzu 1 The display is controlled so as to be stopped and displayed in the display mode (the same symbol is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 22B)), whereby the pseudo main symbol Dmb is stopped and displayed to the player. The opening timing of the second specific winning opening 650a during the hit game can be notified, and the privilege of opening the second specific winning opening 650a as a result of the fluctuation (lottery) of the pseudo main symbol Dmb is provided. It is possible to think.

  In addition, the number of times the pseudo main symbol Dmb is fluctuated and displayed is set to be at least larger than the number of times the second specific winning opening 650a is opened during the small hit game, and corresponds to the opening timing of the second specific winning opening 650a. The fluctuating display of the pseudo main symbol Dmb which is not displayed is controlled so as to be stopped and displayed in a display mode other than a predetermined display mode (for example, a mode in which non-identical symbols are stopped and displayed (so-called loose eyes)). ing. Thereby, regardless of the opening timing of the second specific winning opening 650a during the small hit game, the pseudo main symbol Dmb can be constantly displayed in a variably manner, and the effect can be enhanced.

  Further, when the effect state “2” is selected, the main reserved symbol is not displayed, so that it is difficult for the player to grasp the fluctuation of the pseudo main symbol Dmb and the increase / decrease relationship of the reserved symbol. That is, since the pseudo main symbol Dmb is not a symbol corresponding to each symbol (special figure 1, special figure 2, ordinary figure) actually held and stored, when the pseudo main symbol Dmb starts to be changed and displayed. The number of any of the reserved symbols (special figure 1 reserved symbol, special figure 2 reserved symbol, general figure reserved symbol) does not increase or decrease. Therefore, in the effect state “2” in which the pseudo main symbol Dmb is variably displayed, any of the reserved symbols (the special symbol 1 reserved symbol, the special symbol 2 reserved symbol, and the ordinary symbol reserved symbol) are displayed as the main reserved symbol. Then, when the main symbol starts to fluctuate, the main reserved symbol does not decrease, and a situation occurs in which the player feels strange. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the effect state “2” is selected, the main hold symbol is not displayed, so that the above-described situation can be prevented from occurring.

  In the present embodiment, when the effect state “2” is selected, the main reserved symbol is configured not to be displayed. However, other configurations may be used. For example, a pseudo main symbol is used. A pseudo main reserved symbol corresponding to Dmb may be displayed. In this case, the number of pseudo main reserved symbols may be increased or decreased in accordance with the fluctuation display of the pseudo main symbol Dmb. Thereby, the fluctuation display of the pseudo main symbol can be executed without giving a sense of strangeness to the player.

  Further, in the case of displaying the pseudo main reserved symbols, the number of pseudo main reserved symbols to be displayed and the display mode may be set based on the type of the small hit game to be executed. With this configuration, the content of the current small hit game is predicted to the player by the pseudo main hold symbol displayed as the main hold symbol at the timing when the small hit game in which the effect state “2” is selected is started. It is possible to perform the small hit game while having fun.

  Also, the stop display mode of the pseudo main symbol Dmb corresponding to the timing when the second specific winning opening 650a is opened is a display mode in which the same symbol is stopped and displayed. In addition, the ball enters the second specific winning opening 650a. Display control is performed such that the same symbol type that is stopped and displayed based on the content of the privilege given by the hit ball is different. Specifically, the pseudo main symbol Dmb corresponding to the opening timing of the second specific winning opening 650a that is opened at a timing at which a ball that has entered the second specific winning opening 650a can pass through the specific area (V winning switch 650e3). Of the pseudo main symbol Dmb corresponding to the opening timing of the second specific winning opening 650a which is opened at other timings. The stop display mode is set to a display mode different from the specific same number (for example, “444”). As a result, the pseudo main symbol Dmb is stopped and displayed at the same number, thereby notifying the player of the opening timing at the second specific winning opening 650a. The content can be notified (suggested). Therefore, the effect of the effect using the pseudo main symbol Dmb can be enhanced.

  Next, when the effect state “3” is selected, a pseudo symbol for effect that does not correspond to any of the symbols (special figure 1, special figure 2, ordinary figure) is a main symbol (pseudo main symbol Dmb). In the main reserved symbol, a reserved symbol corresponding to the special figure 2 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a main reserved symbol (see FIG. 16B). The effect state “3” is selected when the gaming state is the time saving state and the small hitting game is executed.

  Next, when the effect state “4” is selected, the third symbol corresponding to the special figure 2 is the main symbol (special symbol 2 main symbol Dmd), and the main symbol symbol is the hold symbol corresponding to the special symbol 2. The symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a main reserved symbol (see FIG. 18A). The effect state “4” is selected when the gaming state is the normal state and the fluctuation of the special figure 2 is executed.

  Next, when the effect state “5” is selected, the third symbol corresponding to the ordinary symbol is the main symbol (ordinary symbol main symbol Dmc), and the reserved symbol corresponding to the special symbol 2 is designated as the primary symbol. It is displayed on the three symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 15B). The effect state “5” is selected when the gaming state is the time reduction state, and during the time reduction state, a normal drawing change in which the lottery and the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a can be performed is executed.

  When the effect state “6” is selected, the third symbol corresponding to the special symbol 1 is the main symbol (special symbol 1 main symbol Dma), and the reserved symbol corresponding to the special symbol 2 is the third symbol as the main symbol. This is displayed on the symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 17A). The effect state “6” is selected when the game state is the time saving state and the normal figure change is started in a state where the remaining change period of the changing special figure 1 is within 2 seconds.

  Next, details of the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 31A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 31A, the ROM 222 has at least a fluctuation pattern selection table 222a and an effect state selection table 222b.

  The variation pattern selection table 222a indicates that the sound ramp control device 113 is configured based on the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110 and that the rough variation content (variation time, variation type (reach, deviation, etc.) indicated by the variation pattern command is used. ) Is used to determine a more detailed variation. As a result, various variations can be determined. Here, one variation mode among a plurality of types is determined by lottery for the rough variation content instructed by main controller 110.

  The effect state selection table 222b is a table for selecting an effect state for setting a display mode of an effect image (third symbol image, reserved symbol image, background image, etc.) displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the state of establishment of various flags, and the lottery results of special symbols and ordinary symbols, any one of the six rendering states is selected.

  Here, the contents of the effect state selection table 222b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the effect state selection table 222b. As shown in FIG. 32 (a), the effect state selection table 222b indicates whether or not the connected state flag 223i, the ordinary figure valid flag 223q, the pseudo effect flag 223r, and the special figure 2 change flag 223s are set to ON or not. Any of the effect states “1” to “6” is selected depending on whether the setting is off.

  Specifically, if the pseudo-effect flag 223r is also set to off in a state where the extended-mode flag 223i is set to off, the effect state "1" is selected. On the other hand, when the pseudo effect flag 223r is set to ON, the effect state “2” is selected. In addition, in the state where the extended-village flag 223i is set to ON and the general map valid flag 223q is set to OFF, if the special figure 2 change flag 223s is set to OFF, the effect state “3” is set. Selected. On the other hand, when the special figure 2 change flag 223s is set to ON, the effect state “4” is selected. Then, when the extended-village flag 223i is set to ON and the general-purpose-valid flag 223q is set to ON, the effect state “5” is selected. In the state where the effect state “5” is selected, the fluctuation stop timing of the executed first special symbol (special figure 1) and the fluctuation stop timing of the ordinary symbol (general figure) are set at a predetermined interval (special figure). In the case where the fluctuation stop timing of the ordinary figure is earlier than the fluctuation stop timing of No. 1 and each fluctuation stop timing is within 2 seconds), the effect state “6” is selected.

  Here, the relationship between the effect state selected by the effect state selection table 222b and the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 (b) is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between each effect state selected by the effect state selection table 222b and the third symbol and the reserved symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, not only the above-described third symbol and the reserved symbol, but also various effect images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are displayed in the set effect state. However, the detailed description is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 32B, a third symbol (main symbol) displayed in the first display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 according to the rendering state selected by the rendering state selection table 222b (see FIG. 9). The symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol, normal symbol) corresponding to the main reserved symbol (see FIG. 9) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are defined so as to be different from each other. In this manner, the pachinko machine 10 having a complicated game performance is made by changing the symbols (the first special symbol, the second special symbol, the ordinary symbol) corresponding to the main symbol and the main reserved symbol depending on the effect state. Just letting the player know the symbol and the main reserved symbol can inform the result of the main game in an easily understandable manner.

  More specifically, when the effect state “1” is selected, the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol (special symbol 1) becomes the main symbol, and the reserved symbol for indicating the number of reserved symbols of the special symbol 1 is stored. The symbol becomes the main reserved symbol and is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 9). The effect state “1” is selected when the gaming state is the normal state in which the left-handed game is being executed.

  Next, when the effect state “2” is selected, a pseudo symbol for effect that does not correspond to any of the symbols (special figure 1, special figure 2, ordinary figure) is the main symbol (pseudo main symbol Dmb). The main symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 so as not to display any symbol on the main symbol (see FIG. 22B). The effect state “2” is selected when the gaming state is the normal state and the small hitting game of Tokuju 1 is executed.

  The pseudo main symbol Dmb displayed as the main symbol when the effect state “2” is selected is a symbol variation display (see FIG. 22A) and a stop display (FIG. 22), like the other main symbols. (B)) is executed, and the pseudo main symbol Dmb is determined based on the timing at which the second specific winning opening 650a of the second variable winning device 650 is opened in the small hit game of Tokuzu 1 The display is controlled so as to be stopped and displayed in the display mode (the same symbol is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 22B)), whereby the pseudo main symbol Dmb is stopped and displayed to the player. The opening timing of the second specific winning opening 650a during the hit game can be notified, and the privilege of opening the second specific winning opening 650a as a result of the fluctuation (lottery) of the pseudo main symbol Dmb is provided. It is possible to think.

  In addition, the number of times the pseudo main symbol Dmb is fluctuated and displayed is set to be at least larger than the number of times the second specific winning opening 650a is opened during the small hit game, and corresponds to the opening timing of the second specific winning opening 650a. The fluctuating display of the pseudo main symbol Dmb which is not displayed is controlled so as to be stopped and displayed in a display mode other than a predetermined display mode (for example, a mode in which non-identical symbols are stopped and displayed (so-called loose eyes)). ing. Thereby, regardless of the opening timing of the second specific winning opening 650a during the small hit game, the pseudo main symbol Dmb can be constantly displayed in a variably manner, and the effect can be enhanced.

  Further, when the effect state “2” is selected, the main reserved symbol is not displayed, so that it is difficult for the player to grasp the fluctuation of the pseudo main symbol Dmb and the increase / decrease relationship of the reserved symbol. That is, since the pseudo main symbol Dmb is not a symbol corresponding to each symbol (special figure 1, special figure 2, ordinary figure) actually held and stored, when the pseudo main symbol Dmb starts to be changed and displayed. The number of any of the reserved symbols (special figure 1 reserved symbol, special figure 2 reserved symbol, general figure reserved symbol) does not increase or decrease. Therefore, in the effect state “2” in which the pseudo main symbol Dmb is variably displayed, any of the reserved symbols (the special symbol 1 reserved symbol, the special symbol 2 reserved symbol, and the ordinary symbol reserved symbol) are displayed as the main reserved symbol. Then, when the main symbol starts to fluctuate, the main reserved symbol does not decrease, and a situation occurs in which the player feels strange. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the effect state “2” is selected, the main hold diagram is not displayed, so that the above-described situation can be prevented from occurring.

  In the present embodiment, when the effect state “2” is selected, the main reserved symbol is configured not to be displayed. However, other configurations may be used. For example, a pseudo main symbol is used. A pseudo main reserved symbol corresponding to Dmb may be displayed. In this case, the number of pseudo main reserved symbols may be increased or decreased in accordance with the fluctuation display of the pseudo main symbol Dmb. Thereby, the fluctuation display of the pseudo main symbol can be executed without giving a sense of strangeness to the player.

  Further, in the case of displaying the pseudo main reserved symbols, the number of pseudo main reserved symbols to be displayed and the display mode may be set based on the type of the small hit game to be executed. With this configuration, the content of the current small hit game is predicted to the player by the pseudo main hold symbol displayed as the main hold symbol at the timing when the small hit game in which the effect state “2” is selected is started. It is possible to perform the small hit game while having fun.

  Also, the stop display mode of the pseudo main symbol Dmb corresponding to the timing when the second specific winning opening 650a is opened is a display mode in which the same symbol is stopped and displayed. In addition, the ball enters the second specific winning opening 650a. Display control is performed such that the same symbol type that is stopped and displayed based on the content of the privilege given by the hit ball is different. Specifically, the pseudo main symbol Dmb corresponding to the opening timing of the second specific winning opening 650a that is opened at a timing at which a ball that has entered the second specific winning opening 650a can pass through the specific area (V winning switch 650e3). Of the pseudo main symbol Dmb corresponding to the opening timing of the second specific winning opening 650a which is opened at other timings. The stop display mode is set to a display mode different from the specific same number (for example, “444”). As a result, the pseudo main symbol Dmb is stopped and displayed at the same number, thereby notifying the player of the opening timing at the second specific winning opening 650a. The content can be notified (suggested). Therefore, the effect of the effect using the pseudo main symbol Dmb can be enhanced.

  Next, when the effect state “3” is selected, a pseudo symbol for effect that does not correspond to any of the symbols (special figure 1, special figure 2, ordinary figure) is a main symbol (pseudo main symbol Dmb). In the main reserved symbol, a reserved symbol corresponding to the special figure 2 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a main reserved symbol (see FIG. 16B). The effect state “3” is selected when the gaming state is the time saving state and the small hitting game is executed.

  Next, when the effect state “4” is selected, the third symbol corresponding to the special figure 2 is the main symbol (special symbol 2 main symbol Dmd), and the main symbol symbol is the hold symbol corresponding to the special symbol 2. The symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a main reserved symbol (see FIG. 18A). The effect state “4” is selected when the gaming state is the normal state and the fluctuation of the special figure 2 is executed.

  Next, when the effect state “5” is selected, the third symbol corresponding to the ordinary symbol is the main symbol (ordinary symbol main symbol Dmc), and the reserved symbol corresponding to the special symbol 2 is designated as the primary symbol. It is displayed on the three symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 15B). The effect state “5” is selected when the gaming state is the time reduction state, and during the time reduction state, a normal drawing change in which the lottery and the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a can be performed is executed.

  When the effect state “6” is selected, the third symbol corresponding to the special symbol 1 is the main symbol (special symbol 1 main symbol Dma), and the reserved symbol corresponding to the special symbol 2 is the third symbol as the main symbol. This is displayed on the symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 16B). The effect state “6” is selected when the game state is the time saving state and the normal figure change is started in a state where the remaining change period of the changing special figure 1 is within 2 seconds.

  Next, the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31B is a block diagram showing the contents of the RAM 223. In the RAM 223, a special figure winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, a special figure change start flag 223d, a stop type selection flag 223e, Effect counter 223f, medium-time saving flag 223g, remaining time-saving period storage area 223h, extended house flag 223i, variable time counter 223j, state storage area 223k, effect state storage area 223m, and special 2 hold flag 223n. , A special 2 suspension upper limit flag 223p, a general figure valid flag 223q, a pseudo effect flag 223r, a special 2 fluctuation flag 223s, a general figure prize information storage area 223t, a general figure fluctuation start flag 223u, and a replacement. A flag 223v, a privilege effect execution flag 223w, an end effect execution flag 223x, Other memory area 223z and is provided with at least.

  The special figure winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and each of these areas has a special symbol (the first special symbol and the first symbol). The winning information of the second special symbol) is stored. Based on the information stored in the special map winning information storage area 223a, the result of the lottery of the reserved ball and the like can be determined by the audio lamp control device 113 before the start of the change.

  The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c are variable effects (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), and are mainly controlled. This is a counter that counts up to four times the number of retained balls (the number of standbys) of the variable effect that are reserved in the device 110 for each type of special symbol. The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b corresponds to the reserved ball number of the variable effect based on the lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol 1), and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c is assigned to the second special symbol (special symbol). This corresponds to the number of balls reserved for the variable effect based on the lottery in 2).

  As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110, and stores the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Cannot get the value of. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c. The number of reserved balls is managed for each type of special symbol.

  Specifically, the main control device 110 holds the variable display by entering the first entrance 64 (left first entrance 64a, right first entrance 64b) and the second entrance 640. After the addition or subtraction, when the number of balls is added, or when the fluctuation display in the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed in the main control device 110 and the number of reserved balls is subtracted, Is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e.

  When receiving the reserved ball count command transmitted from the main control device 110, the sound ramp control device 113 determines the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 or the special symbol 2 reserved ball from the reserved ball number command. The value of the number counter 203e is acquired and stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c (see S3207 in FIG. 61). As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the control device 110.

  The values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c are used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to receiving the reserved ball count command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the reserved ball count indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball count counter 223c, A display reserved ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114 so as to notify the display control device 114 of the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c after storage.

  When the display control unit 114 receives the display reserved ball count command, the value of the reserved ball count indicated by the command, that is, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball of the sound lamp control unit 113, is displayed. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the number of reserved balls corresponding to the value of the number counter 223c is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c are synchronized with the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. , Its value is changed. Accordingly, the number of the reserved ball number symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 also changes while synchronizing with the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. Can be done. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of the reserved balls for which the variable display is suspended.

  In the present embodiment, the variable display (the right of the symbol lottery) can be held (up to four) in the same manner as the special symbol described above for the ordinary symbol. When a command set when the value of the counter 203f increases / decreases is received, a normal symbol holding ball number counter (not shown) is provided as a counter for increasing / decreasing the value in accordance with the content of the received command. However, the processing executed in the sound lamp control device 113 and the processing executed in the display control device 114 are different from the above-mentioned special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 223b only in the target command. Therefore, the detailed description is omitted. The value of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter is used, for example, when the number of ordinary symbol retaining balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, about the detailed content in the case of displaying the value of a normal symbol reserved ball number counter on the third symbol display device 81, it is the same as the case of displaying the reserved symbol number of the special symbol on the third symbol display device 81 described above. Therefore, the description is omitted.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the display control device 114 receives each of the reserved ball count commands for display, the display control device 114 receives the command in a predetermined area (subordinate reserved symbol display areas Dn4 to Dn6 (see FIG. 9A)). A display for indicating the number of balls to be held corresponding to the command that has been made is made, and a command for the number of balls to be held to be displayed in the main holding symbol display area is selected based on the received rendering effect status command for display, and the command is held as the main holding symbol. A display for indicating the number of balls is made. With this configuration, a display synchronized with the increase or decrease in the number of reserved balls set by the main control device 110 can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the player should be notified in the current effect state. It is possible to notify the player of the number of the reserved balls of the symbol in an easy-to-understand manner.

  Note that, in the present embodiment, the display control device 114 changes the number of reserved balls of each symbol (special figure 1, special figure 2, general figure) in a predetermined area (subordinate reserved symbol display areas Dn4 to Dn6 (FIG. 9 ( a)), a part of which can be displayed as the main reserved symbol. However, the display method of the reserved symbol is not limited to this. , Special figure 2, ordinary figure), when a command to hold the number of balls is received, a hold symbol (main hold symbol) to be displayed in the main hold symbol display area based on the received display effect state command, A reserved symbol (subordinate reserved symbol) to be displayed in the reserved symbol display area is determined, and based on the determination result, the third symbol display device 81 holds the symbol corresponding to each symbol (special figure 1, special figure 2, ordinary figure). A design may be displayed.

  The special figure variation start flag 223d is turned on when a variation pattern command (for special figure) transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S3304 in FIG. 62), and the variation display flag on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. It is turned off when the setting is made (see S3702 in FIG. 66). When the special figure change start flag 223d is turned on, a special figure display change pattern command is set based on the change pattern extracted from the received change pattern command (see S3706 in FIG. 66).

  The special pattern display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output processing (S3102) of the main processing (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221. Is transmitted to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the variation pattern command for special figure display, and displays the variation display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 in the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for special figure display. As a result, the display control of the variable effect is started.

  In the present embodiment, as the special figure display variation pattern command, a special figure 1 display variation pattern command corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol and a special figure 2 display variation corresponding to the variation of the second special symbol are used. A pattern command can be set. The display control device 114 displays on the third symbol display device 81 a variation pattern corresponding to the type of the received variation pattern command for special figure display (variation pattern command for special figure 1 display, variation pattern command for special figure 2 display). It is configured to be.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 enters a predetermined area (the symbol display areas Dn1 to Dn3 of the second display area Dn (see FIG. 9A)). A display for indicating a symbol sequence (variation pattern) corresponding to the received display variation pattern command is performed, and a symbol (main symbol) to be displayed in the first display area Dm based on the received display effect state command. Is selected from each of the symbols (special figure 1, special figure 2, ordinary figure), and the selected symbol is displayed as the main symbol. With such a configuration, the display synchronized with the variation pattern of each symbol set by the main control device 110 can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the player should be notified in the current effect state. The change in the symbol can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

  In the present embodiment, the display control device 114 displays all the variable displays (symbol rows) of the respective symbols (special figures 1, special figures 2, and general figures) in a predetermined area (secondary display area Dn). Although it is configured to be displayed in the areas Dn1 to Dn3 (see FIG. 9A) and a part thereof can be displayed as a main symbol in the first display area, each symbol (special figure 1, special figure 2, ordinary figure) is displayed. The display method of FIG. 7 is not limited to this, and for example, when a display variation pattern command corresponding to each symbol (special figure 1, special figure 2, ordinary figure) is received, the received display pattern is displayed. A symbol (main symbol) to be displayed in the first display area Dm and a symbol (sub-symbol) to be displayed in the sub-symbol display area are determined based on the production effect state command, and the third symbol display is performed based on the determination result. Floating display (symbol row) corresponding to each symbol (special figure 1, special figure 2, ordinary figure) on the device 81 It may be displayed.

  The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S3204 in FIG. 61), and turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S3708 in FIG. 66). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type is set as it is based on the stop type (big hit type in the case of a big hit) extracted from the received stop type command (see S3710 in FIG. 66).

  The effect counter 223f is a counter used for selecting a variation pattern, selecting various effects, and the like. The effect counter 223f is configured by a 1-byte loop counter that is updated in the range of 0 to 198. Every time the main process (see FIG. 60) is executed, the value is incremented by one and updated. . The effect counter 223f has a plurality of counters (not shown). When determining an effect pattern by referring to a plurality of counter values in one loop process, different counter values are used. Used. Thus, when one effect pattern is set, the same counter value is not used at a plurality of locations, so that the bias of the effect pattern to be set can be suppressed. The effect pattern may be set by using different values calculated after performing different processes on the values obtained from the same counter. Specifically, of the effect patterns, one selection refers to the first place of the obtained value, another selection refers to the tens place of the obtained value, and another selection refers to the first place of the obtained value. The value obtained by multiplying the order of three times by the value obtained by multiplying the tens place by five times may be used to refer to the one place of the obtained value. With this configuration, it is possible to suppress the bias of the set effect pattern while reducing the number of counters used when setting the effect pattern.

  The time reduction flag 223g is a flag for indicating that the current time is being reduced. When the time reduction flag 223g is on, it indicates that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a time reduction state, and when it is off, it indicates that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is not the time reduction state. This time reduction flag 223g is set to ON (3906 in FIG. 68) when it is determined in the effect state setting processing (see S3114 in FIG. 68) that the state shifts to the time reduction state after the end of the big hit, and the variable display setting processing (FIG. 66). In S3113), it is determined that the special figure change start flag 223d is on (S3701 in FIG. 66: Yes), and when it is determined that the mid-hours flag 223g is on (S3704 in FIG. 66: Yes). ) And set to off (S3705 in FIG. 66).

  In this embodiment, since the change of the special symbol (lottery) is executed once (that is, once the number of time savings) is set as the end condition of the time saving state, the time saving medium flag 223g is turned on as described above. When the change of the special symbol is started in the state set to the state, the during-time reduction flag 223g is set to be off, but the sound lamp control device 113 notifies that the gaming state is the time reduction state. If the number of time reductions is set to 100, for example, a time reduction counter capable of determining the number of remaining periods is provided, and each time a special symbol is changed (lottery). The time-saving flag 223g may be set to off when the counter value is updated to a value indicating that the time-saving state ends. Accordingly, even in the case of the pachinko machine 10 in which the number of time savings is set to a plurality of times (two or more times), the sound lamp control device 113 can reliably determine whether or not the current gaming state is the time saving state. Can be.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the change of the special symbol (the first special symbol, the second special symbol) is executed a predetermined number of times (one time), the end condition of the time saving state is satisfied. Other configurations may be used. For example, the number of times of change of the first special symbol and the number of times of change t of the second special symbol can be separately measured, and the end condition of the time saving state is set to the first special symbol. Is changed 10 times (lottery) or until the second special symbol is changed once (lottery), and the time-saving state is ended when any one of the end conditions is satisfied. Alternatively, the time-saving state may be ended under conditions other than the number of times the special symbol changes. In this case, for example, when the lottery result of the special symbol (the first special symbol, the second special symbol) or the ordinary symbol becomes a predetermined lottery result, an end condition for terminating the time saving state is satisfied, or the pachinko machine 10 A configuration may be used in which the end conditions for terminating the time-saving state are satisfied when the various driving members (the electric accessory 640a, the first variable winning device 65, and the second variable winning device 650) provided are driven, The number of times of driving the various driving members described above may be configured to be measurable, and when the number of times of driving becomes a predetermined number (for example, two times), an ending condition for ending the time-saving state may be established. With this configuration, it is possible to diversify the timing at which the time-saving state ends, thereby improving the interest of the game.

  The time saving remaining period storage area 223h is an area for storing the variation time of the first special symbol executed during the time saving state. Here, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured such that the time reduction state ends when a special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) fluctuates once during the time reduction state. That is, the fluctuation time of the special symbol set during the time reduction state is the remaining period during the time reduction state.

  The extended-flight flag 223i is a flag for indicating that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a right-handed gaming state (extended-living state). The gaming state indicates a right-handed gaming state, and when set to off, indicates that the current gaming state is a normal state. The extended-village flag 223i is turned on (see S3903 in FIG. 68) when it is determined in the effect state setting process (see S3114 in FIG. 68) that the jackpot has been started, and the effect is based on the effect state selection table 222b. It is referred to when selecting a state (see S3918 in FIG. 68), and when it is determined that the time saving state does not enter after the end of the jackpot, or when the condition for terminating the time saving state is satisfied in the state where there is no reserved storage of the special figure 2 Is set to off (see S3907 and S3912 in FIG. 68).

  The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment has transitioned from the time reduction state to a state in which the game has a hold state of the special figure 2 in addition to the jackpot state and the time reduction state as a game state (right-handed game state) advantageous to the player. The game characteristics include a normal state (see FIG. 12), and whether the current state is a game state advantageous to the player (a right-handed game state) is determined by the number of retained balls output from the main control device 110. The sound lamp control device 113 is configured to make a determination based on commands and various status commands. This eliminates the need for the main control device 110 to execute a process of determining whether or not the current gaming state is an advantageous state, and has the effect of reducing the processing load on the main control device 110.

  Note that the main control device 110 may perform a process of determining whether or not the current state is a game state advantageous to the player. In this case, a command indicating that a game state (right-handed game state) advantageous to the player is set is output to the voice lamp control device 113, and the fact that the player is in the right-handed game state is notified to the outside. It may be configured to output a signal for reporting (right-handed signal). In this case, in addition to the period in which the gaming state itself such as the big hit state or the time saving state is advantageous to the player, the gaming state is not an advantageous gaming state (although it is a normal state) but satisfies a predetermined condition. When it is determined that the game mode shifts to the jackpot state, the system is configured to continuously notify the outside that the player is in the right-handed game state, thereby allowing the player to continuously execute the right-handed game. This makes it possible to prevent a troublesome game from being played.

  The fluctuation time counter 223j is a counter for measuring the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 during the time reduction state, and calculates the remaining time of the time reduction state based on the value of the measured counter. In the counter update process (see S3311 in FIG. 70), the fluctuation time counter 223j determines that the fluctuation of the special figure 1 has started during the time reduction (during the time reduction state) (S4103 in FIG. 70: Yes). After the value of the counter is set to “1”, every time the counter updating process (see S3311 in FIG. 70) is executed, “1” is added until the value of the counter becomes “150,000” (S4108 in FIG. 70). When the value of the counter becomes “150,000” (S4107 in FIG. 70: Yes), the value of the counter is set to “0” (S4109). Then, based on the value of the fluctuation time counter 223j, a remaining time reduction period (remaining period in the time reduction state) is calculated (S4105 in FIG. 70).

  The status storage area 223k is a storage area for temporarily storing the status when various status commands output from the main control device 110 are received, and in the command determination process (see S3112 in FIG. 61). When a status command is received (S3215 in FIG. 61: Yes), status information based on the received status command is stored (S3216 in FIG. 61). A display status command is set based on the status information stored in the status storage area 223k, and various images (background images and demonstration images) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are set by the main control device 110. Images corresponding to the various states are displayed.

  In the display control device 114, the effect state storage area 223m displays the display mode of each symbol (special figure 1, special figure 2, ordinary figure) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and each reserved symbol (special figure 1 reserved). This is an area for storing an effect state used for setting an effect state command for display, which is referred to when determining the display mode of the symbol, the special figure 2 reserved symbol, and the ordinary symbol reserved symbol. This effect state includes the setting statuses of various flags (the in-house flag 223i, the ordinary figure valid flag 223q, the pseudo effect flag 223r, and the special figure 2 change flag 223s) set in various processes of the audio lamp control device 113. Based on the symbol fluctuation stop timing, it is selected in the effect state setting process (S3114 in FIG. 68) (see S3918 in FIG. 68), and the selected effect state is stored in the effect state storage area 223m. The effect state storage area 223m is configured to store (store) the selected effect state several times in the past. This makes it possible to compare and determine the effect state before the transition and the effect state after the transition. With this configuration, it is possible to determine a transfer pattern that cannot be transferred when a normal game is being played, and determine whether or not there is an illegal game.

  In addition, when the effect state transitions in a predetermined transition pattern a plurality of times (for example, when the transition from the effect state 4 to the effect state 5 is repeated five or more times without going through the effect states 1 and 2). (For example, Dalian Zhuang production state) can be provided, and the production effect can be enhanced. In the case where the Dalian Zhuang production state is set, it is preferable to display a privilege image that the player cannot normally see in the first display area Dm without displaying the main symbol on the third symbol display device 81. .

  The special 2 hold flag 223n is a flag for indicating that there is a hold storage of the special map 2 (special 2) during the time saving state. When the special 2 hold flag 223n is set to ON, the special 2 hold flag 223n is turned on. This indicates that the hold storage (holding symbol) of FIG. 2 exists, and that it is set to OFF indicates that the hold memory (holding symbol) of the special figure 2 does not exist. The special 2 reserved flag 223n is set to ON when the special 2 reserved ball count is updated to 1 in the reserved ball count related processing (see S3208 in FIG. 63) (see S3403 in FIG. 63). The special 2 reserve flag 223n is referred to when it is determined in the effect state setting process (see S3114 in FIG. 68) that the time reduction state has ended (see S3911 in FIG. 68), and the number of special 2 reserve balls becomes 0. Set to off if

  The special 2 reserved upper limit flag 223p is a flag for indicating that the reserved storage of the special figure 2 (special 2) has reached the upper limit (four) in the time saving state. By being set to ON, it indicates that the reserved storage number of the special map 2 (special 2) reaches the upper limit (four) during the time saving state, and the special 2 reserved upper limit flag 223p is set to off, This indicates that the number of reserved storages in the special map 2 (special 2) is not the upper limit (four).

  The special 2 reserved upper limit flag 223p is set to ON when the special 2 reserved ball count is updated to the upper limit in the reserved ball count related processing (see S3208 in FIG. 63) (S3406 in FIG. 63: Yes) ( This is referred to in the specific effect setting process (see S3407 in FIG. 63) and the specific effect setting process (see S3315 in FIG. 69), and is turned off when the number of special 2 reserved balls is no longer the upper limit.

  The general figure valid flag 223q is a flag for indicating a general figure variation (normal symbol variation) in which the operation of the electric accessory 640a executed at the time of winning is a motion pattern (long opening) advantageous to the player, When the public figure valid flag 223q is set to ON, it indicates that the electric accessory 640a is in a normal figure variation at a timing when the long open can be performed, and when the electric accessory 640a is set to OFF, the electric accessory 640a is short-circuited. This indicates that it is a normal fluctuation at the timing of opening.

  The general figure valid flag 223q is set to ON when it is determined in the general figure change display setting process (see S3712 in FIG. 67) that both the start of change and the end of change are in the time reduction state (FIG. 67). If it is determined that the start of the change is not in the time reduction state, or if it is determined that the end of the change is not in the time reduction state, it is set to OFF (S3809 in FIG. 67). reference). The setting status of the ordinary figure valid flag 223q is referred to when selecting an effect state based on the effect state selection table 222b (see S3918 in FIG. 68).

  The pseudo effect flag 223r is a flag for indicating that the special figure 1 small hit has been executed when the game state is the normal state, and is set to ON to set the special figure 1 small hit in the normal state. Is executed. By setting the pseudo effect flag 223r to ON, an effect display in which the pseudo symbol is the main symbol (pseudo main symbol) is executed during the small hit game (see FIG. 22). The pseudo effect flag 223r is set to ON when the small hit win of the special figure 1 occurs in the normal state by the effect state setting process (see S3114 in FIG. 68) (see S3915 in FIG. 68), and the small hit is set. Is set to off when is completed (S3917 in FIG. 68). The setting state of the pseudo effect flag 223r is referred to when selecting an effect state based on the effect state selection table 222b (see S3918 in FIG. 68).

  The special 2 change flag 223 s is a flag for indicating that the change of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) has started, and when set to ON, the second special symbol (special symbol 2) This indicates that the fluctuation has started. The special variation flag 223s is set to ON in the variation pattern related processing (see S3202 in FIG. 62) when the received variation pattern command is the variation pattern command for special figure 2 (S3302 in FIG. 62). Then, when the variation pattern command for special figure 1 is received, it is set to off. The setting status of the special 2 change flag 223s is referred to when selecting an effect state based on the effect state selection table 222b (see S3918 in FIG. 68).

  Here, in the present embodiment, when the special 2 fluctuation flag 223s is set to ON, that is, when the fluctuation (lottery) of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed, the fluctuation result (lottery result) ) Is configured so that a big hit or a small hit is given. Further, in the small hit game executed based on the fluctuation (lottery) of the second special symbol (special figure 2), the ball is in the specific area (V). It is configured to be a small hit game that easily passes through the winning switch 650e3). That is, the variation (lottery) of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is configured to be advantageous to the player only by being executed. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment configured as described above, while the special 2 change flag 223s is set to ON (that is, while the second special symbol is changing), the second special symbol is not changed. It is variably displayed as a main symbol (a special symbol 2 main symbol). Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the variable display of the second special symbol to which a state advantageous to the player is given is overlooked.

  The ordinary figure winning information storage area 223t is an area for storing winning information included in the winning information command when the winning information command of the ordinary symbol is received. Note that the detailed configuration is the same as the special figure prize information storage area 223a described above, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  The ordinary symbol variation start flag 223u is a flag indicating that the ordinary symbol has been varied, and when set to ON, indicates that the ordinary symbol is varying. This general-purpose variation start flag 223u determines that the received variation pattern command is not a special-purpose variation pattern command (is a general-purpose variation pattern command) in the variation pattern-related processing (see S3202 of FIG. 62). In this case, it is set to ON (see S3306 in FIG. 62), and when it is determined that it is set to ON in the ordinary figure fluctuation display setting process (see S3712 in FIG. 67) (S3801 in FIG. 67: Yes), It is set to off (see S3802 in FIG. 67).

  The replacement flag 223v is a flag indicating that the end timing of the time reduction state (the end timing of the special figure 1 fluctuation started to change in the time reduction state) and the end timing of the normal figure fluctuation satisfy predetermined conditions. When set to ON, it indicates that the end timing of the normal figure fluctuation is within 2 seconds of the end timing of the time saving state. By setting the replacement flag 223v to ON, the effect state “6” is selected as the effect state.

  The privilege effect execution flag 223w is a flag for indicating that the privilege effect is executed, and when set to ON, indicates that the privilege effect is executed. While the privilege effect execution flag 223w is set to ON, a privilege effect (see FIG. 21) that cannot be viewed normally is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. This privilege effect execution flag 223w determines that the special 2 suspension upper limit flag 223p is set to ON in the specific effect setting process (see S3315 in FIG. 69) (see S4002 in FIG. 69), and displays the privilege effect command for display. Is set to ON (see S4004 in FIG. 69), and is set to ON (S4005 in FIG. 69). In the effect state setting process (see S3114 in FIG. 68), the in-concrete flag 223i is set to OFF (FIG. 69). 68 (see S3907), and is set to off (see S3908 in FIG. 68). In other words, even if the privilege effect execution flag 223w is set to ON at least once in the state where the extended-village flag 223i is set to ON (during the extended-villa mode) (the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 becomes the upper limit). If it has reached), the bonus effect is continuously executed until the extended-villa mode ends.

  With this configuration, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the privilege effect ends immediately even when the privilege effect is executed. That is, after the number of reserved balls in Toku-zu 2 reaches the upper limit, at least all of the number of reserved balls in Toku-zu 2 are consumed, and thereafter, the privilege production is performed until the change of Toku-zu 1 in the time-saving state ends. Is executed, the bonus effect can be continuously displayed.

  In addition, with this configuration, it is possible to display on the third symbol display device 81 over a long period that the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 has reached the upper limit, and thus to the surrounding players. You can appeal and get satisfaction. Furthermore, in order to obtain the satisfaction, it is possible to make the player play the game eagerly.

  In the present embodiment, a specific privilege effect is executed under the condition that the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 reaches the upper limit even once, but the present invention is not limited to this. Means may be provided for measuring the number of times that the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 reaches the upper limit, and different privilege effects may be executed based on the measurement result by the means. This allows the player to play the game more ambitiously.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the privilege effect execution flag 223w is set to ON, the setting is made so that the privilege effect is executed until the extended holiday mode ends, but the present invention is not limited to this. A period until all reserved balls in the special figure 2 are consumed may be set as a period in which the privilege effect is executed. Thereby, during the extended holiday mode, the effect can be switched every time the special figure 1 change is executed during the time saving state, and the game is enthusiastically performed to continue the extended holiday mode with a new feeling. Can be.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the configuration is such that the privilege effect is automatically executed when the condition for executing the privilege effect is satisfied. However, other configurations may be used. By operating the operation means (frame button 22) provided on the machine 10, the normal effect and the privilege effect may be switched and executed. Thereby, a desired effect can be provided to the player.

  In the present embodiment, the case where the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 reaches the upper limit is set as the condition for executing the privilege effect, but other conditions may be set as the condition for executing the privilege effect. For example, in addition to the case where the number of reserved balls of the special figure 2 reaches the upper limit, the condition may be set on condition that the changing special figure 1 has won a win (big hit, small hit). In this way, if the lottery result of the changing special figure 1 is a big hit with the number of reserved balls of the special figure 2 reaching the upper limit, substantially five times (one big hit based on the special figure 1, A jackpot game (4 jackpots based on FIG. 2) is provided, so that the game state is more advantageous to the player. By executing the special effect only when such a condition is satisfied, the value of the special effect can be enhanced, and a game can be motivated to watch the special effect.

  In this case, if the number of reserved balls in Toku-zu 2 becomes three (semi-upper limit less than the upper-limit number), based on the lottery result in Toku-zu 1, whether or not a privilege effect is executed (Instruction indicating execution of a privilege effect) may be performed to inform (indicate) the player to the user. Thus, the player can be motivated to play the game while expecting the lottery result of the special map 1 and the provision of the bonus effect. In addition, when the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 reaches the upper limit number (four), the bonus effect is configured to be executed. At the time when the number of reserved balls in Toku-zu 2 reaches the upper limit (at the time when the execution condition of the privilege effect is satisfied), it is changed based on the remaining period of the time-saving state (the remaining fluctuation time of the changing Toku-zu 1). You may. Even in the case of such a configuration, the player can be motivated to play the game.

  The end effect execution flag 223x is a flag for indicating that an end effect (see FIGS. 19B to 20B) for executing the end of the extended holiday mode is to be executed, and is ON. Is set to indicate that the end effect is being executed. The end effect execution flag 223x is turned on in the specific effect setting process (see S3315 in FIG. 69) in a state where the special 2 suspension flag 223n is set to off and the time reduction remaining period becomes 10 seconds. This is set (see S4010 in FIG. 69), and is referred to when the special 2 suspension flag 223n is set to ON in the reserved ball count related processing (see S3208 in FIG. 63) (see S3404 in FIG. 63). Here, in a state where the end effect execution flag 223x is set to ON and the second suspension flag 223n is set to ON, it is assumed that the current time saving state ends (the fluctuation of the special figure 1 ends). Also, the variation (lottery) of the special map 2 is started, and the extended-villa mode is continued. Therefore, a victory command for display is set for the end effect that is being executed, and an effect indicating resumption from the end effect is executed. Thereby, even after the end effect is executed, the player can be expected to continue the extended play mode, and can play the game eagerly until the end.

  Then, in the effect state setting process (see S3114 in FIG. 68), the in-concrete flag 223i is set to off after being set to off (see S3909 in FIG. 68). Note that the end effect performed in the present embodiment may be configured to be executed even when the special figure 2 hold flag 223n is set to ON. In this case, the extended-villa mode is always continued. Therefore, the apparent continuation mode continuation probability in the end effect can be increased. Further, when a plurality of special figure 2 reservations are acquired during the period in which the end effect is being executed, the corresponding effect may be executed.

  The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-described data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. , A command storage area is provided.

  This command storage area is an area in which various commands output from the main control device 110 to the sound ramp control device 113 are temporarily stored until processing for the command is executed. Specifically, it is constituted by a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 61) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process performs The command is analyzed, and processing according to the command is performed.

  Next, an electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the audio lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241. The third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model having a different special lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot and a different number of prize balls paid out in one special symbol jackpot. Since there are models having exactly the same configuration, the display control device 114 is made a common component to reduce the cost.

  Hereinafter, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches an instruction code stored at an address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to perform a system reset from the power supply 115 immediately after power-on (including power recovery from a power failure; the same applies to the following). When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231 a Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. Further, when the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, a control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided in a dedicated program ROM like a conventional gaming machine. Instead, the character data is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing data of an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As will be described in detail later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a that can be increased in capacity with a small area. Thus, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If a control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure rate due to the increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the reading speed is reduced particularly when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data arranged continuously on a plurality of pages, high-speed reading of data on the second and subsequent pages is possible, but an address is specified for reading data of the first page. It takes a long time from when the data is output. In addition, when data that is not continuous is read, a long time is required every time the data is read. As described above, since the reading speed of the NAND flash memory is low, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. However, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporarily storing various data. And store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), as will be described later, and reads and writes data at a high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed by the MPU 231 and data of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, and transfers the control program stored in a second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240. The image controller 237 stores image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237, and the like. The data is transferred to the normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a nonvolatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storing, and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in the present pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

  In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and further can store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. As described above, the control program and the fixed value data are provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. Since the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on an address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like is read. And outputs it to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) occur during data writing, and a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and reads and writes the data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding a defective data block. Performs the data address translation of

  Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, the error is corrected based on the erroneous data. Thus, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

  Further, the bad data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b, and access to the bad data block is avoided, so that the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 use different bad data for each NAND flash memory 234a. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even when the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complexity of controlling access to the character ROM 234.

  The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address allocated to the character ROM 234 is specified from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b operates for one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the specified address. Is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or the NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. I do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction process, and outputs data corresponding to the specified address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and one bank of data of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. Accordingly, the ROM controller 234b outputs data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or specifies the data from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is stored in the other bank. The process of reading from the bank and outputting it to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, the response in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has a much smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND flash memory 234a. ). In the NOR ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the programs not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, the MPU 231 first stores the program after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. After the system reset is released, the MPU 231 executes the boot program first. Thus, the display control device 114 can be set to a state in which various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) of the boot program, and should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) of instructions) are stored from the instructions. The number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be smaller than the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to “0000H” by hardware and specifies the address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address “0000H” is specified on the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231.

  When fetching the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds one to the instruction pointer 231a, and sends the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is the address indicating the program stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 selects from among the programs previously set from the NOR-type ROM 234d to the buffer RAM 234c. , And reads the instruction code at the corresponding address from the buffer RAM 234c and outputs it to the MPU 231.

  Here, in the present embodiment, not all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, but a predetermined number of instructions of the boot program that are to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are read from the NOR ROM 234d. Is stored for the following reason. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a requires a long time from the address designation to the data output in reading the first page of data, which is unique to the NAND flash memory. There's a problem.

  When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a great amount of time is required from the reading thereof to the setting to the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address “0000H” and then executes the instruction corresponding to the address “0000H”. Spend a lot of time waiting to receive the code. Therefore, since the time required to start up the MPU 231 becomes longer, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR ROM is a memory from which data can be read at a high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. When the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. And the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after specifying the address “0000H”, and can start the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  Now, the boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., described later) used in the control program is stored in a program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). 233a and the data table storage area 233b. The MPU 231 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released, and sets the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1. A predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c.

  Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the setting, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a in accordance with the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is used. The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, it is not necessary to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, so that the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

  When the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 stores the instruction pointer 231a in the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. Thus, after the system reset is released, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a moves to the first predetermined position in the program storage area 233a. The address is set.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetches the instruction, but reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes are executed. As will be described later, the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, so that a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at a high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot programs stored in the first program storage area 234d1 include the remaining boot programs in the control programs transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. The program is programmed so as to include the instruction pointer 231a with the first address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Thereby, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Execute the remaining boot program included in the control program.

  In the remaining boot programs, all of the remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table described later) used in the control programs are stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, the initialization processing (see S5002 in FIG. 71) executed after the end of the boot processing by the boot program (see S5001 in FIG. 71) stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed by the MPU 231 to the end, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

  Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can perform various controls by reading the control program from the work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high read speed. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, without storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored, and for the remaining boot programs, Even when the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR-type ROM 234d having a very small capacity. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortened time. Can be.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 36) transmitted from the MPU 231 to be described later, and selects one of a first frame buffer 236b and a second frame buffer 236c described later. The image drawn in the buffer is expanded, and the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs this one-frame image drawing process and one-frame image display process for one frame of image display time on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment). In parallel.

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the rendering process of the image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects the V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 73B) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing processing of the image for the next one frame, and executes the processing of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing processing and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction of the next image at a stage where the image drawing processing or the display processing is not completed, so that the image controller 237 starts drawing a new image during drawing of the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in the frame buffer storing the image information being displayed according to a new drawing instruction.

  The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 based on a transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The drawing of an image is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, image data necessary for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

  Here, while the NAND flash memory facilitates increasing the capacity of the ROM, the reading speed is slower than other ROMs (such as a mask ROM and an EEPROM). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to be. Then, as described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thereby, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data to be used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed when drawing an image. The time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately, and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Particularly, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114 are resident. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  When drawing an image using nonresident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 needs to perform drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image. However, at the time of drawing an image, the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used. It is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of, and the time required for reading out the image data can be omitted. Therefore, it is possible to immediately draw the image and display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  In addition, since the image data is also stored in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data reside in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data, which is performed by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction and the transfer data information of the drawing list, includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236), and the beginning of the transfer destination (the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236) Contains the address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads one block of data from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a in accordance with the various information of the transfer instruction, and temporarily stores the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used. Is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction to the storage source end address is transferred.

  As a result, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing processing. In addition, it is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being delayed.

  Further, since the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine a period that is not used for display processing on the device 81, and to simplify the processing.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is maintained without being overwritten during power-on. The power-on main image area 235a, the back image area 235c, and the character design area 235e, an error message image area 235f, and at least a power-on fluctuation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d.

  The power-on main image area 235a stores a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from when the power is turned on to when all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. An area for storing corresponding data. In addition, the power-on fluctuation image area 235b indicates that the game is started by the player while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance are provided. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on fluctuation image that displays a result of a lottery performed in the main control device 110 by a fluctuation effect when a ball entering the mouth 640 is detected.

  The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S5003 and S5004 in FIG. 71).

  Here, the power-on fluctuation image will be described. The display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b immediately after the power is turned on. Then, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the transfer of the remaining image data is being performed, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image in the third symbol display device. 81 is displayed.

  At this time, when a display variation pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 is received based on a variation pattern command from the main control device 110, which is a variation start instruction command, the display control device 114 turns on the power-on main image. On the display screen of, the power-on fluctuation image of the “○” symbol at the lower right position toward the screen and the power-on fluctuation image of the “X” symbol at the same position as the “○” symbol are displayed during the fluctuation period. It is displayed alternately and repeatedly. Then, based on the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110, the display fluctuation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 are used for the lottery performed by the main control device 110. Judging the result, if it is "special symbol jackpot", display "○" symbol for a fixed period after stopping the variable effect, and if "missing special symbol", display "x" symbol after stopping the variable effect. Display for a certain period.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a to the image controller 237 until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs the main image to be drawn at power-on. Thus, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person in charge of the hall can check the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display controller 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. In addition, the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the remaining images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are displayed. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the user must wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying that the operation has not stopped. Can be.

  Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 can be started without any problem by turning on the power. Can be immediately confirmed, and the use of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed as the character ROM 234 can prevent the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

  In addition, the player starts the game while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the time of power-on, and the first entrance 64 (the left first entrance 64a, the right first entrance). 64b) or when a ball is detected to enter the second ball entrance 640, the power-on fluctuation image is used by using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. Is drawn, and the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to alternately display the power-on fluctuation image on the third symbol display device 81. Thus, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image. Therefore, even when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player can reliably confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple variable effect.

  Also, at the stage when the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. When a ball is detected in the first entrance 64 while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variable effect is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Can be.

  Returning to FIG. 33, the description will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The back image is an image displayed on the back side of the main symbol (third symbol), and displays, for example, a city, the sea, the sky, and the like. In addition, a right-handed navigation image (see FIG. 15A) and the like are also stored in the back image area 235c as a back image.

  The third symbol area 235d is an area where the third symbol used in the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is resident. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned ten types of main symbols with numbers “0” to “9”, which are the third symbols, are resident. Thus, when performing a fluctuation effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read out image data from the character ROM 234 each time. A fluctuating effect can be started quickly. Therefore, after the ball enters the first entrance 64, the variable effect starts immediately on the third symbol display device 81, although the variable effect has been started on the first symbol display device 37. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state that is not performed.

  Further, in the third symbol area 235d, as a main symbol without numbers “0” to “9”, a main symbol including a rear symbol such as a wooden box, or a character such as a rear symbol such as a plane, a furoshiki, a helmet, or the like. The image data corresponding to the main symbol consisting of the attached symbol imitating the symbol is also resident. These image data are used for a demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has elapsed after one variable effect stopped. Can be Thus, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbols without numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

  The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these characters is resident in the character design area 235e, so that display control is performed. When changing the character design based on the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but instead stores the corresponding image data in the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. By reading out the resident image data, the image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used as the character ROM 234, the character pattern can be changed immediately.

  The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of the vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Also, when the occurrence of another error is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. The display control device 114 is configured to, when receiving the error command, display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error, from the viewpoint of preventing the player from cheating and protecting the player from the error. In the present pachinko machine 10, since image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in the error message image area 235f in advance, the display control device 114 determines the error message in the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data previously resident in the image area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. Accordingly, since it is not necessary to sequentially read image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used as the character ROM 234, the error message corresponding to the received error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated at any time, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

  The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

  The MPU 231 transfers, from the character ROM 234, image data not required to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 to image data required for subsequent image rendering, from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236. , And instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data specified by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including the transfer data information in a later-described drawing list in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image. Thus, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, and thus can reduce the processing load.

  The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn in accordance with an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame for the frame buffer. While the image is being developed, while the image is being developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame that has been previously developed is read out from the other frame buffer, and is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes a process of displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffers, the image controller 237 simultaneously develops the image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer while developing the image. The image of one frame that has been developed first is read from the other frame buffer, and the third symbol display device 81 can display the read image of one frame.

  The frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are different from each other. Every 20 milliseconds to be completed, the MPU 231 alternately specifies one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are performed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 ms after the completion of the drawing process of the image of one frame, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. You.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. You. Thereafter, a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed every 20 milliseconds by one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image of one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs. Be composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, and stored image data determination. It has at least a flag 233i, a drawing target buffer flag 233j, and an effect state storage area 233k.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads out the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. When all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 , Diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

  The data table storage area 233b stores a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and a display data table. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing.

  These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in a second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to a boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from character ROM 234 to work RAM 233, and stored in data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114. Using 81, diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

  Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a fluctuation effect, an opening effect A display data table corresponding to a round effect, an ending effect, and a demo effect is prepared.

  The fluctuation effect is an effect started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display fluctuation pattern command is received from the audio lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, a display stop type command indicating the variation effect stop type is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is off, the stop symbol indicating the deviation is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the variation effect is the jackpot A, the jackpot B In any case, the stop symbols indicating the respective jackpots are finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbols in the variable effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

  The opening effect is for notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 will be shifted to the special game state from now on and the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a which are normally closed will be opened. The round effect is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started. The ending effect is an effect for notifying the player that the end of the special game state (big hit state) has been notified to the player.

  As described above, the demonstration effect is an effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has elapsed after the stop of one variable effect. The third symbol consisting of the main symbol without numbers "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person related to the hall can recognize that the game is not performed in the pachinko machine 10.

  The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table corresponding to each of the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect. In addition, if there are 32 variation effect patterns to be set, 32 tables are prepared for one variation effect pattern, that is, a total of 32 tables, as the variation display data table which is a display data table for the variation effect.

  Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of the variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is defined as one unit. The content (drawing content) of an image for one frame is defined in detail.

  In the drawing content, the type of the sprite is defined for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency, and the like are determined according to the type of the sprite. Drawing information, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, for drawing a sprite on the third symbol display device 81 is defined.

  The sprite type is information for specifying a sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 at which the sprite is to be displayed. The enlargement factor is information for specifying an enlargement factor for a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement factor. If the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is enlarged and displayed in a size larger than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucent value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite is displayed. The α blending information is information for specifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing a superimposition process with another sprite. The color information is information for specifying a color tone of a sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the designated sprite when drawing the designated sprite.

  In the variable display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), And one light in the image are defined as one frame of rendering content defined corresponding to each address. For each sprite, drawing information for each sprite such as an effect that expresses insertion of characters and characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters is defined. Note that one or more pieces of information on effects and characters are defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are set with respect to the passage of time. Since it is constant, only the rear type, which is information for specifying the type of the rear image, is specified in the variable display data table. This back type indicates whether to display any of the back surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage (one of the “city stage”, “empty stage”, and “island stage”) selected by the player, or Information for specifying whether to display a rear image different from C is described. In addition, when specifying to display a rear image different from the rear surfaces A to C, the rear type also includes information for specifying which rear image is to be displayed.

  If it is specified by this back type that any of the backs A to C is to be displayed, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage designated by the player among the backs A to C as a drawing target. In addition, the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame is specified as time passes. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back surfaces A to C, the back image to be displayed is specified based on the back type.

  Note that, in the present embodiment, a case will be described in which only the back type is defined as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table. Instead, the back type and the range of the back image corresponding to the back type are specified. May be defined as position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. The position information may be, for example, information indicating an elapsed time from when the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time from when the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time since drawing of an image based on the display data table (or display on the third symbol display device 81) is started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started based on the display database. The identification is performed based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time from the start of drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or the display of the third symbol display device 81).

  Further, the position information includes information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and drawing of an image based on the display data table according to the rear type (or the third symbol display device 81). May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of the display, or the type information of the position information (for example, the range of the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back type and the position information. This is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started. May be defined as the drawing content of the rear image. In addition, the position information may not be the information indicating the elapsed time, but may be the information indicating the address where the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

  The third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...) Describes symbol type offset information as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variable effect is the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before and the variable effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information until a predetermined time elapses from the start of the fluctuation, offset information from the stop symbol of the immediately preceding variation effect is described. Thereby, the variable effect is started from the stop symbol in the preceding variable effect.

  On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the fluctuation, an offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113. Provide information. Thus, the variable effect can be stopped at the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since each 3rd symbol is given a unique number, a variation symbol in the immediately preceding variation effect and a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110 are displayed in the 3rd symbol. , And the offset information is represented by the difference between the numbers attached to the respective third symbols, whereby the third symbol to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information.

  Also, in the symbol offset information, the predetermined time in which the offset information of the immediately preceding variable effect stopped symbol is switched to the offset information of the variable effect stopped symbol performed this time, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed. It is set to be the time displayed. While the third symbol is being displayed at a high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player, and during that time, the stop effect of the variable effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed this time, even if the continuity of the numeral of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is not made aware of the interruption of the continuity of the numeral. be able to.

  “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H” which is the start address of the display data table, and the data table is stored in the last address (“02F0H” in the example of FIG. 30) of the display data table. "End" information indicating the end of the process is described. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the rendering mode to be defined in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display fluctuation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and selects the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, every time the rendering processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one, and the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is used to add The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 36) described later is created. By transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is issued. Thus, the contents of the drawing are specified in the order specified in the display data table in accordance with the update of the pointer 233f, and the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Thus, in the present pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and the like. The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d, instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231. .

  Here, when a program executed by the MPU 231 is started each time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, as in a conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. A large load is placed on the processing of starting and executing a complicated and enormous program, which may limit the processing capability of the display control device 114 and limit the diversification of controllable effect images. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Also, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each of the rendering modes, a display data table buffer corresponding to the rendering mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason why it can be created is that in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the winning start. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display content changes on the spot based on the user's operation, so that the display content cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the presentation mode. As described above, the display data table is prepared corresponding to each rendering mode, the display data table buffer is set according to the rendering mode to be displayed, and the drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This configuration can be realized for the first time based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the winning start.

  Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect. As described above, among the sprite image data used in the effect specified in the display data table, Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, and the transfer timing thereof are specified.

  If all the image data of the sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Thus, an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address specified in the display data table, and is transfer data information of image data of a sprite to be transferred at a time indicated by the address (hereinafter, referred to as “transfer target image data”). (Addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 35 correspond). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to that address. Null data is defined (address “0002H” in FIG. 35 corresponds).

  As the transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 where the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) Is included.

  Note that, as in the display data table, “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in the start address “0000H” of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 35, “02F0H”) describes “End” information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table. Is described.

  When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio ramp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, every time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 36) described later is created. At the same time, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite at which transfer is to be started at that time is obtained, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 35, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified at the address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. The drawing list is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is “0002H”, since null data is defined at the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and the transfer data table is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the processing to be performed.

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

  Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While rendering the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 displays the display data in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110 or the like. When the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the image data of the sprite used in the display data table is The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  In the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thereby, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and corresponds to an address specified in the display data table, and transfers transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address. Since the data information is defined, before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236. As described above, the transfer start timing can be instructed, so that even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, various effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

  The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display a power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) on the third symbol display device 81. The simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. Is set to ON in the main processing (see FIG. 71) executed by the MPU 231 (see S5005 in FIG. 71). Then, at the stage when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, the third symbol display device 81 displays an image other than the power-on image. It is set to off (see S6605 in FIG. 82 (b)).

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S5301 in FIG. 73B), and When the image display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination process (see S5308 in FIG. 73B) and the simple display setting process (see FIG. 73B) so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 73 (b) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 and the like. Processing (see FIGS. 74 to 78) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 79 to 81) are executed.

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 during the V interrupt process (see S6501 in FIG. 82A), and the simple image display flag 233c is on. Executes resident image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 82 (b)) for transferring resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, a normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 83) for transferring image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. This is a buffer for The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. The selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by one, and, based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, increments the image controller 237 for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 36) described below, which describes the contents of the image drawing instruction for, is generated. Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d while adding the pointer 233f to the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f. A drawing list (see FIG. 36) described below that describes the contents of the drawing instruction is generated. Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The transfer data table buffer 233e stores a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the audio ramp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Is a buffer for storing. When storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b, and transfers the selected transfer data table. The data is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all the image data of the sprite used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f to the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while defining the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f. If this is the case (that is, if no Null data is described), the transfer data information is stored in a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 36) that describes the contents of an image drawing instruction to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Accordingly, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, it is necessary to draw a predetermined sprite in accordance with the display data table. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While rendering the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233f is an address at which the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data is to be acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in each of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. Is to be specified. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 at the same time that the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the rendering process of the image for one frame is completed from the image controller 237 (FIG. 73 (b) ), The pointer update process (see S6205 in FIG. 81) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  Each time such an update of the pointer 233f is performed, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, (See FIG. 36), transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to start transfer at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data is obtained. Add the information to the created drawing list.

  Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various effects can be displayed.

  Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite based on the transfer data table is displayed before the drawing of a predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used in the drawing of the image can be always stored in the image storage area 236a. Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While rendering the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g stores an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. 237 is an area for storing a drawing list instructed by 237.

  Here, the drawing list will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 36 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame. As shown in FIG. 36, the back image used for the one-frame image and the third symbol (the symbol 1, ..., effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., reserved ball number design 1, reserved ball number design 2, ..., error) For each sprite such as a pattern, detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (displayed object) is stored. The image controller 237 obtains image data of the sprite from a memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to a scaling process according to a magnification ratio, a rotation process according to a rotation angle, and a translucent process according to a translucent value. Subject to alpha blending information, perform synthesis processing with other sprites, perform color tone correction processing according to color information, and perform filtering processing according to the method specified by the information according to filter specification information. Then, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the rendered image is developed by the image controller 237 in either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the rendering target buffer flag 233j.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 stores the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, Based on an image and a warning image notifying that an error has occurred, detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing one frame of image is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

  Here, in the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and the address of the data of the sprite (display object) correspond to the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the content of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored, or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 responds to the sprite type. Thus, the type and address of the storage RAM in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  In addition, the MPU 231 defines other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite in the display data table. Copy the information as it is.

  Also, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged from the rearmost side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image of one frame, and obtains detailed drawing information for each sprite. (Detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, first, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described, and then, the third design (design 1, design 2,...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2,. Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, reserved ball number symbol 2,..., Error symbol).

  The image controller 237 executes the drawing processing of each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged at the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged at the frontmost side.

  Further, when the transfer data information is described in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transmits the transfer data information (the character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a where the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list includes the transfer data information, the image controller 237 reads the image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The time counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating an effect time of an effect to be displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. The time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment).

  Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the rendering process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 (FIG. 73 (b) Each time the display setting process of ()) is executed, the time counter 233h is decremented by one (see S6207 of FIG. 79). As a result, when the value of the time counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the operation in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processings to be performed.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i indicates that, for all sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the image data corresponding to that sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. This is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is any.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by an initialization process (see S5002 in FIG. 71) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to “OFF” indicating that the storage states for all sprites are not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 83) executed by the MPU 231. Will be In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to “ON” indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of the other sprite to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as the one sprite is always in an unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to the other sprite is set to “off”.

  The MPU 231 refers to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i when transferring image data of a sprite for which image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and determines the transfer target sprite. It is determined whether or not the image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S6717 in FIG. 83). If the storage state corresponding to the transfer target sprite is "OFF" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S6718 in FIG. 83). The image controller 237 causes the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “ON”, since the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, the transfer processing of the image data is stopped. As a result, unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer (hereinafter, referred to as a “drawing target buffer”) that develops an image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c). If the rendering target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the rendering target buffer, and if it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is designated. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S6802 in FIG. 84).

  Thus, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the rendered image information which has already been developed from a frame buffer different from the rendering target buffer in parallel with the rendering process, and sends the read image information to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated at the same time that the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, setting the value to “1” when the value is “0” and setting it to “0” when the value is “1”. Done by Accordingly, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted. The transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. Each time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 73 (b)) is executed, it is performed (see S6802 of FIG. 84).

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are performed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 ms after the completion of the drawing process of the image of one frame, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. You.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. You. Thereafter, a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed every 20 milliseconds by one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image of one frame.

  The effect state storage area 233k is an area for storing effect state information included in the display effect state command output from the audio lamp control device 113. The effect state information stored in the effect state storage area 233k is referred to when determining the display content to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Note that the present embodiment has the variation pattern data corresponding to each effect state information, and is configured such that different variation patterns are determined even when the same variation pattern command for display is received. .

<Control process of main controller in first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process started upon power-on, a main process executed after the start-up process, and a timer started periodically (at an interval of 2 ms in the present embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process started by input of a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, first, a timer interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process will be described, and then a start process will be described. And the main processing will be described.

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of the various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined to store the detection information (winning detection information).

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by one, and is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches a maximum value (299 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in a corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by one, and when the counter value reaches a maximum value (239 in this embodiment), the value is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is updated. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the second hit random number counter C4, and the small hit type counter C5 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the second hit random counter C4, and the small hit type counter C5 are each incremented by one, and their counter values are maximized. When the value reaches 299, 99, 99, 239, 99 in this embodiment, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C5 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203.

  Next, in addition to the processing for displaying on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). Thereafter, the left first entrance 64a and the right first entrance 64b (hereinafter, when both the left first entrance 64a and the right first entrance 64b are indicated, the first entrance 64 and ) Or a start prize process accompanying a prize (start prize) in the second entrance 640 (S105). The details of the special symbol change process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the start winning process, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device, is executed (S106). A gate passing process is performed (S107). The details of the normal symbol change process and the through gate passage process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the execution of the through gate passage process, a V entrance passage process associated with the ball entry into the second variable winning device 650 is executed (S108). After that, a V-pass process is executed in accordance with winning of the V winning switch 650e3 of the second variable winning device 650 (S109). The details of the V entrance passage process and the V passage process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 49 and 59.

  Next, a firing control process is executed (S110), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S111), and the timer interrupt process ends. Note that the firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 with the touch sensor 51a and, on condition that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping firing is not operated. This is a process for determining on / off of firing. When the launch of the ball is on, main controller 110 instructs launch control device 112 to launch the ball.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 38, a special symbol change process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the special symbol change processing (S104). The special symbol change process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37), and the special symbol (first symbol) change display and the third symbol performed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third symbol performed on the display device 81.

  In this special symbol change process, first, it is determined whether or not the present is a special symbol jackpot (S201). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying a special symbol jackpot (including a special symbol jackpot game). During the predetermined time after the end of the symbol jackpot game is included. If the result of the determination is that the special symbol is in a big hit (S201: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  If it is not during the special symbol jackpot (S201: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is changing (S202), and the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are displayed. If the mode is not fluctuating (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of times of suspension of the variable display in the special symbol N2) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S204).

  If the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S205) and changed by the calculation. A reserved ball number command (special figure 2 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is set (S206). The set number-of-spheres command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in an external output process (S1701) of a main process (see FIG. 53) described later executed by the MPU 201. Are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted values in the RAM 223. The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c are stored.

  After the special figure 2 reserved ball count command is set by the processing of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, in each area, such as the first area on hold → the execution area, the second area on hold → the first area on hold, the third area on hold → the second area on hold, the fourth area on the hold → third area on hold, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, a special symbol variation start process for starting variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is executed (S213). The special symbol change start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S204, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (S204: No), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d. Is obtained (S208). It is determined whether the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S209). When it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S209: No), this processing is ended.

  On the other hand, if the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S209: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is subtracted (S210) and changed by calculation. A reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set (S211). After the special figure 1 reserved sphere number command is set by the processing of S211, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a is shifted (S212). After that, the process of S213 is performed.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B is changing (S202: Yes), whether the change time of the variable display executed on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B has elapsed. It is determined whether or not it is (S214). The variation time of the variation display performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command). If the fluctuating time has not elapsed (S214: No), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S214, if the fluctuating time of the fluctuating display being executed has elapsed (S214: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37A, 37B is set (S215). . The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a special symbol change start process (S213) described later with reference to FIGS. When the special symbol change start process is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Is More specifically, it is determined whether the special symbol is a big hit, a small hit, or a miss according to the value of the first random number counter C1, and the special symbol is a big hit or a small hit. In this case, one of the big hits A to G or one of the small hits A to E is determined according to the value of the first hit type counter C2 or the small hit type counter C5.

  In the present embodiment, when the big hit A occurs, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In addition, when a small hit is made, the red LED is turned on, and when it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next change display is started, but may be turned on only for a few seconds after the stop of the change.

  After the process of S215 is completed, when the variation display being executed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is started, the result of the special symbol lottery performed by the special symbol variation start process (the current lottery result). Is a special symbol jackpot (S216). If the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (S216: Yes), a scenario for opening a specific winning opening is set based on the jackpot type (S217), and then the start of the jackpot is set (S218). Next, the big hit start flag 203h and the big hit flag 203i are set to ON (S219), the time reduction counter 203g is set to 0 (S220), and the process shifts to S221. In the processing of S221, a stop command is set (S221), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S216, when it is determined that the current lottery result is not a big hit (S216: No), it is determined whether the current lottery result is a small hit (S222).

  In the process of S222, when it is determined that the current lottery result is a small hit (S222: Yes), a small hit start setting process is executed (S223). Next, the process of S221 is performed, and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S222 that the current lottery result is not a small hit (S222: No), it is determined whether the value of the time reduction counter 203g is 1 or more (S224). When it is determined that the value of the counter 203g during the working hours is 0 (S224: No), the processing of S221 is executed, and this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time reduction counter 203g is 1 or more (S224: Yes), the value of the time reduction counter 203g is decremented by 1 (S224), and the process of S221 is executed. After that, the process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 39, the special symbol change start process (S213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the special symbol change start process (S213). The special symbol change start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 38) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37), and includes the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a and the special symbol change process. Based on the values of the various counters stored in the common execution area with the symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b, a lottery of "special symbol big hit", "special symbol small hit" or "special symbol departure" is performed. This is a process for performing a determination) and determining an effect pattern (variable effect pattern) of the variable effect performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81.

  In the special symbol change start process, first, it is determined whether or not the employee is working for a time reduction (S301). If it is not during the working hours (S301: No), the normal fluctuation start processing (S302) is executed, and this processing ends. On the other hand, when the working hours are reduced (S301: Yes), the working hours start process (S303) is executed, and the process ends.

  Next, the normal fluctuation start processing (S302) and the time reduction fluctuation start processing (S303) executed in the above-described special symbol fluctuation start processing (S213) will be described.

  First, the normal fluctuation start processing (S302) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the normal fluctuation start processing (S302) executed in the special symbol fluctuation start processing (see S213 in FIG. 39).

  In the normal fluctuation start processing, first, data of an execution area in a corresponding special symbol reserved ball storage area (special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b) is acquired (S401). Then, the lottery result is acquired based on the special symbol jackpot random number table corresponding to the acquired special symbol type (S402). Specifically, in the case of the lottery of the first special symbol based on the ball entry into the first entrance opening 64, the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 (see FIG. 26 (b)) is referred to as a big hit or a small hit. If the determination is made and the lottery of the second special symbol is performed based on the ball entering the second entrance 640, the big hit or the small hit is determined with reference to the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 (see FIG. 26 (c)). I do.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result is a jackpot (S403). When the lottery result is a big hit (S403: Yes), the display mode at the time of the normal big hit corresponding to the special symbol and the big hit type is set based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S401 ( S404). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S401 is compared with the random number value stored in the special symbol 1 big hit selection table 202b1 or the special symbol 2 big hit selection table 202b2, and 7 It is determined what the jackpot type is, among the jackpots (jackpots A to G) of the special symbols of various types (see FIG. 27 (b) or (c)).

  In the process of S404, the display mode (the lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined big hit type (big hits A to G). In order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the big hit type on the third symbol display device 81, the big hit types (big hits A to G) are set as the stop types.

  Thereafter, a normal jackpot variation pattern is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 (S405), and the process proceeds to S406. When the fluctuation pattern is set in the processing of S405, the fluctuation time (display time) of the fluctuation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third time until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the big hit symbol is set. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. More specifically, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 and the fluctuation pattern table 202d1 for the special hit 1 or the fluctuation pattern table 202d5 for the special hit 2 (common to normal / time saving) Then, the variation time of the symbol variation is determined (FIG. 29 (a) or FIG. 30 (b)).

  In the process of S406, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the process of S405 is set (S406). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S404 is set (S407). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the sound ramp control device 113 in the processing of S1701 of the main processing (see FIG. 53). Is done. The sound lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the processing in S407 ends, the process returns to the special symbol change processing.

  On the other hand, if the lottery result is not a big hit (S403: No), it is further determined whether the lottery result is a small hit (S408). When the lottery result is a small hit (S408: Yes), the display mode at the time of the normal small hit corresponding to the special symbol and the big hit type is set (S409). Thereafter, a normal small hit variation pattern is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 (S410). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the small hit symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S405, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 and the variation pattern table 202d3 for the small hit for special figure 1 or the variation pattern table 202d5 for the big hit for special figure 2 (Normal / time saving common) to determine the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation (FIG. 29 (d) or FIG. 30 (b)). Next, the processing of S406 and S407 is executed, and the process returns to the special symbol change processing.

  If the lottery result is not a small hit (S408: No), a display mode at the time of normal departure corresponding to the special symbol is set (S411). Thereafter, a fluctuation pattern at the time of the normal departure is determined based on the number of reserved balls (S412). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S405, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 and the variation pattern table 202d2 for the special figure 1 or the variation pattern table 202d5 for the big hit for the special figure 2 ( By comparing the normal and the time saving, the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation is determined (FIG. 29 (c) or FIG. 30 (b)). Next, the processing of S406 and S407 is executed, and the process returns to the special symbol change processing.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 41, the time reduction start process (S303) will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the time reduction start process (S303) executed in the special symbol change start process (S213, see FIG. 39). This time saving variation start process (S303) is different from the above-described normal variation start process (S302) in that a display mode and a variation pattern for time saving are set (determined), and the other points are the same. , And a detailed description thereof will be omitted. In the processing of S505, S510, and S512, when determining the variation pattern for the time saving of the first special symbol, as described above, the determination is made based on the variation pattern table 202d4 for the special figure 1 (FIG. 30 (a) )reference). On the other hand, when determining the variation pattern for the time saving of the second special symbol, it is determined based on the variation pattern table 202d5 for the special figure 2 (common for the normal and the time saving), similarly to the normal variation start process (S302) (FIG. 30 (b)).

  Next, the small hit start setting process (S222) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the small hit start setting process (S222). The small hit start setting process (S222) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 38) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37), and is a small hit type (small hit A to E). Is a process for setting the operations of the V inlet solenoid 209a, the staying solenoid 209b, and the flow path solenoid 209c in the small hitting game based on.

  In the small hit start setting process (S222), first, the small hit type selected in the process of S409 of the above-described normal variation start process or the process of S509 of the time saving variation start process is read (S601). Or, it is determined whether or not B (S602). If it is the small hit type A or B (S602: Yes), an open scenario for the special figure 1 is set (S603). Note that the opening scenario for Tokuzu 1 specifically indicates the setting of the opening pattern of the opening / closing door 650f1 and the staying member 650n of the second variable winning device 650. In other words, the operation of the V inlet solenoid 209a and the staying solenoid 209b is set so that the opening / closing door 650f1 and the staying member 650n are opened for a predetermined period during the small hitting game effect (see FIG. 10).

  When the processing in S603 ends, it is determined whether the small hit type is B (S604). If the small hit type is B (S604: Yes), the flow path solenoid operation is set so that the V prize is not possible (S605). That is, the operation of the flow path solenoid 209c is set so that the ball cannot flow down the flow path 650h3 (see FIG. 10A). After that, the processing shifts to the processing of S608. In the processing of S604, if the small hit type is not B (that is, the small hit type is A) (S604: No), the flow path solenoid operation is set so that the V winning is possible (S606). That is, the operation of the flow path solenoid 209c is set so that the ball can flow down to the flow path 650h3 (see FIG. 10B).

  On the other hand, in the process of S602, if the small hit type is not A or B (that is, the small hit type is C, D or E) (S602: No), an open scenario for the special figure 2 is set (S606). ). Note that the opening scenario for the special figure 2 specifically indicates the setting of the opening pattern of the opening / closing door 650f1 and the staying member 650n of the second variable winning device 650. That is, the operation of the V inlet solenoid 209a and the stay solenoid 209b is set so that the opening / closing door 650f1 and the stay member 650n are opened for a predetermined period during the small hitting game effect (see FIG. 11A). When the processing of S607 ends, the flow path solenoid operation is set so that the V prize is possible (S606). That is, the operation of the flow path solenoid 209c is set so that the ball can flow down to the flow path 650h3 (see FIG. 11A).

  When the processing in S605 and S607 is completed, the V-passing jackpot type corresponding to each small-hit type is set in the V-passing jackpot type storage area 203m (S608). More specifically, based on the small hit type acquired in the process of S601 and the special symbol one big hit selection table 202b1 or the special symbol two big hit selection table 202b2, the big hit type at the time of passing V (big hits C to G) is determined. As described above, if the small hit type is A, it is determined to be a big hit C (seven round short hits), and if the small hit type is B, it is a big hit D (two round short hits). If it is determined that the small hit type is C, it is determined to be a big hit F (5-round short hit jackpot), and if the small hit type is D, it is determined to be a big hit G (10 round short hit jackpot). If the small hit type is E, it is determined to be a big hit E (15-round short-time big hit) (see FIG. 27 (b) or (c)).

  Next, the start of the small hit is set based on the small hit type (S609), and the small hit start flag 203j and the small hit flag 203k are set to ON (S610). After that, the process ends.

  Next, the start winning information processing (S105) will be described. First, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37), and it is determined whether or not there is a win (start win) in the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640. This is a process for acquiring various random number counters and executing a holding process of the values when a winning start is made.

  When the start winning process (S105 in FIG. 43) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the ball has won the first entrance 64 (start win) (S701). Here, a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, if it is determined that the ball has won the first entrance 64 (S701: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times N1 of the variable display in the special symbol is changed) is acquired (S702). ). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment) (S703).

  Then, whether or not there is a prize in the first entrance 64 (S701: No), or even if there is a prize in the first entrance 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 4 If not less than (S703: No), the process proceeds to S707. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first entrance 64 (S701: Yes) and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the special symbol 1 is reserved. The value (N1) of the ball counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S704). Then, a reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S705).

  The set number-of-spheres command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in an external output process (S1701) of a main process (see FIG. 53) described later executed by the MPU 201. Are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

  After setting the pending ball count command in the processing of S705, the first random number counter C1, first collision type counter C2, stop type selection counter C3, and small collision type updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above. Each value of the counter C5 is stored in the first one of the free reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (S706). In the process of S706, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the value, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, in the processing of S707 to S712, the same processing as the processing of S701 to S706 is executed for the winning of the second entrance 640. The only difference is that the holding process for the second special symbol is executed for the winning of the second entrance 640, and the other processes are the same. Then, when it is determined in the processing of S707 that the ball has not won the second entrance 640 (S707: No), after the processing of S712, a pre-reading processing is executed (S713). After that, this processing ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 44, the prefetching process (S713), which is one of the start winning processes (see S105 in FIG. 43), executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the prefetching process (S713).

  In the prefetching process (FIG. 44, S713), first, it is determined whether or not there is a new prize in the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (S801). As a result of the determination, when there is no new winning in the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (S801: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if there is a new prize in the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (S801: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the prize is a first special symbol prize (S802). ).

  In the processing of S802, when it is determined that the winning is the winning of the first special symbol (S802: Yes), the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1, the special symbol 1 big hit selection table 202b1, and the special symbol 1 small hit selection table 202e1. Based on the result, the lottery result, the big hit type and the small hit type are acquired (S803), and the process shifts to S804. In the process of S804, the winning information command including the big hit determination result, the big hit type, the small hit determination result, and the small hit type acquired in S803 (or S805) is set (S804), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S802 that the winning is a winning of the second special symbol (S802: No), the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2, the special symbol 2 big hit selection table 202b2, and the special symbol 2 small hit selection Based on the table 202e2, the lottery result, the big hit type, and the small hit type are acquired (S805), the process of S804 is executed, and this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 40, the ordinary symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the ordinary symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol change process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37), and the second symbol change display performed by the second symbol display device and the electric control attached to the second entrance 640 are performed. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the accessory.

  In the ordinary symbol variation process (FIG. 40, S106), first, it is determined whether or not the present is a hit with an ordinary symbol (second symbol) (S901). As the hit during the normal symbol (the second symbol), the display indicating the hit on the second symbol display device and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 are performed. In the middle of being included. If the result of the determination is that a normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S901: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not being hit (S901: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S902), and If the display mode is not fluctuating (S902: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times of suspension of the variable display in the ordinary symbol) is acquired (S903). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball counter 203f is greater than 0 (S904). If the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203f is 0 (S904). No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S904: Yes), the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 (S905).

  Next, the data stored in the ordinary symbol holding sphere storage area 203c is shifted (S906). In the process of S906, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the ordinary symbol reserved ball storage area 203c to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, in each area, such as the first area on hold → the execution area, the second area on hold → the first area on hold, the third area on hold → the second area on hold, the fourth area on the hold → third area on hold, etc. Shift data. After the data is shifted, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c is obtained (S907).

  Next, a lottery result is acquired based on the second hit random number table 202c (S908). In this control example, there is no distinction between the high probability state and the low probability state in the lottery of the ordinary symbols, and the probability of winning the ordinary symbol is always constant. Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 obtained in the process of S907 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table 202c. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "0 to 11", it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if the value is in the range of "12 to 239", the normal symbol is out of the pattern. Is determined (see FIG. 26D).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the lottery result of the ordinary symbol acquired by the processing of S908 is a hit of the ordinary symbol (S909), and when it is determined that the lottery is a hit of the ordinary symbol (S909: Yes), Is set (S910), and the process moves to S912. In the process of S910, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is completed, a setting is made so that a symbol of “」 ”is displayed as a stopped symbol (second symbol).

  In the process of S909, when it is determined that the symbol is out of the ordinary pattern (S909: No), the display mode at the time of the out of pattern is set (S911). In the process of S911, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is completed, a setting is made so that a symbol “x” is lit and displayed as a stopped symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of departure is completed, the processing shifts to S912.

  When the processing of S910 or S911 is completed, in the processing of S912, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state (S912). If the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time reduction state (S912: Yes), the time reduction medium hit flag 203q is set to ON (S913). Next, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display in the second symbol display device is set to 3 seconds (S914), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is not in the normal symbol time-saving state (S912: No), the variation time of the variation display on the second symbol display device is set to 4 seconds (S915), and this processing ends. As described above, except for during the special symbol jackpot, in the normal symbol time reduction state, the fluctuation display time is very short, “4 seconds → 3 seconds”, as compared with the normal symbol normal state. The ball enters the entrance 640 easily.

  On the other hand, in the process of S902, if the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S902: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed on the second symbol display device has elapsed. (S916). Note that the fluctuation time here is a time preset by the processing of S914 or the processing of S915 before the fluctuation display is started on the second symbol display device.

  In the processing of S916, if the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S916: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S916, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S916: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S917). In the process of S917, the lottery of the ordinary symbol is a hit, and if the display mode is set by the process of S910, the symbol “○” as the second symbol is stopped (displayed on the second symbol display device). ) Is set to be. On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is lost and the display mode is set by the processing of S911, the “X” symbol as the second symbol is stopped (lit) on the second symbol display device. It is set as follows. When the stop display is set by the process of S917, when the second symbol display updating process (see S1708) of the main process (see FIG. 53) is next executed, the variable display on the second symbol display device ends. Then, in the display mode set in the processing of S910 or the processing of S911, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped (lit) on the second symbol display device.

  Next, when the variable display being executed on the second symbol display device is started, the lottery result (the current lottery result) of the ordinary symbol performed by the ordinary symbol variation process (FIG. 45, S106) is changed to the ordinary symbol. Is determined (S918). If the current lottery result is a normal symbol hit (S918: Yes), the control unit sets an electric accessory control process (S919) and ends the process.

  Next, the electric accessory control process (S919) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. The electric accessory control process (S919) is a process executed in the normal symbol change process (see FIG. 45) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37). It is a flowchart which showed S919).

  In the electric accessory control process, first, it is determined whether or not the time-saving medium hit flag 203q is on (S1001). If the time saving medium hit flag 203q is on (S1001: Yes), the time saving medium hit flag 203q is set to off (S1002), and then it is determined whether or not the time saving is being performed (S1003). If the pachinko machine 10 is in a time-saving state (Yes in S1003), the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state of the ordinary design, so that the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened (for 3 seconds) and closed. (5 seconds) and open (3 seconds) (S1004), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, in S1001, if the time saving medium hit flag 203q is not on (that is, it is off) (S1001: Yes), or if it is not in time saving (S1003: No) in S1003, the pachinko machine 10 is normally designed. , The opening operation of the motorized accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is set to open (0.1 seconds), closed (0.1 seconds), and opened (0.1 seconds). (S1005, this process ends).

  As described above, in the normal symbol time reduction state, the opening operation of the second entrance 640 is “open (0.1 second), closed (0.1 second), open ( 0.1 second) → open (3 seconds), close (5 seconds), open (3 seconds) ”, so that the ball easily enters the second entrance 640.

  Further, when the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a is set by the electric accessory control process (S919), when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1706) of the main process (see FIG. 53) is executed next. Then, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started.

  Next, the through gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). This through gate passage processing (S107) is executed in the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 37), and it is determined whether or not a ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, and the ball has passed. In this case, the process is to acquire and hold the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

  In the through gate passage process (FIG. 47, S107), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed the ordinary symbol starting port (through gate) 67 (S1101). Here, the passage of the ball through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the ordinary symbol starting port (through gate) 67 (S1101: Yes), the value of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203f (the number M of times of the fluctuation display in the ordinary symbol) is acquired. (S1102). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the ordinary symbol holding ball counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S1103).

  If the ball passes through the ordinary symbol starting port (through gate) 67 (S1101: Yes) and the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S1103: Yes), the ordinary symbol retaining ball The value (M) of the number counter 203f is incremented by 1 (S1104). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the above-described timer interrupt process is stored in the first one of the free reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. (S1105). In the process of S1105, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the value, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area. When the processing in S1105 is completed, the general-purpose prefetching processing is executed (S1106).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 48, the general-purpose prefetching process will be described (S1106). FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ordinary figure prefetching process (S1106). In the ordinary figure pre-reading process (S1106 in FIG. 48), first, a preliminary determination based on the value of the second random number counter C4 newly stored in the ordinary symbol holding sphere storage area 203c is executed (S1201). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 newly stored in the process of S1105 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table 202c.

  Next, based on the result of the preliminary determination, a hit preliminary determination result and a fluctuation time determination result are acquired (S1202). After that, a general-purpose winning information command is set (S1203), the present processing is ended, and the flow returns to the through gate passing processing.

  Returning to FIG. 47, the description will be continued. When the ordinary figure pre-reading process (S1106) ends, it is then determined whether or not the present is a special symbol jackpot (S1107). If the result of the determination is that the special symbol is in a big hit (S1107: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is. If it is not during the special symbol big hit (S1107: No), it is determined whether or not the present is a small hit (S1108). If the result of the determination is that the player is hitting a small hit (S1108: Yes), the present process ends.

  If it is not a small hit (S1108: No), it is determined whether or not the second special symbol is changing (S1109). If the result of the determination is that the second special symbol is changing (S1109: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is. If the second special symbol is not fluctuating (S1109: No), it is determined whether or not the time is reduced (S1109). If the result of the determination is that it is during working hours (S1110: Yes), this processing is terminated. If it is not during the working hours (S1110: No), an error command is set (S1111), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 (S1101: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, the normal symbol holding ball number counter If the value (M) of 203f is not less than 4 (S1103: No), the general-purpose prefetching process (S1106) is skipped, the processes of S1107 to S1111 are executed, and this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 49, the V entrance passage process (S108) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the V entrance passage process (S108) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37).

  In the V entrance passage process (S108), it is first determined whether or not a small hit is being made (S1301). In the process of S1301, when it is determined that the small hit is occurring (S1301: Yes), a V entrance passage command is set (S1302), and the process ends. If it is not during the small hit (S1302: No), an error command is set (S1303) because the ball has entered the second variable winning device 650 despite the fact that it is not a small hit game. To end.

  The V entrance passage command set in the process of S1302 is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output process (S1701) of the main process (see FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 201. Are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the V entrance passage command, the sound lamp control device 113 counts the balls that have passed the V entrance and transmits a command for executing an effect based on the V entrance passage to the display control device 114. Thereby, it is possible to execute the effect during the small hit game based on the ball entering the second variable winning device 650 (see FIG. 12).

  Next, the V-pass process (S109) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the V passage processing (S109). The V passing process (S109) is a process executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37).

  In the V passing process, first, the V passing big hit type value stored in the V passing big hit type storage area 203m is acquired (S1401), and the V flag 203n indicating the acquired V passing big hit type is set to ON (S1401). S1402). Then, a V passing command is set (S1403).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the small hit type corresponds to the small hit B (S1404). In the process of S1404, when it is determined that the small hit B is applicable (S1404: Yes), an error command is set (S1405), and the process ends. In the present embodiment, it is the small hits A, C, D or E (that is, other than the small hit B) that the ball can pass through the V winning switch 650e3 of the second variable winning device 650. This is only when the small hits A, C, D or E (that is, other than the small hit B) are set. Therefore, when the small hit type value is the small hit B, when the V passing process (S1401) executed based on the ball passing through the V winning switch 650e3 is executed, the V winning switch 650e3 is illegally performed. This is considered to be the case when the ball was won. In this case, by setting an error command in the process of S1405, an error is output and an illegal action can be found.

  FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing an NMI interruption process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt process (S1501). I do.

  Note that the above-described NMI interrupt process is similarly executed in the payout control device 111, and the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 52, a description will be given of a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This start-up process is started by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S1601). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a wait process (one second in the present embodiment) is executed in order to wait until the sub-side control devices (the peripheral control devices such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) are in an operable state. (S1602). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1603).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 7) provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (S1604). If it is turned on (S1604: Yes), the process proceeds to S1612. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S1604: No), it is further determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1605), and if not, it is not stored (S1605: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown may not have been completed normally, the process also proceeds to S1612 in this case.

  If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1605: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1606). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1607: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off, the backed-up data has been destroyed, and the process also proceeds to S1612 in such a case. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as described later in the process of S1716 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S1612, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1612). Upon receiving the payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and enters a state in which ball payout control can be started. After transmitting the pay-out initialization command, main controller 110 executes an initialization process of RAM 203 (S1613, S1614).

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is opened, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is pressed at the time of execution of the startup processing, the RAM initialization processing (S1613, S1614) is executed. Similarly, the initialization process of the RAM 203 (S1613, S1614) is executed also when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the initialization processing of the RAM (S1613, S1614), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1613), and thereafter, the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1614). After the execution of the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process shifts to the process of S1610.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S1604: No), power-off occurrence information is stored (S1605: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like) is normal (S1605: Yes). S1607: Yes), the power-off information is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S1608). Next, a payout return command at the time of power restoration for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of driving power cutoff is transmitted (S1609), and the process proceeds to S1610. When the payout control device 111 receives the payout return command, the payout control device 111 is ready to start the ball payout control while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the process of S1610, the effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, an interrupt is permitted (S1611), and the process proceeds to a main process described later.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the start-up process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the main processing. In this main processing, main processing of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S1701 to S1709 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 ms, and the counter updating process of S1712 and S1713 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main process (see FIG. 53), first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37), output data such as a command stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is transmitted to the sub side. An external output process to be transmitted to each control device (peripheral control device) is executed (S1701). Specifically, the presence / absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading process in S101 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37) is determined. Send a prize ball command. In addition, a command to hold the number of balls set in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 38) and the start winning process (see FIG. 43) is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Also, the jackpot start command, the number of rounds command, and the jackpot end command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 54) are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1702). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by one, and is cleared to zero when the counter value reaches a maximum value (198 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in a corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the winning ball count signal and the abnormal payout signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1703). A jackpot control process for opening or closing the first specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the 1 variable winning device 65 is executed (S1704). In the jackpot control process, the first specific winning opening 65a is opened in each round of the jackpot state, and the maximum opening time of the first specific winning opening 65a has elapsed, or a predetermined number of balls have been won in the first specific winning opening 65a. Is determined. When any of these conditions is satisfied, the first specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the first specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1704) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 53), but may be executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37).

  Next, in the case of the special symbol small hit state, execution of various effects according to the small hit and small hit control processing for opening or closing the opening / closing door 650f1 of the second variable winning device 650 are executed ( S1705). In the small hit control process, the opening / closing door 650f1 is opened based on the opening scenario, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the opening / closing door 650f1 has elapsed or whether a predetermined number of balls have been won in the opening / closing door 650f1. When any one of these conditions is satisfied, the door 650f1 is closed. In the present embodiment, the small hit control process (S1705) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 53), but may be executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37).

  When the process of S1705 is completed, an electric auditors product opening / closing process for controlling the opening and closing of the electric auditors accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is executed (S1706). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is set by the electric accessory control process (S1005 in FIG. 46) executed in the normal symbol change process (see FIG. 45), Start opening / closing control of the object. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening operation set in the processing of S1004 or the processing of S1005 in the electric auditors goods control processing (S1005 in FIG. 46) ends.

  Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is executed (S1707). In the first symbol display update process, S405, S410, S412 of the normal variation start process (FIG. 40, S302) or the time reduction variation start process (FIG. 41, S303) executed in the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 39). When the fluctuation pattern is set by the processing of S505 or S505, S512, the fluctuation display according to the fluctuation pattern is started in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In the present embodiment, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the LED of the first symbol display device 37A, 37B is red until the fluctuation time elapses from the start of the fluctuation. Is turned off and the green LED is turned on. If the green LED is turned on, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is turned on, the blue LED is turned on. Is turned off and the red LED is turned on.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds. However, if the LED lighting color is changed every time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted every time the main processing is executed so that the player can confirm the change of the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. Note that the value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  In the first symbol display update process, the fluctuation set by the processing of S405, S410, S412 or the processing of S505, S510, S512 of the normal fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 40) or the time reduction start processing (see FIG. 41). When the fluctuating time corresponding to the pattern ends, the fluctuating display being executed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is ended, and the normal fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 40) or the time reduction fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 41). In the display mode set by the processing of S404, S409, S411 or the processing of S504, S509, S511, the stop symbol (first symbol) is stopped (lit) on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B.

  Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device is executed (S1708). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S914 or the process of S915 of the ordinary symbol variation process (see FIG. 45), the variation display is started on the second symbol display device. . As a result, in the second symbol display device, the variable display in which the symbol “O” and the symbol “X” as the second symbol are alternately turned on is performed. In the second symbol display updating process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the process of S917 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 45), the variation executed in the second symbol display device is performed. The display is terminated, and the stopped symbol (the second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted display) on the second symbol display device in the display mode set by the process of S910 or the process of S911 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 45). I do.

  Next, a storage device control process for setting the opening and closing of the storage valve 750a associated with the storage device 750 is executed (S1709).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1710). If power-off occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1710: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 sends a power failure signal. SG1 is not output, and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the current main process (S1711). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1711: Yes), the process proceeds to S1701, and the processes from S1701 onward are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the current main processing (S1711: No), the first time is reached until the predetermined time, that is, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing is reached. The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1712, S1713).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1712). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by one, and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in this embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1702 (S1713).

  Here, since the execution time of each processing of S1701 to S1709 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (ie, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4), and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In addition, in the process of S1710, if the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1710: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of the power failure or the power-off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 51 has been executed, the processing at the time of power-off after S1714 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1714), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to another control device (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113). (S1715). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is stored (S1716), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1717), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and the work area of the RAM 203 to be backed up.

  The process of S1710 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to the game state change performed in S1701 to S1709 or at the end of one cycle of the processes of S1712 and S1713 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main control device 110, the power-off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power-off state, the processing is performed after the startup processing is completed. The processing can be started from the processing of S1701. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1701, as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power-off, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, the stack pointer is not reset in the initialization process (S1601). By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the processing of S1701. Therefore, the control load on main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without erroneous operation or runaway of main controller 110.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S1704) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S1704). The jackpot control process (S1704) is executed in the main interrupt process (see FIG. 53), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot state, execution of various effects according to the jackpot or the first This is a process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a.

  In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether a special symbol jackpot is started (S1801). Specifically, if the big hit start flag 203h is set to ON by the processing of S219 of the special symbol change process (see FIG. 38), it is determined that the special symbol big hit is started. In the process of S1801, if a special symbol big hit is started (S1801: Yes), the big hit start flag 203h is set to off (S1802), and an opening command is set (S1803).

  The jackpot start command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is output during the external output process (S1701) of the main process (see FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. Upon receiving the jackpot start command, the sound ramp control device 113 transmits a display jackpot start command to the display control device 114. When the display jackpot start command is received by the display control device 114, an effect of starting a jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When the processing in S1803 ends, the storage release flag 203p is set to ON (S1804), and the processing ends.

  On the other hand, if the special symbol jackpot has not been started in the processing of S1801 (S1801: No), it is determined whether the special symbol jackpot is in progress (S1805). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the big hit game. Specifically, the determination is made based on whether or not the big hit flag 203i is on. In the processing of S1805, if it is not during the special symbol big hit (S1805: No), this processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1805, if the special symbol is in a big hit (S1805: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1806). If it is the start timing of a new round (S1806: Yes), the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is opened (S1807), and a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (S1807). S1808). After setting the number-of-rounds command, the process ends. The round number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is used as an audio lamp in the external output processing (S1701) of the main processing (see FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When receiving the round number command, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits a display round number command corresponding to the round number to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect.

  Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, when a continuous jackpot is executed in the audio lamp control device 113, a display round number command corresponding to the accumulated number of rounds is transmitted. Therefore, the accumulated number of rounds in the continuous big hit is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. This allows the player to recognize that the big hit has continued for a long time, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1806, if it is not the start timing of a new round (S1806: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is satisfied (S1809). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after opening the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65, or a predetermined number of balls (for example, It is determined that the closing condition is satisfied when a prize is won.

  In the processing of S1809, when the closing condition of the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is satisfied (S1809: Yes), the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is closed. Then, the present process ends. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is not satisfied (S1809: No), it is determined whether or not it is the timing to end the big hit (S1811). Specifically, when the special game state (all 16 rounds) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual is completed, it is determined that it is time to end the big hit.

  In the process of S1811, if it is the timing of ending the big hit (S1811: Yes), the big hit end command is set (S1812), and the big hit flag 203i is turned off (S1813).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the special game being executed was the big hit B (S1814). In the process of S1814, when it is determined that the hit is not the big hit B (7R time saving no big hit) (S1814: No), the middle time saving counter 203g is set to 1 (S1815), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1814 that the hit has been the big hit B (7R time short hit) (S1814: Yes), the process of S1815 is skipped and the present process ends.

  The jackpot end command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is output during the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. Upon receiving the jackpot end command, the sound ramp control device 113 selects a jackpot end effect display mode based on the winning information stored in the special figure winning information storage area 223a of the RAM 223. Then, a big hit end command for display corresponding to the selected big hit end display mode is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display jackpot end command is received by the display control device 114, the effect of the jackpot end is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  Next, the small hit control process (S1705) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the small hit control process (S1705) executed in the main process (see FIG. 53). The small hit control process (S1705) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 53). When the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol small hit state, execution of various effects according to the small hit, and This is a process for opening or closing the opening / closing door 650f1 of the two-variable winning device 650.

  In the small hit control process, first, it is determined whether the small hit of the special symbol is started (S1901). Specifically, if the small hit start flag 203j is set to ON in the small hit start setting process (see FIG. 42) in S610, it is determined that the small hit of the special symbol is started. In the process of S1901, when the small hit of the special symbol is started (S1901: Yes), the small hit start flag 203j is turned off (S1902), and the small hit start command is set (S1903).

  The small hit start command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is output in the external output process (S1701) of the main process (see FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the small hit start command, the sound ramp control device 113 transmits a small hit start command for display to the display control device 114. When the display small hit start command is received by the display control device 114, an effect of starting small hit is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  When the processing of S1903 is completed, the V inlet solenoid 209a and the flow path solenoid 209c are set to ON based on the opening scenario (S1904), the operation of the staying member 650n is started (S1905), and this processing ends.

  The open scenario referred to in the process of S1904 is set in the small hit start setting process (see FIG. 42), and the open scenario of the V inlet solenoid 209a is set regardless of the small hit type. The opening scenario of the solenoid 209c is set only when the small hit type is A, C, D or E. Therefore, in all the small hit games, the opening / closing door 650f1 of the second variable winning device 650 is opened, and it becomes possible to make a ball enter the second variable winning device 650. On the other hand, only in the small hits A, C, D or E where the flow path solenoid 209c is turned on, the ball that has entered the second variable winning device 650 can flow down to the special discharge flow path 650e2. That is, the small hits A, C, D or E are the small hit types to which the big hit is given, and the small hits B are the small hit types to which the big hit is not given.

  In addition, in the process of S1905, the operation of the staying member 650n is started (the staying solenoid 209b is turned on), so that one ball can stay in the distribution destination area 650h3.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1901, when it is not the timing to start the small win of the special symbol (S1901: No), it is determined whether or not the special symbol is being hit (S1906). During the special symbol small hit, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying a special symbol small hit (including a special symbol small hit game), and During the predetermined time after the end of the special symbol small hit game. Specifically, the determination is made based on whether or not the small hitting flag 203k is ON. In the processing of S1906, if it is not during the small win of the special symbol (S1906: No), this processing ends as it is.

  In the processing of S1906, when it is determined that the special symbol is being hit (S1906: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the closing condition of the V entrance is satisfied (S1907). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 6.5 seconds) has elapsed after the opening and closing door 650f1 of the second variable winning device 650 has been opened, or a predetermined number of balls (for example, When a prize is won, it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

  The closing condition may be that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls have entered the second specific winning opening 650a.

  In the process of S1907, if the closing condition of the opening / closing door 650f1 of the second variable winning device 650 is satisfied (S1907: Yes), the V inlet solenoid 209a is closed to close the opening / closing door 650f1 of the second variable winning device 650. It is set to off (S1908), and the staying solenoid 209b is turned off to end the operation of the staying member 650n (S1909), and this processing ends. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the opening / closing door 650f1 of the second variable winning device 650 is not satisfied (S1907: No), it is determined whether or not it is the timing of the end of the small hit (S1910). Specifically, it is determined that the timing of the end of the small hit is reached after a predetermined time has elapsed (3 seconds in the present control example) after the above-described V inlet closing condition is satisfied. Thereby, the small hitting end process (turning off of the flow path solenoid 209c) can be executed after the operation of the staying member 650n is finished, so that the ball staying in the distribution destination area 650h3 is transferred to the V winning switch 650e3. The ball can be surely entered.

  In the process of S1910, if it is the timing of the end of the small hit (S1910: Yes), the small hit flag 203k is set to off (S1911), the small hit end process is executed (S1912), and each solenoid is opened. The scenario is cleared (S1913), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1910, if it is not the timing of the end of the small hit (S1910: No), this processing ends as it is.

  Here, the small hit end processing (S1912) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the small hit end processing (S1912). The small hit end process (S1912) is a process executed when it is determined in the small hit control process that it is the timing of the end of the small hit.

  In the small hit end processing (S1912), first, the flow path solenoid 209c is turned off (S2001), and it is determined whether or not the V flag 203n is on (S2002). In the processing of S2002, when it is determined that the V flag 203n is ON (S2002: Yes), the ball has passed the V winning switch 650e3 of the second variable winning device 650 during the small hit game, A process for starting the execution of the jackpot game based on the passage of the V winning switch 650e3 is performed.

  Specifically, the opening scenario of the first specific winning opening 65a is set based on the jackpot type corresponding to the V flag 203n (S2003), and the start of the jackpot is set based on the jackpot type corresponding to the V flag 203n (S2003). S2004). Next, the big hit start flag 203h and the big hit flag 203i are set on (S2005), and the V flag 203n is set off (S2006). Then, the counter 230g during time reduction is set to 0 (S2007), the value of the jackpot type value at the time of passing V stored in the jackpot type storing area at the time of V passing 203m is cleared (S2008), and this processing is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2002 that the V flag 203n is not turned on (S2002: No), it means that the small hit ball has not passed through the V winning switch 650e3, so that no big hit is given. In order to end, a small hit end command is set (S2009). After that, the processing of S2008 is executed, and this processing ends.

  The small hit end command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is output in the external output process (S1701) of the main process (see FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the jackpot end command, the sound ramp control device 113 selects a jackpot end effect display mode based on the winning information stored in the special figure winning information storage area 223a of the RAM 223. Then, a big hit end command for display corresponding to the selected big hit end display mode is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display jackpot end command is received by the display control device 114, the effect of the jackpot end is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  Next, the electric accessory opening / closing process (S1706) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the electric accessory opening / closing process (S1706) executed in the main process (see FIG. 53). The electric accessory opening / closing process (S1706) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 53), and is a process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640.

  In the electric accessory opening / closing process, first, it is determined whether or not the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a is set (S2101). The opening operation of the electric accessory 640a is set by the electric accessory control process (S1005 in FIG. 46) executed in the normal symbol change process (see FIG. 45). In the process of S2101, if the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a is not set (S2101: No), the process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2101, when the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a is set (S2101: Yes), it is determined whether it is the first opening timing of the electric accessory 640a (S2102). If it is determined in the processing of S2102 that it is the first opening timing of the electric accessory 640a (S2102: Yes), the opening of the electric accessory 640a is set (S2103), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2102 that it is not the first opening timing of the electric accessory 640a (S2102: No), then it is determined whether it is the first closing timing of the electric accessory 640a. (S2104). When it is determined that it is the first closing timing of the electric accessory 640a (S2104: Yes), the closing of the electric accessory 640a is set (S2105), and it is then determined whether the time reduction operation is being performed (S2106). ). If it is determined that the time saving operation is not being performed in the process of S2106 (S2106: No), the process ends. If it is determined in the processing of S2106 that the time saving operation is being performed (S2106: Yes), a close command is set (S2107), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2104 that it is not the first closing timing of the electric accessory 640a (S2104: No), then it is determined whether it is the second opening timing of the electric accessory 640a. (S2108). If it is determined that it is the second opening timing of the electric accessory 640a (S2108: Yes), the opening of the electric accessory 640a is set (S2109), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2108 that it is not the second opening timing of the electric accessory 640a (S2108: No), then it is determined whether it is the second closing timing of the electric accessory 640a. (S2110). When it is determined that it is not the second closing timing of the electric accessory 640a (S2110: No), it is next determined whether a ball has entered the second entrance 640 (S2111). If it is determined that the ball has not entered the second entrance 640 (S2111: No), this process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S2110 that it is the second closing timing of the electric accessory 640a (S2108: Yes), and when it is determined in S2111 that the ball has entered the second entrance 640. (S2111: Yes), the closing of the electric accessory 640a is set (S2112). Then, the setting of the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a is cleared (S2113), and this processing ends.

  Next, the storage device control process (S1709) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing a storage device control process (S1709) executed in the main process (see FIG. 53). This storage device control processing (S1709) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 53), and is processing for setting the opening and closing of the storage valve 750a associated with the storage device 750.

  In the storage device control processing, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the release counter 203pa is greater than 1 (S2201). If it is determined that the value of the release counter 203pa is not greater than 1 (that is, it is 0 or 1) (S2201: No), then it is determined whether the storage release flag 203p is on (S2202). If it is determined that the switch is on (S2202: Yes), storage release (that is, opening of the storage valve 750a) is set (S2203). Then, the value of the release counter 203pa is set to 1, and the process shifts to S2205. On the other hand, in the process of S2201, if it is determined that the value of the release counter 203pa is greater than 1 (S2201: Yes), the process of S2201 to S2204 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S2205.

  In the processing of S2205, it is determined whether or not the value of the cancellation counter 203pa is 25000 (S2205). If it is determined that the value of the release counter 203pa is not 25000 (S2205: No), the value of the release counter 203pa is incremented by 1 (S2206), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2205, when it is determined that the value of the release counter 203pa is 25000 (S2205: Yes), the storage close (that is, the storage valve 750a is closed) is set (S2207), and the storage release flag 203p is set. It is set to off (S2208). Next, the value of the release counter 203pa is set to 0, and this processing ends.

<Regarding the control processing of the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processes of the MPU 221 are roughly classified into a start-up process started when the power is turned on, and a main process executed after the start-up process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 59, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S3001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is ON, the current startup processing is caused by a momentary voltage drop (a momentary power failure, so-called “momentary power failure”), and the power-off processing in S3119 (see FIG. 60). It is determined whether the process is started during the execution of () (S3002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 60, upon receiving the power-off command from main controller 110 (see S3116 in FIG. 60), sound lamp control device 113 executes the power-off process in S3119. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is performed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing of S3119 is being performed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing flag.

  If the power-off processing flag is off (S3002: No), this startup processing is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure, and the power-off processing in S3119 is performed. It is started after the execution of the process is completed, or started only by resetting the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S3003).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S3006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, the data is not destroyed in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data is destroyed in the RAM 223. If the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S3003: Yes), the process proceeds to S3004, and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S3003: No), the process proceeds to S3008.

  If the current startup process is started after the power is completely shut off, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the storage in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off. ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S3003: Yes), and the flow shifts to S3004. On the other hand, this start-up processing is started after an instantaneous power failure occurs and after the execution of the power-off processing in S3119 is completed, or is reset only to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Is started, the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so that the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S3003: No), and the flow shifts to S3008.

  If the power-off processing flag is on (S3002: Yes), this startup processing is performed after the momentary power failure, and during the execution of the power-off processing in S3119, the audio lamp control device 113 Of the MPU 221 has been reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being performed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct. Therefore, in such a case, since control cannot be continued, the process proceeds to S3004 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S3004, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S3004). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is "0FFh". If "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. By this read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S3005: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223, and the RAM destruction check data is set (S3006). By confirming the keyword “55AAh” written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data destruction. On the other hand, if an abnormality of the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S3005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S3007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the sound may be output from the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message. It may be.

  In the process of S3008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S3008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process is performed in S3119 (see S3118 in FIG. 60). In other words, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process in S3119 is executed, the process of S3008 in the state in which the power-off flag is on is that the current startup process is instantaneous. This is a case where the process is started after the occurrence of the power failure and in a state where the execution of the power-off process in S3119 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S3008: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the sound ramp control device 113 (S3009), and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S3010), and then the interruption is performed. The permission is set (S3011), and the process proceeds to the main processing. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, the reason why the process of step S3008 is reached after the power-off flag is turned off is that the start-up process of this time is started after the power is completely cut off, for example, and the process of step S3008 is performed via the processes of steps S3004 to S3006. This is the case where the processing has been reached or the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 has been reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like and started. Therefore, in such a case (S3008: No), the process skips S3009, which is the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, shifts the process to S3010, and sets the initial value of the RAM 223 (S3010). Next, interrupt permission is set (S3011), and the process proceeds to main processing.

  It should be noted that the reason why the clearing process of S3009 is skipped is that when the process from S3004 to the process of S3008 is performed via the process of S3006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S3004. When the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset only due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is stored without being cleared, thereby saving the sound lamp control device 113. This is because the control can be continued.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the main processing. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 ms or more has elapsed since the main process was started or the current process of S3101 was executed (S3101). If not (S3101: No), the process proceeds to S3112 without performing the processes in S3102 to S3111. In the process of S3101, whether or not 1 ms has elapsed is mainly determined in S3102 to S3111 for display (production), and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 ms). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination processing in S3112, the variable display setting processing in S3113, the effect state setting processing in S3114, and the specific effect setting processing in S3115 in a short cycle. By executing the process of S3112 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of a command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the process of S3113 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process is Based on this, it is possible to make settings relating to the fluctuation effect without delay. In addition, by executing the process of S3114 in a short cycle, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is changed to the display content corresponding to the current game state without delay based on the command received by the command determination process. Can be done.

  If 1 ms or more has elapsed in the process of S3101 (S3101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S3103 to S3111 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S3102). ). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the output of each lamp are set so as to be the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the processing of S3108 to be described later (S3103), and thereafter, the power-on notification processing is executed (S3104). The power-on notification processing is to provide notification that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Is Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S3105 without performing notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S3105, a customer waiting effect process is executed, and thereafter, a held number display update process is executed (S3106). In the customer waiting effect process, when the pachinko machine 10 has not been played by the player for a predetermined period of time, a setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is used as a command for display control. Sent to device 114. In the reserved number display update process, a process of lighting a reserved lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is performed.

  After that, a frame button input monitoring / production process is executed (S3107). This frame button input monitoring / production process monitors the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the production effect, and responds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting to perform an effect. In this process, when an operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a display command corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 is set in the display control device 114.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process is completed, a lamp editing process is executed (S3108), and then a sound editing / output process is executed (S3109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, an output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S3109, a liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S3110). In the liquid crystal effect execution management processing, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. The lamp editing process of S3108 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing / output processing in S3109 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

  After the counter update process (S3111), a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S3112). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  Next, the process proceeds to S3113. In the process of S3113, a variable display setting process is executed (S3113). In the variation display setting process, a variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute the variation effect. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of the variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  Next, the processing shifts to S3114. In the process of S3114, an effect state setting process is executed (S3114). In this effect state setting process, an effect state for setting each effect mode (third symbol display mode, reserved symbol display mode) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to a game state is set. The process is executed, and a display effect state command for display is generated and set based on the set effect state. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The effect state setting process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  When the processing in S3114 ends, the flow shifts to the processing in S3115. In the process of S3115, a specific effect setting process is executed (S3115). In the specific effect setting process, a process for setting an effect different from a variable effect for indicating a lottery result of each symbol (special figure 1, special figure 2, general figure) is executed. The specific effect setting processing will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  Then, when the specific effect setting processing is completed, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S3116). The power-off information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S3116 (S3116: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S3118), and the power-off processing is executed (S3119). After the execution of the power-off process, the power-off process-in-progress flag is turned off (S3120), and then the process is in an infinite loop. In the power-off process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. Also, the storage of the information of the occurrence of the power interruption is deleted.

  On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S3116 (S3116: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S3117), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S3117: No), the process returns to S3101 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S3117: Yes), the processing is executed in an infinite loop to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main processing is not executed, and thereafter the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, the player can call a clerk of the hall or the like and request a repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM breakdown.

  Next, the command determination process (S3112) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S3112). This command determination processing (S3112) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. It is processing for.

  In the command determination process (FIG. 61, S3112), first, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main control device 110 is read and analyzed from a command storage area (not shown) provided in the RAM 223. It is determined whether a fluctuation pattern related command has been received (S3201). The fluctuation pattern related command is a command for notifying a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) of a special symbol or a command for notifying a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) of a normal symbol. The selected variation pattern (variation time) is output corresponding to each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, or the normal symbol.

  In the processing of S3201, if it is determined that the variation pattern related command has been received (S3201: Yes), the variation pattern related processing (S3202) is executed. This variation pattern-related processing is used to extract a variation pattern based on the variation pattern-related command output (received) from the main control device 110, and to cause the display control device 114 to execute an effect display. Here, the variation pattern-related processing (S3202) will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variation pattern-related processing (S3202). In the variation pattern-related processing (S3202), it is determined which pattern the variation pattern command received this time corresponds to, and the processing corresponding to the received symbol is executed based on the determination result. . In this variation pattern-related processing (S3202), it is determined whether the variation pattern-related command received this time is a variation pattern command for a special symbol (special figure) (S3301). If it is determined in the processing of S3301 that the command is a special figure variation pattern command (S3301: Yes), the process proceeds to S3302.

  In the process of S3302, when it is determined that the received variation pattern command is a special figure 2 variation pattern command (S3302: Yes), first, as illustrated in FIG. 62, it is determined whether the variation pattern received this time is a special figure variation pattern command. It does (S3301). Here, it is determined whether the variation pattern received this time is a variation pattern command for special figure 2 (S3302). If it is determined that the variation pattern command is a variation pattern command for special figure 2 (S3302: Yes), then The special figure 2 change flag 223s is set to ON (S3303), the special figure change start flag is set to ON, and a change pattern is extracted from the received command (S3305), while the special figure 2 change pattern command is set. Is done.

  The variation start flag 223d (variation start flag for special figure) provided in the variation display of the special symbol is set to ON, the variation pattern type is extracted from the received variation pattern command (S3305), and the present process ends. . On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3301 that the variation pattern-related command received this time is not a special figure variation pattern command, the general figure variation start flag 223u is set to ON (S3306), and the received variation pattern The variation pattern type is extracted from the command (S3307), and the process ends. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223, and the fact that the variation pattern type is a special symbol variation pattern type for each special symbol type (corresponding first special symbol, second special symbol, ordinary symbol). In a variable display setting process (see FIG. 66) described later, the start of the special symbol variable display effect and the display mode of the special symbol variable display effect are stored in the variable display setting process (see FIG. 66) described later. It is used when notifying (when setting a variation pattern command for displaying a special symbol).

  Referring back to FIG. 61, the description will be continued. In the process of S3201, if it is determined that the variation pattern related command has not been received (S3201: No), it is determined whether or not a stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S3203). If it is determined that the stop type command (special figure 1 stop type command, or special figure 2 stop type command, or general figure stop type command) has been received (S3203: Yes), it corresponds to the type of the received command. The stop type selection flag 223e is set to ON (S3204). Specifically, when the special figure 1 stop type command is received, the stop type selection flag 223e corresponding to the first special symbol is set to ON, and when the special figure 2 stop type command is received, the second special type The stop type selection flag 223e corresponding to the symbol is set to ON, and when a general symbol stop type command is received, the stop type selection flag 223e corresponding to the ordinary symbol is set ON.

  After finishing the process of S3204, next, the type of stop (one of complete out (out), out of reach, small hit, big hit (hit)) is extracted from the received stop type command (S3205), and this process is executed. finish. The stop type extracted in the process of S3205 is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113. It is referred to when a later-described variable display setting process (see FIG. 66) is executed, and is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display controller 114 of the stop type of the variable effect.

  If it is determined in the process of S3203 that the stop type command has not been received (S3203: No), it is determined whether or not a pending ball count command has been received from the main control device 110 (S3206). When it is determined that the reserved ball number command has been received (S3206: Yes), the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110 included in the received reserved ball number command. (I.e., the number of spheres on the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is extracted, and the corresponding value provided in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in accordance with the extracted counter value. The counter value is updated (S3207). More specifically, when the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is extracted, the extracted counter value is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223, and the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is stored. When the value is extracted, the extracted counter value is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c.

  Note that in the process of S3207. When a normal symbol holding ball number command indicating the number of holding balls of a normal symbol is received, a value of a normal symbol holding ball number counter (not shown) (that is, the number of holding balls in the variable display of the normal symbol) is extracted and extracted. The corresponding counter value provided in the RAM 223 of the sound ramp control device 113 is also updated according to the counter value thus set.

  When the process of S3207 is completed, a process related to the number of reserved balls is executed (S3208). In the reserved ball count related process (S3208), a process for setting various flags and display commands based on the reserved ball count in the special figure 2 is executed. Here, the processing related to the number of reserved balls (S3208) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the contents of the reserved ball number related processing (S3208).

  When the reserved ball count related processing (S3208) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not there is an update of the special 2 (special figure 2) reserved ball count (S3401). Here, if it is determined that there is no update of the special 2 reserved ball count (S3401: No), that is, if the currently received reserved ball number command is not the reserved ball number of the special figure 2, the present process is terminated as it is. . On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3401 that the number of special 2 reserved balls has been updated (S3401: Yes), it is determined whether the number of special 2 reserved balls has been updated to 1 (S3402). Here, it is determined whether the number of special 2 reserved balls has been updated to 1, that is, whether the number of special 2 reserved balls has shifted from "0" to "1", that is, whether there has been no special 2 reserved balls or not. I do.

  In the process of S3402, when it is determined that the number of special 2 reserved balls has been updated to 1 (S3402: Yes), the special 2 reserved flag 223n is set to ON, and then the end effect execution flag 223x is set to ON. It is determined whether it has been performed (S3404). If it is determined that the end effect execution flag 223x is set to ON, that is, if it is determined that the end effect (see FIG. 19B) is being executed on the third symbol display device 81, (S3404: Yes), the display victory command is set (S3405), and this processing ends.

  When the display victory command is set, the character of "victory" is displayed as the effect of the end effect performed by the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 20A), which is advantageous to the player. It is notified that the state continues. Note that if a ball wins in special figure 2 during the period in which the end effect is being executed, the effect may be switched even during the end effect, or the effect may be determined in advance as in the present embodiment. At the end of the end effect performed for a given period, it may be notified that the ball has won the special figure 2.

  Further, as in the present embodiment, the timing at which the ball has won the special figure 2 (second ball entrance 640) and the effect that the ball has won the special figure 2 (second ball entrance 640) as an effect are notified. If there is a possibility that a time lag may occur at the timing of the execution, for example, during the end effect execution period, the reserved symbol for displaying the number of reserved balls of the special figure 2 may be deleted. Thus, it is possible to prevent the player from being notified of the effect of the end effect due to the increase in the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 even though the end effect is continuing.

  Returning to FIG. 63, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S3402 that the number of special 2 reserved balls has not been updated to 1 (S3402: No), it is next determined whether the number of special 2 reserved balls has been updated to the upper limit (4) (S3406). If it is determined that the information has been updated (S3406: Yes), the special 2 suspension upper limit flag 223p is set to ON (S3407: Yes), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3406 that the number of special 2 reserved balls has not been updated to the upper limit, the processing of S3407 is skipped and the present processing ends.

  Here, the pending ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (start winning) or when the ball passes through the through gate 67. Therefore, every time there is a winning start, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the audio lamp control device 113 are changed by the processing of S2210 to the main control device. 110 can be adjusted to the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e. Therefore, due to the influence of noise or the like, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed to the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 or the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223c. Even if the value deviates from the value of the symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e, if the reserved ball number command is notified based on the start winning, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b or the special symbol of the sound lamp control device 113 is provided. The value of the 2 reserved balls counter 223c can be corrected to match the value of the special symbol 1 reserved balls counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved balls counter 203e of the main controller 110.

  If it is determined in the processing of S3206 that the pending ball count command has not been received (S3206: No), it is determined whether a winning information related command has been received from the main control device 110 (S3209). In the process of S3209, when it is determined that the prize information related command has been received (S3209: Yes), the prize information related process is executed (S3210). In the winning information-related processing (S3210), setting of various flags and setting of various counters that are referred to for setting various effects performed by the third symbol display device 81 are performed. Thereby, based on the lottery result of the special symbol on hold, before the change of the special symbol on hold is started (that is, the special symbol executed before the change of the target special symbol) During the variable display), it is possible to execute an effect indicating the lottery result of the special symbol that has transmitted the winning information command, and the lottery result of one special symbol is provided to the player by using the variable display period of a plurality of special symbols. A suggestion can be given, and the effect of the production can be enhanced.

  Here, the winning information related processing (S3210) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the contents of the winning information-related processing (S3210). When the prize information related processing (S3210) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the prize information related command received this time is a prize information command relating to a special figure (special symbol) (S3501). If it is determined that the command is a prize information command related to a special figure (S3501: Yes), the received prize information command is stored in the special figure prize information storage area 223a (S3502), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S3501, if it is determined that the prize information related command received this time is not a prize information command relating to a special figure (special symbol) (a prize information command relating to a general figure) (S3501: No), a prize is won. The information is stored in the public figure prize information storage area 223t (S3503), and the process ends.

  Note that, in a gaming machine on which special symbol prize information (special symbol pre-reading) and ordinary symbol prize information (common symbol pre-reading) are executed, the main control device 110 outputs the voice lamp control device 113. When the output timings of the respective winning information commands become the same, when determining by the winning information related processing (S3210), priorities are set for the respective winning information commands, and only the winning information commands with a higher priority are determined. It may be configured as follows. This eliminates the need to execute different determination processing for each of the winning information commands, thereby reducing the processing load, and making the type and number of the winning information commands determined by the voice lamp control device 113 irregular. Therefore, the effect that the player does not intend can be easily executed.

  That is, the prize information included in the prize information command is obtained when the main controller 110 enters the ball into each of the entrances (the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640) or the through gate 67. Each of the counter values obtained is a result of performing a determination in advance before the lottery based on the entering ball is performed or information indicating a value based on the counter value. Even if the player does not reliably acquire the prize information command, there is no hindrance to the game, so if the predetermined condition is satisfied (the special prize information command and the general-purpose prize information command are received at the same time) In this case, the above-described effect can be obtained by intentionally not acquiring one of the winning information commands. Further, in a configuration in which a plurality of conditions (balls) for obtaining one symbol (first special symbol) exist, such as the left first ball entrance 64a and the right first ball entrance 64b of the present embodiment, a prize is won. The information command includes information that allows the voice lamp control device 113 to identify the winning information command based on which of the acquisition conditions is satisfied, and performs processing based on the winning information command based on the identification result. May be varied. Specifically, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives a winning information command based on a ball entering the first left ball entrance 64a, an effect based on the received winning information command (a so-called look-ahead effect). May be performed more frequently than when a prize information command based on a ball entering the first right ball entrance 64b is received. This makes it possible to easily change the frequency at which the pre-reading effect is executed even for the same first special symbol. According to the configuration shown in the example described above, during a game aiming at the left first entrance 64a (left-handed game), a prefetch effect based on the first special symbol can be executed (frequently executed), and the right first During a game aiming at the entrance 64b (right-handed game), the prefetching effect based on the first special symbol may be difficult to execute (can be executed with a low probability). Thereby, it is possible to set an effect mode according to the game state.

  Referring back to FIG. 61, the description will be continued. In the process of S3209, when it is determined that the winning information related command has not been received (S3209: No), it is determined whether the next winning related command has been received (S3211). When a hit-related command is received (S3211: Yes), a hit-related process (S3212) is executed.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 65, the hit-related processing (S3212) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the hit-related processing (S3212). The hit-related process (S3212) is a process executed when it is determined in the command determination process (see FIG. 61) that a hit-related command has been received.

  In the hit-related process, first, it is determined whether or not a big hit start command has been received (S3601). If it is determined that the jackpot start command has been received (S3601: Yes), a display jackpot start command is set (S3602), and this processing ends. The display jackpot start command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S3102) of the main process (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. When receiving the display jackpot start command, the display control device 114 displays an effect indicating (notifying) the start of the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot start command has not been received (S3601: No), then it is determined whether a round number command has been received (S3603). In the process of S3603, when it is determined that the round number command has been received (S3603: Yes), 1 is added to the round number accumulation counter (S3604). After that, a display round number command is set based on the round number accumulation counter (S3605), and the process ends.

  If it is determined in the processing of S3603 that the round number command has not been received (S3603: No), it is determined whether or not a jackpot end command has been received (S3606). In the process of S3606, when it is determined that the big hit end command has been received (S3606: Yes), a big hit end command for display is set (S3607), and this process ends.

  In the process of S3606, when it is determined that the big hit end command has not been received (S3606: No), it is determined whether or not the small hit start command has been received (S3608).

  In the process of S3608, if it is determined that the small hit start command has been received (S3608: Yes), the small hit start command for display is set based on the small hit type (S3609), and this process ends. If it is determined in the processing of S3608 that the small hit start command has not been received (S3608: No), it is determined whether a small hit end command has been received (S3610).

  In the process of S3610, when it is determined that the small hit end command has been received (S3610: Yes), a display small hit end command is set to execute an effect indicating the end of the small hit game (S3611). Then, the present process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3610 that the small hit end command has not been received (S3610: No), it is determined whether or not a V-pass command has been received (S3612).

  If it is determined in the processing of S3612 that the V-pass command has been received (S3612: Yes), a process based on the ball entry into the V-win switch 650e3 of the second variable winning device 650 is executed, and the display V-pass command is displayed. Is set (S3613), and this process ends. In the present embodiment, there is provided a measuring means for measuring the number of times the V-pass command has been received during the period in which the connected-in-flight flag 223i is set to ON. The V-pass command can be set. Specifically, the display V-pass command is set so that the privilege effect is executed only when the number of times of measurement by the measuring means exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 10 times). This allows the player to aim for more V passes, and allows the player to enthusiastically play the game.

  Note that other conditions may be set as conditions for setting the content of the display V pass command. For example, the number of small hit games that did not pass through V and the number of small hit games that passed V are respectively set. A means for measuring and calculating the ratio may be provided, and the content of the display V-pass command may be set based on the ratio calculated by the means. Thereby, a player who has performed many small hit games that do not pass through V performs an effect that congratulates the player when V passes, or a player that performs small hit games that have passed V at a high rate. Or an effect that congratulates him or her.

  If it is determined in the processing of S3612 that the V-pass command has not been received (S3612: No), this processing ends.

  Referring back to FIG. 61, the description will be continued. In the process of S3211, if it is determined that a hit-related command has not been received (S3211: No), it is next determined whether a notification command has been received (S3213). If it is determined that the notification command has been received in the process of S3213 (S3213: Yes), the notification voice is set, the display command for notification is set (S3214), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3213, when it is determined that the notification command has not been received (S3213: No), it is determined whether a status command has been received (S3215). If it is determined that the status command has been received (S3215: Yes), the status information based on the received status command is stored in the status storage area 223k (S3216), and the process ends. The status commands received here include a normal status command for indicating that the gaming state is the normal status, a big hit status command for indicating that the gaming status is the big hit status, and a gaming status of the small hit status. A small hitting state command to indicate that the game is in progress, a time saving state command to indicate that the gaming state is the time saving state, that the electric accessory 640a is operating, and how many times the operation is being performed. Is a state command related to a game state that can be grasped on the main control device 110 side, such as an operation state command for indicating the game state.

  The state command described above is configured to be received from main controller 110 when the gaming state is shifted. Thus, it is possible to suppress the process of determining the content of the received status command from being complicated and reduce the processing load. When a power failure or the like occurs and the data in the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is erased, the status command currently set in the power failure recovery processing is output. Note that the output timing of the state command is not limited to this, and the currently set gaming state may be periodically output, or the gaming state satisfies a specific output condition without being shifted. In such a case (for example, at the timing when a predetermined round is reached during a jackpot game, or at the timing when the number of times the special symbol changes reaches a predetermined number in the normal state), a state command may be output. Thereby, the current game state can be grasped more reliably on the sound lamp control device 113 side.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3215 that no status command has been received (S3215: No), then processing according to another command is executed (S3217). In the process of S3217, for example, it is determined whether a stop command has been received from the main control device 110. If it is determined that the stop command has been received, a display stop command is set based on the received command, When a ball entry command is set based on the fact that a ball has entered a ball entry port provided on the board 13, the number of entered balls is accumulated for each type of entry port where the ball has entered. , A process of setting the number-of-balls-for-display command.

  Next, the variable display setting process (S3113) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting processing (S3113). The variable display setting process (S3113) is one of the main processes (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. As described above, the variable display setting process (see FIG. 66) is a process executed to display a variable display effect on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, in the present embodiment, each symbol (special figure 1, special figure 2, ordinary figure) corresponding to the main symbol mainly rendered and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the set rendering state. Designed to be variable. In the variation display setting process, a variation pattern command for display is set for each of the above-described symbols, and the display control device 114 is notified. Then, the main symbol (the symbol to be displayed in the first display area Dm) and the secondary symbol (the second symbol) are displayed by the display control device 114 based on the received display variation pattern command and the content of the received display effect state command. The effect display corresponding to the symbol (the symbol to be displayed in the display area Dn) is displayed. Thus, the processing load of the sound lamp control device 113 can be reduced in a gaming machine in which different effect displays are performed corresponding to a plurality of effect states.

  In the variation display setting process (S3113), first, it is determined whether the special figure variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S3701). When it is determined that the special figure change start flag 223d is off (S3701: No), the process shifts to the step S3707 because the change pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure change start flag 223d is on (S3701: Yes), the detailed mode of the change display of the current special symbol based on the change pattern command received from the main controller 110 is described. Of each of S3702 to S3706 for determining the

  More specifically, first, the special figure change start flag 223d is set to off (S3702), and then the extracted change pattern is acquired (S3703), and it is determined whether the time reduction flag 223g is on (S3703). S3704). If it is determined in the process of S3704 that the mid-hours flag 223g is on (S3704: Yes), then the mid-hours flag is set to off (S3705), and a special figure display variation pattern command is set (S3705). S3706), and shifts to the processing of S3707. On the other hand, in the process of S3704, if it is determined that the mid-hours flag 223g is not on (is off) (S3704: No), the process of S3705 is skipped and the process of S3706 is executed.

  When the process of S3706 is executed, 1 is subtracted from the value of the corresponding special symbol reserved ball number counter (special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b or special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c), and the subtracted value is obtained. Based on this, the data in the special figure prize information storage area 223a included in the command storage area is shifted.

  In the process of S3707, it is determined whether or not the flag indicating the stop type of the special figure among the stop type selection flags 223e of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S3707). When it is determined that the flag indicating the stop type of the special figure among the stop type selection flags 223e is off (S3707: No), the process proceeds to S3712. On the other hand, in the process of S3707, if it is determined that the flag indicating the stop type of the special figure among the stop type selection flags 223e is on (S3707: Yes), the (for special figure) stop type selection flag 223e is turned off. Is set (S3708), and the stop type extracted in the process of S3205 of the command determination process (see FIG. 61) is acquired (S3709), and the acquired stop type is set as it is (S3710). Then, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is set (S3711). After that, the normal figure fluctuation display setting processing (S3712) is executed, and this processing ends.

  This normal figure fluctuation display setting processing (S3712) is processing executed to display a fluctuation display effect on the third symbol display device 81 when a fluctuation pattern command related to general figure fluctuation is received from the main control device 110. Here, the ordinary figure fluctuation display setting processing (S3712) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ordinary figure change display setting process (S3712). When the ordinary figure variation display setting process (S3712) is executed, first, it is determined whether the ordinary figure variation start flag 223u is set to ON. Then, when it is determined that the general-purpose variation start flag 223u is off (S3801: No), it is in a state where the variation pattern command relating to the general illustration has not been received from the main controller 110, and the process proceeds to S3810. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the general-purpose variation start flag 223u is ON (S3801: Yes), the detailed mode of the variation display of the current special symbol based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 is described. Of each of S3802 to S3810 for determining the

  Note that among the various processes executed in the ordinary figure change display setting process (S3712) of FIG. 67, the portions where the same process as the change display setting process (S3113) described with reference to FIG. A detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the processing of S3801, if it is determined that the general-purpose variation start flag 223u is ON (S3801: Yes), the special figure S3702 and S3703 executed in the above-described variation display setting process (S3113) are performed. For the processing, the processing of S3802 and S3803 in which the target is changed to the ordinary figure is executed, and then it is determined whether or not the timing at which the fluctuation based on the received fluctuation pattern command is executed is a time saving state (S3804). Here, the determination is made based on the state information stored in the state storage area 223k and the remaining time reduction information stored in the remaining time reduction storage area 223h.

  In the process of S3804, when it is determined that the fluctuation start timing is in the time saving state (S3804: Yes), the timing at which the fluctuation based on the received fluctuation pattern command ends (in the case of a hit, the electric accessory 640a) It is determined whether or not the timing of setting the operation content of (1) is in the time saving state (S3805). Here, the difference between the time reduction remaining time information stored in the time reduction remaining time storage area 223h and the fluctuation time included in the obtained fluctuation pattern is calculated to determine the presence or absence of the time reduction state at the timing when the fluctuation ends. I do.

  In the process of S3805, when it is determined that the change end timing (the timing of starting the operation of the electric accessory 640a) is being reduced (S3805: Yes), the general-purpose enable flag 223q is set to ON (S3806). It is determined whether the end timing is within 2 seconds of the time saving end (S3807). In the process of S3807, if it is determined that the change end timing is within 2 seconds of the end of the working hours (S3807: Yes), the exchange flag 223v is set to ON (S3808), and the display change pattern command (for general drawing) ) Is set (S3810), and the flow shifts to the process of S3811.

  On the other hand, if No is determined in the processing of S3804 or S3805, the general-purpose flag 223q is set to off (S3809), and the flow shifts to the processing of S3810 described above. Also, in the process of S3807, if it is determined that the fluctuation end timing is not within 2 seconds of the time saving end (S3807: No), the process of S3808 is skipped and the process shifts to the process of S3810.

  Next, the processing of S3811 to S3815 similar to S3707 to S3711 described above with reference to FIG. 66 is executed, and this processing ends. Note that the processing executed in S3811 to S3815 is that the target of the stop type command is a special type stop type command in S3707 to S3711 and a general type stop type command in S3811 to S3815. Only the differences are the same, and the other contents are the same. Therefore, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Next, the effect state setting process (S3114) executed in the main process (see FIG. 60) of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the contents of the effect state setting process (S3114). The effect state setting process (S3114) is a process for setting the effect state according to the state command output from the main control device 110 and the current game situation, and sets the effect state set in the present process. By outputting the information (display effect state command for display) to the display control device 114, the display mode of each symbol (special figure 1, special figure 2, ordinary figure) on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, The display mode of the number of reserved storages (the number of reserved symbols) of each symbol is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the effect state.

  When the effect state setting processing (S3114) is executed, first, state information (game state) stored in the state storage area 223k is read (S3901). This status information is stored in the status storage area 223k based on the status command received from the main control device 110 in the above-described command determination processing (see S3112 in FIG. 61). Therefore, it is used to determine the current game state on the sound lamp control device 113 side.

  Next, referring to the status information stored in the status storage area 223k, it is determined whether the current status information (the status information stored in the status storage area 223k) indicates the start of a big hit (S3902). Here, if it is determined that it indicates the start of the big hit (S3902: Yes), the extended-village flag 223i is set to ON (S3903), and the processing shifts to S3918. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3902 that the signal does not indicate the start of the jackpot (S3902: No), it is determined whether the signal indicates the end of the jackpot (S3904).

  In the process of S3904, if it is determined that it indicates the end of the jackpot (S3904: Yes), it is determined whether to shift to the time saving state after the end of the jackpot (S3905). The determination in S3905 is made based on the jackpot type information stored in the state storage area 223k. In the process of S3905, if it is determined that the shift to the time saving state is made (S3905: Yes), the middle time saving flag 223g is set to ON (S3906), and thereafter, the process proceeds to S3918.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3905 that the shift to the time saving state is not to be made (S3905: No), the extended holiday flag 223i is set to off (S3907), and the privilege effect execution flag 223w is set to off (S3908). The end effect execution flag 223x is set to off (S3909), and the flow shifts to the process of S3918.

  If it is determined in the processing of S3904 that the time does not indicate the end of the jackpot (S3904: No), it is next determined whether or not it is time to end the time-saving state (S3910). If it is determined that it is time to end the time saving state (S3910: Yes), then the special 2 hold flag 223n for determining whether or not the second special symbol (special figure 2) is stored is set to ON. It is determined whether it has been performed (S3911). Here, if it is determined that the special 2 hold flag 223n is not on (is off) (S3911: No), the in-house flag 223i is set to off (S3912), and the process shifts to S3918. Also, when it is determined that the special 2 hold flag 223n is set to ON (S3911: Yes), the process similarly proceeds to S3918.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot is started, the extended-village flag 223i is set to ON, and when the time-saving state is not given after the end of the jackpot, or when the time-saving state ends, When the hold storage is “0”, the in-house flag 223i is set to off. Thereby, while the jackpot game, the time saving state, and the state where the change (lottery) of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed when the time saving state shifts to the normal state are repeatedly executed. (During a specific period that is advantageous to the player), the in-house flag 223i can be continuously set to ON. Therefore, by measuring various values (for example, the number of times the jackpot has been executed, the number of acquired balls, and the like) during the period in which the extended holiday flag 223i is turned on, various values in the extended holiday mode can be easily obtained. In the pachinko machine 10 having the extended game mode in which the game machine shifts to a plurality of different game states, the processing can be simplified.

  Returning to FIG. 68, the description will be continued. In the process of S3910, if it is determined that the timing is not the end of the time saving state (not the time saving end timing) (S3910: No), it is determined whether it is the small hit start timing (S3913), and the small hit start timing is determined. If it is determined that there is (S3913: Yes), it is determined whether the current state is the normal state (S3914). In the process of S3914, when it is determined that the current state is the normal state (S3914: Yes), the pseudo effect flag 223r is set to ON (S3915), and the process proceeds to S3918. On the other hand, if it is determined that the current state is not the normal state (the time saving state) in the process of S3914 (S3914: No), the process of S3915 described above is skipped and the process proceeds to S3918.

  In the process of S3913, when it is determined that the present is not the small hit start timing (S3913: No), it is next determined whether the present is the small hit end timing (S3916), and when it is the small hit end timing. (S3916: Yes), the pseudo effect flag 223r is set to off (S3917), and the flow shifts to the process of S3918. Here, in the case of the small hit end timing, when it is determined that the pseudo effect flag 223r is not set to ON (that is, the small hit end timing executed during the time saving state), the process proceeds to S3917. The process shifts to S3918 without executing the process.

  In the process of S3916, when it is determined that the present time is not the small hit end timing (S3916: No), the process proceeds to S3918. In the processing of S3918, the current effect state is selected based on the effect state selection table 222b (S3918). Then, a display effect state command indicating the selected effect state is set (S3919), and the process ends.

  Next, the specific effect setting process (S3115) executed in the main process (see FIG. 60) of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing the contents of the specific effect determination process (S3115). The specific effect setting process (S3115) is a process for setting a display command for displaying the specific effect on the third symbol display device 81 when the specific condition is satisfied.

  In the first embodiment, a bonus effect that is executed when the number of reserved memories (the number of reserved balls) of the second special symbol (special figure 2) reaches the upper limit (four) during the time saving state (see FIG. 21). When the second special symbol (special figure 2) is not held and stored in the time reduction state, and the remaining period of the time reduction state (variable remaining period of special figure 1) becomes a predetermined period (10 seconds). (See FIG. 19B) is executed as a specific effect.

  Note that, when the display control device 114 receives the display command indicating the content of the specific effect, the display mode corresponding to the received specific effect content regardless of the variable display state of each symbol (whether or not the symbol is changing). Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  When the specific effect setting processing (S3115) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the extended holiday flag 223i is set to ON (S4001), and the extended holiday flag 223i is not set to ON (set to OFF). Is determined) (S4001: No), the process ends. If it is determined that the extended-village flag 223i is set to ON (S4001: Yes), then it is determined whether the privilege effect execution flag 223w is set to ON (S4002), and the flag is set to ON. If it is determined that there is no (S4002: No), it is determined whether the special 2 suspension upper limit flag 223p is set to ON (S4003).

  In the process of S4003, if the special 2 suspension upper limit flag 223p is set to ON (S4003: Yes), a display privilege effect command is set (S4004), and the privilege effect execution flag 223w is set to ON (S4005). ), End this processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special 2 suspension upper limit flag 223p is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S4003: No), or in the process of S4002, the privilege effect execution flag 223w is already set to ON. If it is determined that the process has been performed (S4002: Yes), the process proceeds to S4006.

  In the processing of S4006, it is determined whether or not the end effect execution flag 223x is set to ON (S4006). Here, when it is determined that the end effect execution flag 223x is not set to on (set to off) (S4006: No), it is then determined whether the special 2 suspension flag 223n is set to on. If it is determined that the special 2 hold flag 223n is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S4007; No), it is determined whether the remaining time reduction period is 10 seconds (S4008). ).

  In the process of S4008, the information indicating the remaining time saving time period stored in the remaining time saving time period storage area 223h is read and the discrimination is executed. In the processing of S4008, when it is determined that the remaining time reduction period is 10 seconds (S4008: Yes), the display-house end effect command is set (S4009), and the end effect execution flag 223x is set to ON (S4010). ), End this processing.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S4006 that the end effect execution flag 223x is set to ON (S4006: Yes), or when the special 2 suspension flag 223n is set to ON in the processing of S4007 (S4007) : Yes), skips the processing of S4008 to S4010, and ends this processing as it is.

  As described above, in the specific effect setting process (S3315) according to the present embodiment described with reference to FIG. 69, the state in which the in-house flag 223i is set to ON as the first specific effect. When the special 2 reservation upper limit flag 223p is set to ON during the (time saving state) (when the number of reserved storages in the special figure 2 reaches the upper limit), the bonus effect (see FIG. 22) is executed. I have. By executing this privileged effect, a high value-added effect can be provided to the player, so that the player can be motivated to play a game during the time reduction state. Further, when the privilege effect is executed, the main figure Dmc is no longer displayed, so that the number of reserved storage of the special figure 2 cannot be increased (the number of reserved storage of the special figure 2 has already reached the upper limit). In the state), it is possible to suppress the effect of inflating the entry of the ball into the second entrance 640, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

  Furthermore, since the above-described privilege effect is configured to be continuously executed until the extended-mode flag 223i is set to OFF (until the extended-mode is completed), the added value is added to the player. Can be provided for a long period of time (at least until the number of reserved memories in Toku-zu 2 is exhausted), and the high value-added production ends in a short period of time, and the player is willing to play. Can be suppressed.

  Further, as a second specific effect, the reserved memory of the special figure 2 is not acquired during the state in which the extended holiday flag 223i is set to ON (time saving state) (the number of reserved memories of the special figure 2 is “ 0), and when the remaining period of the time saving state reaches a predetermined period (10 seconds remaining), an end effect (see FIG. 19 (b)) suggesting that the extended mode is ended. It is configured to be executed. With such a configuration, the player can easily understand the possibility of the end of the extended game mode, and the period (the extended mode) that is advantageous to the player ends without noticing. It can be suppressed that such a problem occurs.

  Next, a counter updating process (S3111) executed in the main process (see FIG. 60) of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing the contents of the counter update processing (S3111). This counter updating process (S3111) is a process for updating the value of the variable time counter 223j and calculating the elapsed time (remaining time) of the executed variable display. Information (remaining time reduction command for display) relating to the remaining time (reduction time reduction time) of the fluctuation time referred to here is output to the display control device 114 and displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The sound lamp control device 113 is referred to when setting the effect contents.

  When the counter updating process (S3111) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the current value of the variable time counter 223j is “0” (S4101). When it is determined that the value is “0” (S4101: Yes), that is, when the value of the variation time counter 223j is not updated (state in which the special figure 1 variation during the time saving state is not executed), It is determined whether the current time is during working hours (during working hours) (S4102). Here, the determination is made based on the state information stored in the state storage area 223k.

  In the process of S4102, if it is determined that the current time is short (S4102: Yes), it is next determined whether or not it is time to start the change of the special figure 1 (S4103). If it is determined that the timing to start the change (S4103: Yes), the value of the change time counter 223j is set to “1” (S4104), and the remaining change time is set based on the value of the change time counter 223j. A period (remaining time reduction period) is calculated, and information indicating the calculated remaining time reduction period is stored in the remaining time reduction period storage area 223h (S4105).

  After that, a display time reduction remaining period command is set (S4106), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S4102, when it is determined that the current time is not during the time reduction (in the time reduction state) (S4102: No), or in the process of S4103, it is determined that the present time is not the start timing of the special figure 1 change (S4103: No) In S4103 to S4106, the process is skipped and the process ends.

  In the process of S4101, when it is determined that the value of the fluctuation time counter 223j is not “0” (S4101: No), that is, a state in which the value of the fluctuation time counter 223j has already been updated (the special figure 1 in the time saving state). In a state where the fluctuation is being performed, it is determined whether the value of the fluctuation time counter 223j is “150,000” (whether 150 seconds have elapsed) (S4107). Here, when it is determined that the value of the fluctuation time counter 223j is not “150,000” (“less than 150000”) (S4107: Yes), the value of the fluctuation time counter 223j is incremented by “1” (S4108). Then, the flow shifts to the process in S4105 described above. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4107 that the value of the fluctuation time counter 223j is “150,000” (S4107: Yes), the value of the fluctuation time counter 223j is set to “0” (S4109), and Move on to processing.

  In the present embodiment, since the variation pattern (variation time) of the special figure 1 executed during the time saving state is all defined as “150 seconds” regardless of the lottery result of the special figure 1, FIG. As shown, the upper limit of the value of the fluctuation time counter 223j is set to “150,000” corresponding to “150 seconds”, but the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) of the special figure 1 executed during the time reduction state is divided into a plurality of fluctuation patterns ( In the case of the pachinko machine 10 configured to be selected from (variation time), the upper limit of the variation time counter 223j can be reset based on the content of the variation pattern to be executed (set variation time). It may be configured to determine whether or not the value of the variable time counter 223j being updated has reached the set upper limit.

<Regarding the control processing of the display control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly classified into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interruption processing that is executed when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, and a one-frame processing performed by the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes a main process, and executes a command interrupt process or a V interrupt process in accordance with reception of a command or detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed simultaneously, command reception processing is executed with priority. Thus, the V interrupt processing can be executed by quickly reflecting the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  First, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing the main processing. The main process is to execute an initialization process when the power is turned on.

  The activation of the main processing is specifically performed according to the following flow. When the power is supplied from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to “0000H” by the hardware configuration, and , The address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address designated to the bus line 240 is “0000H”, the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 starts the main processing by fetching the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starting execution of the processing corresponding to the fetched instruction.

  Here, if all boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address specified for the bus line 240 is “0000H”. Upon detection, one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a great deal of time from reading to setting in the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address “0000H” and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H”. It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, since the time required to start up the MPU 231 becomes longer, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, a predetermined number of instructions from the instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released from the boot program are stored in the NOR ROM 234d, so that the NOR ROM can operate at high speed. Since the memory is a memory from which data can be read, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the main processing in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  When the main process is executed as described above, first, a boot process executed by a boot program is executed (S5001), and the display control device 114 is configured to execute various controls on the third symbol display device 81. Start

  Here, the boot process (S5001) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S5001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and the fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine but stored in the third symbol display device 81. The data of the image to be displayed is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing the data. Since the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a small area and a large capacity, not only image data but also a control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure rate due to the increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, since the reading speed of the NAND flash memory is low especially when random access is performed, the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be degraded. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table The process of transferring and storing the data to the storage area 233b is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the above-mentioned hardware operation of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, after the system reset is released, a boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c is used. Of the control programs stored in the two program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S5101). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S5102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot program included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S5101.

  Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the processing of S5102, the MPU 231 executes various processing while reading out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetches the instruction, but reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute a process for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S5102, the instruction pointer 231a is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program started to be executed by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and the fixed value data, which have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a, are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S5103). Specifically, the control program and a part of the fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. The data is transferred to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S5104), the instruction pointer 231a is executed after the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of the boot process (see S5001 in FIG. 71). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the initialization process to be performed (see S5002 in FIG. 71) (S5105), the execution of the boot program is completed, and the boot process is completed.

  By executing the boot process (S5001) in this manner, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. The data is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address. Thereafter, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. And execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control program and fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out a control program and fixed value data from a work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high readout speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect unit.

  On the other hand, the entire boot program is not stored in the NOR ROM 234d, but a predetermined number of instructions from the first to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored. Even if the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR-type ROM 234d having a very small capacity. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortened time. Can be.

  In the boot processing shown in FIG. 72, the predetermined amount of the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the processing of S5101 includes all the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although the configuration is not limited to this, the predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S5101 is a boot program that executes a boot process to be processed following the process of S5102. It may be a part of. The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and furthermore, sets the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer. 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S5103 to S5105 may be executed by all remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  The boot program transferred in the process of S5101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently transfers the part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the beginning. Processing for setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount. Processing for setting the head address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S5101. After repeating the processing a plurality of times including the processing of S5102, the processing of S5103 to S5105 may be executed.

  Thereby, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at one time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. By using the boot program, the data can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the case where a part of the boot program executed first by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released from the boot program is stored in the first program storage area 234d1, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when starting the boot process, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S5103 to S5105 without performing the processes of S5101 and S5102. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, so that the number of times of transferring the program to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231 that can be performed after the boot process can be started more quickly.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. When the boot process is completed, an initialization process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S5002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings for the registers in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set in the respective flags. Note that “off” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag unless otherwise specified.

  Furthermore, in the initial setting process, after performing the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And execution of display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, first, an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thus, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 can check whether or not an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the activation can be started normally.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S5003). The transfer instruction includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on, the information of the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer instruction. The image is transferred to the image area 235a.

  Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving the transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can recognize that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction has ended. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 stores the transfer end information indicating the transfer end in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a partial area of the built-in memory. You may write it. Then, the MPU 231 reads out the information of the register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed by detecting the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237. You may do so.

  The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a ends based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S5003, the power-on fluctuation image Is transmitted to the image controller so that the image data corresponding to the image data is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S5004). The transfer instruction includes a start address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is stored, a data size of the image data, information of a transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235). And the start address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, which is the transfer destination, and the image controller reads the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. The image is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. The image data transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  Upon completion of the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b based on the transmission instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the processing of S5004, the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (S5005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 82A) described later, all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. A resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to perform the transfer is executed (see S6502 in FIG. 82A).

  Also, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It is kept on until it ends. Thereby, in the meantime, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 73 (b)), a simple image such as a power-on main image or a power-on fluctuation image (not shown) which is a power-on image is drawn. Command determination processing (see S5308 in FIG. 73B) and simple display setting processing (see S5309 in FIG. 73B) are executed.

  As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a as the character ROM 234, all image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, first, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third video RAM 235. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person in charge of the hall operates at the time of turning on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display controller 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player stays in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying that the operation has not stopped.

  Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. Can be immediately confirmed, and the use of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed as the character ROM 234 can prevent the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

  Further, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the power-on fluctuation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after the power is turned on. Since the player has started the game while being displayed on the display device 81, there is a ball (start winning) in the first ball entrance 64, and the start instruction of the variable effect is issued by the main controller 110 by the sound lamp control. If it is through the device 113, that is, if a display variation pattern command is received, a power-on variation image (not shown) is immediately displayed during the variation effect period to perform a simple variation effect. be able to. Therefore, even when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player can reliably confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple variable effect.

  As described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. Is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the transfer takes a long time, and therefore, the time during which the main image is displayed at power-on after power-on is also long. However, in the pachinko machine 10, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Immediately after, for example, while the main image is being displayed at the time of power-on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the processing in S5005, interruption permission is set (S5006), and thereafter, the main processing executes an infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Thus, after the interruption permission is set by the processing of S5006, the command interruption processing and the V interruption processing are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interruption signal.

  Next, a command interruption process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 73A is a flowchart showing the command interruption processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interruption process.

  In this command interruption process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in a command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S5201), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt processing are read out by a command determination processing or a simple command determination processing of a V interrupt processing described later, and processing according to the command is performed.

  Next, the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 73B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 36) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

  As described above, the execution of the V interrupt processing is started when a V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal generated every 20 milliseconds in the image controller 237 when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed, and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt processing in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction of the next image at a stage where the image drawing processing or the display processing is not completed, so that the image controller 237 starts drawing a new image during drawing of the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in the frame buffer storing the image information being displayed according to a new drawing instruction.

  Here, first, an outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt processing, as shown in FIG. 73 (b), it is first determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S5301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S5301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so it is not a power-on image (not shown) but a normal effect. In order to display an image on the third symbol display device 81, a command determination process (S5302) is performed, and then a display setting process (S5303) is performed.

  In the command determination process (S5302), the contents of the command from the audio ramp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interruption process are analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the display data table for demonstration or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination processing is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds at which the V interrupt processing is executed, and thus there is a high possibility that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the start of the fluctuation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display fluctuation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode of the variable effect and the type of stop selected by the main control device 110 or the sound lamp control device 113 are quickly grasped, and the effect image according to the mode is displayed. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of the command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In the display setting process (S5303), an image for one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81 based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S5302) and the like. Specify the contents of In addition, an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in accordance with a processing situation or the like, and a display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of the display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the display setting process is executed, a task process is executed (S5304). In this task process, the image is formed based on the contents of the next one frame image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S5303) or the simple display setting process (S5309). The type of sprite (display object) to be specified is specified, and various parameters required for drawing, such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

  Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S5305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. While the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is sent from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236, the image controller 237 also receives a continuous notice command or a rear image change command from the audio lamp control device 113. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview effect and the image data of the rear face image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 82 and 83.

  Next, a drawing process is executed (S5306). In this drawing processing, the type of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S5304), the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting processing (S5305) are used. The drawing list shown in FIG. 59 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Thus, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, an update process of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S5307). Then, the V interrupt processing ends. As a counter updated by the process of S5307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and is updated each time the V interrupt processing is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (for example, jackpot A, jackpot B, front-rear reach, reach other than front-rear reach, complete miss) Then, the stop type table corresponding to (chance chance) and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5301 that the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S5301: Yes), it means that transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display a power-on image (not shown) on the third symbol display device 81, a simple command determination process (S5308) is executed, and then a simple display setting process (S5309) is executed. Move on to processing.

  Next, details of the above-described command determination processing (S5302), which is one processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing.

  In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 74, first, it is determined whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S5401). If there is no unprocessed new command (S5401: No), The command determination processing ends, and the processing returns to the V interrupt processing. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S5401: Yes), a new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S5303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S5402). The type of each unprocessed command stored in the buffer area is analyzed (S5403).

  First, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S5404). If there is a display variation pattern command (S5404: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S5405), and returns to the process of S5401.

  Here, the variation pattern command processing (S5405) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 75A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This fluctuation pattern command processing is for executing processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the variation pattern command processing, first, the effect state stored in the effect state storage area 233k is read (S5501). Then, among the variable display data tables corresponding to the variable effect patterns indicated by the display variable pattern command, the variable display data table corresponding to the effect state read out by the processing of S5501 is determined, and the determined variable display data table is determined. The data is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5502).

  Here, since the determination of the start of the fluctuation in the main controller 110 is always made at least several seconds apart, no more than two display fluctuation pattern commands are received within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area. However, part of the command changes due to the influence of noise or the like, and another command is incorrectly displayed. It may be interpreted as a fluctuation pattern command. In the process of S5501, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area in preparation for such a case, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  If a fluctuation display data table corresponding to a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a fluctuation effect having a fluctuation time shorter than the set display data table is actually generated by the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, and there is a possibility that the player may feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, by setting the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern with the shortest fluctuation time in the display data table buffer 233d as in the present embodiment, in practice, the fluctuation display data table longer than the set display data table is set. Even when the fluctuation effect having time is instructed by the main control device 110, as described later, after the fluctuation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is finished, the main control device 110 Until the pattern command is received, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed. You can keep watching the fluctuations of the three symbols.

  Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S5502 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S5503). Then, among the data table determination flags provided for each variation display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table determination flag corresponding to the variation display data table set by the processing of S5502 is turned on, and other variation table data is set. The data table determination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to off (S5504). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table determination flag set in the process of S5503, it is easy to determine which variation pattern the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. You can judge.

  Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S5502, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the time counter 233h (S5505), and the pointer is set. 233f is initialized to 0 (S5506). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S5507), the variation pattern command ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing the variation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S5506, the display data table buffer 233d set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S5502 is updated. , Extract the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, specify the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, execute the transfer data table buffer 233e by the processing of S5503. The transfer data information specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the variable ROM display data table, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 from the normal video R. To be transferred to the image storage area 236a of M236, to control the image controller 237.

  In the display setting process, the time of the fluctuation effect specified in the fluctuation display data table is measured using the time counter 233h in which the time data is set by the processing of S5505, and when the fluctuation effect in the fluctuation display data table ends. When it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the display pattern command processing in the present embodiment, the display contents (effect contents) of the third symbol display device 81 are based on the display variation pattern command output (received) from the sound lamp control device 113. ) Is determined so that the display content (display mode of each symbol, display mode of the number of hold of each symbol) corresponding to the display effect state command for display (received) from the audio lamp control device 113 is determined. Make up. Thereby, as shown in FIGS. 15 to 22, it is possible to execute a display suitable for each effect state. Further, in order to determine the display effect state command and the display variation pattern command on the display control device 114 side and execute the process of determining the display content, the sound lamp control device 113 responds to each effect state. There is no need to set a display variation pattern command, and the processing load on the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, in the variation pattern command processing, the display content corresponding to the effect state is determined, and the determined display content is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a configuration, based on the display variation pattern command, the above-described display processing is performed on the display contents corresponding to all the effect states, and only the display contents corresponding to the currently set effect state are performed by the player. May be configured to be displayed in a viewable manner. Specifically, a display image layer is provided corresponding to each effect state, and a process of transmitting a layer other than the image layer corresponding to the set effect state is executed. Or the layer corresponding to the foreground. Accordingly, even when the effect state changes while the display based on the variation pattern command is being executed and the display content is changed, it is possible to immediately respond. Regarding an area (for example, the second display area Dn) in which the common display content is always displayed regardless of the set effect state, the display state is displayed on another layer, and the display effect state command is referred to. Instead, the display content may be determined only by the variation pattern command.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the process of S5404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S5404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among unprocessed commands (S5406). If there is a display variation type command (S5406: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (S5407), and the process returns to S5401.

  Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S5407) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 75B is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. The stop type command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the stop type command processing, first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (any of jackpot A, jackpot B, reach out of front and rear, reach other than front and back out, reach out completely, out of chance) indicated by the stop type command for display (S5601), and compares the stop type table with the value of the stop type counter updated each time the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 73 (b)) is executed. Finally, the stop symbol after the fluctuation effect displayed at 81 is set (S5602).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S5602 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is turned off. (S5603), terminates the stop type command processing, and returns to the command determination processing.

  Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the variation based on the data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the processing of S5602. In the above-described task processing (S5304), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the processing of S5602 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set in S5603, and the specified stop is determined. The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information obtained by the display setting process to the symbol. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, but before the drawing is performed in the third symbol display device 81, the normal video is read from the character ROM 234. Image data necessary for drawing can be transferred to the RAM 236. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness of drawing in the third symbol display device 81.

  Since the main controller 110 always determines the start of the change at least several seconds apart, the main controller 110 does not receive two or more display stop type commands within 20 milliseconds. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some of the commands change due to the influence of noise or the like, and another command is erroneously stopped for display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of step S5601, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area in preparation for such a case, it is assumed that the stop type is completely off, and the stop type is determined. Determine the table. Thereby, a stop symbol corresponding to complete departure is set by the processing of S5602.

  If a stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the third symbol display device 81 displays the "special symbol" even if it is actually "missing the special symbol". The stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit" is displayed, and the player misunderstands that the pachinko machine 10 has become a "special symbol big hit", which may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete departure as in the present embodiment, in fact, if the “special symbol jackpot” is reached, the stop of the complete departure is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Even if a symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "special symbol jackpot", so that the player can be pleased.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the process of S5406, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S5406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S5408). If there is an image change command (S5408: Yes), a back image change command process is executed (S5409), and the process returns to S5401.

  Here, the details of the back image change command processing (S5409) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 76A is a flowchart showing the back image change command processing. The rear image change command process executes a process corresponding to the rear image change command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the rear image change command processing, first, the rear image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing (S6503) of the change of the rear image due to the reception of the rear image change command in the ON state is set to ON (S5701). . Then, among the back image determination flags provided for each of the back image types (back A to C), the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is turned on, and the other back image The back image determination flag corresponding to the type is set to off (S5702), the back image change command process ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the normal image transfer setting processing, when it is detected that the rear image change flag set in the processing of S5701 is turned on, the rear image type after the change is specified from the rear image determination flag set in the processing of S5702. . When the specified rear image type is the rear surface B or the rear surface C, as described above, a part of the image data corresponding to those rear images is resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, a transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so as to transfer image data corresponding to a predetermined range of rear images from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  In the task processing, if it is specified to display any of the back surfaces A to C by the back type of the back image specified in the display data table, the back image discrimination flag set in S5702 indicates The type of the rear image to be displayed at the time is specified, the range of the rear image to be displayed is specified in accordance with the passage of time, and the RAM type (resident) which stores the image data corresponding to the range of the rear image is specified. Video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 for less than 20 milliseconds, the player does not receive two or more rear image change commands within 20 milliseconds. In this case, there should be no case where two or more rear image change commands are stored in the command buffer area. It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S5702, when it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the previously received back image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, one arbitrary back image change command may be extracted, and the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set the change according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the processing of S5408, if it is determined that there is no rear image change command (S5408: No), then, it is determined whether or not there is an error command among unprocessed commands (S5410). If it is (S5410: Yes), an error command process is executed (S5411), and the process returns to S5401.

  Here, the details of the error command processing (S5411) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 76B is a flowchart showing the error command processing. This error command process executes a process corresponding to the error command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S5801). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S5802). The process ends, and returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S5801, the type of error that occurred is determined from the error determination flag set by the process of S5802, and the corresponding error type is determined. The processing is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in step S5802, error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that a player or a person related to the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence state of the error.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the processing of S5410, when it is determined that there is no error command (S5410: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display effect state command among the unprocessed commands (S5412), and the display effect is performed. If there is a state command (S5412: Yes), the effect state information based on the received command is stored in the effect state storage area 233k (S5413), and the process returns to S5401.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the processing of S5412, when it is determined that there is no display effect state command (S5412: No), it is determined whether there is a hit-related command (S5440). In the process of S5440, when it is determined that there is a hit-related command (S5440: Yes), the hit-related command process is executed (S5441), and the process returns to S5401. On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S5440 that there is no hit-related command (S5440: No), other command processing is executed (S5414), and the process returns to S5401.

  In the processing of S5401 that is executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S5401: Yes) ), And execute the processing of S5402 to S5413 and S5419 again. Until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, the processing of S5401 to S5413 and S5419 is repeatedly executed. If it is determined in the processing of S5401 that there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, this processing is performed. The command determination processing ends.

  The simple command determination process (S5308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 73B) is the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, a command necessary to display an image at power-on (not shown), that is, a display variation pattern command and a display variation pattern command, is selected from unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. Only the stop type command is extracted, and a variation pattern command process (see FIG. 75 (a)) and a stop type command process (see FIG. 75 (b)), which are processes corresponding to each command, are executed. With respect to this command, the processing corresponding to the command is discarded without being executed.

  Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 75A) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the power-on variation image is stored in the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S5501. The image data of the main image at power-on and the fluctuation image at power-on that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S5502, a process of writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233b and clearing the contents is performed.

  Next, the details of the hit-related command processing (S5441) will be described with reference to FIG. The hit-related command process (S5441) is a process executed when it is determined that there is a hit-related command in the command determination process (see FIG. 146).

  In the hit-related command processing (S5441), first, it is determined whether or not there is a display big hit start command (S5901). If it is determined in the processing of S5901 that there is a display hit start command (S5901: Yes), the big hit start command processing is executed (S5902), and the flow shifts to the processing of S5903.

  Here, the details of the jackpot start command process (S5902) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 78 (a) is a flowchart showing the jackpot start command process (S5902). The jackpot start command process (S5902) is a process executed when it is determined in the hit-related command process (FIG. 77) that there is a display jackpot start command. This is a process for displaying on the symbol display device 81.

  In the jackpot start command process (S5902), first, a jackpot start display data table corresponding to the command (for example, corresponding to the jackpot type) is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6001). Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the jackpot start display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6002). Thereafter, the time data is set in the clock counter 233h based on the jackpot start display data table (S6003), the pointer 233f is initialized (S6004), and the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to off (S6005). This processing ends.

  Returning to FIG. 77, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S5901 that there is no display jackpot start command (S5901: No), the flow shifts to the processing of S5903. When the processing of S5901 or S5902 is completed, it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command (S5903). If it is determined in the processing of S5903 that there is a round number command for display, the round number command processing is executed (S5904), and the flow shifts to the processing of S5905.

  Here, the round number command processing (S5904) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 78B is a flowchart showing the round number command processing (S5904). The round number command processing (S5904) is executed when it is determined in the hit-related command processing (FIG. 77) that the round number command for display has been received, and the number of rounds during the big hit game is updated. This is a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to display the effect when the game is performed.

  In the round number command processing (S5904), first, a round number display data table corresponding to the command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6101). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S6102), and time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the round number display data table (S6103). Thereafter, the pointer 233f is initialized (S6104), the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S6105), and the process ends.

  Returning to FIG. 77, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S5903 that there is no display round number command (S5903: No), the process proceeds to S5905. When the processing of S5903 or S5904 is completed, it is determined whether or not the display jackpot end command has been received (S5905).

  If it is determined in the processing of S5905 that there is a display jackpot end command (S5905: Yes), the jackpot end command processing is executed (S5906), and the flow shifts to the processing of S5907.

  Here, the details of the jackpot end command processing will be described. The jackpot end command process (S5906) is a process executed when it is determined that the jackpot end command has been received in the hit-related command determination process (FIG. 77). This is a process for displaying on the symbol display device 81.

  In the jackpot end command processing (S5906), first, a jackpot end display data table corresponding to the command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d. Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared, and time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the big hit end display data table. Thereafter, the pointer 233f is initialized, the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off, and the process ends.

  Returning to FIG. 77, the description will be continued. If it is determined in step S5905 that there is no display jackpot end command, the process skips step S5906 and shifts to step S5907.

  When the processing of S5905 or S5906 is completed, it is determined whether or not there is a display small hit start command (S5907). If it is determined in the processing of S5907 that there is a small hit start command for display (S5907: Yes), the small hit start command processing is executed (S5908), and the flow shifts to the processing of S5909.

  Here, the details of the small hit start command processing (S5908) will be described. The small hit start command process (S5908) is a process executed when it is determined that the small hit start command has been received in the hit-related command determination process (see FIG. 77), and indicates the start of the small hit game. This is a process for displaying the effect on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the small hit start command processing (S5908), first, a small hit start display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d. Next, the transfer data table buffer corresponding to the small hit start display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Thereafter, the time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the small hit start display data table, the pointer 233f is initialized, the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to off, and the process is terminated.

  Returning to FIG. 77, the description will be continued. In the process of S5907, when it is determined that there is no small hit start command for display (S5907: No), the process of S5908 is skipped and the process proceeds to S5909.

  When the processing of S5907 or S5908 is completed, it is determined whether or not there is a display small hit end command (S5909). If it is determined in the processing of S5909 that there is a small hit end command (S5909: Yes), the small hit end command processing is executed (S5910), and this processing ends.

  Here, details of the small hit end command processing (S5210) will be described. The small hit end command process (S5210) is a process executed when it is determined in the hit related command determination process (see FIG. 77) that the small hit end command has been received, and indicates the end of the small hit game. This is a process for displaying the effect to be performed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the small hit end command processing (S5210), first, a small hit end display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d. Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared, and the time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the small hit end display data table. Thereafter, the pointer 233f is initialized, the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off, and the process ends.

  Next, details of the above-described display setting processing (S5303), which is one processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 79, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S6201). If the new command flag is not on, that is, if it is off (S6201: No), In the previously executed command determination process, it is determined that the new command has not been processed, and the process of S6202 to S6204 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S6205. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S6201: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the previously executed command determination process, the new command flag is set to off (S6202), and then S6203 to S6204. The processing corresponding to the new command is executed.

  In the process of S6203, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S6203). If the error occurrence flag is on (S6203: Yes), a warning image setting process is executed (S6204).

  Here, the warning image setting process will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to the generated error on the third symbol display device 81. First, referring to the error determination flag, all error determinations for which ON is set are performed. The warning image data for displaying the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S6301).

  In task processing, based on the expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) that composes the warning image is specified, and for each sprite, it is necessary to draw the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, etc. Various parameters are determined.

  Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S6301, the error occurrence flag is set to off (S6302), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. After the warning image setting process (S6204) or in the process of S6203, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S6203: No), the process proceeds to S6205.

  In S6205, a pointer update process is performed (S6205). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update process acquires the corresponding drawing content or the transfer data information of the transfer target image data from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in each of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is processing for updating the pointer 233f that specifies the address to be set.

  In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S6401). That is, the pointer 233f is updated in principle such that it is incremented by one each time the V interrupt processing is executed. As described above, in the various data tables, the start information is described at the address “0000H”, and the entity of each data is defined after the address “0001H”. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with the value stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer updating process. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

  After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the processing of S6401, then, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information or not. Is determined (S6402). As a result, if it is End information (S6402: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S6403). If the display data table is a demonstration display data table (S6403: Yes), the display data table is displayed. The time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S6404), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S6405), and the process ends. Then, the process returns to the display setting process. Thus, in the display setting process, the drawing content can be developed in order from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S6403, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demonstration display data table (S6403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 ( S6406), this process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process. Accordingly, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the address immediately before the End information is described. Is always developed, so that the third image display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S6402, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S6402: No), the process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. 79, the description is continued. After the pointer updating process, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer updating process is developed from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6206). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing content expanded in the processing of S6206 together with the previously expanded warning image and the like, and the display coordinate position is determined for each sprite. Various parameters required for drawing, such as a magnification, a magnification, and a rotation angle, are determined.

  Next, the value of the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S6207), and it is determined whether or not the value of the time counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S6208). If the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S6208: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is 0 or less (S6208: Yes), it means that the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is checked whether the confirmed display flag is on. (S6209).

  As a result, if the finalized display flag is OFF (S6209: Yes), the effect of the finalized display has not been performed yet, and the effect of the finalized display is to be performed. First, the finalized display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The setting is made (S6210), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6211). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time in the confirmed display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S6212), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6213). Then, after the final display flag indicating that the final display effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S6214), the contents of the stop symbol discrimination flag are directly copied to the previous stop symbol discrimination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S6215), and returns to the V interrupt processing.

  Thus, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the effect. Thus, the drawing content can be set. Further, by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233b to the confirmed display data table, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the confirmed display effect. Compared with the case where the display contents are changed by activating another program as in the related art, the program is not complicated and bloated, so that no great load is applied to the MPU 231. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The previously stopped symbol discrimination flag set by the process of S6215 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variable effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variable effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before. In the variable display data table, the change based on the data table is not changed. Until a predetermined time elapses from the start, symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before is described. In the task process (S5304), a stop symbol of the immediately preceding variation effect is specified from the last stop symbol determination flag set in S6215 until a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, and A third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stopped symbol. Thereby, the variable effect is started from the stop symbol in the preceding variable effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S6209, if the confirmed display flag is not on but off (S6209: No), it is determined whether the demonstration display flag is on (S6216). If the demonstration display flag is off (S6216: Yes), it means that the value of the time counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the finalized display effect, and the demonstration display data table is displayed in the display data table. The contents are set in the buffer 233d (S6217), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6218). Then, time data corresponding to the effect time in the demonstration display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S6219). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6220), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S6221), and the present process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  Thereby, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the final display effect is completed, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. , The content of the drawing can be set.

  In the process of S6216, if the demonstration display flag is ON (S6216: Yes), the demonstration effect is performed after the finalized display effect is completed, and this means that the demonstration effect has been completed. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt processing. In this case, as described above, various settings are performed by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process so that the demonstration effect is started again. Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Note that the same processing as the display setting processing is also performed in the simple display setting processing (S5309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 73B). However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the fluctuation effect by the fluctuation image at power-on ends, the fluctuation image at power-on according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time (FIG. (Not shown) is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  Next, details of the above-described transfer setting processing (S5305), which is one processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 82A is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6501). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6501: Yes), all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The processing is executed (S6502), the transfer setting processing ends, and the processing returns to the V interrupt processing. As a result, a transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 to transfer image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The resident image transfer setting process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S6501, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, if it is off (S6501: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video. The data has been transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, a normal image transfer setting process is executed (S6503), the transfer setting process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thus, a transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S6502), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S5305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 82B is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S6502).

  In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the image controller 237 has been instructed to transfer untransferred image data (S6601). If the transfer instruction has been transmitted (S6601: Yes) ) Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has been completed (S6602). In the process of S6602, after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image data, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined that the transfer process is not completed by the process of S6602 (S6602: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S6602: Yes), the process proceeds to S6603. Also, as a result of the process of S6601, if the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data has not been transmitted to the image controller 237 (S6601: No), the process proceeds to S6603.

  In the process of S6603, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S6603). A transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set so as to transfer the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S6604), and the resident image transfer setting process ends.

  As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing processing includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 transmits the transfer data described in the drawing list. The resident object image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236 based on the data information. The transfer data information includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident image data is stored, information of the transfer destination (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (the transfer is performed here). The head address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 where the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores the read image data in the buffer RAM 237a, and then stores the image data in the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. Then, the data is transferred to the designated address of the resident video RAM 236. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  As a result of the processing in S6603, if all the resident target image data has been transferred (S6603: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S6605), and the resident image transfer setting processing ends. Thus, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 73 (b)), the command is not the simple command determination processing (see S5308 in FIG. 73 (b)) and the simple display setting processing (see S5309 in FIG. 73 (b)). Since the determination processing (see FIGS. 74 to 78) and the display setting processing (see FIGS. 79 to 81) are performed, the drawing of the image in the normal state is set. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 83) (see S6501: No in FIG. 82A).

  By executing the resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 performs all the resident operations to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 except for the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to be retained without being overwritten while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 during power-on.

  Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. Can perform image drawing processing. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed when drawing an image. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately, and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the sound lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114. After the display is determined by, for example, the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed at an arbitrary timing by the player can be performed. In addition, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Next, the normal image transfer setting process (S6503), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S5305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S6503).

  In the normal image transfer setting process, first, a pointer 233f updated from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e by the pointer update process (S6205) of the previously executed display setting process (S5303). The information described at the indicated address is obtained (S6701). Then, it is determined whether or not the obtained information is transfer data information (S6702). If the obtained information is transfer data information (S6702: Yes), the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data is determined based on the transfer data information. (The storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( (S6703) Further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S6704), and the flow shifts to the processing of S6705.

  In the process of S6702, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S6702: No), the process of S6703 and S6704 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S6705. In the process of S6705, it is determined whether a new image data transfer instruction has been set to the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer has been completed (S6705), and the transfer instruction is set. If the transfer has been completed (S6705: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the transfer of the image data performed by the image controller 237 has been completed based on the transfer instruction (S6706).

  In the process of S6706, after setting the transfer instruction of the image data to the image controller 237 and receiving a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is ended. . If it is determined that the transfer process is not completed by the process of S6706 (S6706: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S6706: Yes), the process proceeds to S6707. Also, as a result of the process of S6705, if the image data transfer instruction is not set to the image controller 237 after the previous transfer process is completed (S6705: No), the process proceeds to S6707.

  In the process of S6707, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S6707). If the transfer start flag is on (S6707: Yes), there is image data to be transferred. Is turned off (S6708), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the processing of S6703 is set as the transfer target image data, and then the flow shifts to the processing of S6717. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S6707: No), then it is determined whether the back image change flag is on (S6713). If the back image change flag is not on but off (S6713: No), there is no image data to be transferred, so the normal image transfer setting process ends as it is.

  On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S6713: Yes), it means that the back image is changed, so the back image change flag is set to off (S6714), and the back image provided for each back image type is set. Among the determination flags, the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image determination flag in the ON state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S6715). Further, the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image discrimination flag in the ON state, and the transfer destination (normal) The start address of the video RAM 236) is obtained (S6716), and the flow shifts to the process of S6717.

  If the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is that of the back A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 is stored. No data exists. Therefore, in the process of S6715, if the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is that of the back A, the normal image transfer process ends.

  In the process of S6717, it is determined whether or not the transfer target image data has already been stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S6717). The determination in the process of S6717 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite set as the transfer target image data is read out from the storage image data determination flag 233i, and if the storage state is “ON”, the image data of the transfer target sprite is the normal video data. It is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236, and if the storage state is “off”, it is determined that the image data of the transfer target sprite is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  As a result of the processing in S6717, if the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S6717: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Then, the normal image transfer setting process ends. As a result, unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. Can be planned.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S6717, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S6717: Yes), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S6718). As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing processing includes the transfer data information of the transfer target image data, and the image controller 237 stores the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the transfer target image, information on the transfer destination (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (here, the transfer The start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and designates the designated video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the processing in S6718, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S6719), and the normal transfer setting processing ends. As described above, the storage image data determination flag 233i is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “ON”, and by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite in the same image storage area 236a This is performed by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites to be stored in the area to “off”.

  As described above, by executing the normal image transfer process, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the previously executed command determination process, the rear image is changed. , Image data not stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio ramp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Is set to the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting processing, and sends the image data to the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can be.

  Here, by the time the drawing of a predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the predetermined data is specified in accordance with the display data table. When rendering a sprite, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for rendering the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While rendering the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thereby, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 84, details of the above-described drawing processing (S5306), which is one processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S5304) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information , Color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S5305), to generate a drawing list shown in FIG. 59 (S6801). That is, in the process of S6801, the type of storage RAM and the address where the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S5304). The parameters required for the sprite determined in the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, the sprites are rearranged in the order of the sprite to be arranged from the rearmost side to the front side in the image of one frame, and the sprites after the rearrangement are arranged in the order of the sprites after the rearrangement. A drawing list is generated by describing the type and address of a storage RAM in which image data of the sprite is stored as detailed drawing information (detailed information) and parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. If a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S5305), the leading address (storage source top address) of the character ROM 234 where transfer target image data is stored as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the last address (storage source final address) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

  As described above, the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, so that the MPU 231 According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and the address where the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S6802). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including the information indicating that the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b is expanded as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing to develop an image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

  Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list, and expands the images by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, in the image of one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged at the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged at the frontmost side.

  If transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) and the last address (storage source last address) of the character ROM 234 in which transfer target image data is stored are determined from the transfer data information. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) is extracted, and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source end address is sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

  Note that the image controller 237 reads out image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer indicated by the drawing target buffer information, and stores the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to Thereby, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, while the image drawn in one frame buffer is expanded, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the drawing processing and the display processing are simultaneously performed in parallel. be able to.

  After the processing of S6802, the drawing processing updates the drawing target buffer flag 233j (S6803). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to “1” when the value is “0” and by setting it to “0” when it is “1”. Done. Accordingly, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. This is performed every time the drawing process of the embedding process (see FIG. 73B) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are performed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 ms after the completion of the drawing process of the image of one frame, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the minute is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed every 20 milliseconds by one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c. By alternately designating, one frame of image display processing can be performed continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while one frame of image rendering processing is performed.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, it is determined whether or not to change the state of the starting port provided in the game board from the first state in which the game ball is difficult to enter to the second state in which the game ball is easy to enter. Some perform a first lottery. In such a conventional gaming machine, a lottery executed when a game ball enters the starting port in a state easily changed to the second state is executed a predetermined number of times, and until a predetermined number of lottery results is displayed. In a gaming machine that is set continuously, the probability that the determination that the lottery is advantageous to the player is performed in a state where the lottery is performed a predetermined number of times is constant, the game becomes monotonous, and the player gets tired early. There was a problem of getting it.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the above-described first embodiment, during the period in which the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is executed during the time saving state, the reserved memory of the special figure 2 which is advantageous to the player is acquired. Is possible, and the interest in the game can be improved.

  In some gaming machines in which a lottery of a plurality of symbols is executed, a symbol display for indicating the lottery result is displayed on a display means (third symbol display device 81) to notify a player of the symbol. There is a problem that a plurality of symbols are fluctuated and displayed at an inappropriate timing, and it is difficult for the player to understand the game content.

  On the other hand, in the first embodiment, of the third symbols corresponding to the plurality of symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the symbol that the player is most interested in the current gaming state, that is, Since the symbols that have the greatest effect on the game result are configured to be displayed more emphasized than other symbols, it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

  In the above-described first embodiment, a game (left-handed game or right-handed game) that is advantageous to the player is provided in accordance with various set game states (normal state, time-saving state, big hit state, and the like). It is configured differently. This allows the player to change the content of the game while grasping the current game state, thereby suppressing the game from becoming monotonous.

  In the first embodiment, it is possible to provide different playability depending on the type of the special symbol change executed when the time shift is made, so that the player is prevented from getting tired of the game early. Can be.

<Second embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The first embodiment described above is configured so that when the special symbol fluctuates once during the time reduction state, the time reduction state ends, and in the time reduction state where the first special symbol fluctuates, the second special symbol is changed. Was configured to acquire the pending memory.

  Then, when the change of the first special symbol during the time saving state is completed, if the hold memory of the second special symbol is acquired, the change (lottery) of the second special symbol is executed next, and the change is performed. The jackpot game is executed based on the (lottery), and after the jackpot game ends, the state shifts to the time saving state again. On the other hand, when the change of the first special symbol during the time saving state ends, the second special symbol is changed. If the hold memory cannot be obtained, the state is shifted to the normal state.

  In the first embodiment configured as described above, the end timing of the time reduction state is the end timing of one change of the first special symbol, so that the player can easily predict the timing at which the time reduction state ends. There is a problem. In addition, in order to make it difficult for the player to make predictions, it is necessary to be able to set a plurality of different fluctuation times for the fluctuation of the first special symbol, and the storage capacity of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is increased. There was a problem of letting them do.

  Further, in the first embodiment described above, if the holding of the second special symbol can be acquired at the end of the fluctuation of the first special symbol executed during the time saving state, the state advantageous to the player can be continued and acquired. If not, the game is easy to understand for the player to end the advantageous state for the player, but on the other hand, the game becomes monotonous and the player gets tired of the game early.

  On the other hand, in the second embodiment, a plurality of conditions for ending the time-saving state are provided, and it is configured to make it difficult for the player to grasp the end timing of the time-saving state. Specifically, the case where either the change (lottery) of the first special symbol is performed twice or the change (lottery) of the second special symbol is performed once is set as an end condition of the time saving state. .

  With such a configuration, when the change of the first special symbol in the first rotation (the first rotation of the time reduction) in the time reduction state is completed, if the hold storage of the second special symbol is not secured, the time reduction is performed. The change (lottery) of the first special symbol in the second rotation in the state is executed. On the other hand, at the time when the change of the first special symbol of the first rotation (the first rotation of the time reduction) in the time reduction state is completed, if the storage of the second special symbol is secured, the second special symbol stored and stored is held. The change of the symbol (lottery) is executed.

  Therefore, in the time saving state, when the fluctuation of the first special symbol of the first rotation of the time saving is completed, the gaming ability to acquire the holding memory of the second special symbol is continued, and the holding memory of the second special symbol is changed. The case where the variation (lottery) used is executed can be provided in accordance with the state of holding and storing the second special symbol.

  Further, in the second embodiment, the variation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol executed during the time saving state is configured to be selectable from a plurality (two). Therefore, the time reduction state period (the fluctuation period of the first special symbol executed during the time reduction state) can be diversified by a combination of a plurality of fluctuation patterns, and the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, since the time reduction state period is set by a combination of a plurality of fluctuation patterns, when a plurality of fluctuation patterns of the first special symbol are prepared in a gaming machine having one time reduction as in the first embodiment described above. In comparison, the storage capacity of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

  In addition, in the second embodiment, the time saving state is ended when the change (lottery) of the second special symbol is performed once. Thus, for example, when the second special symbol is changed in the first rotation of the time saving, the small hit which is won is not the most advantageous to the player (this is executed when the ball is passed through the specific area). If the number of rounds of the jackpot game is smaller than the other small jackpots), the player dares to play the ball so that the ball does not pass through the specific area, and then executes the second special symbol of the second time saving second rotation It is possible to prevent execution of a special game such as execution of a game aiming at fluctuation of the game.

  In addition, when the result of the change (lottery) of the first special symbol in the first rotation of the time reduction is a small hit, the small hit game is executed after the completion of the fluctuation of the first special symbol in the first rotation of the time reduction. Since the time saving state is maintained during the small hitting game (since the time saving end condition is not satisfied), during the small hitting game period, the gaming ability to acquire the holding memory of the second special symbol and the second variable winning device A period in which a plurality of game properties such as a game property in which a ball is thrown into 650 and a ball passes through a specific area (V winning switch 630) can be simultaneously executed can be set. Therefore, a novel playability can be provided to the player, and the player can be prevented from getting tired of the game early.

  In addition, as shown in the first embodiment described above, when the case where the special symbol change that started to change during the time saving state ends is set as the end condition of the time saving state, the special symbol change of the first rotation of the time saving becomes Since the small hit game to be executed after the game ends is no longer in the time saving state, it is not possible to provide a game for acquiring the reserved memory of the second special symbol during the small hit game.

  Further, in the second embodiment, as a variation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol in the time reduction state, a first variation pattern (a time reduction state) in which the player can execute a game for acquiring the hold memory of the second special symbol is set. (A fluctuation pattern longer than the normal figure fluctuation time) and a second fluctuation pattern (a fluctuation pattern shorter than the normal figure fluctuation time during the time-saving state) in which it is difficult to execute the game for obtaining the hold memory of the second special symbol. It is configured to be selectable. With this configuration, for example, when the second variation pattern is selected twice consecutively, the time saving state is not substantially given (the game in which the reserved memory of the second special symbol is acquired during the time saving state) If the first variation pattern is selected twice consecutively, it is possible to obtain the reserved memory of the second special symbol during the time saving state with a high probability. A state is given. When the first variation pattern and the second variation pattern are respectively selected, a time-saving state in which the reserved storage of the second special symbol can be acquired is given.

  That is, since the degree of expectation of acquiring the second special symbol during the time reduction state can be varied based on the variation pattern of the first special symbol executed during the time reduction state, an unexpected game is provided to the player. can do. Further, even if the time-saving state is provided after all the jackpot games are completed without preparing a jackpot type that shifts to the time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game and a jackpot type that does not shift to the time-saving state, Since a substantial time-saving state entry ratio can be set based on the selection result of the special symbol variation pattern, an increase in storage capacity due to preparing a plurality of jackpot types can be suppressed.

  Also, by preparing a plurality of variation pattern selection tables for selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol during the time saving state, by referring to a different variation pattern selection table based on the game state and game situation, It is possible to make the actual time-saving state entry ratio more diversified.

  The configuration used in the second embodiment (a configuration using a plurality of time saving end conditions) may be used for a gaming machine having a gaming property other than the second embodiment, for example, a small hit winning of the second special symbol. When some of the small hit types set at the time are set, a small hit game in which a ball cannot pass (is difficult) in a specific area (V winning switch 630e3) is executed. It may be used for such a game machine.

  In the second embodiment, the number of times of change (lottery) is set to two as an end condition of the time saving state based on the change (lottery) of the first special symbol, but the number of times may be set more than that. . Further, the total number of the number of times of change (lottery) of the first special symbol and the number of times of change (lottery) of the second special symbol may be set as an end condition of the time saving state. , The number of changes in the ordinary symbol, the result of the variation of the special symbol (lottery), and various accessories provided on the pachinko machine 10 (the electric accessory 640a, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650, etc.). May be set based on the operation status (presence / absence of operation, number of operations).

  The difference between the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is that a part of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, a part of the RAM 203, and the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 are different. And the process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. Other various processes are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, a display screen executed by the third symbol display device 81 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86. FIG. 85A is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a display screen during the time saving state. Here, a difference between the display screen shown in FIG. 85A and the first embodiment described above (a difference from the display contents in FIG. 15A) will be described. The same elements as those in the above-described first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 85 (a) is an example showing the display screen in a state where the holding of the second special symbol has not been acquired at the time when the first rotation of the time savings is completed. As shown in FIG. 85 (a), at the end of the first turn of the working time, the holding memory of the second special symbol has not been acquired (the special symbol 2 main holding symbol display area Dm5 indicates the number of the holding symbols). If not, the change (lottery) of the first special symbol is started as the change of the second rotation of the time saving. Here, a variation pattern of 150 seconds is set as the variation pattern of the second rotation of the time saving, and the display of “remaining time 0 second” displayed in the first sub-display area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds is performed. “+150 seconds” is displayed as a display mode for adding the remaining time. The display of “150 seconds” is a display for indicating the fluctuation time of the second rotation of the time saving.

  Then, in the first main display area Dm, the character of "not yet" is displayed as a continuation notification display mode indicating that the game for acquiring the reservation memory of the special figure 2 is continued. By displaying such a display screen, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know how long the time-saving state (the game state in which the game for acquiring the reserved memory of the special figure 2 is executed) continues. Yes, it is possible to play games with expectation until the end.

  Note that the “remaining time” displayed in the sub display area Ds1 is changed before the remaining time of the special figure 1 change in the first rotation of time saving becomes “0”, that is, during the special figure 1 change in the first rotation of time saving, A value indicating a part or all of the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation which can be the second rotation may be added and displayed. In this case, it is configured that the addition display is executed only when the remaining period of the special figure 1 fluctuation in the first rotation of the time saving is a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) and the reserved storage of the special figure 2 is not acquired. Good. Thereby, even if the remaining time becomes short, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  On the other hand, when the first rotation of the time reduction is completed, the reserved memory of the special figure 2 is not yet acquired, and the game for acquiring the reserved memory of the special figure 2 is executed as the variation of the special figure 1 of the second rotation of the time reduction. When the difficult second fluctuation pattern (a fluctuation pattern shorter than the normal figure fluctuation time in the time saving state) is selected, the display in which the remaining time is added as shown in FIG. The display screen (time saving state end display) shown in FIG. 20B of the first embodiment is displayed. In this case, during the period in which the time saving state end display is being executed, the special figure 1 change of the second rotation of the time saving is executed.

  In other words, when the above-described second variation pattern is set, the time saving state is substantially ended, and therefore, on the third symbol display device 81, despite the time saving state, When the special figure 1 change of the rotation eye is executed, a time saving state end display is displayed. As a result, the end timing can be notified to the player, not to the end timing of the internal game state (time saving state), but to the game state in which the reserved memory of the special figure 2 can be acquired. An easy-to-understand game can be provided.

  In addition, the special figure 1 fluctuation of the second time reduction executed during the period in which the time saving state end display is displayed, and the number of reserved symbols of the special figure 1 which is reduced when the second time reduction is executed (reserved) Since the (number of storages) is displayed in the second display area Dn of the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice.

  As described above, in the second embodiment, the display timing indicating the end of the time reduction state is made different based on the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol selected during the time reduction state. In addition, even if the time reduction state is internally set, a display indicating the end of the time reduction state is executed as long as the game state advantageous to the player cannot be given. This makes it possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand. In the second embodiment, a case where a second variation pattern (a variation pattern shorter than the normal figure variation time in the time reduction state) in which it is difficult to execute a game for acquiring the reserved memory of the special figure 2 is set is set as an internal It is assumed that even if the player is in a reduced working time state, it is not possible to provide a gaming state that is advantageous to the player. Even if the time-saving state ends), even if it is internally the time-saving state, it is determined that a game state advantageous to the player cannot be given, and a display indicating the end of the time-saving state is executed. Is also good.

  Next, a display screen in the case where the special figure 1 fluctuation in the first rotation of time saving wins a small hit will be described with reference to FIGS. 85 (b) to 86 (b). FIG. 85 (b) is an example showing a display screen in a state where the special figure 1 wins the small hit and the special figure 2 has one hold storage at the time when the first rotation of the time saving is completed. As shown in FIG. 85 (b), the special display 1 main symbol Dma is stopped and displayed in the first display area Dm in a stop display mode of "341" indicating that the small hit has been won, and the main reserved symbol display is performed. In the area Dm5, a display mode indicating that there is one reserved storage of the special figure 2 is displayed.

  In the first sub-display area Ds1, "remaining time 0 seconds" indicating that the special figure 1 change in the first rotation of the time saving is completed is displayed, and further displayed in the first sub-display area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds. “+60 seconds” is displayed as a display mode for adding the remaining time to the displayed “0 seconds remaining”. This display of “60 seconds” is a display for indicating the game time of the small hit game executed based on the small hit winning of the special figure 1.

  That is, although the details will be described later, in the second embodiment, when the fluctuation (lottery) of Toku-zu 1 is executed twice or the fluctuation (lottery) of Toku-zu 2 is executed once, The state is set to end, and at the time when the fluctuation (lottery) of the special figure 1 shown in FIG. 85 (b) is executed once, the end condition of the time reduction state is not satisfied. Therefore, during the small hit game executed by the small hit winning of the special figure 1, the time saving state is continued. Thereby, even in the state where the reserved memory of the special figure 2 is acquired, the reserved memory of the special figure 2 can be further acquired during the period in which the small hit game is executed.

  As described above, the game period in which the game in which the ball is thrown into the second variable prize device 650 that is opened by the small hitting game and the game for acquiring the hold memory of the special map 2 can be simultaneously executed is set by the player. Is displayed in the first display area Dm as a special game period notification mode for notifying the player.

  Then, when the small hitting game is executed, as shown in FIG. 86 (a), the main figure Dmc in the first display area Dm is variably displayed, and the game for acquiring the reserved memory of the special figure 2 is displayed. Be executed. Further, when the small hit game executed in the small hit winning of the special map 1 is a small hit in which a ball can pass through a specific area (V winning switch 650e3), the ball passes through the specific area during the small hit game. Then, as shown in FIG. 86 (b), "V" is displayed in the first display area Dm, and the big hit game is started.

<Electrical Configuration in Second Embodiment>
The second embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the contents of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 are changed. The other points are the same as those of the first embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 87A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the second embodiment. The ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that the contents of the variation pattern table 202d4 for the special figure 1 defined in the variation pattern table 202d are partially changed. The other configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted. Although details will be described later, the conditions for terminating the time saving state are also different.

  The special pattern 1 time saving variation pattern table 202d4a (see FIG. 88) of the second embodiment is different from the special figure 1 time reduction variation pattern table 202d4 of the first embodiment in that the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1 Is different in that a different fluctuation pattern (variation time) is set based on.

  Specifically, regardless of whether the lottery result of Toku-zu 1 is “out of”, “small hit”, or “big hit”, if the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “0 to 99”, , A fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 120 seconds is set. In the case of “100 to 198”, a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds is set. With such a configuration, the game content during the time saving state can be greatly changed depending on the selected fluctuation pattern.

  FIG. 87 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the second embodiment. In the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment, a special second variation flag 203r is added to the first embodiment. The other configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The special 2 change flag 203r is a flag for indicating that the change of the special figure 2 is executed during the time saving state, and when set to ON, the change of the special figure 2 is executed during the time saving. It is shown. The special 2 change flag 203r determines that the current change is the special figure 2 in the time saving change start process 2 (S303 in FIG. 91) executed in the special symbol change start process (see S213 in FIG. 39). In this case (S551: Yes in FIG. 91), it is set to ON (see S522 in FIG. 91), referred to in the time saving end determination process (see S251 in FIG. 90) (see S2301 in FIG. 90), and After the value is set to “0”, it is set to off (see S2303 in FIG. 90).

  As described above, at the start of the special figure change, the result of determining which of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is executed is stored (the corresponding flag is set to ON), and the time saving is performed. At the timing when it is determined whether or not to end the state, it is determined whether or not to end the time-saving state based on the stored determination result (whether or not the time-saving state end condition is satisfied). It is possible to appropriately manage the current game state and the type of the special figure change executed during the time saving state.

  In the second embodiment, the type of the special symbol (special figure) determined at the timing when the change (lottery) of the special figure is started is determined, and the determination result is stored, so that the special figure is stored. Although it is configured to be able to determine whether or not to end the time saving state at the fluctuation end timing, other configurations may be used. For example, when the fluctuation (lottery) of a special figure is started, It is determined whether or not the time-saving state ends at the timing when the fluctuation is completed, and by storing the result of the determination, the control for terminating the time-saving state based on the determination result at the special figure fluctuation end timing is performed. Or, at the end timing of the change of the special figure, the type of the special figure change executed this time (the type of the special figure change used for the change) is determined, and the control for terminating the time-saving state based on the determination result is performed. To run It may be.

<Regarding the control processing in the second embodiment>
In the control processing according to the second embodiment, the contents of the control processing in the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113 are changed from those in the first embodiment. Other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Here, a control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the second embodiment, the special symbol variation process is changed to the special symbol variation process 2 (see FIG. 89) with respect to the first embodiment, and the time saving executed in the special symbol variation process 2 (see FIG. 89) is performed. The end discrimination processing (see FIG. 90) is added, the time saving start processing is changed to the time saving start processing 2 (see FIG. 91), and the big hit control processing is changed to the big hit control processing 2 (see FIG. 92). Is different.

  First, the special symbol variation process 2 (S104) will be described with reference to FIG. The special symbol variation process 2 (S104 in FIG. 89) is different from the special symbol variation process of the first embodiment in that the lottery result of the special symbol variation is out of order, and the value of the counter 203g during time reduction is 1 or more. In the case of (S224: Yes), the difference is that the time saving end determination process (see S251 of FIG. 89) is executed, and the other configuration is the same, so that the description is omitted.

  Next, the contents of the special symbol variation process 2 (see S104 in FIG. 89) described with reference to FIG. 90 will be described. FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing the contents of the time saving end determination process (see S251) in the second embodiment. The time-saving end determination process (see S251) executes control to determine the time-saving state end state in the second embodiment having a plurality of time-saving state end conditions.

  When the execution of the time saving end determination process (S251 in FIG. 90) is started, first, it is determined whether the special 2 variation flag 203r is set to ON (S2301 in FIG. 90). In S2301, if the special 2 change flag 203r is set to ON, that is, if the change of the special figure 2 is executed (S2301: Yes), the special symbol time reduction termination condition is satisfied at that time. Therefore, next, the value of the counter for the time reduction counter 203g is set to “0” (S2303), the special 2 change flag 203r is set to off (S2302), and the special 2 change flag 203r is set to off. This processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S2301, if the special 2 fluctuation flag 203r is not set to ON (S2301: No), then the time reduction counter 203g is decremented by 1 (see S2304), and this processing ends.

  FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing the contents of the time-saving variation start process 2 (see S303 in FIG. 91) used in the second embodiment. In this time saving variation start process 2 (see S303 in FIG. 91), the type of the special figure variation executed this time is the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 in comparison to the above-described time saving variation start processing of the first embodiment. Is added, and the other contents are the same. The description of the same contents is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 91, when the time reduction start process 2 (see S303 in FIG. 91) is executed, the same processes as S501 and S502 as the time reduction start process are executed. After the processing of S502 is completed, it is next determined whether or not the current variation is the special figure 2 (S551). If it is determined that the current fluctuation is the special map 2 (S551: Yes), the special 2 fluctuation flag 203r is set to ON (S552), and the process shifts to S503. On the other hand, in the process of S551, when it is determined that the current fluctuation is not the special figure 2 (the special figure 1) (S551: No), the process of S552 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S503. Then, the same processing as S503 to S512 as the time saving start processing is executed, and this processing ends.

  As described above, in the second embodiment, the value of the time-saving medium counter 203g is decremented by one every time a change in a special figure other than the special figure 2 (that is, a change in the special figure 1) is executed. When the time-saving state is ended when the value of the medium-time counter 203g becomes 0, and when the fluctuation of the special figure 2 is executed, the value of the time-saving medium counter 203g is forcibly set to 0, and the time-saving state is set. There are two time-saving state termination conditions for termination.

  This enables the variation (lottery) of the special figure 1 to be executed a plurality of times during the time reduction state, and the number of times to execute the variation (lottery) of the special figure 2 during the time reduction state is singular (one time). Can be

  Next, the jackpot control process 2 (S1704 in FIG. 92) according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The jackpot control process 2 (S1704 in FIG. 92) is different from the jackpot control process described above only in that the number of time savings given to some of the jackpots after the end of the jackpot is changed from one to two. The other contents are the same.

  The same contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing the content of the jackpot control process 2 (S704 in FIG. 92). As shown in FIG. 92, when this processing is executed, the same processing as S1801 to S1814 as the above-described jackpot control start processing is executed. Then, when it is determined in the processing of S1814 that the jackpot type is not “B or D” (S1814: No), the value of the time reduction counter 203g is set to “2”, and this processing ends.

  As described above, in the second embodiment, a plurality of time-saving state termination conditions for terminating the time-saving state are prepared, and the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation in the time-saving state is set to a plurality of fluctuation patterns (variation). Time). This makes it possible to further diversify the game during the time saving state, and to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early. Specifically, when the ratio of selecting the jackpot type to which the time-saving state is given after the end of the jackpot is fixed, a short variation pattern is continuously selected as the variation pattern (variation time) selected during the time-saving state. In this case, the time reduction state is obtained in which it is substantially difficult to obtain the reserved memory of the special figure 2 even though the time reduction state is given. As described above, the substantial time-saving state entry ratio can be varied according to the selected result of the selected variation pattern (variation time) of the special figure 1 variation.

  In the second embodiment, as the time saving state, the number of time savings is set to two times, and the change of the special figure 1 is executed twice, or the time saving state is changed until the change of the special figure 2 is executed once. Is continued, but the number of time savings to be set and the condition for terminating the time saving state may be any as long as the same technical idea can be executed irrespective of the configuration of the second embodiment. Alternatively, the number of working hours may be set to three or more.

  Also, as the time saving termination condition, the number of times of change of the special figure 1 (for example, 5 times) or the number of times of the change of the special figure 2 which is larger than the number of reserved storages of the special figure 1 (upper limit of 4) may be set. Good. Thereby, even if the reserved memory of the special figure 2 cannot be acquired during the change of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 can be reliably changed during the time saving state. Games can be offered.

  Further, as the time saving end condition, the number of times of change of Toku-zu 1 is set to 2 or the number of changes of Toku-zu 2 is set to 4 (or the total number of changes of Toku-zu 1 and Toku-zu 2 is set to 4) In addition, the small hit type of the special map 2 can be set to a big hit type to which time saving is given and a big hit type to which no time saving is given as a big hit type executed when passing through the specific area (V winning switch 650e3). Another example may be used. With this configuration, in the case where one reserved memory of the special figure 2 is acquired during the special figure 1 change executed in the first rotation of the time saving, the execution is performed based on the change of the special figure 2 in the second rotation of the time saving. The special area (V winning switch 650e3) is passed during the small hit game to execute the big hit game, or the specific area (V Without passing through the winning switch 650e3), it is possible for the player to select whether to execute the third turn (the second turn in FIG. 1) of the time saving.

  In other words, in the special figure 1 fluctuation (first preparation period) executed in the first rotation of the time saving, the game for acquiring the reserved memory of the special figure 2 is executed, and when one reserved memory of the special figure 2 is acquired, The fluctuation of the special figure 2 which is the priority fluctuation is started at the second rotation of the time saving. When the small hit is won due to the change in the special map 2, the small hit game is executed after the end of the change in the second rotation of the time saving. By passing the game ball to the specific area during the small hit game, a big hit game (V winning big hit) based on the small hit game is started. In this alternative example, as the type of the V prize jackpot of the special figure 2, a type in which the time reduction state is provided after the jackpot game and a type in which the time reduction state is not provided can be set. If the big hit based on the change in FIG. 2 is a big hit that does not give the time saving state, the extended play mode ends with this big hit game. Here, in a state where only one hold memory of the special map 2 has been acquired, the player executes the big hit game in the second rotation of the time saving or without executing the big hit game in the second rotation of the time saving (small The special figure 1 change (second preparation period) executed at the third time saving time (without passing the game ball to the specific area (V winning switch 650e3) during the hit game) is executed, and the new special figure 2 It is possible to select whether or not to execute a game for acquiring the hold memory.

  Thereby, based on the number of reserved memories of Toku-zu 2 acquired during the first preparation period, one of the reserved memories of Toku-zu 2 is discarded to obtain more reserved memories of Toku-zu 2, or Since it is possible to select whether the big hit game based on the reserved storage of the special map 2 is to be executed reliably, the player can arbitrarily select the game content suitable for the player.

  Furthermore, in this alternative example, the types of the jackpots to be executed based on the hold storage of the special map 2 include a type to which the time reduction state is provided after the jackpot game is completed and a type to which the time saving state is not provided. If the big hit game (V winning big hit) based on the small hit game is executed in one state of the hold memory, the time-saving state may end after the big hit game ends. Therefore, depending on which of the above-described game contents the player selects, the subsequent game results can be made to differ greatly, and the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased.

  In addition, the notification suggesting the type of the big hit game based on the small hit game executed in the second rotation of the time savings described above may be executed by the notifying means (for example, the effect display by the third symbol display device 81). This allows the player to select the game content with reference to the content of the notification by the notification means. In this case, as the notification content by the notification means, the game content that is advantageous to the player may be notified in a notification mode that allows the player to grasp. For example, if the big hit executed based on the small hit game executed in the second rotation of the time saving is a big hit in which the time saving state is given after the end of the big hit game, a notification mode for indicating that fact may be set. . Thereby, the player can pass the ball through the specific area (V winning switch 650e3) in the small hit game of the second rotation of the time saving with peace of mind.

  In addition, in this alternative example, the time saving end condition is that the number of changes in Toku-zu 1 is two, or the number of changes in Toku-zu 2 is four (or the total number of changes in Toku-zu 1 and Toku-zu 2 is 4). Therefore, the game for selecting the game content described above can be executed only when the suspension of the special figure 2 is acquired during the change of the special figure 1 executed in the first rotation of the time saving number. The game can be enthusiastically performed to acquire the reserved memory of the special map 2 as soon as the state is given.

  In addition, since the time saving termination condition is set so that the number of times of the change of the special figure 2 is smaller than the number of times of the change of the special figure 2, for example, the number of times of the change of the special figure 2 executed during the time saving state is reduced. Thus, the number of times of variation of the special figure 1 can be reduced. Thus, even if a plurality of (for example, two) hold storages of the special figure 2 are stored during one change of the special figure 1, the second change of the special figure 1 is executed during the time saving state. And the opportunity to select the above-mentioned game contents can be increased. In this alternative example, the time saving end condition is that the number of changes in Toku-zu 1 is 2 or the number of changes in Toku-zu 2 is 4 (or the total number of changes in Toku-zu 1 and Toku-zu 2 is 4) Is set, but the time saving end condition based on the number of changes in the special figure 2 may be set to be larger than the time saving end condition based on the number of changes in the special figure 1.

<Third embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the above-described first embodiment, three seconds are set as the variation time of the ordinary symbol variation (ordinary symbol variation) executed during the time reduction state, and the number of times of the ordinary symbol lottery executed during the time reduction state Was configured to be stable. Further, in the above-described second embodiment, a plurality of conditions for terminating the time-saving state are provided in order to vary the period in the time-saving state, and the process is executed during the time-saving state. The configuration was such that a plurality of fluctuation times in Tokuzu 1 could be set.

  On the other hand, in the third embodiment, the variation time of the normal symbol executed during the time reduction state is configured to be setable from a plurality of times, and the normal symbol that can be executed during the time reduction state is set according to the content of the game. It is configured to make the number of symbol lotteries different.

  This allows the player to perform many lotteries of ordinary symbols during the time reduction state, and to actively play the game in order to acquire the special figure 2 hold. Also, since the number of lotteries of ordinary symbols executed during the time reduction state can be changed, it is possible to set a time reduction state advantageous to the player and a disadvantageous time reduction state, thereby improving the interest of the game. it can.

  The difference between the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is that a part of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, a part of the RAM 203, and the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 are different. And the process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. Other various processes are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, the contents of the game according to the third embodiment will be described. The pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment is configured so that the time saving state given based on the drawing of Toku-zu 1 and the time saving state given based on the drawing of Toku-zu 2 are made different. Further, different time-saving states are provided based on the gaming state when the time-saving state is provided. By providing different time-saving states in this way, it is possible to prepare a plurality of playability in the time-saving state, and to allow the player to execute a variety of games.

  Specifically, by setting different time saving states, the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol executed during the time saving state is changed, thereby making the gaming ability during the time saving state different. That is, as described in the above-described first embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 wins the normal symbol during the special figure 1 change in the time saving state, wins the electric accessory 640a, and opens the second ball entry. Since a game in which the special figure 2 is reserved is executed by letting a ball into the mouth 640, by changing the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the number of times of the lottery of the ordinary symbol executed during the time reduction ( (The number of fluctuations) can be varied.

  Further, in the third embodiment, the variation time of the ordinary symbol is configured to be different based on the number of lotteries (the number of variations) of the ordinary symbol executed during the time saving state. Specifically, when the number of lotteries (the number of fluctuations) of the ordinary symbols executed during the time saving state exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 40), a fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time is set. ing. With this configuration, the number of normal symbol lotteries (the number of fluctuations) can be further increased by executing a large number of normal symbol changes during the time reduction state, and the player is eagerly reduced in the time reduction state. A middle game can be executed. In addition, by shifting to a state in which a fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time is set, as a result, the number of balls entering the second entrance 640 per unit time can be increased. It is possible to provide an advantageous game.

  In this way, by providing a plurality of time-saving states in which the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol is different, it is possible to set a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player and a time-saving state that is disadvantageous to the player, thereby improving the interest of the game. .

  First, the display screen executed by the third symbol display device 81 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 93A is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a display screen during the time saving state. Here, a difference between the display screen shown in FIG. 93A and the above-described first embodiment (a difference from the display contents in FIG. 15A) will be described. The same elements as those in the above-described first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 93A, “39/40” is displayed at the lower right of the first display area Dm. This is a display mode described in the general figure change display area for displaying the number of general figure change times during the time reduction state (during the special figure 1 change in the time reduction state), and the value of “39” was executed. In the general figure change frequency display mode for indicating the number of times, the value of “40” is a general figure target change frequency display mode in which the threshold value at which the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol is shortened is shown. In the sub-display area Ds, a guidance display for guiding a period until the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol is reduced is displayed.

  When the game progresses from the state shown in FIG. 93 (a) and the number of times of the normal figure fluctuation during the time reduction state reaches 40 times, as shown in FIG. Characters of "super charge time rush" to indicate the shift are displayed, and a guide display for guiding the player that the normal figure fluctuation time has become short is displayed in the sub display area Ds.

<Electrical Configuration in Third Embodiment>
The third embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the contents of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 are changed. The other points are the same as those of the first embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 94A is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating the contents of the ROM 202 in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the third embodiment. The ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment has a time saving state selection table 202f added to the first embodiment. The other configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The time-saving state selection table 202f is a table that is referred to when a time-saving state is selected based on a big hit symbol (special figure 1 and special figure 2) and a game state stored in the game state storage area 203s. It is referred to in the big hit control process 3 (see FIG. 99) described later (see S1871 in FIG. 99).

  Here, in the third embodiment, as the game state to be set, a time saving A and a time saving B which is more advantageous to the player than the time saving A can be selected. Specifically, the big hit symbol is special figure 1 (first special symbol), and the game state stored in the game state storage area 203s is normal (that is, the big hit is won, or the specific area (V winning) When the ball passes the switch 650e3)), the time saving A is selected as the time saving state, and otherwise, the time saving B is selected as the time saving state as shown in FIG.

  In other words, when the gaming state is the normal state, a jackpot is won based on the lottery of the special figure 1, and when the time saving state is given after the end of the jackpot game, the time saving A is given as the time saving state, otherwise, the time saving state is given As the time saving B.

  When the time saving A is set as the time saving state, 3 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (see S2409 in FIG. 98), and when the time saving B is set, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol A fluctuation time (2.5 seconds or 1.5 seconds) shorter than the case where A is set is set (see S2405 and S2406 in FIG. 98). Thus, when the game enters the extended game mode for the first time, the game is performed during the time saving state in which the normal symbol change time is normal (4 seconds). The fluctuation time can be shorter than usual. Therefore, once the extended play mode advantageous to the player is continued, it is possible to make it difficult to shift from the extended play mode to the normal game state.

  FIG. 94B is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating the contents of the RAM 203 in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the third embodiment. The RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the third embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that a gaming state storage area 203s, a time saving state storage area 203t, and a common time counter 203u are added. The other configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The game state storage area 203s is an area for storing a game state when the start of a big hit is set, and is referred to when a type of a time saving state given after the end of the big hit is selected. The game state is stored in the gaming state storage area 203s after the start of the jackpot in the special symbol change processing 3 (see FIG. 96) (see S271 in FIG. 96), and the jackpot control processing 3 (see FIG. 99). ), It is determined that it is the timing of jackpot end (S1811 in FIG. 99: Yes), and when the jackpot type is not B or D (S1814 in FIG. 99; No), it is referred to when setting the time saving state (S1871). ).

  The time saving state storage area 203t is an area for storing the type (time saving A, time saving B) of the selected time saving state, and is referred to when setting the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol in the time saving state. In the time saving state storage area 203t, when the time saving state is selected in the jackpot control process 3 (see FIG. 99), the selected time saving state is stored (see S1871 in FIG. 99), and the fluctuation time is set (see FIG. 98). ), The information stored when setting the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol is referred to (see S2401 in FIG. 98).

  The ordinary figure counter 203u is a counter for measuring the number of times the normal symbol fluctuates during the time reduction state. In the fluctuation time setting process (see FIG. 98), each time the ordinary symbol fluctuates during the time reduction state. One is added (see S2403 in FIG. 98). In the present embodiment, when the value measured by the ordinary figure counter 203u reaches a predetermined value (40), the processing for setting the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol is made different.

<Control Process in Third Embodiment>
The control processing in the third embodiment is different from the first embodiment in the content of the control processing in the main controller 110 and the sound lamp controller 113. Other processing is the same as that in the first embodiment. And a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, a control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the third embodiment, the special symbol variation process is changed to the special symbol variation process 3 (see FIG. 96), and the ordinary symbol variation process is replaced with the ordinary symbol variation process 3 (see FIG. 97). The difference is that the big hit control process is changed to the big hit control process 3 (FIG. 99). Since the other elements are the same, the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the special symbol variation process 3 (see S104 in FIG. 96), the processes in S201 to S219 are executed as in the first embodiment described above, and when the process in S219 is completed, the current gaming state is stored in the gaming state storage area 203s. It is stored (S271). Then, similarly to the above-described first embodiment, the processing of S220 to S225 is executed, and this processing ends.

  That is, in the third embodiment, unlike the above-described first embodiment, the gaming state at the time when the start of the big hit can be temporarily stored. As a result, the game state set after the end of the jackpot game can be set based on the game state at the start of the jackpot (at the time of winning the jackpot).

  In the present embodiment, the game state at the timing of setting the jackpot is stored in the game state storage area 203s after the change time of the special figure has elapsed. For example, the change of the special symbol is started. (For example, the timing at which the special symbol variation start process (see S213 in FIG. 96) in the special symbol variation process 3 is executed) may be stored.

  Next, in the ordinary symbol variation process 3 (see S106 in FIG. 97), the processes of S901 to S912 are executed, as in the first embodiment described above, and thereafter, the variation time setting process is executed (S951). Here, the variable time setting process (S951) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable time setting process (S951).

  When the fluctuation time setting process (S951) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current time saving state is the time saving A (time saving state A) (S2401), and it is determined that the current time saving state is the time saving A (time saving state A). (S2401: Yes), the normal symbol fluctuation time (normal symbol fluctuation time) is set to 3 seconds (S2409), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S2401, if it is determined that the current time saving state is not the time saving A (time saving state A) (S2401: No), then the value of the ordinary time counter 203u is larger than “1”. Is determined (S2402).

  In the process of S2402, when it is determined that the value of the ordinary figure counter 203u is not larger than "1" (S2402: No), "1" is set to the value of the ordinary figure counter 203u (S2403), and S2404. Move to the processing of. On the other hand, in the process of S2402, when it is determined that the value of the ordinary time counter 203u is greater than “1”, the process proceeds to S2404 (S2402: Yes).

  In the process of S2404, it is determined whether or not the value of the ordinary time counter 203u is “40” or more (S2404). In the process of S2404, when it is determined that the value of the ordinary figure counter 203u is not equal to or more than “40” (less than 40), the variation time of the ordinary symbol (the ordinary figure variation time) is set to 2.5 seconds. (S2405). In this case, a fluctuation time shorter than the normal figure fluctuation time set in the processing of S2409 is set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2404 that the value of the ordinary figure counter 203u is equal to or greater than "40", the variation time of the ordinary symbol (the ordinary figure variation time) is set to 1.5 seconds (S2406). In this case, a fluctuation time shorter than the normal figure fluctuation time set in the processing of S2405 is set. Then, when the process of S2405 or S2406 is completed, “1” is added to the value of the general-purpose number counter 203u (S2407), a general-purpose number command is set (S2408), and this process ends.

  The ordinary figure number command set in the process of S2408 is a command output to the sound lamp control device 113, and is output in the same manner as the various commands set by the main control device 110 described above. .

  As described above, in the third embodiment, different general figure fluctuation times are set based on the type of the set time reduction state and the number of general figure fluctuations executed during the time reduction state. With this configuration, it is possible to make the number of times of the normal figure change executed during the time-saving state different based on the type of the time-saving state and the number of times of the normal figure change executed during the time-saving state. It is possible to improve the interest in the game of winning each ordinary map and acquiring the reserved memory of the special map 2.

  Further, in the case where the time saving state is set to “time saving B” which is more advantageous than “hour saving time A” (a short variation time is set as the general time variation time), the number of times of daily variation is equal to or more than a predetermined number (40 or more times). ), The system is configured such that a shorter general-purpose variation time is set, so that the player can continue playing the game during the time reduction state.

  In the third embodiment, a specific time-varying time is set based on each time-saving state and the number of times of normal time-saving. However, other configurations may be used. A general figure fluctuation time selection table, which is referred to for setting the general figure fluctuation time, is provided in correspondence with the number of fluctuations of the figure, and based on a predetermined acquisition value (for example, a counter acquisition value) from the general figure fluctuation time selection table. Then, the normal figure fluctuation time may be selected. In this case, in the time chart state and the time chart for changing the time of the time chart, the time chart for selecting the time chart for changing the time of the time chart is provided with a table in which the time of the long time chart is easily selected and a table in which the time of the short time chart is easily selected. Thus, as in the third embodiment, it is possible to make the easy-to-select fluctuating time different based on the respective time-saving states (hour-saving A, time-saving B) and the number of times of fluctuating fluctuating figures. Interest in the game to acquire the game can be improved.

  Further, in the third embodiment, two types of "time saving A" and "time saving B" are provided as types of the time saving state, but more types may be provided. In addition, although one trigger (the number of times of the normal figure fluctuation is 40) is provided to change the time of the general figure change selected based on the number of the general figure changes, two or more times may be provided.

  Furthermore, in the third embodiment, the general figure fluctuation time shorter than normal is selected (make it easier to perform) when the predetermined condition is satisfied. When the number of fluctuations exceeds 50, or when the number of reserved storages in Toku-zu 2 reaches the upper limit, the selected general-purpose fluctuation time is longer than normal (for example, 10 seconds). ) May be selected. Thereby, it can be suppressed that the privilege is excessively given to the player due to the excessive execution of the normal figure fluctuation.

  Next, the jackpot control process 3 (S1704) of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing the content of the jackpot control process 3 (S1704). The jackpot control process 3 (S1704) is different from the jackpot control process of the first embodiment in that a process is added when it is determined that it is time to end the jackpot, and otherwise the same process is performed. Is executed. The description of the same processing is omitted.

  When the jackpot control process 3 (S1704) is executed, the processes of S1801 to S1814 are executed similarly to the jackpot control process of the first embodiment, and in the process of S1814, the jackpot type is “jackpot B” or “jackpot D”. "(Ie, a jackpot to which the time-saving state is given after the end of the jackpot) (S1814: No), the time-saving state is set based on the time-saving state selection table 202f, and the set time-saving state is set. It is stored in the time saving state storage area 203t (S1871). Then, the value of the counter 203g during the working hours is set to "1" (S1815), and this processing ends.

  Next, a control process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The third embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the command determination process is changed to a command determination process 3 (see FIG. 100). Since the other elements are the same, the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing the command determination process 3 (S3112). When this command determination process 3 (S3112) is executed, the processes of S3201 to S3214 are executed as in the command determination process of the first embodiment. Then, if it is determined in the processing of S3213 that the notification command has not been received (S3213: No), it is determined whether the command for the number of ordinary times has been received (S3251). When the common figure number command is received (S3251: Yes), the common figure number command for display is set (S3252). The display general-purpose number command set here is output to the display control device 114 in the same manner as other display commands, and is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during the time-saving state. The number of times is displayed (see FIG. 93).

<Modification Example 1 of Game Board 13 in First Embodiment>
Next, a modified example 1 of the game board 13 in each of the above-described embodiments will be described with reference to FIG. In the first embodiment described above, as described with reference to FIG. 2, a storage device is provided to regulate the entry of a ball into the right first entrance opening 64 b disposed in the right area of the game board 13. 750 and a non-motorized accessory 710. As a result, unless the non-motorized accessory 710 is in the open state, the ball is reliably prevented from entering the right first entry opening 64b. On the other hand, in the first modification, a configuration is used in which the ball is prevented from entering the right first ball entrance 64b without using the storage device 750 and the non-motorized accessory 710. Specifically, by always providing the movable valve 1500 above the right first ball entry port 64b, entry of a ball into the right first ball entry port 64b is regulated.

  Further, in the configuration of the game board 13 of the first embodiment described above, the through gate 67 and the second entrance 640 are provided in the first flow path 701, and the ball has passed through the through gate 67. The second ball entrance below the through gate 67 so that the ball passes for a shorter period (0.2 seconds) than the fluctuation time (3 or 4 seconds) of the ordinary symbol (general figure) executed based on By disposing the 640, the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 is prevented from directly entering the second entrance 640. On the other hand, in the present modified example, the through gate 67 is provided in the first flow path 701, and the second ball entrance 640 is provided in the second flow path 702. Thus, it is possible to physically prevent the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 from entering the second entrance 640.

  The difference between the configuration of the game board 13 in the present modified example 1 and the configuration of the game board 13 of the above-described first embodiment is that the storage device 750, the non-motorized accessory 710, and the specific general entrance 630 are eliminated. The point, the arrangement position of the right first entrance port 64b is changed, and the arrangement position of the second entrance port 640 is changed from the first flow path 701 to the second flow path 702. Other configurations are the same. About the same structure, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 101 is a front view showing the configuration of the game board 13 of the first modification. As shown in FIG. 101, in the game board 13 of the first modification, a constantly movable member 1500 is provided along the ball rolling surface at the most upstream part of the first flow path 701, and the constantly movable member 1500 is provided. Is movable to the open position (in the open state), the ball is configured to be able to enter the right first entrance opening 64b.

  Here, the operation of the constantly movable member 1500 will be described in detail. The constantly movable valve 1500 is configured to be changed between an open position (open state) and a closed position (closed state) at a predetermined timing based on power being supplied to the pachinko machine 10. I have. Specifically, in the movable member driving process (not shown) executed every 4 milliseconds in the main process of main controller 110 (see FIG. 53), the operation control is performed based on the movable scenario stored in ROM 203. Have been. In this movable scenario, an operation of constantly opening the movable member 1500 for 0.1 second and thereafter closing it for 1.2 seconds is repeatedly executed.

  That is, in the game board 13 of the first modification, the ball shot in the right-handed game flows into the first flow path 701 at 1.2-second intervals, and the rolling in which the constantly movable member 1500 is provided. It flows down while rolling on the surface. When the timing at which the ball flows into the first flow path 701 and rolls on the constantly movable member 1500 (or falls on the constantly movable member) coincides with the timing at which the constantly movable valve 1500 is opened. The ball passes through the constantly movable member 1500 in the open state and enters the right first ball entry port 64b.

  The timing of rolling on the constantly movable member 1500 (or falling on the constantly movable member) is an interval of 1.2 seconds, and the timing of constantly opening the movable valve 1500 is 0 in 1.3 seconds. .1 second, the timing at which they match is about once every 15.6 seconds. That is, when the right-hitting game is continuously executed, about four balls enter the right first entrance opening 64b in one minute.

  In other words, in a gaming state in which a right-handed game is continuously executed, such as during a jackpot game or a time-short game, a ball periodically enters the right first entrance 64b, so that the jackpot game is not performed. When the process ends and shifts to the time saving state, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a state where the special figure 1 is not suspended. In addition, since the period during which the movable valve 1500 is always opened at one time is set to a period (0.1 seconds) in which it is difficult for the player to aim and hit, the left first ball entry is performed in the normal game state. A right-handed game can be more disadvantageous to a player than a left-handed game aiming at the mouth 64a.

  To be more specific, in the case where the gaming state is the normal state, when a left-hitting game is performed, out of the 250 fired balls, about 15 shots enter the left first entrance 64a. It is designed so that when a ball enters, five prize balls are paid out. Further, it is designed so that approximately five shots enter the general entrance 63, and when a ball enters, five prize balls are paid out. Therefore, in the left-handed game, it is possible to allow approximately 20 balls to enter the left first entrance 64a, considering that the awarded ball to be paid out is to be fired again when 250 balls are fired. Becomes

  On the other hand, in the case where the game state is the normal state, when a right-handed game is performed, it is designed that, out of the 250 balls fired, about 9 rounds enter the right first entrance opening 64b. If the ball enters, two prize balls are paid out. The general entrance 63 is not provided in the right area. Therefore, in the right-handed game, when 250 balls are fired, even if considering that the awarded ball to be paid out will be fired again, about 10 balls should be made to enter the right first entrance 64b. I can only do it. Therefore, when the game state is the normal state, it is possible to suppress the player from playing a right-handed game.

  In the present embodiment, the general entrance 63 is not provided in the game area (the right area) through which the ball fired by the right-handed game passes, but when the game state is the normal state, the right-handed game is performed more than the left-handed game. The general entrance 63 may be provided based on a design concept to the extent that the game is not advantageous to the player. This makes it possible to increase the number of balls to be paid out as prize balls in a right-handed game during a time-saving state or a jackpot state.

  Next, among the configurations arranged in the right area of the game board 13 in the first modification, the through gate 67 and the second ball entrance 640 are different from the structure of the game board 13 of the above-described first embodiment. The explanation will focus on the points.

  In the first modification, the through gate 67 is provided downstream of the first flow path 701 having the curved path 701a, and the second inlet is provided downstream of the second flow path 702 (the lower end of the fifth flow path 704b). A ball port 640 is provided. With this configuration, the sphere flowing into the second flow path 702 at 1.2-second intervals can be made to flow toward the second ball entrance 640 without decreasing the flow velocity. Therefore, since the falling intervals of the spheres flowing down the second flow path 702 can be made constant, the spheres are connected in the second flow path 702, and a plurality of spheres enter the second entrance 640 at the same time. Can be suppressed. In addition, when the third symbol display device 81 notifies that the electric accessory 640a is open (see FIG. 23 (b)) without noticing that the electric accessory 640a has been opened, the third symbol display device 81 promptly notifies. A ball can be made to enter the second entrance 640.

  In addition, different flow paths (first flow path 701,...) Through which the through gate 67 which is an execution trigger of the normal symbol lottery and the electric accessory 640 a whose operation is controlled by the winning of the normal symbol are distributed by the distribution member 700. Since the distributing member 700 is disposed in the second flow path 702) so as to cause the ball to flow down only one of the flow paths (when the distribution function is disabled), the second entrance port is provided. It is possible to make it difficult for the ball to enter the 640. That is, when the through gate 67 and the electric accessory 640a are disposed in one of the flow paths distributed by the distribution member 700, the distribution member 700 is broken, and a state in which the ball flows down only in one of the flow paths is created. This makes it possible to create a state in which a ball can easily enter the second entrance 640. However, by using the configuration of this modification, a ball is illegally entered into the second entrance 640. Creating a state that is easy to cause can be suppressed.

<Modification 2 of the game board 13 in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 102, a second modification of the game board 13 in each of the above-described embodiments will be described. In the first embodiment described above, as described with reference to FIG. 2, a storage device is provided to regulate the entry of a ball into the right first entrance opening 64 b disposed in the right area of the game board 13. 750 and a non-motorized accessory 710. As a result, unless the non-motorized accessory 710 is in the open state, the ball is reliably prevented from entering the right first entry opening 64b. On the other hand, in the second modification, the movable plate 1700 is always provided between the storage device 750 and the specific general entrance 630, and when the storage device 750 is released, the ball that has passed through the storage device 750 is provided. Is provided with a case where the ball enters the specific general ball entrance 630 and a case where the ball does not enter.

  Specifically, the movable plate 1700 is always changed to a guiding position (protruding position) at which a ball can be guided to the specific general entrance 630 every second and an opening position (evacuation position) at which guiding is impossible (difficult). Variable control means for controlling the flow of a sphere passing through the storage device 750 by variable control by the variable control means.

  The operation of the always movable plate 1700 is controlled by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. Specifically, a movable plate solenoid (not shown) that constantly varies the movable plate 1700 is turned on (a state in which the always movable plate 1700 protrudes) and an off state (a state in which the always movable plate 1700 is retracted). A variable control means for causing the variable control means to perform a predetermined variable scenario based on a predetermined counter value updated each time the main processing of the main controller 110 is executed. Is performed in accordance with the control.

  Note that the movable plate solenoid used in the present modification is configured such that the movable plate 1700 is always located at the retreat position in a state where power is supplied. As described in each of the embodiments described above, this is the first condition during the time reduction state as a termination condition of the game period (the time reduction state period in which it is easy to acquire the hold memory of the special figure 2) that is advantageous to the player. This is because the condition is set that the change (lottery) of the special symbol (special figure 1) is executed once. In other words, unless the end condition is satisfied, the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol (ordinary figure) is shorter than that in the normal state (the ordinary symbol fluctuation time is 3 seconds). This is because the opening operation pattern (long opening) advantageous to the player is also continuously executed as the opening operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a. As described above, in the state where the reserved memory of the special figure 1 is not present, the fluctuation of each special symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is started until the reserved memory of the special figure 2 is acquired. No (time saving standby state), only the fluctuation of the ordinary symbol (normal figure) is executed. In this case, the time-saving state is continued until the ball is won in the second entrance 640 after being won per ordinary drawing. In order to prevent such a situation from being intentionally created, the movable plate 1700 is configured to be always located at the projecting position when the power of the movable valve solenoid is cut off. Thereby, even if the act of intentionally stopping the supply of power to the movable valve solenoid is executed, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of serious damage.

  In the configuration of the present modified example described above, the timing to release the storage device 750 (that is, the timing to start the big hit game) and the variable state of the always movable plate 1700 cause the right first ball entry port 64b to move. Of the ball can be restricted. Therefore, it is possible to make the player expect when the big hit game is started.

  A configuration in which a different timing can be set as the timing for bringing the storage device 750 into the release state may be added to the above-described modification. Specifically, according to the jackpot type selected at the time of winning the special symbol (special figure), a jackpot type for releasing the storage valve 750a of the storage device 750 and a jackpot type not to be released are set in advance. Further, the first timing (for example, the timing of the start of the first round) and the second timing (for example, the timing of the start of the third round) are set in advance as the jackpot type for releasing the storage valve 750a. Constitute.

  With this configuration, the timing at which the storage device 750 is released and the ball passes through the storage device 750 can be diversified. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp whether the timing at which the big hit game is started and the variable state of the constantly movable plate 1700 are advantageous to the player, and the player can keep the big hit game even after the big hit game is started. Can be played with a sense of expectation. In addition, it is possible to suppress the act of starting a jackpot game at a timing advantageous to the player.

  The above-described configuration in which the presence or absence of the release of the storage device 750 and a plurality of release timings are set according to the type of big hit may be used in each of the above-described embodiments. As a result, more complex playability can be provided, and the interest of the game can be improved.

<Modification 3 of the game board 13 in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 103, a third modification of the game board 13 in the above-described first embodiment will be described. The third modification is different from the third embodiment in that the arrangement positions of the storage device 750 and the specific general entrance 630 are different from those of the game board 13 of the first embodiment (see FIG. 2). Are the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 103, in the third modified example, the storage device 750 and the specific general entrance 630 are disposed on the right side of the lower center of the game board 13. With this configuration, it is easier for the right-handed game to store the ball in the storage device 750 than for the left-handed game. Specifically, among the balls fired by the right-handed game, the ball flowing down on the first variable winning device 65 is configured to be stored in the storage device 750 most easily.

  When the spheres are stored in the storage device 750, the following spheres are configured to flow over the stored spheres. Specifically, the upper surface position of the sphere stored in the storage device 750 is lower than the extension line of the ball flowing down on the first variable winning device 65 (the first variable winning device 65 is The storage device 750 is disposed (to have a downward step with respect to the upper surface of the provided unit). Therefore, since the sphere is stored in the storage device 750, the subsequent sphere flow is not affected. In this modified example 3 configured as described above, when the right-handed game that is advantageous to the player is started, the reservation of the special figure 1 can be more reliably secured.

  Each modification of the game board 13 described above may be applied to each of the above-described embodiments. Thereby, a more complicated game can be provided to the player, and the interest can be improved.

<Modified example of electric accessory 640a>
Next, a modified example of the electric accessory 640a used in each of the above-described embodiments will be described with reference to FIGS. In each of the above-described embodiments, a game board provided with the second ball entrance 640 so that two or more balls do not enter the second ball entrance 640 during the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a. The ball flow in the right region 13 is regulated. That is, a countermeasure for restricting the ball flow so as to prevent a plurality of balls from flowing into the electric accessory 640a at the same time is taken. On the other hand, the electric accessory A200 described in the present modified example has a configuration in which two or more balls cannot enter the second entrance 640.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 104, the shutter portion A222 has a cross section orthogonal to the rotating shaft portions 223 and 223, which is curved in a substantially “C” shape, and the rotating door A220 is connected to the side start winning opening A40A. In the closed state, the door main wall A222A is located on the front side and stands substantially vertically, and the winning auxiliary wall A222B extends rearward from the upper end of the door main wall A222 in this state. The door main wall A222A has a V-shaped cross section in order to prevent a game ball from biting. Further, the door main wall A222A is located apart from the rotation shaft portions 223 and 223, and rotates forward from a substantially horizontal state as the rotation door A220 rotates from the open state to the closed state. It is in a state of standing almost vertically. The winning assistance wall A222B is inclined so as to descend toward the side of the side starting winning opening A40A with the rotating door A220 opened.

  The width of the shutter portion A222 is slightly smaller than the width of the side start winning opening A40A, while the width of the pair of side walls is wider than the width of the side starting winning opening A40A. Then, in a state where the revolving door A220 is completely closed, the front surface of the side wall abuts against the side edge of the side starting winning opening A40A, and the revolving door A220 further moves to the side for closing the side starting winning opening A40A. It prevents rotation.

  Door rotation projections A224 and A224 are provided on the pair of side walls on opposite sides of the rotation shaft with respect to the shutter. Further, on the side wall, there are formed positioning contact portions A225 and A225 which are located behind the door rotation projection A224 and project downward when the rotation door A220 is at the open end position where the rotation door A220 is completely opened. ing.

  A detection sensor is housed in the above-mentioned switch housing part 215B of the resin housing. The detection sensor has a flat rectangular parallelepiped shape, and a game ball passage hole is formed at the rear end thereof in a vertical direction. Through holes are formed in the upper and lower surfaces of the switch accommodating portion 215B corresponding to the game ball passage holes, and the game balls that have entered the tongue piece accommodating portion 215A pass through the game ball passage holes 281 to accommodate the switch. It moves below the portion 215B. In addition, a duct (not shown) is provided below the switch accommodating portion 215B for taking in game balls and guiding them to the ball circulation system of the game hall.

  The movable tongue A230 is accommodated in the tongue accommodating portion 215A of the resin housing. The movable tongue piece A230 has a flat structure in which the widthwise direction is shorter than the front-back direction and becomes thinner in the up-down direction, and is supported so as to slide back and forth while sliding on the inner surface of the tongue-storing portion 215A.

  The movable tongue piece A230 has a symmetrical shape when viewed from above, and has a protruding and protruding piece that is narrower in a stepped shape than the whole at its front end. The projecting piece portion is slightly wider than the diameter of the game ball, and has a width that can be inserted into the lower wide portion of the side starting winning port A40A.

  A pair of outer downward slopes 240S, 240S, which are inclined downward toward both sides, are formed on both sides in the width direction of the upper surface of the projecting piece. Further, between the pair of outer descending inclined surfaces 240S, 240S of the protruding and projecting piece portions, a retracting inclined surface which is extremely gently inclined to descend toward the center and gently inclined to descend rearward. 240H are formed. Further, on the upper surface of the protruding and protruding piece portion, there is formed a guiding inclined surface 240Y which descends relatively steeply from the rear end of the retracted inclined surface 240H toward the rear.

  The movable tongue piece A230 has a shape in which a trapezoidal protrusion 231D protrudes rearward from the center in the width direction at the rear end of the substantially square base when viewed from above. I have. In the center in the width direction of the base portion, a ball-passing long hole is vertically formed from the front end position to the rear end position. The ball passage slot has a width that allows one game ball to pass just therethrough and is slightly smaller than the width of the protruding and projecting piece. In addition, the front end of the ball passing elongate hole is semicircular and partly reaches the base end of the projecting and protruding piece, and the rear end of the ball passing elongate hole is parallel to the base of the trapezoidal protrusion 231D. It has reached the position near the rear end of the base.

  The movable tongue piece A230 has a pair of doors extending vertically along both side edges of the ball passage slot in a range extending from the base end of the projecting and protruding piece to an intermediate position in the front-rear direction of the base. The driving projection wall is formed to project. The entire rear portion of the base portion from the door driving protruding wall is a power receiving portion A230P that is vertically thick so as to have an upper surface flush with the rear end upper surface of the door driving protruding wall.

  A pair of connecting recesses are formed in the power receiving portion A230P on the opposing inner side surfaces of the power receiving portion A230P with the ball-passing elongated hole interposed therebetween. Each coupling recess is formed by a substantially triangular interference avoiding recess whose lower end side is narrowed, and an engaging groove portion which is depressed and formed in the inner surface of the interference avoiding recess away from the ball-passing elongated hole and extends vertically. Become. The front sliding contact surface 236A disposed on the front side of the engagement groove portion extends vertically in the vertical direction. The rear sliding contact surface 236B disposed on the rear side of the engagement groove portion has a lower portion protruding forward from an intermediate position in the vertical direction, and serves as a seesaw stopper portion according to the present invention. The stopper contact surface 237S at the upper end of the seesaw stopper portion is slightly inclined so as to descend toward the front sliding contact surface 236A.

  Each door drive protruding wall is provided with an intermediate depression at an intermediate position in the front-rear direction, the front side of the intermediate depression is the front-side pressing projection A241 according to the present invention, and the rear side of the intermediate depression is the rear-side pressing according to the present invention. It is a protrusion A242. The rear pressing protrusion A242 has the same height as the power receiving portion A230P, and the front pressing protrusion A241 is lower than the power receiving portion A230P. Further, the bottom surface of the intermediate depression is a horizontal and flat intermediate depression flat surface 233N. The rear surface of the front-side pressing protrusion A241 is the closing pressing portion A241K according to the present invention, and rises vertically from the intermediate depressed flat surface 233N. The upper surface of the front-side pressing projection A241 is a door stopper A241J according to the present invention, and is horizontally flat. On the other hand, the front surface of the rear pressing protrusion A242 is an open pressing portion A242Z according to the present invention, which also rises vertically from the intermediate depressed flat surface 233N. The front surface of the front-side pressing protrusion A241 is parallel to the closing pressing portion A241K, which is the rear surface, and is gently inclined from the middle to the front, and extends to the rear ends of the above-mentioned outer downward inclined surfaces 240S and 240S. .

  The lower end portion of the seesaw member A250 is engaged with the connection concave portion of the movable tongue piece A230, and the door rotation projections A224 and A224 of the rotating door A220 are engaged with the door driving projection wall of the movable tongue piece A230. are doing. Thus, the movable tongue A230 is driven by receiving power from the solenoid via the seesaw member A250, and the movable door A220 is driven by the power from the movable tongue A230.

  First, transmission of power from the seesaw member A250 to the movable tongue piece A230 will be described. The connecting arms of the seesaw member A250 are received in the interference avoiding recesses among the connecting recesses of the movable tongue piece A230, and the lower end connecting protrusions A255 and A255 of the connecting arms are provided in the engaging grooves of the connecting recesses. Engaged.

  Here, in a state where the solenoid is not excited, the plunger protrudes forward as shown in FIG. 104, and at this time, the lower connecting protrusions A255 and A255 are located at the lower ends of the engagement grooves. At this time, the movable tongue piece A230 is disposed at the rear end position of the linearly movable range, and the projecting and protruding piece is retracted to the rear side of the side start winning opening A40A. In this case, that is, in a state in which the projecting and protruding piece is retracted to the rear side of the side start winning opening A40A, the tip of the projecting and protruding piece is retracted to a position completely covered by the side starting winning opening A40A. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent the ball from colliding with the side start winning opening A40A in the retracted state.

  In this state, when the solenoid is excited and the plunger is sucked backward, the seesaw member A250 rotates around the rotating shaft portions A253 and A253, and the connecting arm rotates forward, whereby The lower end connecting projections A255, A255 slidably contact the front sliding surfaces 236A, 236A and press the front sliding surfaces 236A, 236A forward. As a result, the movable tongue piece A230 is pushed out to the front of the gaming machine, and as shown in FIG. 104, the projecting piece projects from the side start winning opening A40A to the front side of the game board. Then, for example, the end surface of the base portion of the movable tongue piece A230 comes into contact with the opening edge of the side starting winning opening A40A from the rear side, and the movable tongue piece A230 is positioned at the “front end operating position” according to the present invention and stopped. Then, the projecting and protruding piece 240 protrudes to the maximum from the side start winning opening A40A (see FIG. 106).

  When the excitation of the solenoid is stopped in a state where the movable tongue piece A230 is located at the front end operating position (the state in FIG. 106), the plunger projects forward by the compression coil spring A276. Then, the lower end portion of the seesaw member A250 rotates rearward around the gaming machine around the rotation shaft portions A253 and A253, and the lower end portion of the seesaw member A250 moves from the front position to the rear position with respect to the rotation shaft portions A253 and A253. Moving. At this time, the lower end connecting projections A255, A255 slide against the rear sliding contact surfaces 236B, 236B of the engagement groove portion and push backward. As a result, the movable tongue piece is retracted to the rear of the gaming machine, and the projection part retracts to the rear side of the side start winning opening A40A (see FIG. 107).

  More specifically, when the excitation of the solenoid is stopped and the lower end of the connection arm of the seesaw member A250 rotates rearward, first, the upper edge E1 of the stopper recess provided in the lower connection protrusion A255 (first The rear edge of one plane M1) contacts the stopper contact surface 237S of the seesaw stopper. Then, with the rotation of the seesaw member A250, the lower connection protrusion A255 slides on the rear sliding contact surface 236B, and the lower connection protrusion A255 is located behind the rotation shaft portions A253 and A253 of the seesaw member A250. At this time, the lower edge portion E2 (lower edge of the second plane M2) of the stopper concave portion abuts on the lower portion of the rear sliding contact surface 236B below the seesaw stopper portion, and the rear sliding portion of the engagement groove portion. The contact surfaces 236B, 236B are pushed backward. Thereby, the movable tongue piece can be returned to the initial position (rear-end retracted position) by the elastic force of the compression coil spring A276.

  By the way, when an illegal act of pulling the movable tongue piece A230 retracted to the back of the side start winning opening A40A to the front of the game board with a wire or the like inserted from the gap of the gaming machine is performed, become that way. That is, the power is not transmitted from the solenoid to the seesaw member A250, the power of the seesaw member A250 is transmitted from the movable tongue piece A230, and the connecting arm of the seesaw member A250 is pushed forward by the rear sliding contact surface 236B in the engagement groove 236. Then, the first flat surface M1 in each stopper concave portion of the lower end connection convex portions A255 and A255 and the stopper contact surface 237S of the seesaw stopper portion come into surface contact. When the movable tongue piece A230 is further pulled forward from this state, the pulling force becomes an upward force F1 orthogonal to the stopper contact surface 237S of the stepped portion, and the center of the first plane M1 and the rotating shaft portion A direction substantially parallel to the direction connecting the center of A253, that is, a direction substantially orthogonal to the rotation direction of the stopper recess. Accordingly, the rotation of the seesaw member A250 is restricted, and it becomes impossible to pull the movable tongue piece A230 toward the user and cause the projecting and protruding piece to protrude forward of the side start winning opening A40A. Also, even if the seesaw member A250 is slightly lifted obliquely upward by the upward force F1, the triangular ridge formed on the communication wall 252 of the seesaw member A250 is engaged with the flange portion 274F of the plunger. Thereby, the rotation of the seesaw member A250 is more reliably prohibited.

  Next, transmission of power from the movable tongue piece A230 to the rotating door A220 will be described. The door turning protrusions A224 and A224 of the turning door A220 are respectively engaged with the door driving protruding wall of the moving tongue, whereby the turning door A220 receives the power from the moving tongue A230 and turns. I do. Specifically, in a state where the movable tongue piece A230 is located at the rear end retracting position and the entire projecting and retracting piece is retracted to the rear side of the side start winning opening A40A, the door turning projection A224 presses the front side. The protrusion 241 is disposed above the door stopper A241J (the state shown in FIG. 104). At this time, the turning shaft of the turning door A220 is located obliquely forward of the door turning projection A224. At this time, a first space AS1 according to the present invention is formed between the lower end portion of the door turning protrusion A224 and the open pressing portion A242Z of the rear pressing protrusion A242.

  Then, when the movable tongue piece A230 moves forward from the rear end retreat position, as shown in the change from FIG. 104 to FIG. 107, the front pressing protrusion A241 moves forward, and the lower end of the door turning protrusion A224 and The front-side pressing protrusion A241 does not face the door stopper A241J in the vertical direction, and the lower end of the door rotating protrusion A224 faces the middle depression flat surface 233N in the up-down direction and the middle depression flat surface 233N. Between them, a rotation space of the door rotation protrusion A224 is secured.

  Then, when the movable tongue piece A230 moves further forward, the lower end of the door turning projection A224 moves in the first space AS1, and during this time, the movable tongue piece A230 moves forward but the turning door is turned. Is maintained in a stopped state. Then, as shown in FIG. 105, when the projecting and retracting projection of the movable tongue piece A230 protrudes by a predetermined amount from the side start winning opening A40A, the lower end of the door turning projection A224 is moved to the rear pressing projection A242. It contacts the front surface A242Z. When the movable tongue further advances, the door main wall A222A of the rotating door A220 is lifted, and the side start winning opening A40A is opened (see FIGS. 105 and 106). When the operating position is reached, the revolving door A220 is fully opened, and a game ball can enter the side start winning opening A40A. More specifically, when the rotating door A220 is pushed by the rear-side pressing protrusion A242 and rotates by a certain angle, the rotating door A220 rotates toward the open end position by its own weight. That is, when the revolving door A220 protrudes about half from the side starting winning opening A40A, the revolving door A220 starts the revolving operation, and the revolving door A220 protrudes about half and then completely protrudes. During a relatively short period of time, the side start winning opening A40A changes from the fully closed state to the fully opened state. In this manner, in the present embodiment, the movable tongue piece A230 starts moving forward, the turning door A220 is stopped halfway, and the turning door A220 starts opening halfway, and the front opening prize is achieved in a two-step operation. The mouth A40A is opened. When the game ball falls on the upper surface of the projection part 240 protruding from the side starting winning part A40A, the game ball is guided by the projecting part 240 and wins the side starting winning part A40A and wins. The game ball is detected by the detection switch.

  In a state where the rotating door A220 is completely opened, as shown in FIG. 106, the positioning contact portion A225 of the side wall abuts on the upper surface of the rear pressing projection A242, and the rotating door A220 is opened. Positioned in position. Thereby, the rattling of the rotating door A220 is regulated. Further, in this state, a second space AS2 according to the present invention is formed between the lower end portion of the door turning protrusion A224 and the open pressing portion A242Z of the rear pressing protrusion A242.

  When the movable tongue piece A230 retreats from the front end operating position, as shown in the change from FIG. 106 to FIG. 107, the front-side pressing protrusion A241 moves rearward. At this time, the lower end of the door turning protrusion A224 relatively moves in the second space AS2 toward the front pressing protrusion A241. As a result, a part of the projecting and protruding piece 240 of the movable tongue piece A230 moves into the front open winning opening A40A (from the state in which the door rotating protrusion A224 is in contact with the opening pressing part A242Z to the closing pressing part A241K). During this time, the turning door A220 is kept open. Then, the movable tongue piece A230 is opened to the front by a predetermined amount (a distance that the movable tongue piece A224 moves in the second space AS2 from the state in which the door rotating projection A224 abuts on the opening pressing part A242Z to the state in which it contacts the closing pressing part A241K). When moved into the mouth A40A, the closing pressing portion A241K of the front pressing protrusion A241 comes into contact with the lower end of the door turning protrusion A224. At this time, the protrusion 240 of the movable tongue A230 is accommodated in the side start winning opening A40A by about half. Then, when the movable tongue piece A230 further retreats, the rotating door A220 operates so as to close with the retreat of the movable tongue piece A230, and when the projecting and retracting protruding part is completely retracted, the rotating door A220 is moved. The side start winning opening A40A is completely closed and stopped, and the movable tongue piece A230 is further retracted behind the side starting winning opening A40A so that the lower end of the door turning projection A224 is vertically moved with the door stopper A241J. It returns to the initial state facing in the direction. As described above, in the present embodiment, the movable tongue piece A230 starts retreating, and the turning door 220 is stopped halfway, and the turning door A220 starts to close from the middle, and the front opening winning is achieved in two steps. The mouth A40A is closed.

  By the way, in a state where the side start winning opening A40A is closed (the state of FIG. 104), for example, when the turning door A220 is forcibly opened with a wire or the like, the door turning projection A224 turns to the opening side. , And comes into contact with the door stopper A241J of the front-side pressing protrusion A241 in the vertical direction. As a result, unauthorized opening of the rotating door A220 is prohibited. Here, the direction in which the door rotating protrusion A224 presses the door stopper A241J of the front-side pressing protrusion A241 is in the up-down direction, and is orthogonal to the movable direction (front-back direction) of the movable tongue piece A230. Therefore, when an improper external force is applied to the rotating door A220, the door stopper A241J of the movable tongue piece A230 is not moved in the movable direction, and the unauthorized opening of the rotating door A220 is reliably prevented. Can be.

<Other effects example 1 using the configuration of each embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 108, another effect example performed using the configuration of each of the above-described embodiments will be described. In the second embodiment described above, as the display screen displayed on the third symbol display device 81, as shown in FIG. 15A, each symbol (special figure 1, special figure 2, And the number of reservations for each symbol are displayed. On the other hand, in the effect example described with reference to FIG. 108, an effect of displaying the symbol display of the special figure 1 and the number of reservations in the sub-display area Ds is executed. In the sub-display area Ds, a specific display mode (for example, a number) is displayed in a variable display mode corresponding to a change in the design of the special figure 1 (variation of the special figure 1 is executed). , The number of reservations in Toku-zu 1 is displayed in a variable display mode in a suggestion display mode indicating the next display mode. Here, the contents of the present effect example will be described with reference to FIG.

  The display screen in FIG. 108 (a) is an example of a display screen in which the special figure 1 is not suspended during the special figure 1 change during the time saving state (first time saving). As shown in FIG. 108 (a), the special figure 1 variable display area Ds3 of the sub display area Ds is referred to as “remaining time seconds” as an auxiliary display mode for giving meaning to the variable state of the variable display mode. The display and “10” are displayed in the variable display area Ds4 as a variable display mode indicating that the special figure 1 is changing. By changing the display mode ("10" in FIG. 108 (a)) displayed in the variable display area Ds4, it is configured to notify that the special figure 1 is changing during the variable display. I have.

  Note that the display mode (for example, “10”) displayed in the variable display area Ds4 while the special figure 1 is changing indicates that the player mistakenly thinks that the change of the special figure 1 has stopped in the display mode. In order to prevent this, the display mode is changed to the next display mode after a temporary stop display for a period (for example, 0.5 seconds) in which the player can recognize the display mode in a slightly shaking state. The display mode (for example, “∞” (see FIG. 108 (b))) displayed in the variable display area Ds4 when the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is stopped, It is configured to stop for a period (for example, 1 second) longer than the above-described temporary stop display (for example, 0.5 seconds) in order to recognize that the fluctuation has stopped.

  With such a configuration, the player can easily grasp the contents of the display mode displayed in the variable display area Ds4. Note that any other configuration may be used as long as the player can easily grasp the contents of the display mode displayed in the variable display area Ds4. The color of the background image in the special figure 1 variable display area Ds3, the display content of the auxiliary display mode is changed, and the display mode displayed in the variable display area Ds4 during the period in which the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed. Or the thickness of the characters may be changed. Thereby, the display mode displayed in the variable display area Ds4 can be easily understood by the player.

  Further, according to the configuration used in this effect example, the fact that the special figure 1 is fluctuating and the remaining fluctuation period of the special figure 1 can be notified according to the display mode displayed in the variable display area Ds4. ing. Thus, a plurality of pieces of information relating to the fluctuation of the special figure 1 can be displayed in one display area (variable display area Ds4).

  In this effect example, in order to notify the player that the special figure 1 is fluctuating, an effect display in which the time is counted down in the special figure 1 fluctuating display area Ds3 is executed. A configuration may be used, for example, a story development type effect display such as an effect of answering a question and an effect of accomplishing a mission may be used. Even in the case of such a configuration, the content displayed in the special figure 1 change display area Ds3 can be changed to notify the player that the special figure 1 is changing.

  Then, in the special figure 1 hold display area Ds5 of the sub-display area Ds, a hold number suggestion mode for indicating the hold number of the special figure 1 is displayed based on the hold number of the special figure 1 (FIG. 108 ( a)). This hold number suggestion mode is displayed in a display mode suggesting a display mode to be displayed in the variable display area Ds4 from the next time. That is, the display mode displayed corresponding to each hold number suggestion mode is also changed each time the display mode displayed in the variable display area Ds4 is changed.

  According to the display screen shown in FIG. 108A, four reserved number suggestion modes are displayed in the special figure 1 reserved display area Ds5, and each of the four reserved number indicating modes is “V”, “9”, or “∞”. Is displayed. The display mode displayed as the hold number suggestion mode indicates the display mode displayed in the variable display area Ds4 as described above, and the “V” display mode indicates that the lottery result of the special drawing 1 is a hit. The "9" display mode suggests the remaining fluctuation period of Toku-zu, and the "∞" display mode indicates that there is no pending storage of Toku-zu.

  According to the gaming state shown in FIG. 108 (a), since there is no hold storage of the special figure 1, the display setting is made so that the number of displayed “∞” increases as the hold number suggestion mode. As described above, the display mode of each hold number suggestion mode displayed in the special figure 1 hold display area Ds5 includes the lottery result of the changing special figure 1, the remaining change time of the changing special figure 1, and the special figure. Since the display content is set based on the number of pending balls of 1, the player plays the game while predicting the future progress of the game based on the display mode displayed in the special figure 1 reserved display area Ds5. It can be carried out.

  According to the display screen shown in FIG. 108 (a), four reserved number suggestion modes are displayed. However, the display number always indicates the four reserved number suggestion modes regardless of the reserved number of the special figure 1. It is configured to be. In other words, the special figure 1 hold display area Ds5 is configured to notify (suggest) the number of holds in the special figure 1 to the player based on the display content of each hold number suggestion mode, not the display number of the hold number suggestion mode. I have. With this configuration, it is possible to provide the player with a fun of predicting the current number of holds.

  In the present example, the display number of the hold number suggestion mode displayed in the special figure 1 hold display area Ds5 is always displayed (regardless of the hold number of the special figure 1), but four. Other configurations may be used. For example, based on the number of reservations in the special figure 1, the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 1, and the lottery result of the special figure 1, the information is displayed in the special figure 1 reservation display area Ds5. The display number of the reserved number suggestion mode may be different. In this case, for example, when the remaining fluctuation time of Toku-zu 1 becomes short (for example, when the remaining time becomes 10 seconds), the display number of the hold number suggestion mode displayed in Toku-zu 1 reservation display area Ds5 decreases. It is good to configure. As a result, the number of options predicted by the player can be reduced, and the prediction accuracy of the player can be improved.

  Further, as in the second embodiment described above, in a gaming machine configured to execute a game advantageous to the player when the number of reservations in the special figure 1 does not exist when the time reduction state ends, By informing (displaying) the presence / absence of the number of reservations in the special figure 1 as in the present effect example, it is possible to execute a game in a time-saving state while expecting the player to the end.

  Then, when the effect display of FIG. 108 (a) has elapsed and the fluctuation of the special figure 1 has stopped, the display screen shown in FIG. 108 (b) is displayed. The display screen of FIG. 108 (b) is a display screen showing an example of a case where neither the special figure 1 nor the special figure 2 is held in a state where the fluctuation of the special figure 1 executed during the time saving state is stopped. is there. As shown in FIG. 108 (b), when the first time-saving is completed in the state where the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are not held, the special figure fluctuation is not started (the special figure fluctuation in the second time-saving rotation is started). Without being started). During this short waiting time, by continuously executing the right-handed game, a game in which a normal symbol is continuously changed (lottery) and a ball is thrown into the second entrance 640 is executed.

  In the configuration of the game board 13 described above with reference to FIG. 2, even if a right-handed game is performed during the time saving state, the ball does not enter the right first entrance opening 64 b, and therefore, FIG. Is a gaming state in which the time-saving state is continuously maintained until the ball enters the second entrance 640. On the display screen, the main symbol Dmc corresponding to the ordinary symbol is variably displayed in the first display area Dm, and the special figure 1 hold display area Ds5 is replaced with the current figure instead of the display indicating the number of holds of the special figure 1. Is displayed in the super discharge mode, indicating that the vehicle is on standby for a short time, and the special figure 1 change display area Ds3 is displayed in the variable display area Ds4 as a display indicating that the special figure 1 is not changing. The character of “remaining time∞second” in which the “∞” display mode is stopped and displayed is displayed.

  According to the above-described effect example, the display mode in which the fluctuation state (lottery result, remaining fluctuation time) of the special figure 1 during the time reduction state and the number of reservations of the special figure 1 are displayed on the display screen is described as follows. Since the effect is displayed so as to predict the progress of the subsequent game, the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  In the above-described effect example, the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are shifted to a time-saving standby state that can occur in a state where there is no hold (the “∞” display mode is stopped and displayed in the variable display area Ds4). Is also executed, but the determination as to whether or not to execute the effect display is determined based on the number of reserved memories (presence or absence of suspension) in the special figures 1 and 2. For example, when the number of reserved storages in Toku-zu 2 is one or more, the above-described effect display may not be executed.

  In the first embodiment described above, when the game state at the timing when the normal symbol change (lottery) is executed and the game state at the timing at which the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a is set are both time reduction states, Although the operation pattern (long opening) advantageous to the player is set as the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a, other configurations may be used. For example, a change (lottery) of a normal symbol is executed. The timing at which the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (the timing at which the determination condition is satisfied) may be used instead of the timing at which the determination is made (the timing at which the determination is performed by the determination means).

  Also, the timing at which the operation of the electric accessory 640a is executed (the timing at which the operation unit executes the operation) is not the timing at which the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a is set (the timing at which the operation mode is set by the operation mode setting unit). ) May be used.

  Furthermore, when the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a causes the electric accessory 640a to operate a plurality of times, each operation content may be determined at each timing when each operation of the electric accessory 640a is executed. . Specifically, the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a has an operation pattern of opening the electric accessory 640a three times, and when an operation pattern (long opening) advantageous to the player is set, each opening is performed. When the period is set to 2 seconds and an operation pattern (short open) disadvantageous to the player is set, when each open period is set to 0.2 seconds, a long open is set as the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a. Is set, and when the time-saving state ends between the second opening and the third opening, the opening period may be set to 0.2 seconds only for the third opening. With such a configuration, during the time-saving state that is advantageous to the player, while the electric accessory 640a is operated so as to be advantageous to the player to the end, after the game state is shifted to the normal state, To provide an excessively advantageous state can be easily suppressed.

  In this case, only the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a may be set in advance, and the opening period may be set at the timing when the electric accessory 640a is opened according to the operation pattern. The timing at which the operation of the electric accessory 640a starts and the content of the operation may be individually controlled for each operation without setting the operation pattern of the object 640a.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in order to prevent a plurality of balls from entering the second entrance 640 in a state where the electric accessory 640a is open, the balls enter the second entrance 640. The entry of one ball is regarded as a condition for ending the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a, and further, in order to prevent a plurality of balls from entering the second entrance 640 at the same time, it is possible to enter the second entrance 640. And a distributing means for alternately distributing the spheres to a flow path (a first flow path) and a flow path (a second flow path) that cannot enter the second ball entrance 640. The distance between the spheres flowing down is configured to be wide. Other configurations may be added to more reliably prevent a plurality of balls from entering the second entrance 640 at the same time.

  For example, among flow paths (first flow paths) that can enter the second ball entrance 640, a gear-type sprocket mechanism is provided upstream of the second ball entrance 640, and for example, the first flow path is provided. Even if a plurality of balls flow down the road continuously, the sprocket mechanism may guide the balls one by one to the downstream side so as to widen the flow-down interval of the balls. Thereby, it is possible to physically prevent a plurality of balls from simultaneously entering the second entrance 640. As described above, in the case where the ball sending member that sends the ball in the downstream direction so that the flow distance of the ball is constant is provided on the upstream side of the second ball entrance 640, the above-described sorting member may not be used. . Further, the ball feed member may have a configuration other than the above-described sprocket mechanism. For example, a magnetic body movable by a constant operation is provided, and the ball is fed at a predetermined timing in a flowing direction depending on a moving position of the magnetic body (flows down). ) Configuration may be used.

  In the present embodiment, a configuration is used in which the ball fired in the right-handed game is distributed to two flow paths by the distribution member (the distribution device 700). However, the configuration is such that the ball is distributed to three or more flow paths. May be used. In this case, a configuration in which one distribution member distributes the sphere to three or more flow paths may be used, or by using a plurality of distribution members in combination, the sphere may be divided into three or more flow paths. You may comprise so that it may distribute. Thereby, the interval at which the ball flows down the flow path that can enter the second ball entrance 640 can be further increased.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the distribution member (the distribution device 700) in which the spheres are uniformly distributed to the plurality of flow paths is used, but it is not necessary to equalize the distribution rate of the spheres to each flow path. Instead, for example, a distribution member may be provided such that the number of spheres flowing down the first flow path 701 and the number of spheres flowing down the second flow path 702 are 1: 2, or the distribution destination of the sphere may be A configuration that can be selected at random may be provided. As a result, the player can be interested in the manner in which the ball flows.

  In the second embodiment described above, a plurality of conditions for terminating the time-saving state are provided, and a configuration for terminating the time-saving state when any of the conditions is satisfied is used. However, other configurations may be used. The time-saving state may end when all the set conditions for terminating the time-saving state are satisfied. In this case, it is preferable to use a configuration in which a plurality of time-saving state end conditions that are already satisfied are output to the outside so that the player can grasp them.

  Further, in the above-described second embodiment, one of the end conditions of the time-saving state is that the variation (lottery) of the first special symbol is executed a plurality of times (two times) as the number of time-saving times in which the time-saving state is continued. Although such a configuration is used, the following gameplay may be executed using such a configuration.

  In the above-described third embodiment, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the time period of the normal symbol is varied to provide a variety of playability, when the time-saving state B is set, and further, when the time-saving state is set. When the number of normal symbol fluctuations exceeds 40, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is reduced to provide an advantageous state to the player, but the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is changed. By doing so, it may be configured to provide a disadvantageous state to the player, for example, a plurality of normal figure fluctuation time based on the type of the symbol that won the win and the game state at the time of winning the win In the configuration in which one selection table is selected from the selection tables and the general figure fluctuation time to be executed from the selected general figure fluctuation time selection table is selected, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol during the time saving state is determined. Also IHiroshizu varying time (Hiroshizu length variation time) may be used can become configuration selection.

  In this case, if the normal figure length change time is selected, it becomes impossible to execute the normal symbol lottery further during the time reduction state, and the gaming state advantageous to the player is substantially ended. With this configuration, the player can know how long the substantial time-saving state (the game state is the time-saving state and the state in which the normal figure length change time is not selected as the normal symbol change) continues. It is possible to provide difficult game characteristics.

  In addition, when selecting the fluctuation time of a normal symbol (general figure), a configuration may be used in which the fluctuation time set in advance based on the number of times of normal figure fluctuation is selected in advance. When setting the fluctuation time of a symbol (ordinary figure), a configuration may be used in which a fluctuation time corresponding to a counter value obtained from a plurality of fluctuation times is selected based on a predetermined counter value. Further, when starting the fluctuation of the ordinary symbol (general figure), a predetermined lottery is executed, and when the lottery result is the predetermined lottery result, the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol (general figure) is set to May be selected (for example, 150 seconds) longer than the fluctuation time of the first special symbol (normal graphic length fluctuation time).

  In this way, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, by increasing the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, it is possible to end the substantial time saving state that is advantageous to the player, The player can concentrate on playing games while always having a sense of tension.

  Further, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the third symbol display device 81 executes the third symbol display device 81 in a configuration in which an ordinary symbol variation time (an ordinary symbol length variation time) longer than the variation time of the first special symbol during the time saving state is selected. As the effect to be performed, when the general figure length change time is selected, the notification of the right-handed game may be erased and the left-handed game may be guided even if the time-saving state is in effect. In this case, since the special figure 1 change in the time saving state is still being executed, the third symbol display device 81 displays the time saving state until the special figure 1 change in the time saving state ends. It is preferable to execute an effect to notify that the (rensou mode) has ended. Thereby, it is possible to make the player think that the special figure 1 fluctuation in the time reduction state ends and the time reduction state ends.

  In addition, as the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol, in addition to the above-described general figure fluctuation time (150 seconds), the fluctuation time in the general figure (for example, 30 seconds or 50 seconds). In this case, when the fluctuating time during the ordinary figure is set, similarly to the case when the fluctuating time during the ordinary figure is set, an effect display indicating that the time saving state has ended is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. At the timing when the fluctuating time in the ordinary figure ends, or immediately before the fluctuating time in the ordinary figure ends (for example, in response to the normal (3 seconds before), the effect display during the time saving state may be displayed again. This makes it possible to think that the player has shifted to the time saving state a plurality of times by using one time saving state, and it is possible to provide an unexpected game to the player.

  Furthermore, by combining the above-mentioned two general figure fluctuation configurations, a time reduction state end effect executed when the set general figure fluctuation time exceeds the remaining period of the time reduction state, and a set general figure fluctuation time May be displayed when both are shorter than the remaining period of the time-saving state. As a result, even after the time-saving state end effect has been executed, it is possible to enthusiastically play a game while having the expectation of immediately shifting to the time-saving state.

  In the first embodiment described above, the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a is set so that the ball cannot enter the second entrance 640 in the normal state (non-time saving state). If a ball enters the second entrance 640, a game stopping means for stopping the game may be provided. In this case, as the game stopping means, means for executing a firing prohibition process in which a ball is not fired even if the operation handle 51 is operated, or a ball fired by operating the operation handle 51 is used in the game area (the game board 13). A ball collection process that allows the ball to be collected before it reaches the front, a firing regulation process that regulates the firing intensity of the operation handle to a firing intensity that is disadvantageous to the player (a firing intensity that cannot reach the game area), Even if a ball enters each of the entrances provided in the game area, there may be a ball entry invalidation process for invalidating all benefits (privileges for paying out prize balls and privileges for executing lottery).

  In addition, as processing for executing the game stopping means, first, when it is determined that a ball has entered the second entrance 640, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is a time saving state. If it is determined that it is not the time saving state, it is next determined whether or not the current game is a jackpot game. Then, when it is determined that the game is not during the big hit game, it may be determined that the current ball entry is an illegal ball entry and the above-described game stop means is used to execute the game stop processing.

  Further, in the above-described game stop means execution processing, when it is determined that a ball has entered the second entrance 640 during the jackpot game, a special privilege effect is executed instead of executing the game stop means. Good to do. In other words, although the game is not in the time saving state during the jackpot game, but is in the game state in which the right-handed game is performed, a ball may rarely enter the second entrance 640. In this case, the game stop means is not executed, and instead, a special effect for celebrating the player is executed, thereby realizing a very rare experience for the player. And the effect can be enhanced.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 configured to be able to execute the above-described special effects, the general symbol change display is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a manner recognizable by the player during the big hit game, and the electric accessory 640a is displayed. The opening timing (short opening timing) may be predicted. This allows the player to complete the jackpot game while closely watching the normal symbol change display displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

<Other effect example 2 using the configuration of the third embodiment>
Next, another effect example 2 using the configuration of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 109 to 111. In this production example, the structure for setting the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol is different from that of the third embodiment described above, and the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol is changed according to the game state. It is configured to set based on the selection table 203aa. Here, with reference to FIG. 109, the content of the effect performed in the present effect example 2 will be described.

  FIG. 109 shows an example of a display screen of an effect executed in the present effect example 2, and FIG. 109 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen when a time-saving state is started. FIG. 109 (b) is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a display screen when a long variation is set as a variation time of a normal symbol in a time saving state. Note that the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the above-described embodiments, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 109 (a), a picture imitating a bomb is displayed on the display screen of this effect example 2 as an end suggestion display mode Dm10, which is an opportunity to reduce the remaining period in a short time and a short time. In the second sub-display area Ds2, the characters "pinch when a bomb explodes" indicating the content of the end indication display mode Dm10 are displayed.

  Then, when the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set longer than the remaining period of the short time, the end suggestion display mode Dm10 is displayed in an exploded display mode as shown in FIG. 109 (b), In the second sub-display area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds, the characters "sorry end" are displayed, and the remaining time is displayed as "? Seconds".

  As described above, the actual time-saving period (the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 in which the fluctuation is started during the time period) does not change, but when it is determined that the fluctuation of the ordinary symbol (general figure) does not end during the time-saving period. Since the electric accessory 640a does not perform the opening operation (long opening) that is advantageous to the player during the short time period, the state that is substantially advantageous to the player has ended.

  In addition, in the effect example 2, when the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set as the fluctuation time longer than the remaining period of the short time, the display screen shown in FIG. 109 (b) is displayed. However, when a variation time (for example, 10 seconds) longer than a normal variation time (3 seconds) can be set as a variation time of a normal symbol, a similar display screen is displayed when the variation time is selected. Good. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player think that the advantageous period has ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 110, the general-purpose variation pattern selection table 202aa used in the present effect example 2 will be described. FIG. 110 (a) is a schematic diagram in which the contents of the ordinary figure fluctuation pattern selection table 202aa are defined. As shown in FIG. 110 (a), the normal pattern change pattern selection table 202aa includes a normal pattern change pattern selection table 202aa1 that is referred to when the game state is the normal state, and a case where the game state is time saving A. A time saving A general-purpose variation pattern selection table 202aa2 to be referred to and a time saving B additional diagram variation pattern selection table 202aa3 to be referenced when the gaming state is the time saving B are defined, and differ depending on each gaming state. The variation pattern selection table is referred to.

  As shown in FIG. 110 (b), the normal pattern change pattern selection table 202aa1 is defined so that a change pattern (change time) of 4 seconds is always selected. As shown in FIGS. 110 (c) and 110 (d), 202aa2 and the attached figure variation pattern selection table for time saving B 202aa3 respectively show the value of the variation type counter and the ordinary symbol (general figure) variation during the time saving state. The configuration is such that a variation pattern (variation time) is selected based on the number of times.

  Note that the means for measuring the number of times the normal symbol (ordinary figure) fluctuates during the time saving state is the same as that in the above-described third embodiment, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 111, a description will be given of the ordinary symbol variation process 4 executed in the present effect example 2. FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing the contents of the normal symbol variation process 4. The ordinary symbol variation process 4 is different from the above-described ordinary symbol variation process (see FIG. 45) in that the processes (S914 and S915) for setting the variation time are changed, and the other configurations are the same. The same components are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. When the normal symbol variation process 4 is executed and it is determined that the time is not reduced in the process of S912 (S912: No), or when the process of S913 is completed, the variation time is set based on the universal symbol variation pattern selection table 202aa. Then, the present process ends.

  According to the present demonstration example 2 described above, the period that is advantageous to the player during the time reduction period (the period when the electric accessory 640a is long open) can be varied depending on the set fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol. Because it is possible, the player can always be noticed for how long the advantageous period lasts.

  It is to be noted that, based on the ordinary symbol winning information command output from the main control device 110, the variation time of the ordinary symbol that is stored and stored is determined in advance, and the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is determined based on the determination result. May be set. In this case, for example, the end suggestion display mode Dm10 may not be displayed when there is no change in the general time of the change time exceeding the remaining time saving time period in the prior determination information of the general figure. Thus, a period in which the player can play the game with peace of mind can be provided.

  Further, the effect display mode may be changed according to the presence / absence of the reserved storage of the special figure 2. In this case, the end suggestion display mode Dm10 may be displayed only in the state where the special figure 2 has no hold storage. As a result, the player can execute a game having a sense of crisis, and the effect can be enhanced.

<Other examples using the configuration of each embodiment described above>
In each of the above-described embodiments, a case where a jackpot is won in a lottery of a special symbol (a first special symbol or a second special symbol) (a symbol hit) and a case where a ball passes through a specific area (a V winning switch 650e3) ( The example in which the pachinko machine 10 (so-called one-type and two-type mixed type) in which the big hit game is executed is described for (winning per V), but the configuration of each of the above-described embodiments is applied only to the above-mentioned symbol-by-symbol. It may be used for such a gaming machine (so-called one type). Next, a description will be given of a gaming machine in which the configuration of each embodiment described above is used for one type.

  In gaming machines used in other examples, a jackpot game is executed when a jackpot is won in a lottery of a special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol), and a predetermined condition is established depending on the type of the jackpot selected. Until a special symbol fluctuates five times, a gaming machine capable of giving a probable change state in which the probability of winning a jackpot by a special symbol lottery is set to a higher probability than the normal state (so-called 1 It is a winning type based on the first special symbol and a jackpot winning based on the second special symbol is more advantageous to the player (a jackpot game with a large number of rounds and a jackpot that is likely to be given a probable change state) than the jackpot winning based on the first special symbol (Game).

  Further, when the gaming state shifts to the probable change state, a change pattern having a long change time (for example, 150 seconds) is selected as the change pattern (change time) of the first special symbol, as in the above-described embodiments. Make it easier. In a state where both the first special symbol holding storage and the second special symbol holding memory are provided, the change (lottery) based on the second special symbol holding memory is preferentially executed. (So-called special figure 2 priority change).

  With such a configuration, it is possible to perform a game for acquiring the hold memory of the second special symbol in a state where the long-time fluctuation of the first special symbol is executed. Therefore, it is possible to enthusiastically play a game during the predetermined period (during the change of the first special symbol in the probable state). In the case where such a configuration is used, a game (for example, a right-handed game) aiming at a predetermined position in the game area is performed, so that the first ball entry means that triggers the acquisition of the reserved memory of the first special symbol is obtained. Each first ball entry so as to be able to enter both the (first entry port 64) and the second entry means (second entry port 640) which triggers the acquisition of the reserved memory of the second special symbol. Means may be provided. Further, it is preferable that the second ball entry means is configured to make it difficult for the ball to enter the ball than the first ball entry means.

  Thus, in the probable change state, a fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time is selected as the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol, and during a predetermined period in which the probable change state continues (a period until the number of times of the special symbol change ends five times), A game (unfavorable game) in which the first special symbol is changed without the lottery of the second special symbol being executed (without the ball entering the second ball entry means) or the first special symbol A fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is selected as the fluctuation pattern of the symbol, and a lottery of the second special symbol is executed during a predetermined period (a period until the number of times the special symbol changes five times) in which the probable change state is continued. (A ball enters the second ball entry means), and a game in which the change of the second special symbol is executed (advantageous game) is executed.

  In this manner, the variation pattern of the first special symbol set during the probable change state executes the probable change state advantageous to the player and the probable change state disadvantageous to the player. Can watch the player. Further, similarly to the above-described embodiments, even when a small hit is won in the first special symbol, it is possible to continue the game for acquiring the reserved memory of the second special symbol.

  In the other examples described above, a configuration in which the probable change state ends when the number of times of the change of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number is used as a one-type probable game machine. However, other configurations may be used. For example, a configuration in which the probable change state is continued until the next jackpot is won, or each time a special symbol change (lottery) is executed, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to end the probable change state, and based on the lottery result, A configuration for terminating the probable change state may be used.

  Further, in the other examples described above, a configuration is used in which the fluctuation (lottery) based on the reserved storage of Toku-zu 2 is executed with higher priority than the fluctuation (lottery) based on the reserved storage of Toku-zu 2. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be used in which the special symbols are changed (lottery) in the order in which the reserved memories are acquired (winning order) regardless of the special figures 1 and 2. Further, the number of consecutive times (upper limit number) to which the probable change state is provided may be set in advance, and when the upper limit number is reached, the probable change state may not be provided after the end of the big hit.

  Next, in the above-described first embodiment, during the fluctuation of the first special symbol (special figure 1) executed during the time saving state, the holding memory of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is acquired, Although the configuration in which the time-saving state is given again after the big hit game based on the hold storage is used, an upper limit (for example, five times) may be set to the number of times the time-saving state is continuously given. .

  In this case, the number of jackpots to be executed until the number of consecutive grants in the time saving state reaches the upper limit is made different depending on the number of jackpot rights acquired in one time saving state (the number of reserved storages in FIG. 2). be able to. Therefore, the player can be motivated to play the game in order to acquire a larger number of reserved memories in the special map 2.

  In the above-described first embodiment, the time-saving state is always given after the end of the jackpot game based on the hold storage of the special map 2, however, the big hit game based on the hold memory of the special map 2 is provided. The jackpot type to which the time reduction state is not given after the end may be selected. This makes it possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the number of times the time saving state has been given when the jackpot is continuously executed by continuously digesting the hold storage of the special figure 2.

  In other words, for example, in the case where there are four reservation memories of Toku-zu 2 and the jackpot game based on the reservation memory has four consecutive time savings, the time savings are completed when the four reservation memories of Toku-zu 2 are consumed. While the next special symbol change is executed in a state where the number of consecutive states of the state becomes four, based on the hold memory that is lastly digested among the jackpot games based on the hold memory of the special figure 2. If the jackpot has a time reduction and the other has no time reduction, the number of consecutive grants in the time reduction state becomes one at the time when the four reserved storages in the special figure 2 are consumed.

  Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know whether or not the continuous number of times of saving time has reached the upper limit, and the interest of the game can be improved. Further, since the maximum number of jackpots in the case where the number of consecutive grants in the time saving state reaches the upper limit can be varied depending on the type of jackpot of the acquired special figure 2 on-hold memory, a surprising game is provided to the player. be able to.

  In addition, as a method of measuring the number of continuous grants in the time saving state, a method of measuring the number of times the time saving is set for a continuous big hit may be used, or the number of times of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 executed during the time saving state may be measured. May be used. When the latter measurement method is used in the first embodiment described above, in a single extended-village mode, when the number of consecutive grants in the time saving state reaches the upper limit (5), a maximum of 25 jackpots (special) In FIG. 2, the upper limit (4 pieces) is held each time, and the fluctuation result of Toku-zu 1 is a big hit every time. 1 if the variation result of FIG. As described above, when the upper limit is set to the number of consecutive grants in the time saving state, the number of jackpots executed during one extended game mode can be changed. It is possible to play the game eagerly.

  In a right-handed state (for example, a time-saving state or a probable change state) that is advantageous to the player, an advantageous special design (second special design) that is advantageous to the player among the special designs and a disadvantage that is more advantageous than the advantageous special design. And the special symbol (first special symbol) can be changed (lottery), and during the right-handed state, the second special symbol is more easily configured to satisfy the change execution condition than the first special symbol. In the gaming machine, when it is determined that the second special symbol is fluctuating by the determining means for determining the type of the special symbol fluctuating during the right-handed game, the display means (the third symbol display device 81) displays the second special symbol. (2) An effect display for changing and displaying the identification information for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol is executed, and when it is determined by the determining means that the first special symbol is fluctuating, the lottery result of the first special symbol is displayed. Of identification information for The guidance display (for example, "save the hold of the special figure 2") that prompts the user to acquire the holding of the second special symbol during the fluctuation period is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in an emphasized manner. It may be configured as follows.

  As described above, in the specific game state, the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 (especially, the variation display mode of the special symbol) is changed based on the type of the special symbol to be executed, so that the current symbol is set. An appropriate game method can be notified to the player based on the current game state and the current game content. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

  In addition, there is provided a determination means for determining a variation time of the first special symbol executed during the right-handed game, and the determination means determines a variation time of the first special symbol being executed for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). If it is determined that the above is the case, the above-described guidance display may be displayed. This allows the player to grasp the contents of the guidance display and correct the game contents of the game being executed. Further, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the period during which the guidance display is displayed becomes short and the player is confused.

  Furthermore, in each of the above-described embodiments, as the opening pattern of the motorized accessory 640a during the time reduction state, an opening pattern of 11 seconds of a first opening period of 3 seconds, a closing period of 5 seconds, and a second opening period of 3 seconds (long opening period). ) Is set and the opening scenario corresponding to the set opening pattern ends, or when one ball enters the second entrance 640 during the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a, Although the condition (end condition) for terminating the opening operation of the object 640a is established, a different opening pattern and an end condition are set as the opening pattern of the electric accessory 640a, and the embodiment described above is applied. May constitute gaming machines having different gaming properties.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the number of balls entering the second entrance 640 when the electric accessory 640a is opened during the time-saving state (when a winning is achieved by a normal symbol lottery during the time-saving state). By limiting the number to one, it has been suppressed that an excessive privilege is given to the player. However, by using such a configuration, a bonus granted to a player when a normal symbol lottery is won during a time-saving state (a privilege that allows the ball to enter the second entrance 640 easily). Is always constant, and there is a problem that the player's willingness to play decreases.

  Therefore, in order to solve the above-described problem, as an opening pattern (long opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a executed during the time saving state, an interval at which the ball reaches the electric accessory 640a (the ball is distributed by the distribution member 700). An open pattern in which an open scenario in which 0.2 seconds is released at intervals of 1.2 seconds, which is the (distributed interval), is used five times is set, and the open scenario ends as a condition for ending the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a. In such a case, a configuration in which four balls enter the second entrance 640 during the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a may be set as the end condition.

  With this configuration, when the timing when the electric accessory 640a is released in the long opening pattern coincides with the timing when the ball reaches the electric accessory 640a, the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a is performed once. In, it is possible to make a maximum of four balls enter the second entrance 640. Therefore, a bonus (a privilege that makes it easy for the ball to enter the second entrance 640) to be given to the player when the player wins the normal symbol lottery during the time-saving state is changed to the game situation (ball launch timing, The timing at which the ball reaches the electric accessory 640a) can be varied, and the game can be prevented from becoming monotonous.

  Further, when the right-handed game is continuously executed (when a game in which 100 balls are fired in one minute is executed), the opening of the electric accessory 640a is changed to the electric accessory 640a. Is set to 1.2 seconds in the same manner as the timing at which the ball arrives, so that a large number of balls can easily enter the second entrance 640 for a player who is actively executing a right-handed game. can do.

  In addition, as described with reference to the first embodiment, the distribution member 700 for alternately distributing the game balls and the flow of the balls distributed by the distribution member 700 are provided on the right side area of the game board 13. Since the ball is configured to reach the electric accessory 640 via a rectifying unit (a curved path 701a or a path directly below the ball that does not reduce the falling speed of the ball) for keeping the interval constant, a right-handed game is performed. When the ball is continuously executed, the accuracy of the interval at which the shot ball reaches the electric accessory 640a can be further improved.

  In the case where such a configuration is used, a configuration may be adopted in which a suggestion notification for suggesting to the player the opening timing of the electric accessory 640a is executed. By executing the suggestion notification, it is possible for the player to play the game aiming at a timing at which the ball easily enters the second entrance 640.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the frame button 22 for determining that the operating means has been operated by the player performing a pressing operation is used as the operating means operable by the player. It is also possible to use, it is possible to determine that the player has been operated by tilting the player left and right or back and forth, and it is possible to determine that the player has been operated by touching or approaching the lever A simple touch sensor type operation means, a wireless type operation means capable of discriminating that the operation has been performed by transmitting a predetermined radio wave, or the like may be used.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the third symbol display for showing the result of the lottery of each symbol to the player is executed by one display means (the third symbol display device 81), but other configurations are used. For example, of the third symbols, different display units may be provided for a display unit for displaying a main symbol displayed to be emphasized to a player and a display unit for displaying a sub symbol. Further, as a configuration of the display means, a configuration other than a liquid crystal display may be used, and a display using an organic electroluminescence (EL) phenomenon that emits light when a voltage is applied to a layered structure using a certain organic compound is applied. The surface of the device (organic EL display) or various three-dimensional objects (such as an accessory) provided in the pachinko machine 10 is used as a screen, and the position of the three-dimensional surface (projection, burial relationship) is identified, and then the image is displayed using a projector. A display device (project mapping) for irradiation may be used.

  In the case where the above-described project mapping is used as the display means, the projection of the video data is performed based on the data of the three-dimensional surface of the movable role provided on the pachinko machine 10 and the position data of the movable role at the time of irradiation. By configuring so as to determine the position and the content, a flexible display can be executed and the effect of the effect can be enhanced. In addition, in consideration of a case where an abnormality has occurred in a movable auditorium that can serve as a screen, it is determined whether or not the movable state of the movable auditorium is normal, and if it is determined that the determination result is not normal, a non-movable It is preferable to execute the abnormal-time control so as to irradiate the image data with the portion as a screen. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the problem that the player cannot grasp the display content displayed on the display means due to the abnormality of the movable auditorium.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, a right-handed game aiming at the right area of the game board 13 is executed in a game state (time saving state) advantageous to the player, and a left area of the game board 13 in a normal game state. The left-handed game aiming at is executed, but the target area of the game board 13 may be made different depending on the game state. May execute a right-handed game. Further, a game in a different game state may be executed while aiming at the same area.

  The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a twice-rights item or a three-times rights item) that increases the jackpot expectation value until a jackpot condition occurs a plurality of times (for example, two or three times) including that. ). Further, after the big hit symbol is displayed, the game may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game for giving a predetermined game value to a player on condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, a prize winning device having a special area such as a V zone may be provided, and the pachinko machine may be put into a special game state on condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the present invention may be implemented as various game machines such as areache, sparrow ball, slot machine, so-called game machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is fluctuated by operating an operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted and a symbol valid line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and determined by operating a stop button. Things. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is as follows. "A display device for variably displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided. The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to a player on the condition that the combination of the identification information at the time is a specific one, and in this case, coins, medals, etc. are representative of game media. As an example.

  Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, a display device for variably displaying a symbol row including a plurality of symbols and then displaying the symbols in a fixed manner is provided, and a handle for hitting a ball is provided. Not included. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the fluctuation of the symbol is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, and, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or With the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called big hit symbol is generated. Is a method in which a large amount of balls are paid out to a lower saucer. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a game value in a game hall, so it is a game value seen in a current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of gaming machines can be solved.

  Hereinafter, the concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be described.

<Feature A>
First obtaining means for obtaining first information based on satisfaction of a first obtaining condition; first determining means for performing first determination based on the first information obtained by the first obtaining means; The first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information for indicating the first determination result by the first determination means, and the first identification information for indicating the specific first determination result is When the stop display is performed, a first privilege granting unit that grants the first privilege to the player, a second acquisition unit that acquires the second information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition, and a second acquisition unit A storage unit in which the obtained second information is stored, and a second unit that executes a second determination based on the second information stored in the storage unit, in which a second determination that is more advantageous for the player than the first determination is easily performed. 2 determining means and a state for restricting establishment of the second acquisition condition. A gaming machine comprising: a first state and a state setting means that can be set by switching between a first state and a second state in which the second acquisition condition is more easily satisfied than the first state. Priority means for executing the second determination corresponding to the second information being performed in preference to the first determination, and when the first state is switched to the second state, A gaming machine A1 characterized in that the first determination is performed before the second determination is performed.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the state of the starting port provided on the game board is changed from the first state in which the game ball is hard to enter to the second state in which the game ball is easy to enter. In some cases, a first lottery is performed. In such a conventional gaming machine, a lottery executed when a game ball enters the starting port in a state easily changed to the second state is executed a predetermined number of times, and until a predetermined number of lottery results is displayed. A gaming machine that is set continuously has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-147965).

  However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the probability that the determination that the lottery is advantageous to the player is performed in a state in which the predetermined number of lotteries are performed is constant, and the game becomes monotonous, and the player becomes early. There was a problem of getting tired.

  According to the gaming machine A1, even in a special state in which the second acquisition condition is easily satisfied, the dynamic display of the first identification information is executed, and the second determination is made during the dynamic display period. Since the execution is restricted, at the start of the special state, a period in which the first determination that is more disadvantageous to the player than the second determination is performed is performed, and thereafter, the second determination that is advantageous to the player is performed. The second information stored in the storage means is configured so that the second determination is executed with priority over the first determination by the priority means, so that the second determination which is advantageous to the player is continuously performed. By switching to a period in which the game is likely to be executed, there is an effect that the interest of the player is improved and a trouble that the player gets tired of the game early can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine A1, first ball entry means that triggers the establishment of the first acquisition condition when a game ball enters, and triggers the satisfaction of the second acquisition condition when a game ball enters. A second ball entry means, a variable member that can be changed between an open state where game balls can enter the second ball entry means and a closed state where entry of the game balls is difficult, and a game ball passing through a predetermined passage area Detection means capable of detecting whether the game has been performed, lottery means for executing a lottery based on the detection of a game ball by the detection means, and lottery information for indicating a lottery result by the lottery means are dynamically displayed. The lottery information dynamic display means, when the lottery information for indicating the specific lottery result is stopped and displayed, the variable member is changed to the closed state or the open state in a variable pattern set according to a predetermined rule. Variable control means for changing, the lottery means, Gaming machine 1 identification information or the second identification information is characterized in that which is configured to be able to execute the lottery in the period being dynamically displayed A2.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine A1, a special state is set, and even during a period in which the first identification information is dynamically displayed, the lottery is performed by passing the gaming ball to the passing area. The second acquisition condition can be satisfied by causing the game ball to enter the second ball entry means to be executed, so that the pass area is as small as possible even during the period in which the first identification information is dynamically displayed. There is an effect that a player can play a game so that a player can pass a game ball.

  In the gaming machine A1 or A2, a state in which game balls can enter the ball, variable winning means in which the game balls are changed to difficult to enter the ball, and a specific area through which the game balls entering the variable winning means can pass. A bonus game execution unit that executes a bonus game that is advantageous to the player when the game ball passes through the specific area, and that the second determination unit determines that the specific second determination result is obtained. A game machine A3 comprising: a variable game execution means for changing the variable ball entry means from the difficult ball entry state to the ball entry possible state based on the variable ball entry means.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine A1 or A2, by performing the second determination, it is possible to shift to a game in which a game ball is passed to a specific area, and There is an effect that a game with change can be provided.

  In any one of the gaming machines A2 and A3, the variable pattern changed by the variable control means is set variably in accordance with a period in which the special state is set. Gaming machine A4.

  According to the gaming machine A4, since the variable pattern is changed in accordance with the setting period of the special state, there is an effect that the variable pattern can be executed in accordance with the period in which the special state is set.

  In any one of the gaming machines A2 to A4, a first storage unit that stores the first information acquired by the first acquisition unit, and the first identification dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display unit. A first dynamic display period setting unit that determines a dynamic display period of information, wherein the first dynamic display period setting unit is configured to determine whether the second state is set by the state setting unit. As the dynamic display period of the first identification information, at least a first dynamic display period shorter than a dynamic display period in which the lottery information is dynamically displayed by the lottery information dynamic display means; A gaming machine A5 wherein a second dynamic display period longer than a dynamically displayed dynamic display period can be set.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A2 to A4, the second state is set as the second state by the length of the dynamic display period set by the first dynamic display period setting means. An advantageous state in which a game ball can easily enter the ball means and a disadvantageous state in which a game ball cannot easily enter the second ball entry means can be set. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play a game so that the second state becomes an advantageous state.

  The gaming machine A5, comprising: display means capable of displaying predetermined information; and display control means for causing the display means to display state information for indicating the state of the game set by the state setting means. The control means does not display state information for indicating the second state when the first dynamic display period setting means sets the second dynamic display period. Gaming machine A6.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine A5, a game ball is entered into the second ball entry means as a dynamic display period of the first identification information even though the second state is set. When the second dynamic display period, which is difficult to be set, is set, the state information for indicating the second state is not displayed, so that the information displayed on the display means impairs the expectation of the player. There is an effect that it can be suppressed.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the game device includes a game restricting unit capable of restricting a game of the player based on the second acquisition condition being satisfied in the state where the first state is set. A gaming machine A7 characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the player's game is performed based on the fact that the second acquisition condition is satisfied in the first state in which the establishment of the second acquisition condition is restricted. Since it is possible to regulate the game, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the illegal establishment of the second acquisition condition.

  The gaming machine A8 according to the gaming machine A7, wherein the game regulating means regulates launching of a game ball.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A7, since the launch of the game ball is regulated by the game regulating means, there is an effect that fraud can be effectively suppressed.

  In any one of the gaming machines A2 to A8, the first ball entry means is capable of entering a first flow path in which a game ball is difficult to enter the second ball entry means, and a game ball to the second ball entry means. The first ball entry means arranged in the second flow path and the first ball entry means arranged in the second flow path, respectively, allows a game ball to enter a ball entry port arranged in the second flow path to play a game. A ball is made available for entry, and a game ball enters the first ball entry means arranged in the second flow path, thereby making the game ball difficult to enter. Gaming machine A9.

  According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A2 to A8, the second state is set by allowing the gaming ball to enter the entrance, so that the gaming ball enters the second entering means. Even when a game ball is caused to flow down to the second flow path in order to make the ball flow, the game ball easily enters the first ball entry means by entering the game ball into the ball entry port. There is an effect that the determination can be easily performed and the configuration can be made.

  In the gaming machine A9, holding means capable of holding the game ball at a position where the game ball can enter the ball entrance, and holding release means for releasing the holding by the holding means based on establishment of a release condition. A gaming machine A10 characterized by having:

  According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine A9, there is an effect that the timing at which the gaming ball enters the first ball entry means can be controlled by the release condition.

  The gaming machine A11, wherein in the gaming machine A10, the cancellation condition is canceled based on the first benefit being given by the first privilege granting means.

  According to the gaming machine A11, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine A10, the release condition is satisfied at the timing when the first privilege is provided, so that the first acquisition condition is easily satisfied after the first privilege is provided. There is an effect that can be.

<Feature B group>
A first flow path through which a game ball can flow, a second flow path through which a game ball flowing down the first flow path is difficult to flow, and a position where a game ball flowing down the first flow path can enter the ball. A first ball entry means, a second ball entry means arranged in the second flow path and capable of entering a game ball, and a game ball entering the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means. Acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the ball, determination means for performing a determination based on the information acquired by the acquisition means, and identification information for indicating a determination result by the determination means being dynamic. In a gaming machine having a dynamic display means to be displayed, and a privilege granting means for granting a privilege to a player when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed. By executing a game by causing a game ball to flow down to the second flow path, the first flow path A state setting means capable of setting a special state that is advantageous to the player rather than executing a game by letting a ball down, and a state in which the special state is not set by the state setting means, Regulating means for making it harder for game balls to enter the second ball entry means than for the first ball entry means when a game is played by causing game balls to flow down to the second flow path. A gaming machine B1 characterized by the following.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the state of the starting port provided on the game board is changed from the first state in which the game ball is hard to enter to the second state in which the game ball is easy to enter. In some cases, a first lottery is performed. In such a conventional gaming machine, a lottery executed when a game ball enters the starting port in a state easily changed to the second state is executed a predetermined number of times, and until a predetermined number of lottery results is displayed. A gaming machine that is set continuously has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-147965).

  However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the probability that the determination that the lottery is advantageous to the player is performed in a state in which the predetermined number of lotteries are performed is constant, and the game becomes monotonous, and the player becomes early. There was a problem of getting tired. Also, in order to give a change to the game, if it is configured to play the game by changing the flow route of the game ball, if the game ball flows down to a different route from the assumed flow route, it will be illegally profitable for the player Was given.

  According to the gaming machine B1, when the special state is set, the game can be changed by flowing down the second flow path so that the game is performed, while the special state is set. If not, the game ball is restricted from entering the second ball entry means more easily than the first ball entry means. Therefore, when the special state is completed, the first flow path is caused to flow down and the game is played. By inevitably causing the player to do so, there is an effect that malfunctions such as fraud can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine B1, the second flow path is formed with at least a third flow path through which game balls can flow and a fourth flow path through which game balls flowing down the third flow path are difficult to flow. And a distributing means for distributing game balls flowing down the second flow path to the third flow path and the fourth flow path, respectively, and the second entering ball is provided in the fourth flow path. A gaming machine B2, wherein the means are arranged.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B1, the gaming balls distributed to the third channel among the gaming balls flowing down to the second channel can enter the second ball entry means. Therefore, there is an effect that the amount of game balls that can enter the second ball entry means than the first ball entry means can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine B2, a third ball entry means capable of entering a game ball is disposed in the third flow path, and based on the game ball having entered the third ball entry means, Information is obtained by the obtaining means, and an advantage determination means for performing an advantage determination that is more advantageous to the player than the determination based on the information obtained by the game ball entering the third ball entry means; and And the variable state control means for changing the state in which the game ball does not easily enter the third ball entry means to the state in which it is easy to enter the ball by setting the special state. Gaming machine B3.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B2, in the special state, the state is such that it is easy to enter the third ball entry means, so that the player can cause the game ball to flow down to the second flow path. There is an effect that the user can be prompted to play a game.

  The gaming machine B4 in the gaming machine B2 or B3, wherein the allocating means alternately distributes gaming balls to the third flow path and the fourth flow path.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B2 or B3, by alternately allocating the gaming balls, half of the gaming balls flowing down to the second flow path can flow down, and the second ball entry means can be effectively provided. There is an effect that the number of game balls entering the ball can be reduced.

  In the gaming machines B1 to B4, switching is made to a holding means capable of holding the game balls flowing down the first flow path or the second flow path, and to a state in which the game balls held by the holding means are caused to flow downstream. A switching means, an opening through which a game ball that has flowed down by being switched to the flow-down state by the switching means can enter, and the game ball enters the opening, whereby the second ball A gaming machine B5 comprising: a variable means for changing a means into a state in which a game ball can enter.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B4, the holding means and the switching means regulate the entering of the game ball into the second entering means, so that the timing is not intended. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the game ball enters the second ball entry means.

  The gaming machine B6, wherein in the gaming machine B5, the switching means switches to a state in which game balls can be held after a predetermined period has elapsed after switching to the downflow state.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B5, it is possible to define a period during which game balls can enter the second ball entry means, so that game balls enter the second ball entry means. Has the effect of being able to regulate more.

  In the gaming machine B5 or B6, the second ball entry means is changed by the variable means to a state in which the game ball is difficult to enter based on the entry of the game ball. Gaming machine B7.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B5 or B6, even when the switching means is being switched to the sulphidation state, a gaming ball has entered the second ball entry means. In this case, since the second ball entry means is changed to a state in which game balls are difficult to enter, it is possible to prevent a plurality of game balls from entering the second ball entry means continuously. . Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress giving an excessive privilege to the player.

  In any one of the gaming machines B5 to B7, a game ball held by the holding means is provided in an area where the game ball can flow down, and a first position at which the game ball flowing down can be guided to a first flow path; Variable guiding means that can be changed to a second position that is difficult to guide the flow path, and a guiding member variable control that variably controls the variable guiding means to the first position and the second position at predetermined intervals. Means, and wherein the opening is disposed in an area where a game ball flowing down the first flow path can enter the ball.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B5 to B7, the timing at which the game ball held by the holding means by the switching means can flow to the downstream, and the variable guiding means at the first position Only when the timing that is changed to a predetermined condition satisfies a predetermined condition, it is possible to allow the game ball to enter the opening, so that the player is conscious of the timing of the game and willingly play the game. There is an effect that it can be performed.

  In any of the gaming machines B1 to B8, when the special state is set by the state setting means, the remaining period of the special state is shortened by dynamically displaying the identification information. A gaming machine B9 having variable means for performing the following.

  According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B8, the remaining period of the special state is shortened by dynamically displaying the identification information, so that the identification information is dynamically displayed to the player. There is an effect that interest can be given for the period, and interest in the game can be improved. Note that the longer the dynamic display period is, the longer the special state that is advantageous to the player is, so that the player can expect a long dynamic display period.

<Character C group> (Control to make one game run)
A first flow path through which a game ball can flow, a second flow path through which a game ball flowing down the first flow path becomes difficult to flow, and a position where a game ball flowing down the first flow path can enter the ball. A first ball entry means arranged, a second ball entry means arranged in the second flow path, into which a game ball can enter, and a game ball in the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means. Acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the entry of the ball, determination means for performing a determination based on the information acquired by the acquisition means, and identification information for indicating a determination result by the determination means are dynamic. In the gaming machine having dynamic display means to be displayed, and privilege providing means for granting a privilege to a player when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed, 2 The first state in which a game ball can enter the ball entry means, and it is more difficult to enter the ball than the first state. A variable means for changing the variable means to a second state, a variable execution means for changing the variable means from the second state to the first state based on the satisfaction of a variable condition, and Special state setting means for setting a special state in which a bonus game which is advantageous to a player by causing a game ball to flow down to the second flow path from the first flow path to execute a game is easily performed; After the bonus game is executed, the identification information is dynamically displayed, and a release unit that releases the special state based on the expiration of the dynamic display period, and when the bonus game is executed, A gaming machine C1 comprising: variable condition determining means for determining whether variable conditions are satisfied.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is executed by a game ball entering a starting port provided on a game board, and if the result of the lottery is a hit, it is advantageous for the player. A game has been proposed in which a game is executed, and a lottery probability after the hit game is set to a high probability state depending on the type of the hit game so that the hit game is easily executed continuously. (For example, JP 2012-147965 A).

  However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, it is difficult for a player to confirm whether a lottery is actually performed in a high-probability state and to play a game, and there is a problem that interest is easily reduced.

  According to the gaming machine C1, when the bonus game is executed, it is determined whether or not a variable condition for determining whether to change the variable means to the first state is satisfied. By changing the variable means to the first state, the identification information can be easily displayed dynamically, the special state can be easily released, and if the variable means is not changed, the identification information can be hardly displayed, and There is an effect that the special state can be easily set continuously, and the interest can be improved depending on whether or not the variable condition is satisfied when the bonus game is executed.

  The gaming machine C1 has a type determining unit that determines the type of the bonus game when the bonus game is executed, and the variable condition determining unit determines the type of the bonus game determined by the type determining unit. A gaming machine C2 for determining whether the variable condition is satisfied based on the condition.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine C1, the establishment of the variable condition is determined based on the type of the bonus game to be executed. Therefore, the establishment of the variable condition is determined by the rate at which the type of the bonus game is determined. The ratio can also be set, and there is an effect that stable game contents can be set.

  In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the privilege granting means executes the privilege game as one of the benefits, and the type determining means determines a type of the privilege game executed by the privilege granting means. And the special state is set based on a type of the privilege game executed by the privilege granting means.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C1 or C2, the rate at which the special state is set can be varied by setting the type of the bonus game, so that the emissivity can be easily adjusted and designed. There is an effect that can be.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C3, a third ball entry means capable of entering a game ball is disposed in the second flow path, and the acquisition means includes a game ball provided to the third ball entry means. The information is acquired based on that the game ball has entered, and the determination means is more capable of playing the game than the determination based on the information acquired by the game ball having entered the third ball entry means. And a restricting means that can be changed between a state in which the third ball entering means is restricted from entering a game ball and a state in which entering is permitted. The gaming machine C4, wherein the regulation means is configured to be easily changed to a state allowing the entering ball by setting the special state.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the gaming ball is easily thrown into the third ball entry means in which an advantage determination that is advantageous to the player in the special state is executed. Since it is possible, there is an effect that it is possible to encourage the player to play the game by causing the game ball to flow down to the second flow path.

  In the gaming machine C4, a variable ball entry means that can be changed between an open state in which the game ball can enter and a closed state in which the game ball does not enter, a specific area through which the game ball entered the variable ball entry means can pass, A bonus game execution unit that executes the bonus game when the game ball passes through the specific area, and the variable ball entry unit is closed from the closed state when the specific result is determined by the advantage determination. A gaming machine C5 characterized by being changed to an open state.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine C4, the bonus game is executed by passing the game ball through the specific area, so that the player can be interested in the ball flow and can play the game. There is an effect that the interest of the person can be improved.

  In any of the gaming machines C2 to C5, a first storage unit capable of storing the information obtained based on a game ball having entered the first ball entry unit, and a first storage unit that stores the information. Determination condition determining means for determining the information for which the determination is performed by the determining means based on the information, wherein the type determining means stores the information in the storage means at least during the privilege game. A first type corresponding to a first privilege game that is easy to be stored and a second type corresponding to a second privilege game that is more difficult to store the information in the storage unit than the first type are determined. Gaming machine C6 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine C6, it is possible to execute a privilege game in which information is easily stored in the first storage means and a privilege game in which it is difficult to store the information during the privilege game, depending on the type determined by the type determining means. Thereby, when the special state is given after the end of the privilege game, it is possible to set a state where the identification information based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means is dynamically displayed and a state where the identification information is not displayed. It becomes possible. Therefore, it is possible to dynamically display the identification information based on the game ball entering the second ball entry means during the special state, and to diversify the game executed during the special state.

  In the gaming machine C6, the special state setting means includes: a first special state in which identification information based on a game ball having entered the first ball entry means is dynamically displayed during the special state; (2) a second special state in which identification information based on a game ball having entered the ball entry means is dynamically displayed, and the second special state is more game-playing than the first special state. Gaming machine C7 characterized in that a privilege game advantageous to a player is easily executed.

  According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C6, the degree of advantage provided to the player can be varied depending on the type of identification information dynamically displayed during the special state. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be motivated to play the game.

<Feature D group>
A first ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, a second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means, and a first determination based on a game ball having entered the first ball entry means Executing a second determination that is more advantageous to the player than the first determination based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second ball input means, and a determination result by the determination means. Dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating, and a first state in which game balls are difficult to enter the second ball entry means, and a second state in which game balls can be entered; Changing means for changing the second ball entry means to the second state when a specific condition is satisfied; and state setting means capable of setting a special state capable of changing the second ball entry means to the second state. When the status is set, the dynamic display of the identification information is executed, and the dynamic display period is displayed. Releasing means for releasing the special state based on the termination, and when the special state is set, dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the identification is performed based on the remaining dynamic display period. A gaming machine D1 comprising: an effect execution unit that executes an effect based on information that determines that a condition is satisfied.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is executed by a game ball entering a starting port provided on a game board, and if the result of the lottery is a hit, it is advantageous for the player. A game has been proposed in which a game is executed, and a lottery probability after the hit game is set to a high probability state depending on the type of the hit game so that the hit game is easily executed continuously. In such a gaming machine, a symbol for notifying a player of a lottery result is displayed on a liquid crystal display device or the like in a fluctuating manner, and then the lottery result is notified by stopping and displaying the symbol indicating the lottery result. If is a hit, a game that executes a hit game is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-147965).

  However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the game is monotonous due to the repeated display of the symbols based on the lottery result, and the player gets tired early.

  According to the gaming machine D1, since the remaining period of the special state changes with the elapse of the dynamic display period of the identification information executed when the special state is set, it is specified by the effect executed by the effect executing means. It is possible to recognize the satisfaction of the condition and the remaining period of the special state, and it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets tired early.

  In the gaming machine D1, there are detection means for detecting that the game ball has passed through the passage area, and determination means for determining whether the specific condition is satisfied when the detection means detects the passage of the game ball. The gaming machine D2, wherein the effect executing means executes an effect for indicating a result of the determination based on the execution of the determination by the determining means.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D1, it is determined that the specific condition is satisfied by passing the game ball through the passage area even when the identification information is displayed in the special state. This has the effect that the interest in the game can be further improved.

  In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the effect executing means executes a specific effect based on the remaining dynamic display period of the identification information being equal to or shorter than a predetermined period. .

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D1 or D2, by executing the specific effect, it is possible to determine that the remaining period of the special state has become equal to or shorter than the predetermined period. .

  In any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the second determination is executed by the determination unit among the information acquired by the acquisition unit based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second ball entry unit. Storage means for storing up to a predetermined number of pieces of the information before the change, and the effect executing means stores the information in the storage means when the remaining dynamic display period of the identification information is equal to or less than the predetermined time period. The gaming machine D4, wherein the specific effect is not executed on condition that it is stored.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, even if the special state is ended by the information being stored in the storage means, the information is stored in the information stored in the storage means. Since it is in a state where it is easy to make an advantageous determination, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from giving extra uneasiness by executing the specific effect.

  A second dynamic display unit for causing any one of the gaming machines D2 to D4 to dynamically display result information for indicating a determination result by the determination unit for a predetermined period of time and then stopping the display, and the second dynamic display unit And a period determining means for determining a remaining dynamic display period of the identification information at the time when the result information is stopped and displayed, wherein the effect executing means determines that the determination result by the period determining means is a predetermined period condition A game machine D5 that switches the stop display mode of the result information to a stop display mode based on the determination result of the identification information when the condition is satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines D2 to D4, when the remaining dynamic display period of the identification information satisfies the period condition, the stop display mode can be switched. It is possible to provide a surprising effect to the person and enhance the effect.

  In the gaming machine D5, when the remaining dynamic display period of the identification information at the time when the result information is stopped and displayed by the second dynamic display means is within a predetermined period, the period condition is satisfied. A gaming machine D6 characterized by the above-mentioned.

  According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D5, it is possible to suppress a problem that the result information and the identification information are stopped and displayed at short intervals and it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the displayed contents, It is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game to the player.

<Feature E group>
A first ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, a second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means, and a first determination based on a game ball having entered the first ball entry means Executing a second determination that is more advantageous to the player than the first determination based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second ball input means, and a determination result by the determination means. Dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating, and a first state in which game balls are difficult to enter the second ball entry means, making it easier to enter game balls than in the first state. Variable means for changing to the second state, state setting means for setting a special state that can be changed to the second state by the variable means when a specific condition is satisfied, and the state setting Means for dynamically displaying the identification information when the special state is set by the means. Executing, based on the end of the dynamic display period, a cancellation means for canceling the special state, and a lottery for determining whether to change the variable means from the first state to the second state. Lottery means, lottery information dynamic display means for dynamically displaying lottery information for indicating a lottery result by the lottery means, and dynamic display for determining a dynamic display period in which the lottery information is dynamically displayed. A period determination unit, a storage unit storing a plurality of dynamic display period groups in which the plurality of dynamic display periods determined by the dynamic display period determination unit are stored, and the special unit set by the state setting unit Selecting means for selecting a type of state; and the dynamic display period group in which the dynamic display period determining means determines the dynamic display period based on the type of the special state set by the state setting means. Configuration Gaming machine E1, wherein the one having a dynamic display period group setting unit that, the.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is executed by a game ball entering a starting port provided on a game board, and if the result of the lottery is a hit, it is advantageous for the player. A game has been proposed in which a game is executed, and a lottery probability after the hit game is set to a high probability state depending on the type of the hit game so that the hit game is easily executed continuously. In such a gaming machine, a symbol for notifying a player of a lottery result is displayed on a liquid crystal display device or the like in a fluctuating manner, and then the lottery result is notified by stopping and displaying the symbol indicating the lottery result. If is a hit, a game that executes a hit game is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-147965).

  However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the game is monotonous due to the repeated display of the symbols based on the lottery result, and the player gets tired early.

  According to the gaming machine E1, the lottery can be executed in the special state period if the dynamic display period of the lottery information is determined to be short, and the interest of the game can be improved by the determined dynamic display period group. This has the effect of suppressing the problem that the player gets tired early.

  In the gaming machine E1, an acquisition unit capable of acquiring information based on a game ball having entered the first ball entry unit or the second ball entry unit, and the information acquired by the acquisition unit are stored. A gaming machine E2, comprising: a storage unit that performs the first determination or the second determination based on the information stored in the storage unit.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine E1, the information acquired by the acquiring means can be stored in the storage means. Game can be played, and the efficiency of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine E1 or E2, during the period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed, the determination unit performs the first determination or the second determination even when the information is stored in the storage unit. A gaming machine E3 characterized by waiting for execution.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine E1 or E2, while the identification information is dynamically displayed, the execution of the determination based on the information stored in the storage means is on standby, so A plurality of determinations based on the information stored in the means are not executed at the same time. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a player with an easy-to-understand game.

  In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the game machine has detection means for detecting that the game ball has passed through a passage area through which the game ball can pass, and the lottery means detects the passage of the game ball by the detection means. A gaming machine E4 for executing the lottery based on the result of the selection.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, when the detection means detects that the game ball has passed through the passing area, the lottery by the lottery means is executed. There is an effect that a player can play a game using a game ball with will.

  In any of the gaming machines E1 to E4, the dynamic display period group set by the dynamic display period group setting means is a short dynamic display period set such that a short dynamic display period is easily determined as a dynamic display period. A gaming machine wherein at least a display period group and a long dynamic display period group in which the short dynamic display period is set to be shorter than the short dynamic display period group are set. E5.

  According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines E1 to E4, the length of the dynamic display period set by the dynamic display period group set by the dynamic display period group setting means is set. Can be variable. Therefore, it is possible to vary the number of lotteries executed by the lottery means during the special state that is advantageous to the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In any one of the gaming machines E2 to E5, the dynamic display period determination unit may be configured to perform a determination based on the number of pieces of information acquired based on having entered the second ball entry unit stored in the storage unit. A game machine E6 for determining one dynamic display period from the determined dynamic display period group.

  According to the gaming machine E6, the dynamic display period is determined based on the number of pieces of information acquired based on the ball entering the second ball entry means, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines E2 to E5. Therefore, it is possible to associate the game in which the game ball is made to enter the second ball entry means with the number of lotteries executed by the lottery means. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machines E1 to E6, there is provided a notifying unit for notifying that the special state is set, and the notifying unit dynamically displays the lottery information determined by the dynamic display period determining unit. The gaming machine E7, wherein the notification is performed only when the period is shorter than the remaining period of the special state set by the state setting means.

  According to the gaming machine E7, the notification unit notifies that the current state is the special state only when the dynamic display of the lottery information ends in the state where the special state is set. Therefore, even during the special state, the variable means notifies the player of the special state during the remaining period of the special state which is not changed from the first state to the second state, thereby distrusting the player. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress giving a feeling.

<Character F group> (Direction per special during working hours)
A first ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, a second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means, and a first determination based on a game ball having entered the first ball entry means Executing a second determination that is more advantageous to the player than the first determination based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second ball input means, and a determination result by the determination means. Dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating, and executing a privilege game which is advantageous to the player when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed. In the gaming machine having a privilege game execution means, wherein the second ball entry means is changed from a first state in which game balls are difficult to enter to a second state in which game balls can enter. Lottery means for executing a lottery based on the establishment of the lottery condition; Lottery information dynamic display means for dynamically displaying lottery information for indicating a result; and the second means by the variable means when the lottery information for indicating the specific lottery result is stopped and displayed. State setting means capable of setting a special state capable of being changed to a state, and when the special state is set by the state setting means, dynamic display of the identification information is executed, Means for canceling the special state based on the end of the special display period, and, if the special state is not set, executing an effect corresponding to the dynamic display of the identification information, Is set, based on the fact that the lottery information is dynamically displayed, the effect execution means, and the effect execution means, when the special state is set, the lottery Of information Gaming machine F1, characterized in that the state of executing an effect corresponding to the representation in which the dynamic display specific conditions to effect corresponding to the identification information is performed by switching based on the satisfied.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is executed by a game ball entering a starting port provided on a game board, and if the result of the lottery is a hit, it is advantageous for the player. A game has been proposed in which a game is executed, and a lottery probability after the hit game is set to a high probability state depending on the type of the hit game so that the hit game is easily executed continuously. In such a gaming machine, a symbol for notifying a player of a lottery result is displayed on a liquid crystal display device or the like in a fluctuating manner, and then the lottery result is notified by stopping and displaying the symbol indicating the lottery result. If is a hit, a game that executes a hit game is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-147965). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the game is monotonous due to the repeated display of the symbols based on the lottery result, and the player gets tired early.

  According to the gaming machine F1, when it is in the special state, it becomes easy to enter a state in which a game ball can enter the second ball entry means, so that it is easy to enter the second ball entry means in a specific lottery result. Can be switched to an effect corresponding to whether or not it is possible to provide the player with an effect corresponding to different information between the special state and the non-special state, so that the game can be changed, There is an effect that the trouble of getting tired can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine F1, information acquisition means for acquiring information determined by the determination means based on a game ball having entered the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means, and the information acquisition means Storage means for storing the acquired information, a gaming machine F2.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine F1, the information acquired in the storage means also when a large number of gaming balls enter the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means. Is stored, so that it is possible to give the player many opportunities to be determined.

  In the gaming machine F2, based on the fact that the determination condition is satisfied, the determining means is based on the information stored in the storage means and acquired based on the fact that the ball has entered the second ball-in means. The gaming machine F3, wherein the determination is performed with priority over the information acquired based on the fact that the first ball entry means has entered the ball.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine F2, when there is a plurality of pieces of information obtained based on the fact that the ball has entered the second ball entry means, the plurality of pieces of information are continuously determined. Can be. Therefore, it is possible to continuously execute the determination that is advantageous to the player, and it is possible to improve the player's willingness to play.

  In any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, when the special condition is set in the specific condition, the remaining period of the dynamic display period of the identification information for which the dynamic display has been started is set to be equal to or shorter than a predetermined period. A gaming machine F4 characterized in that the fact that it has been set is at least one of the fulfillment conditions.

  According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines F1 to F3, an effect corresponding to dynamic display of identification information executed when the special state is released before the special state is released. The effect is that the effect can be switched when it is canceled smoothly.

  In any of the gaming machines F1 to F4, in the specific condition, when the special state is set, the dynamic information is started and the identification information is stopped and displayed with the identification information for indicating the specific determination result. A gaming machine F5, wherein at least one of the conditions is that it is set to be performed.

  According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines F1 to F4, when the dynamically displayed identification information is stopped and displayed with the identification information for indicating that the identification information is a specific determination result, At first, an effect corresponding to the dynamic display of the lottery information is performed, and the second ball entry means is notified to the player whether or not it is in a state where the game ball can easily enter the ball, and then a specific determination result is obtained. Can also be notified by the effect, and it is possible to provide the player with an effect effectively utilizing the dynamic display period of the identification information.

<Feature G group> (Game support)
A ball entry means having an opening through which game balls can enter, an open state in which game balls can enter the opening of the ball entry means, and a closed state in which entry of game balls is restricted. A variable member that can be changed, a determination unit that performs a determination based on the passage of a game ball, and when the determination result by the determination unit is a specific determination result, the variable member is changed from the closed state to the open state. And a variable control means for changing the variable pattern in a specific variable pattern, wherein the variable pattern is in the open state through a closed pattern in a closed state for a predetermined period after the first open pattern in the open state. A gaming machine G1 comprising at least a second opening pattern.

  Here, a game machine such as a pachinko machine is provided with a pass area through which a game ball can pass, and when a game ball passes through the pass area, a predetermined first lottery is executed, and the lottery result is a hit. In some cases, a variable member has been proposed so that the ball can easily enter a specific entrance. In such a gaming machine, when a ball enters a specific entrance, a second lottery different from a predetermined lottery is executed, and a symbol for notifying a player of the lottery result is displayed on a liquid crystal display device. For example, there is known a game in which the lottery result is notified by stopping and displaying the symbol indicating the lottery result after the variation display is performed, and if the lottery result is a hit, a winning game is executed (for example, 2012-147965 gazette).

  However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the symbol variation display based on the second lottery result is displayed on the liquid crystal display device or the like, there is a problem that the player overlooks the result of the first lottery. Was.

  According to the gaming machine G1, since the first opening pattern and the second opening pattern are configured, the player who notices that the variable member is variably controlled by the execution of the first opening pattern. On the other hand, a game ball can be made to enter the ball entry means during the second opening pattern. Therefore, there is an effect that a game can be supported for a player who does not understand the game content.

  In the gaming machine G1, when the closed pattern is determined to be executed by the closed determining means for determining that the closed pattern has been executed among the variable patterns, a predetermined first signal is output when the closed pattern is determined to be executed. A game machine G2, comprising: a notification executing unit configured to execute a notification.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G1, the execution of the first opening pattern is completed, and the first notification is executed by the notification executing means based on the execution of the closing pattern. This allows the player to easily understand that the variable control of the variable member is being performed. Therefore, there is an effect that a game can be supported for a player who does not understand the game content.

  In the gaming machine G2, a game area in which the variable member is provided, and an operation means for firing a game ball in the game area, and a period set as the closed pattern in the variable pattern, A gaming machine G3, wherein the period is set to be longer than a period until the ball fired by the operation means reaches the variable member.

  According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G2, the period set as the closing pattern is set longer than the period until the ball fired by the operation means reaches the variable member. Even if the player who recognizes that the variable control of the variable member is being executed by the first notification by the notification execution unit starts operating the operation unit, the ball entry unit is operated while the second opening pattern is being executed. It is possible to make a ball enter the ball. Therefore, there is an effect that a game can be supported for a player who does not understand the game content.

  In any one of the gaming machines G1 to G3, the variable control means includes end condition determining means for determining that an end condition for ending the operation of changing the variable member has been satisfied. A gaming machine G4 for determining that the end condition is satisfied when the determined variable pattern is executed or when a predetermined number of balls enter the ball entry means.

  According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines G1 to G3, the termination condition is satisfied when a predetermined number of balls enter the ball entry means. By causing the ball to enter the ball entry means, it becomes possible to end the variable control of the variable member by the variable control means without executing the closing pattern. Thereby, one variable control period can be shortened, so that the player can enthusiastically play a game. Also, even if the closing pattern is set for a long period of time, the variable control end condition can be satisfied during the period in which the first variable pattern is being executed, so that a player who is performing a normal game is In addition, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress dissatisfaction caused by executing a long-term closing pattern.

  In the gaming machine G4, a period set as the first open pattern in the variable pattern is set to be longer than a period until the predetermined number of balls fired by the operation means reach the variable member. A gaming machine G5.

  According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G4, a predetermined number of balls can be made to enter the ball entry means during the period in which the first opening pattern is executed. Therefore, there is an effect that a player who is playing a normal game can be prevented from feeling dissatisfied due to the execution of the long-term closing pattern.

  In the gaming machines G1 to G5, the notification execution means is configured to output a predetermined second notification when a ball enters the ball entry means during execution of the second opening pattern among the variable patterns. A gaming machine G6.

  According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines G1 to G5, the second notification is executed when the ball enters the ball entry means while the second opening pattern is being executed. Therefore, the player can correct the operation method of the operation means. Therefore, there is an effect that a game can be supported for a player who does not understand the game content.

  In the gaming machines G1 to G6, among the variable patterns, a period set as the first open pattern is shorter than a period set as the second open pattern.

  According to the gaming machine G7, in addition to the effect provided by any one of the gaming machines G1 to G6, it is possible to make it easy for the ball entry means to enter the ball during the period in which the variable pattern is being executed. Therefore, there is an effect that a game can be supported for a player who does not understand the game content.

<Characteristic H group> (Direction just before the end of time-saving games)
A first ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, a second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means, and a first determination based on a game ball having entered the first ball entry means Executing a second determination that is more advantageous to the player than the first determination based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second ball input means, and a determination result by the determination means. Dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating, and executing a privilege game which is advantageous to the player when the identification information for indicating a specific determination result is stopped and displayed. Lottery means for executing a lottery based on establishment of a lottery condition in a gaming machine having a bonus game executing means, and lottery information dynamically displaying lottery information for indicating a lottery result by the lottery means. Display means and a first state in which game balls are difficult to enter the second ball entry means A variable member that is changed to a second state in which a game ball can be entered, and when the lottery information for indicating the specific lottery result is stopped and displayed, the variable member is changed to the second state. State setting means capable of setting a special state capable of being changed to two states; and when the special state is set by the state setting means, dynamic display of the identification information is executed a predetermined number of times. Releasing means for releasing the special state based on the expiration of the predetermined number of times of the dynamic display period; and, when dynamic display of the lottery information is started during the special state, the lottery information is A gaming machine H1 comprising: an effect execution unit that executes an effect based on information corresponding to a period in which the stop display is performed in a period in which the special state is set.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is executed by a game ball entering a starting port provided on a game board, and if the result of the lottery is a hit, it is advantageous for the player. A game has been proposed in which a game is executed, and a lottery probability after the hit game is set to a high probability state depending on the type of the hit game so that the hit game is easily executed continuously. In such a gaming machine, a symbol for notifying a player of a lottery result is displayed on a liquid crystal display device or the like in a fluctuating manner, and then the lottery result is notified by stopping and displaying the symbol indicating the lottery result. If is a hit, a game that executes a hit game is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-147965).

  However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the game is monotonous due to the repeated display of the symbols based on the lottery result, and the player gets tired early.

  According to the gaming machine H1, since the effect is executed based on the state set at the stop display timing of the lottery information in which the dynamic display is started during the special state, when the lottery information is stopped and displayed from the effect. Can be recognized, the player can be interested in the state at the time when the lottery information is stopped and displayed, and there is an effect that a problem of getting tired of the game early can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine H1, the effect executing means executes an effect corresponding to a dynamic display period of the identification information in a state where the special state is not set, and based on the setting of the special state, A gaming machine H2 characterized by being switched to an effect corresponding to a dynamic display period of lottery information and executed.

  According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine H1, the effect is performed by switching the corresponding dynamic display period between the special state and the non-special state, so that a different effect is provided to the player. There is an effect that the interest of the person can be improved.

  In the gaming machine H1 or H2, an acquisition unit capable of acquiring information based on a game ball having entered the first ball entry unit or the second ball entry unit, and the information acquired by the acquisition unit being And a storage means for storing the game ball in the second entry means of the information stored in the storage means based on the satisfaction of a predetermined determination condition. The gaming machine H3 performs a determination with priority on the information acquired based on the entry of a ball.

  According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine H1 or H2, when there is a plurality of pieces of information obtained based on having entered the second ball entry means, the plurality of pieces of information are determined continuously. can do. Therefore, it is possible to continuously execute the determination that is advantageous to the player, and it is possible to improve the player's willingness to play.

  In the gaming machine H3, in the determination condition, the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped and displayed at the identification information for indicating the specific determination result, and the storage unit stores the undetermined information. Is set as at least a condition.

  According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H1 or H2, the determination condition is hard to be satisfied during the period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed, so that the storage is performed during the period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed. An opportunity to store information in the means can be given to the player, and the game can be played efficiently.

  In the gaming machine H4, when the special state is set, a regulating unit that regulates that the information acquired based on the ball entering the second ball entry unit is stored in the storage unit is provided. A gaming machine H5 characterized by having

  According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine H4, when a special state is set, the storage of information acquired based on the entry into the second entry means is restricted. Therefore, at the timing when the special state is set, the identification information for indicating the determination result based on the information obtained by entering the first ball entry means can be easily displayed dynamically, which is advantageous to the player. This makes it possible to delay the execution of the appropriate determination, thereby increasing the interest of the player.

  In any of the gaming machines H1 to H5, if the special state is set during the period in which the lottery is performed by the lottery means, the variable member stops displaying the lottery information indicating the specific lottery result. The gaming machine H6, which is changed to the second state when the game is performed.

  According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines H1 to H5, it is possible to change to the second state based on the setting state of the special state during the lottery period, which is advantageous to the player. This makes it possible to easily provide an appropriate state and increase the interest of the player.

<Feature I group> (Yamato specification)
First ball entry means capable of entering game balls, second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means, and a game ball entered the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means Information acquisition means for acquiring information based on the information, and the information acquisition means performs a first determination based on the information acquired based on the game ball entered the first ball entry means, Determining means for executing a second determination which is more advantageous to the player than the first determination based on the information obtained based on the game ball having entered the second ball input means, and the determination means A dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a determination result by the user, and a privilege grant for granting a privilege when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed Means in the game machine having the second ball entry means. Set at least a normal state in which game balls easily enter the first ball entry means and a special state in which game balls easily enter the second ball entry means than the first ball entry means. And a condition setting unit capable of performing the special condition. When the special state is set by the state setting unit, the identification information corresponding to the first determination is set as a release condition for releasing the special state. A gaming machine I1 characterized in that it is possible to individually set the number of times of dynamic display and the number of times of dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to the second determination.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is executed by a game ball entering a starting port provided on a game board, and if the result of the lottery is a hit, it is advantageous for the player. A game has been proposed in which a game is executed, and a lottery probability after the hit game is set to a high probability state depending on the type of the hit game so that the hit game is easily executed continuously. In such a gaming machine, a symbol for notifying a player of a lottery result is displayed on a liquid crystal display device or the like in a fluctuating manner, and then the lottery result is notified by stopping and displaying the symbol indicating the lottery result. If is a hit, a game that executes a hit game is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-147965).

  However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the game is monotonous due to the repeated display of the symbols based on the lottery result, and the player gets tired early.

  According to the gaming machine I1, the number of times of dynamic display of identification information corresponding to the first determination and the number of times of dynamic display of identification information corresponding to the second determination can be set as conditions for releasing the special state. , The feeling of expectation that the second determination is performed can be set variably. In other words, if the number of times of dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to the first determination is set to be large, the player can be given many opportunities to execute the second determination, and conversely, the identification information corresponding to the first determination If the number of times of dynamic display is set to be large, the chance that the second determination is executed can be set small, and there is an effect that the interest of the player can be changed.

  The gaming machine I1 has a storage unit for storing the information acquired by the acquisition unit, and the determination unit has entered the second ball entry unit out of the information stored in the storage unit. The gaming machine I2 is characterized in that the information acquired by the information acquiring means is determined with priority based on the information.

  According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I1, the determination is preferentially performed on the information on which the determination that is advantageous to the player is performed, so that the advantageous determination is continuously performed for the player. There is an effect that the game can be easily performed and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine I1 or I2, when the special state is set, the storage means is provided with a regulating means for making it difficult to store information obtained based on a game ball having entered the second ball entry means. A gaming machine I3 characterized by having

  According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I1 or I2, when a special state is established, the identification information based on the first determination can be easily displayed dynamically, and during the dynamic display period, the second input information can be displayed. There is an effect that advantageous information can be easily executed successively after the dynamic display of the first determination is completed by allowing a game ball to enter the ball means to store more information.

  In any of the gaming machines I1 to I3, the cancellation condition is such that the number of dynamic displays of the identification information corresponding to the first determination is greater than the number of dynamic displays of the identification information corresponding to the second determination. A gaming machine I4 characterized by being performed.

  According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines I1 to I3, it is possible to prevent the special state from being released by executing only the first determination which is disadvantageous to the player. During the state, there is an effect that the second determination which is advantageous to the player can be easily performed.

  In the gaming machine I4, the cancellation condition is set such that the number of times of dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to the second determination is one.

  According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I4, the number of times that the second determination advantageous to the player is executed during the special state can be limited to one, so that the excessive privilege is provided to the player. Has the effect that it can be suppressed from being imparted to the surface.

  The gaming machine I6 according to any one of the gaming machines I2 to I5, wherein the storage means is configured to be able to store the information up to an upper limit number.

  According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines I2 to I5, the information for performing the second determination advantageous to the player can be stored up to the upper limit number, so that the special state ends. It is possible to execute the second determination even after the determination. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can have expectations even after the special state ends.

  In the gaming machine I6, the upper limit number is a first upper limit number corresponding to the information obtained based on the game ball having entered the first ball entry means, and a game ball is entered in the second ball entry means. The gaming machine I7, wherein a second upper limit number for the information acquired based on the information is set.

  According to the gaming machine I7, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine I6, the information obtained based on the game ball having entered the first ball entry means and the game ball having entered the second ball entry means It is possible to set the upper limit number that can be stored with the information obtained based on the above, regardless of the storage number of the information obtained based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means The information acquired based on the game ball having entered the second ball entry means can be stored up to the upper limit number. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can enthusiastically play a game to allow the second ball entry means to enter the ball during the special state.

  In any one of the gaming machines I1 to I7, a variable ball-in means for changing the state of the game ball into a ball-enterable state and a ball-in difficult state, and a game ball entering the variable ball-in means can pass through. A gaming machine I8, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to be able to award a bonus when a game ball passes through the specific area.

  According to the gaming machine I8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines I1 to I7, the privilege is given by passing the game ball to the specific area, so that the player is interested in the ball flow. This has the effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine I8, the special state is set by the state setting means after the privilege is given by the privilege giving means.

  According to the gaming machine I9, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine I8, since the special state is set after the privilege is given, it is possible to enhance the playability by passing the game ball through the specific area. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine I9, the state setting means has setting determining means for determining whether or not to set the special state, and the setting determining means determines whether the first determination or the second determination is performed by the determination means. A gaming machine I10 for determining whether or not to set the special state based on the execution.

  According to the gaming machine I10, at the timing when the determination by the determination means is performed, whether or not to set the special state after the privilege is provided is determined. Whether the special state is set or not is variable. Therefore, it is possible to provide a player with a pleasure of selecting a timing at which the game ball passes through the specific area.

  The gaming machine I11, further comprising suggestion means for suggesting the determination information determined by the setting determination means during a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed.

  According to the gaming machine I11, it is possible to recognize whether or not the special state is set after the privilege is given by the suggesting means. Therefore, the game is performed so that the game ball is passed to the specific area, or the specific area is set. There is an effect that the player can determine whether to play the game so that the game ball does not pass by referring to the contents of the suggestion.

  The gaming machine I12 according to any one of the gaming machines I7 to I11, wherein the cancellation condition is set to the number of times of dynamic display for the first identification information that is larger than the first upper limit number.

  According to the gaming machine I12, in addition to the effect provided by any one of the gaming machines I7 to I11, when the special state is entered, the information already acquired for the ball entering the first ball entry means is the first information. Even when the information is stored up to the upper limit, the special state is not released even if all the information is first determined and the dynamic display of the identification information is executed. Therefore, there is an opportunity to execute the second determination in the special state. It can be given by the player and has the effect of increasing the value of the special state for the player.

<Character J group>
A first ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, a second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means, and a first determination based on a game ball having entered the first ball entry means Executing a second determination that is more advantageous to the player than the first determination based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second ball input means, and a determination result by the determination means. Dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating, and a first state in which game balls are difficult to enter the second ball entry means, and a second state in which game balls can be entered; Changing means for changing the second ball entry means to the second state when a specific condition is satisfied; and state setting means capable of setting a special state capable of changing the second ball entry means to the second state. When the status is set, the dynamic display of the identification information is executed, and the dynamic display period is displayed. Release means for releasing the special state based on the termination, and after the special state is released by the release means, before the dynamic display of the identification information is started, the special state is released. Characteristic means comprising: a determination means for determining whether the state is set by the state setting means; and an effect execution means capable of performing an effect variably based on a determination result of the determination means. Gaming machine J1.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is executed by a game ball entering a starting port provided on a game board, and if the result of the lottery is a hit, it is advantageous for the player. A game has been proposed in which a game is executed, and a lottery probability after the hit game is set to a high probability state depending on the type of the hit game so that the hit game is easily executed continuously. In such a gaming machine, a symbol for notifying a player of a lottery result is displayed on a liquid crystal display device or the like in a fluctuating manner, and then the lottery result is notified by stopping and displaying the symbol indicating the lottery result. If the hit is a hit game, a hit game is executed and an effect is executed during the hit game (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-147965).

  However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, there has been a demand for further improving the interest in the gaming.

  According to the gaming machine J1, even when the special state is released, the effect is changed based on the information as to whether the special state is set again before the identification information is dynamically displayed. It is possible to discriminate from the effect whether the special state is continuously set or not, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine J1, the effect executing means executes an effect in response to dynamic display of the identification information for indicating a determination result based on the second determination.

  According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine J1, the effect corresponding to the dynamic display of the identification information for indicating the determination result based on the second determination advantageous to the player is executed. This has the effect that the expectation for the result of the second determination can be increased.

  In the gaming machine J1 or J2, the effect executing means is configured to be capable of executing an effect capable of identifying information based on the number of times the special state has been determined to be continuously set by the determining means. Gaming machine J3.

  According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine J1 or J2, the number of times the special state is continuously set by the effect can be identified, so that not only the game hits the player but also the special state is set. It is also possible to make the player interested in the number of times the game has been played, thereby improving the interest in the game.

  In the gaming machines J1 to J3, information for executing the first determination is obtained when a game ball has entered the first ball entry means, and when a game ball has entered the second ball entry means. A game machine comprising: an information acquisition unit for acquiring information for executing the second determination; and an information storage unit for storing the information acquired by the information acquisition unit. J4.

  According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines J1 to J3, information is acquired at the timing when the gaming ball enters the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means, and the information is stored in the information storage means. Since the information is stored, the opportunity determined by the determination means can be stored, and there is an effect that many benefits can be given to the player.

  In the gaming machine J4, the effect execution means is configured to be able to vary the effect based on the number of pieces of the information for executing the second determination stored in the storage means. A gaming machine J5, characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine J4, the effect is varied depending on the number of pieces of information for which the second determination is performed which is advantageous to the player, so that the information easily retained by the player Is notified, and there is an effect that interest in the effect can be increased.

<Feature K group>
A first ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, a second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means, and a first determination based on a game ball having entered the first ball entry means And a determination means for performing a second determination based on a game ball having entered the second ball entry means, and a dynamic display of identification information for indicating a determination result by the determination means. Machine having a strategic display means and a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to a player when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed. , A game machine K1 comprising state setting means for setting a game state advantageous to a player during a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed based on establishment of a specific condition.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is executed by a game ball entering a starting port provided in a game board, and a pattern for indicating the lottery result is moved to a liquid crystal display device or the like. The symbol is stopped and displayed in such a manner that the lottery result is notified at the timing when the dynamic display period ends. If the notification mode indicated by the symbol is a winning, a winning game that is advantageous to the player is executed, and a high probability state in which the lottery probability after the winning game is increased depending on the type of the winning game, and the winning game is continuously performed. Some have been proposed that are configured to be easily implemented. (For example, JP 2012-147965 A).

  However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, if the dynamic display period for indicating the lottery result is long, the number of times the lottery is drawn becomes disadvantageous for the player, and the player becomes more bored as the dynamic display period is longer. There was a problem that was tired of playing games. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a problem that a player gets tired of a game.

  According to the gaming machine K1, the state becomes advantageous to the player during the period in which the dynamic display of the identification information is being performed, so that the player is expected to perform the dynamic display with a long dynamic display period. This has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine K1, the determination means executes a determination that is more advantageous to the player than the first determination with respect to the second determination, and determines that a game ball has entered the first ball entry means. Information obtaining means for obtaining information for performing the first determination based on the information, and obtaining information for performing the second determination based on a game ball having entered the second ball input means; Storage means for storing the information acquired by the information acquisition means, wherein the determination means is stored in the storage means based on the completion of the dynamic display of the identification information. A gaming machine K2 for performing a determination on the information.

  According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K1, the information is stored in the storage unit even if the information is obtained during the period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed, so that the determination unit has more opportunities for determination. There is an effect that can be.

  In the gaming machine K1 or K2, the variable means for changing from the first state in which the game ball is difficult to enter the second ball entry means to the second state in which the game ball can enter the ball, and Lottery means for executing a lottery based on the lottery information, and lottery information dynamic display means for dynamically displaying lottery information for indicating a lottery result by the lottery means, wherein the state setting means is provided to the player. When the lottery information for indicating the specific lottery result is stopped and displayed as an advantageous gaming state, the variable means can be changed to the second state by the variable means. A gaming machine K3, which is characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine K1 or K2, in a special state, the game ball can be easily inserted into the second ball-in means, and the gaming property can be varied, thereby facilitating the interest of the game. Is increased.

  In the gaming machine K3, when the gaming state advantageous to the player is set by the state setting means, the dynamic display of the identification information is executed, and based on the end of the dynamic display period, A gaming machine K4 having release means for releasing a gaming state advantageous to a player.

  According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine K3, it is advantageous to the player based on the fact that the dynamic display of the identification information executed when the gaming state advantageous to the player has been set is completed. Is released, the player can be interested in the end timing of the dynamic display of the identification information, and the problem of the player being bored even when a long dynamic display period is set can be suppressed. This has the effect.

  In any one of the gaming machines K1 to K4, the game machine has a first flow path through which a game ball can flow, and a second flow path through which a game ball flowing down the first flow path becomes difficult to flow. The means is disposed at the second flow path and at a position at which a game ball flowing down at least the first flow path can enter, and the second ball input means is disposed at the second flow path. A gaming machine K5 characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines K1 to K4, even if a game is performed so that the game ball enters the second ball entry means, the game ball is transferred to the first ball entry means. The configuration is such that the player enters the ball, and there is an effect that it is possible to regulate a state in which only the determination that is advantageous to the player is easily performed.

  In any of the gaming machines K1 to K5, when a gaming state advantageous to the player is set, the game machine has an effect executing means for executing an effect corresponding to a dynamic display period of the identification information. A gaming machine K6 characterized by the above-mentioned.

  According to the gaming machine K6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines K1 to K5, if a gaming state advantageous to the player is set, an effect corresponding to the dynamic display period is executed. This has the effect of increasing interest.

  In the gaming machine K6, the effect executed by the effect executing means includes an effect that prompts the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means to enter a game ball. Gaming machine K7.

  According to the gaming machine K7, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine K6, the game ball is made to enter the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means during a game state advantageous to the player, and the first judgment or the second judgment is made. Since it is easy to give an opportunity to execute the determination, there is an effect that the game can be efficiently performed.

  In any of the above gaming machines, the gaming machine is a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is as follows. The dynamic display of the identification information is started due to the operation, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. And a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the determined identification information is the specific identification information. In this case, coins and medals are typical examples of the game medium.

  In any of the above gaming machines, the gaming machine Z2 is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, as a basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine, an operation handle is provided, and a ball is fired to a predetermined game area in response to operation of the operation handle, and the ball is provided in an operation port arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. A requirement for winning (or passing through the operating port) is that identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined mode to enable the ball to win, and a value corresponding to the winning number is obtained. A value (including not only a prize ball but also data written on a magnetic card) is given.

  In any of the above gaming machines, the gaming machine Z3 is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: "variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string comprising a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and starting operation means (for example, an operation lever) The change of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, The game machine is configured so that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display of the game, and many balls are paid out when the special game state occurs.

10. Pachinko machines (game machines)
64a Left first entrance (first entrance means)
64b Right first entrance (first entrance means)
113 Voice lamp control device (production effect means)
640 Second entrance (second entrance means)
640a Electric accessory (variable means)
S106 Second dynamic display means S225 Release means S402 First determination means, second determination means S406 Dynamic display means S712 Storage means S908 Determination means S1101 Detection means S1815 State setting means S3807 Period determination means

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the state of the starting port provided on the game board is changed from the first state in which the game ball is hard to enter to the second state in which the game ball is easy to enter. which executes a first lottery whether or not have been proposed.

JP 2012-147965 A

  However, there is a demand for further improvement in interest.

  The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving a player's interest in playing a game.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the first ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, a second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means, A first determination is performed based on a game ball having entered the ball means, and a first advantage is provided to the player over the first determination based on a game ball having entered the second ball entry means. a judging means for performing a second determination, and dynamic display means capable of dynamically displayed on the display unit identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination means, gaming balls enter the second ball entrance means A variable means capable of changing from a difficult first state to a second state in which a game ball can easily enter the ball than the first state, and, when a specific condition is satisfied , the variable means game special effect state it is possible to easily is varied to the second state from the first state A state determination unit determinable as a state, and selecting means for performing a lottery for determining varying to the second state said varying means from said first state, to indicate the lottery result by the selecting means And a dynamic display period having different lengths is set as a dynamic display period for dynamically displaying lottery information and a dynamic display period for dynamically displaying the lottery information. A dynamic display period determining unit for determining one dynamic display period from a dynamic display period group; and a notifying unit for notifying that the special effect state has been determined. The production state is released based on the fact that the identification information dynamically displayed in the state where the special production state is determined is stopped and displayed in a display mode for indicating the predetermined determination result. Yes, the identification information In the condition of displaying, the notification is configured to be performed by the notification unit only when the special effect states elapses dynamic display period of the lottery information until terminated.

According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, the first ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, the second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means, and a game ball in the first ball entry means Performs a first determination based on that a ball has entered, and performs a second determination that is more advantageous to the player than the first determination based on that a game ball has entered the second ball entry means. Determining means, dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the determination result by the determining means on the display means, and a first game means in which a game ball is difficult to enter the second entering means. A variable means capable of changing from a state to a second state in which game balls can easily enter than the first state, and, when a specific condition is satisfied, the variable means changes the first state to the second state. determining accessibility of the special effect state it is possible to easily is varied to a second state as a state of the game Such a state determination unit, a selecting means for performing a lottery for determining varying to the second state said varying means from the first state, the lottery information to indicate the lottery result by the selecting means Lottery information dynamic display means capable of executing dynamic display, and a dynamic display period in which different lengths of dynamic display periods are set as the dynamic display period in which the lottery information is dynamically displayed. Dynamic display period determining means for determining one dynamic display period from the group, and a notification means for notifying that the special effect state has been determined, the special effect state, The identification information, which is dynamically displayed in the state where the special effect state is determined, is canceled based on being stopped and displayed in a display mode for indicating the predetermined determination result. Information is dynamically displayed Oite, the notification is configured to be performed by the notification unit only when the dynamic display period of the lottery information to said special effect state is terminated elapses.

  Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed the ball flow in the right area | region of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is the schematic diagram which showed the ball flow in the right area | region of the game board of a pachinko machine. (A), (b) is the schematic diagram which showed the operation | movement relationship between the storage apparatus provided in the game board of the pachinko machine, and a non-motorized accessory. (A), (b) is a schematic diagram showing the internal structure of the second variable winning device 650. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. (A) is a figure which showed typically the area division setting of the display screen in the 3rd symbol display device, and (b) is a figure which showed an example of the display screen in the 3rd symbol display device. (A) is a timing chart showing a flow of a small hitting game of a small hitting type B executed based on a ball entering the first entrance, and (b) is a first entrance. It is a timing chart which showed the flow of the small hitting game of the small hitting type A executed based on the ball entry into the small hitting game. (A) is a timing chart showing a flow of a small hitting game executed based on a ball entering the second entrance, and (b) is a timing chart based on a ball entering the second entrance. It is the timing chart which showed the flow of the big hit game which is executed. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a game flow in the first embodiment. It is a timing chart (first half) which shows the relationship between the game state and the production state in the first embodiment. It is a timing chart (the latter half) which shows the relationship between the game state and the production state in the first embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen of the third symbol display device at the time when the first special symbol starts to fluctuate when the gaming state is a time saving state, and (b) is a gaming diagram. It is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen of the third symbol display device when the state is a time saving state and 40 seconds have elapsed since the change of the first special symbol started. (A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen of the third symbol display device after the ball enters the second entrance while the first special symbol is changing while the gaming state is a time saving state. (B) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device when the gaming state is the time saving state and the variation period of the first special symbol is one second remaining. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display screen of the third symbol display device at the time when the change of the first special symbol executed during the time reduction state is stopped, and (b) is a diagram after the time reduction state ends. It is the figure which showed an example of the display screen of the 3rd symbol display device in the normal state at the time when the change of the 2nd special symbol was started. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device at the time when the change of the second special symbol having won the small hit is stopped and displayed in the normal state after the end of the time saving state, (B) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of the third symbol display device when a big hit game is started based on the small hit game displayed in FIG. 18 (a). (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of the third symbol display device when the second jackpot game is started due to a time saving change executed after the jackpot game due to the V winning, and b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device when the gaming state is the time saving state and the fluctuation period of the first special symbol is 10 seconds remaining. (A) is a display of the third symbol display device in a case where the gaming state is a time saving state, and a hold of a second special symbol occurs due to a ball entering the second entrance during the battle effect. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the screen, (b) of the 3rd symbol display device in the case where a game state is a time-saving state and a ball does not enter a 2nd ball entrance during a battle effect. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a display screen. (A) shows an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device in a case where the gaming state is the time saving state and the reserve ball of the second special symbol is obtained up to the upper limit during the time saving change of the first special symbol. It is a schematic diagram, (b) is a game state is a time saving state, and during the bonus effect execution given when the reserve ball of the second special symbol is acquired to the upper limit during the time saving change of the first special symbol It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display screen of the 3rd symbol display device. (A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen of the third symbol display device in a case where the gaming state is the normal state and the small hitting game based on the first special symbol is executed, and (b). FIG. 23 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen of the third symbol display device during the small hit game shown in FIG. (A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen of the third symbol display device when a right-handed game is performed while the gaming state is a normal state (left-handed state), and (b) is a motorized state. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus in the state where the accessory was opening | released. It is a figure showing the outline of various counters. FIG. 2A is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of a ROM in a main control device according to the first embodiment. FIG. 2B is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of a RAM in the main control device according to the first embodiment. FIG. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a first random number table in the first embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a special symbol 1 random number table in the first embodiment. It is a schematic diagram, (c) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the special symbol 2 random number table in 1st Embodiment, (d) is the content of the 2nd per random number table in 1st Embodiment. FIG. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first hit type selection table in the first embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special symbol one big hit selection table in the first embodiment. (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special symbol 2 big hit selection table in the first embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a small hit type selection table in the first embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special symbol one small hit selection table in the first embodiment. (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special symbol 2 small hit selection table in the first embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the fluctuation pattern table in the first embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation pattern table in the first embodiment. FIG. 3C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special pattern 1 deviation pattern table in the first embodiment, and FIG. 4D is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special pattern in the first embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the fluctuation pattern table for 1 small hits. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 1 time reduction variation pattern table in the first embodiment, and (b) is the contents of the special figure 2 variation pattern table in the first embodiment. FIG. FIG. 2A is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of a ROM in the audio ramp control device according to the first embodiment. FIG. 2B is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of a RAM in the audio ramp control device according to the first embodiment. It is a block diagram shown. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of an effect state selection table, and (b) is each effect state selected by the effect state selection table, and the second state displayed on the third symbol display device. It is the schematic diagram which showed the relationship with three symbols and a reservation symbol. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the display control device according to the first embodiment. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of a display data table according to the first embodiment. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of a transfer data table according to the first embodiment. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of a drawing list according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special design change processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol change start processing performed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the normal fluctuation | variation start process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the time-saving change start process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit start setting process performed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a prefetch process executed by an MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the electric accessory control process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a through gate passage process executed by the MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the general-purpose prefetching process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a V entrance passage process executed by the MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a V-pass process performed by the MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a start-up process executed by the MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. 4 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by an MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit control process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit control process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit end process performed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the electric auditors product opening / closing process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the storage apparatus control processing performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a start-up process performed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment. 4 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment. 4 is a flowchart illustrating a variation pattern-related process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a processing related to the number of reserved balls executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed winning information related processing performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 1st embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the hit-related process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart showing a general-purpose variation display setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the production | presentation state setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the specific effect setting process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a counter updating process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating main processing executed by an MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a boot process executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing a command interruption process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 9 is a flowchart showing a V interrupt process. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process executed by an MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. 9 is a flowchart showing a stop type command process. (A) is a flowchart showing a rear image change command process executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment, and (b) is a flowchart executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. 6 is a flowchart showing error command processing to be performed. It is a flowchart which shows the hit related command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing a jackpot start command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows a round number command process. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a display setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a warning image setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a pointer update process executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing a transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a resident image transfer setting process. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a normal image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a drawing process executed by an MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen of the third symbol display device in the second embodiment, and (b) is an example of a display screen of the third symbol display device in the second embodiment. FIG. (A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen of the third symbol display device in the second embodiment, and (b) is an example of a display screen of the third symbol display device in the second embodiment. FIG. FIG. 7A is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of a ROM in a main control device according to a second embodiment. FIG. 7B is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of a RAM in the main control device according to the second embodiment. FIG. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the variation pattern table for special figure 1 time saving in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special design change processing 2 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the time saving completion | finish determination process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the time saving change start process 2 performed by the MPU in the main control device in the second embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit control process 2 performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen of the third symbol display device in the third embodiment, and (b) is an example of a display screen of the third symbol display device in the third embodiment. FIG. FIG. 7A is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of a ROM in a main control device according to the third embodiment. FIG. 7B is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of a RAM in the main control device according to the third embodiment. FIG. It is the model which showed typically the content of the time saving state selection table in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special design change processing 3 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 3rd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process 3 performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation time setting process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit control process 3 performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed command judgment processing 3 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 3rd embodiment. It is a front view which shows the modification 1 of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a front view which shows the modification 2 of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a front view which shows another example of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is the schematic diagram which showed the operation | movement of the modification of an electric accessory. It is the schematic diagram which showed the operation | movement of the modification of an electric accessory. It is the schematic diagram which showed the operation | movement of the modification of an electric accessory. It is the schematic diagram which showed the operation | movement of the modification of an electric accessory. (A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen of the third symbol display device in other effect example 1, and (b) is an example of a display screen of the third symbol display device in other effect example 1. FIG. (A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen of the third symbol display device in other effect example 2, and (b) is an example of a display screen of the third symbol display device in other effect example 2. FIG. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a variation pattern table for ordinary figure in other effect example 2, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a normal fluctuation pattern table in other effect example 2. FIG. 8C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a variation pattern table for time saving A in other effect example 2; FIG. 9D is a schematic diagram showing the variation for time saving B in other effect example 2; It is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the pattern table typically. 18 is a flowchart showing a normal symbol variation process 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in other effect example 2.

<First embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIGS. 3 and 4 are right side areas of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. 5 is a schematic view showing the operation of the non-electric accessory 710 provided on the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 6 is a schematic view showing the operation of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10. Is a schematic diagram showing the internal structure of the second variable winning device 650 provided in the pachinko machine, and FIG. 7 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed to have substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinges 18 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

  The inner frame 12 has a large number of nails, a left first ball entry port 64a, a right first ball entry port 64b (hereinafter referred to as both the left first ball entry port 64a and the right first ball entry port 64b). Is referred to as a first entrance 64, a second entrance 640, a through gate 67, a variable winning device (a first variable winning device 65, a second variable winning device 650) and the like. 2) is detachably mounted from the front side. When a ball flows down the front surface (game area) of the game board 13, a ball game is performed. Note that the inner frame 12 has a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 8) that launches a ball into the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower plate unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, a metal hinge 19 is attached to the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 19 is provided is used as a pivot for opening and closing the front frame 14 and the lower plate. The unit 15 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side. Note that the locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is provided with a decorative resin component, an electrical component, and the like, and is provided with a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 is visible on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape that projects forward and has an open upper surface, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball firing unit 112a by the inclination.

  Light emitting means such as various lamps is provided around the front frame 14 (for example, at a corner). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the game state at the time of a big hit, a predetermined reach, or the like, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. On the periphery of the window 14c, there are provided illuminations 29 to 33 in which light-emitting means such as LEDs are incorporated. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a jackpot lamp, and at the time of a big hit or a reach effect, etc., each of the illumination parts 29 to 33 is lit by turning on or blinking a built-in LED. Or, it flashes to notify that a jackpot is in progress or that the player is reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, at the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and which can display when a prize ball is being paid out and when an error has occurred.

  Further, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized below the right side illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of chrome-plated ABS resin is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball lending operation unit 40 is provided below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state in which bills, cards, and the like are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is slid according to the operation. Lending is done. More specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED is turned on, and the balance is displayed as a number as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the card or the like has a remaining amount. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without a card unit, a so-called cash machine, the ball-lending operation unit 40 becomes unnecessary. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part to make the parts configuration common. The pachinko machine using the card unit and the cash machine can be shared.

  On the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface on the left side. . On the other hand, on the right side of the lower plate unit 15, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 is provided. Inside the operation handle 51, the driving of the ball firing unit 112a is performed. Sensor 51a for permitting the operation, a push-button type stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 are detected by a change in electric resistance. A variable resistor (not shown) is built in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the operation amount. The ball is fired at a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes, and the ball is hit into the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. When the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  In the present embodiment, the above-described configuration is used. However, the configuration is not limited thereto, and a configuration in which the main control device 110 or another control device detects the ball fired by the ball firing unit 112a, or a solenoid of the ball firing unit 112a may be used. It may be configured to detect that a ball has been fired. Alternatively, the number of detected balls may be counted and stored until a process such as RAM clear is performed.

  A frame button 22 is provided above the lower plate unit 15. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the effect or background displayed on the third symbol display device 81 described later. In this manner, by arranging the frame button 22 operable by the player on the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to arbitrarily select the effect to be executed on the pachinko machine 10, and to increase the willingness of the player to participate in the game. Can be enhanced.

  In the present embodiment, the frame button 22 that can be pressed by the player is provided as the operating means that can be operated by the player. However, other configurations may be used. Or approaching), a lever-type operating means that the player can operate in the left-right (or front-back) direction, and a handle-type operating means that the player can rotate. Further, in the present embodiment, the number of operating means is one, but more than one operating means may be provided, or a plurality of operating means of different operating methods may be provided. With this configuration, the player can execute more various operations, and can increase the types of effects performed based on the operation of the operating means by the player.

  The operation means (frame button 22) is provided at a position (upper left side of the lower plate unit 15) that can be operated by the player while playing the game (while operating the operation handle 51 with the right hand). Therefore, the frame button 22 can be easily operated even while the player is executing the game.

  At the lower front part of the lower plate 50, a ball release lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball pulling lever 52 is constantly urged rightward, and is slid leftward against the urging, so that a bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a “dollar box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, and a number of nails, windmills and rails 61 and 62 for ball guidance, a general ball entrance 63, The first entrance 64, the second entrance 640, the variable winning device (the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650), the variable display device unit 80 and the like are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is an inner frame. 12 is attached to the back side. The general entrance 63, the first entrance 64, the second entrance 640, the variable winning device (the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650), and the variable display device unit 80 are formed by router processing. It is arranged in a through hole formed in the board 60 and is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with a wood screw or the like. Further, the central portion of the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62 is provided inside the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front of the game board 13, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a front area of the game board 13 and is a substantially circular area defined by two rails 61 and 62 and an arc member 70 (a starting port or the like is provided, and a shot ball is provided). Area that flows down). The game area includes all areas where the ball that has passed through the return ball preventing member 68 flows before passing through the out port 66 or the winning port (ball entry port).

  In the pachinko machine 10, a game (hereinafter, referred to as a game) in which the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (the left side when viewed from the front of the game board 13) is formed as a left game area, and the right side is formed as a right game area, and a ball is aimed at the left game area. In a left-hitting game, a game in which a ball enters the general entrance 63 or the first left entrance 64a is performed, and a game in which a ball is fired aiming at a right game area (hereinafter referred to as a right-hitting game). ), The shot ball passes above the variable display device unit 80 and is provided in the right game area with the first right ball entrance 64b, the second ball entrance 640, the first variable prize device 65, and the second variable prize device 65. A game aiming at the variable winning device 650 or the like is performed. In the present pachinko machine 10 configured as described above, the game is suppressed from being monotonous by causing the player to perform a game (left-handed game or right-handed game) according to the game state.

  In addition, as will be described later in detail, in the pachinko machine 10, a game (left-handed game or right-handed game) that is advantageous to the player according to various game states (normal state, time-saving state, big hit state, etc.) set. Games). This allows the player to change the content of the game while grasping the current game state, thereby suppressing the game from becoming monotonous.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description of the game board 13 will be continued. The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 8) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to a tip portion (upper left portion of FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61 to prevent a situation in which a ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right portion in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball fired at a predetermined momentum strikes the return rubber 69 and momentum. Is rebounded toward the center while being attenuated. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is provided between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62. It is fixed by being driven into the plate 60.

  In this pachinko machine 10, when a ball enters either the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640, a lottery of a special symbol (first symbol) is performed, and the ball is passed through a through gate (normal). When passing through the (entrance opening) 67, a lottery of a normal symbol (second symbol) is performed. In the special symbol lottery performed for the ball entering the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot, and it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. If it is, the jackpot type is also determined. When the special symbol hits, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special game state, and the normally closed first specific winning opening 65a is closed for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse, or 10 balls are won). Is released) and the release is repeated a number of times (number of rounds) according to the jackpot type. As a result, a large amount of balls wins in the first specific winning opening 65a, so that a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual.

  Also, in the present pachinko machine 10, a small hit in which a bonus different from the special game state is given to the player is determined in a part of the case where a non-big hit (out) is determined by a special symbol lottery. Is configured. When the special symbol lottery is won in the small win, the second specific winning opening 650a of the second variable winning device 650 is kept for a predetermined period (for example, until a total of 1.8 seconds elapse, or until ten balls are won). The small hit game to be opened is executed. Although details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10, a part of the ball that has won the second specific winning opening 650a during the small hit game has passed through the specific area (V winning switch 650e3 (see FIG. 6)). In this case, the big hit game is configured to be executed after the small hit game ends. With this, the game is aimed at winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery, and the jackpot is executed based on the game result of the small jackpot game executed by winning the small jackpot in the special symbol lottery. It is possible to execute both the game aiming at that. Therefore, since the player can execute various games, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

  As will be described later in detail, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with seven types of special symbols such as “big hit A” to “big hit G”. Note that the two types of “big hits A and B” are big hit types that can be determined when a lottery executed in response to a ball entering the first entrance 64 becomes a big hit. The two types of "big hits C and D" are small wins in a lottery executed when the ball enters the first entrance opening 64, and the ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game Is a jackpot type that can be determined in the following manner. "Big hit E" is a jackpot in a lottery executed when the ball enters the second entrance 640, or when the ball is in the second entry. It is a jackpot type that can be determined when a ball passes through a specific area during a lottery executed by a lottery executed when the ball enters the ball opening 640, and is a "big hit F, G" Has entered the ball into the second entrance 640 Becomes small prize in the lottery is executed bets triggered a jackpot sphere can be determined if having passed through the specific area classification in the small win game. The plurality of jackpot types provided in this manner include a bonus during a jackpot game (for example, the number of rounds, an opening time, an opening operation pattern) and a jackpot as a bonus given to the player when the jackpot game is executed. Benefits provided after the game (for example, a privilege for providing a gaming state in which the player easily obtains the next jackpot) are set to be different. Thereby, in the jackpot game executed with various occasions for the player, it is possible to increase the motivation of the player to acquire a jackpot game to which a more advantageous privilege is given, and to provide various playability. be able to.

  When the special symbol (first symbol) is selected, the first symbol display device 37 starts to display the special symbol in a variable manner. Is stopped and displayed. When the ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of times of entry is determined for each type of entry. Each of them is reserved up to a maximum of four times, and the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. When the variable display ends on the first symbol display device 37, if the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 remains, the next special symbol lottery is performed. Then, the variable display according to the lottery is started.

  On the other hand, in the ordinary symbol lottery performed for the passage of the ball at the through gate (ordinary ball entrance) 67, it is determined whether or not it is an ordinary symbol hit. When a normal symbol is hit, the second entrance 640 is changed by the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 being changed to the open position for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 3 seconds). Be released. It should be noted that the second entrance 640 is normally closed because the electric accessory 640a is arranged at the closed position. Therefore, when a normal symbol is hit, the ball easily enters the second entrance 640, and as a result, a lottery of a special symbol is easily performed.

  Also, when the lottery of the ordinary symbol (the second symbol) is performed, the variation display of the ordinary symbol is started on the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds or 4 seconds) elapses, the lottery is performed. The normal symbol indicating the result is stopped and displayed. When a ball passes through the through gate (normal entrance) 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passes is retained up to a maximum of four times, and the number of retained balls is the first symbol. The information is displayed on the display device 37 and is also shown on the second symbol holding lamp 84. When the variable display is finished on the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the through gate (normal entrance) 67 remains, the next ordinary symbol lottery is performed, and according to the lottery. The variable display is started.

  As described above, seven types of special symbols such as "big hit A" to "big hit G" are provided. In the case of "big hits A to C", the number of rounds becomes a special game state of 7 rounds (7 rounds big hit), and in the case of "big hit D", the number of rounds becomes 2 rounds of a special game state (2 rounds big hit). When the "big hit E" is reached, the number of rounds becomes a special game state of 15 rounds (15 round big hit). When it becomes "big hit F", the number of rounds becomes a special game state of 5 rounds (5 round big hits), and when it becomes "big hit G", the number of rounds becomes a special game state of 10 rounds (10 round big hits).

  In addition, when the "big hit A", "big hit C", and "big hit EG" are reached, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol becomes shorter after the end of the big hit, and the second time is higher than the normal state at the time of winning the normal symbol. A time-saving state in which the electric accessory 640a is controlled to be opened so that the ball easily enters the entrance 640 is provided until the special symbol changes once (one time reduction). . In the case of "big hit B" and "big hit D", after the big hit is completed, the above-mentioned time saving state is not given and the normal state is set.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 used in the present embodiment has a function (so-called time-saving function) of shifting the gaming state to a time-saving state in which a ball can easily enter the second entrance 640 than in the normal state. It does not have the function of changing the jackpot probability of special symbols or the jackpot probability of ordinary symbols (so-called probability variation function), but is not limited to this, using a pachinko machine having a probability variation function Is also good.

  As described above, in the special symbol jackpot according to the present embodiment, the number of rounds at the time of the jackpot differs according to the type of the jackpot. On the other hand, the number of rounds may be common to all jackpot types (for example, all eight rounds). Further, for example, the period during which the “normal symbol time reduction state” is set may be changed according to the type of the jackpot. In addition, instead of changing the period during which the “normal time saving state of the ordinary symbol” is changed, the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is opened or the electric accessory 640a is opened once per ordinary symbol. The number of times to be performed may be changed. In the present embodiment, the bonus granted after the end of the jackpot is determined according to the type of the jackpot. For example, the jackpot is terminated on the condition that the ball passes through a specific area (V winning switch 650e3) during the jackpot. Afterwards, a probable change state of a special symbol or a time reduction state of a normal symbol may be given. Further, in the present embodiment, the time reduction state is configured to continue until the number of times of the change of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (one time). 10), and when the number of special symbol changes reaches the number of time reductions, or when the result of the special symbol lottery is a specific lottery result, the time reduction state may be configured to end. Further, a lottery different from the special symbol lottery (lottery for determining whether or not the time reduction state is continued) is executed, and if the result of the lottery is a result that the time reduction state is not continued, the time reduction state is ended. You may. Further, in the present embodiment, the time saving state is always given after the jackpot game by the specific jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot C, jackpot E to G), but other configurations may be used. For example, a time saving application frequency measuring means for measuring the number of times the time saving state is continuously provided is provided. Even if the big hit game by type is executed, the time saving state may not be given after the big hit game ends. Thereby, the upper limit of the game period in which the player is advantageous can be set, and it is possible to suppress providing the player with excessive gambling. In addition, as an example of suppressing excessive gambling, an example in which the upper limit is set to the number of times the time reduction state is continuously provided is described. An upper limit may be set for the number of times the special symbol is changed during the extended holiday period. Even in the case of such a configuration, the upper limit can be set in the time saving extended holiday period, so that excessive gambling can be suppressed. In this case, since the upper limit is not set for the number of times the time saving state is given (ie, the number of jackpots during the time saving holidays period), a limited period (the time saving holidays period with the upper limit set) is set. In the meantime, the player can be motivated to play a game in order to win many jackpots.

  A first design in which a plurality of light-emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as “LEDs”) 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light-emitting means, are provided on the upper right side (the upper right side in FIG. 2) of the game area in front view. A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 performs a display corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays a game state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a display a variation by displaying a lighting state to indicate whether or not a special symbol lottery performed in accordance with the ball entry (starting prize) into the first entrance 64 is changed, or the variation is displayed. As a stop symbol after the end, a special symbol (first symbol) according to the result of the lottery of the special symbol is indicated by a lighting state, or a ball inserted into the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. The number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) that have not been changed yet, is indicated by the lighting state.

  If a ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 while the special symbol (first symbol) is being displayed while the first symbol display device 37 is displaying the variation, the ball is entered. The number of times is retained up to a maximum of four times for each entrance, and the number of retained balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, each of the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 is configured to be held up to four times, but the maximum number of holdings is limited to four. However, the number of times may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). Further, it may be set so as to be held until the total number of the entering balls into the plurality of entrances reaches the upper limit number (for example, eight times).

  The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds during a big hit, an error display, and the like. The LEDs 37a are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the LEDs are different, and the various game states of the pachinko machine 10 (the high probability state of the special symbol) Or, during normal working hours, etc.). In addition, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot as a stopped symbol after the end of the fluctuation, but also indicates a special jackpot according to the jackpot type (big jackpot A to G) when the jackpot is a jackpot. A symbol (first symbol) is shown.

  In the game area, a plurality of general entrances 63 are provided in which a predetermined number (for example, 5) of balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls enter. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is provided in a central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as “display device”) and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. . A center frame 86 is provided on the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 displays a decorative third symbol (decorative symbol) according to the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the display of the second symbol display device 83. For example, when a ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (start winning), the first symbol display device 37 uses the trigger as a trigger to change the display of the special symbol (first symbol). Be executed. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol. When a ball passes through the through gate 67, the second symbol display device 83 executes a variable display of a normal symbol (second symbol) using the ball as a trigger. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the ordinary symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the ordinary symbol.

  Although the details will be described later, in the present pachinko machine 10, the target of the symbol (main symbol) for informing the player of the variable display in an easy-to-understand manner using the third symbol display device 81 is changed according to the game state and the like. It is configured as follows. In the pachinko machine 10, whether or not a privilege that is advantageous to the player is given is determined based on a special symbol lottery result in one game state (for example, a normal state). This is because, in a gaming state (for example, a time reduction state), it is configured to be determined based on a lottery result of a normal symbol. As described above, even in the case of the pachinko machine 10 having complicated playability, by switching the target of the symbol (main symbol) mainly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to the special symbol and the ordinary symbol, the player can It is only necessary to pay close attention to the variable display of the main symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and an easy-to-understand game can be provided.

  The third symbol display device 81 is configured by an 8-inch size liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device 114 described later, so that, for example, three symbol columns of left, middle, and right are displayed. Is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, among the displays of the game state accompanying the control of the main control device 110, the display relating to the special symbol is performed by the first symbol display device 37, and the display relating to the ordinary symbol is performed by the second symbol display device 83. On the other hand, the third symbol display device 81 performs decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the display of the second symbol display device 83. Note that, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like. Further, a plurality of liquid crystal displays may be provided as the third symbol display device 81, or the third symbol display device 81 may be configured to be movable. Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 9A is a diagram schematically illustrating the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen. FIG. 9B is a diagram exemplifying an actual display screen. As shown in FIG. 9 (a), the first display area Dm shows a first special symbol, a second special symbol, or a normal symbol (different depending on the game state), which is one of the third symbols. Three symbol rows of the area Dm1), the middle (middle display area Dm2), and the right (the right display area Dm3) are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, and a third symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is displayed on the first display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. (Or a symbol or an ordinary symbol) is displayed in a variable manner (dynamic display).

  The third symbols (first special symbols, second special symbols, or ordinary symbols) displayed in the first display area Dm are respectively constituted by main symbols numbered from “0” to “9”. ing. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the lottery result by the main controller 110 described later is a specific lottery result (a big hit or a part of a small hit in the case of a special symbol, a hit in the case of a normal symbol). In such a case, the same third symbol (main symbol) is aligned (for example, “777”), a variable display is performed, and a big hit is generated after the variable display is completed.

  Specifically, the first display area Dm displays three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 for left, middle, and right, respectively. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbol is displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers in the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, and the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are scrolled from top to bottom with a periodicity to perform variable display. Particularly, in the left symbol row Z1, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in descending order, and in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in ascending order.

  In the first display area Dm, the third symbol is stopped and displayed on the activated line L1. If the third symbol is stopped in a combination of the big hit symbols (in this embodiment, the same combination of the main symbols) on the pay line, the big hit video is displayed as the big hit.

  In the upper right area of the first display area Dm, a second display area Dn (Dn1 to Dn6) is formed. In the second display area Dn, a symbol row indicating a first special symbol, a second special symbol, and a normal symbol is displayed. Specifically, the second display area Dn1 is an area where a symbol row indicating a first special symbol is displayed, and the second display area Dn2 is an area where a symbol row indicating a second special symbol is displayed. The 2 display area Dn3 is formed as an area where a symbol row indicating a normal symbol is displayed, and a variable display corresponding to the variable display of each symbol is displayed.

  Further, in the second display area Dn, the number of reserved storages of the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the normal symbol are also displayed. Specifically, the second display area Ds4 is an area in which the number of reserved storages of the first special symbol is displayed, and the second display area Ds5 is an area in which the number of reserved storages of the second special symbol is displayed. The second display area Ds6 is an area in which the number of normally stored symbols is displayed.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 10, the display corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the normal symbol, and the display corresponding to the number of retained symbols of each symbol are the second symbols of the third symbol display device 81. It is configured to be displayed in the display area Dn, of which one symbol (a symbol to be notified to the player) is selected as a main symbol, and the other symbols are less noticeable than the main symbol. It is displayed as a symbol in the second display area Dn. Thereby, the player can execute the optimal game only by checking the display contents of the main symbol.

  In the present embodiment, the display pattern of the sub-pattern is made smaller than that of the main symbol, so that the display pattern is less noticeable than the main symbol. However, other configurations may be used. By increasing the transmissivity of the display mode of the subsidiary symbol or by moving the display area of the subsidiary symbol, the subsidiary symbol may be configured to be more difficult to identify than the main symbol.

  In addition, as the symbol row mode of each symbol displayed in the second display area Dn, the symbol row displayed as the main symbol may be displayed as it is, or “O” as shown in FIG. 9B. "And" X "are displayed in two rows in parallel, and when two" O "symbols are displayed in the left and right columns, the first special symbol, the second special symbol, or the ordinary symbol is hit. May be configured to be notified to the player.

  Furthermore, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured not to display the sub-design corresponding to the symbol displayed as the main symbol, or to display the sub-design in a place other than the third symbol display device 81. You may.

  In the present embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, a main symbol corresponding to the first special symbol (a special symbol 1 main symbol Dma) is displayed in the first display area Dm (see FIG. 9B )), When the gaming state is the time saving state, a main symbol (a general symbol main symbol Dmc) corresponding to the ordinary symbol is displayed in the first display area Dm (see FIG. 16A). Furthermore, when the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, a main symbol (special symbol 2 main symbol Dmd) corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed in the first display area Dm regardless of the game state (FIG. 17 (b)).

  In addition, as will be described in detail later, in each game state, when a predetermined game condition is satisfied (for example, when a normal symbol whose fluctuation is started during the time reduction state stops changing after the time reduction state ends), It is configured such that a combination different from the combination of the main symbol and the sub symbol is displayed. Thereby, the display of the third symbol display device 81 can be executed without giving a sense of incongruity to the player with respect to the symbol variation executed so as to straddle different game states. Further, the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the ordinary symbol are all displayed as sub-patterns in the second display area Dn, and the effect pseudo symbol is variably displayed as the main symbol (see FIG. 22A). It is configured as follows. Thus, during a period in which each symbol is not variably displayed (for example, a small hit period), it is possible to make the player feel that the symbol variance is being executed, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  The main symbol (third symbol) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 is configured in a display mode consisting of numbers from “0” to “9”, and is distinguished from other main symbols. A display mode other than a number may be used as long as the display mode is possible. For example, a display mode imitating a character or a display mode combining a character and a number may be used. Further, as the symbols displayed in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 in the first display area Dm, no bonus is given to the player even if the symbols other than the main symbol are stopped together with the same symbol on the activated line L1. A symbol row including a sub symbol may be used as the symbol.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a lottery result of a special symbol or a normal symbol performed by a main controller 110 (see FIG. 8) described later is a win, a variable display in which the same main symbol is aligned. Is performed, and a big hit occurs after the variable display ends. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, the variable display in which the same main symbol is not prepared is performed.

  The main symbol (third symbol) displayed in the first display area Dm is stopped and displayed on the activated line L1, and this stopped display state is maintained for at least one second. By displaying the stopped third symbol for a certain period of time (1 second or longer), the player can determine whether or not the combination is the third symbol corresponding to the hit (special symbol, ordinary symbol lottery result) Is overlooked) can be suppressed. In the above-described stop display state, only the main symbols stopped and displayed on the activated line L1 are displayed, and the other main symbols (main symbols set in each symbol row and other than the activated line L1) The main symbol stopped and displayed at the location may not be displayed (displayed so as to be inconspicuous). As a result, it is possible to more clearly notify the player of the stop display result of the main symbol.

  In addition, when the combination of the third symbols stopped and displayed is a combination corresponding to the departure, and there is a reserved ball, after the stop display for one second, the variable display corresponding to the lottery based on the reserved ball is started. . When there are a plurality of reserved balls, the lottery is executed based on the reserved ball corresponding to the oldest incoming ball in time.

  On the other hand, when the main symbol (the third symbol) of the combination corresponding to the special symbol or the departure of the ordinary symbol is stopped and displayed for one second in a state where the reserved ball does not exist, the third symbol is still stopped and displayed thereafter. Continue. This state continues until a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses or until a new main symbol change is started. When a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed since the main symbol (the third symbol) was stopped and displayed, a demonstration effect indicating that the game was not executed is displayed. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed after the stop display of the third symbol, it is determined that the player is not playing a game, and the demonstration effect is started. I do. Thereby, the player who is trying to select the pachinko machine 10 to start the game can easily determine whether or not the game is being performed based on whether or not the demonstration effect is displayed.

  In this embodiment, the demonstration effect starts when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses after the symbol corresponding to the main symbol (the first special symbol, the second special symbol, the ordinary symbol) is stopped and displayed. However, the demonstration effect may be started based on the elapsed time from when all the symbols are stopped and displayed irrespective of the main symbol and the slave symbol, The display form of the demonstration may be different between the demonstration effect when only the symbols are stopped and displayed, and the demonstration effect when both the main symbol and the subsidiary symbols are stopped and displayed. In this case, for example, in the demonstration effect executed when only the main symbol is stopped and displayed, a notification for prompting the progress of the game is executed, and in the demonstration effect when both the main symbol and the sub symbol are stopped and displayed, a new It is preferable to execute a notification for prompting a game by a proper player. Thereby, a game can be smoothly performed.

  Next, the sub-display area Ds provided below the first display area Dm will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 9A, a sub-display area Ds is formed below the first display area Dm. The auxiliary display area Ds is an area in which an auxiliary display mode for assisting a player in playing a game, such as a game situation or a game description, is displayed in accordance with each game state or game result. Specifically, the number of reserved symbols corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed (see FIG. 9B), and the content of the fluctuation effect of the main symbol executed in the first display area Dm is assisted. (See FIG. 22 (a)), guide the contents of a game to be played (see FIG. 22 (b)), and display the remaining period of a specific period (shortening period) which is advantageous to the player (FIG. 22 (a)). 15 (a)). This makes it possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description of the game board 13 will be continued. Below the variable display device unit 80, a first left ball entrance 64a into which a ball can enter is provided. When a ball enters the left first entrance opening 64a, a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch is turned on. A special symbol is drawn by the main controller 110, and a display corresponding to the result of the drawing is indicated by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37. In addition, the left first ball entrance 64a is also one of the winning holes from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters. The left first entrance 64a performs a right-handed game when the ball is launched into the path on the left side of the variable display device unit 80 in a front view (a so-called left-handed game). It is configured to make it easier to enter the ball than in the case.

  Below the first left ball entrance 64a, a storage device 750 and a specific general ball entrance 630 are provided. Although a detailed description of the storage device 750 will be described later with reference to FIG. 5, the storage device 750 includes a storage valve 750a that can be variably operated between a closed state and an open state, and a configuration in which the storage valve 750a is in a closed state. And a side wall for forming a storage area in which one sphere can be stored. The storage valve 750a is variably controlled to change from a closed state where a ball can be stored to an open state when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery, and when the variable operation is performed to an open state, the storage area is set. (Or the sphere that has flowed into the storage device 750 while the storage valve 750a is being changed to the open state) flows down below the storage device 750. Note that the storage device 750 is provided at a location where a ball can be stored both when playing a left-handed game and when playing a right-handed game.

  Below the storage device 750, a specific general ball entrance 630 is provided so that a ball passing through the storage device 750 can enter the ball. The specific general entrance 630 is a winning opening in which ten balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters, and is used as a trigger for operating the non-motorized accessory 710. The detailed description of the non-motorized accessory 710 will be described later with reference to FIG. 5. The provided non-motorized accessory 710 is configured to change to a position where a ball can enter the right first entrance opening 64b.

  On the other hand, in the right area of the game board 13, two flow paths through which the right-handed ball flows down, and a distribution member 700 for distributing the ball fired by the right-handed game to the two paths described above, The non-motorized accessory 710, the right first entrance 65b, the through gate 67, the second entrance 640 and the electric accessory 640a, the first variable winning device 65, and the second variable winning device 650 It is arranged. Next, the configuration of the right side area of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  The ball fired by the right-handed game is alternately distributed to the first flow path 701 and the second flow path 702 by the distribution member 700. The ball distributed to the first flow path 701 passes through the curved path 701a (see FIG. 3), passes through the through gate 67 and the second ball entrance 640, and flows out below the right region. Also, the ball distributed to the second flow path 702 flows down the third flow path 703a when the non-motorized accessory 710 provided on the downstream side is in a closed state (see FIG. 5A). Then, the gas flows into the inflow port 704a, flows down the fifth flow path 704b provided on the back side of the first flow path 701 (the rear side in the perspective of FIG. 2), and the right area on the game board 13 from the outflow port 704c. Spills down. On the other hand, when the non-motorized accessory 710 is in the open state (see FIG. 5B), it flows down the fourth flow path 703b and enters the right first ball entrance 64b. When a ball enters the right first entrance opening 64b, three balls are paid out as prize balls.

  In addition, although the detailed description of the non-motorized accessory 710 will be described later with reference to FIG. The non-motorized accessory 710 is configured to be changed to a closed state by its own weight.

  Then, the balls distributed to the two flow paths (the first flow path 701 and the second flow path 702) by the distribution member 700 join below the right region, and are placed on the second variable winning device 650 and the first variable winning device 65. And flows into the out port 66 while flowing down the flow path that can flow into the storage device 750.

  Here, the flow of the ball distributed by the distribution member 700 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram showing a ball flow when a ball fired by a right-handed game flows down the first flow path 701, and FIG. It is the schematic diagram which showed the ball flow when flowing down 702.

  As shown in FIG. 3, when the distribution member 700 fires 100 balls in one minute to alternately distribute the ball fired by the right-handed game to the first flow path 701 and the second flow path 702. In this case, 50 pieces of water flow down the first flow path 701 at an interval of 1.2 seconds, and 50 pieces of water flow down the second flow path 702 at an interval of 1.2 seconds. The first flow path 701 is constituted by a spherical passage formed with a passage width of one ball (about 15 mm), and the flowing speed of the ball is reduced by a curved path 701a provided in the middle thereof. The sphere passing through the first flow path 701 and flowing out of the first flow path 701 is configured to pass about 2 seconds.

  A through gate 67 is provided at a position downstream of the first flow path 701 (downstream of the curved path 701a), and a second ball entrance 640 is provided downstream of the through gate 67. . The second entrance 640 allows the ball to pass through the first flow path 701 when the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state, and passes through the first flow path 701 when the electric accessory 640a is in the open state. The configured ball is configured to enter the second entrance 640.

  Further, the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 is configured to reach the second entrance 640 after 0.2 seconds. Although the details will be described later, since the variation time of the ordinary symbol executed when the ball has passed through the through gate 67 is 3 seconds at the shortest, the ball passing through the through gate 67 is Is configured so as not to enter the second entrance 640 due to the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a executed based on the lottery of the ordinary symbol executed when passing through. In other words, the period from passing through the through gate 67 to reaching the second entrance 640 (electrically driven accessory 640a) is shorter than the period required for the lottery of the ordinary symbols. Thus, it is possible to physically execute a lottery of a normal symbol and to physically insert a ball into the second entrance 640 only by firing one ball. Therefore, execution of an inappropriate game can be suppressed. Further, in the present embodiment, the ball fired by the right-handed game is divided by the distribution member 700 into the first flow path 701 (the flow path in which the through gate 67 and the second ball entrance 640 are provided) and the second flow path. Since the pattern is alternately distributed to the road 702, a normal symbol lottery is executed (a ball is passed through the through gate 67), and the normal symbol lottery is won. Since it is necessary to fire at least three balls in order for the ball to enter the 640, it is possible to suppress the execution of a more inappropriate game (for example, a single shot).

  In the present embodiment, the through gate 67 and the second ball entrance 640 are provided in one of the two flow paths distributed by the distribution member 700, but the through gate 67 is provided in one of the flow paths. 67 may be provided, and the second entrance 640 may be provided in the other flow path. With such a configuration, for example, when a malicious player destroys the distribution member 700 and creates a state in which the ball flows down only one of the flow paths, the ball passes through the through gate 67. By doing so, it is possible to regulate a game in which a ball enters the second entrance 640 when a normal symbol is won, and it is possible to suppress an illegal game from being played.

  Next, a case where a sphere flows down the second flow path 702 will be described with reference to FIG. The second flow path 702 is configured such that the period during which the ball flows down is shorter than that of the first flow path 701 described above. Specifically, the time required for the sphere flowing into the second flow path 702 to flow out of the outflow port 704c is about 1.5 seconds. With this configuration, when 100 balls are fired toward the right region in one minute, the sphere that has flown into the first flow path 701 and the sphere that is fired next to the sphere are fired, and the second flow path 702 is fired. And the ball that has flowed into the lower right area (the area where the first variable prize device 65 and the second variable prize device 650 are disposed) of the game board 13 almost simultaneously (about 0.1 second difference). Become. Therefore, in the game state (big hit state or small hit state) in which each variable winning device is opened, it is possible to easily win a plurality of balls at once.

  Further, a part of the second flow path 702 (fifth flow path 704b) is provided on the back side of the first flow path 701 (far side in the viewpoint of FIG. 4), and is viewed from the front (front view from the viewpoint of FIG. 4). The plurality of flow paths are configured to overlap. In this way, by forming a plurality of ball channels using the depth direction of the game board 13, it is possible to reduce the space for forming the ball channels (the area occupied by the ball channels in the game board 13). it can.

  Further, the ball outlet (outlet 704c) of the second flow path 702 is located lower than the outlet of the first flow path 701 (downstream of the second ball inlet 640), and at the right of the game board 13. In the lower region, the sphere is configured to flow out downstream of the sphere flowing out of the first flow path 701. As a result, the spheres that have flowed out of the outlet 704c vigorously (the spheres that flowed out faster than the spheres that flowed down the first flow path 701) collide directly with the spheres that flowed out of the first flow path 701, and become irregular. A situation in which a ball flow occurs can be suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, a configuration is used in which the ball fired by the right-handed game by the distribution member 700 is alternately distributed to two flow paths. However, other configurations may be used. Instead of alternating (1: 1) to the channels, the balls may be distributed at different ratios, or the balls may be distributed to three or more channels. Further, in the present embodiment, the sorting member 700 in which the sorting destination of the next passing ball changes according to the own weight of the passing ball is used. For example, a sorting member electrically driven according to a predetermined rule is used. A dividing member may be used.

  Next, an operation flow of the storage device 750 and the non-motorized accessory 710 used in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5A is a schematic diagram showing that the storage device 750 and the non-motorized accessory 710 are both in a closed state (closed state), and FIG. FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram showing that both objects 710 are in an open state (open state).

  As shown in FIG. 5A, when the non-motorized accessory 710 is in the closed state (closed state), it is impossible (difficult) to allow the ball to enter the right first entrance opening 64b. Therefore, when the gaming state is the normal state, it is possible to perform a right-handed game aiming at the right area of the gaming board 13 and to suppress a ball from entering the right first entrance opening 64b.

  The non-motorized accessory 710 has an action portion that comes into contact when the ball passes through a specific portion, and the action portion is operated by its own weight of the contacted ball, and is released based on the operation. Is configured. Specifically, the ball that has entered the specific general ball entrance 630 abuts on the above-described action portion, and the action connection portion 710a operates in conjunction with the action, whereby the non-motorized accessory 710 is opened. As a result, the ball can enter the first right ball entry port 64b.

  Further, the right first ball entry port 64b is provided with a second action portion to which the ball that has entered the ball can abut. As a result, the second action portion operates, and the non-electric accessory 710 is closed. As described above, the non-motorized accessory 710 is configured to switch the variable state based on the operation of the member acting by the weight of the ball without using an electric drive source. Note that the configuration of the non-motorized accessory 710 may be other than the configuration described above, and a known configuration that operates based on the weight of the ball may be used.

  As described above, the entry of a ball into the specific general entrance 630 serving as a trigger for operating (opening) the non-motorized accessory 710 is performed by the storage device 750 provided above the specific general entrance 630. When the storage device 750 is released, the ball can enter the specific general ball entrance 630. When the predetermined release condition (for example, the start of the jackpot game) is satisfied as described above, the storage device 750 is in the release state until the predetermined closing condition (for example, 10 seconds has elapsed) is satisfied. It is variably controlled so that

  That is, as shown in FIG. 5B, when the big hit game is started and the first variable winning device 65 is opened, the storage device 750 is released. Then, the storage device 750 is released, and the non-motorized accessory 710 is opened based on the fact that the ball has entered the specific general entrance 630. In the first embodiment, since the storage device 750 is disposed at a position where the ball fired by either the left-handed game or the right-handed game can pass through the storage device 750, the right-handed game The ball that did not win in the first variable prize device 65 during the jackpot game in which the game is performed (the ball that passed on the first variable prize device 65 during the interval between rounds when the first variable prize device is temporarily closed) ) Can be made to enter the specific general entrance 630.

  Therefore, it is possible to acquire both the payout of the prize ball based on the ball entry into the first variable winning device 65 and the payout of the prize ball based on the ball entry into the specific general entrance port 630 during the jackpot game. be able to. Furthermore, since the ball which could not win in the first variable winning device 65 is configured to be able to enter the specific general entrance 630, the first variable during the jackpot game which was conventionally wasted. A ball that does not win the prize device 65 can be given an added value that is advantageous to the player.

  In the first embodiment, the storage valve 750a is set to release the storage device 750 for 10 seconds after the jackpot game is started (after the first opening operation of the first variable winning device 65 is performed). It is configured to be variably operated. Therefore, by establishing the end condition of the first round (for example, winning 10 balls) in the jackpot game within 10 seconds, the interval from the end of the first round to the start of the second round (inter-round interval) ) The period and the period during which the storage device 750 is released can be matched.

  As a result, the ball that has passed on the first variable winning device 65 during the interval between rounds can be made to enter the specific general entrance 630, so that the first round in the jackpot game is early (within 10 seconds). 2) It is possible to have the player play the game eagerly to end the game.

  The release timing of the storage device 750 executed during the big hit game is 10 seconds as described above (after the big hit game is started (after the first opening operation of the first variable winning device 65 is executed). ) May be set, and the storage device 750 may be set to be released at a predetermined interval (for example, every 10 seconds) for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds). With such a configuration, when the end timing of each round of the jackpot game (timing at which an interval between rounds is set) and the timing at which the storage device 750 is released coincide with each other, many jackpot games are performed during the jackpot game. A ball can be made to enter the specific general entrance 630.

  In the case of using the above-described configuration, the timing at which the end condition of each round in the jackpot game is satisfied is adjusted (for example, the tenth ball that is the end condition of the round wins the first variable winning device). By adjusting the timing of operation by operating the operation handle 51), it is possible to change the number of balls to enter the specific general entrance 630 during the jackpot game, so that the player can It is possible to provide a new game property in which each middle round end timing is adjusted to a predetermined timing (timing at which the storage device 750 is set to the release state), and it is possible to make the player enthusiastically play a game.

  The third symbol display device 81 may be configured to display a display mode for notifying the release timing of the storage device 750 or a display mode in which the player can predict the timing at which the interval between rounds is executed. Thereby, the player can execute the game during the jackpot game while grasping the content displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the first embodiment described above, the non-motorized accessory 710 is opened (opened) when the jackpot game is executed. Therefore, by performing a right-handed game during the jackpot game, the right first The ball can be surely entered into the entrance 64b. This makes it possible to reliably execute the change of the first special symbol in the time-saving state in which the game shifts after the jackpot game ends (the time-saving at the time of starting the extended game mode in which the game shifts from the normal state big hit (initial time-saving time)).

  Further, in the present embodiment, the non-motorized accessory 710 operates so as to transition to a closed state (closed state) when one ball enters the right first entrance opening 64b, so that a large hit is achieved. Excessive entry of the ball into the right first entry opening 64b during the game can be suppressed.

  Next, referring to FIG. 6, a configuration in which the game balls guided to the distribution channel of the back cover body 650e in the second variable winning device 650 are distributed to a normal discharge channel 650e1 and a special discharge channel 650e2 described later. Will be described.

  FIG. 6A is a schematic diagram showing a state in which a ball that has won the second variable prize device 650 is distributed to the normal discharge channel 650e1, and FIG. It is a schematic diagram showing a state in which a winning ball is distributed to a special discharge channel 650e2.

  As shown in FIG. 6B, when the switching member 650h is actuated, the game ball that has passed through the detection port 650a1 of the second variable winning device 650 is distributed to the special discharge channel 650e2. In the present embodiment, a staying member 650n is provided in the special discharge channel 650e2. With this staying member 650n, only one game ball can stay in the distribution destination area 650h3, which is the area where the switching ball 650h distributes the game ball to the special discharge channel 650e2 side. Thereby, when one game ball is staying in the distribution destination area 650h3, the game ball that has passed through the detection port 650a1 of the second variable winning device 650 is not distributed to the special discharge channel 650e2, Normally, it flows down to the discharge channel 650e1.

  The staying member 650n is configured by a shutter mechanism that can come and go from the game board 13 side. The staying member 650n operates in the front-rear direction of the game board 13 by the operation of the staying solenoid 209b (see FIG. 8). The staying member 650n can cause one game ball to stay in the distribution destination area 650h3 by performing an advance operation (closing operation) forward. On the other hand, by performing the evacuation operation (opening operation) backward, the game balls staying in the distribution destination area 650h3 flow down to the special discharge channel 650e2.

  Here, the second variable winning device 650 allows the game ball to enter by opening the opening / closing door 650f1 during the small hit game. In addition, the staying member 650n performs a closing operation during the small hitting game (when a ball can enter the second variable winning device 650), and after the opening / closing door 650f1 is closed (a new variable winning device 650 is provided). The opening operation is performed after a lapse of a predetermined time from when it becomes impossible to enter the ball). That is, in the present control example, the game balls that have entered the second variable winning device 650 are limited to one ball that flows down to the special discharge channel 650e2 even if the switching member 650h is operating. Thereby, it can be suppressed that the game balls flowing down to the special discharge channel 650e2 become excessive.

  The game ball flowing down to the special discharge channel 650e2 passes through the V winning switch 650e3. In the first embodiment, a jackpot game is provided based on the passage of a game ball to the V winning switch 650e3.

  In the first embodiment, the number of game balls flowing down to the special discharge channel 650e2 is limited to one ball. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more game balls stay in the distribution destination area 650h3. The number of game balls to be restricted may be changed as appropriate by making it possible or making the staying member operate a predetermined number of times (for example, twice) during the small hitting game.

  A case where a game ball is guided to the normal discharge channel 650e1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6A is a diagram showing a state in which the flow path solenoid 209c (see FIG. 8) is inactive, and the opening surface of the entrance of the special discharge flow path 650e2 is blocked by the guide piece 650h2 of the switching member 650h. .

  In the first embodiment, even when the flow path solenoid 209c is inactive, the stagnation member 650n provided in the special discharge flow path 650e2 is configured to operate. As a result, it is not necessary to switch the process depending on whether the flow path solenoid 9209c is operated or not, so that design cost and program capacity can be reduced.

  When the flow path solenoid 650k is inactive, all game balls that have passed through the detection port 650a1 of the second variable winning device 650 flow down to the normal discharge flow path 650e1. On the other hand, since there is no game ball flowing down to the special discharge channel 650e2, there is no influence of the staying member 650n newly provided in the first embodiment.

  Next, the flow of the small hit game in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 10A shows a small hitting game of the small hitting type B executed based on the ball entry into the first entrance 64 (first left entrance 64a, right first entrance 64b). 10B is a timing chart showing the flow of FIG. 10B. FIG. 10B is executed based on the entry of a ball into the first entrance 64 (left first entrance 64a, right first entrance 64b). It is a timing chart which shows the flow of the small hit game of small hit type A. FIG. 11A is a timing chart showing a flow of a small hitting game executed based on the entry of a ball into the second entrance 640, and FIG. 11B is a timing chart showing the flow of the second entrance 640. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of the big hit game performed based on the ball entry into the ball. The details of the operation control of the various devices shown in FIGS. 10 and 11 will be described later.

  Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, when a small hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, a small hit game for 60 seconds is executed (see FIG. 22). In this small hitting game, a game in which the second variable winning device 650 is opened is executed, and when the ball that has won the second variable winning device 650 passes through a specific area (V winning switch 650e3), the small hitting game ends. The big hit game is configured to be executed later. When a small hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, a small hit (small hit type A) in which a ball can pass (is easy to pass) in a specific area (V winning switch 650e3) during the small hit game is set. One of the small hits (small hitting type B) in which the ball cannot pass (is difficult to pass) in the specific area (V winning switch 650e3) is selected.

  First, a description will be given with reference to FIG. Based on the winning of the ball into the first entrance 64, the main control device 110 controls the variation of the first special symbol. At that time, the display control device 114 executes a first special symbol variation effect indicating that the first special symbol is changing, for the same period (30 seconds) as the variation time of the first special symbol. Note that the time of the first special symbol fluctuation effect executed by the display control device 114 will be described later. Then, when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped and the main control device 110 starts the small hitting control (when the small hitting game is executed), the opening / closing door 650f1 provided in the second variable winning device 650 is opened / closed. The V-inlet solenoid 209a, the stagnation solenoid 209b for variably operating the stagnation member 650n, and the flow path solenoid 209c for variably operating the switching member 650h are turned on in accordance with a predetermined opening scenario. Specifically, the V inlet solenoid 209a repeats the opening operation of turning off for 15 seconds and turning on for 0.5 seconds twice after the small hitting game is executed, and then turns off for 15 seconds and turns off for 0.8 seconds. An open scenario for a total of 60 seconds is set to be in the ON state and the OFF state for 13.2 seconds.

  Next, the staying solenoid 209b is turned on (a state in which the ball stays) for 55 seconds after the execution of the small hitting game, and is then turned off (a state in which the ball stays released) for a total of 60 seconds. A second release scenario is set. The above-described opening scenario of the V inlet solenoid 209a and the staying solenoid 209b is an opening scenario common to the small hit types A and B.

  On the other hand, the opening scenario of the flow path solenoid 209c is configured such that different opening scenarios are set depending on the type of small hit, and a small hit where a ball cannot pass (is difficult to pass) in a specific area (V winning switch 650e3). In the small hit type B, which is a type, an open scenario in which the small hitting game is continuously turned off for 60 seconds during the small hitting game period is set (see FIG. 10A), and the ball passes through the specific area (V winning switch 650e3). In the small hitting type A, which is a possible (easy to pass) small hitting type, an open scenario is set in which the small hitting game is executed for 40 seconds off, 15 seconds on, and 5 seconds off after the small hitting game is executed (FIG. 10). (B)).

  As described above, by making only the driving operation of one of the three solenoids different during the execution of the small hitting game, the ball easily passes through the specific area (the V winning switch 650e3). By configuring the small hit game and the small hit game in which the ball is difficult to pass, a common open scenario can be used for the small hit game executed in different small hit types, thereby reducing the processing load. be able to.

  In the present embodiment, the opening scenario of the V inlet solenoid 209a and the staying solenoid 209b are shared, and the opening scenario of the flow path solenoid 209c is made different depending on the type of small hit. However, other configurations may be used. For example, the opening scenario of the residence solenoid 209b and the opening scenario of the flow path solenoid 209C may be made common, and the opening scenario of the V inlet solenoid 209a may be made different. In this case, a common opening scenario is set such that a period in which the ball can pass through and a period in which the ball cannot pass through the specific area (V winning switch 650e3) are set according to the timing at which the ball wins the second variable winning device 650. In advance, as an opening scenario of the V inlet solenoid 209a, an opening scenario in which the V inlet solenoid 209a is turned on corresponding to a period in which the ball can pass through the specific area (V winning switch 650e3), and a specific area (V It is preferable to use an open scenario in which the winning switch 650e3) corresponds to a period during which the ball cannot pass, and the V inlet solenoid 209a is turned on. Further, it is preferable that the period during which the V inlet solenoid 209a is turned on is unified in any of the open scenarios. With this configuration, it is possible to make the second variable winning device 650 match the number of balls that can be won.

  In addition, as in the above-described example, the opening scenario is not changed only for the V inlet solenoid 209a, and even when the same opening scenario is used, the start position (execution start position) of the opening scenario is changed. A small hit game in which a ball easily passes through a specific area (V winning switch 650e3) and a small hit game in which a ball hardly passes may be configured to be executable. In the case of such a configuration, it is not necessary to prepare different release scenarios for each small hit type, so that the storage capacity can be reduced.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 11A, a flow of the small hitting game executed based on the entry of the ball into the second entrance 640 will be described. In the present embodiment, the small hitting game executed based on the entry of the ball into the second entrance 640 (that is, the small hitting is won in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2)) Since the small hitting game executed based on the small hitting type is configured to execute the same operation control, the description will be given without limiting the small hitting type.

  In FIG. 11A, a description will be given by setting the time of the entire small hit control (small hit game time) to 10 seconds. First, when the set time t1 (6.5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the small hitting game (control), the V inlet solenoid 209a of the plurality of solenoids is turned off, and the opening / closing door 650f1 is closed. By closing the opening / closing door 650f1, a new ball does not win in the second variable winning device 650. Next, the set time t2 (9 seconds) elapses, the staying solenoid 209b is turned off, the staying member 650n is opened (retracted state), and the ball stayed by the staying member 650n flows down to the special discharge path 650e2. To go. The set time t2 is set to a time sufficient for the ball existing in the second variable winning device 650 at the time when the set time t1 has elapsed to flow down the normal discharge flow path 650e1. In the two-variable winning device 650, only the balls stayed by the staying member 650n flow down the special discharge channel 650e2. Next, when the set time t3 (5 seconds) has elapsed, the flow path solenoid 209c is turned off, and the guide piece 650h2 of the switching member 650h blocks the opening surface of the entrance of the special discharge flow path 650e2. The set time t3 is set to a time sufficient to cause the sphere flowing down the special discharge flow path 650e2 to flow downstream of the movable range of the guide piece 650h2 after the set time t2 has elapsed.

  By driving the staying solenoid 209b and the flow path solenoid 209c with a time difference in this way, even if the ball is stayed by the staying member 650n within the movable range of the guide piece 650h2, the stay is performed by the guide piece 650h2 and the staying member 650n. Since it is possible to reliably flow down to the special discharge channel 650e2 without interference with the stagnated spheres, it is possible to reduce the size of the apparatus.

  Finally, based on the fact that the ball flowing down the special discharge channel 650e2 has passed through the V winning switch (specific area) 650e3, the main control device 110 ends the small hitting game control and performs the big hitting game control. The specific winning opening 65 is opened.

  Next, differences from FIG. 11A will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 11B, the operation of the second variable winning device 650 is not performed because the lottery result of the second special symbol based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 is a big hit (a symbol hit). That is, after the variation control of the second special symbol by the main control device 110 ends, the big hit control is started. In the meantime, the display control device 114 executes a second special symbol change effect indicating that the second special symbol is changing.

  Here, the relationship between the effect performed by the display control device 114 in FIG. 11A and the time of the effect performed by the display control device 114 in FIG. 11B will be described. In FIG. 11 (a), the total of the fluctuation time (2 seconds) of the second special symbol and the small hit effect time (10 seconds) is set to 12 seconds, and in FIG. 11 (b), the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set. Is set to 12 seconds. This is the timing when the jackpot game is started even if the jackpot based on the lottery result of the second special symbol is either the above-mentioned V winning or the symbol winning, that is, the first variable winning device 65 (the first specific winning). This is for adjusting the opening timing of the mouth 65a). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the result of the lottery of the second special symbol, and to enjoy the effect performed by the display control device to the end.

  Next, the flow of a game in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the flow of a game in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, when the game state is roughly divided into a normal state, a left-handed game in which a lottery of the first special symbol (special 1) is executed aiming at the left first entrance 64a and a game state in which the game state is a time reduction state In this case, the second special symbol (special 2) is executed by aiming at the second entrance 640, or the first variable prize device 65, the second variable prize device 65, 2 It is configured so that a right-handed game aiming at the variable winning device 650 is performed, and a winning (big hit or small hit) is won in the lottery of the first special symbol executed during the left-handed game, and the winning game is ended. When the time saving state is given later, the game shifts to the right-handed game (rensou mode), and shifts to the specific game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state. This extended play mode (specific game state) ends when the predetermined condition is satisfied (when the game state shifts to the normal state and the number of balls reserved for the second special symbol becomes 0), and ends in the normal state. It shifts to a left-handed game. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, during the left-handed game (normal state), a game is performed with the aim of shifting to the right-handed game (specific game state) which is advantageous to the player, and the right-handed game is performed. During the extended play mode (specific gaming state), a game is played with the aim of continuing the extended play mode (specific gaming state). As described above, in the gaming machines having different gaming properties, by making the different gaming properties correspond to the game in which the position at which the player fires the ball is different (right-handed game, left-handed game), Easy-to-understand games can be provided.

  Also, in the present pachinko machine 10, a symbol in which the lottery of the first special symbol is won as a trigger to shift from the normal state in which the left-handed game is performed to the specific game state in which the right-handed game is performed (rensou mode). A plurality of (two types) triggers of a winning and a first special symbol being won in a small hit, and a V-win winning in which a special area (V winning switch 650e3) is passed to execute a big hit during the small hit game. Therefore, the player can be prevented from getting tired of the game early during the left-handed game, which is a normal state disadvantageous to the player.

  As shown in FIG. 12, in a normal game state in which a left-handed game is performed, a game aimed at the left first entrance 64a is executed. When the lottery of the first special symbol is performed based on the ball entering the left first entrance 64a and the jackpot type of the lottery result is jackpot A (80% of the jackpot winning), after the end of the jackpot A time-saving gaming state (time-saving state) in which winning in the second entrance 640 is facilitated is provided. When shifting to the time-saving game state (time-saving state), a right-handed game in which a right-handed shot of firing a ball to the right side of the game board 13 to aim at the second entrance 640 provided in the right area of the game board 13 is performed. Done. On the other hand, when the jackpot type is the jackpot B (20% of the jackpot winning), the time-saving game state (time-saving state) is not given after the end of the jackpot. (Normal state). Further, in this embodiment, when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a small hit and the type of the small hit is a small hit A (10% of the small hit winning), there is a route that becomes a big hit (V winning). . In this case, the game shifts to the time-saving game state after the end of the big hit. Further, even if the small hit type is the small hit A, the ball cannot be passed through the specific area (V winning switch 650e3) during the small hit game, or the small hit type of the winning small hit Is a small hit B, the game does not shift to the time saving game state (time saving state), but shifts to the normal state in which the left-handed game is executed.

  Next, a flow during the right-handed game that is advantageous to the player in the pachinko machine 10 will be described. As described with reference to FIGS. 2 to 5, in the pachinko machine 10, the right first ball entry port 64 b is provided in the right area of the game board 13, and a big hit game in which a right-handed game is executed. At least one ball therein is configured so that the ball enters the right first ball entrance 64b. In other words, in the normal gaming state (normal state), when a jackpot to which the time-saving state is given after the end of the jackpot game is won, at least one hold storage of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is performed after the jackpot game ends. The time-saving state is started in a state where there is no reserved storage of the second special symbol (special figure 2).

  As shown in FIG. 12, in the pachinko machine 10, when both the reserved memory of the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the reserved memory of the second special symbol (special figure 2) exist, the second special symbol is used. The lottery (fluctuation) based on the reserved storage of the (special figure 2) is configured to be preferentially executed (so-called special 2 priority fluctuation), but the reserved storage of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is not performed. In the absence state, a lottery (change) based on the reserved storage of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is executed. Here, since the variation pattern (fluctuation time) of the first special symbol (special figure 1) in the time reduction state is set to 150 seconds regardless of the lottery result, after the time reduction state is started. During the period of 150 seconds, the first special symbol (special figure 1) is changed. In addition, when a change (lottery) of any of the special symbols (special figure 1, special figure 2) is executed once during the time reduction state, the end condition of the time reduction state is satisfied ( 1 time reduction).

  During the period in which the first special symbol (special figure 1) fluctuates in the time saving state, a game for acquiring the hold memory of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed, and the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed. A maximum of four reservation memories of the special figure 2) can be acquired. Here, if the reserved memory of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) can be acquired, the change of the first special symbol is stopped after the end of the working hours, and after the transition to the normal state, the reserved memory of the second special symbol is stored. Based on the lottery is executed. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the lottery of the second special symbol is set so as to win the big hit with a probability of 1/300 and to win the small hit with a probability of 299/300. The small hits won by the special symbol lottery are executed in a small hitting game in which a ball can pass (is easy to pass) in a specific area (V winning switch 630e3). A jackpot to which a time saving state is given after the end of the jackpot game is set. Therefore, in the time-saving gaming state, the extended play mode (specific gaming state) is continued as long as the storage of the second special symbol is held.

  On the other hand, during the period when the first special symbol fluctuates in the time saving state (during the extended holiday preparation period), it is not possible to acquire the reserved memory of the second special symbol, and there is no reserved memory of the second special symbol. When the time-saving state ends, the game shifts to the normal game state as it is, and the extended play mode (specific game state) ends.

  In addition, when a plurality of (for example, three) reserved memories of the second special symbol are acquired during the extended holiday preparation period, the fluctuation of the second special symbol is started when the vehicle enters the time saving state again. Become. In the present embodiment, the variation time of the second special symbol in the time reduction state (special 2 variation time) is set to 2 seconds regardless of the lottery result, and is shorter than the variation time of the ordinary symbol in the time reduction state (3 seconds). Therefore, it is possible to suppress the acquisition of a new reserved memory of the second special symbol during the time-saving state in which the lottery (change) of the second special symbol is being executed. Thereby, it is possible to suppress a situation in which an excessive prize ball is provided to the player. In the present embodiment, the time saving state is configured to loop with a probability of about 90% once entering the time saving state.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 13 to 23, the effect display contents executed by the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 13 and FIG. 14, a description will be given of the flow of the effect display contents that change in accordance with the transition of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment. FIG. 13 is a timing chart (first half) showing the relationship between the gaming state and the presentation state in the present embodiment, and FIG. 14 is a timing chart (second half) showing the relationship between the gaming state and the presentation state in the present embodiment.

  Here, the decorative symbol (third symbol) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 used in the present embodiment will be briefly described. The third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment can display a decorative symbol (third symbol) corresponding to three types of symbols of a first special symbol, a second special symbol, and a normal symbol on the third symbol display device 81. The decorative symbol (third symbol) corresponding to the symbol for which the lottery result should be most notified to the player is displayed as the main symbol in the first display area Dm (see FIG. 9) of the third symbol display device. The decorative symbol (third symbol) corresponding to the other symbol is displayed as a secondary symbol in the second display area Dn (see FIG. 9) of the third symbol display device.

  Then, by switching the symbols to be displayed as the main symbols in accordance with the transition of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the player can simply recognize the display result of the main symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is configured to make it easy to understand complicated gaming characteristics.

  The control for switching the symbols to be displayed as the main symbols described above will be described in detail later. , A symbol displayed as a main symbol and a symbol displayed as a sub symbol are switched and displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 13, when the gaming state is the normal (special 1) state in which the first special symbol is changed (lottery), “state 1” is set as the effect state. During the period in which the “state 1” is set, the first special symbol is displayed so as to be a main symbol, the normal symbol is displayed as a subsidiary symbol, and a reserved symbol of the first special symbol is displayed as a main reserved symbol (FIG. 9 (b)). In this manner, in the “normal (special 1)” state in which the first special symbol change (lottery) is being performed, a display that allows the player to easily recognize the result of the first special symbol lottery is provided. In addition, the contents of the game can be reported in an easily understandable manner.

  Next, in the “big hit” state in which the big hit is won by the lottery of the first special symbol and the big hit game is executed, the first symbol is displayed in the first display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 9B). A jackpot effect image is displayed. In this case, since the main symbol is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81, "-" is set as the effect state.

  After the jackpot game is over, the gaming state shifts to the time saving state, and the first special symbol is changed. "Or" State 5 "is set. Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in the “time saving (special 1)” state will be described. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the gaming state is “time saving (special 1)”, a game for acquiring the holding memory of the second special symbol is performed. In order to acquire the reserved memory of the second special symbol, a right-handed game is performed, the ball is passed through the through gate 67 (the normal symbol lottery is executed), and the normal symbol is won (the ordinary symbol is won). It is necessary to open the electric accessory 640a with a probability of 1/20).

  That is, in the case where the gaming state is the “time reduction (special 1)” state, the player plays the game while expecting that the lottery result of the ordinary symbol will be successful. Further, in the present embodiment, when the normal symbol whose fluctuation is started during the time reduction state stops changing during the time reduction state and the operation of the electric accessory 640a is started, the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a is performed. Since the open pattern (long open) which is advantageous to the player is set, the normal figure fluctuation is started when the game state is not the time reduction state (for example, the big hit state), and the electric power is changed during the time reduction state. In the case where the operation of the accessory 640a is started, or in the case where the normal figure fluctuation is started during the time reduction state and the operation of the electric accessory 640a is started after the end of the time reduction state (for example, the normal state), etc. The normal opening pattern (short opening) is executed instead of the opening pattern (long opening) in which the opening operation of the object 640a is advantageous to the player.

  In the gaming machine configured as described above, if the main symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is switched to the third symbol corresponding to the ordinary symbol on condition that the gaming state is shifted to the time saving state. However, in spite of the time saving state as described above, the variation of the ordinary symbol, in which the electric accessory 640a is short-circuited, is displayed in the main symbol, giving the player distrust. There was a problem that it would.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the “time reduction (special 1)” state is set as the gaming state, the variation state of the ordinary symbol is determined, and the timing at which the variation of the ordinary symbol is started and the variation of the ordinary symbol are determined. Is stopped (when the hit is won, the timing when the electric accessory 640a is opened), and both are in the "time saving (special 1)" state, the effect state is "state 5". Is set, and in other cases, "state 3" is set.

  During the period in which “state 5” is set as the effect state, the normal symbol is displayed such that the main symbol, the first special symbol, and the second special symbol are the slave symbols, and the second special symbol is designated as the main reserved symbol. Is displayed (see FIG. 16A). As described above, in the “time saving (special 1)” state in which the first special symbol is changed (lottery) for a long period (150 seconds), the symbol corresponding to the main symbol is switched from the first special symbol to the normal symbol. This makes it possible for the player to easily recognize the result of the lottery of the ordinary symbols, and to inform the contents of the game in an easily understandable manner.

  Also, during the period in which the “state 3” is set as the effect state, pseudo symbols that do not correspond to any of the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the ordinary symbol are the main symbol, the first special symbol, and the second special symbol. The third symbol corresponding to the ordinary symbol is displayed so as to be a sub symbol, and the reserved symbol of the second special symbol is displayed as the main reserved symbol (see FIG. 16 (a)). With this configuration, the contents of the game can be reported in an easily understandable manner.

  In the state where the second special symbol is fluctuating, “state 4” is set as the effect state regardless of the game state (regardless of the normal state or the time saving state). During the period in which “state 4” is set as the effect state, a third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed as a main symbol (see FIG. 17B). Then, as shown in FIG. 14, when “state 5” is set as the effect state, if the lottery result of the fluctuating first special symbol is a specific result (for example, a big hit), the When the remaining fluctuation time of one special symbol is equal to or shorter than a predetermined period, “state 6” is set as the effect state.

  During the period in which “state 6” is set as the effect state, the first special symbol is randomly selected from the variable display mode in which the third symbol corresponding to the ordinary symbol executed in “state 5” is the main symbol. A simulation symbol based on the result is displayed as a variation as a main symbol. By doing so, it is possible to secure a period for indicating to the player the lottery result of the first special symbol that has won the jackpot. Therefore, from the state where the “state 5” is set and the variable display mode in which the third symbol corresponding to the ordinary symbol is the main symbol is displayed, the jackpot game of the first special symbol is suddenly started, and the game is started. The disadvantage that the user is confused can be suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, the timing at which the effect state shifts from “state 5” to “state 6” is the timing at which the normal symbol change is executed. Thus, the transition of the effect state can be performed without discomfort.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state and the lottery result of the first special symbol is a small hit, a specific effect for the small hit is executed (see FIG. 22). When the gaming state is the normal state and the small hitting game based on the first special symbol is executed, “state 2” is set as the effect state.

  During the period in which the “state 2” is set as the effect state, in the special effect for small hits, a pseudo symbol that does not correspond to any of the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the ordinary symbol is displayed as a variable as a main symbol. Is done. In this case, the pseudo symbol variably displayed is a pseudo symbol variably displayed based on the opening timing of the second variable winning device 650 during the small hit game. In other words, the timing at which the pseudo symbol is stopped and displayed in a predetermined stop display mode (for example, a double stitch) is displayed a predetermined period before the timing when the second variable winning device 650 is opened, that is, the predetermined stop display mode is displayed. The timing at which the ball that has been fired since then has become possible to win the second variable 650 is given, and an effect that makes the player think that the second variable winning device 650 has opened based on the stop display of the pseudo symbol is provided. Be executed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the small hitting game in which the second variable winning device 650 is opened, a small hitting game which is advantageous to the player (the ball easily passes through the specific area (V winning switch 650e3)) is disadvantageous. The type of the stop display mode of the pseudo symbol which is variably displayed during the small hit game is set by the type of the small hit game being executed. For example, as a stop display mode of a pseudo symbol corresponding to a timing at which the second variable winning device 650 is opened at a timing at which a ball can pass through a specific area, a specific stop display mode (for example, a specific numeral (7)) Eye) is stopped. With this configuration, the type of the small hit game and the opening timing of the second variable winning device 650 can be grasped by the fluctuation display of the pseudo symbol executed during the small hit game, so that the player You can enjoy small hit games.

  Next, a display screen displayed on the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the present embodiment, as described above with reference to FIGS. 13 and 14, the pachinko machine 10 responds to the gaming state and the fluctuation state and the holding state of each symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol, normal symbol). Thus, display control is performed to change the symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol, and ordinary symbol) corresponding to the main symbol displayed in the first display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. With such a configuration, in a gaming machine designed to have different design lotteries (lottery of the first special symbol, lottery of the second special symbol, lottery of the ordinary symbol) depending on the gaming state, By simply letting the player know the display result of the main symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to easily notify whether or not the game result is advantageous to the player, and to the player. An easy-to-understand gaming machine can be provided.

  FIG. 15A is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at the time when the variation of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is started when the gaming state is the time saving state. is there. In the present embodiment, during the time reduction state, the right-handed game is a game that is advantageous to the player. Therefore, guidance for guiding the game method in the guidance display area Dm4 formed on the upper left of the first display area Dm. "Right-handed" characters are displayed. At the center of the first display area Dm, a general symbol main symbol Dmc having a third symbol corresponding to the ordinary symbol as a main symbol is variably displayed in synchronization with the ordinary symbol. On the left side of the first display area Dm, a main reserved symbol display area Dm5 for displaying the retained number of second special symbols as a main reserved symbol is formed. Note that, in the state shown in FIG. 15A, the number of reserved memories of the second special symbol is “0”.

  The second display area Dn1 formed on the upper right side of the first display area Dm has a third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol, and the second display area Dn2 has a third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol. However, in the third display area Dn3, a third symbol corresponding to the ordinary symbol is displayed as a subsidiary symbol, and indicates that the corresponding symbol is changing in the second display region Dn1 and the second display region Dn3. For this reason, the third symbol (slave symbol) is variably displayed, and the third symbol (slave symbol) is stopped and displayed in the second display area Dn2 to indicate that the corresponding symbol has not fluctuated.

  In addition, as for the display mode of the subsidiary symbols displayed in the second display areas Dn1 to Dn3, the display mode corresponding to whether or not the corresponding symbol (the first special symbol, the second special symbol, the normal symbol) is changing. Should be fine. Further, as a display mode corresponding to a stopped symbol, it is only necessary to be able to grasp that there is no change (stop), and as shown in the second display area Dn2 of FIG. May be displayed in a stop mode, or the stop mode of the previous variable display may be stopped and displayed as it is.

  Then, in the second display area Dn4, the number "3" is displayed as a display mode for indicating that the number of reserved memories (the number of reserved balls) of the first special symbol is three, and in the second display area Dn5. , The number “0” is displayed as a display mode for indicating that the number of reserved memories (the number of reserved balls) of the second special symbol is 0 (a state in which the reserved memory is not acquired), and the second display In the area Dn6, the numeral "4" is displayed as a display mode for indicating that the number of reserved symbols (the number of reserved balls) of the ordinary symbol is four.

  As a display mode for indicating the number of reserved storages (the number of reserved balls) of each symbol displayed in the second display areas Dn4 to Dn6, the number of reserved storages of each symbol is specifically shown as in the present embodiment. A display mode in which a value is indicated by a number may be used, or a display mode indicating only whether or not each symbol is on hold (for example, “「 ”when there is a hold memory,“ − ”when there is no hold memory) May be used. In this case, the number of storages to be held may be suggested by changing the color of the display mode of “○” indicating that there is the storage to be held. Also, a display mode that abstractly indicates the number of reserved storages may be used.

  The state shown in FIG. 15A is a state in which the first special symbol fluctuates for a fluctuation time of 150 seconds and the second special symbol does not fluctuate. The secondary symbol corresponding to the special symbol is variably displayed, and "-" indicating that the secondary symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is not variably displayed is displayed in the second display area Dn2.

  Further, in the sub-display area Ds formed below the first display area Dm, “150 seconds” is displayed in the first sub-display area Ds1 as a time display for indicating the remaining time in the time saving state. In the second sub-display area Ds2 on the left side of the display area Ds1, “Countdown !!” is displayed as a guide display for notifying the player that the remaining period of the time saving state is being subtracted. In the present embodiment, as the remaining period displayed in the first sub-display area Ds1, the remaining period of the fluctuation period (150 seconds) of the special figure 1 in the time saving state is calculated, and the calculated value is displayed. Therefore, an accurate period until the time saving state ends can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the player can play the game with peace of mind until the period elapses. However, a different value may be displayed as the remaining period display to be displayed in the first sub-display area Ds1, for example, a value with the remaining period of the fluctuation period (150 seconds) of the special figure 1 in the time saving state as an upper limit. May be set at random and displayed so that the value is subtracted.

  In this case, until the displayed value becomes 0, the difference between the value indicating the remaining fluctuation period of Toku-zu 1 and the value set at random is added and displayed, or the displayed value is changed to “???”. May be changed to the display. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp how long the time reduction state lasts, and it is possible to cause the player to play the game while always pounding.

  FIG. 15B shows a state in which the gaming state is a time-saving state, and 40 seconds have elapsed since the start of the change of the first special symbol (Special figure 1) (from the state shown in FIG. 15A). 5 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in FIG. As shown in FIG. 15 (b), the main symbol Dmc is stopped and displayed in a mode (a display mode of “555”) informing that a winning has been won in the lottery of the normal symbol, and the first display area Dm is displayed. On the lower right side of the icon, a guide display for notifying that the electric accessory 640a has been long opened due to the winning of the ordinary symbol, and that the ball can enter the second entrance 640 is displayed.

  In the first sub-display area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds, “110 seconds” is displayed as the remaining time in the time saving state, and in the second sub-display area Ds2, a ball is made to enter the second entrance 640. “Charge time” indicating that the state is easy (the state where the electric accessory 640a is in the long opening operation) is displayed. Then, in the second display area Ds3, a stop display mode ("OO") for indicating that a normal symbol has been won in a win is displayed.

  As described above, in the case where the gaming state is the time reduction state, while the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is being executed, the lottery result of the ordinary symbol (ordinary symbol) becomes the symbol that the player should pay close attention to. The ordinary drawing lottery result is displayed using the symbol Dmc. Therefore, a display that is easy for the player to understand can be provided.

  In the present embodiment, the display position and display mode of each main symbol (special figure 1 main symbol, special figure 2 main symbol, ordinary figure main symbol, and pseudo main symbol) displayed in the first display area Dm are described. The same stop display mode (e.g., collateral) is used for the same stop display mode for indicating a specific lottery result (for example, a win) in which the symbol lottery result is advantageous to the player. Even if the symbol to be designed is changed in accordance with the game state, the player can be caused to execute the effect display (effect change display) without a sense of incongruity. As a configuration of the above, the display position and the display mode may be different for each main symbol, or the stop display mode for indicating a specific lottery result (for example, winning) in which the symbol lottery result is advantageous to the player may be different. You may let it.

  FIG. 16A is a diagram illustrating a state in which the gaming state is a time saving state, and a state in which a ball has entered the second entrance 640 while the first special symbol (special figure 1) is changing. As shown in FIG. 16A, when a ball enters the second entrance 640, a display indicating that the ball has entered the second entrance 640 is provided at the upper center of the first display area Dm. "Charge completed" is displayed. Then, in the main reserved symbol display area Dm5, a display mode (the black circle in the figure) indicating that the retained number of the second special symbol is “1” is displayed. In this state, the number "1" is displayed in the second display area Dn5 as a display mode indicating that the number of reserved storages of the second special symbol is one.

  In the present embodiment, one ball is inserted into the second entrance 640 as a closing condition of the electric accessory 640a when the normal accessory is won during the working hours and the electric accessory 640a is in the long open state. A lapse of 11 seconds (total opening time of 6 seconds) has been set since the operation of the ball or the electric accessory 640a was started, and in this figure, one ball enters the second entrance 640, Since the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a has been completed and the next ordinary symbol change state is being executed, the main symbol Dmc is variably displayed at the center of the first display area Dm. In the first sub-display area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds, “100 seconds” is displayed as the remaining time in the time saving state.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as described above, at the time when one hold memory of the second special symbol is acquired, after the time-saving state ends (after the change of the first special symbol being changed is stopped), the second special symbol is stopped. (2) The special symbol is started to be displayed in a variable manner, and is designed so that a symbol or a V winning can be obtained with a high probability. Further, after the jackpot game executed based on the lottery of the second special symbol, the time saving state is always given, so that a chance to acquire the reserved memory of the second special symbol again comes. In addition, when a plurality of hold memories of the second special symbol are acquired in one time saving state (during the change of the first special symbol), a jackpot game corresponding to the acquired number is executed. Have been. Therefore, by displaying the "second storage of the second special symbol" that the player most expects during the time reduction state as the main symbol on the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game. it can.

  In the present embodiment, as a display mode of the main hold symbol, a maximum of four “black circles” are configured to be able to be displayed corresponding to the number of storages to be held, but other configurations may be used. In order to effectively notify the presence or absence of the extended mode (the presence or absence of the storage of the second special symbol), the display mode of the main storage symbol corresponding to the first storage of the second special symbol is changed to another main storage. You may make it different from the display mode of a symbol. As a display mode in this case, the main reserved symbol corresponding to the first reserved memory of the second special symbol is emphasized more than other main reserved symbols by changing the size, color, shape and pattern of the main reserved symbol. Alternatively, only the main reserved symbol corresponding to the first reserved storage of the second special symbol may be displayed at a position different from other main reserved symbols. Further, instead of changing the display mode of the main reserved symbol, the mode (display mode of the background image) on the display area side where the main reserved symbol is displayed may be changed. Alternatively, only when the first hold storage of the second special symbol is obtained, the effect may be notified by the sound output unit or the light emitting unit.

  FIG. 16B is a diagram illustrating an example of the display screen when the gaming state is the time saving state and the fluctuation period of the first special symbol (Special figure 1) is one second remaining. In this state, a pseudo effect symbol whose main symbol does not correspond to the display of the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the ordinary symbol is displayed as a pseudo main symbol Dmb in the center of the first display area Dm. This pseudo main symbol Dmb is temporarily stopped and displayed in a rocking state until the period in which the fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped (until the remaining period display of the first sub display area Ds1 becomes “0 second”). .

  This pseudo effect symbol is at the timing when the game state is the time reduction state and the fluctuation of the normal symbol, in which the fluctuation period exceeds the remaining short time period, is started (timing when “state 3” is set as the production state). It is what is displayed. With this configuration, when the third symbol corresponding to the variation of the ordinary symbol in which the variation period exceeds the remaining short time period is displayed as the ordinary symbol main symbol Dmc, even if the ordinary symbol main symbol Dmc is hit. Even if the stop display is performed in the display mode indicating, it is possible to suppress the problem that the electric accessory 640a is short-circuited and opened, thereby giving the player distrust of the effect.

  In addition, the third symbol corresponding to the variation of the ordinary symbol whose variation period is longer than the remaining short time period is displayed as the general symbol main symbol Dmc, and the display of the general symbol main symbol Dmc is interrupted at the timing when the time reduction state ends ( It is possible to switch to another main symbol display), but if the display of the main symbol used to make the player gaze at the display content is changed in the middle, it will give the player a great sense of discomfort. There's a problem. By using the above-described configuration, such a problem can be solved.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, since the display mode showing the lottery result of the first special symbol is displayed as the display mode of the pseudo effect symbol, the pseudo effect symbol is displayed in synchronization with the timing at which the change of the first special symbol stops. The lottery result of the first special symbol can be smoothly displayed only by changing the swinging state (temporary stop state) to the completely stopped state (see FIG. 17A). In addition, when the temporarily stopped main symbol (pseudo main symbol Dmb) is temporarily stopped in a display mode indicating a hit, the lottery result of the first special symbol is a hit, so that the bonus is definitely given to the player. It is possible to suppress the problem of giving the player distrust of the display mode (display result) of the main symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, a configuration other than the configuration in which the pseudo effect design is displayed during the period in which the pseudo effect design described in the present embodiment is displayed as the main design (during the period in which “state 3” is set as the effect state) may be used. For example, during the period, an effect that encourages the end of the time saving state may be executed without displaying any main symbols. Even in the case of such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the general symbol main symbol Dmc corresponding to the ordinary symbol in which the fluctuation period longer than the remaining short time period is set from being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Since it is possible, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the player has a mistrust.

  In the state shown in FIG. 16 (b), the fluctuation of the ordinary symbol is stopped and displayed while the pseudo main symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, so that the lottery result of the ordinary symbol is displayed in the second display area Dn3. Are stopped and displayed in a display mode (“○ ×”) indicating the departure. As described above, the fluctuation stop timing of the normal symbol is within a predetermined period (for example, within 2 seconds) from the fluctuation stop timing (end timing of the time saving state) of the special figure 1, and the lottery result of the normal symbol is out of order. Even in the case of, the effect display using the pseudo main symbol Dmb is executed.

  In FIG. 16 (b), since the main reserved symbol display area Dm5 displays a display mode indicating that the number of retained second special symbols is two, the second special symbol is displayed after the time saving state ends. Starts to fluctuate. In order to guide the player to that effect, "Charge release time !!" is displayed above the first display area Dm. The “charge release time” indicates a period during which a jackpot corresponding to the number of the second special symbols stored and stored is executed.

  Then, when the charge release time is entered, as shown in FIG. 17A, "charge release time entry" is displayed in the information of the first display area Dm, and the special figure 1 main symbol Dma is stopped and displayed. At this timing (time saving end timing), the ordinary symbol that is displayed in a variable manner, that is, the variation during the time saving state is started and the variation stop timing is after the end of the time saving, is a second display area as a subsidiary symbol. Since it is displayed on Dn3, it is possible to suppress the above-described inconvenience in the case where the fluctuation display of the main symbol Dmc is shown to the player.

  Next, when the charge release time starts, as shown in FIG. 17B, the special figure 2 main symbol Dmd is variably displayed in the first display area Dm. In this case, since the change of the second special symbol is started, the display mode indicating the number of reserved memories (number of reserved symbols) of the special figure 2 displayed in the main reserved symbol display area Dm5 is updated, and the remaining one reserved symbol is updated. A display mode indicating the number of storages is displayed. Further, in the second display area Dn, the sub-pattern corresponding to the special figure 1 is displayed in the second display area Dn1 while being stopped and displayed as the main symbol in FIG. 17A, and in the second display area Dn2. The special figure 2 change is displayed, and in the second display area Dn3, the normal figure change is displayed in a sub-pattern.

  In the present embodiment, when the change of the special figure 2 is executed, it is designed so that either the big hit or the small hit is easily won (100% is won). Therefore, there is no need for the player to pay close attention to the normal map fluctuation. Therefore, while the special figure 2 is being changed, the special figure 2 main symbol Dmd is displayed as the main symbol, so that the player can be provided with an easy-to-understand game.

  In the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 is set to 2 seconds in both the normal state and the time saving state. This period of 2 seconds is shorter than the shortest period normally set as the fluctuation time of the symbol. As a result, during the period when the special figure 2 is fluctuating, the execution and the stop of the general figure fluctuation are suppressed without straddling a plurality of game states. As a result, during the fluctuation of the special figure 2, occurrence of an extra effect is suppressed. In addition, with this configuration, when the special figure 2 fluctuates during the time saving state, the hit change of the ordinary figure is executed and stopped during the special figure 2 fluctuation period (during the time saving), It can be suppressed that the electric accessory 640a is opened and the special figure 2 reservation is increased during the special figure 2 fluctuation period (during the shortened working hours), and an excessive payout is provided to the player. Can be suppressed.

  It should be noted that the fluctuation period of the normal symbol and the fluctuation period of the special figure 2 are configured to be selectable from a plurality of times, and only when the selected fluctuation period satisfies a predetermined condition, the fluctuation period of the special figure 2 ), The electric accessory 640a may be configured to be openable. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with unexpectedness and to have an effect that the player can play the game enthusiastically.

  Subsequently, when the special figure 2 fluctuation shown in FIG. 17B is won and the small win is displayed, the display screen shown in FIG. 18A is displayed. That is, in the first display area Dm, the special figure 2 main symbol Dmd is stopped and displayed in the display mode ("555") indicating the small hit, and is opened in the lower right area of the first display area Dm during the small hit game. A guidance display for guiding the player to the second variable winning device 650 to be performed is displayed. Then, "Aim for V" is displayed in the second sub-display area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds.

  Then, during the small hit game shown in FIG. 18 (a), when the ball passes through a specific area (V winning switch 650e3) in the second variable winning device 650 and the big hit game is started, FIG. 18 (b) ) Is displayed. In this jackpot effect screen, the main design is not displayed in the main display area Dm, and a third design corresponding to each design (special 1, special 2, general figure) is displayed in the second display region Dm as a subordinate design. Is displayed. As a result, the player can enjoy the big hit effect without worrying about the fluctuation display of each symbol (special 1, special 2, general figure) being executed.

  Further, in the jackpot effect, “Charge Bonus 1st” is displayed in the main display area Dm as the number of consecutive jackpots indicating the number of jackpots executed during the extended console mode. “ROUND1” is displayed as a round number display indicating the number of rounds. As described above, in the present embodiment, a plurality of rounds (2, 5, 7, 10, 15 rounds) are set in the jackpot game. Further, in the present embodiment, the jackpot can be executed after the time-saving state ends, by the number of times that the special figure 2 is held and stored during the special figure 1 fluctuation (150-second fluctuation) during the time-saving state.

  In the gaming machine of the present embodiment configured as described above, the display relating to the plurality of jackpots executed during the extended-village state is counted as a period from the start of the extended-village state to the end thereof. It is configured to be able to display the sojourn period cumulative display and the specific period cumulative display that totals only the jackpot games based on the jackpot right acquired in one change of the special figure 1 (ie, the number of special figure 2 reservations). In the example shown in FIG. 18A, the round number display area Dm6 formed on the lower right side of the first display area Dm corresponds to the number of rounds for the jackpot game in the specific period described above. The number display mode is displayed.

  In the number-of-rounds display area Dm6, it is determined how many rounds of the jackpot game are to be executed cumulatively, based on the reserved storage of the special figure 2 acquired by one special figure 1 change, and the determination result. Is displayed. Specifically, based on the end of the special figure 1 change (150-second change) during the time saving game, the winning information corresponding to the special figure 2 suspension (that is, stored in the special figure winning information storage area 223a described later) (The winning information relating to the special figure 2) is extracted, and the number of viable jackpots and the number of rounds are determined. Then, a display mode including at least the determination result is displayed in the round number display area Dm6.

  The number-of-rounds display mode displayed in the number-of-rounds display area Dm6 includes a number-of-executed-rounds display mode (indicated by a solid-line circle in FIG. 18B) indicating the number of rounds that have been determined to be executed. , A running round display mode indicating the currently running round (indicated by a black circle in FIG. 18B), and a jackpot right acquired during a specific period (a special figure 1 fluctuation (150 second fluctuation) during a time-saving game). And a specific period total round number suggestion display mode (indicated by a dotted circle in FIG. 18 (b)) indicating the total number of rounds in the jackpot game period that can be executed by the game.

  By executing the jackpot effect configured as described above, the player can enter the special figure 2 number of reserved balls displayed in the main reserved symbol display area Dm5 and the specific period total rounds displayed in the round number display area Dm6. While watching the number suggestion display mode, it is possible to enjoy the jackpot game while predicting the type (number of rounds) of the jackpot game to be executed in the future.

  Furthermore, as described above, the number-of-executed rounds display mode and the currently-executed round display mode are displayed in the number-of-rounds display area Dm6. Of the total number of rounds that may be executed (the number of rounds displayed as a specific period total round number suggestion display mode) or the number of rounds that are determined to be executed (the execution confirmed round number display mode), The player can easily grasp the location. Therefore, it is possible to easily predict the number of remaining rounds executed within a specific period.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 18B, “the first charge bonus” is displayed as the number of times of consecutive play indicating the number of jackpots executed during the consecutive play mode. The number of consecutive holidays displayed is the number of jackpots (number of consecutive holidays within a specific period) executed based on the jackpot right acquired during the above-described specific period (special figure 1 fluctuation (150 second fluctuation during time-saving game) (150-second fluctuation)) Alternatively, both the display of the number of extended holidays and the display of the number of extended holidays within a specific period may be displayed. A means for calculating the special figure 1 change (the number of times the 150-second change is executed) during the time-saving game is provided, and the total number of jackpots in the extended play mode, the number of times of entering the specific period, and the execution within one specific period The number of jackpots that will be displayed With this configuration, it is possible not only to enjoy the display mode during the jackpot game, but also to grasp the game state of the pachinko machine 10 and to refer to the game in the future. After calculating the number of times described above, the average number of jackpots within a specific period executed within one specific period may be displayed.

  By displaying the average number of jackpots in the specific period, if the average number of jackpots in the specific period is low, it is determined whether the lottery result of the ordinary symbol is biased out or a through condition which is a condition for executing the lottery of the ordinary symbol. It is possible to refer to a future game while analyzing whether the number of passing balls to the gate 67 is small and an assumed cause.

  In the present embodiment, the display mode (one round, one display mode) corresponding to the number of rounds is displayed as the display mode displayed in the round number display area Dm6. The display mode displayed in the area Dm6 is not limited to this, and may be any display mode in which the player can predict the number of rounds. For example, the size and color of the display mode may be changed according to a predetermined rule in accordance with the number of rounds.

  Further, in the present embodiment, “ROUND1” is displayed as a round number display indicating the number of jackpot rounds currently being executed. However, this round number display does not indicate the number of rounds for one jackpot game. Instead, the number of rounds may be added to the jackpot game executed within a specific period and displayed. As a result, it is possible to easily grasp and store the game result in the extended game mode. In the second sub-display area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds, "5, 10, 20" indicating the number of times of execution in a plurality of jackpot games executed within a specific period is displayed.

  When the second jackpot game is started due to the time saving variation (variation in the special figure 2) executed after the jackpot game shown in FIG. 18B is completed, the second jackpot game shown in FIG. The middle display screen is displayed. As shown in FIG. 19 (a), in the state where the second jackpot game has been started, the main reserved symbol display area Dm5 displays a display mode indicating that the remaining reserved storage number is “0”. In the main display area Dm, “Charge Bonus Second Time” is displayed as the number-of-games display to indicate that the current big-hit is the second big-hit in the consecutive-play mode. In the round number display area Dm6, the execution confirmed round number display mode for a total of 20 rounds is displayed. In other words, in FIG. 18B, the number of rounds displayed as the specific round total round number suggestion display mode is changed to the execution confirmed round number display mode by executing the jackpot game (second time) this time. ing. In this way, by changing the specific round total round number suggestion display mode to the execution confirmed round number display mode, it is possible for the player to execute the jackpot game with peace of mind.

  In the present embodiment, when the jackpot game is started, in order to notify the number of rounds of the jackpot game this time, of the number of rounds displayed as a specific period total round number suggestion display mode, the current jackpot game Although the configuration corresponding to the number of game rounds is changed to the execution confirmed round number display mode, other configurations may be used. For example, at the timing when the jackpot game is started, the execution confirmed round number display is performed. When the display is performed as it is and a predetermined condition (for example, execution of a predetermined operation on the frame button 22 during the jackpot game or the jackpot game reaches the third round during the jackpot game) is established, the specific period total The round number suggestion display mode may be changed to the execution confirmed round number display mode. Thereby, the player can be interested in the effect to grasp the number of execution confirmed rounds even during the big hit game.

  Further, in the present embodiment, an example has been described in which the specific period total round number suggestion display mode is all changed to the execution confirmed round number display mode. However, other configurations may be used, for example, the specific period total round number suggestion display mode. May be changed to the execution confirmed round number display mode, or the specific period total round number suggestion display mode may be changed to the execution confirmed round number display mode at a plurality of timings during the jackpot game. It may be. As a result, the jackpot game can be executed while always having a sense of expectation.

  Next, referring to FIG. 19B to FIG. 20B, the remaining period of the time-saving state (the time-saving state in which the special figure 1 change is executed) (the remaining change period of the special figure 1) is a predetermined condition ( The effect display (battle effect) executed when (remaining 10 seconds) is satisfied will be described. This effect display (battle effect) is an effect for notifying the player that the extended-village mode will end when there is no pending memory in the special figure 2 when the time saving state ends. As described above, this battle effect is executed when the remaining period of the time-saving state is within 10 seconds and the number of reserved special figure 2 is “0”. Then, when a ball enters the second entrance 640 during the battle effect and the reservation memory of the special figure 2 is generated, a battle victory effect for indicating that the extended play mode is continued is executed. (See FIG. 20 (a).) If no ball has entered the second entrance 640 during this battle effect, a battle defeat effect is performed to indicate that the extended play mode will be continued (see FIG. 20 (a)). FIG. 20 (b)). In the present embodiment, when a battle effect is executed, an effect that ultimately defeats the battle is set. This means that the period of the battle effect is set to a period (10 seconds) in which the normal figure change can be changed three or four times, and the probability of the ball entering the second entrance 640 during the battle effect is This is because the probability that the ball does not enter the second entrance 640 during the battle effect is lower. That is, it is only necessary to execute the control for changing the effect content only when a low-probability event occurs, so that the processing load can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, the effect of the battle effect is made different depending on whether or not the special figure 2 is reserved. However, other elements may be included. For example, when the lottery result of the special figure 1 which fluctuates during the working hours is a big hit, a battle victory effect may be executed at a timing when the lottery result of the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed. As a result, a surprising effect can be provided to a player who predicts the winning or losing of the battle effect based only on the content (presence or absence of storage) of the main reserved symbol display area Dm5.

  In the present embodiment, the display mode of the main reserved symbol display area Dm5 is updated at the timing when the reserved storage of the special figure 2 occurs. However, as another configuration, for example, during the battle effect, the display form of the special figure 2 is changed. Even if the suspension storage occurs, the display mode of the main suspension symbol display area Dm5 may not be updated, or the main suspension symbol display area Dm5 may not be displayed when the battle effect is executed. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp that the ball has entered the second entrance 640 during the execution of the battle effect, and to enhance the effect of the battle effect. Can be.

  Also, based on the winning information of the ordinary symbols stored on hold, it is possible to determine whether or not the ordinary symbol is correct, and the content of the battle effect (the opponent, the order of the attack, the type of the attack, etc.) can be changed based on the determination result. It is good to constitute. As a result, it is possible for the player to watch the content of the battle effect. Further, a privilege effect that is executed only when a plurality of special figure 2 reservations are acquired during the battle effect may be provided.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 21 (a), a description will be given of the contents of the effect that is executed when the special figure 2 suspension is acquired up to the upper limit during the special figure 1 time reduction. As shown in FIG. 21A, when the special figure 2 reservation is acquired up to the upper limit, the special figure 2 reservation is stored in the main reserved symbol display area Dm5 to indicate that the upper limit (four) is stored. (The black circles in the figure are four display modes), the main reserved symbol is displayed. Then, a message for congratulating that the special figure 2 reservation has reached the upper limit is displayed in the center of the first display area Dm. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 21 (b), in the first display area Dm, a bonus effect (buzzing effect using a character) irrelevant to the lottery result of each symbol is executed.

  Then, in the first sub-display area Ds1, a character "??" that hides the remaining period of time and short-term is displayed. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know which gaming state the period in which the above-described privilege effect is being executed.

  Here, during the special figure 1 time change, the lottery of the ordinary symbol is repeatedly performed, and the winning of the ordinary symbol is performed, so that the electric accessory 640a is opened and the ball enters the second entrance 640. Thus, a game for acquiring the reserved memory of the second special symbol is executed. While such a game is being executed, the player usually pays the most attention to the result of the lottery of the ordinary symbols, so that the ordinary symbol main symbol Dmc is displayed as the main symbol of the third symbol display device 81 ( When the special figure 2 reservation as shown in FIG. 15 (b) and FIG. 21 (a) is stored up to the upper limit (four), the special figure 2 reservation can no longer be stored. In addition, the player does not have to pay close attention to whether or not the symbol is normally won. Therefore, in the state shown in FIG. 21A, the third symbol corresponding to the ordinary symbol is displayed as the secondary symbol in the second display area Dn3.

  Thus, it is possible to suppress the display of the third symbol corresponding to the symbol that the player does not watch as the main symbol. Further, it is possible to suppress a problem that the main symbol Dmc is displayed in the state of FIG. 21A and the stop display is performed in the display mode indicating the hit.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 22, a description will be given of the effect contents when the first special symbol (special figure 1) executed in the normal gaming state is a small hit. FIG. 22A is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a display screen immediately after the small hitting game is started, and FIG. 22B is a diagram illustrating a specific timing (second variable winning device 650) during the small hitting game. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen at the time of opening the image).

  Here, in the present embodiment, when the small hit game based on the lottery result of the special figure 1 is executed in the normal state, the pseudo main symbol Dmb is variably displayed in the first display area Dm. The pseudo main symbol Dmb is variably displayed so as to indicate the opening timing of the second variable winning device 650 during the small hitting game, and the sub display area Ds is for explaining the game content during the small hitting game. If the symbols (pseudo main symbol Dmb) are aligned, the character "CHANCE" is displayed (see FIG. 22A).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 22 (b), when the pseudo main symbol Dmb is stopped and displayed in a predetermined stop display mode (“444” in FIG. 22 (b)), it is displayed on the lower right side of the first display area Dm. A guidance display mode for guiding the player to the game aiming at the second variable winning device 650 is displayed, and the character "Aim for V" for explaining the content of the game is displayed in the sub display area Ds.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the small hitting game based on the special figure 1 is executed in the normal state, the pseudo main symbol Dmb that is variably displayed based on the opening timing of the second variable winning device 650 is the first symbol. It is displayed in one display area Dm. This makes it seem that the opening operation of the second variable winning device 650 executed a plurality of times during the small hit game is executed based on the variable display of the pseudo main symbol Dmb.

  Also, in the state where the small hit game based on the special figure 1 is executed in the normal state, the main reserved symbol for displaying the number of reserved symbols is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 so as to emphasize the player. Make up. Thereby, based on the fluctuating display of the pseudo main symbol which is not related to each symbol (special figure 1, special figure 2, ordinary figure), the above-mentioned holding symbol display indicating the number of held symbols of each symbol is not changed. It can be hard for the player to notice. In addition, as another configuration, a pseudo reserved symbol display (pseudo reserved main symbol) that is changed based on the variable display of the pseudo main symbol Dmb may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, the pseudo main symbol Dmb also performs a variable display in which the pseudo variable symbol Dmb is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode (for example, a blind eye) indicating a deviation during the small hitting game, at a timing different from the opening timing of the second variable winning device 650. Is done. Thereby, even when the interval between the opening timings of the second variable winning device 650 is wide, the pseudo main symbol Dmb can be continuously displayed in a variable manner. In addition, in the pseudo main symbol Dmb that is stopped and displayed based on the opening timing of the second variable winning device 650, the stop display mode is changed to the opening timing of the corresponding second variable winning device 650 that is advantageous to the player. The timing (open timing at which the ball can pass through the specific area (V winning switch 650e3)) is configured to be different from the timing. For example, the pseudo main symbol Dmb corresponding to the open timing advantageous to the player is stopped. As a display mode, a display mode in which a specific same numeral is stopped, such as “777”, is set. Thereby, the opening timing of the second variable winning device 650 and the degree of advantage of the opening timing can be grasped by the variable display of the pseudo main symbol Dmb executed during the small hitting game. Interest can be given to the effect display contents.

  Next, an error display displayed on the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23A is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a display screen when a right-handed game is played in a normal state in which a left-handed game is executed. As shown in FIG. 23A, in the normal state in which the left-handed game is executed, when it is determined that the right-handed game has been performed, the main symbol displayed in the first display area Dm is covered. Notification display area Dm7 is formed as described above, and the characters "Please return to left-handed" are displayed. This allows the player to correct the game content.

  In the present embodiment, the error display in FIG. 23A indicates that the right-handed game is executed (the ball passes through the through gate 67) during the normal state in which the left-handed game is executed. Although the ball is passed through the through gate 67 immediately after the transition from the time saving state to the normal state, the normal state in which the left-handed game is executed is set as the gaming state. It is preferable that the error display is not executed even if the operation is detected. Specifically, immediately before shifting from the time-saving state to the normal state (immediately before the end of the time-saving state), the fluctuation period of the ordinary symbol that has been started and the electric operation that is executed when the fluctuation (lottery) result is a hit. A predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) during the operation period of the accessory 640a or after the time saving state ends may be set as a grace period during which no error display is performed.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the error display from being performed even if the ball shot into the game area immediately before the time reduction state ends passes through the through gate 67 after the time reduction state ends. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the willingness of the player who has been actively playing the game until immediately before the end of the time reduction state.

  In addition, in the case of using such a configuration, when a ball enters the second entrance 640 during the above-mentioned grace period, it is preferable that an unusual privilege effect is executed. It is preferable to execute a resurrection effect indicating that a state advantageous to the player (rensou mode) has revived. Thereby, the player can be motivated to play the game to the end.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 23B, the display contents displayed during the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a during the time saving state will be described. FIG. 23 (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed during the opening operation of the electric accessory during the time reduction state (during the long opening). In the present embodiment, the right-handed game is continuously performed during the time saving state, so that the ball can be immediately introduced into the second entrance 640 when the electric accessory 640a is in the long open state. The game board 13 is constituted. Further, the electric accessory 640a that is long opened is opened for 3 seconds as the first opening period, then closed for 5 seconds, and then opened again for 3 seconds (second opening period).

  The display screen shown in FIG. 23B is displayed when the ball does not enter the second entrance 640 during the first opening period during the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a (during long opening). Is what is done. In other words, if a right-handed game is normally performed, the first game board 13 is used in spite of using the configuration of the game board 13 in which the ball can surely enter the second entrance 640 during the first opening period. Assuming that a normal right-handed game has not been executed as a case where the ball has not been entered into the second entrance 640 during the opening period, a display for prompting a right-handed game is displayed in the notification display area Dm7. Is displayed.

  In the present embodiment, even if a right-handed game is started after seeing the content displayed in the notification display area Dm7, each period is set so that the ball can enter the second entrance 640 during the second opening period. Is set. Specifically, it is designed such that the period from when the ball is fired in a right-handed game to when the ball reaches the second entrance 640 (electrically powered accessory 640a) is about 2 seconds, The closing period provided between the first opening period (3 seconds) and the second opening period (3 seconds) is set to 5 seconds. Therefore, by performing a right-handed game for three seconds after the start of the closing period, it is possible to cause a ball to enter the second entrance 640.

  In the present embodiment, the first open period and the second open period are set to the same number of seconds, and a unit that measures the elapsed period of the first open period and a unit that measures the elapsed period of the second open period Although the common use is attempted, for example, the second open period may be set longer than the first open period. Thereby, based on the fact that a display for prompting a right-handed shot is displayed in the notification display area Dm7, when a right-handed game is performed, it is possible to more reliably make the ball enter the second entrance 640. it can.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the closing period is set to 5 seconds, but a longer closing time (for example, 30 seconds) may be set. In this case, as a condition for terminating the opening operation of the motorized accessory 640a, if the right-handed game is normally executed, the number of balls that can enter the second entrance 640 during the first opening period ( (For example, one ball) may be set as the termination condition. Thereby, even if the closing period executed during the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a (the closing period executed after the elapse of the first opening period) is lengthened, the player who normally plays the right-handed game can be prevented. Thus, the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a can be ended before the closing period is executed.

<Electrical Configuration in First Embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

  The main control device 110 has an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer, which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built therein. Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control device by the data transmission / reception circuit to instruct the sub-control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction.

  The main control device 110 executes the main processes of the pachinko machine 10 such as the jackpot lottery, the setting of the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 24) for storing various counters for controlling these processes.

  Here, a counter and the like provided in RAM 203 of main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. These counters and the like are used to perform a jackpot lottery, a display setting of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, a lottery of a display result of the second symbol display device 83, and the like. Used in.

  For setting the jackpot lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, selection of the first random number counter C1 used for the lottery of the big hit (and the small hit) and selection of the big hit type (big hit symbol). The first hit type counter C2 used for selecting the stop type, the stop type counter C3 used for selecting the stop type, the small hit type counter C5 used for selecting the small hit type (small hit symbol), and used for selecting the variation pattern And a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting an initial value of the first random number counter C1. In addition, the random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the ordinary symbols (the second symbol display device 83), and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 37), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main processing (see FIG. 53). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. Although details will be described later, the RAM 203 stores the first entrance 64 (left first entrance 64a, right first entrance 64b (hereinafter, referred to as the first entrance 64 when both are shown). )), A special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a in which each counter value is stored for a prize, and a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b in which each counter value is stored for a prize for the second entrance 640. I have. In the present embodiment, the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 are provided with up to four retaining balls, respectively, so that a maximum of eight retaining balls can be stored in total. Therefore, when a ball wins in the first entrance 64 during a period in which a special symbol can be selected by lottery, such as when the special symbol is not being displayed in a fluctuating manner or when a special symbol jackpot is not being played, each counter value becomes a special symbol. When the ball is stored in the 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the second winning opening 640 receives a ball, each counter value is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Thereafter, the respective counter values stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a are moved to the execution area provided in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, and the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner (dynamic display). Setting and control processing for performing the setting are performed. Similarly, each counter value stored in the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b is moved to the execution area provided in the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b, and the second special symbol is variably displayed. Various settings and control processing are executed.

  In the present embodiment, the upper limit of the number of holdings (the number of stored storages) is set to four for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The present invention is not limited to this, and a different value may be set, or only one special symbol may be held.

  On the other hand, during a period in which a special symbol cannot be selected by lottery, such as during a change display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol or during a jackpot game of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the ball enters the first entrance 64 or When the second entrance 640 is won, if the number of reserves for the winning entrance (starting entrance) is less than the upper limit (four in the present embodiment), acquisition of each counter value is not performed. The special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b corresponding to the winning entrance is stored. If the number of reserves for the winning entrance is equal to or more than the upper limit value (four in this embodiment), each counter value or the like is not obtained and the prize ball (five in this embodiment) is not obtained. Prize ball) is treated as an invalid ball paid out to the player.

  In the present embodiment, the upper limit value of the number of reserved balls is four for each of the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640, but is not limited thereto, and is smaller than four (for example, 3) or more than four (for example, eight). Further, a configuration in which no upper limit is provided may be adopted.

  Each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by one in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 299) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 299 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 299). It returns to the structure. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 299, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 53).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is, for example, updated periodically (once every timer interrupt processing in the present embodiment), and the timing at which the ball wins the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. Is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. The value of the random number which is a special symbol jackpot is defined in the first random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is stored in the first random number table. If the value matches the value of the random number which is a jackpot defined in 202a, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot.

  Here, the first random number table 202a will be described. The first winning random number table 202a is a table in which a random number value (determination value) determined to be a winning in each gaming state in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is set. Specifically, the first random number table 202a includes a special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 used for the first special symbol lottery and a special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 used for the second special symbol lottery. In the lottery of the first special symbol, it is determined whether the acquired value of the first random number counter C1 is “0”, and if it is “0”, it is determined that the winning is a big hit. In addition, it is determined whether the value of the first random number counter C1 obtained is “1 to 3”, and if it is “1 to 3”, it is determined that the small hit has occurred.

  On the other hand, in the lottery of the second special symbol, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is “0”, and if it is “0”, it is determined that the winning is a big hit. Further, it is determined whether or not the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is "1 to 299". If the value is "1 to 299", it is determined that the small hit has occurred.

  Here, the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a or the execution area of the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b may be a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol. For example, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is that at the time of the special symbol big hit. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same execution area.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter ranging from 0 to 299. As described above, there is one value of the first random number counter C1 serving as a special symbol big hit, and the random number value “0” is stored in the first random number table 202a as described above. As described above, the total number of random numbers is 300, and the total number of random numbers to be a jackpot is 1, so the probability of a special symbol to be a jackpot is “1/300”. In addition, the value of the first random number counter C1 which is a small hit in the first special symbol is three, and the value of the first random number counter C1 which is a small hit in the second special symbol is 299. The probability of the small hit of the special symbol is “1/100”, and the probability of the small hit of the second special symbol is “299/300”.

  The value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in a range of 0 to 99. When the special symbol lottery result is a big hit, the big hit type is selected based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 and the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 27A). The Rukoto. The details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The stop type selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by one in order within a range of, for example, 0 to 99, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In the present embodiment, the stop type at the time of disengagement displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is selected by the stop type selection counter C3, and is different from the reach symbol as the final stop symbol after reach occurs. Two stop (effect) patterns are selected: a "reach out" where the symbol stops (for example, in the range of 90 to 99) and a "complete out of reach" (for example, in the range of 0 to 89) in which no reach occurs. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (once for each timer interruption process in the present embodiment), and when a ball enters the first entrance 64, the value is stored in the RAM 203. The special symbol 1 is stored in the reserved ball storage area 203a. When a ball enters the second entrance 640, the value is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

  The random number value for determining the special symbol stop type from the value of the stop type selection counter C3 (random number value) is set by a stop type selection table (not shown). It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. In the present embodiment, this table is divided into a table for the normal state and a table for the time saving state, and the range of the random number value set for each type of stop is changed according to the table. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed according to whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the time saving state, or the like.

  The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by one in order within a range of, for example, 0 to 198, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The fluctuation type counter CS1 determines one fluctuation pattern from the set fluctuation pattern selection table. A fluctuation time (dynamic display period) is set in this fluctuation pattern, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 is also a counter that determines the fluctuation time. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 53) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. The variation pattern table 202d (see FIGS. 29 and 30) storing a random value that determines one symbol variation time from the value of the variation type counter CS1 (random value) is stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. It is provided within.

  A plurality of data tables for selecting a variation pattern are defined in the variation pattern table 202d (see FIGS. 29 and 30). In the variation pattern table 202d, a plurality of variation pattern tables respectively corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol are set, and for each of the variation patterns, the variation pattern corresponding to the game state or the result of the determination as to whether the game is valid or not. The table is set. Details of each variation pattern table will be described later with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30.

  The second random number counter C4 is configured as, for example, a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 239 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In this embodiment, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically at each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37), and the ball passes through the right or left normal starting port (through gate) 67. This is acquired when it is detected, and is stored in the general-purpose execution area of the RAM 203.

  Then, the value of the random number, which is a normal symbol hit, is defined in the second random number table 202c (see FIG. 26 (c)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second random number counter C4 Is equal to the winning random number specified in the second winning random number table 202c, it is determined that the winning is a normal symbol (second symbol). For example, in the second winning random number table 202c, there are 12 random numbers which are usually hits of symbols, and the range is "0 to 11". The total number of random numbers that can be obtained by the second random number counter C4 is 240, and the total number of random numbers that can be won is 12, so the probability of winning a symbol is usually “12/240 (1/20) ".

  Further, in the present embodiment, the normal state and the time reduction state can be set as the game state. According to the game state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol and the second symbol in the case where the normal symbol is hit are obtained. The opening time of the motorized accessory 640a attached to the entrance 640 is made different, so that the ball can easily enter the second entrance 640 in the time reduction state than in the normal state. Thereby, when the game state is the normal state, a game (left-handed game) aiming at the first entrance 64 (the left first entrance 64a) is performed, and when the game state is the time reduction state, A game (right-handed game) aiming at the second entrance 640 can be performed.

  In the normal state, when the ball passes through the through gate (normal ball entrance) 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is obtained, and the second symbol display device 83 displays the variation of the ordinary symbol for 4 seconds. You. If the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “0 to 11”, it is determined that the winning has been achieved, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 has been completed, the stop symbol (the second symbol) ), The symbol of “」 ”is illuminated and displayed, and the electric accessory 640a is opened (short open) for“ 0.1 seconds × 2 times ”. On the other hand, when the ball passes through the through gate (normal entrance) 67 in the time saving state, the fluctuation display of the ordinary symbol is executed for 3 seconds on the second symbol display device 83, and the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 per second is acquired. Is in the range of "0 to 11", it is determined that the winning has been achieved, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, a symbol "O" is displayed as a stopped symbol (second symbol) while being lit. The electric accessory 640a is opened (long open) for "3 seconds × 2 times". In the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the opening time and the number of times of opening the ordinary electric accessory may be appropriately changed within a range that does not impair the game performance.

  In the present embodiment, although the detailed description will be given later, the timing at which the value of the first random number counter C4 is obtained (the timing at which the normal symbol lottery is executed) and the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 Is completed (the timing at which the operation of the electric accessory 640a is set), so that the electric accessory 640a is opened long only when both are in the time saving state. For example, if the timing at which the value of the first random number counter C4 is obtained (the timing at which the normal symbol lottery is executed) is a time saving state, the timing at which the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed Even if (the timing at which the operation of the electric accessory 640a is set) is in the normal state, the electric accessory 640a may be configured to be long opened. Even if the timing at which the value of the first random number counter C4 is acquired (the timing at which the normal symbol lottery is executed) is in the normal state, the timing when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends (the electric If the timing when the operation of the accessory 640a is set) is a time saving state, the electric accessory 640a may be configured to be long opened.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once every timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 37). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see 53).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 performs a jackpot lottery and a display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the values of the counters and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 8, the description will be continued. The RAM 203 includes, in addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 24, a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, I / Os, and the like. And a work area (work area) in which the value is stored.

  The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is cut off (including when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by turning off the power, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before the power was shut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is turned off by a main process (see FIG. 53), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 52). The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When the input is made, the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 51) as the processing at the time of the power failure is immediately executed.

  Next, the contents of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 25A is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating the contents of the ROM 202 in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the present embodiment. The ROM 202 is provided with at least a first hit random number table 202a, a first hit type selection table 202b, a second hit random number table 202c, a variation pattern table 202d, and a small hit type selection table 202e.

  Next, the first random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIGS. As shown in FIG. 26A, the first random number table 202a includes a special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 used for the first special symbol lottery and a special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 used for the second special symbol lottery. It is prescribed.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 26B, the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 is used for entering the first entrance 64 (left first entrance 64a, right first entrance 64b). 7 is a table in which random numbers (judgment values) determined to be hits are set in the first special symbol lottery. In the lottery of the first special symbol, it is determined whether or not the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is “0”. If the value is “0”, it is determined that a big hit has occurred. Further, it is determined whether or not the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is “1 to 3”, and if it is “1 to 3”, it is determined that the small hit is made. In addition, when it is determined that the value is “4 to 299”, it is determined that the value is out of range.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 26 (c), the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 stores a random number value (judgment value) determined to be a hit in the second special symbol lottery based on the ball entering the second entrance 640. ) Is a set table. In the lottery of the second special symbol, it is determined whether or not the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is “0”. If the value is “0”, it is determined that it is a big hit. Further, it is determined whether or not the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is “1 to 299”. If the value is “1 to 299”, it is determined that the small hit is made.

  The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 26 (d)) is a data table in which hit determination values of ordinary symbols are stored. As shown in FIG. 26 (d), regardless of the state of the gaming machine, when the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the second random number counter buffer is in the range of 0 to 11, the normal symbol hit is determined. Is determined.

  When it is determined that the symbol is a normal symbol, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, a symbol of “」 ”is displayed as a stopped symbol (second symbol), and the electric accessory is displayed. 640a is opened for a predetermined time.

  Here, the electric accessory 640a in the present embodiment operates in the front-rear direction of the game board 13 by the operation of the solenoid (not shown, one of the solenoids 209z) as described above with reference to FIG. The electric accessory 640a performs a forward operation (opening operation) to guide the ball to enter the second entrance 640. On the other hand, by performing the retreating operation (closing operation) backward, the ball does not guide the ball to the second entrance 640 (does not enter the ball).

  Although details will be described later, the electric accessory 640a in the present embodiment is opened for three seconds again after a three-second opening period (first opening period) elapses during the time-saving state, after a five-second closing period. An opening operation (long opening) in which a period (second opening period) is set is executed, and when not in the time reduction state (during the normal state), after an opening period (first opening period) of 0.1 second elapses, After a closing period of 0.1 second, an opening operation (short opening) in which an opening period (second opening period) of 0.1 second is set again is executed. Thereby, it is possible to suppress a game in which a ball is attempted to enter the second entrance 640 even though the time saving state is not being set (the normal state is being set).

  The electric accessory 640a according to the present embodiment is designed such that when one ball enters the second entrance 640, the condition for terminating the opening operation is satisfied, and the opening operation is terminated. Thus, it is possible to suppress a plurality of balls from entering the second entrance 640 by one opening operation of the electric accessory 640a. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, as described with reference to FIGS. 2 to 4, since the configuration is such that the ball flowing down the flow path that can enter the second ball entrance 640 is regulated, Since a situation in which a plurality of balls enter the second ball entrance 640 at one time can be suppressed, a plurality of balls enter the second ball entrance 640 by one opening operation of the electric accessory 640a. Balling can be further suppressed.

  Next, the details of the first hit type selection table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 27A to 27C are schematic diagrams schematically showing the contents of the first hit type selection table 202b.

  The first hit type selection table 202b indicates that when the big hit of the first special symbol is won or the small hit of the first special symbol is won, the ball is in the specific area (V winning switch 650e3 (FIG. 5)), a special symbol 1 jackpot selection table 202b1 for selecting a jackpot type when passing through, and a win in the second special symbol jackpot or a small jackpot in the second special symbol, 27 has a special symbol 2 big hit selection table 202b2 for selecting a big hit type when the ball passes through a specific area (V winning switch 650e3 (see FIG. 5)) during the small hit game. a)).

  As shown in FIG. 27B, at the time of the big hit of the first special symbol, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “0 to 79”, the big hit A (7R short hit big hit) is selected, and “580” In the case of "-99", the big hit D (16R short time no big hit) is selected. In addition, at the time of the small hit of the first special symbol, the big hit type is selected corresponding to the small hit type described later. Specifically, when the small hit type is the small hit A, the big hit C (7R short hit big hit) is selected, and when the small hit B is the big hit D (2R short hit big hit) is selected.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 27C, at the time of the big hit of the second special symbol, regardless of the value of the first hit type counter C2 (when the value is “0 to 99”), the big hit E (15R time-saving big hit) ) Is selected. Also, at the time of the small hit of the second special symbol, the big hit type is selected corresponding to the small hit type described later. Specifically, if the small hit type is small hit C, the big hit F (5R short hit big hit) is selected, if the small hit D is the big hit G (10R short hit big hit) is selected, and if the small hit E is Is a big hit E (15R hour big hit).

  In the present embodiment, in the above-described respective jackpot types, when “time-saving jackpot” is selected, a time-saving state of “one time-saving number of times” is provided after the end of the jackpot game. However, the number of time savings given after the end of the jackpot game is not limited to this, and may be set to two or more times, or different time saving states are selected based on the selected jackpot type. You may do so. Alternatively, a different number of time saving states may be selected based on the gaming state set at the time of winning the selected jackpot type and the jackpot (the ball passes through the specific area), or “ Based on the number of times "big hits" are successively selected, a different number of time saving states may be selected based on the big hit type selected at the time of the big hit winning. With this configuration, in addition to the content of the jackpot game (the number of rounds of the jackpot game, etc.), it is possible to make the privilege content (number of times of reduced working hours) given after the end of the jackpot game different. It is possible to make the player ambitiously playing the game while expecting what kind of privilege (time saving state) will be given after the end of the big hit game.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the time saving end condition for ending the time saving state is set by performing the change of the special symbol for a preset number of time saving times, but the time saving end condition different from the present embodiment is set. May be set. For example, the number of times of the change of the first special symbol and the number of times of the change of the second special symbol may be measured, and different end conditions may be set for the change of each special symbol. Specifically, the time saving end condition is that the number of times of change of the first special symbol is four or the number of times of change of the second special symbol is one. The fact that the total number of times of change with the two special symbols is four, or that the number of times of change of the second special symbol is one may be set as the time saving end condition.

  In addition, each time a special symbol is changed, a lottery may be performed to determine whether or not to end the time reduction state, and the time reduction state may be ended based on the result of the lottery. The time-saving state may be ended when the stop display is performed with the symbol of. With this configuration, it is possible to set the timing at which the time reduction state ends in a complicated manner, and to allow a player who is in a time reduction game to perform a game while expecting the time reduction state to continue for a long time. Can be. In this case, at least a part of the period in which the time reduction does not end may be notified to the player. Thereby, it is possible to make the player understand a part of the period in which the working hours are not ended, and it is possible to make the player play the game with peace of mind during that period.

  Next, the contents of the small hit type selection table 202e will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 28A to 28C are schematic diagrams schematically showing the contents of the small hit type selection table 202e.

  The small hit type selection table 202e includes a special symbol 1 small hit selection table 202e1 for selecting a small hit type when the small hit of the first special symbol is won, and a special winning small hit selection table 202e1 for the second special symbol. There is a special symbol 2 small hit selection table 202e2 for selecting a small hit type (see FIG. 28 (a)).

  As shown in FIG. 28B, at the time of winning the small hit of the first special symbol, when the value of the small hit type counter C5 is “0 to 10”, the small hit A (V passing possible) is selected, and “ In the case of "11 to 99", the small hit B (V passing impossible) is selected.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 28 (c), at the time of the small hit winning of the second special symbol, if the value of the small hit type counter C5 is "0 to 9", the small hit C (V passing possible) is selected, In the case of "10 to 24", the small hit D (V passable) is selected, and in the case of "25 to 99", the small hit E (V passable) is selected.

  In the present embodiment, the operations of the V inlet solenoid 209a and the flow path solenoid 209c of the second variable winning device 650 are set according to the small hit type. Specifically, in the small hit game with the small hits A and C to E, the flow path solenoid 209c of the second variable winning device 650 operates, and the ball can enter the special discharge flow path 650e2. I have. On the other hand, in the small hit game with the small hit B, the flow path solenoid 209c of the second variable winning device 650 is not operated. The ball cannot enter the special discharge channel 650e2. That is, the small hits A and C to E pass the ball to the specific area (the V winning switch 650e3), and the small hits are the small hits to which the big hit can be given, and the small hits B are the small hits to which the big hit is not given. .

  Further, in the small hit game by the small hits A and B (small hit type selected by the small hit winning of the first special symbol), the V inlet solenoid 209a operates so that the opening / closing door 650f is opened for a short period (FIG. 10). In the small hit game with small hits C to E (small hit type selected by the small hit winning of the second special symbol), the V inlet solenoid 209a operates so that the opening / closing door 650f is opened for a long period of time (FIG. 11). That is, the small hits A and B are small hits in which the ball is unlikely to enter the second variable winning device 650 during the small hit game, and the small hits C to E are the second variable winning devices 650 during the small hit game. It is a small hit where the ball easily enters.

  In this control example, the type of the jackpot to be given thereafter is determined according to the type of the small hit, and the big hit given after the small hit A becomes the big hit C (7R short hit big hit) and the big hit B The jackpot given afterwards is a jackpot D (2R short jackpot), the jackpot given after the small jackpot C is a jackpot F (5R short jackpot), and the jackpot given after the small jackpot D is a jackpot G (10R). It is configured so that the big hit is given after the small hit E and the big hit is given as the big hit E (15R time saving big hit).

  In the present control example, the type of the jackpot to be given thereafter is determined according to the type of the small hit. However, as another specification, the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit. Also, the jackpot type is determined by the jackpot selection table (only the jackpot right is acquired), and in the subsequent small jackpot game, the jackpot for which the right has been acquired is executed by passing the ball through the V winning switch 650e3. You may. By doing so, the player can select the small hit that passes through the V winning switch 650e3, and the interest of the game can be improved. Also, a configuration may be adopted in which a predetermined lottery is executed based on the fact that the ball has passed through the specific area (V winning switch 650e3) during the small hit game, and the big hit type is determined based on the lottery result. Good. Thereby, the content of the jackpot game to be executed can be made different depending on the timing at which the ball passes through the specific area, so that the player is willing to play the small jackpot game, and the interest of the game can be improved. it can.

  Next, the contents of the variation pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIGS. The variation pattern table 202d is a data table used to determine the display mode (variation time) of the variation pattern, and the display mode is defined for each value of the variation type counter CS1. In the variation pattern table 202d, a plurality of different tables corresponding to types of special symbols, lottery results, and game states are defined.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 29A, the special figure 1 big hit variation pattern table 202d1, the special figure 1 departure (normal) change pattern table 202d2, and the special figure 1 small hit variation pattern table 202d3 And at least a special pattern 1 time reduction variation pattern table 202d4 and a special pattern 2 variation pattern table 202d5.

  First, with reference to FIG. 29B, the special figure 1 big hit variation pattern table 202d will be described. The special pattern 1 big hit change pattern table 202d1 selects a change pattern (change time) when the big hit is won from the change patterns (change time) of the first special symbol (special figure 1) in the normal state. And a random number value (counter value of the variation type counter value CS1) for determining the type (variation time) of the variation pattern.

  Specifically, when the jackpot is determined as the stop type, the variation pattern of the normal reach (30 seconds) is associated with the range of “0 to 50” as the value of the variation type counter CS1, and the variation pattern of “51 to 179” is set. A variation pattern of super reach (60 seconds) is associated with the range, and a variation pattern of various special reach (90 seconds) is associated with the range of “180 to 198”.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 29 (c), the contents of the (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 for the special figure 1 will be described. The special pattern 1 deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 indicates that the lottery result of the special figure 1 is out of the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol (special figure 1) in the normal state. A random number value (counter value of the fluctuation type counter value CS1) for determining the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) in is defined.

  Specifically, when complete departure is determined as the stop type, a short departure (7 seconds) fluctuation pattern is associated with the range of “0 to 98” as the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. A variation pattern of a long time (10 seconds) is associated with the range of “198”. In addition, when the first special symbol is removed by lottery and the out-of-reach is determined as the stop type, various values of the normal reach (30 seconds) are associated with the range of “0 to 149” as the value of the variation type counter CS1. , “150 to 197”, various super reach (60 seconds) are associated, and “198” is associated with various special reach (90 seconds).

  Next, the contents of the special figure 1 small hit variation pattern table 202d3 will be described with reference to FIG. 29 (d). The special figure 1 small hit variation pattern table 202d3 is the first special symbol ( A random value (counter value of the variation type counter value CS1) for determining the variation pattern (variation time) when the lottery result of the special figure 1 is a small hit among the variation pattern (variation time) of the special figure 1) ) Is specified.

  Specifically, when the small hit is determined as the stop type, the type of the small hit (small hit A, small hit B) and various types of super reach (60 seconds) regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1. Are associated.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, various fluctuation patterns are selected corresponding to each stop type based on the lottery result of the first special symbol. Is set so that a long (for example, 90 seconds) fluctuation pattern is easily selected when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit. So, if the player is displayed continuously fluctuating for a long time, may he win the jackpot? You will play while expecting. Therefore, the game result can be predicted by the set period length of the fluctuation pattern, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 30A, the contents of the special figure 1 time reduction variation pattern table 202d4 will be described. The special pattern 1 time-saving variation pattern table 202d42 has a random number value (counter value of the variation type counter value CS1) for determining the variation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol (special figure 1) in the time-saving state. Stipulated.

  Specifically, a variation pattern for 150 seconds is associated with the determined stop type and the value of the variation type counter CS1.

  FIG. 30B is a diagram showing the contents of the special figure 2 variation pattern table 202d5. The variation pattern table 202d5 for special figure 2 defines a random value for determining the variation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol (special figure 2) in the normal state and the time saving state.

  Specifically, if the determined stop type is a big hit, a short and big hit (7 seconds) is set irrespective of the value of the change type counter CS1, and if the determined stop type is a small hit, the change type is Irrespective of the value of the counter CS1, the short hit (2 seconds) is associated.

  Next, the contents of the RAM 203 in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. As shown in FIG. 25B, the RAM 203 has a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d, and a special symbol. 2 reserved ball number counter 203e, ordinary symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, time reduction counter 203g, big hit start flag 203h, big hit flag 203i, small hit start flag 203j, small hit flag 203k, V passing big hit type storage area 203m , V flag 203n, storage release flag 203p, release counter 203qa, medium time saving flag 203q, and other memory area 203z.

  The special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area), and each of these areas has a random number counter per first. Each value of C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the small hit type counter C5 is stored.

  More specifically, at the timing when the ball enters the first entrance 64 (start winning prize), each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 and C5 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in four holdings. Among the vacant areas of the areas (reserved first area to reserved fourth area), the areas are stored in ascending order of the area numbers (first to fourth). That is, the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the area having the smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when a special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is transferred to the execution area. It is shifted (moved), and a determination such as a lottery of a special symbol is made based on each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the execution area.

  When data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process of packing the winning data stored in the other reserved areas (the reserved second area to the reserved fourth area) into the reserved area having the smaller area number (the reserved first area to the reserved third area). Done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, data is shifted only for reserved areas (reserved second area to reserved fourth area) in which winning data is stored.

  The special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b has one execution area and four reserved areas, similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. In the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, each counter value acquired based on the winning winning in the second ball entrance 640 is stored. The method of storing the counter value and the like are the same as those in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Like the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b, the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). Area). Each of these areas stores a second random number counter C4.

  More specifically, at the timing when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the value of the counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is available in four reserved areas (the first reserved area to the fourth reserved area). Of the areas that are present, the areas are stored in ascending order of area number (first to fourth). That is, similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, in the main control device 110, when the lottery for the ordinary symbol is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the ordinary symbol retaining ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( Is moved), and a determination such as a lottery for a normal symbol is made based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area.

  When the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty, so that the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, A shift process is performed in which the winning data stored in the other reserved areas is packed into the reserved area having the smaller area number. The data shift is also performed only for the reserved area in which the winning data is stored.

  The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is a variable display (third symbol) of a special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the ball entering the first entrance 64 (start winning). This is a counter for counting the number of reserved balls (the number of times of standby) of the variable display performed on the display device 81 up to four times. The initial value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first entrance 64 and the number of retained balls in the variable display increases, the counter value increases to a maximum value of 4. It is incremented by one (see S704 in FIG. 43). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time a new special symbol change display is executed (see S210 in FIG. 38).

  The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times N1 of the variable display in the first special symbol is changed) is notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by a reserved ball number command (see S211 in FIG. 38). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 each time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is changed.

  Each time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is changed, the sound ramp control device 113 holds the variable display retained by the main control device 110 by the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110. The value of the number of balls itself can be obtained. As a result, the number of retained balls in the variable display, which is managed by the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113, is transmitted to the main control device 110 by the influence of noise or the like. Even in the case where the number of balls is deviated from the actual number of retained balls displayed in the fluctuation display, the deviation can be corrected by a next received ball number command.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and displays the reserved ball number for notifying the display control device 114 of the reserved ball number every time the reserved ball number changes. Send the ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball count symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball count notified by the display reserved ball count command.

  The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is a variable display (third symbol) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry into the second entrance 640 (start winning). This is a counter for counting the number of reserved balls (the number of times of standby) of the variable display performed on the display device 81 up to four times. The initial value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the second entrance 640 and the number of retained balls in the variable display increases, the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e increases to a maximum value of 4. It is incremented by one (see S710 in FIG. 43). On the other hand, the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 each time a new special symbol change display is executed (see S205 in FIG. 38). The value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command, similarly to the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d.

  The ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203f counts up to four times the number of waiting balls (the number of standbys) of the variable display of the ordinary symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball through the through gate 67. It is a counter that counts up to. The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the through gate 67 and the number of retained balls of the variable display increases, one is added to the maximum value of 4 ( See S1104 in FIG. 47). On the other hand, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is decremented by one each time a new variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is executed (see S905 in FIG. 45).

  When the ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (the number of times M of the variable display in the normal symbol is held) is less than 4, the value of the second random number counter C4 is obtained. The acquired data is stored in the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203c (S1105 in FIG. 47). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the ordinary symbol retaining ball storage area 203c (S1103 in FIG. 47: No) ).

  The time reduction counter 203g is a counter for counting the remaining time reduction period (the number of times the special symbol fluctuates) in the normal symbol time reduction state (time reduction state). At the time reduction counter 203g, 1 is set at the end of the big hit game in which the big hit type is other than "big hit B, D" (that is, "big hit A, C, EG") (see S1815 in FIG. 54). . That is, in this embodiment, when the time saving state is given after the big hit game, one time saving state is given.

  The big hit start flag 203h is a flag used to determine whether it is a big hit start timing. The jackpot start flag 203h is set to ON when the lottery result is a jackpot in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38) (see S219 in FIG. 38), and the start timing of the jackpot in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 54). Is determined (see S1801 in FIG. 54), and is set to OFF when it is determined that the timing is the jackpot start timing in the jackpot control process (see S1802 in FIG. 54). Thereby, it is possible to execute the processing according to the big hit start timing. Although not shown in each of the above control examples, the jackpot start timing is similarly determined.

  The big hit flag 203i is a flag used to determine whether or not a big hit is being performed, that is, whether or not a big hit game is being executed. Like the big hit start flag 203h, the big hit flag 203i is turned on when the lottery result is a big hit in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 38) (see S219 in FIG. 38). Then, in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 54), it is referred to determine whether or not a jackpot is in progress (see S1805 in FIG. 54), and in the jackpot control process, it is determined that it is the timing for ending the jackpot. In this case, it is set to off (see S1813 in FIG. 54).

  The small hit start flag 203j is a flag used to determine whether or not it is a small hit start timing. The small hit start flag 203j is set to ON in a small hit start setting process (see FIG. 42) executed when the lottery result is determined to be a small hit in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 38). (See S610 in FIG. 42). Then, it is referred to in the small hit control process (see FIG. 55) to determine whether or not it is the small hit start timing (see S1901 in FIG. 55), and the small hit control process is the small hit start timing. Is set to off (see S1902 in FIG. 55).

  The small hitting flag 203k is a flag used to determine whether a small hitting is being performed, that is, whether a small hitting game is being executed. The small hitting flag 203k is set to ON in the small hitting start setting process (see FIG. 42), similarly to the small hitting start flag 203j described above (see S610 in FIG. 42). Then, in the small hit control process (see FIG. 55), it is referred to determine whether or not a small hit is occurring (S1906 in FIG. 55), and in the small hit control process, it is determined that it is the end timing of the small hit. In this case, it is set to off (S1911 in FIG. 55).

  The big hit type storage area 203m at the time of passing V is an area for storing a big hit type corresponding to the small hit type of the small hit when the small hit is won. The type of the jackpot to be executed based on passing through is stored. In the small hit start setting process (see FIG. 42), the big hit type corresponding to the winning small hit type is set (see S608 in FIG. 42), and the V passing process (see FIG. 50) is set in the small hit start setting process (see FIG. 42). ), The set jackpot type is read (see S1401 in FIG. 50), and the corresponding V flag is set to ON (see S1401 in FIG. 50).

  The V flag 203n is a flag for storing that the ball has passed the V winning switch 650e3 of the second variable winning device 650, and sets the big hit type based on the value of the V flag 203n at the end of the small hitting game. Things. The V flag 203n is set based on the value of the big hit type at the time of V passing in the V passing process (see FIG. 50) (S1402 in FIG. 50), and is referred to in the small hit ending process (S2003 and S2004 in FIG. 56). Thereafter, it is set to off (S2006 in FIG. 56).

  The storage release flag 203p is a flag used to indicate a period during which the storage valve 750a of the storage device 750 provided in the pachinko machine 10 is released (opened), and when set to ON, the storage of the storage device 750 is performed. When the state is released and set to off, the storage device 750 enters the storage state. This storage release flag 203p is set to ON (S1801 in FIG. 54) when it is determined in the big hit control process (see FIG. 54) that it is the start timing of the big hit (S1804 in FIG. 54), and the storage device is set. It is referred to in the control process (see FIG. 58) (see S2202 in FIG. 58), and is set to off when the value of the release counter 203Pa reaches the upper limit (25000) (see S2205 in FIG. 58). S2208). That is, in the present embodiment, the storage device 750 is released (the storage valve 750a is opened) at the timing when the big hit game is started, and the storage device 750 is brought into the storage state after a predetermined period (10 seconds) has elapsed (the storage valve). 750a is closed). Thereby, the privilege given to the player when the big hit is won can be increased.

  Note that a configuration other than the present embodiment may be used as a configuration for changing the state (storage state, release state) of the storage device 750. For example, a jackpot for shifting the storage device 750 to the release state, and a storage device 750 May be set according to the selected jackpot type, or a plurality of winning ports (for example, the first specific winning port 65 and the second specific winning port 650) may be set in advance. In the case where a jackpot game in which opening operations are performed in the order described above is executed, the storage device 750 may be shifted to a release state at a timing when a specific winning opening is opened.

  Further, in the configuration in which the storage device 750 is shifted from the release state to the storage state (the termination condition of the release state), in the present embodiment, the configuration in which the release state is ended when 10 seconds elapse after the transition to the release state. Even if a ball is not stored in the storage device 750, the ball can pass through the storage device 750, but the period during which the storage device is released is shortened (for example, 0.5 seconds). Only the stored balls may be allowed to pass through the storage device 750. This allows the player to enthusiastically play a game to cause the storage device 750 to store a ball before the release condition (big hit) of the storage device 750 is satisfied.

  The release counter 203pa is a counter for measuring a period during which the storage valve 750a of the storage device 750 is released (opened). This release counter 203pa is set to “1” when it is determined in the storage device control process (see FIG. 58) that the storage release flag 203p has been set to ON (see S2202 in FIG. 58) (see FIG. 58). Thereafter, every time the storage device control process is executed, the value is incremented by 1 (see S2206 in FIG. 58). Then, it is determined whether the value of the counter has reached “25000” (see 2205 in FIG. 58), and based on the determination result, the variable operation of the storage valve 750a is controlled, and the storage valve 750a is variably controlled to the closed state. Then, the value of the release counter 203Pa is set to “0” (see S2209 in FIG. 58).

  The time saving medium hit flag 203q is a flag for indicating in which gaming state the lottery of the ordinary symbol whose result of the lottery is a hit (general figure lottery) is executed. When the lottery is executed during the time saving state, Set to on. The time saving medium hit flag 203q is referred to when setting the opening pattern of the electric accessory 640a that is executed based on the winning of the ordinary drawing lottery.

  The other memory area 203z is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110.

  Returning to FIG. 8, the description will be continued. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a large opening solenoid for closing or opening the first specific winning opening 65a, A solenoid 209 composed of a solenoid or the like for driving the electric accessory is connected, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205.

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), and a RAM erase switch (122 in FIG. 7) described later provided in the power supply device 115. Various processes are executed based on signals output from various switches 208 and a RAM erasure signal SG2 output from a RAM erasure switch (122 in FIG. 7) circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loaned balls. The MPU 211 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 212 storing a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I / O and the like are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similarly to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 51) as a process during a power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize ball. The winning ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the sphere launch unit 112a so that the launching strength of the sphere according to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when the sphere control is instructed by the main control device 110. The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown). The launching solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation handle 51b is turned off (not operated) on the condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off. The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation of the 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs a sound from a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, and outputs and changes the lighting and extinguishing of a lamp display device 227 (such as a decoration lamp 227a, a transmission lamp 227b, and other lamps 227c). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as the display effect (variable display). The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  The input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225.

  The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22 and, when the player operates the frame button 22, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or performs super-reach. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect content, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the third image display device 81 displays a back image corresponding to the changed stage. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and controls display of an error command including the type of the error. Transmit to device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

  Next, details of the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 31A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 31A, the ROM 222 has at least a fluctuation pattern selection table 222a and an effect state selection table 222b.

  The variation pattern selection table 222a indicates that the sound ramp control device 113 is configured based on the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110 and that the rough variation content (variation time, variation type (reach, deviation, etc.) indicated by the variation pattern command is used. ) Is used to determine a more detailed variation. As a result, various variations can be determined. Here, one variation mode among a plurality of types is determined by lottery for the rough variation content instructed from main controller 110.

  The effect state selection table 222b is a table for selecting an effect state for setting a display mode of an effect image (third symbol image, reserved symbol image, background image, etc.) displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the state of establishment of various flags, and the lottery results of special symbols and ordinary symbols, any one of the six rendering states is selected.

  Here, the contents of the effect state selection table 222b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the effect state selection table 222b. As shown in FIG. 32 (a), the effect state selection table 222b indicates that the extended state flag 223i, the ordinary figure valid flag 223q, the pseudo effect flag 223r, and the special 2 change flag 223s are established (on or off). Is set to any one of the effect states “1” to “6”.

  Specifically, if the pseudo-effect flag 223r is also set to off in a state where the extended-mode flag 223i is set to off, the effect state "1" is selected. On the other hand, when the pseudo effect flag 223r is set to ON, the effect state “2” is selected. In addition, in the state where the extended-village flag 223i is set to ON and the general map valid flag 223q is set to OFF, if the special figure 2 change flag 223s is set to OFF, the effect state “3” is set. Selected. On the other hand, when the special figure 2 change flag 223s is set to ON, the effect state “4” is selected. Then, when the extended-village flag 223i is set to ON and the general-purpose-valid flag 223q is set to ON, the effect state “5” is selected. In the state where the effect state “5” is selected, the fluctuation stop timing of the executed first special symbol (special figure 1) and the fluctuation stop timing of the ordinary symbol (general figure) are set at a predetermined interval (special figure). In the case where the fluctuation stop timing of the ordinary figure is earlier than the fluctuation stop timing of No. 1 and each fluctuation stop timing is within 2 seconds), the effect state “6” is selected.

  Here, the relationship between the effect state selected by the effect state selection table 222b and the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 (b) is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between each effect state selected by the effect state selection table 222b and the third symbol and the reserved symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, not only the above-described third symbol and the reserved symbol, but also various effect images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are displayed in the set effect state. However, the detailed description is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 32B, a third symbol (main symbol) displayed in the first display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 according to the rendering state selected by the rendering state selection table 222b (see FIG. 9). And a symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol, ordinary symbol) corresponding to the main reserved symbol (see FIG. 9) displayed in the first sub-display area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. Stipulated. In this manner, the pachinko machine 10 having a complicated game performance is made by changing the symbols (the first special symbol, the second special symbol, the ordinary symbol) corresponding to the main symbol and the main reserved symbol depending on the effect state. Just letting the player know the symbol and the main reserved symbol can inform the result of the main game in an easily understandable manner.

  More specifically, when the effect state “1” is selected, the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol (special symbol 1) becomes the main symbol, and the reserved symbol for indicating the number of reserved symbols of the special symbol 1 is stored. The symbol becomes the main reserved symbol and is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 9). The effect state “1” is selected when the gaming state is the normal state in which the left-handed game is being executed.

  Next, when the effect state “2” is selected, a pseudo symbol for effect that does not correspond to any of the symbols (special figure 1, special figure 2, ordinary figure) is the main symbol (pseudo main symbol Dmb). The main symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 so as not to display any symbol on the main symbol (see FIG. 22B). The effect state “2” is selected when the gaming state is the normal state and the small hitting game of Tokuju 1 is executed.

  The pseudo main symbol Dmb displayed as the main symbol when the effect state “2” is selected is a symbol variation display (see FIG. 22A) and a stop display (FIG. 22), like the other main symbols. (B)) is executed, and the pseudo main symbol Dmb is determined based on the timing at which the second specific winning opening 650a of the second variable winning device 650 is opened in the small hit game of Tokuzu 1 The display is controlled so as to be stopped and displayed in the display mode (the same symbol is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 22B)), whereby the pseudo main symbol Dmb is stopped and displayed to the player. The opening timing of the second specific winning opening 650a during the hit game can be notified, and the privilege of opening the second specific winning opening 650a as a result of the fluctuation (lottery) of the pseudo main symbol Dmb is provided. It is possible to think.

  In addition, the number of times the pseudo main symbol Dmb is fluctuated and displayed is set to be at least larger than the number of times the second specific winning opening 650a is opened during the small hit game, and corresponds to the opening timing of the second specific winning opening 650a. The fluctuating display of the pseudo main symbol Dmb which is not displayed is controlled so as to be stopped and displayed in a display mode other than a predetermined display mode (for example, a mode in which non-identical symbols are stopped and displayed (so-called loose eyes)). ing. Thereby, regardless of the opening timing of the second specific winning opening 650a during the small hit game, the pseudo main symbol Dmb can be constantly displayed in a variably manner, and the effect can be enhanced.

  Further, when the effect state “2” is selected, the main reserved symbol is not displayed, so that it is difficult for the player to grasp the fluctuation of the pseudo main symbol Dmb and the increase / decrease relationship of the reserved symbol. That is, since the pseudo main symbol Dmb is not a symbol corresponding to each symbol (special figure 1, special figure 2, ordinary figure) actually held and stored, when the pseudo main symbol Dmb starts to be changed and displayed. The number of any of the reserved symbols (special figure 1 reserved symbol, special figure 2 reserved symbol, general figure reserved symbol) does not increase or decrease. Therefore, in the effect state “2” in which the pseudo main symbol Dmb is variably displayed, any of the reserved symbols (the special symbol 1 reserved symbol, the special symbol 2 reserved symbol, and the ordinary symbol reserved symbol) are displayed as the main reserved symbol. Then, when the main symbol starts to fluctuate, the main reserved symbol does not decrease, and a situation occurs in which the player feels strange. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the effect state “2” is selected, the main hold symbol is not displayed, so that the above-described situation can be prevented from occurring.

  In the present embodiment, when the effect state “2” is selected, the main reserved symbol is configured not to be displayed. However, other configurations may be used. For example, a pseudo main symbol is used. A pseudo main reserved symbol corresponding to Dmb may be displayed. In this case, the number of pseudo main reserved symbols may be increased or decreased in accordance with the fluctuation display of the pseudo main symbol Dmb. Thereby, the fluctuation display of the pseudo main symbol can be executed without giving a sense of strangeness to the player.

  Further, in the case of displaying the pseudo main reserved symbols, the number of pseudo main reserved symbols to be displayed and the display mode may be set based on the type of the small hit game to be executed. With this configuration, the content of the current small hit game is predicted to the player by the pseudo main hold symbol displayed as the main hold symbol at the timing when the small hit game in which the effect state “2” is selected is started. It is possible to perform the small hit game while having fun.

  Also, the stop display mode of the pseudo main symbol Dmb corresponding to the timing when the second specific winning opening 650a is opened is a display mode in which the same symbol is stopped and displayed. In addition, the ball enters the second specific winning opening 650a. Display control is performed such that the same symbol type that is stopped and displayed based on the content of the privilege given by the hit ball is different. Specifically, the pseudo main symbol Dmb corresponding to the opening timing of the second specific winning opening 650a that is opened at a timing at which a ball that has entered the second specific winning opening 650a can pass through the specific area (V winning switch 650e3). Of the pseudo main symbol Dmb corresponding to the opening timing of the second specific winning opening 650a which is opened at other timings. The stop display mode is set to a display mode different from the specific same number (for example, “444”). As a result, the pseudo main symbol Dmb is stopped and displayed at the same number, thereby notifying the player of the opening timing at the second specific winning opening 650a. The content can be notified (suggested). Therefore, the effect of the effect using the pseudo main symbol Dmb can be enhanced.

  Next, when the effect state “3” is selected, a pseudo symbol for effect that does not correspond to any of the symbols (special figure 1, special figure 2, ordinary figure) is a main symbol (pseudo main symbol Dmb). In the main reserved symbol, a reserved symbol corresponding to the special figure 2 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a main reserved symbol (see FIG. 16B). The effect state “3” is selected when the gaming state is the time saving state and the small hitting game is executed.

  Next, when the effect state “4” is selected, the third symbol corresponding to the special figure 2 is the main symbol (special symbol 2 main symbol Dmd), and the main symbol symbol is the hold symbol corresponding to the special symbol 2. The symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a main reserved symbol (see FIG. 18A). The effect state “4” is selected when the gaming state is the normal state and the fluctuation of the special figure 2 is executed.

  Next, when the effect state “5” is selected, the third symbol corresponding to the ordinary symbol is the main symbol (ordinary symbol main symbol Dmc), and the reserved symbol corresponding to the special symbol 2 is designated as the primary symbol. It is displayed on the three symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 15B). The effect state “5” is selected when the gaming state is the time reduction state, and during the time reduction state, a normal drawing change in which the lottery and the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a can be performed is executed.

  When the effect state “6” is selected, the third symbol corresponding to the special symbol 1 is the main symbol (special symbol 1 main symbol Dma), and the reserved symbol corresponding to the special symbol 2 is the third symbol as the main symbol. This is displayed on the symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 17A). The effect state “6” is selected when the game state is the time saving state and the normal figure change is started in a state where the remaining change period of the changing special figure 1 is within 2 seconds.

  Next, details of the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 31A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 31A, the ROM 222 has at least a fluctuation pattern selection table 222a and an effect state selection table 222b.

  The variation pattern selection table 222a indicates that the sound ramp control device 113 is configured based on the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110 and that the rough variation content (variation time, variation type (reach, deviation, etc.) indicated by the variation pattern command is used. ) Is used to determine a more detailed variation. As a result, various variations can be determined. Here, one variation mode among a plurality of types is determined by lottery for the rough variation content instructed by main controller 110.

  The effect state selection table 222b is a table for selecting an effect state for setting a display mode of an effect image (third symbol image, reserved symbol image, background image, etc.) displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the state of establishment of various flags, and the lottery results of special symbols and ordinary symbols, any one of the six rendering states is selected.

  Here, the contents of the effect state selection table 222b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the effect state selection table 222b. As shown in FIG. 32 (a), the effect state selection table 222b indicates whether or not the connected state flag 223i, the ordinary figure valid flag 223q, the pseudo effect flag 223r, and the special figure 2 change flag 223s are set to ON or not. Any of the effect states “1” to “6” is selected depending on whether the setting is off.

  Specifically, if the pseudo-effect flag 223r is also set to off in a state where the extended-mode flag 223i is set to off, the effect state "1" is selected. On the other hand, when the pseudo effect flag 223r is set to ON, the effect state “2” is selected. In addition, in the state where the extended-village flag 223i is set to ON and the general map valid flag 223q is set to OFF, if the special figure 2 change flag 223s is set to OFF, the effect state “3” is set. Selected. On the other hand, when the special figure 2 change flag 223s is set to ON, the effect state “4” is selected. Then, when the extended-village flag 223i is set to ON and the general-purpose-valid flag 223q is set to ON, the effect state “5” is selected. In the state where the effect state “5” is selected, the fluctuation stop timing of the executed first special symbol (special figure 1) and the fluctuation stop timing of the ordinary symbol (general figure) are set at a predetermined interval (special figure). In the case where the fluctuation stop timing of the ordinary figure is earlier than the fluctuation stop timing of No. 1 and each fluctuation stop timing is within 2 seconds), the effect state “6” is selected.

  Here, the relationship between the effect state selected by the effect state selection table 222b and the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 (b) is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between each effect state selected by the effect state selection table 222b and the third symbol and the reserved symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, not only the above-described third symbol and the reserved symbol, but also various effect images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are displayed in the set effect state. However, the detailed description is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 32B, a third symbol (main symbol) displayed in the first display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 according to the rendering state selected by the rendering state selection table 222b (see FIG. 9). The symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol, normal symbol) corresponding to the main reserved symbol (see FIG. 9) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are defined so as to be different from each other. In this manner, the pachinko machine 10 having a complicated game performance is made by changing the symbols (the first special symbol, the second special symbol, the ordinary symbol) corresponding to the main symbol and the main reserved symbol depending on the effect state. Just letting the player know the symbol and the main reserved symbol can inform the result of the main game in an easily understandable manner.

  More specifically, when the effect state “1” is selected, the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol (special symbol 1) becomes the main symbol, and the reserved symbol for indicating the number of reserved symbols of the special symbol 1 is stored. The symbol becomes the main reserved symbol and is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 9). The effect state “1” is selected when the gaming state is the normal state in which the left-handed game is being executed.

  Next, when the effect state “2” is selected, a pseudo symbol for effect that does not correspond to any of the symbols (special figure 1, special figure 2, ordinary figure) is the main symbol (pseudo main symbol Dmb). The main symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 so as not to display any symbol on the main symbol (see FIG. 22B). The effect state “2” is selected when the gaming state is the normal state and the small hitting game of Tokuju 1 is executed.

  The pseudo main symbol Dmb displayed as the main symbol when the effect state “2” is selected is a symbol variation display (see FIG. 22A) and a stop display (FIG. 22), like the other main symbols. (B)) is executed, and the pseudo main symbol Dmb is determined based on the timing at which the second specific winning opening 650a of the second variable winning device 650 is opened in the small hit game of Tokuzu 1 The display is controlled so as to be stopped and displayed in the display mode (the same symbol is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 22B)), whereby the pseudo main symbol Dmb is stopped and displayed to the player. The opening timing of the second specific winning opening 650a during the hit game can be notified, and the privilege of opening the second specific winning opening 650a as a result of the fluctuation (lottery) of the pseudo main symbol Dmb is provided. It is possible to think.

  In addition, the number of times the pseudo main symbol Dmb is fluctuated and displayed is set to be at least larger than the number of times the second specific winning opening 650a is opened during the small hit game, and corresponds to the opening timing of the second specific winning opening 650a. The fluctuating display of the pseudo main symbol Dmb which is not displayed is controlled so as to be stopped and displayed in a display mode other than a predetermined display mode (for example, a mode in which non-identical symbols are stopped and displayed (so-called loose eyes)). ing. Thereby, regardless of the opening timing of the second specific winning opening 650a during the small hit game, the pseudo main symbol Dmb can be constantly displayed in a variably manner, and the effect can be enhanced.

  Further, when the effect state “2” is selected, the main reserved symbol is not displayed, so that it is difficult for the player to grasp the fluctuation of the pseudo main symbol Dmb and the increase / decrease relationship of the reserved symbol. That is, since the pseudo main symbol Dmb is not a symbol corresponding to each symbol (special figure 1, special figure 2, ordinary figure) actually held and stored, when the pseudo main symbol Dmb starts to be changed and displayed. The number of any of the reserved symbols (special figure 1 reserved symbol, special figure 2 reserved symbol, general figure reserved symbol) does not increase or decrease. Therefore, in the effect state “2” in which the pseudo main symbol Dmb is variably displayed, any of the reserved symbols (the special symbol 1 reserved symbol, the special symbol 2 reserved symbol, and the ordinary symbol reserved symbol) are displayed as the main reserved symbol. Then, when the main symbol starts to fluctuate, the main reserved symbol does not decrease, and a situation occurs in which the player feels strange. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the effect state “2” is selected, the main hold diagram is not displayed, so that the above-described situation can be prevented from occurring.

  In the present embodiment, when the effect state “2” is selected, the main reserved symbol is configured not to be displayed. However, other configurations may be used. For example, a pseudo main symbol is used. A pseudo main reserved symbol corresponding to Dmb may be displayed. In this case, the number of pseudo main reserved symbols may be increased or decreased in accordance with the fluctuation display of the pseudo main symbol Dmb. Thereby, the fluctuation display of the pseudo main symbol can be executed without giving a sense of strangeness to the player.

  Further, in the case of displaying the pseudo main reserved symbols, the number of pseudo main reserved symbols to be displayed and the display mode may be set based on the type of the small hit game to be executed. With this configuration, the content of the current small hit game is predicted to the player by the pseudo main hold symbol displayed as the main hold symbol at the timing when the small hit game in which the effect state “2” is selected is started. It is possible to perform the small hit game while having fun.

  Also, the stop display mode of the pseudo main symbol Dmb corresponding to the timing when the second specific winning opening 650a is opened is a display mode in which the same symbol is stopped and displayed. In addition, the ball enters the second specific winning opening 650a. Display control is performed such that the same symbol type that is stopped and displayed based on the content of the privilege given by the hit ball is different. Specifically, the pseudo main symbol Dmb corresponding to the opening timing of the second specific winning opening 650a that is opened at a timing at which a ball that has entered the second specific winning opening 650a can pass through the specific area (V winning switch 650e3). Of the pseudo main symbol Dmb corresponding to the opening timing of the second specific winning opening 650a which is opened at other timings. The stop display mode is set to a display mode different from the specific same number (for example, “444”). As a result, the pseudo main symbol Dmb is stopped and displayed at the same number, thereby notifying the player of the opening timing at the second specific winning opening 650a. The content can be notified (suggested). Therefore, the effect of the effect using the pseudo main symbol Dmb can be enhanced.

  Next, when the effect state “3” is selected, a pseudo symbol for effect that does not correspond to any of the symbols (special figure 1, special figure 2, ordinary figure) is a main symbol (pseudo main symbol Dmb). In the main reserved symbol, a reserved symbol corresponding to the special figure 2 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a main reserved symbol (see FIG. 16B). The effect state “3” is selected when the gaming state is the time saving state and the small hitting game is executed.

  Next, when the effect state “4” is selected, the third symbol corresponding to the special figure 2 is the main symbol (special symbol 2 main symbol Dmd), and the main symbol symbol is the hold symbol corresponding to the special symbol 2. The symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a main reserved symbol (see FIG. 18A). The effect state “4” is selected when the gaming state is the normal state and the fluctuation of the special figure 2 is executed.

  Next, when the effect state “5” is selected, the third symbol corresponding to the ordinary symbol is the main symbol (ordinary symbol main symbol Dmc), and the reserved symbol corresponding to the special symbol 2 is designated as the primary symbol. It is displayed on the three symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 15B). The effect state “5” is selected when the gaming state is the time reduction state, and during the time reduction state, a normal drawing change in which the lottery and the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a can be performed is executed.

  When the effect state “6” is selected, the third symbol corresponding to the special symbol 1 is the main symbol (special symbol 1 main symbol Dma), and the reserved symbol corresponding to the special symbol 2 is the third symbol as the main symbol. This is displayed on the symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 16B). The effect state “6” is selected when the game state is the time saving state and the normal figure change is started in a state where the remaining change period of the changing special figure 1 is within 2 seconds.

  Next, the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31B is a block diagram showing the contents of the RAM 223. In the RAM 223, a special figure winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, a special figure change start flag 223d, a stop type selection flag 223e, Effect counter 223f, medium-time saving flag 223g, remaining time-saving period storage area 223h, extended house flag 223i, variable time counter 223j, state storage area 223k, effect state storage area 223m, and special 2 hold flag 223n. , A special 2 suspension upper limit flag 223p, a general figure valid flag 223q, a pseudo effect flag 223r, a special 2 fluctuation flag 223s, a general figure prize information storage area 223t, a general figure fluctuation start flag 223u, and a replacement. A flag 223v, a privilege effect execution flag 223w, an end effect execution flag 223x, Other memory area 223z and is provided with at least.

  The special figure winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and each of these areas has a special symbol (the first special symbol and the first symbol). The winning information of the second special symbol) is stored. Based on the information stored in the special map winning information storage area 223a, the result of the lottery of the reserved ball and the like can be determined by the audio lamp control device 113 before the start of the change.

  The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c are variable effects (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), and are mainly controlled. This is a counter that counts up to four times the number of retained balls (the number of standbys) of the variable effect that are reserved in the device 110 for each type of special symbol. The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b corresponds to the reserved ball number of the variable effect based on the lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol 1), and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c is assigned to the second special symbol (special symbol). This corresponds to the number of balls reserved for the variable effect based on the lottery in 2).

  As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110, and stores the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Cannot get the value of. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c. The number of reserved balls is managed for each type of special symbol.

  Specifically, the main control device 110 holds the variable display by entering the first entrance 64 (left first entrance 64a, right first entrance 64b) and the second entrance 640. After the addition or subtraction, when the number of balls is added, or when the fluctuation display in the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed in the main control device 110 and the number of reserved balls is subtracted, Is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e.

  When receiving the reserved ball count command transmitted from the main control device 110, the sound ramp control device 113 determines the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 or the special symbol 2 reserved ball from the reserved ball number command. The value of the number counter 203e is acquired and stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c (see S3207 in FIG. 61). As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the control device 110.

  The values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c are used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to receiving the reserved ball count command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the reserved ball count indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball count counter 223c, A display reserved ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114 so as to notify the display control device 114 of the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c after storage.

  When the display control unit 114 receives the display reserved ball count command, the value of the reserved ball count indicated by the command, that is, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball of the sound lamp control unit 113, is displayed. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the number of reserved balls corresponding to the value of the number counter 223c is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c are synchronized with the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. , Its value is changed. Accordingly, the number of the reserved ball number symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 also changes while synchronizing with the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. Can be done. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of the reserved balls for which the variable display is suspended.

  In the present embodiment, the variable display (the right of the symbol lottery) can be held (up to four) in the same manner as the special symbol described above for the ordinary symbol. When a command set when the value of the counter 203f increases / decreases is received, a normal symbol holding ball number counter (not shown) is provided as a counter for increasing / decreasing the value in accordance with the content of the received command. However, the processing executed in the sound lamp control device 113 and the processing executed in the display control device 114 are different from the above-mentioned special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 223b only in the target command. Therefore, the detailed description is omitted. The value of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter is used, for example, when the number of ordinary symbol retaining balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, about the detailed content in the case of displaying the value of a normal symbol reserved ball number counter on the third symbol display device 81, it is the same as the case of displaying the reserved symbol number of the special symbol on the third symbol display device 81 described above. Therefore, the description is omitted.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the display control device 114 receives each of the reserved ball count commands for display, the display control device 114 receives the command in a predetermined area (subordinate reserved symbol display areas Dn4 to Dn6 (see FIG. 9A)). A display for indicating the number of balls to be held corresponding to the command that has been made is made, and a command for the number of balls to be held to be displayed in the main holding symbol display area is selected based on the received rendering effect status command for display, and the command is held as the main holding symbol. A display for indicating the number of balls is made. With this configuration, a display synchronized with the increase or decrease in the number of reserved balls set by the main control device 110 can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the player should be notified in the current effect state. It is possible to notify the player of the number of the reserved balls of the symbol in an easy-to-understand manner.

  Note that, in the present embodiment, the display control device 114 changes the number of reserved balls of each symbol (special figure 1, special figure 2, general figure) in a predetermined area (subordinate reserved symbol display areas Dn4 to Dn6 (FIG. 9 ( a)), a part of which can be displayed as the main reserved symbol. However, the display method of the reserved symbol is not limited to this. , Special figure 2, ordinary figure), when a command to hold the number of balls is received, a hold symbol (main hold symbol) to be displayed in the main hold symbol display area based on the received display effect state command, A reserved symbol (subordinate reserved symbol) to be displayed in the reserved symbol display area is determined, and based on the determination result, the third symbol display device 81 holds the symbol corresponding to each symbol (special figure 1, special figure 2, ordinary figure). A design may be displayed.

  The special figure variation start flag 223d is turned on when a variation pattern command (for special figure) transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S3304 in FIG. 62), and the variation display flag on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. It is turned off when the setting is made (see S3702 in FIG. 66). When the special figure change start flag 223d is turned on, a special figure display change pattern command is set based on the change pattern extracted from the received change pattern command (see S3706 in FIG. 66).

  The special pattern display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output processing (S3102) of the main processing (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221. Is transmitted to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the variation pattern command for special figure display, and displays the variation display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 in the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for special figure display. As a result, the display control of the variable effect is started.

  In the present embodiment, as the special figure display variation pattern command, a special figure 1 display variation pattern command corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol and a special figure 2 display variation corresponding to the variation of the second special symbol are used. A pattern command can be set. The display control device 114 displays on the third symbol display device 81 a variation pattern corresponding to the type of the received variation pattern command for special figure display (variation pattern command for special figure 1 display, variation pattern command for special figure 2 display). It is configured to be.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 enters a predetermined area (the symbol display areas Dn1 to Dn3 of the second display area Dn (see FIG. 9A)). A display for indicating a symbol sequence (variation pattern) corresponding to the received display variation pattern command is performed, and a symbol (main symbol) to be displayed in the first display area Dm based on the received display effect state command. Is selected from each of the symbols (special figure 1, special figure 2, ordinary figure), and the selected symbol is displayed as the main symbol. With such a configuration, the display synchronized with the variation pattern of each symbol set by the main control device 110 can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the player should be notified in the current effect state. The change in the symbol can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

  In the present embodiment, the display control device 114 displays all the variable displays (symbol rows) of the respective symbols (special figures 1, special figures 2, and general figures) in a predetermined area (secondary display area Dn). Although it is configured to be displayed in the areas Dn1 to Dn3 (see FIG. 9A) and a part thereof can be displayed as a main symbol in the first display area, each symbol (special figure 1, special figure 2, ordinary figure) is displayed. The display method of FIG. 7 is not limited to this, and for example, when a display variation pattern command corresponding to each symbol (special figure 1, special figure 2, ordinary figure) is received, the received display pattern is displayed. A symbol (main symbol) to be displayed in the first display area Dm and a symbol (sub-symbol) to be displayed in the sub-symbol display area are determined based on the production effect state command, and the third symbol display is performed based on the determination result. Floating display (symbol row) corresponding to each symbol (special figure 1, special figure 2, ordinary figure) on the device 81 It may be displayed.

  The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S3204 in FIG. 61), and turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S3708 in FIG. 66). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type is set as it is based on the stop type (big hit type in the case of a big hit) extracted from the received stop type command (see S3710 in FIG. 66).

  The effect counter 223f is a counter used for selecting a variation pattern, selecting various effects, and the like. The effect counter 223f is configured by a 1-byte loop counter that is updated in the range of 0 to 198. Every time the main process (see FIG. 60) is executed, the value is incremented by one and updated. . The effect counter 223f has a plurality of counters (not shown). When determining an effect pattern by referring to a plurality of counter values in one loop process, different counter values are used. Used. Thus, when one effect pattern is set, the same counter value is not used at a plurality of locations, so that the bias of the effect pattern to be set can be suppressed. The effect pattern may be set by using different values calculated after performing different processes on the values obtained from the same counter. Specifically, of the effect patterns, one selection refers to the first place of the obtained value, another selection refers to the tens place of the obtained value, and another selection refers to the first place of the obtained value. The value obtained by multiplying the order of three times by the value obtained by multiplying the tens place by five times may be used to refer to the one place of the obtained value. With this configuration, it is possible to suppress the bias of the set effect pattern while reducing the number of counters used when setting the effect pattern.

  The time reduction flag 223g is a flag for indicating that the current time is being reduced. When the time reduction flag 223g is on, it indicates that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a time reduction state, and when it is off, it indicates that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is not the time reduction state. This time reduction flag 223g is set to ON (3906 in FIG. 68) when it is determined in the effect state setting processing (see S3114 in FIG. 68) that the state shifts to the time reduction state after the end of the big hit, and the variable display setting processing (FIG. 66). In S3113), it is determined that the special figure change start flag 223d is on (S3701 in FIG. 66: Yes), and when it is determined that the mid-hours flag 223g is on (S3704 in FIG. 66: Yes). ) And set to off (S3705 in FIG. 66).

  In this embodiment, since the change of the special symbol (lottery) is executed once (that is, once the number of time savings) is set as the end condition of the time saving state, the time saving medium flag 223g is turned on as described above. When the change of the special symbol is started in the state set to the state, the during-time reduction flag 223g is set to be off, but the sound lamp control device 113 notifies that the gaming state is the time reduction state. If the number of time reductions is set to 100, for example, a time reduction counter capable of determining the number of remaining periods is provided, and each time a special symbol is changed (lottery). The time-saving flag 223g may be set to off when the counter value is updated to a value indicating that the time-saving state ends. Accordingly, even in the case of the pachinko machine 10 in which the number of time savings is set to a plurality of times (two or more times), the sound lamp control device 113 can reliably determine whether or not the current gaming state is the time saving state. Can be.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the change of the special symbol (the first special symbol, the second special symbol) is executed a predetermined number of times (one time), the end condition of the time saving state is satisfied. Other configurations may be used. For example, the number of times of change of the first special symbol and the number of times of change t of the second special symbol can be separately measured, and the end condition of the time saving state is set to the first special symbol. Is changed 10 times (lottery) or until the second special symbol is changed once (lottery), and the time-saving state is ended when any one of the end conditions is satisfied. Alternatively, the time-saving state may be ended under conditions other than the number of times the special symbol changes. In this case, for example, when the lottery result of the special symbol (the first special symbol, the second special symbol) or the ordinary symbol becomes a predetermined lottery result, an end condition for terminating the time saving state is satisfied, or the pachinko machine 10 A configuration may be used in which the end conditions for terminating the time-saving state are satisfied when the various driving members (the electric accessory 640a, the first variable winning device 65, and the second variable winning device 650) provided are driven, The number of times of driving the various driving members described above may be configured to be measurable, and when the number of times of driving becomes a predetermined number (for example, two times), an ending condition for ending the time-saving state may be established. With this configuration, it is possible to diversify the timing at which the time-saving state ends, thereby improving the interest of the game.

  The time saving remaining period storage area 223h is an area for storing the variation time of the first special symbol executed during the time saving state. Here, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured such that the time reduction state ends when a special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) fluctuates once during the time reduction state. That is, the fluctuation time of the special symbol set during the time reduction state is the remaining period during the time reduction state.

  The extended-flight flag 223i is a flag for indicating that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a right-handed gaming state (extended-living state). The gaming state indicates a right-handed gaming state, and when set to off, indicates that the current gaming state is a normal state. The extended-village flag 223i is turned on (see S3903 in FIG. 68) when it is determined in the effect state setting process (see S3114 in FIG. 68) that the jackpot has been started, and the effect is based on the effect state selection table 222b. It is referred to when selecting a state (see S3918 in FIG. 68), and when it is determined that the time saving state does not enter after the end of the jackpot, or when the condition for terminating the time saving state is satisfied in the state where there is no reserved storage of the special figure 2 Is set to off (see S3907 and S3912 in FIG. 68).

  The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment has transitioned from the time reduction state to a state in which the game has a hold state of the special figure 2 in addition to the jackpot state and the time reduction state as a game state (right-handed game state) advantageous to the player. The game characteristics include a normal state (see FIG. 12), and whether the current state is a game state advantageous to the player (a right-handed game state) is determined by the number of retained balls output from the main control device 110. The sound lamp control device 113 is configured to make a determination based on commands and various status commands. This eliminates the need for the main control device 110 to execute a process of determining whether or not the current gaming state is an advantageous state, and has the effect of reducing the processing load on the main control device 110.

  Note that the main control device 110 may perform a process of determining whether or not the current state is a game state advantageous to the player. In this case, a command indicating that a game state (right-handed game state) advantageous to the player is set is output to the voice lamp control device 113, and the fact that the player is in the right-handed game state is notified to the outside. It may be configured to output a signal for reporting (right-handed signal). In this case, in addition to the period in which the gaming state itself such as the big hit state or the time saving state is advantageous to the player, the gaming state is not an advantageous gaming state (although it is a normal state) but satisfies a predetermined condition. When it is determined that the game mode shifts to the jackpot state, the system is configured to continuously notify the outside that the player is in the right-handed game state, thereby allowing the player to continuously execute the right-handed game. This makes it possible to prevent a troublesome game from being played.

  The fluctuation time counter 223j is a counter for measuring the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 during the time reduction state, and calculates the remaining time of the time reduction state based on the value of the measured counter. In the counter update process (see S3311 in FIG. 70), the fluctuation time counter 223j determines that the fluctuation of the special figure 1 has started during the time reduction (during the time reduction state) (S4103 in FIG. 70: Yes). After the value of the counter is set to “1”, every time the counter updating process (see S3311 in FIG. 70) is executed, “1” is added until the value of the counter becomes “150,000” (S4108 in FIG. 70). When the value of the counter becomes “150,000” (S4107 in FIG. 70: Yes), the value of the counter is set to “0” (S4109). Then, based on the value of the fluctuation time counter 223j, a remaining time reduction period (remaining period in the time reduction state) is calculated (S4105 in FIG. 70).

  The status storage area 223k is a storage area for temporarily storing the status when various status commands output from the main control device 110 are received, and in the command determination process (see S3112 in FIG. 61). When a status command is received (S3215 in FIG. 61: Yes), status information based on the received status command is stored (S3216 in FIG. 61). A display status command is set based on the status information stored in the status storage area 223k, and various images (background images and demonstration images) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are set by the main control device 110. Images corresponding to the various states are displayed.

  In the display control device 114, the effect state storage area 223m displays the display mode of each symbol (special figure 1, special figure 2, ordinary figure) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and each reserved symbol (special figure 1 reserved). This is an area for storing an effect state used for setting an effect state command for display, which is referred to when determining the display mode of the symbol, the special figure 2 reserved symbol, and the ordinary symbol reserved symbol. This effect state includes the setting statuses of various flags (the in-house flag 223i, the ordinary figure valid flag 223q, the pseudo effect flag 223r, and the special figure 2 change flag 223s) set in various processes of the audio lamp control device 113. Based on the symbol fluctuation stop timing, it is selected in the effect state setting process (S3114 in FIG. 68) (see S3918 in FIG. 68), and the selected effect state is stored in the effect state storage area 223m. The effect state storage area 223m is configured to store (store) the selected effect state several times in the past. This makes it possible to compare and determine the effect state before the transition and the effect state after the transition. With this configuration, it is possible to determine a transfer pattern that cannot be transferred when a normal game is being played, and determine whether or not there is an illegal game.

  In addition, when the effect state transitions in a predetermined transition pattern a plurality of times (for example, when the transition from the effect state 4 to the effect state 5 is repeated five or more times without going through the effect states 1 and 2). (For example, Dalian Zhuang production state) can be provided, and the production effect can be enhanced. In the case where the Dalian Zhuang production state is set, it is preferable to display a privilege image that the player cannot normally see in the first display area Dm without displaying the main symbol on the third symbol display device 81. .

  The special 2 hold flag 223n is a flag for indicating that there is a hold storage of the special map 2 (special 2) during the time saving state. When the special 2 hold flag 223n is set to ON, the special 2 hold flag 223n is turned on. This indicates that the hold storage (holding symbol) of FIG. 2 exists, and that it is set to OFF indicates that the hold memory (holding symbol) of the special figure 2 does not exist. The special 2 reserved flag 223n is set to ON when the special 2 reserved ball count is updated to 1 in the reserved ball count related processing (see S3208 in FIG. 63) (see S3403 in FIG. 63). The special 2 reserve flag 223n is referred to when it is determined in the effect state setting process (see S3114 in FIG. 68) that the time reduction state has ended (see S3911 in FIG. 68), and the number of special 2 reserve balls becomes 0. Set to off if

  The special 2 reserved upper limit flag 223p is a flag for indicating that the reserved storage of the special figure 2 (special 2) has reached the upper limit (four) in the time saving state. By being set to ON, it indicates that the reserved storage number of the special map 2 (special 2) reaches the upper limit (four) during the time saving state, and the special 2 reserved upper limit flag 223p is set to off, This indicates that the number of reserved storages in the special map 2 (special 2) is not the upper limit (four).

  The special 2 reserved upper limit flag 223p is set to ON when the special 2 reserved ball count is updated to the upper limit in the reserved ball count related processing (see S3208 in FIG. 63) (S3406 in FIG. 63: Yes) ( This is referred to in the specific effect setting process (see S3407 in FIG. 63) and the specific effect setting process (see S3315 in FIG. 69), and is turned off when the number of special 2 reserved balls is no longer the upper limit.

  The general figure valid flag 223q is a flag for indicating a general figure variation (normal symbol variation) in which the operation of the electric accessory 640a executed at the time of winning is a motion pattern (long opening) advantageous to the player, When the public figure valid flag 223q is set to ON, it indicates that the electric accessory 640a is in a normal figure variation at a timing when the long open can be performed, and when the electric accessory 640a is set to OFF, the electric accessory 640a is short-circuited. This indicates that it is a normal fluctuation at the timing of opening.

  The general figure valid flag 223q is set to ON when it is determined in the general figure change display setting process (see S3712 in FIG. 67) that both the start of change and the end of change are in the time reduction state (FIG. 67). If it is determined that the start of the change is not in the time reduction state, or if it is determined that the end of the change is not in the time reduction state, it is set to OFF (S3809 in FIG. 67). reference). The setting status of the ordinary figure valid flag 223q is referred to when selecting an effect state based on the effect state selection table 222b (see S3918 in FIG. 68).

  The pseudo effect flag 223r is a flag for indicating that the special figure 1 small hit has been executed when the game state is the normal state, and is set to ON to set the special figure 1 small hit in the normal state. Is executed. By setting the pseudo effect flag 223r to ON, an effect display in which the pseudo symbol is the main symbol (pseudo main symbol) is executed during the small hit game (see FIG. 22). The pseudo effect flag 223r is set to ON when the small hit win of the special figure 1 occurs in the normal state by the effect state setting process (see S3114 in FIG. 68) (see S3915 in FIG. 68), and the small hit is set. Is set to off when is completed (S3917 in FIG. 68). The setting state of the pseudo effect flag 223r is referred to when selecting an effect state based on the effect state selection table 222b (see S3918 in FIG. 68).

  The special 2 change flag 223 s is a flag for indicating that the change of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) has started, and when set to ON, the second special symbol (special symbol 2) This indicates that the fluctuation has started. The special variation flag 223s is set to ON in the variation pattern related processing (see S3202 in FIG. 62) when the received variation pattern command is the variation pattern command for special figure 2 (S3302 in FIG. 62). Then, when the variation pattern command for special figure 1 is received, it is set to off. The setting status of the special 2 change flag 223s is referred to when selecting an effect state based on the effect state selection table 222b (see S3918 in FIG. 68).

  Here, in the present embodiment, when the special 2 fluctuation flag 223s is set to ON, that is, when the fluctuation (lottery) of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed, the fluctuation result (lottery result) ) Is configured so that a big hit or a small hit is given. Further, in the small hit game executed based on the fluctuation (lottery) of the second special symbol (special figure 2), the ball is in the specific area (V). It is configured to be a small hit game that easily passes through the winning switch 650e3). That is, the variation (lottery) of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is configured to be advantageous to the player only by being executed. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment configured as described above, while the special 2 change flag 223s is set to ON (that is, while the second special symbol is changing), the second special symbol is not changed. It is variably displayed as a main symbol (a special symbol 2 main symbol). Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the variable display of the second special symbol to which a state advantageous to the player is given is overlooked.

  The ordinary figure winning information storage area 223t is an area for storing winning information included in the winning information command when the winning information command of the ordinary symbol is received. Note that the detailed configuration is the same as the special figure prize information storage area 223a described above, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  The ordinary symbol variation start flag 223u is a flag indicating that the ordinary symbol has been varied, and when set to ON, indicates that the ordinary symbol is varying. This general-purpose variation start flag 223u determines that the received variation pattern command is not a special-purpose variation pattern command (is a general-purpose variation pattern command) in the variation pattern-related processing (see S3202 of FIG. 62). In this case, it is set to ON (see S3306 in FIG. 62), and when it is determined that it is set to ON in the ordinary figure fluctuation display setting process (see S3712 in FIG. 67) (S3801 in FIG. 67: Yes), It is set to off (see S3802 in FIG. 67).

  The replacement flag 223v is a flag indicating that the end timing of the time reduction state (the end timing of the special figure 1 fluctuation started to change in the time reduction state) and the end timing of the normal figure fluctuation satisfy predetermined conditions. When set to ON, it indicates that the end timing of the normal figure fluctuation is within 2 seconds of the end timing of the time saving state. By setting the replacement flag 223v to ON, the effect state “6” is selected as the effect state.

  The privilege effect execution flag 223w is a flag for indicating that the privilege effect is executed, and when set to ON, indicates that the privilege effect is executed. While the privilege effect execution flag 223w is set to ON, a privilege effect (see FIG. 21) that cannot be viewed normally is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. This privilege effect execution flag 223w determines that the special 2 suspension upper limit flag 223p is set to ON in the specific effect setting process (see S3315 in FIG. 69) (see S4002 in FIG. 69), and displays the privilege effect command for display. Is set to ON (see S4004 in FIG. 69), and is set to ON (S4005 in FIG. 69). In the effect state setting process (see S3114 in FIG. 68), the in-concrete flag 223i is set to OFF (FIG. 69). 68 (see S3907), and is set to off (see S3908 in FIG. 68). In other words, even if the privilege effect execution flag 223w is set to ON at least once in the state where the extended-village flag 223i is set to ON (during the extended-villa mode) (the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 becomes the upper limit). If it has reached), the bonus effect is continuously executed until the extended-villa mode ends.

  With this configuration, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the privilege effect ends immediately even when the privilege effect is executed. That is, after the number of reserved balls in Toku-zu 2 reaches the upper limit, at least all of the number of reserved balls in Toku-zu 2 are consumed, and thereafter, the privilege production is performed until the change of Toku-zu 1 in the time-saving state ends. Is executed, the bonus effect can be continuously displayed.

  In addition, with this configuration, it is possible to display on the third symbol display device 81 over a long period that the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 has reached the upper limit, and thus to the surrounding players. You can appeal and get satisfaction. Furthermore, in order to obtain the satisfaction, it is possible to make the player play the game eagerly.

  In the present embodiment, a specific privilege effect is executed under the condition that the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 reaches the upper limit even once, but the present invention is not limited to this. Means may be provided for measuring the number of times that the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 reaches the upper limit, and different privilege effects may be executed based on the measurement result by the means. This allows the player to play the game more ambitiously.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the privilege effect execution flag 223w is set to ON, the setting is made so that the privilege effect is executed until the extended holiday mode ends, but the present invention is not limited to this. A period until all reserved balls in the special figure 2 are consumed may be set as a period in which the privilege effect is executed. Thereby, during the extended holiday mode, the effect can be switched every time the special figure 1 change is executed during the time saving state, and the game is enthusiastically performed to continue the extended holiday mode with a new feeling. Can be.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the configuration is such that the privilege effect is automatically executed when the condition for executing the privilege effect is satisfied. However, other configurations may be used. By operating the operation means (frame button 22) provided on the machine 10, the normal effect and the privilege effect may be switched and executed. Thereby, a desired effect can be provided to the player.

  In the present embodiment, the case where the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 reaches the upper limit is set as the condition for executing the privilege effect, but other conditions may be set as the condition for executing the privilege effect. For example, in addition to the case where the number of reserved balls of the special figure 2 reaches the upper limit, the condition may be set on condition that the changing special figure 1 has won a win (big hit, small hit). In this way, if the lottery result of the changing special figure 1 is a big hit with the number of reserved balls of the special figure 2 reaching the upper limit, substantially five times (one big hit based on the special figure 1, A jackpot game (4 jackpots based on FIG. 2) is provided, so that the game state is more advantageous to the player. By executing the special effect only when such a condition is satisfied, the value of the special effect can be enhanced, and a game can be motivated to watch the special effect.

  In this case, if the number of reserved balls in Toku-zu 2 becomes three (semi-upper limit less than the upper-limit number), based on the lottery result in Toku-zu 1, whether or not a privilege effect is executed (Instruction indicating execution of a privilege effect) may be performed to inform (indicate) the player to the user. Thus, the player can be motivated to play the game while expecting the lottery result of the special map 1 and the provision of the bonus effect. In addition, when the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 reaches the upper limit number (four), the bonus effect is configured to be executed. At the time when the number of reserved balls in Toku-zu 2 reaches the upper limit (at the time when the execution condition of the privilege effect is satisfied), it is changed based on the remaining period of the time-saving state (the remaining fluctuation time of the changing Toku-zu 1). You may. Even in the case of such a configuration, the player can be motivated to play the game.

  The end effect execution flag 223x is a flag for indicating that an end effect (see FIGS. 19B to 20B) for executing the end of the extended holiday mode is to be executed, and is ON. Is set to indicate that the end effect is being executed. The end effect execution flag 223x is turned on in the specific effect setting process (see S3315 in FIG. 69) in a state where the special 2 suspension flag 223n is set to off and the time reduction remaining period becomes 10 seconds. This is set (see S4010 in FIG. 69), and is referred to when the special 2 suspension flag 223n is set to ON in the reserved ball count related processing (see S3208 in FIG. 63) (see S3404 in FIG. 63). Here, in a state where the end effect execution flag 223x is set to ON and the second suspension flag 223n is set to ON, it is assumed that the current time saving state ends (the fluctuation of the special figure 1 ends). Also, the variation (lottery) of the special map 2 is started, and the extended-villa mode is continued. Therefore, a victory command for display is set for the end effect that is being executed, and an effect indicating resumption from the end effect is executed. Thereby, even after the end effect is executed, the player can be expected to continue the extended play mode, and can play the game eagerly until the end.

  Then, in the effect state setting process (see S3114 in FIG. 68), the in-concrete flag 223i is set to off after being set to off (see S3909 in FIG. 68). Note that the end effect performed in the present embodiment may be configured to be executed even when the special figure 2 hold flag 223n is set to ON. In this case, the extended-villa mode is always continued. Therefore, the apparent continuation mode continuation probability in the end effect can be increased. Further, when a plurality of special figure 2 reservations are acquired during the period in which the end effect is being executed, the corresponding effect may be executed.

  The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-described data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. , A command storage area is provided.

  This command storage area is an area in which various commands output from the main control device 110 to the sound ramp control device 113 are temporarily stored until processing for the command is executed. Specifically, it is constituted by a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 61) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process performs The command is analyzed, and processing according to the command is performed.

  Next, an electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the audio lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241. The third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model having a different special lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot and a different number of prize balls paid out in one special symbol jackpot. Since there are models having exactly the same configuration, the display control device 114 is made a common component to reduce the cost.

  Hereinafter, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches an instruction code stored at an address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to perform a system reset from the power supply 115 immediately after power-on (including power recovery from a power failure; the same applies to the following). When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231 a Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. Further, when the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, a control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided in a dedicated program ROM like a conventional gaming machine. Instead, the character data is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing data of an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As will be described in detail later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a that can be increased in capacity with a small area. Thus, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If a control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure rate due to the increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the reading speed is reduced particularly when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data arranged continuously on a plurality of pages, high-speed reading of data on the second and subsequent pages is possible, but an address is specified for reading data of the first page. It takes a long time from when the data is output. In addition, when data that is not continuous is read, a long time is required every time the data is read. As described above, since the reading speed of the NAND flash memory is low, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. However, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporarily storing various data. And store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), as will be described later, and reads and writes data at a high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed by the MPU 231 and data of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, and transfers the control program stored in a second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240. The image controller 237 stores image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237, and the like. The data is transferred to the normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a nonvolatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storing, and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in the present pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

  In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and further can store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. As described above, the control program and the fixed value data are provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. Since the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on an address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like is read. And outputs it to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) occur during data writing, and a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and reads and writes the data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding a defective data block. Performs the data address translation of

  Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, the error is corrected based on the erroneous data. Thus, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

  Further, the bad data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b, and access to the bad data block is avoided, so that the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 use different bad data for each NAND flash memory 234a. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even when the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complexity of controlling access to the character ROM 234.

  The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address allocated to the character ROM 234 is specified from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b operates for one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the specified address. Is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or the NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. I do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction process, and outputs data corresponding to the specified address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and one bank of data of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. Accordingly, the ROM controller 234b outputs data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or specifies the data from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is stored in the other bank. The process of reading from the bank and outputting it to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, the response in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has a much smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND flash memory 234a. ). In the NOR ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the programs not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, the MPU 231 first stores the program after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. After the system reset is released, the MPU 231 executes the boot program first. Thus, the display control device 114 can be set to a state in which various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) of the boot program, and should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) of instructions) are stored from the instructions. The number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be smaller than the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to “0000H” by hardware and specifies the address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address “0000H” is specified on the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231.

  When fetching the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds one to the instruction pointer 231a, and sends the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is the address indicating the program stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 selects from among the programs previously set from the NOR-type ROM 234d to the buffer RAM 234c. , And reads the instruction code at the corresponding address from the buffer RAM 234c and outputs it to the MPU 231.

  Here, in the present embodiment, not all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, but a predetermined number of instructions of the boot program that are to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are read from the NOR ROM 234d. Is stored for the following reason. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a requires a long time from the address designation to the data output in reading the first page of data, which is unique to the NAND flash memory. There's a problem.

  When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a great amount of time is required from the reading thereof to the setting to the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address “0000H” and then executes the instruction corresponding to the address “0000H”. Spend a lot of time waiting to receive the code. Therefore, since the time required to start up the MPU 231 becomes longer, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR ROM is a memory from which data can be read at a high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. When the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. And the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after specifying the address “0000H”, and can start the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  Now, the boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., described later) used in the control program is stored in a program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). 233a and the data table storage area 233b. The MPU 231 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released, and sets the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1. A predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c.

  Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the setting, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a in accordance with the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is used. The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, it is not necessary to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, so that the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

  When the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 stores the instruction pointer 231a in the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. Thus, after the system reset is released, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a moves to the first predetermined position in the program storage area 233a. The address is set.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetches the instruction, but reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes are executed. As will be described later, the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, so that a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at a high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot programs stored in the first program storage area 234d1 include the remaining boot programs in the control programs transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. The program is programmed so as to include the instruction pointer 231a with the first address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Thereby, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Execute the remaining boot program included in the control program.

  In the remaining boot programs, all of the remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table described later) used in the control programs are stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, the initialization processing (see S5002 in FIG. 71) executed after the end of the boot processing by the boot program (see S5001 in FIG. 71) stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed by the MPU 231 to the end, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

  Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can perform various controls by reading the control program from the work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high read speed. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, without storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored, and for the remaining boot programs, Even when the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR-type ROM 234d having a very small capacity. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortened time. Can be.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 36) transmitted from the MPU 231 to be described later, and selects one of a first frame buffer 236b and a second frame buffer 236c described later. The image drawn in the buffer is expanded, and the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs this one-frame image drawing process and one-frame image display process for one frame of image display time on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment). In parallel.

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the rendering process of the image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects the V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 73B) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing processing of the image for the next one frame, and executes the processing of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing processing and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction of the next image at a stage where the image drawing processing or the display processing is not completed, so that the image controller 237 starts drawing a new image during drawing of the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in the frame buffer storing the image information being displayed according to a new drawing instruction.

  The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 based on a transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The drawing of an image is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, image data necessary for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

  Here, while the NAND flash memory facilitates increasing the capacity of the ROM, the reading speed is slower than other ROMs (such as a mask ROM and an EEPROM). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to be. Then, as described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thereby, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data to be used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed when drawing an image. The time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately, and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Particularly, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114 are resident. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  When drawing an image using nonresident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 needs to perform drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image. However, at the time of drawing an image, the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used. It is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of, and the time required for reading out the image data can be omitted. Therefore, it is possible to immediately draw the image and display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  In addition, since the image data is also stored in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data reside in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data, which is performed by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction and the transfer data information of the drawing list, includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236), and the beginning of the transfer destination (the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236) Contains the address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads one block of data from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a in accordance with the various information of the transfer instruction, and temporarily stores the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used. Is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction to the storage source end address is transferred.

  As a result, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing processing. In addition, it is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being delayed.

  Further, since the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine a period that is not used for display processing on the device 81, and to simplify the processing.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is maintained without being overwritten during power-on. The power-on main image area 235a, the back image area 235c, and the character design area 235e, an error message image area 235f, and at least a power-on fluctuation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d.

  The power-on main image area 235a stores a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from when the power is turned on to when all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. An area for storing corresponding data. In addition, the power-on fluctuation image area 235b indicates that the game is started by the player while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance are provided. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on fluctuation image that displays a result of a lottery performed in the main control device 110 by a fluctuation effect when a ball entering the mouth 640 is detected.

  The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S5003 and S5004 in FIG. 71).

  Here, the power-on fluctuation image will be described. The display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b immediately after the power is turned on. Then, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the transfer of the remaining image data is being performed, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image in the third symbol display device. 81 is displayed.

  At this time, when a display variation pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 is received based on a variation pattern command from the main control device 110, which is a variation start instruction command, the display control device 114 turns on the power-on main image. On the display screen of, the power-on fluctuation image of the “○” symbol at the lower right position toward the screen and the power-on fluctuation image of the “X” symbol at the same position as the “○” symbol are displayed during the fluctuation period. It is displayed alternately and repeatedly. Then, based on the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110, the display fluctuation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 are used for the lottery performed by the main control device 110. Judging the result, if it is "special symbol jackpot", display "○" symbol for a fixed period after stopping the variable effect, and if "missing special symbol", display "x" symbol after stopping the variable effect. Display for a certain period.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a to the image controller 237 until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs the main image to be drawn at power-on. Thus, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person in charge of the hall can check the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display controller 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. In addition, the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the remaining images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are displayed. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the user must wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying that the operation has not stopped. Can be.

  Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 can be started without any problem by turning on the power. Can be immediately confirmed, and the use of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed as the character ROM 234 can prevent the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

  In addition, the player starts the game while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the time of power-on, and the first entrance 64 (the left first entrance 64a, the right first entrance). 64b) or when a ball is detected to enter the second ball entrance 640, the power-on fluctuation image is used by using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. Is drawn, and the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to alternately display the power-on fluctuation image on the third symbol display device 81. Thus, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image. Therefore, even when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player can reliably confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple variable effect.

  Also, at the stage when the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. When a ball is detected in the first entrance 64 while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variable effect is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Can be.

  Returning to FIG. 33, the description will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The back image is an image displayed on the back side of the main symbol (third symbol), and displays, for example, a city, the sea, the sky, and the like. In addition, a right-handed navigation image (see FIG. 15A) and the like are also stored in the back image area 235c as a back image.

  The third symbol area 235d is an area where the third symbol used in the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is resident. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned ten types of main symbols with numbers “0” to “9”, which are the third symbols, are resident. Thus, when performing a fluctuation effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read out image data from the character ROM 234 each time. A fluctuating effect can be started quickly. Therefore, after the ball enters the first entrance 64, the variable effect starts immediately on the third symbol display device 81, although the variable effect has been started on the first symbol display device 37. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state that is not performed.

  Further, in the third symbol area 235d, as a main symbol without numbers “0” to “9”, a main symbol including a rear symbol such as a wooden box, or a character such as a rear symbol such as a plane, a furoshiki, a helmet, or the like. The image data corresponding to the main symbol consisting of the attached symbol imitating the symbol is also resident. These image data are used for a demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has elapsed after one variable effect stopped. Can be Thus, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbols without numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

  The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these characters is resident in the character design area 235e, so that display control is performed. When changing the character design based on the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but instead stores the corresponding image data in the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. By reading out the resident image data, the image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used as the character ROM 234, the character pattern can be changed immediately.

  The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of the vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Also, when the occurrence of another error is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. The display control device 114 is configured to, when receiving the error command, display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error, from the viewpoint of preventing the player from cheating and protecting the player from the error. In the present pachinko machine 10, since image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in the error message image area 235f in advance, the display control device 114 determines the error message in the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data previously resident in the image area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. Accordingly, since it is not necessary to sequentially read image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used as the character ROM 234, the error message corresponding to the received error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated at any time, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

  The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

  The MPU 231 transfers, from the character ROM 234, image data not required to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 to image data required for subsequent image rendering, from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236. , And instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data specified by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including the transfer data information in a later-described drawing list in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image. Thus, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, and thus can reduce the processing load.

  The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn in accordance with an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame for the frame buffer. While the image is being developed, while the image is being developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame that has been previously developed is read out from the other frame buffer, and is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes a process of displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffers, the image controller 237 simultaneously develops the image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer while developing the image. The image of one frame that has been developed first is read from the other frame buffer, and the third symbol display device 81 can display the read image of one frame.

  The frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are different from each other. Every 20 milliseconds to be completed, the MPU 231 alternately specifies one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are performed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 ms after the completion of the drawing process of the image of one frame, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. You.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. You. Thereafter, a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed every 20 milliseconds by one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image of one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs. Be composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, and stored image data determination. It has at least a flag 233i, a drawing target buffer flag 233j, and an effect state storage area 233k.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads out the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. When all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 , Diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

  The data table storage area 233b stores a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and a display data table. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing.

  These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in a second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to a boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from character ROM 234 to work RAM 233, and stored in data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114. Using 81, diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

  Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a fluctuation effect, an opening effect A display data table corresponding to a round effect, an ending effect, and a demo effect is prepared.

  The fluctuation effect is an effect started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display fluctuation pattern command is received from the audio lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, a display stop type command indicating the variation effect stop type is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is off, the stop symbol indicating the deviation is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the variation effect is the jackpot A, the jackpot B In any case, the stop symbols indicating the respective jackpots are finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbols in the variable effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

  The opening effect is for notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 will be shifted to the special game state from now on and the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a which are normally closed will be opened. The round effect is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started. The ending effect is an effect for notifying the player that the end of the special game state (big hit state) has been notified to the player.

  As described above, the demonstration effect is an effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has elapsed after the stop of one variable effect. The third symbol consisting of the main symbol without numbers "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person related to the hall can recognize that the game is not performed in the pachinko machine 10.

  The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table corresponding to each of the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect. In addition, if there are 32 variation effect patterns to be set, 32 tables are prepared for one variation effect pattern, that is, a total of 32 tables, as the variation display data table which is a display data table for the variation effect.

  Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of the variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is defined as one unit. The content (drawing content) of an image for one frame is defined in detail.

  In the drawing content, the type of the sprite is defined for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency, and the like are determined according to the type of the sprite. Drawing information, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, for drawing a sprite on the third symbol display device 81 is defined.

  The sprite type is information for specifying a sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 at which the sprite is to be displayed. The enlargement factor is information for specifying an enlargement factor for a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement factor. If the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is enlarged and displayed in a size larger than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucent value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite is displayed. The α blending information is information for specifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing a superimposition process with another sprite. The color information is information for specifying a color tone of a sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the designated sprite when drawing the designated sprite.

  In the variable display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), And one light in the image are defined as one frame of rendering content defined corresponding to each address. For each sprite, drawing information for each sprite such as an effect that expresses insertion of characters and characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters is defined. Note that one or more pieces of information on effects and characters are defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are set with respect to the passage of time. Since it is constant, only the rear type, which is information for specifying the type of the rear image, is specified in the variable display data table. This back type indicates whether to display any of the back surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage (one of the “city stage”, “empty stage”, and “island stage”) selected by the player, or Information for specifying whether to display a rear image different from C is described. In addition, when specifying to display a rear image different from the rear surfaces A to C, the rear type also includes information for specifying which rear image is to be displayed.

  If it is specified by this back type that any of the backs A to C is to be displayed, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage designated by the player among the backs A to C as a drawing target. In addition, the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame is specified as time passes. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back surfaces A to C, the back image to be displayed is specified based on the back type.

  Note that, in the present embodiment, a case will be described in which only the back type is defined as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table. Instead, the back type and the range of the back image corresponding to the back type are specified. May be defined as position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. The position information may be, for example, information indicating an elapsed time from when the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time from when the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time since drawing of an image based on the display data table (or display on the third symbol display device 81) is started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started based on the display database. The identification is performed based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time from the start of drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or the display of the third symbol display device 81).

  Further, the position information includes information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and drawing of an image based on the display data table according to the rear type (or the third symbol display device 81). May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of the display, or the type information of the position information (for example, the range of the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back type and the position information. This is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started. May be defined as the drawing content of the rear image. In addition, the position information may not be the information indicating the elapsed time, but may be the information indicating the address where the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

  The third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...) Describes symbol type offset information as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variable effect is the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before and the variable effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information until a predetermined time elapses from the start of the fluctuation, offset information from the stop symbol of the immediately preceding variation effect is described. Thereby, the variable effect is started from the stop symbol in the preceding variable effect.

  On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the fluctuation, an offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113. Provide information. Thus, the variable effect can be stopped at the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since each 3rd symbol is given a unique number, a variation symbol in the immediately preceding variation effect and a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110 are displayed in the 3rd symbol. , And the offset information is represented by the difference between the numbers attached to the respective third symbols, whereby the third symbol to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information.

  Also, in the symbol offset information, the predetermined time in which the offset information of the immediately preceding variable effect stopped symbol is switched to the offset information of the variable effect stopped symbol performed this time, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed. It is set to be the time displayed. While the third symbol is being displayed at a high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player, and during that time, the stop effect of the variable effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed this time, even if the continuity of the numeral of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is not made aware of the interruption of the continuity of the numeral. be able to.

  “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H” which is the start address of the display data table, and the data table is stored in the last address (“02F0H” in the example of FIG. 30) of the display data table. "End" information indicating the end of the process is described. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the rendering mode to be defined in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display fluctuation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and selects the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, every time the rendering processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one, and the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is used to add The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 36) described later is created. By transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is issued. Thus, the contents of the drawing are specified in the order specified in the display data table in accordance with the update of the pointer 233f, and the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Thus, in the present pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and the like. The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d, instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231. .

  Here, when a program executed by the MPU 231 is started each time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, as in a conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. A large load is placed on the processing of starting and executing a complicated and enormous program, which may limit the processing capability of the display control device 114 and limit the diversification of controllable effect images. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Also, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each of the rendering modes, a display data table buffer corresponding to the rendering mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason why it can be created is that in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the winning start. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display content changes on the spot based on the user's operation, so that the display content cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the presentation mode. As described above, the display data table is prepared corresponding to each rendering mode, the display data table buffer is set according to the rendering mode to be displayed, and the drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This configuration can be realized for the first time based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the winning start.

  Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect. As described above, among the sprite image data used in the effect specified in the display data table, Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, and the transfer timing thereof are specified.

  If all the image data of the sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Thus, an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address specified in the display data table, and is transfer data information of image data of a sprite to be transferred at a time indicated by the address (hereinafter, referred to as “transfer target image data”). (Addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 35 correspond). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to that address. Null data is defined (address “0002H” in FIG. 35 corresponds).

  As the transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 where the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) Is included.

  Note that, as in the display data table, “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in the start address “0000H” of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 35, “02F0H”) describes “End” information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table. Is described.

  When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio ramp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, every time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 36) described later is created. At the same time, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite at which transfer is to be started at that time is obtained, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 35, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified at the address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. The drawing list is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is “0002H”, since null data is defined at the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and the transfer data table is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the processing to be performed.

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

  Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While rendering the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 displays the display data in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110 or the like. When the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the image data of the sprite used in the display data table is The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  In the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thereby, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and corresponds to an address specified in the display data table, and transfers transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address. Since the data information is defined, before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236. As described above, the transfer start timing can be instructed, so that even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, various effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

  The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display a power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) on the third symbol display device 81. The simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. Is set to ON in the main processing (see FIG. 71) executed by the MPU 231 (see S5005 in FIG. 71). Then, at the stage when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, the third symbol display device 81 displays an image other than the power-on image. It is set to off (see S6605 in FIG. 82 (b)).

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S5301 in FIG. 73B), and When the image display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination process (see S5308 in FIG. 73B) and the simple display setting process (see FIG. 73B) so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 73 (b) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 and the like. Processing (see FIGS. 74 to 78) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 79 to 81) are executed.

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 during the V interrupt process (see S6501 in FIG. 82A), and the simple image display flag 233c is on. Executes resident image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 82 (b)) for transferring resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, a normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 83) for transferring image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. This is a buffer for The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. The selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by one, and, based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, increments the image controller 237 for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 36) described below, which describes the contents of the image drawing instruction for, is generated. Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d while adding the pointer 233f to the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f. A drawing list (see FIG. 36) described below that describes the contents of the drawing instruction is generated. Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The transfer data table buffer 233e stores a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the audio ramp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Is a buffer for storing. When storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b, and transfers the selected transfer data table. The data is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all the image data of the sprite used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f to the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while defining the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f. If this is the case (that is, if no Null data is described), the transfer data information is stored in a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 36) that describes the contents of an image drawing instruction to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Accordingly, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, it is necessary to draw a predetermined sprite in accordance with the display data table. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While rendering the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233f is an address at which the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data is to be acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in each of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. Is to be specified. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 at the same time that the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the rendering process of the image for one frame is completed from the image controller 237 (FIG. 73 (b) ), The pointer update process (see S6205 in FIG. 81) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  Each time such an update of the pointer 233f is performed, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, (See FIG. 36), transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to start transfer at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data is obtained. Add the information to the created drawing list.

  Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various effects can be displayed.

  Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite based on the transfer data table is displayed before the drawing of a predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used in the drawing of the image can be always stored in the image storage area 236a. Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While rendering the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g stores an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. 237 is an area for storing a drawing list instructed by 237.

  Here, the drawing list will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 36 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame. As shown in FIG. 36, the back image used for the one-frame image and the third symbol (the symbol 1, ..., effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., reserved ball number design 1, reserved ball number design 2, ..., error) For each sprite such as a pattern, detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (displayed object) is stored. The image controller 237 obtains image data of the sprite from a memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to a scaling process according to a magnification ratio, a rotation process according to a rotation angle, and a translucent process according to a translucent value. Subject to alpha blending information, perform synthesis processing with other sprites, perform color tone correction processing according to color information, and perform filtering processing according to the method specified by the information according to filter specification information. Then, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the rendered image is developed by the image controller 237 in either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the rendering target buffer flag 233j.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 stores the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, Based on an image and a warning image notifying that an error has occurred, detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing one frame of image is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

  Here, in the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and the address of the data of the sprite (display object) correspond to the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the content of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored, or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 responds to the sprite type. Thus, the type and address of the storage RAM in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  In addition, the MPU 231 defines other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite in the display data table. Copy the information as it is.

  Also, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged from the rearmost side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image of one frame, and obtains detailed drawing information for each sprite. (Detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, first, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described, and then, the third design (design 1, design 2,...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2,. Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, reserved ball number symbol 2,..., Error symbol).

  The image controller 237 executes the drawing processing of each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged at the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged at the frontmost side.

  Further, when the transfer data information is described in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transmits the transfer data information (the character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a where the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list includes the transfer data information, the image controller 237 reads the image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The time counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating an effect time of an effect to be displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. The time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment).

  Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the rendering process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 (FIG. 73 (b) Each time the display setting process of ()) is executed, the time counter 233h is decremented by one (see S6207 of FIG. 79). As a result, when the value of the time counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the operation in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processings to be performed.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i indicates that, for all sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the image data corresponding to that sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. This is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is any.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by an initialization process (see S5002 in FIG. 71) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to “OFF” indicating that the storage states for all sprites are not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 83) executed by the MPU 231. Will be In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to “ON” indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of the other sprite to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as the one sprite is always in an unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to the other sprite is set to “off”.

  The MPU 231 refers to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i when transferring image data of a sprite for which image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and determines the transfer target sprite. It is determined whether or not the image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S6717 in FIG. 83). If the storage state corresponding to the transfer target sprite is "OFF" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S6718 in FIG. 83). The image controller 237 causes the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “ON”, since the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, the transfer processing of the image data is stopped. As a result, unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer (hereinafter, referred to as a “drawing target buffer”) that develops an image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c). If the rendering target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the rendering target buffer, and if it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is designated. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S6802 in FIG. 84).

  Thus, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the rendered image information which has already been developed from a frame buffer different from the rendering target buffer in parallel with the rendering process, and sends the read image information to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated at the same time that the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, setting the value to “1” when the value is “0” and setting it to “0” when the value is “1”. Done by Accordingly, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted. The transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. Each time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 73 (b)) is executed, it is performed (see S6802 of FIG. 84).

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are performed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 ms after the completion of the drawing process of the image of one frame, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. You.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. You. Thereafter, a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed every 20 milliseconds by one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image of one frame.

  The effect state storage area 233k is an area for storing effect state information included in the display effect state command output from the audio lamp control device 113. The effect state information stored in the effect state storage area 233k is referred to when determining the display content to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Note that the present embodiment has the variation pattern data corresponding to each effect state information, and is configured such that different variation patterns are determined even when the same variation pattern command for display is received. .

<Control process of main controller in first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process started upon power-on, a main process executed after the start-up process, and a timer started periodically (at an interval of 2 ms in the present embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process started by input of a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, first, a timer interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process will be described, and then a start process will be described. And the main processing will be described.

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of the various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined to store the detection information (winning detection information).

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by one, and is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches a maximum value (299 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in a corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by one, and when the counter value reaches a maximum value (239 in this embodiment), the value is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is updated. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the second hit random number counter C4, and the small hit type counter C5 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the second hit random counter C4, and the small hit type counter C5 are each incremented by one, and their counter values are maximized. When the value reaches 299, 99, 99, 239, 99 in this embodiment, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C5 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203.

  Next, in addition to the processing for displaying on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). Thereafter, the left first entrance 64a and the right first entrance 64b (hereinafter, when both the left first entrance 64a and the right first entrance 64b are indicated, the first entrance 64 and ) Or a start prize process accompanying a prize (start prize) in the second entrance 640 (S105). The details of the special symbol change process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the start winning process, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device, is executed (S106). A gate passing process is performed (S107). The details of the normal symbol change process and the through gate passage process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the execution of the through gate passage process, a V entrance passage process associated with the ball entry into the second variable winning device 650 is executed (S108). After that, a V-pass process is executed in accordance with winning of the V winning switch 650e3 of the second variable winning device 650 (S109). The details of the V entrance passage process and the V passage process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 49 and 59.

  Next, a firing control process is executed (S110), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S111), and the timer interrupt process ends. Note that the firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 with the touch sensor 51a and, on condition that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping firing is not operated. This is a process for determining on / off of firing. When the launch of the ball is on, main controller 110 instructs launch control device 112 to launch the ball.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 38, a special symbol change process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the special symbol change processing (S104). The special symbol change process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37), and the special symbol (first symbol) change display and the third symbol performed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third symbol performed on the display device 81.

  In this special symbol change process, first, it is determined whether or not the present is a special symbol jackpot (S201). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying a special symbol jackpot (including a special symbol jackpot game). During the predetermined time after the end of the symbol jackpot game is included. If the result of the determination is that the special symbol is in a big hit (S201: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  If it is not during the special symbol jackpot (S201: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is changing (S202), and the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are displayed. If the mode is not fluctuating (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of times of suspension of the variable display in the special symbol N2) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S204).

  If the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S205) and changed by the calculation. A reserved ball number command (special figure 2 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is set (S206). The set number-of-spheres command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in an external output process (S1701) of a main process (see FIG. 53) described later executed by the MPU 201. Are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted values in the RAM 223. The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c are stored.

  After the special figure 2 reserved ball count command is set by the processing of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, in each area, such as the first area on hold → the execution area, the second area on hold → the first area on hold, the third area on hold → the second area on hold, the fourth area on the hold → third area on hold, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, a special symbol variation start process for starting variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is executed (S213). The special symbol change start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S204, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (S204: No), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d. Is obtained (S208). It is determined whether the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S209). When it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S209: No), this processing is ended.

  On the other hand, if the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S209: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is subtracted (S210) and changed by calculation. A reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set (S211). After the special figure 1 reserved sphere number command is set by the processing of S211, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a is shifted (S212). After that, the process of S213 is performed.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B is changing (S202: Yes), whether the change time of the variable display executed on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B has elapsed. It is determined whether or not it is (S214). The variation time of the variation display performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command). If the fluctuating time has not elapsed (S214: No), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S214, if the fluctuating time of the fluctuating display being executed has elapsed (S214: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37A, 37B is set (S215). . The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a special symbol change start process (S213) described later with reference to FIGS. When the special symbol change start process is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Is More specifically, it is determined whether the special symbol is a big hit, a small hit, or a miss according to the value of the first random number counter C1, and the special symbol is a big hit or a small hit. In this case, one of the big hits A to G or one of the small hits A to E is determined according to the value of the first hit type counter C2 or the small hit type counter C5.

  In the present embodiment, when the big hit A occurs, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In addition, when a small hit is made, the red LED is turned on, and when it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next change display is started, but may be turned on only for a few seconds after the stop of the change.

  After the process of S215 is completed, when the variation display being executed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is started, the result of the special symbol lottery performed by the special symbol variation start process (the current lottery result). Is a special symbol jackpot (S216). If the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (S216: Yes), a scenario for opening a specific winning opening is set based on the jackpot type (S217), and then the start of the jackpot is set (S218). Next, the big hit start flag 203h and the big hit flag 203i are set to ON (S219), the time reduction counter 203g is set to 0 (S220), and the process shifts to S221. In the processing of S221, a stop command is set (S221), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S216, when it is determined that the current lottery result is not a big hit (S216: No), it is determined whether the current lottery result is a small hit (S222).

  In the process of S222, when it is determined that the current lottery result is a small hit (S222: Yes), a small hit start setting process is executed (S223). Next, the process of S221 is performed, and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S222 that the current lottery result is not a small hit (S222: No), it is determined whether the value of the time reduction counter 203g is 1 or more (S224). When it is determined that the value of the counter 203g during the working hours is 0 (S224: No), the processing of S221 is executed, and this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time reduction counter 203g is 1 or more (S224: Yes), the value of the time reduction counter 203g is decremented by 1 (S224), and the process of S221 is executed. After that, the process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 39, the special symbol change start process (S213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the special symbol change start process (S213). The special symbol change start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 38) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37), and includes the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a and the special symbol change process. Based on the values of the various counters stored in the common execution area with the symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b, a lottery of "special symbol big hit", "special symbol small hit" or "special symbol departure" is performed. This is a process for performing a determination) and determining an effect pattern (variable effect pattern) of the variable effect performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81.

  In the special symbol change start process, first, it is determined whether or not the employee is working for a time reduction (S301). If it is not during the working hours (S301: No), the normal fluctuation start processing (S302) is executed, and this processing ends. On the other hand, when the working hours are reduced (S301: Yes), the working hours start process (S303) is executed, and the process ends.

  Next, the normal fluctuation start processing (S302) and the time reduction fluctuation start processing (S303) executed in the above-described special symbol fluctuation start processing (S213) will be described.

  First, the normal fluctuation start processing (S302) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the normal fluctuation start processing (S302) executed in the special symbol fluctuation start processing (see S213 in FIG. 39).

  In the normal fluctuation start processing, first, data of an execution area in a corresponding special symbol reserved ball storage area (special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b) is acquired (S401). Then, the lottery result is acquired based on the special symbol jackpot random number table corresponding to the acquired special symbol type (S402). Specifically, in the case of the lottery of the first special symbol based on the ball entry into the first entrance opening 64, the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 (see FIG. 26 (b)) is referred to as a big hit or a small hit. If the determination is made and the lottery of the second special symbol is performed based on the ball entering the second entrance 640, the big hit or the small hit is determined with reference to the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 (see FIG. 26 (c)). I do.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result is a jackpot (S403). When the lottery result is a big hit (S403: Yes), the display mode at the time of the normal big hit corresponding to the special symbol and the big hit type is set based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S401 ( S404). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S401 is compared with the random number value stored in the special symbol 1 big hit selection table 202b1 or the special symbol 2 big hit selection table 202b2, and 7 It is determined what the jackpot type is, among the jackpots (jackpots A to G) of the special symbols of various types (see FIG. 27 (b) or (c)).

  In the process of S404, the display mode (the lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined big hit type (big hits A to G). In order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the big hit type on the third symbol display device 81, the big hit types (big hits A to G) are set as the stop types.

  Thereafter, a normal jackpot variation pattern is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 (S405), and the process proceeds to S406. When the fluctuation pattern is set in the processing of S405, the fluctuation time (display time) of the fluctuation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third time until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the big hit symbol is set. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. More specifically, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 and the fluctuation pattern table 202d1 for the special hit 1 or the fluctuation pattern table 202d5 for the special hit 2 (common to normal / time saving) Then, the variation time of the symbol variation is determined (FIG. 29 (a) or FIG. 30 (b)).

  In the process of S406, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the process of S405 is set (S406). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S404 is set (S407). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the sound ramp control device 113 in the processing of S1701 of the main processing (see FIG. 53). Is done. The sound lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the processing in S407 ends, the process returns to the special symbol change processing.

  On the other hand, if the lottery result is not a big hit (S403: No), it is further determined whether the lottery result is a small hit (S408). When the lottery result is a small hit (S408: Yes), the display mode at the time of the normal small hit corresponding to the special symbol and the big hit type is set (S409). Thereafter, a normal small hit variation pattern is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 (S410). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the small hit symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S405, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 and the variation pattern table 202d3 for the small hit for special figure 1 or the variation pattern table 202d5 for the big hit for special figure 2 (Normal / time saving common) to determine the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation (FIG. 29 (d) or FIG. 30 (b)). Next, the processing of S406 and S407 is executed, and the process returns to the special symbol change processing.

  If the lottery result is not a small hit (S408: No), a display mode at the time of normal departure corresponding to the special symbol is set (S411). Thereafter, a fluctuation pattern at the time of the normal departure is determined based on the number of reserved balls (S412). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S405, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 and the variation pattern table 202d2 for the special figure 1 or the variation pattern table 202d5 for the big hit for the special figure 2 ( By comparing the normal and the time saving, the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation is determined (FIG. 29 (c) or FIG. 30 (b)). Next, the processing of S406 and S407 is executed, and the process returns to the special symbol change processing.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 41, the time reduction start process (S303) will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the time reduction start process (S303) executed in the special symbol change start process (S213, see FIG. 39). This time saving variation start process (S303) is different from the above-described normal variation start process (S302) in that a display mode and a variation pattern for time saving are set (determined), and the other points are the same. , And a detailed description thereof will be omitted. In the processing of S505, S510, and S512, when determining the variation pattern for the time saving of the first special symbol, as described above, the determination is made based on the variation pattern table 202d4 for the special figure 1 (FIG. 30 (a) )reference). On the other hand, when determining the variation pattern for the time saving of the second special symbol, it is determined based on the variation pattern table 202d5 for the special figure 2 (common for the normal and the time saving), similarly to the normal variation start process (S302) (FIG. 30 (b)).

  Next, the small hit start setting process (S222) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the small hit start setting process (S222). The small hit start setting process (S222) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 38) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37), and is a small hit type (small hit A to E). Is a process for setting the operations of the V inlet solenoid 209a, the staying solenoid 209b, and the flow path solenoid 209c in the small hitting game based on.

  In the small hit start setting process (S222), first, the small hit type selected in the process of S409 of the above-described normal variation start process or the process of S509 of the time saving variation start process is read (S601). Or, it is determined whether or not B (S602). If it is the small hit type A or B (S602: Yes), an open scenario for the special figure 1 is set (S603). Note that the opening scenario for Tokuzu 1 specifically indicates the setting of the opening pattern of the opening / closing door 650f1 and the staying member 650n of the second variable winning device 650. In other words, the operation of the V inlet solenoid 209a and the staying solenoid 209b is set so that the opening / closing door 650f1 and the staying member 650n are opened for a predetermined period during the small hitting game effect (see FIG. 10).

  When the processing in S603 ends, it is determined whether the small hit type is B (S604). If the small hit type is B (S604: Yes), the flow path solenoid operation is set so that the V prize is not possible (S605). That is, the operation of the flow path solenoid 209c is set so that the ball cannot flow down the flow path 650h3 (see FIG. 10A). After that, the processing shifts to the processing of S608. In the processing of S604, if the small hit type is not B (that is, the small hit type is A) (S604: No), the flow path solenoid operation is set so that the V winning is possible (S606). That is, the operation of the flow path solenoid 209c is set so that the ball can flow down to the flow path 650h3 (see FIG. 10B).

  On the other hand, in the process of S602, if the small hit type is not A or B (that is, the small hit type is C, D or E) (S602: No), an open scenario for the special figure 2 is set (S606). ). Note that the opening scenario for the special figure 2 specifically indicates the setting of the opening pattern of the opening / closing door 650f1 and the staying member 650n of the second variable winning device 650. That is, the operation of the V inlet solenoid 209a and the stay solenoid 209b is set so that the opening / closing door 650f1 and the stay member 650n are opened for a predetermined period during the small hitting game effect (see FIG. 11A). When the processing of S607 ends, the flow path solenoid operation is set so that the V prize is possible (S606). That is, the operation of the flow path solenoid 209c is set so that the ball can flow down to the flow path 650h3 (see FIG. 11A).

  When the processing in S605 and S607 is completed, the V-passing jackpot type corresponding to each small-hit type is set in the V-passing jackpot type storage area 203m (S608). More specifically, based on the small hit type acquired in the process of S601 and the special symbol one big hit selection table 202b1 or the special symbol two big hit selection table 202b2, the big hit type at the time of passing V (big hits C to G) is determined. As described above, if the small hit type is A, it is determined to be a big hit C (seven round short hits), and if the small hit type is B, it is a big hit D (two round short hits). If it is determined that the small hit type is C, it is determined to be a big hit F (5-round short hit jackpot), and if the small hit type is D, it is determined to be a big hit G (10 round short hit jackpot). If the small hit type is E, it is determined to be a big hit E (15-round short-time big hit) (see FIG. 27 (b) or (c)).

  Next, the start of the small hit is set based on the small hit type (S609), and the small hit start flag 203j and the small hit flag 203k are set to ON (S610). After that, the process ends.

  Next, the start winning information processing (S105) will be described. First, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37), and it is determined whether or not there is a win (start win) in the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640. This is a process for acquiring various random number counters and executing a holding process of the values when a winning start is made.

  When the start winning process (S105 in FIG. 43) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the ball has won the first entrance 64 (start win) (S701). Here, a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, if it is determined that the ball has won the first entrance 64 (S701: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times N1 of the variable display in the special symbol is changed) is acquired (S702). ). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment) (S703).

  Then, whether or not there is a prize in the first entrance 64 (S701: No), or even if there is a prize in the first entrance 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 4 If not less than (S703: No), the process proceeds to S707. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first entrance 64 (S701: Yes) and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the special symbol 1 is reserved. The value (N1) of the ball counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S704). Then, a reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S705).

  The set number-of-spheres command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in an external output process (S1701) of a main process (see FIG. 53) described later executed by the MPU 201. Are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

  After setting the pending ball count command in the processing of S705, the first random number counter C1, first collision type counter C2, stop type selection counter C3, and small collision type updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above. Each value of the counter C5 is stored in the first one of the free reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (S706). In the process of S706, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the value, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, in the processing of S707 to S712, the same processing as the processing of S701 to S706 is executed for the winning of the second entrance 640. The only difference is that the holding process for the second special symbol is executed for the winning of the second entrance 640, and the other processes are the same. Then, when it is determined in the processing of S707 that the ball has not won the second entrance 640 (S707: No), after the processing of S712, a pre-reading processing is executed (S713). After that, this processing ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 44, the prefetching process (S713), which is one of the start winning processes (see S105 in FIG. 43), executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the prefetching process (S713).

  In the prefetching process (FIG. 44, S713), first, it is determined whether or not there is a new prize in the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (S801). As a result of the determination, when there is no new winning in the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (S801: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if there is a new prize in the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (S801: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the prize is a first special symbol prize (S802). ).

  In the processing of S802, when it is determined that the winning is the winning of the first special symbol (S802: Yes), the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1, the special symbol 1 big hit selection table 202b1, and the special symbol 1 small hit selection table 202e1. Based on the result, the lottery result, the big hit type and the small hit type are acquired (S803), and the process shifts to S804. In the process of S804, the winning information command including the big hit determination result, the big hit type, the small hit determination result, and the small hit type acquired in S803 (or S805) is set (S804), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S802 that the winning is a winning of the second special symbol (S802: No), the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2, the special symbol 2 big hit selection table 202b2, and the special symbol 2 small hit selection Based on the table 202e2, the lottery result, the big hit type, and the small hit type are acquired (S805), the process of S804 is executed, and this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 40, the ordinary symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the ordinary symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol change process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37), and the second symbol change display performed by the second symbol display device and the electric control attached to the second entrance 640 are performed. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the accessory.

  In the ordinary symbol variation process (FIG. 40, S106), first, it is determined whether or not the present is a hit with an ordinary symbol (second symbol) (S901). As the hit during the normal symbol (the second symbol), the display indicating the hit on the second symbol display device and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 are performed. In the middle of being included. If the result of the determination is that a normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S901: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not being hit (S901: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S902), and If the display mode is not fluctuating (S902: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times of suspension of the variable display in the ordinary symbol) is acquired (S903). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball counter 203f is greater than 0 (S904). If the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203f is 0 (S904). No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S904: Yes), the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 (S905).

  Next, the data stored in the ordinary symbol holding sphere storage area 203c is shifted (S906). In the process of S906, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the ordinary symbol reserved ball storage area 203c to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, in each area, such as the first area on hold → the execution area, the second area on hold → the first area on hold, the third area on hold → the second area on hold, the fourth area on the hold → third area on hold, etc. Shift data. After the data is shifted, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c is obtained (S907).

  Next, a lottery result is acquired based on the second hit random number table 202c (S908). In this control example, there is no distinction between the high probability state and the low probability state in the lottery of the ordinary symbols, and the probability of winning the ordinary symbol is always constant. Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 obtained in the process of S907 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table 202c. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "0 to 11", it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if the value is in the range of "12 to 239", the normal symbol is out of the pattern. Is determined (see FIG. 26D).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the lottery result of the ordinary symbol acquired by the processing of S908 is a hit of the ordinary symbol (S909), and when it is determined that the lottery is a hit of the ordinary symbol (S909: Yes), Is set (S910), and the process moves to S912. In the process of S910, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is completed, a setting is made so that a symbol of “」 ”is displayed as a stopped symbol (second symbol).

  In the process of S909, when it is determined that the symbol is out of the ordinary pattern (S909: No), the display mode at the time of the out of pattern is set (S911). In the process of S911, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is completed, a setting is made so that a symbol “x” is lit and displayed as a stopped symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of departure is completed, the processing shifts to S912.

  When the processing of S910 or S911 is completed, in the processing of S912, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state (S912). If the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time reduction state (S912: Yes), the time reduction medium hit flag 203q is set to ON (S913). Next, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display in the second symbol display device is set to 3 seconds (S914), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is not in the normal symbol time-saving state (S912: No), the variation time of the variation display on the second symbol display device is set to 4 seconds (S915), and this processing ends. As described above, except for during the special symbol jackpot, in the normal symbol time reduction state, the fluctuation display time is very short, “4 seconds → 3 seconds”, as compared with the normal symbol normal state. The ball enters the entrance 640 easily.

  On the other hand, in the process of S902, if the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S902: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed on the second symbol display device has elapsed. (S916). Note that the fluctuation time here is a time preset by the processing of S914 or the processing of S915 before the fluctuation display is started on the second symbol display device.

  In the processing of S916, if the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S916: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S916, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S916: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S917). In the process of S917, the lottery of the ordinary symbol is a hit, and if the display mode is set by the process of S910, the symbol “○” as the second symbol is stopped (displayed on the second symbol display device). ) Is set to be. On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is lost and the display mode is set by the processing of S911, the “X” symbol as the second symbol is stopped (lit) on the second symbol display device. It is set as follows. When the stop display is set by the process of S917, when the second symbol display updating process (see S1708) of the main process (see FIG. 53) is next executed, the variable display on the second symbol display device ends. Then, in the display mode set in the processing of S910 or the processing of S911, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped (lit) on the second symbol display device.

  Next, when the variable display being executed on the second symbol display device is started, the lottery result (the current lottery result) of the ordinary symbol performed by the ordinary symbol variation process (FIG. 45, S106) is changed to the ordinary symbol. Is determined (S918). If the current lottery result is a normal symbol hit (S918: Yes), the control unit sets an electric accessory control process (S919) and ends the process.

  Next, the electric accessory control process (S919) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. The electric accessory control process (S919) is a process executed in the normal symbol change process (see FIG. 45) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37). It is a flowchart which showed S919).

  In the electric accessory control process, first, it is determined whether or not the time-saving medium hit flag 203q is on (S1001). If the time saving medium hit flag 203q is on (S1001: Yes), the time saving medium hit flag 203q is set to off (S1002), and then it is determined whether or not the time saving is being performed (S1003). If the pachinko machine 10 is in a time-saving state (Yes in S1003), the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state of the ordinary design, so that the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened (for 3 seconds) and closed. (5 seconds) and open (3 seconds) (S1004), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, in S1001, if the time saving medium hit flag 203q is not on (that is, it is off) (S1001: Yes), or if it is not in time saving (S1003: No) in S1003, the pachinko machine 10 is normally designed. , The opening operation of the motorized accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is set to open (0.1 seconds), closed (0.1 seconds), and opened (0.1 seconds). (S1005, this process ends).

  As described above, in the normal symbol time reduction state, the opening operation of the second entrance 640 is “open (0.1 second), closed (0.1 second), open ( 0.1 second) → open (3 seconds), close (5 seconds), open (3 seconds) ”, so that the ball easily enters the second entrance 640.

  Further, when the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a is set by the electric accessory control process (S919), when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1706) of the main process (see FIG. 53) is executed next. Then, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started.

  Next, the through gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). This through gate passage processing (S107) is executed in the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 37), and it is determined whether or not a ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, and the ball has passed. In this case, the process is to acquire and hold the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

  In the through gate passage process (FIG. 47, S107), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed the ordinary symbol starting port (through gate) 67 (S1101). Here, the passage of the ball through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the ordinary symbol starting port (through gate) 67 (S1101: Yes), the value of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203f (the number M of times of the fluctuation display in the ordinary symbol) is acquired. (S1102). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the ordinary symbol holding ball counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S1103).

  If the ball passes through the ordinary symbol starting port (through gate) 67 (S1101: Yes) and the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S1103: Yes), the ordinary symbol retaining ball The value (M) of the number counter 203f is incremented by 1 (S1104). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the above-described timer interrupt process is stored in the first one of the free reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. (S1105). In the process of S1105, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the value, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area. When the processing in S1105 is completed, the general-purpose prefetching processing is executed (S1106).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 48, the general-purpose prefetching process will be described (S1106). FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ordinary figure prefetching process (S1106). In the ordinary figure pre-reading process (S1106 in FIG. 48), first, a preliminary determination based on the value of the second random number counter C4 newly stored in the ordinary symbol holding sphere storage area 203c is executed (S1201). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 newly stored in the process of S1105 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table 202c.

  Next, based on the result of the preliminary determination, a hit preliminary determination result and a fluctuation time determination result are acquired (S1202). After that, a general-purpose winning information command is set (S1203), the present processing is ended, and the flow returns to the through gate passing processing.

  Returning to FIG. 47, the description will be continued. When the ordinary figure pre-reading process (S1106) ends, it is then determined whether or not the present is a special symbol jackpot (S1107). If the result of the determination is that the special symbol is in a big hit (S1107: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is. If it is not during the special symbol big hit (S1107: No), it is determined whether or not the present is a small hit (S1108). If the result of the determination is that the player is hitting a small hit (S1108: Yes), the present process ends.

  If it is not a small hit (S1108: No), it is determined whether or not the second special symbol is changing (S1109). If the result of the determination is that the second special symbol is changing (S1109: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is. If the second special symbol is not fluctuating (S1109: No), it is determined whether or not the time is reduced (S1109). If the result of the determination is that it is during working hours (S1110: Yes), this processing is terminated. If it is not during the working hours (S1110: No), an error command is set (S1111), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 (S1101: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, the normal symbol holding ball number counter If the value (M) of 203f is not less than 4 (S1103: No), the general-purpose prefetching process (S1106) is skipped, the processes of S1107 to S1111 are executed, and this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 49, the V entrance passage process (S108) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the V entrance passage process (S108) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37).

  In the V entrance passage process (S108), it is first determined whether or not a small hit is being made (S1301). In the process of S1301, when it is determined that the small hit is occurring (S1301: Yes), a V entrance passage command is set (S1302), and the process ends. If it is not during the small hit (S1302: No), an error command is set (S1303) because the ball has entered the second variable winning device 650 despite the fact that it is not a small hit game. To end.

  The V entrance passage command set in the process of S1302 is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output process (S1701) of the main process (see FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 201. Are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the V entrance passage command, the sound lamp control device 113 counts the balls that have passed the V entrance and transmits a command for executing an effect based on the V entrance passage to the display control device 114. Thereby, it is possible to execute the effect during the small hit game based on the ball entering the second variable winning device 650 (see FIG. 12).

  Next, the V-pass process (S109) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the V passage processing (S109). The V passing process (S109) is a process executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37).

  In the V passing process, first, the V passing big hit type value stored in the V passing big hit type storage area 203m is acquired (S1401), and the V flag 203n indicating the acquired V passing big hit type is set to ON (S1401). S1402). Then, a V passing command is set (S1403).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the small hit type corresponds to the small hit B (S1404). In the process of S1404, when it is determined that the small hit B is applicable (S1404: Yes), an error command is set (S1405), and the process ends. In the present embodiment, it is the small hits A, C, D or E (that is, other than the small hit B) that the ball can pass through the V winning switch 650e3 of the second variable winning device 650. This is only when the small hits A, C, D or E (that is, other than the small hit B) are set. Therefore, when the small hit type value is the small hit B, when the V passing process (S1401) executed based on the ball passing through the V winning switch 650e3 is executed, the V winning switch 650e3 is illegally performed. This is considered to be the case when the ball was won. In this case, by setting an error command in the process of S1405, an error is output and an illegal action can be found.

  FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing an NMI interruption process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt process (S1501). I do.

  Note that the above-described NMI interrupt process is similarly executed in the payout control device 111, and the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 52, a description will be given of a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This start-up process is started by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S1601). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a wait process (one second in the present embodiment) is executed in order to wait until the sub-side control devices (the peripheral control devices such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) are in an operable state. (S1602). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1603).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 7) provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (S1604). If it is turned on (S1604: Yes), the process proceeds to S1612. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S1604: No), it is further determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1605), and if not, it is not stored (S1605: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown may not have been completed normally, the process also proceeds to S1612 in this case.

  If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1605: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1606). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1607: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off, the backed-up data has been destroyed, and the process also proceeds to S1612 in such a case. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as described later in the process of S1716 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S1612, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1612). Upon receiving the payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and enters a state in which ball payout control can be started. After transmitting the pay-out initialization command, main controller 110 executes an initialization process of RAM 203 (S1613, S1614).

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is opened, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is pressed at the time of execution of the startup processing, the RAM initialization processing (S1613, S1614) is executed. Similarly, the initialization process of the RAM 203 (S1613, S1614) is executed also when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the initialization processing of the RAM (S1613, S1614), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1613), and thereafter, the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1614). After the execution of the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process shifts to the process of S1610.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S1604: No), power-off occurrence information is stored (S1605: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like) is normal (S1605: Yes). S1607: Yes), the power-off information is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S1608). Next, a payout return command at the time of power restoration for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of driving power cutoff is transmitted (S1609), and the process proceeds to S1610. When the payout control device 111 receives the payout return command, the payout control device 111 is ready to start the ball payout control while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the process of S1610, the effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, an interrupt is permitted (S1611), and the process proceeds to a main process described later.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the start-up process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the main processing. In this main processing, main processing of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S1701 to S1709 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 ms, and the counter updating process of S1712 and S1713 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main process (see FIG. 53), first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37), output data such as a command stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is transmitted to the sub side. An external output process to be transmitted to each control device (peripheral control device) is executed (S1701). Specifically, the presence / absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading process in S101 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37) is determined. Send a prize ball command. In addition, a command to hold the number of balls set in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 38) and the start winning process (see FIG. 43) is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Also, the jackpot start command, the number of rounds command, and the jackpot end command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 54) are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1702). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by one, and is cleared to zero when the counter value reaches a maximum value (198 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in a corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the winning ball count signal and the abnormal payout signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1703). A jackpot control process for opening or closing the first specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the 1 variable winning device 65 is executed (S1704). In the jackpot control process, the first specific winning opening 65a is opened in each round of the jackpot state, and the maximum opening time of the first specific winning opening 65a has elapsed, or a predetermined number of balls have been won in the first specific winning opening 65a. Is determined. When any of these conditions is satisfied, the first specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the first specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1704) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 53), but may be executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37).

  Next, in the case of the special symbol small hit state, execution of various effects according to the small hit and small hit control processing for opening or closing the opening / closing door 650f1 of the second variable winning device 650 are executed ( S1705). In the small hit control process, the opening / closing door 650f1 is opened based on the opening scenario, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the opening / closing door 650f1 has elapsed or whether a predetermined number of balls have been won in the opening / closing door 650f1. When any one of these conditions is satisfied, the door 650f1 is closed. In the present embodiment, the small hit control process (S1705) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 53), but may be executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37).

  When the process of S1705 is completed, an electric auditors product opening / closing process for controlling the opening and closing of the electric auditors accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is executed (S1706). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is set by the electric accessory control process (S1005 in FIG. 46) executed in the normal symbol change process (see FIG. 45), Start opening / closing control of the object. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening operation set in the processing of S1004 or the processing of S1005 in the electric auditors goods control processing (S1005 in FIG. 46) ends.

  Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is executed (S1707). In the first symbol display update process, S405, S410, S412 of the normal variation start process (FIG. 40, S302) or the time reduction variation start process (FIG. 41, S303) executed in the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 39). When the fluctuation pattern is set by the processing of S505 or S505, S512, the fluctuation display according to the fluctuation pattern is started in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In the present embodiment, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the LED of the first symbol display device 37A, 37B is red until the fluctuation time elapses from the start of the fluctuation. Is turned off and the green LED is turned on. If the green LED is turned on, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is turned on, the blue LED is turned on. Is turned off and the red LED is turned on.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds. However, if the LED lighting color is changed every time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted every time the main processing is executed so that the player can confirm the change of the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. Note that the value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  In the first symbol display update process, the fluctuation set by the processing of S405, S410, S412 or the processing of S505, S510, S512 of the normal fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 40) or the time reduction start processing (see FIG. 41). When the fluctuating time corresponding to the pattern ends, the fluctuating display being executed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is ended, and the normal fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 40) or the time reduction fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 41). In the display mode set by the processing of S404, S409, S411 or the processing of S504, S509, S511, the stop symbol (first symbol) is stopped (lit) on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B.

  Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device is executed (S1708). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S914 or the process of S915 of the ordinary symbol variation process (see FIG. 45), the variation display is started on the second symbol display device. . As a result, in the second symbol display device, the variable display in which the symbol “O” and the symbol “X” as the second symbol are alternately turned on is performed. In the second symbol display updating process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the process of S917 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 45), the variation executed in the second symbol display device is performed. The display is terminated, and the stopped symbol (the second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted display) on the second symbol display device in the display mode set by the process of S910 or the process of S911 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 45). I do.

  Next, a storage device control process for setting the opening and closing of the storage valve 750a associated with the storage device 750 is executed (S1709).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1710). If power-off occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1710: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 sends a power failure signal. SG1 is not output, and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the current main process (S1711). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1711: Yes), the process proceeds to S1701, and the processes from S1701 onward are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the current main processing (S1711: No), the first time is reached until the predetermined time, that is, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing is reached. The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1712, S1713).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1712). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by one, and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in this embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1702 (S1713).

  Here, since the execution time of each processing of S1701 to S1709 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (ie, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4), and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In addition, in the process of S1710, if the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1710: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of the power failure or the power-off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 51 has been executed, the processing at the time of power-off after S1714 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1714), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to another control device (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113). (S1715). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is stored (S1716), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1717), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and the work area of the RAM 203 to be backed up.

  The process of S1710 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to the game state change performed in S1701 to S1709 or at the end of one cycle of the processes of S1712 and S1713 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main control device 110, the power-off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power-off state, the processing is performed after the startup processing is completed. The processing can be started from the processing of S1701. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1701, as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power-off, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, the stack pointer is not reset in the initialization process (S1601). By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the processing of S1701. Therefore, the control load on main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without erroneous operation or runaway of main controller 110.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S1704) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S1704). The jackpot control process (S1704) is executed in the main interrupt process (see FIG. 53), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot state, execution of various effects according to the jackpot or the first This is a process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a.

  In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether a special symbol jackpot is started (S1801). Specifically, if the big hit start flag 203h is set to ON by the processing of S219 of the special symbol change process (see FIG. 38), it is determined that the special symbol big hit is started. In the process of S1801, if a special symbol big hit is started (S1801: Yes), the big hit start flag 203h is set to off (S1802), and an opening command is set (S1803).

  The jackpot start command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is output during the external output process (S1701) of the main process (see FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. Upon receiving the jackpot start command, the sound ramp control device 113 transmits a display jackpot start command to the display control device 114. When the display jackpot start command is received by the display control device 114, an effect of starting a jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When the processing in S1803 ends, the storage release flag 203p is set to ON (S1804), and the processing ends.

  On the other hand, if the special symbol jackpot has not been started in the processing of S1801 (S1801: No), it is determined whether the special symbol jackpot is in progress (S1805). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the big hit game. Specifically, the determination is made based on whether or not the big hit flag 203i is on. In the processing of S1805, if it is not during the special symbol big hit (S1805: No), this processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1805, if the special symbol is in a big hit (S1805: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1806). If it is the start timing of a new round (S1806: Yes), the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is opened (S1807), and a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (S1807). S1808). After setting the number-of-rounds command, the process ends. The round number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is used as an audio lamp in the external output processing (S1701) of the main processing (see FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When receiving the round number command, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits a display round number command corresponding to the round number to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect.

  Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, when a continuous jackpot is executed in the audio lamp control device 113, a display round number command corresponding to the accumulated number of rounds is transmitted. Therefore, the accumulated number of rounds in the continuous big hit is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. This allows the player to recognize that the big hit has continued for a long time, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1806, if it is not the start timing of a new round (S1806: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is satisfied (S1809). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after opening the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65, or a predetermined number of balls (for example, It is determined that the closing condition is satisfied when a prize is won.

  In the processing of S1809, when the closing condition of the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is satisfied (S1809: Yes), the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is closed. Then, the present process ends. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is not satisfied (S1809: No), it is determined whether or not it is the timing to end the big hit (S1811). Specifically, when the special game state (all 16 rounds) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual is completed, it is determined that it is time to end the big hit.

  In the process of S1811, if it is the timing of ending the big hit (S1811: Yes), the big hit end command is set (S1812), and the big hit flag 203i is turned off (S1813).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the special game being executed was the big hit B (S1814). In the process of S1814, when it is determined that the hit is not the big hit B (7R time saving no big hit) (S1814: No), the middle time saving counter 203g is set to 1 (S1815), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1814 that the hit has been the big hit B (7R time short hit) (S1814: Yes), the process of S1815 is skipped and the present process ends.

  The jackpot end command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is output during the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. Upon receiving the jackpot end command, the sound ramp control device 113 selects a jackpot end effect display mode based on the winning information stored in the special figure winning information storage area 223a of the RAM 223. Then, a big hit end command for display corresponding to the selected big hit end display mode is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display jackpot end command is received by the display control device 114, the effect of the jackpot end is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  Next, the small hit control process (S1705) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the small hit control process (S1705) executed in the main process (see FIG. 53). The small hit control process (S1705) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 53). When the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol small hit state, execution of various effects according to the small hit, and This is a process for opening or closing the opening / closing door 650f1 of the two-variable winning device 650.

  In the small hit control process, first, it is determined whether the small hit of the special symbol is started (S1901). Specifically, if the small hit start flag 203j is set to ON in the small hit start setting process (see FIG. 42) in S610, it is determined that the small hit of the special symbol is started. In the process of S1901, when the small hit of the special symbol is started (S1901: Yes), the small hit start flag 203j is turned off (S1902), and the small hit start command is set (S1903).

  The small hit start command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is output in the external output process (S1701) of the main process (see FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the small hit start command, the sound ramp control device 113 transmits a small hit start command for display to the display control device 114. When the display small hit start command is received by the display control device 114, an effect of starting small hit is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  When the processing of S1903 is completed, the V inlet solenoid 209a and the flow path solenoid 209c are set to ON based on the opening scenario (S1904), the operation of the staying member 650n is started (S1905), and this processing ends.

  The open scenario referred to in the process of S1904 is set in the small hit start setting process (see FIG. 42), and the open scenario of the V inlet solenoid 209a is set regardless of the small hit type. The opening scenario of the solenoid 209c is set only when the small hit type is A, C, D or E. Therefore, in all the small hit games, the opening / closing door 650f1 of the second variable winning device 650 is opened, and it becomes possible to make a ball enter the second variable winning device 650. On the other hand, only in the small hits A, C, D or E where the flow path solenoid 209c is turned on, the ball that has entered the second variable winning device 650 can flow down to the special discharge flow path 650e2. That is, the small hits A, C, D or E are the small hit types to which the big hit is given, and the small hits B are the small hit types to which the big hit is not given.

  In addition, in the process of S1905, the operation of the staying member 650n is started (the staying solenoid 209b is turned on), so that one ball can stay in the distribution destination area 650h3.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1901, when it is not the timing to start the small win of the special symbol (S1901: No), it is determined whether or not the special symbol is being hit (S1906). During the special symbol small hit, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying a special symbol small hit (including a special symbol small hit game), and During the predetermined time after the end of the special symbol small hit game. Specifically, the determination is made based on whether or not the small hitting flag 203k is ON. In the processing of S1906, if it is not during the small win of the special symbol (S1906: No), this processing ends as it is.

  In the processing of S1906, when it is determined that the special symbol is being hit (S1906: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the closing condition of the V entrance is satisfied (S1907). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 6.5 seconds) has elapsed after the opening and closing door 650f1 of the second variable winning device 650 has been opened, or a predetermined number of balls (for example, When a prize is won, it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

  The closing condition may be that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls have entered the second specific winning opening 650a.

  In the process of S1907, if the closing condition of the opening / closing door 650f1 of the second variable winning device 650 is satisfied (S1907: Yes), the V inlet solenoid 209a is closed to close the opening / closing door 650f1 of the second variable winning device 650. It is set to off (S1908), and the staying solenoid 209b is turned off to end the operation of the staying member 650n (S1909), and this processing ends. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the opening / closing door 650f1 of the second variable winning device 650 is not satisfied (S1907: No), it is determined whether or not it is the timing of the end of the small hit (S1910). Specifically, it is determined that the timing of the end of the small hit is reached after a predetermined time has elapsed (3 seconds in the present control example) after the above-described V inlet closing condition is satisfied. Thereby, the small hitting end process (turning off of the flow path solenoid 209c) can be executed after the operation of the staying member 650n is finished, so that the ball staying in the distribution destination area 650h3 is transferred to the V winning switch 650e3. The ball can be surely entered.

  In the process of S1910, if it is the timing of the end of the small hit (S1910: Yes), the small hit flag 203k is set to off (S1911), the small hit end process is executed (S1912), and each solenoid is opened. The scenario is cleared (S1913), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1910, if it is not the timing of the end of the small hit (S1910: No), this processing ends as it is.

  Here, the small hit end processing (S1912) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the small hit end processing (S1912). The small hit end process (S1912) is a process executed when it is determined in the small hit control process that it is the timing of the end of the small hit.

  In the small hit end processing (S1912), first, the flow path solenoid 209c is turned off (S2001), and it is determined whether or not the V flag 203n is on (S2002). In the processing of S2002, when it is determined that the V flag 203n is ON (S2002: Yes), the ball has passed the V winning switch 650e3 of the second variable winning device 650 during the small hit game, A process for starting the execution of the jackpot game based on the passage of the V winning switch 650e3 is performed.

  Specifically, the opening scenario of the first specific winning opening 65a is set based on the jackpot type corresponding to the V flag 203n (S2003), and the start of the jackpot is set based on the jackpot type corresponding to the V flag 203n (S2003). S2004). Next, the big hit start flag 203h and the big hit flag 203i are set on (S2005), and the V flag 203n is set off (S2006). Then, the counter 230g during time reduction is set to 0 (S2007), the value of the jackpot type value at the time of passing V stored in the jackpot type storing area at the time of V passing 203m is cleared (S2008), and this processing is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2002 that the V flag 203n is not turned on (S2002: No), it means that the small hit ball has not passed through the V winning switch 650e3, so that no big hit is given. In order to end, a small hit end command is set (S2009). After that, the processing of S2008 is executed, and this processing ends.

  The small hit end command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is output in the external output process (S1701) of the main process (see FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the jackpot end command, the sound ramp control device 113 selects a jackpot end effect display mode based on the winning information stored in the special figure winning information storage area 223a of the RAM 223. Then, a big hit end command for display corresponding to the selected big hit end display mode is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display jackpot end command is received by the display control device 114, the effect of the jackpot end is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  Next, the electric accessory opening / closing process (S1706) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the electric accessory opening / closing process (S1706) executed in the main process (see FIG. 53). The electric accessory opening / closing process (S1706) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 53), and is a process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640.

  In the electric accessory opening / closing process, first, it is determined whether or not the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a is set (S2101). The opening operation of the electric accessory 640a is set by the electric accessory control process (S1005 in FIG. 46) executed in the normal symbol change process (see FIG. 45). In the process of S2101, if the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a is not set (S2101: No), the process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2101, when the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a is set (S2101: Yes), it is determined whether it is the first opening timing of the electric accessory 640a (S2102). If it is determined in the processing of S2102 that it is the first opening timing of the electric accessory 640a (S2102: Yes), the opening of the electric accessory 640a is set (S2103), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2102 that it is not the first opening timing of the electric accessory 640a (S2102: No), then it is determined whether it is the first closing timing of the electric accessory 640a. (S2104). When it is determined that it is the first closing timing of the electric accessory 640a (S2104: Yes), the closing of the electric accessory 640a is set (S2105), and it is then determined whether the time reduction operation is being performed (S2106). ). If it is determined that the time saving operation is not being performed in the process of S2106 (S2106: No), the process ends. If it is determined in the processing of S2106 that the time saving operation is being performed (S2106: Yes), a close command is set (S2107), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2104 that it is not the first closing timing of the electric accessory 640a (S2104: No), then it is determined whether it is the second opening timing of the electric accessory 640a. (S2108). If it is determined that it is the second opening timing of the electric accessory 640a (S2108: Yes), the opening of the electric accessory 640a is set (S2109), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2108 that it is not the second opening timing of the electric accessory 640a (S2108: No), then it is determined whether it is the second closing timing of the electric accessory 640a. (S2110). When it is determined that it is not the second closing timing of the electric accessory 640a (S2110: No), it is next determined whether a ball has entered the second entrance 640 (S2111). If it is determined that the ball has not entered the second entrance 640 (S2111: No), this process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S2110 that it is the second closing timing of the electric accessory 640a (S2108: Yes), and when it is determined in S2111 that the ball has entered the second entrance 640. (S2111: Yes), the closing of the electric accessory 640a is set (S2112). Then, the setting of the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a is cleared (S2113), and this processing ends.

  Next, the storage device control process (S1709) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing a storage device control process (S1709) executed in the main process (see FIG. 53). This storage device control processing (S1709) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 53), and is processing for setting the opening and closing of the storage valve 750a associated with the storage device 750.

  In the storage device control processing, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the release counter 203pa is greater than 1 (S2201). If it is determined that the value of the release counter 203pa is not greater than 1 (that is, it is 0 or 1) (S2201: No), then it is determined whether the storage release flag 203p is on (S2202). If it is determined that the switch is on (S2202: Yes), storage release (that is, opening of the storage valve 750a) is set (S2203). Then, the value of the release counter 203pa is set to 1, and the process shifts to S2205. On the other hand, in the process of S2201, if it is determined that the value of the release counter 203pa is greater than 1 (S2201: Yes), the process of S2201 to S2204 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S2205.

  In the processing of S2205, it is determined whether or not the value of the cancellation counter 203pa is 25000 (S2205). If it is determined that the value of the release counter 203pa is not 25000 (S2205: No), the value of the release counter 203pa is incremented by 1 (S2206), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2205, when it is determined that the value of the release counter 203pa is 25000 (S2205: Yes), the storage close (that is, the storage valve 750a is closed) is set (S2207), and the storage release flag 203p is set. It is set to off (S2208). Next, the value of the release counter 203pa is set to 0, and this processing ends.

<Regarding the control processing of the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processes of the MPU 221 are roughly classified into a start-up process started when the power is turned on, and a main process executed after the start-up process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 59, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S3001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is ON, the current startup processing is caused by a momentary voltage drop (a momentary power failure, so-called “momentary power failure”), and the power-off processing in S3119 (see FIG. 60). It is determined whether the process is started during the execution of () (S3002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 60, upon receiving the power-off command from main controller 110 (see S3116 in FIG. 60), sound lamp control device 113 executes the power-off process in S3119. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is performed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing of S3119 is being performed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing flag.

  If the power-off processing flag is off (S3002: No), this startup processing is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure, and the power-off processing in S3119 is performed. It is started after the execution of the process is completed, or started only by resetting the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S3003).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S3006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, the data is not destroyed in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data is destroyed in the RAM 223. If the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S3003: Yes), the process proceeds to S3004, and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S3003: No), the process proceeds to S3008.

  If the current startup process is started after the power is completely shut off, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the storage in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off. ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S3003: Yes), and the flow shifts to S3004. On the other hand, this start-up processing is started after an instantaneous power failure occurs and after the execution of the power-off processing in S3119 is completed, or is reset only to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Is started, the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so that the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S3003: No), and the flow shifts to S3008.

  If the power-off processing flag is on (S3002: Yes), this startup processing is performed after the momentary power failure, and during the execution of the power-off processing in S3119, the audio lamp control device 113 Of the MPU 221 has been reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being performed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct. Therefore, in such a case, since control cannot be continued, the process proceeds to S3004 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S3004, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S3004). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is "0FFh". If "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. By this read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S3005: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223, and the RAM destruction check data is set (S3006). By confirming the keyword “55AAh” written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data destruction. On the other hand, if an abnormality of the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S3005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S3007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the sound may be output from the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message. It may be.

  In the process of S3008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S3008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process is performed in S3119 (see S3118 in FIG. 60). In other words, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process in S3119 is executed, the process of S3008 in the state in which the power-off flag is on is that the current startup process is instantaneous. This is a case where the process is started after the occurrence of the power failure and in a state where the execution of the power-off process in S3119 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S3008: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the sound ramp control device 113 (S3009), and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S3010), and then the interruption is performed. The permission is set (S3011), and the process proceeds to the main processing. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, the reason why the process of step S3008 is reached after the power-off flag is turned off is that the start-up process of this time is started after the power is completely cut off, for example, and the process of step S3008 is performed via the processes of steps S3004 to S3006. This is the case where the processing has been reached or the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 has been reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like and started. Therefore, in such a case (S3008: No), the process skips S3009, which is the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, shifts the process to S3010, and sets the initial value of the RAM 223 (S3010). Next, interrupt permission is set (S3011), and the process proceeds to main processing.

  It should be noted that the reason why the clearing process of S3009 is skipped is that when the process from S3004 to the process of S3008 is performed via the process of S3006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S3004. When the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset only due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is stored without being cleared, thereby saving the sound lamp control device 113. This is because the control can be continued.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the main processing. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 ms or more has elapsed since the main process was started or the current process of S3101 was executed (S3101). If not (S3101: No), the process proceeds to S3112 without performing the processes in S3102 to S3111. In the process of S3101, whether or not 1 ms has elapsed is mainly determined in S3102 to S3111 for display (production), and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 ms). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination processing in S3112, the variable display setting processing in S3113, the effect state setting processing in S3114, and the specific effect setting processing in S3115 in a short cycle. By executing the process of S3112 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of a command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the process of S3113 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process is Based on this, it is possible to make settings relating to the fluctuation effect without delay. In addition, by executing the process of S3114 in a short cycle, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is changed to the display content corresponding to the current game state without delay based on the command received by the command determination process. Can be done.

  If 1 ms or more has elapsed in the process of S3101 (S3101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S3103 to S3111 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S3102). ). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the output of each lamp are set so as to be the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the processing of S3108 to be described later (S3103), and thereafter, the power-on notification processing is executed (S3104). The power-on notification processing is to provide notification that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Is Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S3105 without performing notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S3105, a customer waiting effect process is executed, and thereafter, a held number display update process is executed (S3106). In the customer waiting effect process, when the pachinko machine 10 has not been played by the player for a predetermined period of time, a setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is used as a command for display control. Sent to device 114. In the reserved number display update process, a process of lighting a reserved lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is performed.

  After that, a frame button input monitoring / production process is executed (S3107). This frame button input monitoring / production process monitors the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the production effect, and responds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting to perform an effect. In this process, when an operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a display command corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 is set in the display control device 114.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process is completed, a lamp editing process is executed (S3108), and then a sound editing / output process is executed (S3109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, an output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S3109, a liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S3110). In the liquid crystal effect execution management processing, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. The lamp editing process of S3108 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing / output processing in S3109 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

  After the counter update process (S3111), a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S3112). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  Next, the process proceeds to S3113. In the process of S3113, a variable display setting process is executed (S3113). In the variation display setting process, a variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute the variation effect. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of the variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  Next, the processing shifts to S3114. In the process of S3114, an effect state setting process is executed (S3114). In this effect state setting process, an effect state for setting each effect mode (third symbol display mode, reserved symbol display mode) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to a game state is set. The process is executed, and a display effect state command for display is generated and set based on the set effect state. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The effect state setting process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  When the processing in S3114 ends, the flow shifts to the processing in S3115. In the process of S3115, a specific effect setting process is executed (S3115). In the specific effect setting process, a process for setting an effect different from a variable effect for indicating a lottery result of each symbol (special figure 1, special figure 2, general figure) is executed. The specific effect setting processing will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  Then, when the specific effect setting processing is completed, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S3116). The power-off information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S3116 (S3116: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S3118), and the power-off processing is executed (S3119). After the execution of the power-off process, the power-off process-in-progress flag is turned off (S3120), and then the process is in an infinite loop. In the power-off process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. Also, the storage of the information of the occurrence of the power interruption is deleted.

  On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S3116 (S3116: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S3117), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S3117: No), the process returns to S3101 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S3117: Yes), the processing is executed in an infinite loop to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main processing is not executed, and thereafter the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, the player can call a clerk of the hall or the like and request a repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM breakdown.

  Next, the command determination process (S3112) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S3112). This command determination processing (S3112) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. It is processing for.

  In the command determination process (FIG. 61, S3112), first, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main control device 110 is read and analyzed from a command storage area (not shown) provided in the RAM 223. It is determined whether a fluctuation pattern related command has been received (S3201). The fluctuation pattern related command is a command for notifying a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) of a special symbol or a command for notifying a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) of a normal symbol. The selected variation pattern (variation time) is output corresponding to each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, or the normal symbol.

  In the processing of S3201, if it is determined that the variation pattern related command has been received (S3201: Yes), the variation pattern related processing (S3202) is executed. This variation pattern-related processing is used to extract a variation pattern based on the variation pattern-related command output (received) from the main control device 110, and to cause the display control device 114 to execute an effect display. Here, the variation pattern-related processing (S3202) will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variation pattern-related processing (S3202). In the variation pattern-related processing (S3202), it is determined which pattern the variation pattern command received this time corresponds to, and the processing corresponding to the received symbol is executed based on the determination result. . In this variation pattern-related processing (S3202), it is determined whether the variation pattern-related command received this time is a variation pattern command for a special symbol (special figure) (S3301). If it is determined in the processing of S3301 that the command is a special figure variation pattern command (S3301: Yes), the process proceeds to S3302.

  In the process of S3302, when it is determined that the received variation pattern command is a special figure 2 variation pattern command (S3302: Yes), first, as illustrated in FIG. 62, it is determined whether the variation pattern received this time is a special figure variation pattern command. It does (S3301). Here, it is determined whether the variation pattern received this time is a variation pattern command for special figure 2 (S3302). If it is determined that the variation pattern command is a variation pattern command for special figure 2 (S3302: Yes), then The special figure 2 change flag 223s is set to ON (S3303), the special figure change start flag is set to ON, and a change pattern is extracted from the received command (S3305), while the special figure 2 change pattern command is set. Is done.

  The variation start flag 223d (variation start flag for special figure) provided in the variation display of the special symbol is set to ON, the variation pattern type is extracted from the received variation pattern command (S3305), and the present process ends. . On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3301 that the variation pattern-related command received this time is not a special figure variation pattern command, the general figure variation start flag 223u is set to ON (S3306), and the received variation pattern The variation pattern type is extracted from the command (S3307), and the process ends. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223, and the fact that the variation pattern type is a special symbol variation pattern type for each special symbol type (corresponding first special symbol, second special symbol, ordinary symbol). In a variable display setting process (see FIG. 66) described later, the start of the special symbol variable display effect and the display mode of the special symbol variable display effect are stored in the variable display setting process (see FIG. 66) described later. It is used when notifying (when setting a variation pattern command for displaying a special symbol).

  Referring back to FIG. 61, the description will be continued. In the process of S3201, if it is determined that the variation pattern related command has not been received (S3201: No), it is determined whether or not a stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S3203). If it is determined that the stop type command (special figure 1 stop type command, or special figure 2 stop type command, or general figure stop type command) has been received (S3203: Yes), it corresponds to the type of the received command. The stop type selection flag 223e is set to ON (S3204). Specifically, when the special figure 1 stop type command is received, the stop type selection flag 223e corresponding to the first special symbol is set to ON, and when the special figure 2 stop type command is received, the second special type The stop type selection flag 223e corresponding to the symbol is set to ON, and when a general symbol stop type command is received, the stop type selection flag 223e corresponding to the ordinary symbol is set ON.

  After finishing the process of S3204, next, the type of stop (one of complete out (out), out of reach, small hit, big hit (hit)) is extracted from the received stop type command (S3205), and this process is executed. finish. The stop type extracted in the process of S3205 is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113. It is referred to when a later-described variable display setting process (see FIG. 66) is executed, and is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display controller 114 of the stop type of the variable effect.

  If it is determined in the process of S3203 that the stop type command has not been received (S3203: No), it is determined whether or not a pending ball count command has been received from the main control device 110 (S3206). When it is determined that the reserved ball number command has been received (S3206: Yes), the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110 included in the received reserved ball number command. (I.e., the number of spheres on the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is extracted, and the corresponding value provided in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in accordance with the extracted counter value. The counter value is updated (S3207). More specifically, when the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is extracted, the extracted counter value is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223, and the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is stored. When the value is extracted, the extracted counter value is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c.

  Note that in the process of S3207. When a normal symbol holding ball number command indicating the number of holding balls of a normal symbol is received, a value of a normal symbol holding ball number counter (not shown) (that is, the number of holding balls in the variable display of the normal symbol) is extracted and extracted. The corresponding counter value provided in the RAM 223 of the sound ramp control device 113 is also updated according to the counter value thus set.

  When the process of S3207 is completed, a process related to the number of reserved balls is executed (S3208). In the reserved ball count related process (S3208), a process for setting various flags and display commands based on the reserved ball count in the special figure 2 is executed. Here, the processing related to the number of reserved balls (S3208) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the contents of the reserved ball number related processing (S3208).

  When the reserved ball count related processing (S3208) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not there is an update of the special 2 (special figure 2) reserved ball count (S3401). Here, if it is determined that there is no update of the special 2 reserved ball count (S3401: No), that is, if the currently received reserved ball number command is not the reserved ball number of the special figure 2, the present process is terminated as it is. . On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3401 that the number of special 2 reserved balls has been updated (S3401: Yes), it is determined whether the number of special 2 reserved balls has been updated to 1 (S3402). Here, it is determined whether the number of special 2 reserved balls has been updated to 1, that is, whether the number of special 2 reserved balls has shifted from "0" to "1", that is, whether there has been no special 2 reserved balls or not. I do.

  In the process of S3402, when it is determined that the number of special 2 reserved balls has been updated to 1 (S3402: Yes), the special 2 reserved flag 223n is set to ON, and then the end effect execution flag 223x is set to ON. It is determined whether it has been performed (S3404). If it is determined that the end effect execution flag 223x is set to ON, that is, if it is determined that the end effect (see FIG. 19B) is being executed on the third symbol display device 81, (S3404: Yes), the display victory command is set (S3405), and this processing ends.

  When the display victory command is set, the character of "victory" is displayed as the effect of the end effect performed by the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 20A), which is advantageous to the player. It is notified that the state continues. Note that if a ball wins in special figure 2 during the period in which the end effect is being executed, the effect may be switched even during the end effect, or the effect may be determined in advance as in the present embodiment. At the end of the end effect performed for a given period, it may be notified that the ball has won the special figure 2.

  Further, as in the present embodiment, the timing at which the ball has won the special figure 2 (second ball entrance 640) and the effect that the ball has won the special figure 2 (second ball entrance 640) as an effect are notified. If there is a possibility that a time lag may occur at the timing of the execution, for example, during the end effect execution period, the reserved symbol for displaying the number of reserved balls of the special figure 2 may be deleted. Thus, it is possible to prevent the player from being notified of the effect of the end effect due to the increase in the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 even though the end effect is continuing.

  Returning to FIG. 63, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S3402 that the number of special 2 reserved balls has not been updated to 1 (S3402: No), it is next determined whether the number of special 2 reserved balls has been updated to the upper limit (4) (S3406). If it is determined that the information has been updated (S3406: Yes), the special 2 suspension upper limit flag 223p is set to ON (S3407: Yes), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3406 that the number of special 2 reserved balls has not been updated to the upper limit, the processing of S3407 is skipped and the present processing ends.

  Here, the pending ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (start winning) or when the ball passes through the through gate 67. Therefore, every time there is a winning start, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the audio lamp control device 113 are changed by the processing of S2210 to the main control device. 110 can be adjusted to the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e. Therefore, due to the influence of noise or the like, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed to the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 or the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223c. Even if the value deviates from the value of the symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e, if the reserved ball number command is notified based on the start winning, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b or the special symbol of the sound lamp control device 113 is provided. The value of the 2 reserved balls counter 223c can be corrected to match the value of the special symbol 1 reserved balls counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved balls counter 203e of the main controller 110.

  If it is determined in the processing of S3206 that the pending ball count command has not been received (S3206: No), it is determined whether a winning information related command has been received from the main control device 110 (S3209). In the process of S3209, when it is determined that the prize information related command has been received (S3209: Yes), the prize information related process is executed (S3210). In the winning information-related processing (S3210), setting of various flags and setting of various counters that are referred to for setting various effects performed by the third symbol display device 81 are performed. Thereby, based on the lottery result of the special symbol on hold, before the change of the special symbol on hold is started (that is, the special symbol executed before the change of the target special symbol) During the variable display), it is possible to execute an effect indicating the lottery result of the special symbol that has transmitted the winning information command, and the lottery result of one special symbol is provided to the player by using the variable display period of a plurality of special symbols. A suggestion can be given, and the effect of the production can be enhanced.

  Here, the winning information related processing (S3210) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the contents of the winning information-related processing (S3210). When the prize information related processing (S3210) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the prize information related command received this time is a prize information command relating to a special figure (special symbol) (S3501). If it is determined that the command is a prize information command related to a special figure (S3501: Yes), the received prize information command is stored in the special figure prize information storage area 223a (S3502), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S3501, if it is determined that the prize information related command received this time is not a prize information command relating to a special figure (special symbol) (a prize information command relating to a general figure) (S3501: No), a prize is won. The information is stored in the public figure prize information storage area 223t (S3503), and the process ends.

  Note that, in a gaming machine on which special symbol prize information (special symbol pre-reading) and ordinary symbol prize information (common symbol pre-reading) are executed, the main control device 110 outputs the voice lamp control device 113. When the output timings of the respective winning information commands become the same, when determining by the winning information related processing (S3210), priorities are set for the respective winning information commands, and only the winning information commands with a higher priority are determined. It may be configured as follows. This eliminates the need to execute different determination processing for each of the winning information commands, thereby reducing the processing load, and making the type and number of the winning information commands determined by the voice lamp control device 113 irregular. Therefore, the effect that the player does not intend can be easily executed.

  That is, the prize information included in the prize information command is obtained when the main controller 110 enters the ball into each of the entrances (the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640) or the through gate 67. Each of the counter values obtained is a result of performing a determination in advance before the lottery based on the entering ball is performed or information indicating a value based on the counter value. Even if the player does not reliably acquire the prize information command, there is no hindrance to the game, so if the predetermined condition is satisfied (the special prize information command and the general-purpose prize information command are received at the same time) In this case, the above-described effect can be obtained by intentionally not acquiring one of the winning information commands. Further, in a configuration in which a plurality of conditions (balls) for obtaining one symbol (first special symbol) exist, such as the left first ball entrance 64a and the right first ball entrance 64b of the present embodiment, a prize is won. The information command includes information that allows the voice lamp control device 113 to identify the winning information command based on which of the acquisition conditions is satisfied, and performs processing based on the winning information command based on the identification result. May be varied. Specifically, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives a winning information command based on a ball entering the first left ball entrance 64a, an effect based on the received winning information command (a so-called look-ahead effect). May be performed more frequently than when a prize information command based on a ball entering the first right ball entrance 64b is received. This makes it possible to easily change the frequency at which the pre-reading effect is executed even for the same first special symbol. According to the configuration shown in the example described above, during a game aiming at the left first entrance 64a (left-handed game), a prefetch effect based on the first special symbol can be executed (frequently executed), and the right first During a game aiming at the entrance 64b (right-handed game), the prefetching effect based on the first special symbol may be difficult to execute (can be executed with a low probability). Thereby, it is possible to set an effect mode according to the game state.

  Referring back to FIG. 61, the description will be continued. In the process of S3209, when it is determined that the winning information related command has not been received (S3209: No), it is determined whether the next winning related command has been received (S3211). When a hit-related command is received (S3211: Yes), a hit-related process (S3212) is executed.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 65, the hit-related processing (S3212) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the hit-related processing (S3212). The hit-related process (S3212) is a process executed when it is determined in the command determination process (see FIG. 61) that a hit-related command has been received.

  In the hit-related process, first, it is determined whether or not a big hit start command has been received (S3601). If it is determined that the jackpot start command has been received (S3601: Yes), a display jackpot start command is set (S3602), and this processing ends. The display jackpot start command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S3102) of the main process (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. When receiving the display jackpot start command, the display control device 114 displays an effect indicating (notifying) the start of the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot start command has not been received (S3601: No), then it is determined whether a round number command has been received (S3603). In the process of S3603, when it is determined that the round number command has been received (S3603: Yes), 1 is added to the round number accumulation counter (S3604). After that, a display round number command is set based on the round number accumulation counter (S3605), and the process ends.

  If it is determined in the processing of S3603 that the round number command has not been received (S3603: No), it is determined whether or not a jackpot end command has been received (S3606). In the process of S3606, when it is determined that the big hit end command has been received (S3606: Yes), a big hit end command for display is set (S3607), and this process ends.

  In the process of S3606, when it is determined that the big hit end command has not been received (S3606: No), it is determined whether or not the small hit start command has been received (S3608).

  In the process of S3608, if it is determined that the small hit start command has been received (S3608: Yes), the small hit start command for display is set based on the small hit type (S3609), and this process ends. If it is determined in the processing of S3608 that the small hit start command has not been received (S3608: No), it is determined whether a small hit end command has been received (S3610).

  In the process of S3610, when it is determined that the small hit end command has been received (S3610: Yes), a display small hit end command is set to execute an effect indicating the end of the small hit game (S3611). Then, the present process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3610 that the small hit end command has not been received (S3610: No), it is determined whether or not a V-pass command has been received (S3612).

  If it is determined in the processing of S3612 that the V-pass command has been received (S3612: Yes), a process based on the ball entry into the V-win switch 650e3 of the second variable winning device 650 is executed, and the display V-pass command is displayed. Is set (S3613), and this process ends. In the present embodiment, there is provided a measuring means for measuring the number of times the V-pass command has been received during the period in which the connected-in-flight flag 223i is set to ON. The V-pass command can be set. Specifically, the display V-pass command is set so that the privilege effect is executed only when the number of times of measurement by the measuring means exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 10 times). This allows the player to aim for more V passes, and allows the player to enthusiastically play the game.

  Note that other conditions may be set as conditions for setting the content of the display V pass command. For example, the number of small hit games that did not pass through V and the number of small hit games that passed V are respectively set. A means for measuring and calculating the ratio may be provided, and the content of the display V-pass command may be set based on the ratio calculated by the means. Thereby, a player who has performed many small hit games that do not pass through V performs an effect that congratulates the player when V passes, or a player that performs small hit games that have passed V at a high rate. Or an effect that congratulates him or her.

  If it is determined in the processing of S3612 that the V-pass command has not been received (S3612: No), this processing ends.

  Referring back to FIG. 61, the description will be continued. In the process of S3211, if it is determined that a hit-related command has not been received (S3211: No), it is next determined whether a notification command has been received (S3213). If it is determined that the notification command has been received in the process of S3213 (S3213: Yes), the notification voice is set, the display command for notification is set (S3214), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3213, when it is determined that the notification command has not been received (S3213: No), it is determined whether a status command has been received (S3215). If it is determined that the status command has been received (S3215: Yes), the status information based on the received status command is stored in the status storage area 223k (S3216), and the process ends. The status commands received here include a normal status command for indicating that the gaming state is the normal status, a big hit status command for indicating that the gaming status is the big hit status, and a gaming status of the small hit status. A small hitting state command to indicate that the game is in progress, a time saving state command to indicate that the gaming state is the time saving state, that the electric accessory 640a is operating, and how many times the operation is being performed. Is a state command related to a game state that can be grasped on the main control device 110 side, such as an operation state command for indicating the game state.

  The state command described above is configured to be received from main controller 110 when the gaming state is shifted. Thus, it is possible to suppress the process of determining the content of the received status command from being complicated and reduce the processing load. When a power failure or the like occurs and the data in the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is erased, the status command currently set in the power failure recovery processing is output. Note that the output timing of the state command is not limited to this, and the currently set gaming state may be periodically output, or the gaming state satisfies a specific output condition without being shifted. In such a case (for example, at the timing when a predetermined round is reached during a jackpot game, or at the timing when the number of times the special symbol changes reaches a predetermined number in the normal state), a state command may be output. Thereby, the current game state can be grasped more reliably on the sound lamp control device 113 side.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3215 that no status command has been received (S3215: No), then processing according to another command is executed (S3217). In the process of S3217, for example, it is determined whether a stop command has been received from the main control device 110. If it is determined that the stop command has been received, a display stop command is set based on the received command, When a ball entry command is set based on the fact that a ball has entered a ball entry port provided on the board 13, the number of entered balls is accumulated for each type of entry port where the ball has entered. , A process of setting the number-of-balls-for-display command.

  Next, the variable display setting process (S3113) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting processing (S3113). The variable display setting process (S3113) is one of the main processes (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. As described above, the variable display setting process (see FIG. 66) is a process executed to display a variable display effect on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, in the present embodiment, each symbol (special figure 1, special figure 2, ordinary figure) corresponding to the main symbol mainly rendered and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the set rendering state. Designed to be variable. In the variation display setting process, a variation pattern command for display is set for each of the above-described symbols, and the display control device 114 is notified. Then, the main symbol (the symbol to be displayed in the first display area Dm) and the secondary symbol (the second symbol) are displayed by the display control device 114 based on the received display variation pattern command and the content of the received display effect state command. The effect display corresponding to the symbol (the symbol to be displayed in the display area Dn) is displayed. Thus, the processing load of the sound lamp control device 113 can be reduced in a gaming machine in which different effect displays are performed corresponding to a plurality of effect states.

  In the variation display setting process (S3113), first, it is determined whether the special figure variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S3701). When it is determined that the special figure change start flag 223d is off (S3701: No), the process shifts to the step S3707 because the change pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure change start flag 223d is on (S3701: Yes), the detailed mode of the change display of the current special symbol based on the change pattern command received from the main controller 110 is described. Of each of S3702 to S3706 for determining the

  More specifically, first, the special figure change start flag 223d is set to off (S3702), and then the extracted change pattern is acquired (S3703), and it is determined whether the time reduction flag 223g is on (S3703). S3704). If it is determined in the process of S3704 that the mid-hours flag 223g is on (S3704: Yes), then the mid-hours flag is set to off (S3705), and a special figure display variation pattern command is set (S3705). S3706), and shifts to the processing of S3707. On the other hand, in the process of S3704, if it is determined that the mid-hours flag 223g is not on (is off) (S3704: No), the process of S3705 is skipped and the process of S3706 is executed.

  When the process of S3706 is executed, 1 is subtracted from the value of the corresponding special symbol reserved ball number counter (special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b or special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c), and the subtracted value is obtained. Based on this, the data in the special figure prize information storage area 223a included in the command storage area is shifted.

  In the process of S3707, it is determined whether or not the flag indicating the stop type of the special figure among the stop type selection flags 223e of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S3707). When it is determined that the flag indicating the stop type of the special figure among the stop type selection flags 223e is off (S3707: No), the process proceeds to S3712. On the other hand, in the process of S3707, if it is determined that the flag indicating the stop type of the special figure among the stop type selection flags 223e is on (S3707: Yes), the (for special figure) stop type selection flag 223e is turned off. Is set (S3708), and the stop type extracted in the process of S3205 of the command determination process (see FIG. 61) is acquired (S3709), and the acquired stop type is set as it is (S3710). Then, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is set (S3711). After that, the normal figure fluctuation display setting processing (S3712) is executed, and this processing ends.

  This normal figure fluctuation display setting processing (S3712) is processing executed to display a fluctuation display effect on the third symbol display device 81 when a fluctuation pattern command related to general figure fluctuation is received from the main control device 110. Here, the ordinary figure fluctuation display setting processing (S3712) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ordinary figure change display setting process (S3712). When the ordinary figure variation display setting process (S3712) is executed, first, it is determined whether the ordinary figure variation start flag 223u is set to ON. Then, when it is determined that the general-purpose variation start flag 223u is off (S3801: No), it is in a state where the variation pattern command relating to the general illustration has not been received from the main controller 110, and the process proceeds to S3810. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the general-purpose variation start flag 223u is ON (S3801: Yes), the detailed mode of the variation display of the current special symbol based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 is described. Of each of S3802 to S3810 for determining the

  Note that among the various processes executed in the ordinary figure change display setting process (S3712) of FIG. 67, the portions where the same process as the change display setting process (S3113) described with reference to FIG. A detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the processing of S3801, if it is determined that the general-purpose variation start flag 223u is ON (S3801: Yes), the special figure S3702 and S3703 executed in the above-described variation display setting process (S3113) are performed. For the processing, the processing of S3802 and S3803 in which the target is changed to the ordinary figure is executed, and then it is determined whether or not the timing at which the fluctuation based on the received fluctuation pattern command is executed is a time saving state (S3804). Here, the determination is made based on the state information stored in the state storage area 223k and the remaining time reduction information stored in the remaining time reduction storage area 223h.

  In the process of S3804, when it is determined that the fluctuation start timing is in the time saving state (S3804: Yes), the timing at which the fluctuation based on the received fluctuation pattern command ends (in the case of a hit, the electric accessory 640a) It is determined whether or not the timing of setting the operation content of (1) is in the time saving state (S3805). Here, the difference between the time reduction remaining time information stored in the time reduction remaining time storage area 223h and the fluctuation time included in the obtained fluctuation pattern is calculated to determine the presence or absence of the time reduction state at the timing when the fluctuation ends. I do.

  In the process of S3805, when it is determined that the change end timing (the timing of starting the operation of the electric accessory 640a) is being reduced (S3805: Yes), the general-purpose enable flag 223q is set to ON (S3806). It is determined whether the end timing is within 2 seconds of the time saving end (S3807). In the process of S3807, if it is determined that the change end timing is within 2 seconds of the end of the working hours (S3807: Yes), the exchange flag 223v is set to ON (S3808), and the display change pattern command (for general drawing) ) Is set (S3810), and the flow shifts to the process of S3811.

  On the other hand, if No is determined in the processing of S3804 or S3805, the general-purpose flag 223q is set to off (S3809), and the flow shifts to the processing of S3810 described above. Also, in the process of S3807, if it is determined that the fluctuation end timing is not within 2 seconds of the time saving end (S3807: No), the process of S3808 is skipped and the process shifts to the process of S3810.

  Next, the processing of S3811 to S3815 similar to S3707 to S3711 described above with reference to FIG. 66 is executed, and this processing ends. Note that the processing executed in S3811 to S3815 is that the target of the stop type command is a special type stop type command in S3707 to S3711 and a general type stop type command in S3811 to S3815. Only the differences are the same, and the other contents are the same. Therefore, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Next, the effect state setting process (S3114) executed in the main process (see FIG. 60) of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the contents of the effect state setting process (S3114). The effect state setting process (S3114) is a process for setting the effect state according to the state command output from the main control device 110 and the current game situation, and sets the effect state set in the present process. By outputting the information (display effect state command for display) to the display control device 114, the display mode of each symbol (special figure 1, special figure 2, ordinary figure) on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, The display mode of the number of reserved storages (the number of reserved symbols) of each symbol is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the effect state.

  When the effect state setting processing (S3114) is executed, first, state information (game state) stored in the state storage area 223k is read (S3901). This status information is stored in the status storage area 223k based on the status command received from the main control device 110 in the above-described command determination processing (see S3112 in FIG. 61). Therefore, it is used to determine the current game state on the sound lamp control device 113 side.

  Next, referring to the status information stored in the status storage area 223k, it is determined whether the current status information (the status information stored in the status storage area 223k) indicates the start of a big hit (S3902). Here, if it is determined that it indicates the start of the big hit (S3902: Yes), the extended-village flag 223i is set to ON (S3903), and the processing shifts to S3918. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3902 that the signal does not indicate the start of the jackpot (S3902: No), it is determined whether the signal indicates the end of the jackpot (S3904).

  In the process of S3904, if it is determined that it indicates the end of the jackpot (S3904: Yes), it is determined whether to shift to the time saving state after the end of the jackpot (S3905). The determination in S3905 is made based on the jackpot type information stored in the state storage area 223k. In the process of S3905, if it is determined that the shift to the time saving state is made (S3905: Yes), the middle time saving flag 223g is set to ON (S3906), and thereafter, the process proceeds to S3918.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3905 that the shift to the time saving state is not to be made (S3905: No), the extended holiday flag 223i is set to off (S3907), and the privilege effect execution flag 223w is set to off (S3908). The end effect execution flag 223x is set to off (S3909), and the flow shifts to the process of S3918.

  If it is determined in the processing of S3904 that the time does not indicate the end of the jackpot (S3904: No), it is next determined whether or not it is time to end the time-saving state (S3910). If it is determined that it is time to end the time saving state (S3910: Yes), then the special 2 hold flag 223n for determining whether or not the second special symbol (special figure 2) is stored is set to ON. It is determined whether it has been performed (S3911). Here, if it is determined that the special 2 hold flag 223n is not on (is off) (S3911: No), the in-house flag 223i is set to off (S3912), and the process shifts to S3918. Also, when it is determined that the special 2 hold flag 223n is set to ON (S3911: Yes), the process similarly proceeds to S3918.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot is started, the extended-village flag 223i is set to ON, and when the time-saving state is not given after the end of the jackpot, or when the time-saving state ends, When the hold storage is “0”, the in-house flag 223i is set to off. Thereby, while the jackpot game, the time saving state, and the state where the change (lottery) of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed when the time saving state shifts to the normal state are repeatedly executed. (During a specific period that is advantageous to the player), the in-house flag 223i can be continuously set to ON. Therefore, by measuring various values (for example, the number of times the jackpot has been executed, the number of acquired balls, and the like) during the period in which the extended holiday flag 223i is turned on, various values in the extended holiday mode can be easily obtained. In the pachinko machine 10 having the extended game mode in which the game machine shifts to a plurality of different game states, the processing can be simplified.

  Returning to FIG. 68, the description will be continued. In the process of S3910, if it is determined that the timing is not the end of the time saving state (not the time saving end timing) (S3910: No), it is determined whether it is the small hit start timing (S3913), and the small hit start timing is determined. If it is determined that there is (S3913: Yes), it is determined whether the current state is the normal state (S3914). In the process of S3914, when it is determined that the current state is the normal state (S3914: Yes), the pseudo effect flag 223r is set to ON (S3915), and the process proceeds to S3918. On the other hand, if it is determined that the current state is not the normal state (the time saving state) in the process of S3914 (S3914: No), the process of S3915 described above is skipped and the process proceeds to S3918.

  In the process of S3913, when it is determined that the present is not the small hit start timing (S3913: No), it is next determined whether the present is the small hit end timing (S3916), and when it is the small hit end timing. (S3916: Yes), the pseudo effect flag 223r is set to off (S3917), and the flow shifts to the process of S3918. Here, in the case of the small hit end timing, when it is determined that the pseudo effect flag 223r is not set to ON (that is, the small hit end timing executed during the time saving state), the process proceeds to S3917. The process shifts to S3918 without executing the process.

  In the process of S3916, when it is determined that the present time is not the small hit end timing (S3916: No), the process proceeds to S3918. In the processing of S3918, the current effect state is selected based on the effect state selection table 222b (S3918). Then, a display effect state command indicating the selected effect state is set (S3919), and the process ends.

  Next, the specific effect setting process (S3115) executed in the main process (see FIG. 60) of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing the contents of the specific effect determination process (S3115). The specific effect setting process (S3115) is a process for setting a display command for displaying the specific effect on the third symbol display device 81 when the specific condition is satisfied.

  In the first embodiment, a bonus effect that is executed when the number of reserved memories (the number of reserved balls) of the second special symbol (special figure 2) reaches the upper limit (four) during the time saving state (see FIG. 21). When the second special symbol (special figure 2) is not held and stored in the time reduction state, and the remaining period of the time reduction state (variable remaining period of special figure 1) becomes a predetermined period (10 seconds). (See FIG. 19B) is executed as a specific effect.

  Note that, when the display control device 114 receives the display command indicating the content of the specific effect, the display mode corresponding to the received specific effect content regardless of the variable display state of each symbol (whether or not the symbol is changing). Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  When the specific effect setting processing (S3115) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the extended holiday flag 223i is set to ON (S4001), and the extended holiday flag 223i is not set to ON (set to OFF). Is determined) (S4001: No), the process ends. If it is determined that the extended-village flag 223i is set to ON (S4001: Yes), then it is determined whether the privilege effect execution flag 223w is set to ON (S4002), and the flag is set to ON. If it is determined that there is no (S4002: No), it is determined whether the special 2 suspension upper limit flag 223p is set to ON (S4003).

  In the process of S4003, if the special 2 suspension upper limit flag 223p is set to ON (S4003: Yes), a display privilege effect command is set (S4004), and the privilege effect execution flag 223w is set to ON (S4005). ), End this processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special 2 suspension upper limit flag 223p is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S4003: No), or in the process of S4002, the privilege effect execution flag 223w is already set to ON. If it is determined that the process has been performed (S4002: Yes), the process proceeds to S4006.

  In the processing of S4006, it is determined whether or not the end effect execution flag 223x is set to ON (S4006). Here, when it is determined that the end effect execution flag 223x is not set to on (set to off) (S4006: No), it is then determined whether the special 2 suspension flag 223n is set to on. If it is determined that the special 2 hold flag 223n is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S4007; No), it is determined whether the remaining time reduction period is 10 seconds (S4008). ).

  In the process of S4008, the information indicating the remaining time saving time period stored in the remaining time saving time period storage area 223h is read and the discrimination is executed. In the processing of S4008, when it is determined that the remaining time reduction period is 10 seconds (S4008: Yes), the display-house end effect command is set (S4009), and the end effect execution flag 223x is set to ON (S4010). ), End this processing.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S4006 that the end effect execution flag 223x is set to ON (S4006: Yes), or when the special 2 suspension flag 223n is set to ON in the processing of S4007 (S4007) : Yes), skips the processing of S4008 to S4010, and ends this processing as it is.

  As described above, in the specific effect setting process (S3315) according to the present embodiment described with reference to FIG. 69, the state in which the in-house flag 223i is set to ON as the first specific effect. When the special 2 reservation upper limit flag 223p is set to ON during the (time saving state) (when the number of reserved storages in the special figure 2 reaches the upper limit), the bonus effect (see FIG. 22) is executed. I have. By executing this privileged effect, a high value-added effect can be provided to the player, so that the player can be motivated to play a game during the time reduction state. Further, when the privilege effect is executed, the main figure Dmc is no longer displayed, so that the number of reserved storage of the special figure 2 cannot be increased (the number of reserved storage of the special figure 2 has already reached the upper limit). In the state), it is possible to suppress the effect of inflating the entry of the ball into the second entrance 640, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

  Furthermore, since the above-described privilege effect is configured to be continuously executed until the extended-mode flag 223i is set to OFF (until the extended-mode is completed), the added value is added to the player. Can be provided for a long period of time (at least until the number of reserved memories in Toku-zu 2 is exhausted), and the high value-added production ends in a short period of time, and the player is willing to play. Can be suppressed.

  Further, as a second specific effect, the reserved memory of the special figure 2 is not acquired during the state in which the extended holiday flag 223i is set to ON (time saving state) (the number of reserved memories of the special figure 2 is “ 0), and when the remaining period of the time saving state reaches a predetermined period (10 seconds remaining), an end effect (see FIG. 19 (b)) suggesting that the extended mode is ended. It is configured to be executed. With such a configuration, the player can easily understand the possibility of the end of the extended game mode, and the period (the extended mode) that is advantageous to the player ends without noticing. It can be suppressed that such a problem occurs.

  Next, a counter updating process (S3111) executed in the main process (see FIG. 60) of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing the contents of the counter update processing (S3111). This counter updating process (S3111) is a process for updating the value of the variable time counter 223j and calculating the elapsed time (remaining time) of the executed variable display. Information (remaining time reduction command for display) relating to the remaining time (reduction time reduction time) of the fluctuation time referred to here is output to the display control device 114 and displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The sound lamp control device 113 is referred to when setting the effect contents.

  When the counter updating process (S3111) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the current value of the variable time counter 223j is “0” (S4101). When it is determined that the value is “0” (S4101: Yes), that is, when the value of the variation time counter 223j is not updated (state in which the special figure 1 variation during the time saving state is not executed), It is determined whether the current time is during working hours (during working hours) (S4102). Here, the determination is made based on the state information stored in the state storage area 223k.

  In the process of S4102, if it is determined that the current time is short (S4102: Yes), it is next determined whether or not it is time to start the change of the special figure 1 (S4103). If it is determined that the timing to start the change (S4103: Yes), the value of the change time counter 223j is set to “1” (S4104), and the remaining change time is set based on the value of the change time counter 223j. A period (remaining time reduction period) is calculated, and information indicating the calculated remaining time reduction period is stored in the remaining time reduction period storage area 223h (S4105).

  After that, a display time reduction remaining period command is set (S4106), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S4102, when it is determined that the current time is not during the time reduction (in the time reduction state) (S4102: No), or in the process of S4103, it is determined that the present time is not the start timing of the special figure 1 change (S4103: No) In S4103 to S4106, the process is skipped and the process ends.

  In the process of S4101, when it is determined that the value of the fluctuation time counter 223j is not “0” (S4101: No), that is, a state in which the value of the fluctuation time counter 223j has already been updated (the special figure 1 in the time saving state). In a state where the fluctuation is being performed, it is determined whether the value of the fluctuation time counter 223j is “150,000” (whether 150 seconds have elapsed) (S4107). Here, when it is determined that the value of the fluctuation time counter 223j is not “150,000” (“less than 150000”) (S4107: Yes), the value of the fluctuation time counter 223j is incremented by “1” (S4108). Then, the flow shifts to the process in S4105 described above. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4107 that the value of the fluctuation time counter 223j is “150,000” (S4107: Yes), the value of the fluctuation time counter 223j is set to “0” (S4109), and Move on to processing.

  In the present embodiment, since the variation pattern (variation time) of the special figure 1 executed during the time saving state is all defined as “150 seconds” regardless of the lottery result of the special figure 1, FIG. As shown, the upper limit of the value of the fluctuation time counter 223j is set to “150,000” corresponding to “150 seconds”, but the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) of the special figure 1 executed during the time reduction state is divided into a plurality of fluctuation patterns ( In the case of the pachinko machine 10 configured to be selected from (variation time), the upper limit of the variation time counter 223j can be reset based on the content of the variation pattern to be executed (set variation time). It may be configured to determine whether or not the value of the variable time counter 223j being updated has reached the set upper limit.

<Regarding the control processing of the display control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly classified into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interruption processing that is executed when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, and a one-frame processing performed by the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes a main process, and executes a command interrupt process or a V interrupt process in accordance with reception of a command or detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed simultaneously, command reception processing is executed with priority. Thus, the V interrupt processing can be executed by quickly reflecting the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  First, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing the main processing. The main process is to execute an initialization process when the power is turned on.

  The activation of the main processing is specifically performed according to the following flow. When the power is supplied from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to “0000H” by the hardware configuration, and , The address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address designated to the bus line 240 is “0000H”, the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 starts the main processing by fetching the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starting execution of the processing corresponding to the fetched instruction.

  Here, if all boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address specified for the bus line 240 is “0000H”. Upon detection, one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a great deal of time from reading to setting in the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address “0000H” and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H”. It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, since the time required to start up the MPU 231 becomes longer, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, a predetermined number of instructions from the instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released from the boot program are stored in the NOR ROM 234d, so that the NOR ROM can operate at high speed. Since the memory is a memory from which data can be read, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the main processing in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  When the main process is executed as described above, first, a boot process executed by a boot program is executed (S5001), and the display control device 114 is configured to execute various controls on the third symbol display device 81. Start

  Here, the boot process (S5001) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S5001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and the fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine but stored in the third symbol display device 81. The data of the image to be displayed is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing the data. Since the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a small area and a large capacity, not only image data but also a control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure rate due to the increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, since the reading speed of the NAND flash memory is low especially when random access is performed, the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be degraded. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table The process of transferring and storing the data to the storage area 233b is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the above-mentioned hardware operation of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, after the system reset is released, a boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c is used. Of the control programs stored in the two program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S5101). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S5102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot program included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S5101.

  Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the processing of S5102, the MPU 231 executes various processing while reading out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetches the instruction, but reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute a process for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S5102, the instruction pointer 231a is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program started to be executed by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and the fixed value data, which have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a, are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S5103). Specifically, the control program and a part of the fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. The data is transferred to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S5104), the instruction pointer 231a is executed after the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of the boot process (see S5001 in FIG. 71). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the initialization process to be performed (see S5002 in FIG. 71) (S5105), the execution of the boot program is completed, and the boot process is completed.

  By executing the boot process (S5001) in this manner, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. The data is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address. Thereafter, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. And execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control program and fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out a control program and fixed value data from a work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high readout speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect unit.

  On the other hand, the entire boot program is not stored in the NOR ROM 234d, but a predetermined number of instructions from the first to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored. Even if the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR-type ROM 234d having a very small capacity. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortened time. Can be.

  In the boot processing shown in FIG. 72, the predetermined amount of the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the processing of S5101 includes all the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although the configuration is not limited to this, the predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S5101 is a boot program that executes a boot process to be processed following the process of S5102. It may be a part of. The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and furthermore, sets the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer. 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S5103 to S5105 may be executed by all remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  The boot program transferred in the process of S5101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently transfers the part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the beginning. Processing for setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount. Processing for setting the head address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S5101. After repeating the processing a plurality of times including the processing of S5102, the processing of S5103 to S5105 may be executed.

  Thereby, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at one time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. By using the boot program, the data can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the case where a part of the boot program executed first by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released from the boot program is stored in the first program storage area 234d1, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when starting the boot process, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S5103 to S5105 without performing the processes of S5101 and S5102. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, so that the number of times of transferring the program to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231 that can be performed after the boot process can be started more quickly.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. When the boot process is completed, an initialization process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S5002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings for the registers in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set in the respective flags. Note that “off” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag unless otherwise specified.

  Furthermore, in the initial setting process, after performing the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And execution of display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, first, an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thus, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 can check whether or not an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the activation can be started normally.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S5003). The transfer instruction includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on, the information of the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer instruction. The image is transferred to the image area 235a.

  Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving the transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can recognize that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction has ended. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 stores the transfer end information indicating the transfer end in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a partial area of the built-in memory. You may write it. Then, the MPU 231 reads out the information of the register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed by detecting the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237. You may do so.

  The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a ends based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S5003, the power-on fluctuation image Is transmitted to the image controller so that the image data corresponding to the image data is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S5004). The transfer instruction includes a start address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is stored, a data size of the image data, information of a transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235). And the start address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, which is the transfer destination, and the image controller reads the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. The image is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. The image data transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  Upon completion of the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b based on the transmission instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the processing of S5004, the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (S5005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 82A) described later, all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. A resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to perform the transfer is executed (see S6502 in FIG. 82A).

  Also, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It is kept on until it ends. Thereby, in the meantime, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 73 (b)), a simple image such as a power-on main image or a power-on fluctuation image (not shown) which is a power-on image is drawn. Command determination processing (see S5308 in FIG. 73B) and simple display setting processing (see S5309 in FIG. 73B) are executed.

  As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a as the character ROM 234, all image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, first, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third video RAM 235. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person in charge of the hall operates at the time of turning on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display controller 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player stays in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying that the operation has not stopped.

  Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. Can be immediately confirmed, and the use of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed as the character ROM 234 can prevent the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

  Further, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the power-on fluctuation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after the power is turned on. Since the player has started the game while being displayed on the display device 81, there is a ball (start winning) in the first ball entrance 64, and the start instruction of the variable effect is issued by the main controller 110 by the sound lamp control. If it is through the device 113, that is, if a display variation pattern command is received, a power-on variation image (not shown) is immediately displayed during the variation effect period to perform a simple variation effect. be able to. Therefore, even when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player can reliably confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple variable effect.

  As described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. Is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the transfer takes a long time, and therefore, the time during which the main image is displayed at power-on after power-on is also long. However, in the pachinko machine 10, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Immediately after, for example, while the main image is being displayed at the time of power-on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the processing in S5005, interruption permission is set (S5006), and thereafter, the main processing executes an infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Thus, after the interruption permission is set by the processing of S5006, the command interruption processing and the V interruption processing are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interruption signal.

  Next, a command interruption process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 73A is a flowchart showing the command interruption processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interruption process.

  In this command interruption process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in a command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S5201), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt processing are read out by a command determination processing or a simple command determination processing of a V interrupt processing described later, and processing according to the command is performed.

  Next, the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 73B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 36) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

  As described above, the execution of the V interrupt processing is started when a V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal generated every 20 milliseconds in the image controller 237 when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed, and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt processing in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction of the next image at a stage where the image drawing processing or the display processing is not completed, so that the image controller 237 starts drawing a new image during drawing of the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in the frame buffer storing the image information being displayed according to a new drawing instruction.

  Here, first, an outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt processing, as shown in FIG. 73 (b), it is first determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S5301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S5301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so it is not a power-on image (not shown) but a normal effect. In order to display an image on the third symbol display device 81, a command determination process (S5302) is performed, and then a display setting process (S5303) is performed.

  In the command determination process (S5302), the contents of the command from the audio ramp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interruption process are analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the display data table for demonstration or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination processing is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds at which the V interrupt processing is executed, and thus there is a high possibility that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the start of the fluctuation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display fluctuation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode of the variable effect and the type of stop selected by the main control device 110 or the sound lamp control device 113 are quickly grasped, and the effect image according to the mode is displayed. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of the command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In the display setting process (S5303), an image for one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81 based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S5302) and the like. Specify the contents of In addition, an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in accordance with a processing situation or the like, and a display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of the display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the display setting process is executed, a task process is executed (S5304). In this task process, the image is formed based on the contents of the next one frame image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S5303) or the simple display setting process (S5309). The type of sprite (display object) to be specified is specified, and various parameters required for drawing, such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

  Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S5305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. While the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is sent from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236, the image controller 237 also receives a continuous notice command or a rear image change command from the audio lamp control device 113. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview effect and the image data of the rear face image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 82 and 83.

  Next, a drawing process is executed (S5306). In this drawing processing, the type of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S5304), the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting processing (S5305) are used. The drawing list shown in FIG. 59 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Thus, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, an update process of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S5307). Then, the V interrupt processing ends. As a counter updated by the process of S5307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and is updated each time the V interrupt processing is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (for example, jackpot A, jackpot B, front-rear reach, reach other than front-rear reach, complete miss) Then, the stop type table corresponding to (chance chance) and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5301 that the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S5301: Yes), it means that transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display a power-on image (not shown) on the third symbol display device 81, a simple command determination process (S5308) is executed, and then a simple display setting process (S5309) is executed. Move on to processing.

  Next, details of the above-described command determination processing (S5302), which is one processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing.

  In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 74, first, it is determined whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S5401). If there is no unprocessed new command (S5401: No), The command determination processing ends, and the processing returns to the V interrupt processing. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S5401: Yes), a new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S5303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S5402). The type of each unprocessed command stored in the buffer area is analyzed (S5403).

  First, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S5404). If there is a display variation pattern command (S5404: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S5405), and returns to the process of S5401.

  Here, the variation pattern command processing (S5405) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 75A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This fluctuation pattern command processing is for executing processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the variation pattern command processing, first, the effect state stored in the effect state storage area 233k is read (S5501). Then, among the variable display data tables corresponding to the variable effect patterns indicated by the display variable pattern command, the variable display data table corresponding to the effect state read out by the processing of S5501 is determined, and the determined variable display data table is determined. The data is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5502).

  Here, since the determination of the start of the fluctuation in the main controller 110 is always made at least several seconds apart, no more than two display fluctuation pattern commands are received within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area. However, part of the command changes due to the influence of noise or the like, and another command is incorrectly displayed. It may be interpreted as a fluctuation pattern command. In the process of S5501, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area in preparation for such a case, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  If a fluctuation display data table corresponding to a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a fluctuation effect having a fluctuation time shorter than the set display data table is actually generated by the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, and there is a possibility that the player may feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, by setting the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern with the shortest fluctuation time in the display data table buffer 233d as in the present embodiment, in practice, the fluctuation display data table longer than the set display data table is set. Even when the fluctuation effect having time is instructed by the main control device 110, as described later, after the fluctuation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is finished, the main control device 110 Until the pattern command is received, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed. You can keep watching the fluctuations of the three symbols.

  Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S5502 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S5503). Then, among the data table determination flags provided for each variation display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table determination flag corresponding to the variation display data table set by the processing of S5502 is turned on, and other variation table data is set. The data table determination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to off (S5504). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table determination flag set in the process of S5503, it is easy to determine which variation pattern the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. You can judge.

  Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S5502, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the time counter 233h (S5505), and the pointer is set. 233f is initialized to 0 (S5506). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S5507), the variation pattern command ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing the variation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S5506, the display data table buffer 233d set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S5502 is updated. , Extract the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, specify the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, execute the transfer data table buffer 233e by the processing of S5503. The transfer data information specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the variable ROM display data table, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 from the normal video R. To be transferred to the image storage area 236a of M236, to control the image controller 237.

  In the display setting process, the time of the fluctuation effect specified in the fluctuation display data table is measured using the time counter 233h in which the time data is set by the processing of S5505, and when the fluctuation effect in the fluctuation display data table ends. When it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the display pattern command processing in the present embodiment, the display contents (effect contents) of the third symbol display device 81 are based on the display variation pattern command output (received) from the sound lamp control device 113. ) Is determined so that the display content (display mode of each symbol, display mode of the number of hold of each symbol) corresponding to the display effect state command for display (received) from the audio lamp control device 113 is determined. Make up. Thereby, as shown in FIGS. 15 to 22, it is possible to execute a display suitable for each effect state. Further, in order to determine the display effect state command and the display variation pattern command on the display control device 114 side and execute the process of determining the display content, the sound lamp control device 113 responds to each effect state. There is no need to set a display variation pattern command, and the processing load on the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, in the variation pattern command processing, the display content corresponding to the effect state is determined, and the determined display content is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a configuration, based on the display variation pattern command, the above-described display processing is performed on the display contents corresponding to all the effect states, and only the display contents corresponding to the currently set effect state are performed by the player. May be configured to be displayed in a viewable manner. Specifically, a display image layer is provided corresponding to each effect state, and a process of transmitting a layer other than the image layer corresponding to the set effect state is executed. Or the layer corresponding to the foreground. Accordingly, even when the effect state changes while the display based on the variation pattern command is being executed and the display content is changed, it is possible to immediately respond. Regarding an area (for example, the second display area Dn) in which the common display content is always displayed regardless of the set effect state, the display state is displayed on another layer, and the display effect state command is referred to. Instead, the display content may be determined only by the variation pattern command.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the process of S5404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S5404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among unprocessed commands (S5406). If there is a display variation type command (S5406: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (S5407), and the process returns to S5401.

  Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S5407) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 75B is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. The stop type command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the stop type command processing, first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (any of jackpot A, jackpot B, reach out of front and rear, reach other than front and back out, reach out completely, out of chance) indicated by the stop type command for display (S5601), and compares the stop type table with the value of the stop type counter updated each time the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 73 (b)) is executed. Finally, the stop symbol after the fluctuation effect displayed at 81 is set (S5602).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S5602 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is turned off. (S5603), terminates the stop type command processing, and returns to the command determination processing.

  Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the variation based on the data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the processing of S5602. In the above-described task processing (S5304), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the processing of S5602 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set in S5603, and the specified stop is determined. The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information obtained by the display setting process to the symbol. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, but before the drawing is performed in the third symbol display device 81, the normal video is read from the character ROM 234. Image data necessary for drawing can be transferred to the RAM 236. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness of drawing in the third symbol display device 81.

  Since the main controller 110 always determines the start of the change at least several seconds apart, the main controller 110 does not receive two or more display stop type commands within 20 milliseconds. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some of the commands change due to the influence of noise or the like, and another command is erroneously stopped for display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of step S5601, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area in preparation for such a case, it is assumed that the stop type is completely off, and the stop type is determined. Determine the table. Thereby, a stop symbol corresponding to complete departure is set by the processing of S5602.

  If a stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the third symbol display device 81 displays the "special symbol" even if it is actually "missing the special symbol". The stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit" is displayed, and the player misunderstands that the pachinko machine 10 has become a "special symbol big hit", which may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete departure as in the present embodiment, in fact, if the “special symbol jackpot” is reached, the stop of the complete departure is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Even if a symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "special symbol jackpot", so that the player can be pleased.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the process of S5406, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S5406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S5408). If there is an image change command (S5408: Yes), a back image change command process is executed (S5409), and the process returns to S5401.

  Here, the details of the back image change command processing (S5409) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 76A is a flowchart showing the back image change command processing. The rear image change command process executes a process corresponding to the rear image change command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the rear image change command processing, first, the rear image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing (S6503) of the change of the rear image due to the reception of the rear image change command in the ON state is set to ON (S5701). . Then, among the back image determination flags provided for each of the back image types (back A to C), the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is turned on, and the other back image The back image determination flag corresponding to the type is set to off (S5702), the back image change command process ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the normal image transfer setting processing, when it is detected that the rear image change flag set in the processing of S5701 is turned on, the rear image type after the change is specified from the rear image determination flag set in the processing of S5702. . When the specified rear image type is the rear surface B or the rear surface C, as described above, a part of the image data corresponding to those rear images is resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, a transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so as to transfer image data corresponding to a predetermined range of rear images from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  In the task processing, if it is specified to display any of the back surfaces A to C by the back type of the back image specified in the display data table, the back image discrimination flag set in S5702 indicates The type of the rear image to be displayed at the time is specified, the range of the rear image to be displayed is specified in accordance with the passage of time, and the RAM type (resident) which stores the image data corresponding to the range of the rear image is specified. Video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 for less than 20 milliseconds, the player does not receive two or more rear image change commands within 20 milliseconds. In this case, there should be no case where two or more rear image change commands are stored in the command buffer area. It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S5702, when it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the previously received back image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, one arbitrary back image change command may be extracted, and the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set the change according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the processing of S5408, if it is determined that there is no rear image change command (S5408: No), then, it is determined whether or not there is an error command among unprocessed commands (S5410). If it is (S5410: Yes), an error command process is executed (S5411), and the process returns to S5401.

  Here, the details of the error command processing (S5411) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 76B is a flowchart showing the error command processing. This error command process executes a process corresponding to the error command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S5801). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S5802). The process ends, and returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S5801, the type of error that occurred is determined from the error determination flag set by the process of S5802, and the corresponding error type is determined. The processing is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in step S5802, error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that a player or a person related to the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence state of the error.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the processing of S5410, when it is determined that there is no error command (S5410: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display effect state command among the unprocessed commands (S5412), and the display effect is performed. If there is a state command (S5412: Yes), the effect state information based on the received command is stored in the effect state storage area 233k (S5413), and the process returns to S5401.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the processing of S5412, when it is determined that there is no display effect state command (S5412: No), it is determined whether there is a hit-related command (S5440). In the process of S5440, when it is determined that there is a hit-related command (S5440: Yes), the hit-related command process is executed (S5441), and the process returns to S5401. On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S5440 that there is no hit-related command (S5440: No), other command processing is executed (S5414), and the process returns to S5401.

  In the processing of S5401 that is executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S5401: Yes) ), And execute the processing of S5402 to S5413 and S5419 again. Until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, the processing of S5401 to S5413 and S5419 is repeatedly executed. If it is determined in the processing of S5401 that there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, this processing is performed. The command determination processing ends.

  The simple command determination process (S5308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 73B) is the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, a command necessary to display an image at power-on (not shown), that is, a display variation pattern command and a display variation pattern command, is selected from unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. Only the stop type command is extracted, and a variation pattern command process (see FIG. 75 (a)) and a stop type command process (see FIG. 75 (b)), which are processes corresponding to each command, are executed. With respect to this command, the processing corresponding to the command is discarded without being executed.

  Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 75A) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the power-on variation image is stored in the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S5501. The image data of the main image at power-on and the fluctuation image at power-on that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S5502, a process of writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233b and clearing the contents is performed.

  Next, the details of the hit-related command processing (S5441) will be described with reference to FIG. The hit-related command process (S5441) is a process executed when it is determined that there is a hit-related command in the command determination process (see FIG. 146).

  In the hit-related command processing (S5441), first, it is determined whether or not there is a display big hit start command (S5901). If it is determined in the processing of S5901 that there is a display hit start command (S5901: Yes), the big hit start command processing is executed (S5902), and the flow shifts to the processing of S5903.

  Here, the details of the jackpot start command process (S5902) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 78 (a) is a flowchart showing the jackpot start command process (S5902). The jackpot start command process (S5902) is a process executed when it is determined in the hit-related command process (FIG. 77) that there is a display jackpot start command. This is a process for displaying on the symbol display device 81.

  In the jackpot start command process (S5902), first, a jackpot start display data table corresponding to the command (for example, corresponding to the jackpot type) is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6001). Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the jackpot start display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6002). Thereafter, the time data is set in the clock counter 233h based on the jackpot start display data table (S6003), the pointer 233f is initialized (S6004), and the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to off (S6005). This processing ends.

  Returning to FIG. 77, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S5901 that there is no display jackpot start command (S5901: No), the flow shifts to the processing of S5903. When the processing of S5901 or S5902 is completed, it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command (S5903). If it is determined in the processing of S5903 that there is a round number command for display, the round number command processing is executed (S5904), and the flow shifts to the processing of S5905.

  Here, the round number command processing (S5904) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 78B is a flowchart showing the round number command processing (S5904). The round number command processing (S5904) is executed when it is determined in the hit-related command processing (FIG. 77) that the round number command for display has been received, and the number of rounds during the big hit game is updated. This is a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to display the effect when the game is performed.

  In the round number command processing (S5904), first, a round number display data table corresponding to the command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6101). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S6102), and time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the round number display data table (S6103). Thereafter, the pointer 233f is initialized (S6104), the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S6105), and the process ends.

  Returning to FIG. 77, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S5903 that there is no display round number command (S5903: No), the process proceeds to S5905. When the processing of S5903 or S5904 is completed, it is determined whether or not the display jackpot end command has been received (S5905).

  If it is determined in the processing of S5905 that there is a display jackpot end command (S5905: Yes), the jackpot end command processing is executed (S5906), and the flow shifts to the processing of S5907.

  Here, the details of the jackpot end command processing will be described. The jackpot end command process (S5906) is a process executed when it is determined that the jackpot end command has been received in the hit-related command determination process (FIG. 77). This is a process for displaying on the symbol display device 81.

  In the jackpot end command processing (S5906), first, a jackpot end display data table corresponding to the command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d. Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared, and time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the big hit end display data table. Thereafter, the pointer 233f is initialized, the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off, and the process ends.

  Returning to FIG. 77, the description will be continued. If it is determined in step S5905 that there is no display jackpot end command, the process skips step S5906 and shifts to step S5907.

  When the processing of S5905 or S5906 is completed, it is determined whether or not there is a display small hit start command (S5907). If it is determined in the processing of S5907 that there is a small hit start command for display (S5907: Yes), the small hit start command processing is executed (S5908), and the flow shifts to the processing of S5909.

  Here, the details of the small hit start command processing (S5908) will be described. The small hit start command process (S5908) is a process executed when it is determined that the small hit start command has been received in the hit-related command determination process (see FIG. 77), and indicates the start of the small hit game. This is a process for displaying the effect on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the small hit start command processing (S5908), first, a small hit start display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d. Next, the transfer data table buffer corresponding to the small hit start display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Thereafter, the time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the small hit start display data table, the pointer 233f is initialized, the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to off, and the process is terminated.

  Returning to FIG. 77, the description will be continued. In the process of S5907, when it is determined that there is no small hit start command for display (S5907: No), the process of S5908 is skipped and the process proceeds to S5909.

  When the processing of S5907 or S5908 is completed, it is determined whether or not there is a display small hit end command (S5909). If it is determined in the processing of S5909 that there is a small hit end command (S5909: Yes), the small hit end command processing is executed (S5910), and this processing ends.

  Here, details of the small hit end command processing (S5210) will be described. The small hit end command process (S5210) is a process executed when it is determined in the hit related command determination process (see FIG. 77) that the small hit end command has been received, and indicates the end of the small hit game. This is a process for displaying the effect to be performed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the small hit end command processing (S5210), first, a small hit end display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d. Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared, and the time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the small hit end display data table. Thereafter, the pointer 233f is initialized, the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off, and the process ends.

  Next, details of the above-described display setting processing (S5303), which is one processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 79, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S6201). If the new command flag is not on, that is, if it is off (S6201: No), In the previously executed command determination process, it is determined that the new command has not been processed, and the process of S6202 to S6204 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S6205. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S6201: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the previously executed command determination process, the new command flag is set to off (S6202), and then S6203 to S6204. The processing corresponding to the new command is executed.

  In the process of S6203, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S6203). If the error occurrence flag is on (S6203: Yes), a warning image setting process is executed (S6204).

  Here, the warning image setting process will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to the generated error on the third symbol display device 81. First, referring to the error determination flag, all error determinations for which ON is set are performed. The warning image data for displaying the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S6301).

  In task processing, based on the expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) that composes the warning image is specified, and for each sprite, it is necessary to draw the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, etc. Various parameters are determined.

  Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S6301, the error occurrence flag is set to off (S6302), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. After the warning image setting process (S6204) or in the process of S6203, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S6203: No), the process proceeds to S6205.

  In S6205, a pointer update process is performed (S6205). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update process acquires the corresponding drawing content or the transfer data information of the transfer target image data from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in each of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is processing for updating the pointer 233f that specifies the address to be set.

  In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S6401). That is, the pointer 233f is updated in principle such that it is incremented by one each time the V interrupt processing is executed. As described above, in the various data tables, the start information is described at the address “0000H”, and the entity of each data is defined after the address “0001H”. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with the value stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer updating process. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

  After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the processing of S6401, then, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information or not. Is determined (S6402). As a result, if it is End information (S6402: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S6403). If the display data table is a demonstration display data table (S6403: Yes), the display data table is displayed. The time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S6404), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S6405), and the process ends. Then, the process returns to the display setting process. Thus, in the display setting process, the drawing content can be developed in order from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S6403, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demonstration display data table (S6403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 ( S6406), this process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process. Accordingly, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the address immediately before the End information is described. Is always developed, so that the third image display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S6402, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S6402: No), the process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. 79, the description is continued. After the pointer updating process, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer updating process is developed from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6206). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing content expanded in the processing of S6206 together with the previously expanded warning image and the like, and the display coordinate position is determined for each sprite. Various parameters required for drawing, such as a magnification, a magnification, and a rotation angle, are determined.

  Next, the value of the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S6207), and it is determined whether or not the value of the time counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S6208). If the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S6208: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is 0 or less (S6208: Yes), it means that the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is checked whether the confirmed display flag is on. (S6209).

  As a result, if the finalized display flag is OFF (S6209: Yes), the effect of the finalized display has not been performed yet, and the effect of the finalized display is to be performed. First, the finalized display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The setting is made (S6210), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6211). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time in the confirmed display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S6212), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6213). Then, after the final display flag indicating that the final display effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S6214), the contents of the stop symbol discrimination flag are directly copied to the previous stop symbol discrimination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S6215), and returns to the V interrupt processing.

  Thus, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the effect. Thus, the drawing content can be set. Further, by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233b to the confirmed display data table, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the confirmed display effect. Compared with the case where the display contents are changed by activating another program as in the related art, the program is not complicated and bloated, so that no great load is applied to the MPU 231. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The previously stopped symbol discrimination flag set by the process of S6215 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variable effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variable effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before. In the variable display data table, the change based on the data table is not changed. Until a predetermined time elapses from the start, symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before is described. In the task process (S5304), a stop symbol of the immediately preceding variation effect is specified from the last stop symbol determination flag set in S6215 until a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, and A third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stopped symbol. Thereby, the variable effect is started from the stop symbol in the preceding variable effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S6209, if the confirmed display flag is not on but off (S6209: No), it is determined whether the demonstration display flag is on (S6216). If the demonstration display flag is off (S6216: Yes), it means that the value of the time counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the finalized display effect, and the demonstration display data table is displayed in the display data table. The contents are set in the buffer 233d (S6217), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6218). Then, time data corresponding to the effect time in the demonstration display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S6219). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6220), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S6221), and the present process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  Thereby, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the final display effect is completed, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. , The content of the drawing can be set.

  In the process of S6216, if the demonstration display flag is ON (S6216: Yes), the demonstration effect is performed after the finalized display effect is completed, and this means that the demonstration effect has been completed. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt processing. In this case, as described above, various settings are performed by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process so that the demonstration effect is started again. Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Note that the same processing as the display setting processing is also performed in the simple display setting processing (S5309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 73B). However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the fluctuation effect by the fluctuation image at power-on ends, the fluctuation image at power-on according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time (FIG. (Not shown) is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  Next, details of the above-described transfer setting processing (S5305), which is one processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 82A is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6501). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6501: Yes), all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The processing is executed (S6502), the transfer setting processing ends, and the processing returns to the V interrupt processing. As a result, a transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 to transfer image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The resident image transfer setting process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S6501, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, if it is off (S6501: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video. The data has been transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, a normal image transfer setting process is executed (S6503), the transfer setting process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thus, a transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S6502), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S5305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 82B is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S6502).

  In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the image controller 237 has been instructed to transfer untransferred image data (S6601). If the transfer instruction has been transmitted (S6601: Yes) ) Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has been completed (S6602). In the process of S6602, after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image data, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined that the transfer process is not completed by the process of S6602 (S6602: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S6602: Yes), the process proceeds to S6603. Also, as a result of the process of S6601, if the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data has not been transmitted to the image controller 237 (S6601: No), the process proceeds to S6603.

  In the process of S6603, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S6603). A transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set so as to transfer the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S6604), and the resident image transfer setting process ends.

  As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing processing includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 transmits the transfer data described in the drawing list. The resident object image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236 based on the data information. The transfer data information includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident image data is stored, information of the transfer destination (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (the transfer is performed here). The head address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 where the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores the read image data in the buffer RAM 237a, and then stores the image data in the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. Then, the data is transferred to the designated address of the resident video RAM 236. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  As a result of the processing in S6603, if all the resident target image data has been transferred (S6603: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S6605), and the resident image transfer setting processing ends. Thus, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 73 (b)), the command is not the simple command determination processing (see S5308 in FIG. 73 (b)) and the simple display setting processing (see S5309 in FIG. 73 (b)). Since the determination processing (see FIGS. 74 to 78) and the display setting processing (see FIGS. 79 to 81) are performed, the drawing of the image in the normal state is set. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 83) (see S6501: No in FIG. 82A).

  By executing the resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 performs all the resident operations to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 except for the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to be retained without being overwritten while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 during power-on.

  Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. Can perform image drawing processing. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed when drawing an image. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately, and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the sound lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114. After the display is determined by, for example, the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed at an arbitrary timing by the player can be performed. In addition, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Next, the normal image transfer setting process (S6503), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S5305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S6503).

  In the normal image transfer setting process, first, a pointer 233f updated from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e by the pointer update process (S6205) of the previously executed display setting process (S5303). The information described at the indicated address is obtained (S6701). Then, it is determined whether or not the obtained information is transfer data information (S6702). If the obtained information is transfer data information (S6702: Yes), the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data is determined based on the transfer data information. (The storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( (S6703) Further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S6704), and the flow shifts to the processing of S6705.

  In the process of S6702, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S6702: No), the process of S6703 and S6704 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S6705. In the process of S6705, it is determined whether a new image data transfer instruction has been set to the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer has been completed (S6705), and the transfer instruction is set. If the transfer has been completed (S6705: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the transfer of the image data performed by the image controller 237 has been completed based on the transfer instruction (S6706).

  In the process of S6706, after setting the transfer instruction of the image data to the image controller 237 and receiving a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is ended. . If it is determined that the transfer process is not completed by the process of S6706 (S6706: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S6706: Yes), the process proceeds to S6707. Also, as a result of the process of S6705, if the image data transfer instruction is not set to the image controller 237 after the previous transfer process is completed (S6705: No), the process proceeds to S6707.

  In the process of S6707, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S6707). If the transfer start flag is on (S6707: Yes), there is image data to be transferred. Is turned off (S6708), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the processing of S6703 is set as the transfer target image data, and then the flow shifts to the processing of S6717. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S6707: No), then it is determined whether the back image change flag is on (S6713). If the back image change flag is not on but off (S6713: No), there is no image data to be transferred, so the normal image transfer setting process ends as it is.

  On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S6713: Yes), it means that the back image is changed, so the back image change flag is set to off (S6714), and the back image provided for each back image type is set. Among the determination flags, the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image determination flag in the ON state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S6715). Further, the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image discrimination flag in the ON state, and the transfer destination (normal) The start address of the video RAM 236) is obtained (S6716), and the flow shifts to the process of S6717.

  If the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is that of the back A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 is stored. No data exists. Therefore, in the process of S6715, if the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is that of the back A, the normal image transfer process ends.

  In the process of S6717, it is determined whether or not the transfer target image data has already been stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S6717). The determination in the process of S6717 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite set as the transfer target image data is read out from the storage image data determination flag 233i, and if the storage state is “ON”, the image data of the transfer target sprite is the normal video data. It is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236, and if the storage state is “off”, it is determined that the image data of the transfer target sprite is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  As a result of the processing in S6717, if the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S6717: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Then, the normal image transfer setting process ends. As a result, unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. Can be planned.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S6717, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S6717: Yes), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S6718). As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing processing includes the transfer data information of the transfer target image data, and the image controller 237 stores the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the transfer target image, information on the transfer destination (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (here, the transfer The start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and designates the designated video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the processing in S6718, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S6719), and the normal transfer setting processing ends. As described above, the storage image data determination flag 233i is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “ON”, and by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite in the same image storage area 236a This is performed by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites to be stored in the area to “off”.

  As described above, by executing the normal image transfer process, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the previously executed command determination process, the rear image is changed. , Image data not stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio ramp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Is set to the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting processing, and sends the image data to the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can be.

  Here, by the time the drawing of a predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the predetermined data is specified in accordance with the display data table. When rendering a sprite, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for rendering the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While rendering the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thereby, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 84, details of the above-described drawing processing (S5306), which is one processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S5304) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information , Color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S5305), to generate a drawing list shown in FIG. 59 (S6801). That is, in the process of S6801, the type of storage RAM and the address where the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S5304). The parameters required for the sprite determined in the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, the sprites are rearranged in the order of the sprite to be arranged from the rearmost side to the front side in the image of one frame, and the sprites after the rearrangement are arranged in the order of the sprites after the rearrangement. A drawing list is generated by describing the type and address of a storage RAM in which image data of the sprite is stored as detailed drawing information (detailed information) and parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. If a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S5305), the leading address (storage source top address) of the character ROM 234 where transfer target image data is stored as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the last address (storage source final address) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

  As described above, the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, so that the MPU 231 According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and the address where the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S6802). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including the information indicating that the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b is expanded as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing to develop an image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

  Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list, and expands the images by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, in the image of one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged at the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged at the frontmost side.

  If transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) and the last address (storage source last address) of the character ROM 234 in which transfer target image data is stored are determined from the transfer data information. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) is extracted, and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source end address is sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

  Note that the image controller 237 reads out image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer indicated by the drawing target buffer information, and stores the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to Thereby, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, while the image drawn in one frame buffer is expanded, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the drawing processing and the display processing are simultaneously performed in parallel. be able to.

  After the processing of S6802, the drawing processing updates the drawing target buffer flag 233j (S6803). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to “1” when the value is “0” and by setting it to “0” when it is “1”. Done. Accordingly, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. This is performed every time the drawing process of the embedding process (see FIG. 73B) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are performed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 ms after the completion of the drawing process of the image of one frame, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the minute is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed every 20 milliseconds by one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c. By alternately designating, one frame of image display processing can be performed continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while one frame of image rendering processing is performed.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, it is determined whether or not to change the state of the starting port provided in the game board from the first state in which the game ball is difficult to enter to the second state in which the game ball is easy to enter. Some perform a first lottery. In such a conventional gaming machine, a lottery executed when a game ball enters the starting port in a state easily changed to the second state is executed a predetermined number of times, and until a predetermined number of lottery results is displayed. In a gaming machine that is set continuously, the probability that the determination that the lottery is advantageous to the player is performed in a state where the lottery is performed a predetermined number of times is constant, the game becomes monotonous, and the player gets tired early. There was a problem of getting it.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the above-described first embodiment, during the period in which the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is executed during the time saving state, the reserved memory of the special figure 2 which is advantageous to the player is acquired. Is possible, and the interest in the game can be improved.

  In some gaming machines in which a lottery of a plurality of symbols is executed, a symbol display for indicating the lottery result is displayed on a display means (third symbol display device 81) to notify a player of the symbol. There is a problem that a plurality of symbols are fluctuated and displayed at an inappropriate timing, and it is difficult for the player to understand the game content.

  On the other hand, in the first embodiment, of the third symbols corresponding to the plurality of symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the symbol that the player is most interested in the current gaming state, that is, Since the symbols that have the greatest effect on the game result are configured to be displayed more emphasized than other symbols, it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

  In the above-described first embodiment, a game (left-handed game or right-handed game) that is advantageous to the player is provided in accordance with various set game states (normal state, time-saving state, big hit state, and the like). It is configured differently. This allows the player to change the content of the game while grasping the current game state, thereby suppressing the game from becoming monotonous.

  In the first embodiment, it is possible to provide different playability depending on the type of the special symbol change executed when the time shift is made, so that the player is prevented from getting tired of the game early. Can be.

<Second embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The first embodiment described above is configured so that when the special symbol fluctuates once during the time reduction state, the time reduction state ends, and in the time reduction state where the first special symbol fluctuates, the second special symbol is changed. Was configured to acquire the pending memory.

  Then, when the change of the first special symbol during the time saving state is completed, if the hold memory of the second special symbol is acquired, the change (lottery) of the second special symbol is executed next, and the change is performed. The jackpot game is executed based on the (lottery), and after the jackpot game ends, the state shifts to the time saving state again. On the other hand, when the change of the first special symbol during the time saving state ends, the second special symbol is changed. If the hold memory cannot be obtained, the state is shifted to the normal state.

  In the first embodiment configured as described above, the end timing of the time reduction state is the end timing of one change of the first special symbol, so that the player can easily predict the timing at which the time reduction state ends. There is a problem. In addition, in order to make it difficult for the player to make predictions, it is necessary to be able to set a plurality of different fluctuation times for the fluctuation of the first special symbol, and the storage capacity of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is increased. There was a problem of letting them do.

  Further, in the first embodiment described above, if the holding of the second special symbol can be acquired at the end of the fluctuation of the first special symbol executed during the time saving state, the state advantageous to the player can be continued and acquired. If not, the game is easy to understand for the player to end the advantageous state for the player, but on the other hand, the game becomes monotonous and the player gets tired of the game early.

  On the other hand, in the second embodiment, a plurality of conditions for ending the time-saving state are provided, and it is configured to make it difficult for the player to grasp the end timing of the time-saving state. Specifically, the case where either the change (lottery) of the first special symbol is performed twice or the change (lottery) of the second special symbol is performed once is set as an end condition of the time saving state. .

  With such a configuration, when the change of the first special symbol in the first rotation (the first rotation of the time reduction) in the time reduction state is completed, if the hold storage of the second special symbol is not secured, the time reduction is performed. The change (lottery) of the first special symbol in the second rotation in the state is executed. On the other hand, at the time when the change of the first special symbol of the first rotation (the first rotation of the time reduction) in the time reduction state is completed, if the storage of the second special symbol is secured, the second special symbol stored and stored is held. The change of the symbol (lottery) is executed.

  Therefore, in the time saving state, when the fluctuation of the first special symbol of the first rotation of the time saving is completed, the gaming ability to acquire the holding memory of the second special symbol is continued, and the holding memory of the second special symbol is changed. The case where the variation (lottery) used is executed can be provided in accordance with the state of holding and storing the second special symbol.

  Further, in the second embodiment, the variation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol executed during the time saving state is configured to be selectable from a plurality (two). Therefore, the time reduction state period (the fluctuation period of the first special symbol executed during the time reduction state) can be diversified by a combination of a plurality of fluctuation patterns, and the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, since the time reduction state period is set by a combination of a plurality of fluctuation patterns, when a plurality of fluctuation patterns of the first special symbol are prepared in a gaming machine having one time reduction as in the first embodiment described above. In comparison, the storage capacity of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

  In addition, in the second embodiment, the time saving state is ended when the change (lottery) of the second special symbol is performed once. Thus, for example, when the second special symbol is changed in the first rotation of the time saving, the small hit which is won is not the most advantageous to the player (this is executed when the ball is passed through the specific area). If the number of rounds of the jackpot game is smaller than the other small jackpots), the player dares to play the ball so that the ball does not pass through the specific area, and then executes the second special symbol of the second time saving second rotation It is possible to prevent execution of a special game such as execution of a game aiming at fluctuation of the game.

  In addition, when the result of the change (lottery) of the first special symbol in the first rotation of the time reduction is a small hit, the small hit game is executed after the completion of the fluctuation of the first special symbol in the first rotation of the time reduction. Since the time saving state is maintained during the small hitting game (since the time saving end condition is not satisfied), during the small hitting game period, the gaming ability to acquire the holding memory of the second special symbol and the second variable winning device A period in which a plurality of game properties such as a game property in which a ball is thrown into 650 and a ball passes through a specific area (V winning switch 630) can be simultaneously executed can be set. Therefore, a novel playability can be provided to the player, and the player can be prevented from getting tired of the game early.

  In addition, as shown in the first embodiment described above, when the case where the special symbol change that started to change during the time saving state ends is set as the end condition of the time saving state, the special symbol change of the first rotation of the time saving becomes Since the small hit game to be executed after the game ends is no longer in the time saving state, it is not possible to provide a game for acquiring the reserved memory of the second special symbol during the small hit game.

  Further, in the second embodiment, as a variation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol in the time reduction state, a first variation pattern (a time reduction state) in which the player can execute a game for acquiring the hold memory of the second special symbol is set. (A fluctuation pattern longer than the normal figure fluctuation time) and a second fluctuation pattern (a fluctuation pattern shorter than the normal figure fluctuation time during the time-saving state) in which it is difficult to execute the game for obtaining the hold memory of the second special symbol. It is configured to be selectable. With this configuration, for example, when the second variation pattern is selected twice consecutively, the time saving state is not substantially given (the game in which the reserved memory of the second special symbol is acquired during the time saving state) If the first variation pattern is selected twice consecutively, it is possible to obtain the reserved memory of the second special symbol during the time saving state with a high probability. A state is given. When the first variation pattern and the second variation pattern are respectively selected, a time-saving state in which the reserved storage of the second special symbol can be acquired is given.

  That is, since the degree of expectation of acquiring the second special symbol during the time reduction state can be varied based on the variation pattern of the first special symbol executed during the time reduction state, an unexpected game is provided to the player. can do. Further, even if the time-saving state is provided after all the jackpot games are completed without preparing a jackpot type that shifts to the time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game and a jackpot type that does not shift to the time-saving state, Since a substantial time-saving state entry ratio can be set based on the selection result of the special symbol variation pattern, an increase in storage capacity due to preparing a plurality of jackpot types can be suppressed.

  Also, by preparing a plurality of variation pattern selection tables for selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol during the time saving state, by referring to a different variation pattern selection table based on the game state and game situation, It is possible to make the actual time-saving state entry ratio more diversified.

  The configuration used in the second embodiment (a configuration using a plurality of time saving end conditions) may be used for a gaming machine having a gaming property other than the second embodiment, for example, a small hit winning of the second special symbol. When some of the small hit types set at the time are set, a small hit game in which a ball cannot pass (is difficult) in a specific area (V winning switch 630e3) is executed. It may be used for such a game machine.

  In the second embodiment, the number of times of change (lottery) is set to two as an end condition of the time saving state based on the change (lottery) of the first special symbol, but the number of times may be set more than that. . Further, the total number of the number of times of change (lottery) of the first special symbol and the number of times of change (lottery) of the second special symbol may be set as an end condition of the time saving state. , The number of changes in the ordinary symbol, the result of the variation of the special symbol (lottery), and various accessories provided on the pachinko machine 10 (the electric accessory 640a, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650, etc.). May be set based on the operation status (presence / absence of operation, number of operations).

  The difference between the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is that a part of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, a part of the RAM 203, and the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 are different. And the process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. Other various processes are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, a display screen executed by the third symbol display device 81 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86. FIG. 85A is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a display screen during the time saving state. Here, a difference between the display screen shown in FIG. 85A and the first embodiment described above (a difference from the display contents in FIG. 15A) will be described. The same elements as those in the above-described first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 85 (a) is an example showing the display screen in a state where the holding of the second special symbol has not been acquired at the time when the first rotation of the time savings is completed. As shown in FIG. 85 (a), at the end of the first turn of the working time, the holding memory of the second special symbol has not been acquired (the special symbol 2 main holding symbol display area Dm5 indicates the number of the holding symbols). If not, the change (lottery) of the first special symbol is started as the change of the second rotation of the time saving. Here, a variation pattern of 150 seconds is set as the variation pattern of the second rotation of the time saving, and the display of “remaining time 0 second” displayed in the first sub-display area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds is performed. “+150 seconds” is displayed as a display mode for adding the remaining time. The display of “150 seconds” is a display for indicating the fluctuation time of the second rotation of the time saving.

  Then, in the first main display area Dm, the character of "not yet" is displayed as a continuation notification display mode indicating that the game for acquiring the reservation memory of the special figure 2 is continued. By displaying such a display screen, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know how long the time-saving state (the game state in which the game for acquiring the reserved memory of the special figure 2 is executed) continues. Yes, it is possible to play games with expectation until the end.

  Note that the “remaining time” displayed in the sub display area Ds1 is changed before the remaining time of the special figure 1 change in the first rotation of time saving becomes “0”, that is, during the special figure 1 change in the first rotation of time saving, A value indicating a part or all of the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation which can be the second rotation may be added and displayed. In this case, it is configured that the addition display is executed only when the remaining period of the special figure 1 fluctuation in the first rotation of the time saving is a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) and the reserved storage of the special figure 2 is not acquired. Good. Thereby, even if the remaining time becomes short, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  On the other hand, when the first rotation of the time reduction is completed, the reserved memory of the special figure 2 is not yet acquired, and the game for acquiring the reserved memory of the special figure 2 is executed as the variation of the special figure 1 of the second rotation of the time reduction. When the difficult second fluctuation pattern (a fluctuation pattern shorter than the normal figure fluctuation time in the time saving state) is selected, the display in which the remaining time is added as shown in FIG. The display screen (time saving state end display) shown in FIG. 20B of the first embodiment is displayed. In this case, during the period in which the time saving state end display is being executed, the special figure 1 change of the second rotation of the time saving is executed.

  In other words, when the above-described second variation pattern is set, the time saving state is substantially ended, and therefore, on the third symbol display device 81, despite the time saving state, When the special figure 1 change of the rotation eye is executed, a time saving state end display is displayed. As a result, the end timing can be notified to the player, not to the end timing of the internal game state (time saving state), but to the game state in which the reserved memory of the special figure 2 can be acquired. An easy-to-understand game can be provided.

  In addition, the special figure 1 fluctuation of the second time reduction executed during the period in which the time saving state end display is displayed, and the number of reserved symbols of the special figure 1 which is reduced when the second time reduction is executed (reserved) Since the (number of storages) is displayed in the second display area Dn of the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice.

  As described above, in the second embodiment, the display timing indicating the end of the time reduction state is made different based on the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol selected during the time reduction state. In addition, even if the time reduction state is internally set, a display indicating the end of the time reduction state is executed as long as the game state advantageous to the player cannot be given. This makes it possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand. In the second embodiment, a case where a second variation pattern (a variation pattern shorter than the normal figure variation time in the time reduction state) in which it is difficult to execute a game for acquiring the reserved memory of the special figure 2 is set is set as an internal It is assumed that even if the player is in a reduced working time state, it is not possible to provide a gaming state that is advantageous to the player. Even if the time-saving state ends), even if it is internally the time-saving state, it is determined that a game state advantageous to the player cannot be given, and a display indicating the end of the time-saving state is executed. Is also good.

  Next, a display screen in the case where the special figure 1 fluctuation in the first rotation of time saving wins a small hit will be described with reference to FIGS. 85 (b) to 86 (b). FIG. 85 (b) is an example showing a display screen in a state where the special figure 1 wins the small hit and the special figure 2 has one hold storage at the time when the first rotation of the time saving is completed. As shown in FIG. 85 (b), the special display 1 main symbol Dma is stopped and displayed in the first display area Dm in a stop display mode of "341" indicating that the small hit has been won, and the main reserved symbol display is performed. In the area Dm5, a display mode indicating that there is one reserved storage of the special figure 2 is displayed.

  In the first sub-display area Ds1, "remaining time 0 seconds" indicating that the special figure 1 change in the first rotation of the time saving is completed is displayed, and further displayed in the first sub-display area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds. “+60 seconds” is displayed as a display mode for adding the remaining time to the displayed “0 seconds remaining”. This display of “60 seconds” is a display for indicating the game time of the small hit game executed based on the small hit winning of the special figure 1.

  That is, although the details will be described later, in the second embodiment, when the fluctuation (lottery) of Toku-zu 1 is executed twice or the fluctuation (lottery) of Toku-zu 2 is executed once, The state is set to end, and at the time when the fluctuation (lottery) of the special figure 1 shown in FIG. 85 (b) is executed once, the end condition of the time reduction state is not satisfied. Therefore, during the small hit game executed by the small hit winning of the special figure 1, the time saving state is continued. Thereby, even in the state where the reserved memory of the special figure 2 is acquired, the reserved memory of the special figure 2 can be further acquired during the period in which the small hit game is executed.

  As described above, the game period in which the game in which the ball is thrown into the second variable prize device 650 that is opened by the small hitting game and the game for acquiring the hold memory of the special map 2 can be simultaneously executed is set by the player. Is displayed in the first display area Dm as a special game period notification mode for notifying the player.

  Then, when the small hitting game is executed, as shown in FIG. 86 (a), the main figure Dmc in the first display area Dm is variably displayed, and the game for acquiring the reserved memory of the special figure 2 is displayed. Be executed. Further, when the small hit game executed in the small hit winning of the special map 1 is a small hit in which a ball can pass through a specific area (V winning switch 650e3), the ball passes through the specific area during the small hit game. Then, as shown in FIG. 86 (b), "V" is displayed in the first display area Dm, and the big hit game is started.

<Electrical Configuration in Second Embodiment>
The second embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the contents of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 are changed. The other points are the same as those of the first embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 87A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the second embodiment. The ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that the contents of the variation pattern table 202d4 for the special figure 1 defined in the variation pattern table 202d are partially changed. The other configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted. Although details will be described later, the conditions for terminating the time saving state are also different.

  The special pattern 1 time saving variation pattern table 202d4a (see FIG. 88) of the second embodiment is different from the special figure 1 time reduction variation pattern table 202d4 of the first embodiment in that the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1 Is different in that a different fluctuation pattern (variation time) is set based on.

  Specifically, regardless of whether the lottery result of Toku-zu 1 is “out of”, “small hit”, or “big hit”, if the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “0 to 99”, , A fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 120 seconds is set. In the case of “100 to 198”, a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds is set. With such a configuration, the game content during the time saving state can be greatly changed depending on the selected fluctuation pattern.

  FIG. 87 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the second embodiment. In the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment, a special second variation flag 203r is added to the first embodiment. The other configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The special 2 change flag 203r is a flag for indicating that the change of the special figure 2 is executed during the time saving state, and when set to ON, the change of the special figure 2 is executed during the time saving. It is shown. The special 2 change flag 203r determines that the current change is the special figure 2 in the time saving change start process 2 (S303 in FIG. 91) executed in the special symbol change start process (see S213 in FIG. 39). In this case (S551: Yes in FIG. 91), it is set to ON (see S522 in FIG. 91), referred to in the time saving end determination process (see S251 in FIG. 90) (see S2301 in FIG. 90), and After the value is set to “0”, it is set to off (see S2303 in FIG. 90).

  As described above, at the start of the special figure change, the result of determining which of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is executed is stored (the corresponding flag is set to ON), and the time saving is performed. At the timing when it is determined whether or not to end the state, it is determined whether or not to end the time-saving state based on the stored determination result (whether or not the time-saving state end condition is satisfied). It is possible to appropriately manage the current game state and the type of the special figure change executed during the time saving state.

  In the second embodiment, the type of the special symbol (special figure) determined at the timing when the change (lottery) of the special figure is started is determined, and the determination result is stored, so that the special figure is stored. Although it is configured to be able to determine whether or not to end the time saving state at the fluctuation end timing, other configurations may be used. For example, when the fluctuation (lottery) of a special figure is started, It is determined whether or not the time-saving state ends at the timing when the fluctuation is completed, and by storing the result of the determination, the control for terminating the time-saving state based on the determination result at the special figure fluctuation end timing is performed. Or, at the end timing of the change of the special figure, the type of the special figure change executed this time (the type of the special figure change used for the change) is determined, and the control for terminating the time-saving state based on the determination result is performed. To run It may be.

<Regarding the control processing in the second embodiment>
In the control processing according to the second embodiment, the contents of the control processing in the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113 are changed from those in the first embodiment. Other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Here, a control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the second embodiment, the special symbol variation process is changed to the special symbol variation process 2 (see FIG. 89) with respect to the first embodiment, and the time saving executed in the special symbol variation process 2 (see FIG. 89) is performed. The end discrimination processing (see FIG. 90) is added, the time saving start processing is changed to the time saving start processing 2 (see FIG. 91), and the big hit control processing is changed to the big hit control processing 2 (see FIG. 92). Is different.

  First, the special symbol variation process 2 (S104) will be described with reference to FIG. The special symbol variation process 2 (S104 in FIG. 89) is different from the special symbol variation process of the first embodiment in that the lottery result of the special symbol variation is out of order, and the value of the counter 203g during time reduction is 1 or more. In the case of (S224: Yes), the difference is that the time saving end determination process (see S251 of FIG. 89) is executed, and the other configuration is the same, so that the description is omitted.

  Next, the contents of the special symbol variation process 2 (see S104 in FIG. 89) described with reference to FIG. 90 will be described. FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing the contents of the time saving end determination process (see S251) in the second embodiment. The time-saving end determination process (see S251) executes control to determine the time-saving state end state in the second embodiment having a plurality of time-saving state end conditions.

  When the execution of the time saving end determination process (S251 in FIG. 90) is started, first, it is determined whether the special 2 variation flag 203r is set to ON (S2301 in FIG. 90). In S2301, if the special 2 change flag 203r is set to ON, that is, if the change of the special figure 2 is executed (S2301: Yes), the special symbol time reduction termination condition is satisfied at that time. Therefore, next, the value of the counter for the time reduction counter 203g is set to “0” (S2303), the special 2 change flag 203r is set to off (S2302), and the special 2 change flag 203r is set to off. This processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S2301, if the special 2 fluctuation flag 203r is not set to ON (S2301: No), then the time reduction counter 203g is decremented by 1 (see S2304), and this processing ends.

  FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing the contents of the time-saving variation start process 2 (see S303 in FIG. 91) used in the second embodiment. In this time saving variation start process 2 (see S303 in FIG. 91), the type of the special figure variation executed this time is the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 in comparison to the above-described time saving variation start processing of the first embodiment. Is added, and the other contents are the same. The description of the same contents is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 91, when the time reduction start process 2 (see S303 in FIG. 91) is executed, the same processes as S501 and S502 as the time reduction start process are executed. After the processing of S502 is completed, it is next determined whether or not the current variation is the special figure 2 (S551). If it is determined that the current fluctuation is the special map 2 (S551: Yes), the special 2 fluctuation flag 203r is set to ON (S552), and the process shifts to S503. On the other hand, in the process of S551, when it is determined that the current fluctuation is not the special figure 2 (the special figure 1) (S551: No), the process of S552 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S503. Then, the same processing as S503 to S512 as the time saving start processing is executed, and this processing ends.

  As described above, in the second embodiment, the value of the time-saving medium counter 203g is decremented by one every time a change in a special figure other than the special figure 2 (that is, a change in the special figure 1) is executed. When the time-saving state is ended when the value of the medium-time counter 203g becomes 0, and when the fluctuation of the special figure 2 is executed, the value of the time-saving medium counter 203g is forcibly set to 0, and the time-saving state is set. There are two time-saving state termination conditions for termination.

  This enables the variation (lottery) of the special figure 1 to be executed a plurality of times during the time reduction state, and the number of times to execute the variation (lottery) of the special figure 2 during the time reduction state is singular (one time). Can be

  Next, the jackpot control process 2 (S1704 in FIG. 92) according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The jackpot control process 2 (S1704 in FIG. 92) is different from the jackpot control process described above only in that the number of time savings given to some of the jackpots after the end of the jackpot is changed from one to two. The other contents are the same.

  The same contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing the content of the jackpot control process 2 (S704 in FIG. 92). As shown in FIG. 92, when this processing is executed, the same processing as S1801 to S1814 as the above-described jackpot control start processing is executed. Then, when it is determined in the processing of S1814 that the jackpot type is not “B or D” (S1814: No), the value of the time reduction counter 203g is set to “2”, and this processing ends.

  As described above, in the second embodiment, a plurality of time-saving state termination conditions for terminating the time-saving state are prepared, and the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation in the time-saving state is set to a plurality of fluctuation patterns (variation). Time). This makes it possible to further diversify the game during the time saving state, and to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early. Specifically, when the ratio of selecting the jackpot type to which the time-saving state is given after the end of the jackpot is fixed, a short variation pattern is continuously selected as the variation pattern (variation time) selected during the time-saving state. In this case, the time reduction state is obtained in which it is substantially difficult to obtain the reserved memory of the special figure 2 even though the time reduction state is given. As described above, the substantial time-saving state entry ratio can be varied according to the selected result of the selected variation pattern (variation time) of the special figure 1 variation.

  In the second embodiment, as the time saving state, the number of time savings is set to two times, and the change of the special figure 1 is executed twice, or the time saving state is changed until the change of the special figure 2 is executed once. Is continued, but the number of time savings to be set and the condition for terminating the time saving state may be any as long as the same technical idea can be executed irrespective of the configuration of the second embodiment. Alternatively, the number of working hours may be set to three or more.

  Also, as the time saving termination condition, the number of times of change of the special figure 1 (for example, 5 times) or the number of times of the change of the special figure 2 which is larger than the number of reserved storages of the special figure 1 (upper limit of 4) may be set. Good. Thereby, even if the reserved memory of the special figure 2 cannot be acquired during the change of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 can be reliably changed during the time saving state. Games can be offered.

  Further, as the time saving end condition, the number of times of change of Toku-zu 1 is set to 2 or the number of changes of Toku-zu 2 is set to 4 (or the total number of changes of Toku-zu 1 and Toku-zu 2 is set to 4) In addition, the small hit type of the special map 2 can be set to a big hit type to which time saving is given and a big hit type to which no time saving is given as a big hit type executed when passing through the specific area (V winning switch 650e3). Another example may be used. With this configuration, in the case where one reserved memory of the special figure 2 is acquired during the special figure 1 change executed in the first rotation of the time saving, the execution is performed based on the change of the special figure 2 in the second rotation of the time saving. The special area (V winning switch 650e3) is passed during the small hit game to execute the big hit game, or the specific area (V Without passing through the winning switch 650e3), it is possible for the player to select whether to execute the third turn (the second turn in FIG. 1) of the time saving.

  In other words, in the special figure 1 fluctuation (first preparation period) executed in the first rotation of the time saving, the game for acquiring the reserved memory of the special figure 2 is executed, and when one reserved memory of the special figure 2 is acquired, The fluctuation of the special figure 2 which is the priority fluctuation is started at the second rotation of the time saving. When the small hit is won due to the change in the special map 2, the small hit game is executed after the end of the change in the second rotation of the time saving. By passing the game ball to the specific area during the small hit game, a big hit game (V winning big hit) based on the small hit game is started. In this alternative example, as the type of the V prize jackpot of the special figure 2, a type in which the time reduction state is provided after the jackpot game and a type in which the time reduction state is not provided can be set. If the big hit based on the change in FIG. 2 is a big hit that does not give the time saving state, the extended play mode ends with this big hit game. Here, in a state where only one hold memory of the special map 2 has been acquired, the player executes the big hit game in the second rotation of the time saving or without executing the big hit game in the second rotation of the time saving (small The special figure 1 change (second preparation period) executed at the third time saving time (without passing the game ball to the specific area (V winning switch 650e3) during the hit game) is executed, and the new special figure 2 It is possible to select whether or not to execute a game for acquiring the hold memory.

  Thereby, based on the number of reserved memories of Toku-zu 2 acquired during the first preparation period, one of the reserved memories of Toku-zu 2 is discarded to obtain more reserved memories of Toku-zu 2, or Since it is possible to select whether the big hit game based on the reserved storage of the special map 2 is to be executed reliably, the player can arbitrarily select the game content suitable for the player.

  Furthermore, in this alternative example, the types of the jackpots to be executed based on the hold storage of the special map 2 include a type to which the time reduction state is provided after the jackpot game is completed and a type to which the time saving state is not provided. If the big hit game (V winning big hit) based on the small hit game is executed in one state of the hold memory, the time-saving state may end after the big hit game ends. Therefore, depending on which of the above-described game contents the player selects, the subsequent game results can be made to differ greatly, and the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased.

  In addition, the notification suggesting the type of the big hit game based on the small hit game executed in the second rotation of the time savings described above may be executed by the notifying means (for example, the effect display by the third symbol display device 81). This allows the player to select the game content with reference to the content of the notification by the notification means. In this case, as the notification content by the notification means, the game content that is advantageous to the player may be notified in a notification mode that allows the player to grasp. For example, if the big hit executed based on the small hit game executed in the second rotation of the time saving is a big hit in which the time saving state is given after the end of the big hit game, a notification mode for indicating that fact may be set. . Thereby, the player can pass the ball through the specific area (V winning switch 650e3) in the small hit game of the second rotation of the time saving with peace of mind.

  In addition, in this alternative example, the time saving end condition is that the number of changes in Toku-zu 1 is two, or the number of changes in Toku-zu 2 is four (or the total number of changes in Toku-zu 1 and Toku-zu 2 is 4). Therefore, the game for selecting the game content described above can be executed only when the suspension of the special figure 2 is acquired during the change of the special figure 1 executed in the first rotation of the time saving number. The game can be enthusiastically performed to acquire the reserved memory of the special map 2 as soon as the state is given.

  In addition, since the time saving termination condition is set so that the number of times of the change of the special figure 2 is smaller than the number of times of the change of the special figure 2, for example, the number of times of the change of the special figure 2 executed during the time saving state is reduced. Thus, the number of times of variation of the special figure 1 can be reduced. Thus, even if a plurality of (for example, two) hold storages of the special figure 2 are stored during one change of the special figure 1, the second change of the special figure 1 is executed during the time saving state. And the opportunity to select the above-mentioned game contents can be increased. In this alternative example, the time saving end condition is that the number of changes in Toku-zu 1 is 2 or the number of changes in Toku-zu 2 is 4 (or the total number of changes in Toku-zu 1 and Toku-zu 2 is 4) Is set, but the time saving end condition based on the number of changes in the special figure 2 may be set to be larger than the time saving end condition based on the number of changes in the special figure 1.

<Third embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the above-described first embodiment, three seconds are set as the variation time of the ordinary symbol variation (ordinary symbol variation) executed during the time reduction state, and the number of times of the ordinary symbol lottery executed during the time reduction state Was configured to be stable. Further, in the above-described second embodiment, a plurality of conditions for terminating the time-saving state are provided in order to vary the period in the time-saving state, and the process is executed during the time-saving state. The configuration was such that a plurality of fluctuation times in Toku-zu 1 could be set.

  On the other hand, in the third embodiment, the variation time of the normal symbol executed during the time reduction state is configured to be setable from a plurality of times, and the normal symbol that can be executed during the time reduction state is set according to the content of the game. It is configured to make the number of symbol lotteries different.

  This allows the player to perform many lotteries of ordinary symbols during the time reduction state, and to actively play the game in order to acquire the special figure 2 hold. Also, since the number of lotteries of ordinary symbols executed during the time reduction state can be changed, it is possible to set a time reduction state advantageous to the player and a disadvantageous time reduction state, thereby improving the interest of the game. it can.

  The difference between the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is that a part of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, a part of the RAM 203, and the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 are different. And the process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. Other various processes are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, the contents of the game according to the third embodiment will be described. The pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment is configured so that the time saving state given based on the drawing of Toku-zu 1 and the time saving state given based on the drawing of Toku-zu 2 are made different. Further, different time-saving states are provided based on the gaming state when the time-saving state is provided. By providing different time-saving states in this way, it is possible to prepare a plurality of playability in the time-saving state, and to allow the player to execute a variety of games.

  Specifically, by setting different time saving states, the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol executed during the time saving state is changed, thereby making the gaming ability during the time saving state different. That is, as described in the above-described first embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 wins the normal symbol during the special figure 1 change in the time saving state, wins the electric accessory 640a, and opens the second ball entry. Since a game in which the special figure 2 is reserved is executed by letting a ball into the mouth 640, by changing the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the number of times of the lottery of the ordinary symbol executed during the time reduction ( (The number of fluctuations) can be varied.

  Further, in the third embodiment, the variation time of the ordinary symbol is configured to be different based on the number of lotteries (the number of variations) of the ordinary symbol executed during the time saving state. Specifically, when the number of lotteries (the number of fluctuations) of the ordinary symbols executed during the time saving state exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 40), a fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time is set. ing. With this configuration, the number of normal symbol lotteries (the number of fluctuations) can be further increased by executing a large number of normal symbol changes during the time reduction state, and the player is eagerly reduced in the time reduction state. A middle game can be executed. In addition, by shifting to a state in which a fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time is set, as a result, the number of balls entering the second entrance 640 per unit time can be increased. It is possible to provide an advantageous game.

  In this way, by providing a plurality of time-saving states in which the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol is different, it is possible to set a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player and a time-saving state that is disadvantageous to the player, thereby improving the interest of the game. .

  First, the display screen executed by the third symbol display device 81 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 93A is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a display screen during the time saving state. Here, a difference between the display screen shown in FIG. 93A and the above-described first embodiment (a difference from the display contents in FIG. 15A) will be described. The same elements as those in the above-described first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 93A, “39/40” is displayed at the lower right of the first display area Dm. This is a display mode described in the general figure change display area for displaying the number of general figure change times during the time reduction state (during the special figure 1 change in the time reduction state), and the value of “39” was executed. In the general figure change frequency display mode for indicating the number of times, the value of “40” is a general figure target change frequency display mode in which the threshold value at which the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol is shortened is shown. In the sub-display area Ds, a guidance display for guiding a period until the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol is reduced is displayed.

  When the game progresses from the state shown in FIG. 93 (a) and the number of times of the normal figure fluctuation during the time reduction state reaches 40 times, as shown in FIG. Characters of "super charge time rush" to indicate the shift are displayed, and a guide display for guiding the player that the normal figure fluctuation time has become short is displayed in the sub display area Ds.

<Electrical Configuration in Third Embodiment>
The third embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the contents of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 are changed. The other points are the same as those of the first embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 94A is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating the contents of the ROM 202 in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the third embodiment. The ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment has a time saving state selection table 202f added to the first embodiment. The other configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The time-saving state selection table 202f is a table that is referred to when a time-saving state is selected based on a big hit symbol (special figure 1 and special figure 2) and a game state stored in the game state storage area 203s. It is referred to in the big hit control process 3 (see FIG. 99) described later (see S1871 in FIG. 99).

  Here, in the third embodiment, as the game state to be set, a time saving A and a time saving B which is more advantageous to the player than the time saving A can be selected. Specifically, the big hit symbol is special figure 1 (first special symbol), and the game state stored in the game state storage area 203s is normal (that is, the big hit is won, or the specific area (V winning) When the ball passes the switch 650e3)), the time saving A is selected as the time saving state, and otherwise, the time saving B is selected as the time saving state as shown in FIG.

  In other words, when the gaming state is the normal state, a jackpot is won based on the lottery of the special figure 1, and when the time saving state is given after the end of the jackpot game, the time saving A is given as the time saving state, otherwise, the time saving state is given As the time saving B.

  When the time saving A is set as the time saving state, 3 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (see S2409 in FIG. 98), and when the time saving B is set, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol A fluctuation time (2.5 seconds or 1.5 seconds) shorter than the case where A is set is set (see S2405 and S2406 in FIG. 98). Thus, when the game enters the extended game mode for the first time, the game is performed during the time saving state in which the normal symbol change time is normal (4 seconds). The fluctuation time can be shorter than usual. Therefore, once the extended play mode advantageous to the player is continued, it is possible to make it difficult to shift from the extended play mode to the normal game state.

  FIG. 94B is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating the contents of the RAM 203 in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the third embodiment. The RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the third embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that a gaming state storage area 203s, a time saving state storage area 203t, and a common time counter 203u are added. The other configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The game state storage area 203s is an area for storing a game state when the start of a big hit is set, and is referred to when a type of a time saving state given after the end of the big hit is selected. The game state is stored in the gaming state storage area 203s after the start of the jackpot in the special symbol change processing 3 (see FIG. 96) (see S271 in FIG. 96), and the jackpot control processing 3 (see FIG. 99). ), It is determined that it is the timing of jackpot end (S1811 in FIG. 99: Yes), and when the jackpot type is not B or D (S1814 in FIG. 99; No), it is referred to when setting the time saving state (S1871). ).

  The time saving state storage area 203t is an area for storing the type (time saving A, time saving B) of the selected time saving state, and is referred to when setting the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol in the time saving state. In the time saving state storage area 203t, when the time saving state is selected in the jackpot control process 3 (see FIG. 99), the selected time saving state is stored (see S1871 in FIG. 99), and the fluctuation time is set (see FIG. 98). ), The information stored when setting the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol is referred to (see S2401 in FIG. 98).

  The ordinary figure counter 203u is a counter for measuring the number of times the normal symbol fluctuates during the time reduction state. In the fluctuation time setting process (see FIG. 98), each time the ordinary symbol fluctuates during the time reduction state. One is added (see S2403 in FIG. 98). In the present embodiment, when the value measured by the ordinary figure counter 203u reaches a predetermined value (40), the processing for setting the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol is made different.

<Control Process in Third Embodiment>
The control processing in the third embodiment is different from the first embodiment in the content of the control processing in the main controller 110 and the sound lamp controller 113. Other processing is the same as that in the first embodiment. And a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, a control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the third embodiment, the special symbol variation process is changed to the special symbol variation process 3 (see FIG. 96), and the ordinary symbol variation process is replaced with the ordinary symbol variation process 3 (see FIG. 97). The difference is that the big hit control process is changed to the big hit control process 3 (FIG. 99). Since the other elements are the same, the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the special symbol variation process 3 (see S104 in FIG. 96), the processes in S201 to S219 are executed as in the first embodiment described above, and when the process in S219 is completed, the current gaming state is stored in the gaming state storage area 203s. It is stored (S271). Then, similarly to the above-described first embodiment, the processing of S220 to S225 is executed, and this processing ends.

  That is, in the third embodiment, unlike the above-described first embodiment, the gaming state at the time when the start of the big hit can be temporarily stored. As a result, the game state set after the end of the jackpot game can be set based on the game state at the start of the jackpot (at the time of winning the jackpot).

  In the present embodiment, the game state at the timing of setting the jackpot is stored in the game state storage area 203s after the change time of the special figure has elapsed. For example, the change of the special symbol is started. (For example, the timing at which the special symbol variation start process (see S213 in FIG. 96) in the special symbol variation process 3 is executed) may be stored.

  Next, in the ordinary symbol variation process 3 (see S106 in FIG. 97), the processes of S901 to S912 are executed, as in the first embodiment described above, and thereafter, the variation time setting process is executed (S951). Here, the variable time setting process (S951) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable time setting process (S951).

  When the fluctuation time setting process (S951) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current time saving state is the time saving A (time saving state A) (S2401), and it is determined that the current time saving state is the time saving A (time saving state A). (S2401: Yes), the normal symbol fluctuation time (normal symbol fluctuation time) is set to 3 seconds (S2409), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S2401, if it is determined that the current time saving state is not the time saving A (time saving state A) (S2401: No), then the value of the ordinary time counter 203u is larger than “1”. Is determined (S2402).

  In the process of S2402, when it is determined that the value of the ordinary figure counter 203u is not larger than "1" (S2402: No), "1" is set to the value of the ordinary figure counter 203u (S2403), and S2404. Move to the processing of. On the other hand, in the process of S2402, when it is determined that the value of the ordinary time counter 203u is greater than “1”, the process proceeds to S2404 (S2402: Yes).

  In the process of S2404, it is determined whether or not the value of the ordinary time counter 203u is “40” or more (S2404). In the process of S2404, when it is determined that the value of the ordinary figure counter 203u is not equal to or more than “40” (less than 40), the variation time of the ordinary symbol (the ordinary figure variation time) is set to 2.5 seconds. (S2405). In this case, a fluctuation time shorter than the normal figure fluctuation time set in the processing of S2409 is set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2404 that the value of the ordinary figure counter 203u is equal to or greater than "40", the variation time of the ordinary symbol (the ordinary figure variation time) is set to 1.5 seconds (S2406). In this case, a fluctuation time shorter than the normal figure fluctuation time set in the processing of S2405 is set. Then, when the process of S2405 or S2406 is completed, “1” is added to the value of the general-purpose number counter 203u (S2407), a general-purpose number command is set (S2408), and this process ends.

  The ordinary figure number command set in the process of S2408 is a command output to the sound lamp control device 113, and is output in the same manner as the various commands set by the main control device 110 described above. .

  As described above, in the third embodiment, different general figure fluctuation times are set based on the type of the set time reduction state and the number of general figure fluctuations executed during the time reduction state. With this configuration, it is possible to make the number of times of the normal figure change executed during the time-saving state different based on the type of the time-saving state and the number of times of the normal figure change executed during the time-saving state. It is possible to improve the interest in the game of winning each ordinary map and acquiring the reserved memory of the special map 2.

  Further, in the case where the time saving state is set to “time saving B” which is more advantageous than “hour saving time A” (a short variation time is set as the general time variation time), the number of times of daily variation is equal to or more than a predetermined number (40 or more times). ), The system is configured such that a shorter general-purpose variation time is set, so that the player can continue playing the game during the time reduction state.

  In the third embodiment, a specific time-varying time is set based on each time-saving state and the number of times of normal time-saving. However, other configurations may be used. A general figure fluctuation time selection table, which is referred to for setting the general figure fluctuation time, is provided in correspondence with the number of fluctuations of the figure, and based on a predetermined acquisition value (for example, a counter acquisition value) from the general figure fluctuation time selection table. Then, the normal figure fluctuation time may be selected. In this case, in the time chart state and the time chart for changing the time of the time chart, the time chart for selecting the time chart for changing the time of the time chart is provided with a table in which the time of the long time chart is easily selected and a table in which the time of the short time chart is easily selected. Thus, as in the third embodiment, it is possible to make the easy-to-select fluctuating time different based on the respective time-saving states (hour-saving A, time-saving B) and the number of times of fluctuating fluctuating figures. Interest in the game to acquire the game can be improved.

  Further, in the third embodiment, two types of "time saving A" and "time saving B" are provided as types of the time saving state, but more types may be provided. In addition, although one trigger (the number of times of the normal figure fluctuation is 40) is provided to change the time of the general figure change selected based on the number of the general figure changes, two or more times may be provided.

  Furthermore, in the third embodiment, the general figure fluctuation time shorter than normal is selected (make it easier to perform) when the predetermined condition is satisfied. When the number of fluctuations exceeds 50, or when the number of reserved storages in Toku-zu 2 reaches the upper limit, the selected general-purpose fluctuation time is longer than normal (for example, 10 seconds). ) May be selected. Thereby, it can be suppressed that the privilege is excessively given to the player due to the excessive execution of the normal figure fluctuation.

  Next, the jackpot control process 3 (S1704) of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing the content of the jackpot control process 3 (S1704). The jackpot control process 3 (S1704) is different from the jackpot control process of the first embodiment in that a process is added when it is determined that it is time to end the jackpot, and otherwise the same process is performed. Is executed. The description of the same processing is omitted.

  When the jackpot control process 3 (S1704) is executed, the processes of S1801 to S1814 are executed similarly to the jackpot control process of the first embodiment, and in the process of S1814, the jackpot type is “jackpot B” or “jackpot D”. "(Ie, a jackpot to which the time-saving state is given after the end of the jackpot) (S1814: No), the time-saving state is set based on the time-saving state selection table 202f, and the set time-saving state is set. It is stored in the time saving state storage area 203t (S1871). Then, the value of the counter 203g during the working hours is set to "1" (S1815), and this processing ends.

  Next, a control process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The third embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the command determination process is changed to a command determination process 3 (see FIG. 100). Since the other elements are the same, the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing the command determination process 3 (S3112). When this command determination process 3 (S3112) is executed, the processes of S3201 to S3214 are executed as in the command determination process of the first embodiment. Then, if it is determined in the processing of S3213 that the notification command has not been received (S3213: No), it is determined whether the command for the number of ordinary times has been received (S3251). When the common figure number command is received (S3251: Yes), the common figure number command for display is set (S3252). The display general-purpose number command set here is output to the display control device 114 in the same manner as other display commands, and is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during the time-saving state. The number of times is displayed (see FIG. 93).

<Modification Example 1 of Game Board 13 in First Embodiment>
Next, a modified example 1 of the game board 13 in each of the above-described embodiments will be described with reference to FIG. In the first embodiment described above, as described with reference to FIG. 2, a storage device is provided to regulate the entry of a ball into the right first entrance opening 64 b disposed in the right area of the game board 13. 750 and a non-motorized accessory 710. As a result, unless the non-motorized accessory 710 is in the open state, the ball is reliably prevented from entering the right first entry opening 64b. On the other hand, in the first modification, a configuration is used in which the ball is prevented from entering the right first ball entrance 64b without using the storage device 750 and the non-motorized accessory 710. Specifically, by always providing the movable valve 1500 above the right first ball entry port 64b, entry of a ball into the right first ball entry port 64b is regulated.

  Further, in the configuration of the game board 13 of the first embodiment described above, the through gate 67 and the second entrance 640 are provided in the first flow path 701, and the ball has passed through the through gate 67. The second ball entrance below the through gate 67 so that the ball passes for a shorter period (0.2 seconds) than the fluctuation time (3 or 4 seconds) of the ordinary symbol (general figure) executed based on By disposing the 640, the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 is prevented from directly entering the second entrance 640. On the other hand, in the present modified example, the through gate 67 is provided in the first flow path 701, and the second ball entrance 640 is provided in the second flow path 702. Thus, it is possible to physically prevent the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 from entering the second entrance 640.

  The difference between the configuration of the game board 13 in the present modified example 1 and the configuration of the game board 13 of the above-described first embodiment is that the storage device 750, the non-motorized accessory 710, and the specific general entrance 630 are eliminated. The point, the arrangement position of the right first entrance port 64b is changed, and the arrangement position of the second entrance port 640 is changed from the first flow path 701 to the second flow path 702. Other configurations are the same. About the same structure, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 101 is a front view showing the configuration of the game board 13 of the first modification. As shown in FIG. 101, in the game board 13 of the first modification, a constantly movable member 1500 is provided along the ball rolling surface at the most upstream part of the first flow path 701, and the constantly movable member 1500 is provided. Is movable to the open position (in the open state), the ball is configured to be able to enter the right first entrance opening 64b.

  Here, the operation of the constantly movable member 1500 will be described in detail. The constantly movable valve 1500 is configured to be changed between an open position (open state) and a closed position (closed state) at a predetermined timing based on power being supplied to the pachinko machine 10. I have. Specifically, in the movable member driving process (not shown) executed every 4 milliseconds in the main process of main controller 110 (see FIG. 53), the operation control is performed based on the movable scenario stored in ROM 203. Have been. In this movable scenario, an operation of constantly opening the movable member 1500 for 0.1 second and thereafter closing it for 1.2 seconds is repeatedly executed.

  That is, in the game board 13 of the first modification, the ball shot in the right-handed game flows into the first flow path 701 at 1.2-second intervals, and the rolling in which the constantly movable member 1500 is provided. It flows down while rolling on the surface. When the timing at which the ball flows into the first flow path 701 and rolls on the constantly movable member 1500 (or falls on the constantly movable member) coincides with the timing at which the constantly movable valve 1500 is opened. The ball passes through the constantly movable member 1500 in the open state and enters the right first ball entry port 64b.

  The timing of rolling on the constantly movable member 1500 (or falling on the constantly movable member) is an interval of 1.2 seconds, and the timing of constantly opening the movable valve 1500 is 0 in 1.3 seconds. .1 second, the timing at which they match is about once every 15.6 seconds. That is, when the right-hitting game is continuously executed, about four balls enter the right first entrance opening 64b in one minute.

  In other words, in a gaming state in which a right-handed game is continuously executed, such as during a jackpot game or a time-short game, a ball periodically enters the right first entrance 64b, so that the jackpot game is not performed. When the process ends and shifts to the time saving state, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a state where the special figure 1 is not suspended. In addition, since the period during which the movable valve 1500 is always opened at one time is set to a period (0.1 seconds) in which it is difficult for the player to aim and hit, the left first ball entry is performed in the normal game state. A right-handed game can be more disadvantageous to a player than a left-handed game aiming at the mouth 64a.

  To be more specific, in the case where the gaming state is the normal state, when a left-hitting game is performed, out of the 250 fired balls, about 15 shots enter the left first entrance 64a. It is designed so that when a ball enters, five prize balls are paid out. Further, it is designed so that approximately five shots enter the general entrance 63, and when a ball enters, five prize balls are paid out. Therefore, in the left-handed game, it is possible to allow approximately 20 balls to enter the left first entrance 64a, considering that the awarded ball to be paid out is to be fired again when 250 balls are fired. Becomes

  On the other hand, in the case where the game state is the normal state, when a right-handed game is performed, it is designed that, out of the 250 balls fired, about 9 rounds enter the right first entrance opening 64b. If the ball enters, two prize balls are paid out. The general entrance 63 is not provided in the right area. Therefore, in the right-handed game, when 250 balls are fired, even if considering that the awarded ball to be paid out will be fired again, about 10 balls should be made to enter the right first entrance 64b. I can only do it. Therefore, when the game state is the normal state, it is possible to suppress the player from playing a right-handed game.

  In the present embodiment, the general entrance 63 is not provided in the game area (the right area) through which the ball fired by the right-handed game passes, but when the game state is the normal state, the right-handed game is performed more than the left-handed game. The general entrance 63 may be provided based on a design concept to the extent that the game is not advantageous to the player. This makes it possible to increase the number of balls to be paid out as prize balls in a right-handed game during a time-saving state or a jackpot state.

  Next, among the configurations arranged in the right area of the game board 13 in the first modification, the through gate 67 and the second ball entrance 640 are different from the structure of the game board 13 of the above-described first embodiment. The explanation will focus on the points.

  In the first modification, the through gate 67 is provided downstream of the first flow path 701 having the curved path 701a, and the second inlet is provided downstream of the second flow path 702 (the lower end of the fifth flow path 704b). A ball port 640 is provided. With this configuration, the sphere flowing into the second flow path 702 at 1.2-second intervals can be made to flow toward the second ball entrance 640 without decreasing the flow velocity. Therefore, since the falling intervals of the spheres flowing down the second flow path 702 can be made constant, the spheres are connected in the second flow path 702, and a plurality of spheres enter the second entrance 640 at the same time. Can be suppressed. In addition, when the third symbol display device 81 notifies that the electric accessory 640a is open (see FIG. 23 (b)) without noticing that the electric accessory 640a has been opened, the third symbol display device 81 promptly notifies. A ball can be made to enter the second entrance 640.

  In addition, different flow paths (first flow path 701,...) Through which the through gate 67 which is an execution trigger of the normal symbol lottery and the electric accessory 640 a whose operation is controlled by the winning of the normal symbol are distributed by the distribution member 700. Since the distributing member 700 is disposed in the second flow path 702) so as to cause the ball to flow down only one of the flow paths (when the distribution function is disabled), the second entrance port is provided. It is possible to make it difficult for the ball to enter the 640. That is, when the through gate 67 and the electric accessory 640a are disposed in one of the flow paths distributed by the distribution member 700, the distribution member 700 is broken, and a state in which the ball flows down only in one of the flow paths is created. This makes it possible to create a state in which a ball can easily enter the second entrance 640. However, by using the configuration of this modification, a ball is illegally entered into the second entrance 640. Creating a state that is easy to cause can be suppressed.

<Modification 2 of the game board 13 in the first embodiment>
Next, a second modification of the game board 13 in each of the above-described embodiments will be described with reference to FIG. As described with reference to FIG. 2 in the above-described first embodiment, a storage device is provided to regulate the ball from entering the right first ball entrance 64b disposed in the right area of the game board 13. 750 and the non-motorized accessory 710. As a result, unless the non-motorized accessory 710 is in the open state, the ball is reliably prevented from entering the right first entry opening 64b. On the other hand, in the present modified example 2, the movable plate 1700 is always provided between the storage device 750 and the specific general entrance 630, and when the storage device 750 is released, the ball passing through the storage device 750 is provided. Is provided with a case where the ball enters the specific general ball entrance 630 and a case where the ball does not enter the ball.

  Specifically, the movable plate 1700 is always changed to a guiding position (protruding position) at which a ball can be guided to the specific general entrance 630 every second and an opening position (evacuation position) at which guiding is impossible (difficult). Variable control means for controlling the flow of a sphere passing through the storage device 750 by variable control by the variable control means.

  The operation of the always movable plate 1700 is controlled by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. Specifically, a movable plate solenoid (not shown) that constantly varies the movable plate 1700 is turned on (a state in which the always movable plate 1700 protrudes) and an off state (a state in which the always movable plate 1700 is retracted). A variable control means for causing the variable control means to perform a predetermined variable scenario based on a predetermined counter value updated each time the main processing of the main controller 110 is executed. Is performed in accordance with the control.

  Note that the movable plate solenoid used in the present modification is configured such that the movable plate 1700 is always located at the retreat position in a state where power is supplied. As described in each of the embodiments described above, this is the first condition during the time reduction state as a termination condition of the game period (the time reduction state period in which it is easy to acquire the hold memory of the special figure 2) that is advantageous to the player. This is because the condition is set that the change (lottery) of the special symbol (special figure 1) is executed once. In other words, unless the end condition is satisfied, the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol (ordinary figure) is shorter than that in the normal state (the ordinary symbol fluctuation time is 3 seconds). This is because the opening operation pattern (long opening) advantageous to the player is also continuously executed as the opening operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a. As described above, in the state where the reserved memory of the special figure 1 is not present, the fluctuation of each special symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is started until the reserved memory of the special figure 2 is acquired. No (time saving standby state), only the fluctuation of the ordinary symbol (normal figure) is executed. In this case, the time-saving state is continued until the ball is won in the second entrance 640 after being won per ordinary drawing. In order to prevent such a situation from being intentionally created, the movable plate 1700 is configured to be always located at the projecting position when the power of the movable valve solenoid is cut off. Thereby, even if the act of intentionally stopping the supply of power to the movable valve solenoid is executed, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of serious damage.

  In the configuration of the present modified example described above, the timing to release the storage device 750 (that is, the timing to start the big hit game) and the variable state of the always movable plate 1700 cause the right first ball entry port 64b to move. Of the ball can be restricted. Therefore, it is possible to make the player expect when the big hit game is started.

  A configuration in which a different timing can be set as the timing for bringing the storage device 750 into the release state may be added to the above-described modification. Specifically, according to the jackpot type selected at the time of winning the special symbol (special figure), a jackpot type for releasing the storage valve 750a of the storage device 750 and a jackpot type not to be released are set in advance. Further, the first timing (for example, the timing of the start of the first round) and the second timing (for example, the timing of the start of the third round) are set in advance as the jackpot type for releasing the storage valve 750a. Constitute.

  With this configuration, the timing at which the storage device 750 is released and the ball passes through the storage device 750 can be diversified. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp whether the timing at which the big hit game is started and the variable state of the constantly movable plate 1700 are advantageous to the player, and the player can keep the big hit game even after the big hit game is started. Can be played with a sense of expectation. In addition, it is possible to suppress the act of starting a jackpot game at a timing advantageous to the player.

  The above-described configuration in which the presence or absence of the release of the storage device 750 and a plurality of release timings are set according to the type of big hit may be used in each of the above-described embodiments. As a result, more complex playability can be provided, and the interest of the game can be improved.

<Modification 3 of the game board 13 in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 103, a third modification of the game board 13 in the above-described first embodiment will be described. The third modification is different from the third embodiment in that the arrangement positions of the storage device 750 and the specific general entrance 630 are different from those of the game board 13 of the first embodiment (see FIG. 2). Are the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 103, in the third modified example, the storage device 750 and the specific general entrance 630 are disposed on the right side of the lower center of the game board 13. With this configuration, it is easier for the right-handed game to store the ball in the storage device 750 than for the left-handed game. Specifically, among the balls fired by the right-handed game, the ball flowing down on the first variable winning device 65 is configured to be stored in the storage device 750 most easily.

  When the spheres are stored in the storage device 750, the following spheres are configured to flow over the stored spheres. Specifically, the upper surface position of the sphere stored in the storage device 750 is lower than the extension line of the ball flowing down on the first variable winning device 65 (the first variable winning device 65 is The storage device 750 is disposed (to have a downward step with respect to the upper surface of the provided unit). Therefore, since the sphere is stored in the storage device 750, the subsequent sphere flow is not affected. In this modified example 3 configured as described above, when the right-handed game that is advantageous to the player is started, the reservation of the special figure 1 can be more reliably secured.

  Each modification of the game board 13 described above may be applied to each of the above-described embodiments. Thereby, a more complicated game can be provided to the player, and the interest can be improved.

<Modified example of electric accessory 640a>
Next, a modified example of the electric accessory 640a used in each of the above-described embodiments will be described with reference to FIGS. In each of the above-described embodiments, a game board provided with the second ball entrance 640 so that two or more balls do not enter the second ball entrance 640 during the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a. The ball flow in the right region 13 is regulated. That is, a countermeasure for restricting the ball flow so as to prevent a plurality of balls from flowing into the electric accessory 640a at the same time is taken. On the other hand, the electric accessory A200 described in the present modified example has a configuration in which two or more balls cannot enter the second entrance 640.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 104, the shutter portion A222 has a cross section orthogonal to the rotating shaft portions 223 and 223, which is curved in a substantially “C” shape, and the rotating door A220 is connected to the side start winning opening A40A. In the closed state, the door main wall A222A is located on the front side and stands substantially vertically, and the winning auxiliary wall A222B extends rearward from the upper end of the door main wall A222 in this state. The door main wall A222A has a V-shaped cross section in order to prevent a game ball from biting. Further, the door main wall A222A is located apart from the rotation shaft portions 223 and 223, and rotates forward from a substantially horizontal state as the rotation door A220 rotates from the open state to the closed state. It is in a state of standing almost vertically. The winning assistance wall A222B is inclined so as to descend toward the side of the side starting winning opening A40A with the rotating door A220 opened.

  The width of the shutter portion A222 is slightly smaller than the width of the side start winning opening A40A, while the width of the pair of side walls is wider than the width of the side starting winning opening A40A. Then, in a state where the revolving door A220 is completely closed, the front surface of the side wall abuts against the side edge of the side starting winning opening A40A, and the revolving door A220 further moves to the side for closing the side starting winning opening A40A. It prevents rotation.

  Door rotation projections A224 and A224 are provided on the pair of side walls on opposite sides of the rotation shaft with respect to the shutter. Further, on the side wall, there are formed positioning contact portions A225 and A225 which are located behind the door rotation projection A224 and project downward when the rotation door A220 is at the open end position where the rotation door A220 is completely opened. ing.

  A detection sensor is housed in the above-mentioned switch housing part 215B of the resin housing. The detection sensor has a flat rectangular parallelepiped shape, and a game ball passage hole is formed at the rear end thereof in a vertical direction. Through holes are formed in the upper and lower surfaces of the switch accommodating portion 215B corresponding to the game ball passage holes, and the game balls that have entered the tongue piece accommodating portion 215A pass through the game ball passage holes 281 to accommodate the switch. It moves below the portion 215B. In addition, a duct (not shown) is provided below the switch accommodating portion 215B for taking in game balls and guiding them to the ball circulation system of the game hall.

  The movable tongue A230 is accommodated in the tongue accommodating portion 215A of the resin housing. The movable tongue piece A230 has a flat structure in which the widthwise direction is shorter than the front-back direction and becomes thinner in the up-down direction, and is supported so as to slide back and forth while sliding on the inner surface of the tongue-storing portion 215A.

  The movable tongue piece A230 has a symmetrical shape when viewed from above, and has a protruding and protruding piece that is narrower in a stepped shape than the whole at its front end. The projecting piece portion is slightly wider than the diameter of the game ball, and has a width that can be inserted into the lower wide portion of the side starting winning port A40A.

  A pair of outer downward slopes 240S, 240S, which are inclined downward toward both sides, are formed on both sides in the width direction of the upper surface of the projecting piece. Further, between the pair of outer descending inclined surfaces 240S, 240S of the protruding and projecting piece portions, a retracting inclined surface which is extremely gently inclined to descend toward the center and gently inclined to descend rearward. 240H are formed. Further, on the upper surface of the protruding and protruding piece portion, there is formed a guiding inclined surface 240Y which descends relatively steeply from the rear end of the retracted inclined surface 240H toward the rear.

  The movable tongue piece A230 has a shape in which a trapezoidal protrusion 231D protrudes rearward from the center in the width direction at the rear end of the substantially square base when viewed from above. I have. In the center in the width direction of the base portion, a ball-passing long hole is vertically formed from the front end position to the rear end position. The ball passage slot has a width that allows one game ball to pass just therethrough and is slightly smaller than the width of the protruding and projecting piece. In addition, the front end of the ball passing elongate hole is semicircular and partly reaches the base end of the projecting and protruding piece, and the rear end of the ball passing elongate hole is parallel to the base of the trapezoidal protrusion 231D. It has reached the position near the rear end of the base.

  The movable tongue piece A230 has a pair of doors extending vertically along both side edges of the ball passage slot in a range extending from the base end of the projecting and protruding piece to an intermediate position in the front-rear direction of the base. The driving projection wall is formed to project. The entire rear portion of the base portion from the door driving protruding wall is a power receiving portion A230P that is vertically thick so as to have an upper surface flush with the rear end upper surface of the door driving protruding wall.

  A pair of connecting recesses are formed in the power receiving portion A230P on the opposing inner side surfaces of the power receiving portion A230P with the ball-passing elongated hole interposed therebetween. Each coupling recess is formed by a substantially triangular interference avoiding recess whose lower end side is narrowed, and an engaging groove portion which is depressed and formed in the inner surface of the interference avoiding recess away from the ball-passing elongated hole and extends vertically. Become. The front sliding contact surface 236A disposed on the front side of the engagement groove portion extends vertically in the vertical direction. The rear sliding contact surface 236B disposed on the rear side of the engagement groove portion has a lower portion protruding forward from an intermediate position in the vertical direction, and serves as a seesaw stopper portion according to the present invention. The stopper contact surface 237S at the upper end of the seesaw stopper portion is slightly inclined so as to descend toward the front sliding contact surface 236A.

  Each door drive protruding wall is provided with an intermediate depression at an intermediate position in the front-rear direction, the front side of the intermediate depression is the front-side pressing projection A241 according to the present invention, and the rear side of the intermediate depression is the rear-side pressing according to the present invention. It is a protrusion A242. The rear pressing protrusion A242 has the same height as the power receiving portion A230P, and the front pressing protrusion A241 is lower than the power receiving portion A230P. Further, the bottom surface of the intermediate depression is a horizontal and flat intermediate depression flat surface 233N. The rear surface of the front-side pressing protrusion A241 is the closing pressing portion A241K according to the present invention, and rises vertically from the intermediate depressed flat surface 233N. The upper surface of the front-side pressing projection A241 is a door stopper A241J according to the present invention, and is horizontally flat. On the other hand, the front surface of the rear pressing protrusion A242 is an open pressing portion A242Z according to the present invention, which also rises vertically from the intermediate depressed flat surface 233N. The front surface of the front-side pressing protrusion A241 is parallel to the closing pressing portion A241K, which is the rear surface, and is gently inclined from the middle to the front, and extends to the rear ends of the above-mentioned outer downward inclined surfaces 240S and 240S. .

  The lower end portion of the seesaw member A250 is engaged with the connection concave portion of the movable tongue piece A230, and the door rotation projections A224 and A224 of the rotating door A220 are engaged with the door driving projection wall of the movable tongue piece A230. are doing. Thus, the movable tongue A230 is driven by receiving power from the solenoid via the seesaw member A250, and the movable door A220 is driven by the power from the movable tongue A230.

  First, transmission of power from the seesaw member A250 to the movable tongue piece A230 will be described. The connecting arms of the seesaw member A250 are received in the interference avoiding recesses among the connecting recesses of the movable tongue piece A230, and the lower end connecting protrusions A255 and A255 of the connecting arms are provided in the engaging grooves of the connecting recesses. Engaged.

  Here, in a state where the solenoid is not excited, the plunger protrudes forward as shown in FIG. 104, and at this time, the lower connecting protrusions A255 and A255 are located at the lower ends of the engagement grooves. At this time, the movable tongue piece A230 is disposed at the rear end position of the linearly movable range, and the projecting and protruding piece is retracted to the rear side of the side start winning opening A40A. In this case, that is, in a state in which the projecting and protruding piece is retracted to the rear side of the side start winning opening A40A, the tip of the projecting and protruding piece is retracted to a position completely covered by the side starting winning opening A40A. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent the ball from colliding with the side start winning opening A40A in the retracted state.

  In this state, when the solenoid is excited and the plunger is sucked backward, the seesaw member A250 rotates around the rotating shaft portions A253 and A253, and the connecting arm rotates forward, whereby The lower end connecting projections A255, A255 slidably contact the front sliding surfaces 236A, 236A and press the front sliding surfaces 236A, 236A forward. As a result, the movable tongue piece A230 is pushed out to the front of the gaming machine, and as shown in FIG. 104, the projecting piece projects from the side start winning opening A40A to the front side of the game board. Then, for example, the end surface of the base portion of the movable tongue piece A230 comes into contact with the opening edge of the side starting winning opening A40A from the rear side, and the movable tongue piece A230 is positioned at the “front end operating position” according to the present invention and stopped. Then, the projecting and protruding piece 240 protrudes to the maximum from the side start winning opening A40A (see FIG. 106).

  When the excitation of the solenoid is stopped in a state where the movable tongue piece A230 is located at the front end operating position (the state in FIG. 106), the plunger projects forward by the compression coil spring A276. Then, the lower end portion of the seesaw member A250 rotates rearward around the gaming machine around the rotation shaft portions A253 and A253, and the lower end portion of the seesaw member A250 moves from the front position to the rear position with respect to the rotation shaft portions A253 and A253. Moving. At this time, the lower end connecting projections A255, A255 slide against the rear sliding contact surfaces 236B, 236B of the engagement groove portion and push backward. As a result, the movable tongue piece is retracted to the rear of the gaming machine, and the projection part retracts to the rear side of the side start winning opening A40A (see FIG. 107).

  More specifically, when the excitation of the solenoid is stopped and the lower end of the connection arm of the seesaw member A250 rotates rearward, first, the upper edge E1 of the stopper recess provided in the lower connection protrusion A255 (first The rear edge of one plane M1) contacts the stopper contact surface 237S of the seesaw stopper. Then, with the rotation of the seesaw member A250, the lower connection protrusion A255 slides on the rear sliding contact surface 236B, and the lower connection protrusion A255 is located behind the rotation shaft portions A253 and A253 of the seesaw member A250. At this time, the lower edge portion E2 (lower edge of the second plane M2) of the stopper concave portion abuts on the lower portion of the rear sliding contact surface 236B below the seesaw stopper portion, and the rear sliding portion of the engagement groove portion. The contact surfaces 236B, 236B are pushed backward. Thereby, the movable tongue piece can be returned to the initial position (rear-end retracted position) by the elastic force of the compression coil spring A276.

  By the way, when an illegal act of pulling the movable tongue piece A230 retracted to the back of the side start winning opening A40A to the front of the game board with a wire or the like inserted from the gap of the gaming machine is performed, become that way. That is, the power is not transmitted from the solenoid to the seesaw member A250, the power of the seesaw member A250 is transmitted from the movable tongue piece A230, and the connecting arm of the seesaw member A250 is pushed forward by the rear sliding contact surface 236B in the engagement groove 236. Then, the first flat surface M1 in each stopper concave portion of the lower end connection convex portions A255 and A255 and the stopper contact surface 237S of the seesaw stopper portion come into surface contact. When the movable tongue piece A230 is further pulled forward from this state, the pulling force becomes an upward force F1 orthogonal to the stopper contact surface 237S of the stepped portion, and the center of the first plane M1 and the rotating shaft portion A direction substantially parallel to the direction connecting the center of A253, that is, a direction substantially orthogonal to the rotation direction of the stopper recess. Accordingly, the rotation of the seesaw member A250 is restricted, and it becomes impossible to pull the movable tongue piece A230 toward the user and cause the projecting and protruding piece to protrude forward of the side start winning opening A40A. Also, even if the seesaw member A250 is slightly lifted obliquely upward by the upward force F1, the triangular ridge formed on the communication wall 252 of the seesaw member A250 is engaged with the flange portion 274F of the plunger. Thereby, the rotation of the seesaw member A250 is more reliably prohibited.

  Next, transmission of power from the movable tongue piece A230 to the rotating door A220 will be described. The door turning protrusions A224 and A224 of the turning door A220 are respectively engaged with the door driving protruding wall of the moving tongue, whereby the turning door A220 receives the power from the moving tongue A230 and turns. I do. Specifically, in a state where the movable tongue piece A230 is located at the rear end retracting position and the entire projecting and retracting piece is retracted to the rear side of the side start winning opening A40A, the door turning projection A224 presses the front side. The protrusion 241 is disposed above the door stopper A241J (the state shown in FIG. 104). At this time, the turning shaft of the turning door A220 is located obliquely forward of the door turning projection A224. At this time, a first space AS1 according to the present invention is formed between the lower end portion of the door turning protrusion A224 and the open pressing portion A242Z of the rear pressing protrusion A242.

  Then, when the movable tongue piece A230 moves forward from the rear end retreat position, as shown in the change from FIG. 104 to FIG. 107, the front pressing protrusion A241 moves forward, and the lower end of the door turning protrusion A224 and The front-side pressing protrusion A241 does not face the door stopper A241J in the vertical direction, and the lower end of the door rotating protrusion A224 faces the middle depression flat surface 233N in the up-down direction and the middle depression flat surface 233N. Between them, a rotation space of the door rotation protrusion A224 is secured.

  Then, when the movable tongue piece A230 moves further forward, the lower end of the door turning projection A224 moves in the first space AS1, and during this time, the movable tongue piece A230 moves forward but the turning door is turned. Is maintained in a stopped state. Then, as shown in FIG. 105, when the projecting and retracting projection of the movable tongue piece A230 protrudes by a predetermined amount from the side start winning opening A40A, the lower end of the door turning projection A224 is moved to the rear pressing projection A242. It contacts the front surface A242Z. When the movable tongue further advances, the door main wall A222A of the rotating door A220 is lifted, and the side start winning opening A40A is opened (see FIGS. 105 and 106). When the operating position is reached, the revolving door A220 is fully opened, and a game ball can enter the side start winning opening A40A. More specifically, when the rotating door A220 is pushed by the rear-side pressing protrusion A242 and rotates by a certain angle, the rotating door A220 rotates toward the open end position by its own weight. That is, when the revolving door A220 protrudes about half from the side starting winning opening A40A, the revolving door A220 starts the revolving operation, and the revolving door A220 protrudes about half and then completely protrudes. During a relatively short period of time, the side start winning opening A40A changes from the fully closed state to the fully opened state. In this manner, in the present embodiment, the movable tongue piece A230 starts moving forward, the turning door A220 is stopped halfway, and the turning door A220 starts opening halfway, and the front opening prize is achieved in a two-step operation. The mouth A40A is opened. When the game ball falls on the upper surface of the projection part 240 protruding from the side starting winning part A40A, the game ball is guided by the projecting part 240 and wins the side starting winning part A40A and wins. The game ball is detected by the detection switch.

  In a state where the rotating door A220 is completely opened, as shown in FIG. 106, the positioning contact portion A225 of the side wall abuts on the upper surface of the rear pressing projection A242, and the rotating door A220 is opened. Positioned in position. Thereby, the rattling of the rotating door A220 is regulated. Further, in this state, a second space AS2 according to the present invention is formed between the lower end portion of the door turning protrusion A224 and the open pressing portion A242Z of the rear pressing protrusion A242.

  When the movable tongue piece A230 retreats from the front end operating position, as shown in the change from FIG. 106 to FIG. 107, the front-side pressing protrusion A241 moves rearward. At this time, the lower end of the door turning protrusion A224 relatively moves in the second space AS2 toward the front pressing protrusion A241. As a result, a part of the projecting and protruding piece 240 of the movable tongue piece A230 moves into the front open winning opening A40A (from the state in which the door rotating protrusion A224 is in contact with the opening pressing part A242Z to the closing pressing part A241K). During this time, the turning door A220 is kept open. Then, the movable tongue piece A230 is opened to the front by a predetermined amount (a distance that the movable tongue piece A224 moves in the second space AS2 from the state in which the door rotating projection A224 abuts on the opening pressing part A242Z to the state in which it contacts the closing pressing part A241K). When moved into the mouth A40A, the closing pressing portion A241K of the front pressing protrusion A241 comes into contact with the lower end of the door turning protrusion A224. At this time, the protrusion 240 of the movable tongue A230 is accommodated in the side start winning opening A40A by about half. Then, when the movable tongue piece A230 further retreats, the rotating door A220 operates so as to close with the retreat of the movable tongue piece A230, and when the projecting and retracting protruding part is completely retracted, the rotating door A220 is moved. The side start winning opening A40A is completely closed and stopped, and the movable tongue piece A230 is further retracted behind the side starting winning opening A40A so that the lower end of the door turning projection A224 is vertically moved with the door stopper A241J. It returns to the initial state facing in the direction. As described above, in the present embodiment, the movable tongue piece A230 starts retreating, and the turning door 220 is stopped halfway, and the turning door A220 starts to close from the middle, and the front opening winning is achieved in two steps. The mouth A40A is closed.

  By the way, in a state where the side start winning opening A40A is closed (the state of FIG. 104), for example, when the turning door A220 is forcibly opened with a wire or the like, the door turning projection A224 turns to the opening side. , And comes into contact with the door stopper A241J of the front-side pressing protrusion A241 in the vertical direction. As a result, unauthorized opening of the rotating door A220 is prohibited. Here, the direction in which the door rotating protrusion A224 presses the door stopper A241J of the front-side pressing protrusion A241 is in the up-down direction, and is orthogonal to the movable direction (front-back direction) of the movable tongue piece A230. Therefore, when an improper external force is applied to the rotating door A220, the door stopper A241J of the movable tongue piece A230 is not moved in the movable direction, and the unauthorized opening of the rotating door A220 is reliably prevented. Can be.

<Other effects example 1 using the configuration of each embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 108, another effect example performed using the configuration of each of the above-described embodiments will be described. In the second embodiment described above, as the display screen displayed on the third symbol display device 81, as shown in FIG. 15A, each symbol (special figure 1, special figure 2, And the number of reservations for each symbol are displayed. On the other hand, in the effect example described with reference to FIG. 108, an effect of displaying the symbol display of the special figure 1 and the number of reservations in the sub-display area Ds is executed. In the sub-display area Ds, a specific display mode (for example, a number) is displayed in a variable display mode corresponding to a change in the design of the special figure 1 (variation of the special figure 1 is executed). , The number of reservations in Toku-zu 1 is displayed in a variable display mode in a suggestion display mode indicating the next display mode. Here, the contents of the present effect example will be described with reference to FIG.

  The display screen in FIG. 108 (a) is an example of a display screen in which the special figure 1 is not suspended during the special figure 1 change during the time saving state (first time saving). As shown in FIG. 108 (a), the special figure 1 variable display area Ds3 of the sub display area Ds is referred to as “remaining time seconds” as an auxiliary display mode for giving meaning to the variable state of the variable display mode. The display and “10” are displayed in the variable display area Ds4 as a variable display mode indicating that the special figure 1 is changing. By changing the display mode ("10" in FIG. 108 (a)) displayed in the variable display area Ds4, it is configured to notify that the special figure 1 is changing during the variable display. I have.

  Note that the display mode (for example, “10”) displayed in the variable display area Ds4 while the special figure 1 is changing indicates that the player mistakenly thinks that the change of the special figure 1 has stopped in the display mode. In order to prevent this, the display mode is changed to the next display mode after a temporary stop display for a period (for example, 0.5 seconds) in which the player can recognize the display mode in a slightly shaking state. The display mode (for example, “∞” (see FIG. 108 (b))) displayed in the variable display area Ds4 when the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is stopped, It is configured to stop for a period (for example, 1 second) longer than the above-described temporary stop display (for example, 0.5 seconds) in order to recognize that the fluctuation has stopped.

  With such a configuration, the player can easily grasp the contents of the display mode displayed in the variable display area Ds4. Note that any other configuration may be used as long as the player can easily grasp the contents of the display mode displayed in the variable display area Ds4. The color of the background image in the special figure 1 variable display area Ds3, the display content of the auxiliary display mode is changed, and the display mode displayed in the variable display area Ds4 during the period in which the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed. Or the thickness of the characters may be changed. Thereby, the display mode displayed in the variable display area Ds4 can be easily understood by the player.

  Further, according to the configuration used in this effect example, the fact that the special figure 1 is fluctuating and the remaining fluctuation period of the special figure 1 can be notified according to the display mode displayed in the variable display area Ds4. ing. Thus, a plurality of pieces of information relating to the fluctuation of the special figure 1 can be displayed in one display area (variable display area Ds4).

  In this effect example, in order to notify the player that the special figure 1 is fluctuating, an effect display in which the time is counted down in the special figure 1 fluctuating display area Ds3 is executed. A configuration may be used, for example, a story development type effect display such as an effect of answering a question and an effect of accomplishing a mission may be used. Even in the case of such a configuration, the content displayed in the special figure 1 change display area Ds3 can be changed to notify the player that the special figure 1 is changing.

  Then, in the special figure 1 hold display area Ds5 of the sub-display area Ds, a hold number suggestion mode for indicating the hold number of the special figure 1 is displayed based on the hold number of the special figure 1 (FIG. 108 ( a)). This hold number suggestion mode is displayed in a display mode suggesting a display mode to be displayed in the variable display area Ds4 from the next time. That is, the display mode displayed corresponding to each hold number suggestion mode is also changed each time the display mode displayed in the variable display area Ds4 is changed.

  According to the display screen shown in FIG. 108A, four reserved number suggestion modes are displayed in the special figure 1 reserved display area Ds5, and each of the four reserved number indicating modes is “V”, “9”, or “∞”. Is displayed. The display mode displayed as the hold number suggestion mode indicates the display mode displayed in the variable display area Ds4 as described above, and the “V” display mode indicates that the lottery result of the special drawing 1 is a hit. The "9" display mode suggests the remaining fluctuation period of Toku-zu, and the "∞" display mode indicates that there is no pending storage of Toku-zu.

  According to the gaming state shown in FIG. 108 (a), since there is no hold storage of the special figure 1, the display setting is made so that the number of displayed “∞” increases as the hold number suggestion mode. As described above, the display mode of each hold number suggestion mode displayed in the special figure 1 hold display area Ds5 includes the lottery result of the changing special figure 1, the remaining change time of the changing special figure 1, and the special figure. Since the display content is set based on the number of pending balls of 1, the player plays the game while predicting the future progress of the game based on the display mode displayed in the special figure 1 reserved display area Ds5. It can be carried out.

  According to the display screen shown in FIG. 108 (a), four reserved number suggestion modes are displayed. However, the display number always indicates the four reserved number suggestion modes regardless of the reserved number of the special figure 1. It is configured to be. In other words, the special figure 1 hold display area Ds5 is configured to notify (suggest) the number of holds in the special figure 1 to the player based on the display content of each hold number suggestion mode, not the display number of the hold number suggestion mode. I have. With this configuration, it is possible to provide the player with a fun of predicting the current number of holds.

  In the present example, the display number of the hold number suggestion mode displayed in the special figure 1 hold display area Ds5 is always displayed (regardless of the hold number of the special figure 1), but four. Other configurations may be used. For example, based on the number of reservations in the special figure 1, the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 1, and the lottery result of the special figure 1, the information is displayed in the special figure 1 reservation display area Ds5. The display number of the reserved number suggestion mode may be different. In this case, for example, when the remaining fluctuation time of Toku-zu 1 becomes short (for example, when the remaining time becomes 10 seconds), the display number of the hold number suggestion mode displayed in Toku-zu 1 reservation display area Ds5 decreases. It is good to configure. As a result, the number of options predicted by the player can be reduced, and the prediction accuracy of the player can be improved.

  Further, as in the second embodiment described above, in a gaming machine configured to execute a game advantageous to the player when the number of reservations in the special figure 1 does not exist when the time reduction state ends, By informing (displaying) the presence / absence of the number of reservations in the special figure 1 as in the present effect example, it is possible to execute a game in a time-saving state while expecting the player to the end.

  Then, when the effect display of FIG. 108 (a) has elapsed and the fluctuation of the special figure 1 has stopped, the display screen shown in FIG. 108 (b) is displayed. The display screen of FIG. 108 (b) is a display screen showing an example of a case where neither the special figure 1 nor the special figure 2 is held in a state where the fluctuation of the special figure 1 executed during the time saving state is stopped. is there. As shown in FIG. 108 (b), when the first time-saving is completed in the state where the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are not held, the special figure fluctuation is not started (the special figure fluctuation in the second time-saving rotation is started). Without being started). During this short waiting time, by continuously executing the right-handed game, a game in which a normal symbol is continuously changed (lottery) and a ball is thrown into the second entrance 640 is executed.

  In the configuration of the game board 13 described above with reference to FIG. 2, even if a right-handed game is performed during the time saving state, the ball does not enter the right first entrance opening 64 b, and therefore, FIG. Is a gaming state in which the time-saving state is continuously maintained until the ball enters the second entrance 640. On the display screen, the main symbol Dmc corresponding to the ordinary symbol is variably displayed in the first display area Dm, and the special figure 1 hold display area Ds5 is replaced with the current figure instead of the display indicating the number of holds of the special figure 1. Is displayed in the super discharge mode, indicating that the vehicle is on standby for a short time, and the special figure 1 change display area Ds3 is displayed in the variable display area Ds4 as a display indicating that the special figure 1 is not changing. The character of “remaining time∞second” in which the “∞” display mode is stopped and displayed is displayed.

  According to the above-described effect example, the display mode in which the fluctuation state (lottery result, remaining fluctuation time) of the special figure 1 during the time reduction state and the number of reservations of the special figure 1 are displayed on the display screen is described as follows. Since the effect is displayed so as to predict the progress of the subsequent game, the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  In the above-described effect example, the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are shifted to a time-saving standby state that can occur in a state where there is no hold (the “∞” display mode is stopped and displayed in the variable display area Ds4). Is also executed, but the determination as to whether or not to execute the effect display is determined based on the number of reserved memories (presence or absence of suspension) in the special figures 1 and 2. For example, when the number of reserved storages in Toku-zu 2 is one or more, the above-described effect display may not be executed.

  In the first embodiment described above, when the game state at the timing when the normal symbol change (lottery) is executed and the game state at the timing at which the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a is set are both time reduction states, Although the operation pattern (long opening) advantageous to the player is set as the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a, other configurations may be used. For example, a change (lottery) of a normal symbol is executed. The timing at which the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (the timing at which the determination condition is satisfied) may be used instead of the timing at which the determination is made (the timing at which the determination is performed by the determination means).

  Also, the timing at which the operation of the electric accessory 640a is executed (the timing at which the operation unit executes the operation) is not the timing at which the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a is set (the timing at which the operation mode is set by the operation mode setting unit). ) May be used.

  Furthermore, when the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a causes the electric accessory 640a to operate a plurality of times, each operation content may be determined at each timing when each operation of the electric accessory 640a is executed. . Specifically, the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a has an operation pattern of opening the electric accessory 640a three times, and when an operation pattern (long opening) advantageous to the player is set, each opening is performed. When the period is set to 2 seconds and an operation pattern (short open) disadvantageous to the player is set, when each open period is set to 0.2 seconds, a long open is set as the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a. Is set, and when the time-saving state ends between the second opening and the third opening, the opening period may be set to 0.2 seconds only for the third opening. With such a configuration, during the time-saving state that is advantageous to the player, while the electric accessory 640a is operated so as to be advantageous to the player to the end, after the game state is shifted to the normal state, To provide an excessively advantageous state can be easily suppressed.

  In this case, only the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a may be set in advance, and the opening period may be set at the timing when the electric accessory 640a is opened according to the operation pattern. The timing at which the operation of the electric accessory 640a starts and the content of the operation may be individually controlled for each operation without setting the operation pattern of the object 640a.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in order to prevent a plurality of balls from entering the second entrance 640 in a state where the electric accessory 640a is open, the balls enter the second entrance 640. The entry of one ball is regarded as a condition for ending the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a, and further, in order to prevent a plurality of balls from entering the second entrance 640 at the same time, it is possible to enter the second entrance 640. And a distributing means for alternately distributing the spheres to a flow path (a first flow path) and a flow path (a second flow path) that cannot enter the second ball entrance 640. The distance between the spheres flowing down is configured to be wide. Other configurations may be added to more reliably prevent a plurality of balls from entering the second entrance 640 at the same time.

  For example, among flow paths (first flow paths) that can enter the second ball entrance 640, a gear-type sprocket mechanism is provided upstream of the second ball entrance 640, and for example, the first flow path is provided. Even if a plurality of balls flow down the road continuously, the sprocket mechanism may guide the balls one by one to the downstream side so as to widen the flow-down interval of the balls. Thereby, it is possible to physically prevent a plurality of balls from simultaneously entering the second entrance 640. As described above, in the case where the ball sending member that sends the ball in the downstream direction so that the flow distance of the ball is constant is provided on the upstream side of the second ball entrance 640, the above-described sorting member may not be used. . Further, the ball feed member may have a configuration other than the above-described sprocket mechanism. For example, a magnetic body movable by a constant operation is provided, and the ball is fed at a predetermined timing in a flowing direction depending on a moving position of the magnetic body (flows down). ) Configuration may be used.

  In the present embodiment, a configuration is used in which the ball fired in the right-handed game is distributed to two flow paths by the distribution member (the distribution device 700). However, the configuration is such that the ball is distributed to three or more flow paths. May be used. In this case, a configuration in which one distribution member distributes the sphere to three or more flow paths may be used, or by using a plurality of distribution members in combination, the sphere may be divided into three or more flow paths. You may comprise so that it may distribute. Thereby, the interval at which the ball flows down the flow path that can enter the second ball entrance 640 can be further increased.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the distribution member (the distribution device 700) in which the spheres are uniformly distributed to the plurality of flow paths is used, but it is not necessary to equalize the distribution rate of the spheres to each flow path. Instead, for example, a distribution member may be provided such that the number of spheres flowing down the first flow path 701 and the number of spheres flowing down the second flow path 702 are 1: 2, or the distribution destination of the sphere may be A configuration that can be selected at random may be provided. As a result, the player can be interested in the manner in which the ball flows.

  In the second embodiment described above, a plurality of conditions for terminating the time-saving state are provided, and a configuration for terminating the time-saving state when any of the conditions is satisfied is used. However, other configurations may be used. The time-saving state may end when all the set conditions for terminating the time-saving state are satisfied. In this case, it is preferable to use a configuration in which a plurality of time-saving state end conditions that are already satisfied are output to the outside so that the player can grasp them.

  Further, in the above-described second embodiment, one of the end conditions of the time-saving state is that the variation (lottery) of the first special symbol is executed a plurality of times (two times) as the number of time-saving times in which the time-saving state is continued. Although such a configuration is used, the following gameplay may be executed using such a configuration.

  In the above-described third embodiment, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the time period of the normal symbol is varied to provide a variety of playability, when the time-saving state B is set, and further, when the time-saving state is set. When the number of normal symbol fluctuations exceeds 40, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is reduced to provide an advantageous state to the player, but the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is changed. By doing so, it may be configured to provide a disadvantageous state to the player, for example, a plurality of normal figure fluctuation time based on the type of the symbol that won the win and the game state at the time of winning the win In the configuration in which one selection table is selected from the selection tables and the general figure fluctuation time to be executed from the selected general figure fluctuation time selection table is selected, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol during the time saving state is determined. Also IHiroshizu varying time (Hiroshizu length variation time) may be used can become configuration selection.

  In this case, if the normal figure length change time is selected, it becomes impossible to execute the normal symbol lottery further during the time reduction state, and the gaming state advantageous to the player is substantially ended. With this configuration, the player can know how long the substantial time-saving state (the game state is the time-saving state and the state in which the normal figure length change time is not selected as the normal symbol change) continues. It is possible to provide difficult game characteristics.

  In addition, when selecting the fluctuation time of a normal symbol (general figure), a configuration may be used in which the fluctuation time set in advance based on the number of times of normal figure fluctuation is selected in advance. When setting the fluctuation time of a symbol (ordinary figure), a configuration may be used in which a fluctuation time corresponding to a counter value obtained from a plurality of fluctuation times is selected based on a predetermined counter value. Further, when starting the fluctuation of the ordinary symbol (general figure), a predetermined lottery is executed, and when the lottery result is the predetermined lottery result, the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol (general figure) is set to May be selected (for example, 150 seconds) longer than the fluctuation time of the first special symbol (normal graphic length fluctuation time).

  In this way, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, by increasing the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, it is possible to end the substantial time saving state that is advantageous to the player, The player can concentrate on playing games while always having a sense of tension.

  Further, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the third symbol display device 81 executes the third symbol display device 81 in a configuration in which an ordinary symbol variation time (an ordinary symbol length variation time) longer than the variation time of the first special symbol during the time saving state is selected. As the effect to be performed, when the general figure length change time is selected, the notification of the right-handed game may be erased and the left-handed game may be guided even if the time-saving state is in effect. In this case, since the special figure 1 change in the time saving state is still being executed, the third symbol display device 81 displays the time saving state until the special figure 1 change in the time saving state ends. It is preferable to execute an effect to notify that the (rensou mode) has ended. Thereby, it is possible to make the player think that the special figure 1 fluctuation in the time reduction state ends and the time reduction state ends.

  In addition, as the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol, in addition to the above-described general figure fluctuation time (150 seconds), the fluctuation time in the general figure (for example, 30 seconds or 50 seconds). In this case, when the fluctuating time during the ordinary figure is set, similarly to the case when the fluctuating time during the ordinary figure is set, an effect display indicating that the time saving state has ended is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. At the timing when the fluctuating time in the ordinary figure ends, or immediately before the fluctuating time in the ordinary figure ends (for example, in response to the normal (3 seconds before), the effect display during the time saving state may be displayed again. This makes it possible to think that the player has shifted to the time saving state a plurality of times by using one time saving state, and it is possible to provide an unexpected game to the player.

  Furthermore, by combining the above-mentioned two general figure fluctuation configurations, a time reduction state end effect executed when the set general figure fluctuation time exceeds the remaining period of the time reduction state, and a set general figure fluctuation time May be displayed when both are shorter than the remaining period of the time-saving state. As a result, even after the time-saving state end effect has been executed, it is possible to enthusiastically play a game while having the expectation of immediately shifting to the time-saving state.

  In the first embodiment described above, the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a is set so that the ball cannot enter the second entrance 640 in the normal state (non-time saving state). If a ball enters the second entrance 640, a game stopping means for stopping the game may be provided. In this case, as the game stopping means, means for executing a firing prohibition process in which a ball is not fired even if the operation handle 51 is operated, or a ball fired by operating the operation handle 51 is used in the game area (the game board 13). A ball collection process that allows the ball to be collected before it reaches the front, a firing regulation process that regulates the firing intensity of the operation handle to a firing intensity that is disadvantageous to the player (a firing intensity that cannot reach the game area), Even if a ball enters each of the entrances provided in the game area, there may be a ball entry invalidation process for invalidating all benefits (privileges for paying out prize balls and privileges for executing lottery).

  In addition, as processing for executing the game stopping means, first, when it is determined that a ball has entered the second entrance 640, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is a time saving state. If it is determined that it is not the time saving state, it is next determined whether or not the current game is a jackpot game. Then, when it is determined that the game is not during the big hit game, it may be determined that the current ball entry is an illegal ball entry and the above-described game stop means is used to execute the game stop processing.

  Further, in the above-described game stop means execution processing, when it is determined that a ball has entered the second entrance 640 during the jackpot game, a special privilege effect is executed instead of executing the game stop means. Good to do. In other words, although the game is not in the time saving state during the jackpot game, but is in the game state in which the right-handed game is performed, a ball may rarely enter the second entrance 640. In this case, the game stop means is not executed, and instead, a special effect for celebrating the player is executed, thereby realizing a very rare experience for the player. And the effect can be enhanced.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 configured to be able to execute the above-described special effects, the general symbol change display is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a manner recognizable by the player during the big hit game, and the electric accessory 640a is displayed. The opening timing (short opening timing) may be predicted. This allows the player to complete the jackpot game while closely watching the normal symbol change display displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

<Other effect example 2 using the configuration of the third embodiment>
Next, another effect example 2 using the configuration of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 109 to 111. In this production example, the structure for setting the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol is different from that of the third embodiment described above, and the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol is changed according to the game state. It is configured to set based on the selection table 203aa. Here, with reference to FIG. 109, the content of the effect performed in the present effect example 2 will be described.

  FIG. 109 shows an example of a display screen of an effect executed in the present effect example 2, and FIG. 109 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen when a time-saving state is started. FIG. 109 (b) is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a display screen when a long variation is set as a variation time of a normal symbol in a time saving state. Note that the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the above-described embodiments, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 109 (a), a picture imitating a bomb is displayed on the display screen of this effect example 2 as an end suggestion display mode Dm10, which is an opportunity to reduce the remaining period in a short time and a short time. In the second sub-display area Ds2, the characters "pinch when a bomb explodes" indicating the content of the end indication display mode Dm10 are displayed.

  Then, when the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set longer than the remaining period of the short time, the end suggestion display mode Dm10 is displayed in an exploded display mode as shown in FIG. 109 (b), In the second sub-display area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds, the characters "sorry end" are displayed, and the remaining time is displayed as "? Seconds".

  As described above, the actual time-saving period (the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 in which the fluctuation is started during the time period) does not change, but when it is determined that the fluctuation of the ordinary symbol (general figure) does not end during the time-saving period. Since the electric accessory 640a does not perform the opening operation (long opening) that is advantageous to the player during the short time period, the state that is substantially advantageous to the player has ended.

  In addition, in the effect example 2, when the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set as the fluctuation time longer than the remaining period of the short time, the display screen shown in FIG. 109 (b) is displayed. However, when a variation time (for example, 10 seconds) longer than a normal variation time (3 seconds) can be set as a variation time of a normal symbol, a similar display screen is displayed when the variation time is selected. Good. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player think that the advantageous period has ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 110, the general-purpose variation pattern selection table 202aa used in the present effect example 2 will be described. FIG. 110 (a) is a schematic diagram in which the contents of the ordinary figure fluctuation pattern selection table 202aa are defined. As shown in FIG. 110 (a), the normal pattern change pattern selection table 202aa includes a normal pattern change pattern selection table 202aa1 that is referred to when the game state is the normal state, and a case where the game state is time saving A. A time saving A general-purpose variation pattern selection table 202aa2 to be referred to and a time saving B additional diagram variation pattern selection table 202aa3 to be referenced when the gaming state is the time saving B are defined, and differ depending on each gaming state. The variation pattern selection table is referred to.

  As shown in FIG. 110 (b), the normal pattern change pattern selection table 202aa1 is defined so that a change pattern (change time) of 4 seconds is always selected. As shown in FIGS. 110 (c) and 110 (d), 202aa2 and the attached figure variation pattern selection table for time saving B 202aa3 respectively show the value of the variation type counter and the ordinary symbol (general figure) variation during the time saving state. The configuration is such that a variation pattern (variation time) is selected based on the number of times.

  Note that the means for measuring the number of times the normal symbol (ordinary figure) fluctuates during the time saving state is the same as that in the above-described third embodiment, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 111, a description will be given of the ordinary symbol variation process 4 executed in the present effect example 2. FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing the contents of the normal symbol variation process 4. The ordinary symbol variation process 4 is different from the above-described ordinary symbol variation process (see FIG. 45) in that the processes (S914 and S915) for setting the variation time are changed, and the other configurations are the same. The same components are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. When the normal symbol variation process 4 is executed and it is determined that the time is not reduced in the process of S912 (S912: No), or when the process of S913 is completed, the variation time is set based on the universal symbol variation pattern selection table 202aa. Then, the present process ends.

  According to the present demonstration example 2 described above, the period that is advantageous to the player during the time reduction period (the period when the electric accessory 640a is long open) can be varied depending on the set fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol. Because it is possible, the player can always be noticed for how long the advantageous period lasts.

  It is to be noted that, based on the ordinary symbol winning information command output from the main control device 110, the variation time of the ordinary symbol that is stored and stored is determined in advance, and the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is determined based on the determination result. May be set. In this case, for example, the end suggestion display mode Dm10 may not be displayed when there is no change in the general time of the change time exceeding the remaining time saving time period in the prior determination information of the general figure. Thus, a period in which the player can play the game with peace of mind can be provided.

  Further, the effect display mode may be changed according to the presence / absence of the reserved storage of the special figure 2. In this case, the end suggestion display mode Dm10 may be displayed only in the state where the special figure 2 has no hold storage. As a result, the player can execute a game having a sense of crisis, and the effect can be enhanced.

<Other examples using the configuration of each embodiment described above>
In each of the above-described embodiments, a case where a jackpot is won in a lottery of a special symbol (a first special symbol or a second special symbol) (a symbol hit) and a case where a ball passes through a specific area (a V winning switch 650e3) ( Although the example using the pachinko machine 10 (so-called one type and two types mixed type) in which a big hit game is executed has been described for each of the V winnings, the configuration of each of the above-described embodiments is applied only to the above-mentioned symbol hits. It may be used for such a gaming machine (so-called one type). Next, a description will be given of a gaming machine in which the configuration of each embodiment described above is used for one type.

  In gaming machines used in other examples, a jackpot game is executed when a jackpot is won in a lottery of a special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol), and a predetermined condition is established depending on the type of the jackpot selected. Until a special symbol fluctuates five times, a gaming machine capable of giving a probable change state in which the probability of winning a jackpot by a special symbol lottery is set to a higher probability than the normal state (so-called 1 It is a winning type based on the first special symbol and a jackpot winning based on the second special symbol is more advantageous to the player (a jackpot game with a large number of rounds and a jackpot that is likely to be given a probable change state) than the jackpot winning based on the first special symbol (Game).

  Further, when the gaming state shifts to the probable change state, a change pattern having a long change time (for example, 150 seconds) is selected as the change pattern (change time) of the first special symbol, as in the above-described embodiments. Make it easier. In a state where both the first special symbol holding storage and the second special symbol holding memory are provided, the change (lottery) based on the second special symbol holding memory is preferentially executed. (So-called special figure 2 priority change).

  With such a configuration, it is possible to perform a game for acquiring the hold memory of the second special symbol in a state where the long-time fluctuation of the first special symbol is executed. Therefore, it is possible to enthusiastically play a game during the predetermined period (during the change of the first special symbol in the probable state). In the case where such a configuration is used, a game (for example, a right-handed game) aiming at a predetermined position in the game area is performed, so that the first ball entry means that triggers the acquisition of the reserved memory of the first special symbol is obtained. Each first ball entry so as to be able to enter both the (first entry port 64) and the second entry means (second entry port 640) which triggers the acquisition of the reserved memory of the second special symbol. Means may be provided. Further, it is preferable that the second ball entry means is configured to make it difficult for the ball to enter the ball than the first ball entry means.

  Thus, in the probable change state, a fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time is selected as the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol, and during a predetermined period in which the probable change state continues (a period until the number of times of the special symbol change ends five times), A game (unfavorable game) in which the first special symbol is changed without the lottery of the second special symbol being executed (without the ball entering the second ball entry means) or the first special symbol A fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is selected as the fluctuation pattern of the symbol, and a lottery of the second special symbol is executed during a predetermined period (a period until the number of times the special symbol changes five times) in which the probable change state is continued. (A ball enters the second ball entry means), and a game in which the change of the second special symbol is executed (advantageous game) is executed.

  In this manner, the variation pattern of the first special symbol set during the probable change state executes the probable change state advantageous to the player and the probable change state disadvantageous to the player. Can watch the player. Further, similarly to the above-described embodiments, even when a small hit is won in the first special symbol, it is possible to continue the game for acquiring the reserved memory of the second special symbol.

  In the other examples described above, a configuration in which the probable change state ends when the number of times of the change of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number is used as a one-type probable game machine. However, other configurations may be used. For example, a configuration in which the probable change state is continued until the next jackpot is won, or each time a special symbol change (lottery) is executed, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to end the probable change state, and based on the lottery result, A configuration for terminating the probable change state may be used.

  Further, in the other examples described above, a configuration is used in which the fluctuation (lottery) based on the reserved storage of Toku-zu 2 is executed with higher priority than the fluctuation (lottery) based on the reserved storage of Toku-zu 2. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be used in which the special symbols are changed (lottery) in the order in which the reserved memories are acquired (winning order) regardless of the special figures 1 and 2. Further, the number of consecutive times (upper limit number) to which the probable change state is provided may be set in advance, and when the upper limit number is reached, the probable change state may not be provided after the end of the big hit.

  Next, in the above-described first embodiment, during the fluctuation of the first special symbol (special figure 1) executed during the time saving state, the holding memory of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is acquired, Although the configuration in which the time-saving state is given again after the big hit game based on the hold storage is used, an upper limit (for example, five times) may be set to the number of times the time-saving state is continuously given. .

  In this case, the number of jackpots to be executed until the number of consecutive grants in the time saving state reaches the upper limit is made different depending on the number of jackpot rights acquired in one time saving state (the number of reserved storages in FIG. 2). be able to. Therefore, the player can be motivated to play the game in order to acquire a larger number of reserved memories in the special map 2.

  In the above-described first embodiment, the time-saving state is always given after the end of the jackpot game based on the hold storage of the special map 2, however, the big hit game based on the hold memory of the special map 2 is provided. The jackpot type to which the time reduction state is not given after the end may be selected. This makes it possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the number of times the time saving state has been given when the jackpot is continuously executed by continuously digesting the hold storage of the special figure 2.

  In other words, for example, in the case where there are four reservation memories of Toku-zu 2 and the jackpot game based on the reservation memory has four consecutive time savings, the time savings are completed when the four reservation memories of Toku-zu 2 are consumed. While the next special symbol change is executed in a state where the number of consecutive states of the state becomes four, based on the hold memory that is lastly digested among the jackpot games based on the hold memory of the special figure 2. If the jackpot has a time reduction and the other has no time reduction, the number of consecutive grants in the time reduction state becomes one at the time when the four reserved storages in the special figure 2 are consumed.

  Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know whether or not the continuous number of times of saving time has reached the upper limit, and the interest of the game can be improved. Further, since the maximum number of jackpots in the case where the number of consecutive grants in the time saving state reaches the upper limit can be varied depending on the type of jackpot of the acquired special figure 2 on-hold memory, a surprising game is provided to the player. be able to.

  In addition, as a method of measuring the number of continuous grants in the time saving state, a method of measuring the number of times the time saving is set for a continuous big hit may be used, or the number of times of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 executed during the time saving state may be measured. May be used. When the latter measurement method is used in the first embodiment described above, in a single extended-village mode, when the number of consecutive grants in the time saving state reaches the upper limit (5), a maximum of 25 jackpots (special) In FIG. 2, the upper limit (4 pieces) is held each time, and the fluctuation result of Toku-zu 1 is a big hit every time. 1 if the variation result of FIG. As described above, when the upper limit is set to the number of consecutive grants in the time saving state, the number of jackpots executed during one extended game mode can be changed. It is possible to play the game eagerly.

  In a right-handed state (for example, a time-saving state or a probable change state) that is advantageous to the player, an advantageous special design (second special design) that is advantageous to the player among the special designs and a disadvantage that is more advantageous than the advantageous special design. And the special symbol (first special symbol) can be changed (lottery), and during the right-handed state, the second special symbol is more easily configured to satisfy the change execution condition than the first special symbol. In the gaming machine, when it is determined that the second special symbol is fluctuating by the determining means for determining the type of the special symbol fluctuating during the right-handed game, the display means (the third symbol display device 81) displays the second special symbol. (2) An effect display for changing and displaying the identification information for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol is executed, and when it is determined by the determining means that the first special symbol is fluctuating, the lottery result of the first special symbol is displayed. Of identification information for The guidance display (for example, "save the hold of the special figure 2") that prompts the user to acquire the holding of the second special symbol during the fluctuation period is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in an emphasized manner. It may be configured as follows.

  As described above, in the specific game state, the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 (especially, the variation display mode of the special symbol) is changed based on the type of the special symbol to be executed, so that the current symbol is set. An appropriate game method can be notified to the player based on the current game state and the current game content. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

  In addition, there is provided a determination means for determining a variation time of the first special symbol executed during the right-handed game, and the determination means determines a variation time of the first special symbol being executed for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). If it is determined that the above is the case, the above-described guidance display may be displayed. This allows the player to grasp the contents of the guidance display and correct the game contents of the game being executed. Further, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the period during which the guidance display is displayed becomes short and the player is confused.

  Furthermore, in each of the above-described embodiments, as the opening pattern of the motorized accessory 640a during the time reduction state, an opening pattern of 11 seconds of a first opening period of 3 seconds, a closing period of 5 seconds, and a second opening period of 3 seconds (long opening period). ) Is set and the opening scenario corresponding to the set opening pattern ends, or when one ball enters the second entrance 640 during the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a, Although the condition (end condition) for terminating the opening operation of the object 640a is established, a different opening pattern and an end condition are set as the opening pattern of the electric accessory 640a, and the embodiment described above is applied. May constitute gaming machines having different gaming properties.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the number of balls entering the second entrance 640 when the electric accessory 640a is opened during the time-saving state (when a winning is achieved by a normal symbol lottery during the time-saving state). By limiting the number to one, it has been suppressed that an excessive privilege is given to the player. However, by using such a configuration, a bonus granted to a player when a normal symbol lottery is won during a time-saving state (a privilege that allows the ball to enter the second entrance 640 easily). Is always constant, and there is a problem that the player's willingness to play decreases.

  Therefore, in order to solve the above-described problem, as an opening pattern (long opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a executed during the time saving state, an interval at which the ball reaches the electric accessory 640a (the ball is distributed by the distribution member 700). An open pattern in which an open scenario in which 0.2 seconds is released at intervals of 1.2 seconds, which is the (distributed interval), is used five times is set, and the open scenario ends as a condition for ending the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a. In such a case, a configuration in which four balls enter the second entrance 640 during the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a may be set as the end condition.

  With this configuration, when the timing when the electric accessory 640a is released in the long opening pattern coincides with the timing when the ball reaches the electric accessory 640a, the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a is performed once. In, it is possible to make a maximum of four balls enter the second entrance 640. Therefore, a bonus (a privilege that makes it easy for the ball to enter the second entrance 640) to be given to the player when the player wins the normal symbol lottery during the time-saving state is changed to the game situation (ball launch timing, The timing at which the ball reaches the electric accessory 640a) can be varied, and the game can be prevented from becoming monotonous.

  Further, when the right-handed game is continuously executed (when a game in which 100 balls are fired in one minute is executed), the opening of the electric accessory 640a is changed to the electric accessory 640a. Is set to 1.2 seconds in the same manner as the timing at which the ball arrives, so that a large number of balls can easily enter the second entrance 640 for a player who is actively executing a right-handed game. can do.

  In addition, as described with reference to the first embodiment, the distribution member 700 for alternately distributing the game balls and the flow of the balls distributed by the distribution member 700 are provided on the right side area of the game board 13. Since the ball is configured to reach the electric accessory 640 via a rectifying unit (a curved path 701a or a path directly below the ball that does not reduce the falling speed of the ball) for keeping the interval constant, a right-handed game is performed. When the ball is continuously executed, the accuracy of the interval at which the shot ball reaches the electric accessory 640a can be further improved.

  In the case where such a configuration is used, a configuration may be adopted in which a suggestion notification for suggesting to the player the opening timing of the electric accessory 640a is executed. By executing the suggestion notification, it is possible for the player to play the game aiming at a timing at which the ball easily enters the second entrance 640.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the frame button 22 for determining that the operating means has been operated by the player performing a pressing operation is used as the operating means operable by the player. It is also possible to use, it is possible to determine that the player has been operated by tilting the player left and right or back and forth, and it is possible to determine that the player has been operated by touching or approaching the lever A simple touch sensor type operation means, a wireless type operation means capable of discriminating that the operation has been performed by transmitting a predetermined radio wave, or the like may be used.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the third symbol display for showing the result of the lottery of each symbol to the player is executed by one display means (the third symbol display device 81), but other configurations are used. For example, of the third symbols, different display units may be provided for a display unit for displaying a main symbol displayed to be emphasized to a player and a display unit for displaying a sub symbol. Further, as a configuration of the display means, a configuration other than a liquid crystal display may be used, and a display using an organic electroluminescence (EL) phenomenon that emits light when a voltage is applied to a layered structure using a certain organic compound is applied. The surface of the device (organic EL display) or various three-dimensional objects (such as an accessory) provided in the pachinko machine 10 is used as a screen, and the position of the three-dimensional surface (projection, burial relationship) is identified, and then the image is displayed using a projector. A display device (project mapping) for irradiation may be used.

  In the case where the above-described project mapping is used as the display means, the projection of the video data is performed based on the data of the three-dimensional surface of the movable role provided on the pachinko machine 10 and the position data of the movable role at the time of irradiation. By configuring so as to determine the position and the content, a flexible display can be executed and the effect of the effect can be enhanced. In addition, in consideration of a case where an abnormality has occurred in a movable auditorium that can serve as a screen, it is determined whether or not the movable state of the movable auditorium is normal, and if it is determined that the determination result is not normal, a non-movable It is preferable to execute the abnormal-time control so as to irradiate the image data with the portion as a screen. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the problem that the player cannot grasp the display content displayed on the display means due to the abnormality of the movable auditorium.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, a right-handed game aiming at the right area of the game board 13 is executed in a game state (time saving state) advantageous to the player, and a left area of the game board 13 in a normal game state. The left-handed game aiming at is executed, but the target area of the game board 13 may be made different depending on the game state. May execute a right-handed game. Further, a game in a different game state may be executed while aiming at the same area.

  The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a twice-rights item or a three-times rights item) that increases the jackpot expectation value until a jackpot condition occurs a plurality of times (for example, two or three times) including that. ). Further, after the big hit symbol is displayed, the game may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game for giving a predetermined game value to a player on condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, a prize winning device having a special area such as a V zone may be provided, and the pachinko machine may be put into a special game state on condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the present invention may be implemented as various game machines such as areache, sparrow ball, slot machine, so-called game machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is fluctuated by operating an operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted and a symbol valid line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and determined by operating a stop button. Things. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is as follows. "A display device for variably displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided. The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to a player on the condition that the combination of the identification information at the time is a specific one, and in this case, coins, medals, etc. are representative of game media. As an example.

  Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, a display device for variably displaying a symbol row including a plurality of symbols and then displaying the symbols in a fixed manner is provided, and a handle for hitting a ball is provided. Not included. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the fluctuation of the symbol is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, and, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or With the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called big hit symbol is generated. Is a method in which a large amount of balls are paid out to a lower saucer. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a game value in a game hall, so it is a game value seen in a current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of gaming machines can be solved.

  Hereinafter, the concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be described.

<Feature A>
First obtaining means for obtaining first information based on satisfaction of a first obtaining condition; first determining means for performing first determination based on the first information obtained by the first obtaining means; The first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information for indicating the first determination result by the first determination means, and the first identification information for indicating the specific first determination result is When the stop display is performed, a first privilege granting unit that grants the first privilege to the player, a second acquisition unit that acquires the second information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition, and a second acquisition unit A storage unit in which the obtained second information is stored, and a second unit that executes a second determination based on the second information stored in the storage unit, in which a second determination that is more advantageous for the player than the first determination is easily performed. 2 determining means and a state for restricting establishment of the second acquisition condition. A gaming machine comprising: a first state and a state setting means that can be set by switching between a first state and a second state in which the second acquisition condition is more easily satisfied than the first state. Priority means for executing the second determination corresponding to the second information being performed in preference to the first determination, and when the first state is switched to the second state, A gaming machine A1 characterized in that the first determination is performed before the second determination is performed.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the state of the starting port provided on the game board is changed from the first state in which the game ball is hard to enter to the second state in which the game ball is easy to enter. In some cases, a first lottery is performed. In such a conventional gaming machine, a lottery executed when a game ball enters the starting port in a state easily changed to the second state is executed a predetermined number of times, and until a predetermined number of lottery results is displayed. A gaming machine that is set continuously has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-147965).

  However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the probability that the determination that the lottery is advantageous to the player is performed in a state in which the predetermined number of lotteries are performed is constant, and the game becomes monotonous, and the player becomes early. There was a problem of getting tired.

  According to the gaming machine A1, even in a special state in which the second acquisition condition is easily satisfied, the dynamic display of the first identification information is executed, and the second determination is made during the dynamic display period. Since the execution is restricted, at the start of the special state, a period in which the first determination that is more disadvantageous to the player than the second determination is performed is performed, and thereafter, the second determination that is advantageous to the player is performed. The second information stored in the storage means is configured so that the second determination is executed with priority over the first determination by the priority means, so that the second determination which is advantageous to the player is continuously performed. By switching to a period in which the game is likely to be executed, there is an effect that the interest of the player is improved and a trouble that the player gets tired of the game early can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine A1, first ball entry means that triggers the establishment of the first acquisition condition when a game ball enters, and triggers the satisfaction of the second acquisition condition when a game ball enters. A second ball entry means, a variable member that can be changed between an open state where game balls can enter the second ball entry means and a closed state where entry of the game balls is difficult, and a game ball passing through a predetermined passage area Detection means capable of detecting whether the game has been performed, lottery means for executing a lottery based on the detection of a game ball by the detection means, and lottery information for indicating a lottery result by the lottery means are dynamically displayed. The lottery information dynamic display means, when the lottery information for indicating the specific lottery result is stopped and displayed, the variable member is changed to the closed state or the open state in a variable pattern set according to a predetermined rule. Variable control means for changing, the lottery means, Gaming machine 1 identification information or the second identification information is characterized in that which is configured to be able to execute the lottery in the period being dynamically displayed A2.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine A1, a special state is set, and even during a period in which the first identification information is dynamically displayed, the lottery is performed by passing the gaming ball to the passing area. The second acquisition condition can be satisfied by causing the game ball to enter the second ball entry means to be executed, so that the pass area is as small as possible even during the period in which the first identification information is dynamically displayed. There is an effect that a player can play a game so that a player can pass a game ball.

  In the gaming machine A1 or A2, a state in which game balls can enter the ball, variable winning means in which the game balls are changed to difficult to enter the ball, and a specific area through which the game balls entering the variable winning means can pass. A bonus game execution unit that executes a bonus game that is advantageous to the player when the game ball passes through the specific area, and that the second determination unit determines that the specific second determination result is obtained. A game machine A3 comprising: a variable game execution means for changing the variable ball entry means from the difficult ball entry state to the ball entry possible state based on the variable ball entry means.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine A1 or A2, by performing the second determination, it is possible to shift to a game in which a game ball is passed to a specific area, and There is an effect that a game with change can be provided.

  In any one of the gaming machines A2 and A3, the variable pattern changed by the variable control means is set variably in accordance with a period in which the special state is set. Gaming machine A4.

  According to the gaming machine A4, since the variable pattern is changed in accordance with the setting period of the special state, there is an effect that the variable pattern can be executed in accordance with the period in which the special state is set.

  In any one of the gaming machines A2 to A4, a first storage unit that stores the first information acquired by the first acquisition unit, and the first identification dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display unit. A first dynamic display period setting unit that determines a dynamic display period of information, wherein the first dynamic display period setting unit is configured to determine whether the second state is set by the state setting unit. As the dynamic display period of the first identification information, at least a first dynamic display period shorter than a dynamic display period in which the lottery information is dynamically displayed by the lottery information dynamic display means; A gaming machine A5 wherein a second dynamic display period longer than a dynamically displayed dynamic display period can be set.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A2 to A4, the second state is set as the second state by the length of the dynamic display period set by the first dynamic display period setting means. An advantageous state in which a game ball can easily enter the ball means and a disadvantageous state in which a game ball cannot easily enter the second ball entry means can be set. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play a game so that the second state becomes an advantageous state.

  The gaming machine A5, comprising: display means capable of displaying predetermined information; and display control means for causing the display means to display state information for indicating the state of the game set by the state setting means. The control means does not display state information for indicating the second state when the first dynamic display period setting means sets the second dynamic display period. Gaming machine A6.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine A5, a game ball is entered into the second ball entry means as a dynamic display period of the first identification information even though the second state is set. When the second dynamic display period, which is difficult to be set, is set, the state information for indicating the second state is not displayed, so that the information displayed on the display means impairs the expectation of the player. There is an effect that it can be suppressed.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the game device includes a game restricting unit capable of restricting a game of the player based on the second acquisition condition being satisfied in the state where the first state is set. A gaming machine A7 characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the player's game is performed based on the fact that the second acquisition condition is satisfied in the first state in which the establishment of the second acquisition condition is restricted. Since it is possible to regulate the game, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the illegal establishment of the second acquisition condition.

  The gaming machine A8 according to the gaming machine A7, wherein the game regulating means regulates launching of a game ball.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A7, since the launch of the game ball is regulated by the game regulating means, there is an effect that fraud can be effectively suppressed.

  In any one of the gaming machines A2 to A8, the first ball entry means is capable of entering a first flow path in which a game ball is difficult to enter the second ball entry means, and a game ball to the second ball entry means. The first ball entry means arranged in the second flow path and the first ball entry means arranged in the second flow path, respectively, allows a game ball to enter a ball entry port arranged in the second flow path to play a game. A ball is made available for entry, and a game ball enters the first ball entry means arranged in the second flow path, thereby making the game ball difficult to enter. Gaming machine A9.

  According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A2 to A8, the second state is set by allowing the gaming ball to enter the entrance, so that the gaming ball enters the second entering means. Even when a game ball is caused to flow down to the second flow path in order to make the ball flow, the game ball easily enters the first ball entry means by entering the game ball into the ball entry port. There is an effect that the determination can be easily performed and the configuration can be made.

  In the gaming machine A9, holding means capable of holding the game ball at a position where the game ball can enter the ball entrance, and holding release means for releasing the holding by the holding means based on establishment of a release condition. A gaming machine A10 characterized by having:

  According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine A9, there is an effect that the timing at which the gaming ball enters the first ball entry means can be controlled by the release condition.

  The gaming machine A11, wherein in the gaming machine A10, the cancellation condition is canceled based on the first benefit being given by the first privilege granting means.

  According to the gaming machine A11, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine A10, the release condition is satisfied at the timing when the first privilege is provided, so that the first acquisition condition is easily satisfied after the first privilege is provided. There is an effect that can be.

<Feature B group> (Regulation of special 1 prize at normal time)
A first flow path through which a game ball can flow, a second flow path through which a game ball flowing down the first flow path is difficult to flow, and a position where a game ball flowing down the first flow path can enter the ball. A first ball entry means, a second ball entry means arranged in the second flow path and capable of entering a game ball, and a game ball entering the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means. Acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the ball, determination means for performing a determination based on the information acquired by the acquisition means, and identification information for indicating a determination result by the determination means being dynamic. In a gaming machine having a dynamic display means to be displayed, and a privilege granting means for granting a privilege to a player when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed. By executing a game by causing a game ball to flow down to the second flow path, the first flow path A state setting means capable of setting a special state that is advantageous to the player rather than executing a game by letting a ball down, and a state in which the special state is not set by the state setting means, Regulating means for making it harder for game balls to enter the second ball entry means than for the first ball entry means when a game is played by causing game balls to flow down to the second flow path. A gaming machine B1 characterized by the following.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the state of the starting port provided on the game board is changed from the first state in which the game ball is hard to enter to the second state in which the game ball is easy to enter. In some cases, a first lottery is performed. In such a conventional gaming machine, a lottery executed when a game ball enters the starting port in a state easily changed to the second state is executed a predetermined number of times, and until a predetermined number of lottery results is displayed. A gaming machine that is set continuously has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-147965).

  However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the probability that the determination that the lottery is advantageous to the player is performed in a state in which the predetermined number of lotteries are performed is constant, and the game becomes monotonous, and the player becomes early. There was a problem of getting tired. Also, in order to give a change to the game, if it is configured to play the game by changing the flow route of the game ball, if the game ball flows down to a different route from the assumed flow route, it will be illegally profitable for the player Was given.

  According to the gaming machine B1, when the special state is set, the game can be changed by flowing down the second flow path so that the game is performed, while the special state is set. If not, the game ball is restricted from entering the second ball entry means more easily than the first ball entry means. Therefore, when the special state is completed, the first flow path is caused to flow down and the game is played. By inevitably causing the player to do so, there is an effect that malfunctions such as fraud can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine B1, the second flow path is formed with at least a third flow path through which game balls can flow and a fourth flow path through which game balls flowing down the third flow path are difficult to flow. And a distributing means for distributing game balls flowing down the second flow path to the third flow path and the fourth flow path, respectively, and the second entering ball is provided in the fourth flow path. A gaming machine B2, wherein the means are arranged.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B1, the gaming balls distributed to the third channel among the gaming balls flowing down to the second channel can enter the second ball entry means. Therefore, there is an effect that the amount of game balls that can enter the second ball entry means than the first ball entry means can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine B2, a third ball entry means capable of entering a game ball is disposed in the third flow path, and based on the game ball having entered the third ball entry means, Information is obtained by the obtaining means, and an advantage determination means for performing an advantage determination that is more advantageous to the player than the determination based on the information obtained by the game ball entering the third ball entry means; and And the variable state control means for changing the state in which the game ball does not easily enter the third ball entry means to the state in which it is easy to enter the ball by setting the special state. Gaming machine B3.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B2, in the special state, the state is such that it is easy to enter the third ball entry means, so that the player can cause the game ball to flow down to the second flow path. There is an effect that the user can be prompted to play a game.

  The gaming machine B4 in the gaming machine B2 or B3, wherein the allocating means alternately distributes gaming balls to the third flow path and the fourth flow path.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B2 or B3, by alternately allocating the gaming balls, half of the gaming balls flowing down to the second flow path can flow down, and the second ball entry means can be effectively provided. There is an effect that the number of game balls entering the ball can be reduced.

  In the gaming machines B1 to B4, switching is made to a holding means capable of holding the game balls flowing down the first flow path or the second flow path, and to a state in which the game balls held by the holding means are caused to flow downstream. A switching means, an opening through which a game ball that has flowed down by being switched to the flow-down state by the switching means can enter, and the game ball enters the opening, whereby the second ball A gaming machine B5 comprising: a variable means for changing a means into a state in which a game ball can enter.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B4, the holding means and the switching means regulate the entering of the game ball into the second entering means, so that the timing is not intended. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the game ball enters the second ball entry means.

  The gaming machine B6, wherein in the gaming machine B5, the switching means switches to a state in which game balls can be held after a predetermined period has elapsed after switching to the downflow state.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B5, it is possible to define a period during which game balls can enter the second ball entry means, so that game balls enter the second ball entry means. Has the effect of being able to regulate more.

  In the gaming machine B5 or B6, the second ball entry means is changed by the variable means to a state in which the game ball is difficult to enter based on the entry of the game ball. Gaming machine B7.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B5 or B6, even when the switching means is being switched to the sulphidation state, a gaming ball has entered the second ball entry means. In this case, since the second ball entry means is changed to a state in which game balls are difficult to enter, it is possible to prevent a plurality of game balls from entering the second ball entry means continuously. . Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress giving an excessive privilege to the player.

  In any one of the gaming machines B5 to B7, a game ball held by the holding means is provided in an area where the game ball can flow down, and a first position at which the game ball flowing down can be guided to a first flow path; Variable guiding means that can be changed to a second position that is difficult to guide the flow path, and a guiding member variable control that variably controls the variable guiding means to the first position and the second position at predetermined intervals. Means, and wherein the opening is disposed in an area where a game ball flowing down the first flow path can enter the ball.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B5 to B7, the timing at which the game ball held by the holding means by the switching means can flow to the downstream, and the variable guiding means at the first position Only when the timing that is changed to a predetermined condition satisfies a predetermined condition, it is possible to allow the game ball to enter the opening, so that the player is conscious of the timing of the game and willingly play the game. There is an effect that it can be performed.

  In any of the gaming machines B1 to B8, when the special state is set by the state setting means, the remaining period of the special state is shortened by dynamically displaying the identification information. A gaming machine B9 having variable means for performing the following.

  According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B8, the remaining period of the special state is shortened by dynamically displaying the identification information, so that the identification information is dynamically displayed to the player. There is an effect that interest can be given for the period, and interest in the game can be improved. Note that the longer the dynamic display period is, the longer the special state that is advantageous to the player is, so that the player can expect a long dynamic display period.

<Character C group> (Control to make one game run)
A first flow path through which a game ball can flow, a second flow path through which a game ball flowing down the first flow path becomes difficult to flow, and a position where a game ball flowing down the first flow path can enter the ball. A first ball entry means arranged, a second ball entry means arranged in the second flow path, into which a game ball can enter, and a game ball in the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means. Acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the entry of the ball, determination means for performing a determination based on the information acquired by the acquisition means, and identification information for indicating a determination result by the determination means are dynamic. In the gaming machine having dynamic display means to be displayed, and privilege providing means for granting a privilege to a player when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed, 2 The first state in which a game ball can enter the ball entry means, and it is more difficult to enter the ball than the first state. A variable means for changing the variable means to a second state, a variable execution means for changing the variable means from the second state to the first state based on the satisfaction of a variable condition, and A special state setting means for setting a special state in which a bonus game advantageous to a player is made easier by executing a game by causing a game ball to flow down from the first flow path to the second flow path; After the bonus game is executed, the identification information is dynamically displayed, and a release unit that releases the special state based on the expiration of the dynamic display period, and when the bonus game is executed, A gaming machine C1 comprising: variable condition determining means for determining whether variable conditions are satisfied.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is executed by a game ball entering a starting port provided on a game board, and if the result of the lottery is a hit, it is advantageous for the player. A game has been proposed in which a game is executed, and a lottery probability after the hit game is set to a high probability state depending on the type of the hit game so that the hit game is easily executed continuously. (For example, JP 2012-147965 A).

  However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, it is difficult for a player to confirm whether a lottery is actually performed in a high-probability state and to play a game, and there is a problem that interest is easily reduced.

  According to the gaming machine C1, when the bonus game is executed, it is determined whether or not a variable condition for determining whether to change the variable means to the first state is satisfied. By changing the variable means to the first state, the identification information can be easily displayed dynamically, the special state can be easily released, and if the variable means is not changed, the identification information can be hardly displayed, and There is an effect that the special state can be easily set continuously, and the interest can be improved depending on whether or not the variable condition is satisfied when the bonus game is executed.

  The gaming machine C1 has a type determining unit that determines the type of the bonus game when the bonus game is executed, and the variable condition determining unit determines the type of the bonus game determined by the type determining unit. A gaming machine C2 for determining whether the variable condition is satisfied based on the condition.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine C1, the establishment of the variable condition is determined based on the type of the bonus game to be executed. Therefore, the establishment of the variable condition is determined by the rate at which the type of the bonus game is determined. The ratio can also be set, and there is an effect that stable game contents can be set.

  In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the privilege granting means executes the privilege game as one of the benefits, and the type determining means determines a type of the privilege game executed by the privilege granting means. And the special state is set based on a type of the privilege game executed by the privilege granting means.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C1 or C2, the rate at which the special state is set can be varied by setting the type of the bonus game, so that the emissivity can be easily adjusted and designed. There is an effect that can be.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C3, a third ball entry means capable of entering a game ball is disposed in the second flow path, and the acquisition means includes a game ball provided to the third ball entry means. The information is acquired based on that the game ball has entered, and the determination means is more capable of playing the game than the determination based on the information acquired by the game ball having entered the third ball entry means. And a restricting means that can be changed between a state in which the third ball entering means is restricted from entering a game ball and a state in which entering is permitted. The gaming machine C4, wherein the regulation means is configured to be easily changed to a state allowing the entering ball by setting the special state.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the gaming ball is easily thrown into the third ball entry means in which an advantage determination that is advantageous to the player in the special state is executed. Since it is possible, there is an effect that it is possible to encourage the player to play the game by causing the game ball to flow down to the second flow path.

  In the gaming machine C4, a variable ball entry means that can be changed between an open state in which the game ball can enter and a closed state in which the game ball does not enter, a specific area through which the game ball entered the variable ball entry means can pass, A bonus game execution unit that executes the bonus game when the game ball passes through the specific area, and the variable ball entry unit is closed from the closed state when the specific result is determined by the advantage determination. A gaming machine C5 characterized by being changed to an open state.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine C4, the bonus game is executed by passing the game ball through the specific area, so that the player can be interested in the ball flow and can play the game. There is an effect that the interest of the person can be improved.

  In any of the gaming machines C2 to C5, a first storage unit capable of storing the information obtained based on a game ball having entered the first ball entry unit, and a first storage unit that stores the information. Determination condition determining means for determining the information for which the determination is performed by the determining means based on the information, wherein the type determining means stores the information in the storage means at least during the privilege game. A first type corresponding to a first privilege game that is easy to be stored and a second type corresponding to a second privilege game that is more difficult to store the information in the storage unit than the first type are determined. Gaming machine C6 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine C6, it is possible to execute a privilege game in which information is easily stored in the first storage means and a privilege game in which it is difficult to store the information during the privilege game, depending on the type determined by the type determining means. Thereby, when the special state is given after the end of the privilege game, it is possible to set a state where the identification information based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means is dynamically displayed and a state where the identification information is not displayed. It becomes possible. Therefore, it is possible to dynamically display the identification information based on the game ball entering the second ball entry means during the special state, and to diversify the game executed during the special state.

  In the gaming machine C6, the special state setting means includes: a first special state in which identification information based on a game ball having entered the first ball entry means is dynamically displayed during the special state; (2) a second special state in which identification information based on a game ball having entered the ball entry means is dynamically displayed, and the second special state is more game-playing than the first special state. Gaming machine C7 characterized in that a privilege game advantageous to a player is easily executed.

  According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C6, the degree of advantage provided to the player can be varied depending on the type of identification information dynamically displayed during the special state. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be motivated to play the game.

<Feature D group>
A first ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, a second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means, and a first determination based on a game ball having entered the first ball entry means Executing a second determination that is more advantageous to the player than the first determination based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second ball input means, and a determination result by the determination means. Dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating, and a first state in which game balls are difficult to enter the second ball entry means, and a second state in which game balls can be entered; Changing means for changing the second ball entry means to the second state when a specific condition is satisfied; and state setting means capable of setting a special state capable of changing the second ball entry means to the second state. When the status is set, the dynamic display of the identification information is executed, and the dynamic display period is displayed. Releasing means for releasing the special state based on the termination, and when the special state is set, dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the identification is performed based on the remaining dynamic display period. A gaming machine D1 comprising: an effect execution unit that executes an effect based on information that determines that a condition is satisfied.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is executed by a game ball entering a starting port provided on a game board, and if the result of the lottery is a hit, it is advantageous for the player. A game has been proposed in which a game is executed, and a lottery probability after the hit game is set to a high probability state depending on the type of the hit game so that the hit game is easily executed continuously. In such a gaming machine, a symbol for notifying a player of a lottery result is displayed on a liquid crystal display device or the like in a fluctuating manner, and then the lottery result is notified by stopping and displaying the symbol indicating the lottery result. If is a hit, a game that executes a hit game is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-147965).

  However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the game is monotonous due to the repeated display of the symbols based on the lottery result, and the player gets tired early.

  According to the gaming machine D1, since the remaining period of the special state changes with the elapse of the dynamic display period of the identification information executed when the special state is set, it is specified by the effect executed by the effect executing means. It is possible to recognize the satisfaction of the condition and the remaining period of the special state, and it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets tired early.

  In the gaming machine D1, there are detection means for detecting that the game ball has passed through the passage area, and determination means for determining whether the specific condition is satisfied when the detection means detects the passage of the game ball. The gaming machine D2, wherein the effect executing means executes an effect for indicating a result of the determination based on the execution of the determination by the determining means.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D1, it is determined that the specific condition is satisfied by passing the game ball through the passage area even when the identification information is displayed in the special state. This has the effect that the interest in the game can be further improved.

  In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the effect executing means executes a specific effect based on the remaining dynamic display period of the identification information being equal to or shorter than a predetermined period. .

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D1 or D2, by executing the specific effect, it is possible to determine that the remaining period of the special state has become equal to or shorter than the predetermined period. .

  In any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the second determination is executed by the determination unit among the information acquired by the acquisition unit based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second ball entry unit. Storage means for storing up to a predetermined number of pieces of the information before the change, and the effect executing means stores the information in the storage means when the remaining dynamic display period of the identification information is equal to or less than the predetermined time period. The gaming machine D4, wherein the specific effect is not executed on condition that it is stored.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, even if the special state is ended by the information being stored in the storage means, the information is stored in the information stored in the storage means. Since it is in a state where it is easy to make an advantageous determination, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from giving extra uneasiness by executing the specific effect.

  A second dynamic display unit for causing any one of the gaming machines D2 to D4 to dynamically display result information for indicating a determination result by the determination unit for a predetermined period of time and then stopping the display, and the second dynamic display unit And a period determining means for determining a remaining dynamic display period of the identification information at the time when the result information is stopped and displayed, wherein the effect executing means determines that the determination result by the period determining means is a predetermined period condition A game machine D5 that switches the stop display mode of the result information to a stop display mode based on the determination result of the identification information when the condition is satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines D2 to D4, when the remaining dynamic display period of the identification information satisfies the period condition, the stop display mode can be switched. It is possible to provide a surprising effect to the person and enhance the effect.

  In the gaming machine D5, when the remaining dynamic display period of the identification information at the time when the result information is stopped and displayed by the second dynamic display means is within a predetermined period, the period condition is satisfied. A gaming machine D6 characterized by the above-mentioned.

  According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D5, it is possible to suppress a problem that the result information and the identification information are stopped and displayed at short intervals and it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the displayed contents, It is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game to the player.

<Feature E group>
A first ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, a second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means, and a first determination based on a game ball having entered the first ball entry means Executing a second determination that is more advantageous to the player than the first determination based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second ball input means, and a determination result by the determination means. Dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating, and a first state in which game balls are difficult to enter the second ball entry means, making it easier to enter game balls than in the first state. Variable means for changing to the second state, state setting means for setting a special state that can be changed to the second state by the variable means when a specific condition is satisfied, and the state setting Means for dynamically displaying the identification information when the special state is set by the means. Executing, based on the end of the dynamic display period, a cancellation means for canceling the special state, and a lottery for determining whether to change the variable means from the first state to the second state. Lottery means, lottery information dynamic display means for dynamically displaying lottery information for indicating a lottery result by the lottery means, and dynamic display for determining a dynamic display period in which the lottery information is dynamically displayed. A period determination unit, a storage unit storing a plurality of dynamic display period groups in which the plurality of dynamic display periods determined by the dynamic display period determination unit are stored, and the special unit set by the state setting unit Selecting means for selecting a type of state; and the dynamic display period group in which the dynamic display period determining means determines the dynamic display period based on the type of the special state set by the state setting means. Configuration Gaming machine E1, wherein the one having a dynamic display period group setting unit that, the.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is executed by a game ball entering a starting port provided on a game board, and if the result of the lottery is a hit, it is advantageous for the player. A game has been proposed in which a game is executed, and a lottery probability after the hit game is set to a high probability state depending on the type of the hit game so that the hit game is easily executed continuously. In such a gaming machine, a symbol for notifying a player of a lottery result is displayed on a liquid crystal display device or the like in a fluctuating manner, and then the lottery result is notified by stopping and displaying the symbol indicating the lottery result. If is a hit, a game that executes a hit game is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-147965).

  However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the game is monotonous due to the repeated display of the symbols based on the lottery result, and the player gets tired early.

  According to the gaming machine E1, the lottery can be executed in the special state period if the dynamic display period of the lottery information is determined to be short, and the interest of the game can be improved by the determined dynamic display period group. This has the effect of suppressing the problem that the player gets tired early.

  In the gaming machine E1, an acquisition unit capable of acquiring information based on a game ball having entered the first ball entry unit or the second ball entry unit, and the information acquired by the acquisition unit are stored. A gaming machine E2, comprising: a storage unit that performs the first determination or the second determination based on the information stored in the storage unit.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine E1, the information acquired by the acquiring means can be stored in the storage means. Game can be played, and the efficiency of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine E1 or E2, during the period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed, the determination unit performs the first determination or the second determination even when the information is stored in the storage unit. A gaming machine E3 characterized by waiting for execution.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine E1 or E2, while the identification information is dynamically displayed, the execution of the determination based on the information stored in the storage means is on standby, so A plurality of determinations based on the information stored in the means are not executed at the same time. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a player with an easy-to-understand game.

  In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the game machine has detection means for detecting that the game ball has passed through a passage area through which the game ball can pass, and the lottery means detects the passage of the game ball by the detection means. A gaming machine E4 for executing the lottery based on the result of the selection.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, when the detection means detects that the game ball has passed through the passing area, the lottery by the lottery means is executed. There is an effect that a player can play a game using a game ball with will.

  In any of the gaming machines E1 to E4, the dynamic display period group set by the dynamic display period group setting means is a short dynamic display period set such that a short dynamic display period is easily determined as a dynamic display period. A gaming machine wherein at least a display period group and a long dynamic display period group in which the short dynamic display period is set to be shorter than the short dynamic display period group are set. E5.

  According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines E1 to E4, the length of the dynamic display period set by the dynamic display period group set by the dynamic display period group setting means is set. Can be variable. Therefore, it is possible to vary the number of lotteries executed by the lottery means during the special state that is advantageous to the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In any one of the gaming machines E2 to E5, the dynamic display period determination unit may be configured to perform a determination based on the number of pieces of information acquired based on having entered the second ball entry unit stored in the storage unit. A game machine E6 for determining one dynamic display period from the determined dynamic display period group.

  According to the gaming machine E6, the dynamic display period is determined based on the number of pieces of information acquired based on the ball entering the second ball entry means, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines E2 to E5. Therefore, it is possible to associate the game in which the game ball is made to enter the second ball entry means with the number of lotteries executed by the lottery means. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machines E1 to E6, there is provided a notifying unit for notifying that the special state is set, and the notifying unit dynamically displays the lottery information determined by the dynamic display period determining unit. The gaming machine E7, wherein the notification is performed only when the period is shorter than the remaining period of the special state set by the state setting means.

  According to the gaming machine E7, the notification unit notifies that the current state is the special state only when the dynamic display of the lottery information ends in the state where the special state is set. Therefore, even during the special state, the variable means notifies the player of the special state during the remaining period of the special state which is not changed from the first state to the second state, thereby distrusting the player. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress giving a feeling.

<Character F group> (Direction per special during working hours)
A first ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, a second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means, and a first determination based on a game ball having entered the first ball entry means Executing a second determination that is more advantageous to the player than the first determination based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second ball input means, and a determination result by the determination means. Dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating, and executing a privilege game which is advantageous to the player when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed. In the gaming machine having a privilege game execution means, wherein the second ball entry means is changed from a first state in which game balls are difficult to enter to a second state in which game balls can enter. Lottery means for executing a lottery based on the establishment of the lottery condition; Lottery information dynamic display means for dynamically displaying lottery information for indicating a result; and the second means by the variable means when the lottery information for indicating the specific lottery result is stopped and displayed. State setting means capable of setting a special state capable of being changed to a state, and when the special state is set by the state setting means, dynamic display of the identification information is executed, Means for canceling the special state based on the end of the special display period, and, if the special state is not set, executing an effect corresponding to the dynamic display of the identification information, Is set, based on the fact that the lottery information is dynamically displayed, the effect execution means, and the effect execution means, when the special state is set, the lottery Of information Gaming machine F1, characterized in that the state of executing an effect corresponding to the representation in which the dynamic display specific conditions to effect corresponding to the identification information is performed by switching based on the satisfied.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is executed by a game ball entering a starting port provided on a game board, and if the result of the lottery is a hit, it is advantageous for the player. A game has been proposed in which a game is executed, and a lottery probability after the hit game is set to a high probability state depending on the type of the hit game so that the hit game is easily executed continuously. In such a gaming machine, a symbol for notifying a player of a lottery result is displayed on a liquid crystal display device or the like in a fluctuating manner, and then the lottery result is notified by stopping and displaying the symbol indicating the lottery result. If is a hit, a game that executes a hit game is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-147965). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the game is monotonous due to the repeated display of the symbols based on the lottery result, and the player gets tired early.

  According to the gaming machine F1, when it is in the special state, it becomes easy to enter a state in which a game ball can enter the second ball entry means, so that it is easy to enter the second ball entry means in a specific lottery result. Can be switched to an effect corresponding to whether or not it is possible to provide the player with an effect corresponding to different information between the special state and the non-special state, so that the game can be changed, There is an effect that the trouble of getting tired can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine F1, information acquisition means for acquiring information determined by the determination means based on a game ball having entered the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means, and the information acquisition means Storage means for storing the acquired information, a gaming machine F2.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine F1, the information acquired in the storage means also when a large number of gaming balls enter the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means. Is stored, so that it is possible to give the player many opportunities to be determined.

  In the gaming machine F2, based on the fact that the determination condition is satisfied, the determining means is based on the information stored in the storage means and acquired based on the fact that the ball has entered the second ball-in means. The gaming machine F3, wherein the determination is performed with priority over the information acquired based on the fact that the first ball entry means has entered the ball.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine F2, when there is a plurality of pieces of information obtained based on the fact that the ball has entered the second ball entry means, the plurality of pieces of information are continuously determined. Can be. Therefore, it is possible to continuously execute the determination that is advantageous to the player, and it is possible to improve the player's willingness to play.

  In any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, when the special condition is set in the specific condition, the remaining period of the dynamic display period of the identification information for which the dynamic display has been started is set to be equal to or shorter than a predetermined period. A gaming machine F4 characterized in that the fact that it has been set is at least one of the fulfillment conditions.

  According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines F1 to F3, an effect corresponding to dynamic display of identification information executed when the special state is released before the special state is released. The effect is that the effect can be switched when it is canceled smoothly.

  In any of the gaming machines F1 to F4, in the specific condition, when the special state is set, the dynamic information is started and the identification information is stopped and displayed with the identification information for indicating the specific determination result. A gaming machine F5, wherein at least one of the conditions is that it is set to be performed.

  According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines F1 to F4, when the dynamically displayed identification information is stopped and displayed with the identification information for indicating that the identification information is a specific determination result, At first, an effect corresponding to the dynamic display of the lottery information is performed, and the second ball entry means is notified to the player whether or not it is in a state where the game ball can easily enter the ball, and then a specific determination result is obtained. Can also be notified by the effect, and it is possible to provide the player with an effect effectively utilizing the dynamic display period of the identification information.

<Feature G group> (Game support)
A ball entry means having an opening through which game balls can enter, an open state in which game balls can enter the opening of the ball entry means, and a closed state in which entry of game balls is restricted. A variable member that can be changed, a determination unit that performs a determination based on the passage of a game ball, and when the determination result by the determination unit is a specific determination result, the variable member is changed from the closed state to the open state. And a variable control means for changing the variable pattern in a specific variable pattern, wherein the variable pattern is in the open state through a closed pattern in a closed state for a predetermined period after the first open pattern in the open state. A gaming machine G1 comprising at least a second opening pattern.

  Here, a game machine such as a pachinko machine is provided with a pass area through which a game ball can pass, and when a game ball passes through the pass area, a predetermined first lottery is executed, and the lottery result is a hit. In some cases, a variable member has been proposed so that the ball can easily enter a specific entrance. In such a gaming machine, when a ball enters a specific entrance, a second lottery different from a predetermined lottery is executed, and a symbol for notifying a player of the lottery result is displayed on a liquid crystal display device. For example, there is known a game in which the lottery result is notified by stopping and displaying the symbol indicating the lottery result after the variation display is performed, and if the lottery result is a hit, a winning game is executed (for example, 2012-147965 gazette).

  However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the symbol variation display based on the second lottery result is displayed on the liquid crystal display device or the like, there is a problem that the player overlooks the result of the first lottery. Was.

  According to the gaming machine G1, since the first opening pattern and the second opening pattern are configured, the player who notices that the variable member is variably controlled by the execution of the first opening pattern. On the other hand, a game ball can be made to enter the ball entry means during the second opening pattern. Therefore, there is an effect that a game can be supported for a player who does not understand the game content.

  In the gaming machine G1, when the closed pattern is determined to be executed by the closed determining means for determining that the closed pattern has been executed among the variable patterns, a predetermined first signal is output when the closed pattern is determined to be executed. A game machine G2, comprising: a notification executing unit configured to execute a notification.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G1, the execution of the first opening pattern is completed, and the first notification is executed by the notification executing means based on the execution of the closing pattern. This allows the player to easily understand that the variable control of the variable member is being performed. Therefore, there is an effect that a game can be supported for a player who does not understand the game content.

  In the gaming machine G2, a game area in which the variable member is provided, and an operation means for firing a game ball in the game area, and a period set as the closed pattern in the variable pattern, A gaming machine G3, wherein the period is set to be longer than a period until the ball fired by the operation means reaches the variable member.

  According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G2, the period set as the closing pattern is set longer than the period until the ball fired by the operation means reaches the variable member. Even if the player who recognizes that the variable control of the variable member is being executed by the first notification by the notification execution unit starts operating the operation unit, the ball entry unit is operated while the second opening pattern is being executed. It is possible to make a ball enter the ball. Therefore, there is an effect that a game can be supported for a player who does not understand the game content.

  In any one of the gaming machines G1 to G3, the variable control means includes end condition determining means for determining that an end condition for ending the operation of changing the variable member has been satisfied. A gaming machine G4 for determining that the end condition is satisfied when the determined variable pattern is executed or when a predetermined number of balls enter the ball entry means.

  According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines G1 to G3, the termination condition is satisfied when a predetermined number of balls enter the ball entry means. By causing the ball to enter the ball entry means, it becomes possible to end the variable control of the variable member by the variable control means without executing the closing pattern. Thereby, one variable control period can be shortened, so that the player can enthusiastically play a game. Also, even if the closing pattern is set for a long period of time, the variable control end condition can be satisfied during the period in which the first variable pattern is being executed, so that a player who is performing a normal game is In addition, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress dissatisfaction caused by executing a long-term closing pattern.

  In the gaming machine G4, a period set as the first open pattern in the variable pattern is set to be longer than a period until the predetermined number of balls fired by the operation means reach the variable member. A gaming machine G5.

  According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G4, a predetermined number of balls can be made to enter the ball entry means during the period in which the first opening pattern is executed. Therefore, there is an effect that a player who is playing a normal game can be prevented from feeling dissatisfied due to the execution of the long-term closing pattern.

  In the gaming machines G1 to G5, the notification execution means is configured to output a predetermined second notification when a ball enters the ball entry means during execution of the second opening pattern among the variable patterns. A gaming machine G6.

  According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines G1 to G5, the second notification is executed when the ball enters the ball entry means while the second opening pattern is being executed. Therefore, the player can correct the operation method of the operation means. Therefore, there is an effect that a game can be supported for a player who does not understand the game content.

  In the gaming machines G1 to G6, among the variable patterns, a period set as the first open pattern is shorter than a period set as the second open pattern.

  According to the gaming machine G7, in addition to the effect provided by any one of the gaming machines G1 to G6, it is possible to make it easy for the ball entry means to enter the ball during the period in which the variable pattern is being executed. Therefore, there is an effect that a game can be supported for a player who does not understand the game content.

<Characteristic H group> (Direction just before the end of time-saving games)
A first ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, a second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means, and a first determination based on a game ball having entered the first ball entry means Executing a second determination that is more advantageous to the player than the first determination based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second ball input means, and a determination result by the determination means. Dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating, and executing a privilege game which is advantageous to the player when the identification information for indicating a specific determination result is stopped and displayed. Lottery means for executing a lottery based on establishment of a lottery condition in a gaming machine having a bonus game executing means, and lottery information dynamically displaying lottery information for indicating a lottery result by the lottery means. Display means and a first state in which game balls are difficult to enter the second ball entry means A variable member that is changed to a second state in which a game ball can be entered, and when the lottery information for indicating the specific lottery result is stopped and displayed, the variable member is changed to the second state. State setting means capable of setting a special state capable of being changed to two states; and when the special state is set by the state setting means, dynamic display of the identification information is executed a predetermined number of times. Releasing means for releasing the special state based on the expiration of the predetermined number of times of the dynamic display period; and, when dynamic display of the lottery information is started during the special state, the lottery information is A gaming machine H1 comprising: an effect execution unit that executes an effect based on information corresponding to a period in which the stop display is performed in a period in which the special state is set.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is executed by a game ball entering a starting port provided on a game board, and if the result of the lottery is a hit, it is advantageous for the player. A game has been proposed in which a game is executed, and a lottery probability after the hit game is set to a high probability state depending on the type of the hit game so that the hit game is easily executed continuously. In such a gaming machine, a symbol for notifying a player of a lottery result is displayed on a liquid crystal display device or the like in a fluctuating manner, and then the lottery result is notified by stopping and displaying the symbol indicating the lottery result. If is a hit, a game that executes a hit game is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-147965).

  However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the game is monotonous due to the repeated display of the symbols based on the lottery result, and the player gets tired early.

  According to the gaming machine H1, since the effect is executed based on the state set at the stop display timing of the lottery information in which the dynamic display is started during the special state, when the lottery information is stopped and displayed from the effect. Can be recognized, the player can be interested in the state at the time when the lottery information is stopped and displayed, and there is an effect that a problem of getting tired of the game early can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine H1, the effect executing means executes an effect corresponding to a dynamic display period of the identification information in a state where the special state is not set, and based on the setting of the special state, A gaming machine H2 characterized by being switched to an effect corresponding to a dynamic display period of lottery information and executed.

  According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine H1, the effect is performed by switching the corresponding dynamic display period between the special state and the non-special state, so that a different effect is provided to the player. There is an effect that the interest of the person can be improved.

  In the gaming machine H1 or H2, an acquisition unit capable of acquiring information based on a game ball having entered the first ball entry unit or the second ball entry unit, and the information acquired by the acquisition unit being And a storage means for storing the game ball in the second entry means of the information stored in the storage means based on the satisfaction of a predetermined determination condition. The gaming machine H3 performs a determination with priority on the information acquired based on the entry of a ball.

  According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine H1 or H2, when there is a plurality of pieces of information obtained based on having entered the second ball entry means, the plurality of pieces of information are determined continuously. can do. Therefore, it is possible to continuously execute the determination that is advantageous to the player, and it is possible to improve the player's willingness to play.

  In the gaming machine H3, in the determination condition, the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped and displayed at the identification information for indicating the specific determination result, and the storage unit stores the undetermined information. Is set as at least a condition.

  According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H1 or H2, the determination condition is hard to be satisfied during the period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed, so that the storage is performed during the period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed. An opportunity to store information in the means can be given to the player, and the game can be played efficiently.

  In the gaming machine H4, when the special state is set, a regulating unit that regulates that the information acquired based on the ball entering the second ball entry unit is stored in the storage unit is provided. A gaming machine H5 characterized by having

  According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine H4, when a special state is set, the storage of information acquired based on the entry into the second entry means is restricted. Therefore, at the timing when the special state is set, the identification information for indicating the determination result based on the information obtained by entering the first ball entry means can be easily displayed dynamically, which is advantageous to the player. This makes it possible to delay the execution of the appropriate determination, thereby increasing the interest of the player.

  In any of the gaming machines H1 to H5, if the special state is set during the period in which the lottery is performed by the lottery means, the variable member stops displaying the lottery information indicating the specific lottery result. The gaming machine H6, which is changed to the second state when the game is performed.

  According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines H1 to H5, it is possible to change to the second state based on the setting state of the special state during the lottery period, which is advantageous to the player. This makes it possible to easily provide an appropriate state and increase the interest of the player.

<Feature I group> (Yamato specification)
First ball entry means capable of entering game balls, second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means, and a game ball entered the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means Information acquisition means for acquiring information based on the information, and the information acquisition means performs a first determination based on the information acquired based on the game ball entered the first ball entry means, Determining means for executing a second determination which is more advantageous to the player than the first determination based on the information obtained based on the game ball having entered the second ball input means, and the determination means A dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a determination result by the user, and a privilege grant for granting a privilege when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed Means in the game machine having the second ball entry means. Set at least a normal state in which game balls easily enter the first ball entry means and a special state in which game balls easily enter the second ball entry means than the first ball entry means. And a condition setting unit capable of performing the special condition. When the special state is set by the state setting unit, the identification information corresponding to the first determination is set as a release condition for releasing the special state. A gaming machine I1 characterized in that it is possible to individually set the number of times of dynamic display and the number of times of dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to the second determination.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is executed by a game ball entering a starting port provided on a game board, and if the result of the lottery is a hit, it is advantageous for the player. A game has been proposed in which a game is executed, and a lottery probability after the hit game is set to a high probability state depending on the type of the hit game so that the hit game is easily executed continuously. In such a gaming machine, a symbol for notifying a player of a lottery result is displayed on a liquid crystal display device or the like in a fluctuating manner, and then the lottery result is notified by stopping and displaying the symbol indicating the lottery result. If is a hit, a game that executes a hit game is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-147965).

  However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the game is monotonous due to the repeated display of the symbols based on the lottery result, and the player gets tired early.

  According to the gaming machine I1, the number of times of dynamic display of identification information corresponding to the first determination and the number of times of dynamic display of identification information corresponding to the second determination can be set as conditions for releasing the special state. , The feeling of expectation that the second determination is performed can be set variably. In other words, if the number of times of dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to the first determination is set to be large, the player can be given many opportunities to execute the second determination, and conversely, the identification information corresponding to the first determination If the number of times of dynamic display is set to be large, the chance that the second determination is executed can be set small, and there is an effect that the interest of the player can be changed.

  The gaming machine I1 has a storage unit for storing the information acquired by the acquisition unit, and the determination unit has entered the second ball entry unit out of the information stored in the storage unit. The gaming machine I2 is characterized in that the information acquired by the information acquiring means is determined with priority based on the information.

  According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I1, the determination is preferentially performed on the information on which the determination that is advantageous to the player is performed, so that the advantageous determination is continuously performed for the player. There is an effect that the game can be easily performed and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine I1 or I2, when the special state is set, the storage means is provided with a regulating means for making it difficult to store information obtained based on a game ball having entered the second ball entry means. A gaming machine I3 characterized by having

  According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I1 or I2, when a special state is established, the identification information based on the first determination can be easily displayed dynamically, and during the dynamic display period, the second input information can be displayed. There is an effect that advantageous information can be easily executed successively after the dynamic display of the first determination is completed by allowing a game ball to enter the ball means to store more information.

  In any of the gaming machines I1 to I3, the cancellation condition is such that the number of dynamic displays of the identification information corresponding to the first determination is greater than the number of dynamic displays of the identification information corresponding to the second determination. A gaming machine I4 characterized by being performed.

  According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines I1 to I3, it is possible to prevent the special state from being released by executing only the first determination which is disadvantageous to the player. During the state, there is an effect that the second determination which is advantageous to the player can be easily performed.

  In the gaming machine I4, the cancellation condition is set such that the number of times of dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to the second determination is one.

  According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I4, the number of times that the second determination advantageous to the player is executed during the special state can be limited to one, so that the excessive privilege is provided to the player. Has the effect that it can be suppressed from being imparted to the surface.

  The gaming machine I6 according to any one of the gaming machines I2 to I5, wherein the storage means is configured to be able to store the information up to an upper limit number.

  According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines I2 to I5, the information for performing the second determination advantageous to the player can be stored up to the upper limit number, so that the special state ends. It is possible to execute the second determination even after the determination. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can have expectations even after the special state ends.

  In the gaming machine I6, the upper limit number is a first upper limit number corresponding to the information obtained based on the game ball having entered the first ball entry means, and a game ball is entered in the second ball entry means. The gaming machine I7, wherein a second upper limit number for the information acquired based on the information is set.

  According to the gaming machine I7, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine I6, the information obtained based on the game ball having entered the first ball entry means and the game ball having entered the second ball entry means It is possible to set the upper limit number that can be stored with the information obtained based on the above, regardless of the storage number of the information obtained based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means The information acquired based on the game ball having entered the second ball entry means can be stored up to the upper limit number. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can enthusiastically play a game to allow the second ball entry means to enter the ball during the special state.

  In any one of the gaming machines I1 to I7, a variable ball-in means for changing the state of the game ball into a ball-enterable state and a ball-in difficult state, and a game ball entering the variable ball-in means can pass through. A gaming machine I8, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to be able to award a bonus when a game ball passes through the specific area.

  According to the gaming machine I8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines I1 to I7, the privilege is given by passing the game ball to the specific area, so that the player is interested in the ball flow. This has the effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine I8, the special state is set by the state setting means after the privilege is given by the privilege giving means.

  According to the gaming machine I9, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine I8, since the special state is set after the privilege is given, it is possible to enhance the playability by passing the game ball through the specific area. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine I9, the state setting means has setting determining means for determining whether or not to set the special state, and the setting determining means determines whether the first determination or the second determination is performed by the determination means. A gaming machine I10 for determining whether or not to set the special state based on the execution.

  According to the gaming machine I10, at the timing when the determination by the determination means is performed, whether or not to set the special state after the privilege is provided is determined. Whether the special state is set or not is variable. Therefore, it is possible to provide a player with a pleasure of selecting a timing at which the game ball passes through the specific area.

  The gaming machine I11, further comprising suggestion means for suggesting the determination information determined by the setting determination means during a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed.

  According to the gaming machine I11, it is possible to recognize whether or not the special state is set after the privilege is given by the suggesting means. Therefore, the game is performed so that the game ball is passed to the specific area, or the specific area is set. There is an effect that the player can determine whether to play the game so that the game ball does not pass by referring to the contents of the suggestion.

  The gaming machine I12 according to any one of the gaming machines I7 to I11, wherein the cancellation condition is set to the number of times of dynamic display for the first identification information that is larger than the first upper limit number.

  According to the gaming machine I12, in addition to the effect provided by any one of the gaming machines I7 to I11, when the special state is entered, the information already acquired for the ball entering the first ball entry means is the first information. Even when the information is stored up to the upper limit, the special state is not released even if all the information is first determined and the dynamic display of the identification information is executed. Therefore, there is an opportunity to execute the second determination in the special state. It can be given by the player and has the effect of increasing the value of the special state for the player.

<Character J group>
A first ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, a second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means, and a first determination based on a game ball having entered the first ball entry means Executing a second determination that is more advantageous to the player than the first determination based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second ball input means, and a determination result by the determination means. Dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating, and a first state in which game balls are difficult to enter the second ball entry means, and a second state in which game balls can be entered; Changing means for changing the second ball entry means to the second state when a specific condition is satisfied; and state setting means capable of setting a special state capable of changing the second ball entry means to the second state. When the status is set, the dynamic display of the identification information is executed, and the dynamic display period is displayed. Release means for releasing the special state based on the termination, and after the special state is released by the release means, before the dynamic display of the identification information is started, the special state is released. Characteristic means comprising: a determination means for determining whether the state is set by the state setting means; and an effect execution means capable of performing an effect variably based on a determination result of the determination means. Gaming machine J1.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is executed by a game ball entering a starting port provided on a game board, and if the result of the lottery is a hit, it is advantageous for the player. A game has been proposed in which a game is executed, and a lottery probability after the hit game is set to a high probability state depending on the type of the hit game so that the hit game is easily executed continuously. In such a gaming machine, a symbol for notifying a player of a lottery result is displayed on a liquid crystal display device or the like in a fluctuating manner, and then the lottery result is notified by stopping and displaying the symbol indicating the lottery result. If the hit is a hit game, a hit game is executed and an effect is executed during the hit game (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-147965).

  However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, there has been a demand for further improving the interest in the gaming.

  According to the gaming machine J1, even when the special state is released, the effect is changed based on the information as to whether the special state is set again before the identification information is dynamically displayed. It is possible to discriminate from the effect whether the special state is continuously set or not, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine J1, the effect executing means executes an effect in response to dynamic display of the identification information for indicating a determination result based on the second determination.

  According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine J1, the effect corresponding to the dynamic display of the identification information for indicating the determination result based on the second determination advantageous to the player is executed. This has the effect that the expectation for the result of the second determination can be increased.

  In the gaming machine J1 or J2, the effect executing means is configured to be capable of executing an effect capable of identifying information based on the number of times the special state has been determined to be continuously set by the determining means. Gaming machine J3.

  According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine J1 or J2, the number of times the special state is continuously set by the effect can be identified, so that not only the game hits the player but also the special state is set. It is also possible to make the player interested in the number of times the game has been played, thereby improving the interest in the game.

  In the gaming machines J1 to J3, information for executing the first determination is obtained when a game ball has entered the first ball entry means, and when a game ball has entered the second ball entry means. A game machine comprising: an information acquisition unit for acquiring information for executing the second determination; and an information storage unit for storing the information acquired by the information acquisition unit. J4.

  According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines J1 to J3, information is acquired at the timing when the gaming ball enters the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means, and the information is stored in the information storage means. Since the information is stored, the opportunity determined by the determination means can be stored, and there is an effect that many benefits can be given to the player.

  In the gaming machine J4, the effect execution means is configured to be able to vary the effect based on the number of pieces of the information for executing the second determination stored in the storage means. A gaming machine J5, characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine J4, the effect is varied depending on the number of pieces of information for which the second determination is performed which is advantageous to the player, so that the information easily retained by the player Is notified, and there is an effect that interest in the effect can be increased.

<Feature K group>
A first ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, a second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means, and a first determination based on a game ball having entered the first ball entry means And a determination means for performing a second determination based on a game ball having entered the second ball entry means, and a dynamic display of identification information for indicating a determination result by the determination means. Machine having a strategic display means and a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to a player when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed. , A game machine K1 comprising state setting means for setting a game state advantageous to a player during a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed based on establishment of a specific condition.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is executed by a game ball entering a starting port provided in a game board, and a pattern for indicating the lottery result is moved to a liquid crystal display device or the like. The symbol is stopped and displayed in such a manner that the lottery result is notified at the timing when the dynamic display period ends. If the notification mode indicated by the symbol is a winning, a winning game that is advantageous to the player is executed, and a high probability state in which the lottery probability after the winning game is increased depending on the type of the winning game, and the winning game is continuously performed. Some have been proposed that are configured to be easily implemented. (For example, JP 2012-147965 A).

  However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, if the dynamic display period for indicating the lottery result is long, the number of times the lottery is drawn becomes disadvantageous for the player, and the player becomes more bored as the dynamic display period is longer. There was a problem that was tired of playing games. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a problem that a player gets tired of a game.

  According to the gaming machine K1, the state becomes advantageous to the player during the period in which the dynamic display of the identification information is being performed, so that the player is expected to perform the dynamic display with a long dynamic display period. This has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine K1, the determination means executes a determination that is more advantageous to the player than the first determination with respect to the second determination, and determines that a game ball has entered the first ball entry means. Information obtaining means for obtaining information for performing the first determination based on the information, and obtaining information for performing the second determination based on a game ball having entered the second ball input means; Storage means for storing the information acquired by the information acquisition means, wherein the determination means is stored in the storage means based on the completion of the dynamic display of the identification information. A gaming machine K2 for performing a determination on the information.

  According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K1, the information is stored in the storage unit even if the information is obtained during the period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed, so that the determination unit has more opportunities for determination. There is an effect that can be.

  In the gaming machine K1 or K2, the variable means for changing from the first state in which the game ball is difficult to enter the second ball entry means to the second state in which the game ball can enter the ball, and Lottery means for executing a lottery based on the lottery information, and lottery information dynamic display means for dynamically displaying lottery information for indicating a lottery result by the lottery means, wherein the state setting means is provided to the player. When the lottery information for indicating the specific lottery result is stopped and displayed as an advantageous gaming state, the variable means can be changed to the second state by the variable means. A gaming machine K3, which is characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine K1 or K2, in a special state, the game ball can be easily inserted into the second ball-in means, and the gaming property can be varied, thereby facilitating the interest of the game. Is increased.

  In the gaming machine K3, when the gaming state advantageous to the player is set by the state setting means, the dynamic display of the identification information is executed, and based on the end of the dynamic display period, A gaming machine K4 having release means for releasing a gaming state advantageous to a player.

  According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine K3, it is advantageous to the player based on the fact that the dynamic display of the identification information executed when the gaming state advantageous to the player has been set is completed. Is released, the player can be interested in the end timing of the dynamic display of the identification information, and the problem of the player being bored even when a long dynamic display period is set can be suppressed. This has the effect.

  In any one of the gaming machines K1 to K4, the game machine has a first flow path through which a game ball can flow, and a second flow path through which a game ball flowing down the first flow path becomes difficult to flow. The means is disposed at the second flow path and at a position at which a game ball flowing down at least the first flow path can enter, and the second ball input means is disposed at the second flow path. A gaming machine K5 characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines K1 to K4, even if a game is performed so that the game ball enters the second ball entry means, the game ball is transferred to the first ball entry means. The configuration is such that the player enters the ball, and there is an effect that it is possible to regulate a state in which only the determination that is advantageous to the player is easily performed.

  In any of the gaming machines K1 to K5, when a gaming state advantageous to the player is set, the game machine has an effect executing means for executing an effect corresponding to a dynamic display period of the identification information. A gaming machine K6 characterized by the above-mentioned.

  According to the gaming machine K6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines K1 to K5, if a gaming state advantageous to the player is set, an effect corresponding to the dynamic display period is executed. This has the effect of increasing interest.

  In the gaming machine K6, the effect executed by the effect executing means includes an effect that prompts the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means to enter a game ball. Gaming machine K7.

  According to the gaming machine K7, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine K6, the game ball is made to enter the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means during a game state advantageous to the player, and the first judgment or the second judgment is made. Since it is easy to give an opportunity to execute the determination, there is an effect that the game can be efficiently performed.

  In any of the above gaming machines, the gaming machine is a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is as follows. The dynamic display of the identification information is started due to the operation, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. And a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the determined identification information is the specific identification information. In this case, coins and medals are typical examples of the game medium.

  In any of the above gaming machines, the gaming machine Z2 is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, as a basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine, an operation handle is provided, and a ball is fired to a predetermined game area in response to operation of the operation handle, and the ball is provided in an operation port arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. A requirement for winning (or passing through the operating port) is that identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined mode to enable the ball to win, and a value corresponding to the winning number is obtained. A value (including not only a prize ball but also data written on a magnetic card) is given.

In any of the above gaming machines, the gaming machine Z3 is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: "variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string comprising a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and starting operation means (for example, an operation lever) The change of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, The game machine is configured so that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display of the game, and many balls are paid out when the special game state occurs.
<Others>
Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the state of the starting port provided on the game board is changed from the first state in which the game ball is hard to enter to the second state in which the game ball is easy to enter. In some cases, a first lottery is performed. In such a conventional gaming machine, a lottery executed when a game ball enters the starting port in a state easily changed to the second state is executed a predetermined number of times, and until a predetermined number of lottery results is displayed. A gaming machine that is set continuously has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-147965).
However, there is a demand for further improvement in interest.
The present technical idea has been made in order to solve the above-described problems and the like, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving a player's interest in playing a game.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 comprises: a first ball entry means capable of entering a game ball; a second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means; A first determination is performed based on a game ball having entered the ball means, and a first advantage is provided to the player over the first determination based on a game ball having entered the second ball entry means. (2) determining means for executing the determination, dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the determination result by the determining means, and a first state in which a game ball is difficult to enter the second entering means Means for changing the state of the game ball to a second state in which game balls can be entered, and a special state in which the state of the second ball entry means can be changed to the second state when a specific condition is satisfied. State setting means capable of setting the special state, and when the special state is set by the state setting means, A dynamic display of the identification information is executed, and based on the expiration of the dynamic display period, a release unit for releasing the special state, and a dynamic display of the identification information when the special state is set. Display starting, and effect executing means for executing an effect based on information that has determined that the specific condition is satisfied based on the remaining dynamic display period.
The gaming machine according to the second technical concept is a game machine according to the first technical concept. In the gaming machine according to the first technical concept, a detection unit that detects that the game ball has passed through the passing area, Determining means for determining whether the specific condition is satisfied, wherein the effect executing means executes an effect for indicating a determination result based on the execution of the determination by the determining means. .
The gaming machine according to the third aspect of the present invention is the gaming machine according to the first or second aspect, wherein the effect performing unit performs a specific effect based on a remaining dynamic display period of the identification information being equal to or shorter than a predetermined period. Is to execute.
The gaming machine according to the fourth aspect of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to third aspects, wherein the acquisition unit acquires the game ball based on a game ball having entered the second ball entry unit. Among the information, the storage means for storing the information up to a predetermined number before the second determination is performed by the determination means, wherein the effect execution means has the remaining dynamic display period of the identification information. The specific effect is not executed on condition that the information is stored in the storage means when the predetermined time has elapsed.
In the gaming machine according to any one of the technical ideas 2 to 4, the gaming machine according to the technical idea 5 stops and displays the result information for indicating the result of the determination by the determining unit for a predetermined period of time. A second dynamic display unit, and a period determining unit configured to determine a remaining dynamic display period of the identification information at the time when the result information is stopped and displayed by the second dynamic display unit; The means switches a stop display mode of the result information to a stop display mode based on the determination result of the identification information when a determination result by the period determination means satisfies a predetermined period condition.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the first ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, the second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means, and the game is played on the first ball entry means. A first determination is performed based on the ball having entered, and a second determination that is more advantageous to the player than the first determination is performed based on that a game ball has entered the second ball entry means. Determining means, dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a determination result by the determining means, and a first state in which game balls are difficult to enter the second ball entry means. A variable means for changing to a second state in which the ball can be entered and a special state in which the second ball means can be changed to the second state when a specific condition is satisfied can be set. State setting means, and when the special state is set by the state setting means, the operation of the identification information. Display is executed, based on the end of the dynamic display period, release means for releasing the special state, when the special state is set, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, And an effect executing means for executing an effect based on the information that has determined the satisfaction of the specific condition based on the remaining dynamic display period.
Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the following effects are achieved. That is, detecting means for detecting that the game ball has passed through the passing area, and determining means for determining whether the specific condition is satisfied when the detecting means detects the passage of the game ball, The effect execution means executes an effect for indicating the result of the determination based on the execution of the determination by the determination means.
Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, the following effects can be obtained. That is, the effect executing means executes the specific effect based on the remaining dynamic display period of the identification information being equal to or shorter than a predetermined period.
Therefore, there is an effect that the player's willingness to play can be increased.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 4, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine described in any of the technical ideas 1 to 3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, among the information acquired by the acquisition means based on the game ball having entered the second ball entry means, the information before the second determination is executed by the determination means is a predetermined number. The effect execution means has a condition that the information is stored in the storage means when the remaining dynamic display period of the identification information is equal to or shorter than the predetermined period. The specific effect is not executed.
Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in any of the technical ideas 2 to 4, the following effects are obtained. That is, after dynamically displaying the result information for indicating the determination result by the determination means for a predetermined period, the second dynamic display means for stopping and displaying the result information is stopped and displayed by the second dynamic display means. And a period determining unit for determining a remaining dynamic display period of the identification information at a certain point in time. The stop display mode of the result information is switched to a stop display mode based on the determination result of the identification information.
Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

10. Pachinko machines (game machines)
202 ROM (storage means)
202f time saving state selection table (selection means)
64a Left first entrance (first entrance means)
64b Right first entrance (first entrance means )
640 Second entrance (second entrance means)
640a Electric accessory (variable member )
S 225 release means
S 1815 state setting means

Claims (5)

First ball entry means capable of entering game balls, and second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means;
A first determination is performed based on a game ball having entered the first ball entry means, and a first determination is performed based on that a game ball has entered the second ball entry means. Determining means for performing an advantageous second determination;
Dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a determination result by the determination means;
Changing means for changing from a first state in which game balls are difficult to enter the second ball entry means to a second state in which game balls can enter;
State setting means capable of setting a special state in which the second ball entry means can be changed to the second state when a specific condition is satisfied;
When the special state is set by the state setting unit, dynamic display of the identification information is executed, and based on the end of the dynamic display period, a release unit that releases the special state,
In the case where the special state is set, dynamic display of the identification information is started, and an effect execution unit that executes an effect based on information that determines that the specific condition has been satisfied based on the remaining dynamic display period. A gaming machine characterized by having: Detecting means for detecting that the game ball has passed through the passing area;
When the detection means detects the passage of the game ball, determining means for determining whether the specific condition is satisfied,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the effect executing means executes an effect for indicating a result of the determination based on the execution of the determination by the determining means.   The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the effect executing means executes a specific effect based on a remaining dynamic display period of the identification information being equal to or shorter than a predetermined period. Of the information acquired by the acquisition means based on the game ball having entered the second ball entry means, the information before the second determination is executed by the determination means is stored up to a predetermined number. Storage means to be
The effect execution means does not execute the specific effect on condition that the information is stored in the storage means when the remaining dynamic display period of the identification information is shorter than the predetermined period. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, characterized in that: A second dynamic display unit for stopping the display after dynamically displaying result information for indicating a determination result by the determination unit for a predetermined period;
A period determining unit for determining a remaining dynamic display period of the identification information at the time when the result information is stopped and displayed by the second dynamic display unit,
The effect execution means switches a stop display mode of the result information to a stop display mode based on the determination result of the identification information when a determination result by the period determination means satisfies a predetermined period condition. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 2 to 4, wherein:

Images